rowid,title,contents,year,author,author_slug,published,url,topic
195,Levelling Up for Junior Developers,"If you are a junior developer starting out in the web industry, things can often seem a little daunting. There are so many things to learn, and as soon as you’ve learnt one framework or tool, there seems to be something new out there.
I am lucky enough to lead a team of developers building applications for the web. During a recent One to One meeting with one of our junior developers, he asked me about a learning path and the basic fundamentals that every developer should know. After a bit of digging around, I managed to come up with a (not so exhaustive) list of principles that was shared with him.

In this article, I will share the list with you, and hopefully help you level up from junior developer and become a better developer all round. This list doesn’t focus on an particular programming language, but rather coding concepts as a whole. The idea behind this list is that whether you are a front-end developer, back-end developer, full stack developer or just a curious one, these principles apply to everyone that writes code. 
I have tried to be technology agnostic, so that you can use these tips to guide you, whatever your tech stack might be.
Without any further ado and in no particular order, let’s get started.
Refactoring code like a boss
The Boy Scouts have a rule that goes “always leave the campground cleaner than you found it.” This rule can be applied to code too and ensures that you leave code cleaner than you found it. As a junior developer, it’s almost certain that you will either create or come across older code that could be improved. The resources below are a guide that will help point you in the right direction.

My favourite book on this subject has to be Clean Code by Robert C. Martin. It’s a must read for anyone writing code as it helps you identify bad code and shows you techniques that you can use to improve existing code.
If you find that in your day to day work you deal with a lot of legacy code, Improving Existing Technology through Refactoring is another useful read.
Design Patterns are a general repeatable solution to a commonly occurring problem in software design. My friend and colleague Ranj Abass likes to refer to them as a “common language” that helps developers discuss the way that we write code as a pattern. My favourite book on this subject is Head First Design Patterns which goes right back to the basics. Another great read on this topic is Refactoring to Patterns.
Working Effectively With Legacy Code is another one that I found really valuable.

Improving your debugging skills
A solid understanding of how to debug code is a must for any developer. Whether you write code for the web or purely back-end code, the ability to debug will save you time and help you really understand what is going on under the hood.

If you write front-end code for the web, one of my favourite resources to help you understand how to debug code in Chrome can be found on the Chrome Dev Tools website. While some of the tips are specific to Chrome, these techniques apply to any modern browser of your choice.
At Settled, we use Node.js for much of our server side code. Without a doubt, our most trusted IDE has to be Visual Studio Code and the built-in debuggers are amazing. Regardless of whether you use Node.js or not, there are a number of plugins and debuggers that you can use in the IDE. I recommend reading the website of your favourite IDE for more information. 
As a side note, it is worth mentioning that Chrome Developer Tools actually has functionality that allows you to debug Node.js code too. This makes it a seamless transition from front-end code to server-side code debugging.
The Debugging Mindset is an informative online article by Devon H. O’Dell and discusses the the psychology of learning strategies that lead to effective problem-solving skills. 

A good understanding of relational databases and NoSQL databases
Almost all developers will need to persist data at some point in their career. Even if you don’t write SQL queries in your day to day job, a solid understanding of how they work will help you become a better developer.

If you are a complete newbie when it comes to databases, I recommend checking out Code Academy. They offer a free online course that can help you get your head around how relational databases work. The course is quite basic, but is a useful hands-on approach to learning this topic.
This article provides a great explainer for the difference between the SQL and NoSQL databases, and this  Stackoverflow answer goes a little deeper into the subject of the two database types.
If you’d like to learn more about NoSQL queries, I would recommend starting with this article on MongoDB queries. Unfortunately, there isn’t one overall course as most NoSQL databases have their own syntax. 

You may also have noticed that I haven’t included other types of databases such as Graph or In-memory; it’s worth focussing on the basics before going any deeper.
Performance on the web
If you build for the web today, it is important to understand how the browser receives and renders the content that you send it. I am pretty passionate about Web Performance, and hope that everyone can learn how to make websites faster and more efficient. It can be fun at the same time!

Steve Souders High Performance Websites is the godfather of web performance books. While it was created a few years ago and many of the techniques might have changed slightly, it is the original book on the subject and set up many of the ground rules that we know about web performance today.
A free online resource on this topic is the Google Developers website. The site is an up to date guide on the best web performance techniques for your site. It is definitely worth a read.
The network plays a key role in delivering data to your users, and it plays a big role in performance on the web. A fantastic book on this topic is Ilya Grigorik’s High Performance Browser Networking. It is also available to read online at hpbn.co.

Understand the end to end architecture of your software project
I find that one of the best ways to improve my knowledge is to learn about the architecture of the software at the company I work at. It gives you a good understanding as to why things are designed the way they are, why certain decisions were made, and gives you an understanding of how you might do things differently with hindsight.
Try and find someone more senior, such as a Technical Lead or Software Architect, at your company and ask them to explain the overall architecture and draw a few high-level diagrams for you. Not to mention that they will be impressed with your willingness to learn.

I recommend reading Clean Architecture: A Craftsman’s Guide to Software Structure and Design for more detail on this subject.
Far too often, software projects can be over-engineered and over-architected, it is worth reading Just Enough Software Architecture. The book helps developers understand how the smallest of changes can affect the outcome of your software architecture.

How are things deployed
A big part of creating software is actually shipping it! How is the software at your company released into the wild? Does your company do Continuous Integration? Continuous Deployment?

Even if you answered no to any of these questions, it is worth finding someone with the knowledge in your company to explain these things to you. If it is not already documented, perhaps you could start a wiki to document everything you’re learning about the system - this is a great way to level up and be appreciated and invaluable.
A streamlined deployment process is a beautiful thing, and understanding how they work can help you grow your knowledge as a developer. 
Continuous Integration is a practical read on the ins and outs of implementing this deployment technique.
Docker is another great tool to use when it comes to software deployment. It can be tricky at first to wrap your head around, but it is definitely worth learning about this great technology. The documentation on the website will teach and guide you on how to get started using Docker.

Writing Tests
Testing is an essential tool in the developer bag of skills. They help you to make big refactoring changes to your code, and feel a lot more confident knowing that your changes haven’t broken anything. There are so many benefits to testing, which make it so important for developers at every level to become acquainted with it/them.

The book that started it all for me was Roy Osherove’s The Art of Unit Testing. The code in the book is written in C#, but the principles apply to every language. It’s a great, easy-to-understand read.
Another great read is How Google Tests Software and covers exactly what it says on the tin. It covers many different testing techniques such as exploratory, black box, white box, and acceptance testing and really helps you understand how large organisations test their code.

Soft skills
Whilst reading through this article, you’ve probably noticed that a large chunk of it focusses on code and technical ability. Without a doubt, I’d say that it is even more important to be a good teammate. If you look up the definition of soft skills in the dictionary, it is defined as “personal attributes that enable someone to interact effectively and harmoniously with other people” and I think that it sums this up perfectly. Working on your “soft skills” is something that can truly help you level up in your career. You may be the world’s greatest coder, but if you colleagues can’t get along with you, your coding skills won’t matter!
While you may not learn how to become the perfect co-worker overnight, I really try and live by the motto “don’t be an arsehole”. Think about how you like to be treated and then try and treat your co-workers with the same courtesy and respect. The next time you need to make a decision at work, ask yourself “is this something an arsehole would do”? If you answered yes to that question, you probably shouldn’t do it!
Summary
Levelling up as a junior developer doesn’t have to be scary. Focus on the fundamentals and they should hold you in good stead, regardless of the new things that come along. Software engineering is built on these great principles that have stood the test of time.
Whilst researching for this article, I came across a useful Github repo that is worth mentioning. Things Every Programmer Should Know is packed with useful information. I have to admit, I didn’t know everything on there!
I hope that you have found this list helpful. Some of the topics I have mentioned might not be relevant for you at this stage in your career, but should give a nudge in the right direction. After all, knowledge is power!
If you are a junior developer reading this article, what would you add to it?",2017,Dean Hume,deanhume,2017-12-05T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2017/levelling-up-for-junior-developers/,code
201,Lint the Web Forward With Sonarwhal,"Years ago, when I was in a senior in college, much of my web development courses focused on two things: the basics like HTML and CSS (and boy, do I mean basic), and Adobe Flash. I spent many nights writing ActionScript 3.0 to build interactions for the websites that I would add to my portfolio. A few months after graduating, I built one website in Flash for a client, then never again. Flash was dying, and it became obsolete in my résumé and portfolio. 
That was my first lesson in the speed at which things change in technology, and what a daunting realization that was as a new graduate looking to enter the professional world. Now, seven years later, I work on the Microsoft Edge team where I help design and build a tool that would have lessened my early career anxieties: sonarwhal. 
Sonarwhal is a linting tool, built by and for the web community. The code is open source and lives under the JS Foundation. It helps web developers and designers like me keep up with the constant change in technology while simultaneously teaching how to code better websites. 
Introducing sonarwhal’s mascot Nellie
Good web development is hard. It is more than HTML, CSS, and JavaScript: developers are expected to have a grasp of accessibility, performance, security, emerging standards, and more, all while refreshing this knowledge every few months as the web evolves. It’s a lot to keep track of.
 
Web development is hard 
Staying up-to-date on all this knowledge is one of the driving forces for developing this scanning tool. Whether you are just starting out, are a student, or you have over a decade of experience, the sonarwhal team wants to help you build better websites for all browsers. 
Currently sonarwhal checks for best practices in five categories: Accessibility, Interoperability, Performance, PWAs, and Security. Each check is called a “rule”. You can configure them and even create your own rules if you need to follow some specific guidelines for your project (e.g. validate analytics attributes, title format of pages, etc.). 
You can use sonarwhal in two ways:

An online version, that provides a quick and easy way to scan any public website.
A command line tool, if you want more control over the configuration, or want to integrate it into your development flow.

The Online Scanner
The online version offers a streamlined way to scan a website; just enter a URL and you will get a web page of scan results with a permalink that you can share and revisit at any time.
The online version of sonarwal
When my team works on a new rule, we spend the bulk of our time carefully researching each subject, finding sources, and documenting it rather than writing the rule’s code. Not only is it important that we get you the right results, but we also want you to understand why something is failing. Next to each failing rule you’ll find a link to its detailed documentation, explaining why you should care about it, what exactly we are testing, examples that pass and examples that don’t, and useful links to even more in-depth documentation if you are interested in the subject.
We hope that between reading the documentation and continued use of sonarwhal, developers can stay on top of best practices. As devs continue to build sites and identify recurring issues that appear in their results, they will hopefully start to automatically include those missing elements or fix those pieces of code that are producing errors. This also isn’t a one-way communication: the documentation is not only available on the sonarwhal site, but also on GitHub for editing so you can help us make it even better!
A results report
The current configuration for the online scanner is very strict, so it might hurt your feelings (it did when I first tested it on my personal website). But you can configure sonarwhal to any level of strictness as well as customize the command line tool to your needs!  
Sonarwhal’s CLI 
The CLI gives you full control of sonarwhal: what rules to use, tweaks to them, domains that are out of your control, and so on. You will need the latest node LTS (v8) or Stable (v9) and your favorite package manager, such as npm:
npm install -g sonarwhal
You can now run sonarwhal from anywhere via:
sonarwhal https://example.com
Using the CLI
The configuration is done via a .sonarwhalrc file. When analyzing a site, if no file is available, you will be prompted to answer a series of questions:

What connector do you want to use? Connectors are what sonarwhal uses to access a website and gather all the information about the requests, resources, HTML, etc. Currently it supports jsdom, Microsoft Edge, and Google Chrome.
What formatter? This is how you want to see the results: summary, stylish, etc. Make sure to look at the full list. Some are concise for, perfect for a quick build assessment, while others are more verbose and informative.
Do you want to use the recommended rules configuration? Rules are the things we are validating. Unless you’ve read the documentation and know what you are doing, first timers should probably use the recommended configuration.
What browsers are you targeting? One of the best features of sonarwhal is that rules can adapt their feedback depending on your targeted browsers, suggesting to add or remove things. For example, the rule “Highest Document Mode” will tell you to add the “X-UA-Compatible” header if IE10 or lower is targeted or remove if the opposite is true. 

sonarwhal configuration generator questions
Once you answer all these questions the scan will start and you will have a .sonarwhalrc file similar to the following:
{
    ""connector"": {
        ""name"": ""jsdom"",
        ""options"": {
            ""waitFor"": 1000
        }
    },
    ""formatters"": ""stylish"",
    ""rulesTimeout"": 120000,
    ""rules"": {
        ""apple-touch-icons"": ""error"",
        ""axe"": ""error"",
        ""content-type"": ""error"",
        ""disown-opener"": ""error"",
        ""highest-available-document-mode"": ""error"",
        ""validate-set-cookie-header"": ""warning"",
        // ...
    }
}
You should see the scan initiate in the command line and within a few seconds the results should start to appear. Remember, the scan results will look different depending on which formatter you selected so try each one out to see which one you like best. 
sonarwhal results on my website and hurting my feelings 💔
Now that you have a list of errors, you can get to work improving the site! Note though, that when you scan your website, it scans all the resources on that page and if you’ve added something like analytics or fonts hosted elsewhere, you are unable to change those files. You can configure the CLI to ignore files from certain domains so that you are only getting results for files you are in control of.
The documentation should give enough guidance on how to fix the errors, but if it’s insufficient, please help us and suggest edits or contribute back to it. This is a community effort and chances are someone else will have the same question as you.
When I scanned both my websites, sonarwhal alerted me to not having an Apple Touch Icon. If I search on the web as opposed to using the sonarwhal documentation, the first top 3 results give me outdated information: I need to include many different icon sizes. I don’t need to include all the different size icons that target different devices. Declaring one icon sized 180px x 180px will provide a large enough icon for devices and it will scale down as appropriate for people on older devices. 
The information at the top of the search results isn’t always the correct answer to an issue and we don’t want you to have to search through outdated documentation. As sonarwhal’s capabilities expand, the goal is for it to be the one stop shop for helping preflight your website. 
The journey up until now and looking forward

On the Microsoft Edge team, we’re passionate about empowering developers to build great websites. Every day we see so many sites come through our issue tracker. (Thanks for filing those bugs, they help us make Microsoft Edge better and better!) Some issues we see over and over are honest mistakes or outdated ‘best practices’ that could be avoided, so we built this tool to help everyone help make the web a better place.
When we decided to create sonarwhal, we wanted to create a tool that would help developers write better and more up-to-date code for their websites. We want sonarwhal to be useful to anyone so, early on, we defined three guiding principles we’ve used along the way:

Community Driven. We build for the community’s best interests. The web belongs to everyone and this project should too. Not only is it open source, we’ve also donated it to the JS Foundation and have an inclusive governance model that welcomes the collaboration of anyone, individual or company.
User Centric. We want to put the user at the center, making sonarwhal configurable for your needs and easy to use no matter what your skill level is.
Collaborative. We didn’t want to reinvent the wheel, so we collaborated with existing tools and services that help developers build for the web. Some examples are aXe, snyk.io, Cloudinary, etc.

This is just the beginning and we still have lots to do. We’re hard at work on a backlog of exciting features for future releases, such as:

New rules for a variety of areas like performance, accessibility, security, progressive web apps, and more.
A plug-in for Visual Studio Code: we want sonarwhal to help you write better websites, and what better moment than when you are in your editor.
Configuration options for the online service: as we fine tune the infrastructure, the rule configuration for our scanner is locked, but we look forward to adding CLI customization options here in the near future.

This is a tool for the web community by the web community so if you are excited about sonarwhal, making a better web, and want to contribute, we have a few issues where you might be able to help. Also, don’t forget to check the rest of the sonarwhal GitHub organization. PRs are always welcome and appreciated! 
Let us know what you think about the scanner at @NarwhalNellie on Twitter and we hope you’ll help us lint the web forward!",2017,Stephanie Drescher,stephaniedrescher,2017-12-02T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2017/lint-the-web-forward-with-sonarwhal/,code
178,Make Out Like a Bandit,"If you are anything like me, you are a professional juggler. No, we don’t juggle bowling pins or anything like that (or do you? Hey, that’s pretty rad!). I’m talking about the work that we juggle daily. In my case, I’m a full-time designer, a half-time graduate student, a sometimes author and conference speaker, and an all-the-time social networker. Only two of these “positions” have actually put any money in my pocket (and, well, the second one takes a lot of money out). Still, this is all part of the work that I do. Your work situation is probably similar. We are workaholics.

So if we work so much in our daily lives, shouldn’t we be making out like bandits? Umm, honestly, I’m not hitting on you, silly. I’m talking about our success. We work and work and work. Shouldn’t we be filthy, stinking rich? Well… okay, that’s not quite what I mean either. I’m not necessarily talking about money (though that could potentially be a part of it). I’m talking about success — as in feeling a true sense of accomplishment and feeling happy about what we do and why we do it.

It’s important to feel accomplished and a general happiness in our work. To make out like a bandit (or have an incredible amount of success), you can either get lucky or work hard for it. And if you’re going to work hard for it, you might as well make it all meaningful and worthwhile. This is what I strive for in my own work and my life, and the following points I’m sharing with you are the steps I am taking to work toward this.


	I know the price of success: dedication, hard work & an unremitting devotion to the things you want to see happen. — Frank Lloyd Wright


Learn. Participate. Do.

The best way to get good at something is to keep doing whatever it is you’re doing that you want to be good at. For example, a sushi-enthusiast might take a sushi-making class because she wants to learn to make sushi for herself. It totally makes sense while the teacher demonstrates all the procedures, materials, and methods needed to make good, beautiful sushi. Later, the student goes home and tries to make sushi on her own, she gets totally confused and lost. Okay, I’m not even going to hide it, I’m talking about myself (this happened to me). As much as I love sushi, I couldn’t even begin to make good sushi because I’ve never really practiced.

Take advantage of learning opportunities where possible. Whether you’re learning CSS, Actionscript, or visual design, the best way to grasp how to do things is to participate, practice, do. Apply what you learn in your work. Participation is so vital to your success. If you have problems, let people know, and ask. But definitely practice on your own. And as cliché as it may sound, believe in yourself because if you don’t think you can do it, no one else will think you can either.

Maintain momentum

With whatever it is you’re doing, if you find yourself “on a roll”, you should take advantage of that momentum and keep moving. Sure, you’ll definitely want to take breaks here or there, but remember that momentum can be very difficult to obtain again once you’ve lost it. Get it done!

Deal with people

Whether you love or hate people, the fact is, you gotta deal with them — even the difficult ones. If you’re in a management position, then you know pretty well that most people don’t like being told what to do (even if that’s their job). Find ways to get people excited about what they’re doing. Make people feel that they (and what they do) are needed — people respond better if they’re valued, not commanded. Even if you’re not in a management position, this still applies to the way you work with your coworkers, clients, vendors, etc.

Resolve any conflicts right away. Conflicts will inevitably happen. Move on to how you can improve the situation, and do it as quickly as possible. Don’t spend too much time focusing on whose screw up it is — nobody feels good in this situation. Also, try to keep people informed on whatever it is you need or what it is you’re doing. If you’re waiting on something from someone, and it’s been a while, don’t be afraid to say something (tactfully). Sometimes people are forgetful — or just slacking. Hey, it happens!

Help yourself by helping others

What are some of the small, simple things you can do when you’re working that will help the people you work with (and in most cases, will end up helping yourself)? For example: if you’re a designer, perhaps taking a couple minutes now to organize and name your Photoshop layers will end up saving time later (since it will be easier to find things). This is going to help both you and your team. Or, developers: taking some time to write some documentation (even if it’s as simple as a comment in the code, or a well-written commit message) could potentially save valuable time for both you and your team later. Maybe you have to take a little time to sit down with a coworker and explain why something works the way it does. This helps them out tremendously — and will most likely lead to them respecting you a little more. This is a benefit.

If you make little things like this a habit, people will notice. People will enjoy working with you. People will trust you and rely on you. Sure, it might seem beneficial at any given moment to be “in it for yourself” (and therefore only helping yourself), but that won’t last very long. Helping others (whether it be a small or large feat) will cause a positive impact in the long run — and that is what will be more valuable to you and your career.

Do work that is meaningful

One of the best ways to feel successful about what you do is to feel good and happy about it. And a great way to feel good and happy about what you’re doing is to actually do good. This could be purpose-driven work that focuses on sustainability and environmentalism, or work that helps support causes and charity. Perhaps the work simply inspires people. Or maybe the work is just something you are very passionate about. Whatever the work may be, try working on projects that are meaningful to you. You’ll do well simply by being more motivated and interested. And it’s a double-win if the project is meaningful to others as well.

I feel very fortunate to work at a place like Crush + Lovely, where we have found quite frequently that the projects that inspire people, focus on global and social good, and create some sort of positive impact are the very projects that bring us more paid projects. But more importantly, we are happy and excited to do it. You might not work at a company that takes on those types of projects. But perhaps you have your own personal endeavors that create this excitement for you. Elliot Jay Stocks wrote about having pet projects. Do you take on side projects? What are those projects?

Over the last couple years, I’ve seen some really fantastic side projects come out that are great examples of meaningful work. These projects reflect the passions and goals of the respective designers and developers involved, and therefore become quite successful (because the people involved simply love what they are doing while they’re doing it). Some of these projects include:


	Typedia is a shared encyclopedia of typefaces which serves as a resource to classify, categorize, and connect typefaces. It was founded by Jason Santa Maria, a graphic designer with a love and passion for typography. He created it as a solution to a problem he faced as a designer: finding the right typeface.
	Huffduffer was created by Jeremy Keith, a web developer who wanted to create a podcast of inspirational talks — but after he found that this could be tedious, he decided to create a tool to automate this.
	Level & Tap was created by passionate photographer and web developer, Tom Watson. It began as a photography print store for Tom’s best personal photography. Over time, more photographers were added to the site and the site has grown to become quite a great collection of beautiful photography.
	Heat Eat Review is a review blog created by information architect and user experience designer, Abi Jones. As a foodie, she is able to use this passion for this blog, as it focuses on reviewing TV Dinners, Frozen Meals, and Microwavable Foods.
	Art in My Coffee, a favorite personal project of my own, is a photo blog of coffee art I created, after I found that my friends and I were frequently posting coffee art photos to Flickr, Twitter, and other websites. After the blog became more popular, I teamed up with Meagan Fisher on the project, who has just as much a passion for coffee art, if not more.


So, what’s important to you?

This is the very, very important question here. What really matters to you most? Beyond just working on meaningful projects you are passionate about, is the work you’re doing the right work for you, so that you can live a good lifestyle? Scott Boms wrote an excellent article, Burnout, in which he shares his own experience in battling stress and exhaustion, and what he learned from it. You should definitely read the article in its entirety, but a couple of his points that are particularly excellent are:


	Make time for numero uno, in which you make time for the things in life that make you happy
	Examine your values, goals, and measures of success, in which you work toward the things you are passionate about, your own personal development, and focusing on the things that matter.


A solid work-life balance can be a challenging struggle to obtain. Of course, you can cheat this by finding ways to combine the things you love with the things you do (so then it doesn’t even feel like you’re working — oh, you sneaky little bandit!). However, there are other factors to consider beyond your general love for the work you’re doing. Take proper care of yourself physically, mentally, and socially.

So, are you making out like a bandit?

Do you feel accomplished and generally happy with your work? If not, perhaps that is something to focus on for the next year. Consider your work (both in your job as well as any side projects you may take on) and how it benefits you — present and future. Take any steps necessary to get you to where you need to be. If you are miserable, fix it!

Finally, it’s important to be thankful for the things that matter to you and make you happy. Pass it along everyday. Thank people. It’s a simple thing, really. Saying “thank you” can and will have enormous impact on the people around you. Oh. And, I apologize if the title of this article led you to thinking it would teach you how to be an amazing kisser. That’s a different article entirely for 24 ways to impress your friends!",2009,Jina Anne,jina,2009-12-21T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2009/make-out-like-a-bandit/,business
20,Make Your Browser Dance,"It was a crisp winter’s evening when I pulled up alongside the pier. I stepped out of my car and the bitterly cold sea air hit my face. I walked around to the boot, opened it and heaved out a heavy flight case. I slammed the boot shut, locked the car and started walking towards the venue.

This was it. My first gig. I thought about all those weeks of preparation: editing video clips, creating 3-D objects, making coloured patterns, then importing them all into software and configuring effects to change as the music did; targeting frequency, beat, velocity, modifying size, colour, starting point; creating playlists of these… and working out ways to mix them as the music played.

This was it. This was me VJing.

This was all a lifetime (well a decade!) ago.

When I started web designing, VJing took a back seat. I was more interested in interactive layouts, semantic accessible HTML, learning all the IE bugs and mastering the quirks that CSS has to offer. More recently, I have been excited by background gradients, 3-D transforms, the @keyframe directive, as well as new APIs such as getUserMedia, indexedDB, the Web Audio API

But wait, have I just come full circle? Could it be possible, with these wonderful new things in technologies I am already familiar with, that I could VJ again, right here, in a browser?

Well, there’s only one thing to do: let’s try it!

Let’s take to the dance floor 

Over the past couple of years working in The Lab I have learned to take a much more iterative approach to projects than before. One of my new favourite methods of working is to create a proof of concept to make sure my theory is feasible, before going on to create a full-blown product. So let’s take the same approach here.

The main VJing functionality I want to recreate is manipulating visuals in relation to sound. So for my POC I need to create a visual, with parameters that can be changed, then get some sound and see if I can analyse that sound to detect some data, which I can then use to manipulate the visual parameters. Easy, right?

So, let’s start at the beginning: creating a simple visual. For this I’m going to create a CSS animation. It’s just a funky i element with the opacity being changed to make it flash.

 See the Pen Creating a light by Rumyra (@Rumyra) on CodePen

A note about prefixes: I’ve left them out of the code examples in this post to make them easier to read. Please be aware that you may need them. I find a great resource to find out if you do is caniuse.com. You can also check out all the code for the examples in this article

Start the music

Well, that’s pretty easy so far. Next up: loading in some sound. For this we’ll use the Web Audio API. The Web Audio API is based around the concept of nodes. You have a source node: the sound you are loading in; a destination node: usually the device’s speakers; and any number of processing nodes in between. All this processing that goes on with the audio is sandboxed within the AudioContext.

So, let’s start by initialising our audio context.

var contextClass = window.AudioContext;
if (contextClass) {
  //web audio api available.
  var audioContext = new contextClass();
} else {
  //web audio api unavailable
  //warn user to upgrade/change browser
}

Now let’s load our sound file into the new context we created with an XMLHttpRequest.

function loadSound() {
	//set audio file url
	var audioFileUrl = '/octave.ogg';
	//create new request
	var request = new XMLHttpRequest();
	request.open(""GET"", audioFileUrl, true);
	request.responseType = ""arraybuffer"";

	request.onload = function() {
		//take from http request and decode into buffer
		context.decodeAudioData(request.response, function(buffer) {
	    	audioBuffer = buffer;
	     });
		}
	request.send();
}

Phew! Now we’ve loaded in some sound! There are plenty of things we can do with the Web Audio API: increase volume; add filters; spatialisation. If you want to dig deeper, the O’Reilly Web Audio API book by Boris Smus is available to read online free.

All we really want to do for this proof of concept, however, is analyse the sound data. To do this we really need to know what data we have.

 Learning the steps

Let’s take a minute to step back and remember our school days and science class. I’m sure if I drew a picture of a sound wave, we would all start nodding our heads.

 

The sound you hear is caused by pressure differences in the particles in the air. Sound pushes these particles together, causing vibrations. Amplitude is basically strength of pressure. A simple example of change of amplitude is when you increase the volume on your stereo and the output wave increases in size.

This is great when everything is analogue, but the waveform varies continuously and it’s not suitable for digital processing: there’s an infinite set of values. For digital processing, we need discrete numbers.

We have to sample the waveform at set time intervals, and record data such as amplitude and frequency. Luckily for us, just the fact we have a digital sound file means all this hard work is done for us. What we’re doing in the code above is piping that data in the audio context. All we need to do now is access it.

We can do this with the Web Audio API’s analysing functionality. Just pop in an analysing node before we connect the source to its destination node.

function createAnalyser(source) {
	//create analyser node
	analyser = audioContext.createAnalyser();
	//connect to source
	source.connect(analyzer);
	//pipe to speakers
	analyser.connect(audioContext.destination);
}

The data I’m really interested in here is frequency. Later we could look into amplitude or time, but for now I’m going to stick with frequency.

The analyser node gives us frequency data via the getFrequencyByteData method.

 Don’t forget to count!

To collect the data from the getFrequencyByteData method, we need to pass in an empty array (a JavaScript typed array is ideal). But how do we know how many items the array will need when we create it?

This is really up to us and how high the resolution of frequencies we want to analyse is. Remember we talked about sampling the waveform; this happens at a certain rate (sample rate) which you can find out via the audio context’s sampleRate attribute. This is good to bear in mind when you’re thinking about your resolution of frequencies.

var sampleRate = audioContext.sampleRate;

Let’s say your file sample rate is 48,000, making the maximum frequency in the file 24,000Hz (thanks to a wonderful theorem from Dr Harry Nyquist, the maximum frequency in the file is always half the sample rate). The analyser array we’re creating will contain frequencies up to this point. This is ideal as the human ear hears the range 0–20,000hz.

So, if we create an array which has 2,400 items, each frequency recorded will be 10Hz apart. However, we are going to create an array which is half the size of the FFT (fast Fourier transform), which in this case is 2,048 which is the default. You can set it via the fftSize property.

//set our FFT size
analyzer.fftSize = 2048;
//create an empty array with 1024 items
var frequencyData = new Uint8Array(1024);

So, with an array of 1,024 items, and a frequency range of 24,000Hz, we know each item is 24,000 ÷ 1,024 = 23.44Hz apart.

The thing is, we also want that array to be updated constantly. We could use the setInterval or setTimeout methods for this; however, I prefer the new and shiny requestAnimationFrame.

function update() {
  	//constantly getting feedback from data
  	requestAnimationFrame(update);
  	analyzer.getByteFrequencyData(frequencyData);
}

 Putting it all together

Sweet sticks! Now we have an array of frequencies from the sound we loaded, updating as the sound plays. Now we want that data to trigger our animation from earlier.

We can easily pause and run our CSS animation from JavaScript:

element.style.webkitAnimationPlayState = ""paused"";
element.style.webkitAnimationPlayState = ""running"";

Unfortunately, this may not be ideal as our animation might be a whole heap longer than just a flashing light. We may want to target specific points within that animation to have it stop and start in a visually pleasing way and perhaps not smack bang in the middle.

There is no really easy way to do this at the moment as Zach Saucier explains in this wonderful article. It takes some jiggery pokery with setInterval to try to ascertain how far through the CSS animation you are in percentage terms.

This seems a bit much for our proof of concept, so let’s backtrack a little. We know by the animation we’ve created which CSS properties we want to change. This is pretty easy to do directly with JavaScript.

element.style.opacity = ""1"";
element.style.opacity = ""0.2"";

So let’s start putting it all together. For this example I want to trigger each light as a different frequency plays. For this, I’ll loop through the HTML elements and change the opacity style if the frequency gain goes over a certain threshold.

//get light elements
var lights = document.getElementsByTagName('i');
var totalLights = lights.length;

for (var i=0; i<totalLights; i++) {
  //get frequencyData key
  var freqDataKey = i*8;
	//if gain is over threshold for that frequency animate light
  if (frequencyData[freqDataKey] > 160){
    //start animation on element
    lights[i].style.opacity = ""1"";
  } else {
    lights[i].style.opacity = ""0.2"";
  }
}

See all the code in action here. I suggest viewing in a modern browser :)

Awesome! It is true — we can VJ in our browser!

Let’s dance!

So, let’s start to expand this simple example. First, I feel the need to make lots of lights, rather than just a few. Also, maybe we should try a sound file more suited to gigs or clubs.

Check it out!

I don’t know about you, but I’m pretty excited — that’s just a bit of HTML, CSS and JavaScript!

The other thing to think about, of course, is the sound that you would get at a venue. We don’t want to load sound from a file, but rather pick up on what is playing in real time. The easiest way to do this, I’ve found, is to capture what my laptop’s mic is picking up and piping that back into the audio context. We can do this by using getUserMedia.

Let’s include this in this demo. If you make some noise while viewing the demo, the lights will start to flash.

 And relax :)

There you have it. Sit back, play some music and enjoy the Winamp like experience in front of you.

So, where do we go from here? I already have a wealth of ideas. We haven’t started with canvas, SVG or the 3-D features of CSS. There are other things we can detect from the audio as well. And yes, OK, it’s questionable whether the browser is the best environment for this. For one, I’m using a whole bunch of nonsensical HTML elements (maybe each animation could be held within a web component in the future). But hey, it’s fun, and it looks cool and sometimes I think it’s OK to just dance.",2013,Ruth John,ruthjohn,2013-12-02T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2013/make-your-browser-dance/,code
185,Make Your Mockup in Markup,"We aren’t designing copies of web pages, we’re designing web pages.

	 Andy Clarke, via Quotes on Design


The old way

I used to think the best place to design a website was in an image editor. I’d create a pixel-perfect PSD filled with generic content, send it off to the client, go through several rounds of revisions, and eventually create the markup.

Does this process sound familiar? You’re not alone. In a very scientific and official survey I conducted, close to 90% of respondents said they design in Photoshop before the browser.  

That process is whack, yo!

Recently, thanks in large part to the influence of design hero Dan Cederholm, I’ve come to the conclusion that a website’s design should begin where it’s going to live: in the browser.

Die Photoshop, die

Some of you may be wondering, “what’s so bad about using Photoshop for the bulk of my design?” Well, any seasoned designer will tell you that working in Photoshop is akin to working in a minefield: you never know when it’s going to blow up in your face.

 The application Adobe Photoshop CS4 has unexpectedly ruined your day.

Photoshop’s propensity to crash at crucial moments is a running joke in the industry, as is its barely usable interface. And don’t even get me started on the hot, steaming pile of crap that is  text rendering.

 Text rendered in Photoshop (left) versus Safari (right).

Crashing and text rendering issues suck, but we’ve learned to live with them. The real issue with using Photoshop for mockups is the expectations you’re setting for a client. When you send the client a static image of the design, you’re not giving them the whole picture — they can’t see how a fluid grid would function, how the design will look in a variety of browsers, basic interactions like :hover effects, or JavaScript behaviors. For more on the disadvantages to showing clients designs as images rather than websites, check out Andy Clarke’s Time to stop showing clients static design visuals.

A necessary evil?

In the past we’ve put up with Photoshop because it was vital to achieving our beloved rounded corners, drop shadows, outer glows, and gradients. However, with the recent adaptation of CSS3 in major browsers, and the slow, joyous death of IE6, browsers can render mockups that are just as beautiful as those created in an image editor. With the power of RGBA, text-shadow, box-shadow, border-radius, transparent PNGs, and @font-face combined, you can create a prototype that radiates shiny awesomeness right in the browser. If you can see this epic article through to the end, I’ll show you step by step how to create a gorgeous mockup using mostly markup.

Get started by getting naked 


	Content precedes design. Design in the absence of content is not design, it’s decoration.

	 Jeffrey Zeldman


In the beginning, don’t even think about style. Instead, start with the foundation: the content. Lay the groundwork for your markup order, and ensure that your design will be useable with styles and images turned off. This is great for prioritizing the content, and puts you on the right path for accessibility and search engine optimization. Not a bad place to start, amirite?

 An example of unstyled content, in all its naked glory. View it large.

Flush out the layout 

The next step is to structure the content in a usable way. With CSS, making basic layout changes is as easy as switching up a float, so experiment to see what structure suits the content best.

 The mockup with basic layout work done.

Got your grids covered

There are a variety of tools that allow you to layer a grid over your browser window. For Mac users I recommend using Slammer, and PC users can check out one of the bookmarklets that are available, such as 960 Gridder.

 The mockup with a grid applied using Slammer.

Once you’ve found a layout that works well for the content, pass it along to the client for review. This keeps them involved in the design process, and gives them an idea of how the site will be structured when it’s live.

Start your styling

Now for the fun part: begin applying the presentation layer. Let usability considerations drive your decisions about color and typography; use highlighted colors and contrasting typefaces on elements you wish to emphasize.

RGBA? More like RGByay!

Introducing color is easy with RGBA. I like to start with the page’s main color, then use white at varying opacities to empasize content sections.

 In the example mockup the body background is set to rgba(203,111,21), the content containers are set to rgba(255,255,255,0.7), and a few elements are highlighted with rgba(255,255,255,0.1) If you’re not sure how RGBA works, check out Drew McLellan’s super helpful 24ways article.

Laying down type

Just like with color, you can use typography to evoke a feeling and direct a user’s attention. Have contrasting typefaces (like serif headlines and sans-serif body text) to group the content into meaningful sections.

In a recent A List Apart article, the Master of Web Typography™ Jason Santa Maria offers excellent advice on how to choose your typefaces:


	Write down a general description of the qualities of the message you are trying to convey, and then look for typefaces that embody those qualities.


Sounds pretty straightforward. I wanted to give my design a classic feel with a hint of nostalgia, so I used Georgia for the headlines, and incorporated the ornate ampersand from Baskerville into the header.

 A closeup on the site’s header.

Let’s get sexy

The design doesn’t look too bad as it is, but it’s still pretty flat. We can do better, and after mixing in some CSS3 and a couple of PNGs, it’s going to get downright steamy in here.

Give it some glow

Objects in the natural world reflect light, so to make your design feel tangible and organic, give it some glow. In the example design I achieved this by creating two white to transparent gradients of varying opacities. Both have a solid white border across their top, which gives edges a double border effect and makes them look sharper. Using CSS3’s text-shadow on headlines and box-shadow on content modules is another quick way to add depth.

 A wide and closeup view of the design with gradients, text-shadow and box-shadow added. For information on how to implement text-shadow and box-shadow using RGBA, check out the article I wrote on it last week.


37 pieces of flair

Okay, maybe you don’t need that much flair, but it couldn’t hurt to add a little; it’s the details that will set your design apart. Work in imagery and texture, using PNGs with an alpha channel so you can layer images and still tweak the color later on.

 The design with grungy textures, a noisy diagonal stripe pattern, and some old transportation images layered behind the text. Because the colors are rendered using RGBA, these images bleed through the content, giving the design a layered feel. Best viewed large.


Send it off

Hey, look at that. You’ve got a detailed, well structured mockup for the client to review. Best of all, your markup is complete too. If the client approves the design at this stage, your template is practically finished. Bust out the party hats!

Not so fast, Buster!

So I don’t know about you, but I’ve never gotten a design past the client’s keen eye for criticism on the first go. Let’s review some hypothetical feedback (none of which is too outlandish, in my experience), and see how we’d make the requested changes in the browser. 

Updating the typography


	My ex-girlfriend loved Georgia, so I never want to see it again. Can we get rid of it? I want to use a font that’s chunky and loud, just like my stupid ex-girlfriend.

	 Fakey McClient


Yikes! Thankfully with CSS, removing Georgia is as easy as running a find and replace on the stylesheet. In my revised mockup, I used @font-face and League Gothic on the headlines to give the typography the, um, unique feel the client is looking for.

 The same mockup, using @font-face on the headlines. If you’re unfamiliar with implementing @font-face, check out Nice Web Type‘s helpful article.

Adding rounded corners


	I’m not sure if I’ll like it, but I want to see what it’d look like with rounded corners. My cousin, a Web 2.0 marketing guru, says they’re trendy right now.

	 Fakey McClient


Switching to rounded corners is a nightmare if you’re doing your mockup in Photoshop, since it means recreating most of the shapes and UI elements in the design. Thankfully, with CSS border-radius comes to our rescue! By applying this gem of a style to a handful of classes, you’ll be rounded out in no time.

 The mockup with rounded corners, created using border-radius. If you’re not sure how to implement border-radius, check out CSS3.info‘s quick how-to.

Making changes to the color


	The design is too dark, it’s depressing! They call it ‘the blues’ for a reason, dummy. Can you try using a brighter color? I want orange, like Zeldman uses.

	 Fakey McClient


Making color changes is another groan-inducing task when working in Photoshop. Finding and updating every background layer, every drop shadow, and every link can take forever in a complex PSD. However, if you’ve done your mockup in markup with RGBA and semi-transparent PNGs, making changes to your color is as easy as updating the body background and a few font colors.

 The mockup with an orange color scheme. Best viewed large.

Ahem, what about Internet Explorer?

Gee, thanks for reminding me, buzzkill. Several of the CSS features I’ve suggested you use, such as RGBA, text-shadow and box-shadow, and border-radius, are not supported in Internet Explorer. I know, it makes me sad too. However, this doesn’t mean you can’t try these techniques out in your markup based mockups.  The point here is to get your mockups done as efficiently as possible, and to keep the emphasis on markup from the very beginning.

Once the design is approved, you and the client have to decide if you can live with the design looking different in different browsers. Is it so bad if some users get to see drop shadows and some don’t? Or if the rounded corners are missing for a portion of your audience? The design won’t be broken for IE people, they’re just missing out on a few visual treats that other users will see.

The idea of rewarding users who choose modern browsers is not a new concept; Dan covers it thoroughly in Handcrafted CSS, and it’s been written about in the past by Aaron Gustafson and Andy Clarke on several occasions. I believe we shouldn’t have to design for the lowest common denominator (cough, IE6 users, cough); instead we should create designs that are beautiful in modern browsers, but still degrade nicely for the other guy. However, some clients just aren’t that progressive, and in that case you can always use background images for drop shadows and rounded corners, as you have in the past. 

Closing thoughts

With the advent of CSS3, browsers are just as capable of giving us beautiful, detailed mockups as Photoshop, and in half the time. I’m not the only one to make an argument for this revised process; in his article Time to stop showing clients static design visuals, and in his presentation Walls Come Tumbling Down, Andy Clarke makes a fantastic case for creating your mockups in markup.

So I guess my challenge to you for 2010 is to get out of Photoshop and into the code. Even if the arguments for designing in the browser aren’t enough to make you change your process permanently, it’s worthwhile to give it a try. Look at the New Year as a time to experiment; applying constraints and evaluating old processes can do wonders for improving your efficiency and creativity.",2009,Meagan Fisher,meaganfisher,2009-12-24T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2009/make-your-mockup-in-markup/,process
50,Make a Comic,"For something slightly different over Christmas, why not step away from your computer and make a comic? 
Definitely not the author working on a comic in the studio, with the desk displaying some of the things you need to make a comic on paper.
Why make a comic?
First of all, it’s truly fun and it’s not that difficult. If you’re a designer, you can use skills you already have, so why not take some time to indulge your aesthetic whims and make something for yourself, rather than for a client or your company. And you can use a computer – or not.
If you’re an interaction designer, it’s likely you’ve already made a storyboard or flow, or designed some characters for personas. This is a wee jump away from that, to the realm of storytelling and navigating human emotions through characters who may or may not be human. Similar medium and skills, different content. 
It’s not a client deliverable but something that stands by itself, and you’ve nobody’s criteria to meet except those that exist in your imagination! 
Thanks to your brain and the alchemy of comics, you can put nearly anything in a sequence and your brain will find a way to make sense of it. Scott McCloud wrote about the non sequitur in comics: 

“There is a kind of alchemy at work in the space between panels which can help us find meaning or resonance in even the most jarring of combinations.” 

Here’s an example of a non sequitur from Scott McCloud’s Understanding Comics – the images bear no relation to one another, but since they’re in a sequence our brains do their best to understand it: 

Once you know this it takes the pressure off somewhat. It’s a fun thing to keep in mind and experiment with in your comics! 
Materials needed

A4 copy/printing paper 
HB pencil for light drawing
Dip pen and waterproof Indian ink 
Bristol board (or any good quality card with a smooth, durable surface) 

Step 1: Get ideas
You’d be surprised where you can take a small grain of an idea and develop it into an interesting comic. Think about a funny conversation you had, or any irrational fears, habits, dreams or anything else. Just start writing and drawing. Having ideas is hard, I know, but you will get some ideas when you start working. 
One way to keep track of ideas is to keep a sketch diary, capturing funny conversations and other events you could use in comics later. 
You might want to just sketch out the whole comic very roughly if that helps. I tend to sketch the story first, but it usually changes drastically during step 2.
Step 2: Edit your story using thumbnails
How thumbnailing works.
Why use thumbnails? You can move them around or get rid of them! 
Drawings are harder and much slower to edit than words, so you need to draw something very quick and very rough. You don’t have to care about drawing quality at this point. 
You might already have a drafted comic from the previous step; now you can split each panel up into a thumbnail like the image above. 
Get an A4 sheet of printing paper and tear it up into squares. A thumbnail equals a comic panel. Start drawing one panel per thumbnail. This way you can move scenes and parts of the story around as you work on the pacing. It’s an extremely useful tip if you want to expand a moment in time or draw out a dialogue, or if you want to just completely cut scenes. 
Step 3: Plan a layout
So you’ve got the story more or less down: you now need to know how they’ll look on the page. Sketch a layout and arrange the thumbnails into the layout.
The simplest way to do this is to divide an A4 page into equal panels — say, nine. But if you want, you can be more creative than that. The Gigantic Beard That Was Evil by Stephen Collins is an excellent example of the scope for using page layout creatively. You can really push the form: play with layout, scale, story and what you think of as a comic.
Step 4: Draw the comic
I recommend drawing on A4 Bristol board paper since it has a smooth surface, can tolerate a lot of rubbing out and holds ink well. You can get it from any art shop. 
Using your thumbnails for reference, draw the comic lightly using an HB pencil. Don’t make the line so heavy that it can’t be erased (since you’ll ink over the lines later).
Step 5: Ink the comic
Image before colour was added.
You’ve drawn your story. Well done!
Now for the fun part. I recommend using a dip pen and some waterproof ink. Why waterproof? If you want, you can add an ink wash later, or even paint it. 
If you don’t have a dip pen, you could also use any quality pen. Carefully go over your pencilled lines with the pen, working from top left to right and down, to avoid smudging it. It’s unfortunately easy to smudge the ink from the dip pen, so I recommend practising first. 
You’ve made a comic! 
Step 6: Adding colour
Comics traditionally had a limited colour palette before computers (here’s an in-depth explanation if you’re curious). You can actually do a huge amount with a restricted colour palette. Ellice Weaver’s comics show how very nicely how you can paint your work using a restricted palette. So for the next step, resist the temptation to add ALL THE COLOURS and consider using a limited palette. 
Once the ink is completely dry, erase the pencilled lines and you’ll be left with a beautiful inked black and white drawing. 
You could use a computer for this part. You could also photocopy it and paint straight on the copy. If you’re feeling really brave, you could paint straight on the original. But I’d suggest not doing this if it’s your first try at painting! 
What follows is an extremely basic guide for painting using Photoshop, but there are hundreds of brilliant articles out there and different techniques for digital painting. 
How to paint your comic using Photoshop

Scan the drawing and open it in Photoshop. You can adjust the levels (Image → Adjustments → Levels) to make the lines darker and crisper, and the paper invisible. At this stage, you can erase any smudges or mistakes. With a Wacom tablet, you could even completely redraw parts! Computers are just amazing. Keep the line art as its own layer. 
Add a new layer on top of the lines, and set the layer state from normal to multiply. This means you can paint your comic without obscuring your lines. Rename the layer something else, so you can keep track.
Start blocking in colour. And once you’re happy with that, experiment with adding tone and texture.

Christmas comic challenge!
Why not challenge yourself to make a short comic over Christmas? If you make one, share it in the comments. Or show me on Twitter — I’d love to see it.

Credit: Many of these techniques were learned on the Royal Drawing School’s brilliant ‘Drawing the Graphic Novel’ course.",2015,Rebecca Cottrell,rebeccacottrell,2015-12-20T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2015/make-a-comic/,design
97,Making Modular Layout Systems,"For all of the advantages the web has with distribution of content, I’ve always lamented the handiness of the WYSIWYG design tools from the print publishing world. When I set out to redesign my personal website, I wanted to have some of the same abilities that those tools have, laying out pages how I saw fit, and that meant a flexible system for dealing with imagery. 

Building on some of the CSS that Eric Meyer employed a few years back on the A List Apart design, I created a set of classes to use together to achieve the variety I was after. Employing multiple classes isn’t a new technique, but most examples aren’t coming at this from strictly editorial and visual perspectives; I wanted to have options to vary my layouts depending on content.

If you want to skip ahead, you can view the example first.

Laying the Foundation

We need to be able to map out our page so that we have predictable canvas, and then create a system of image sizes that work with it. For the sake of this article, let’s use a simple uniform 7-column grid, consisting of seven 100px-wide columns and 10px of space between each column, though you can use any measurements you want as long as they remain constant.


All of our images will have a width that references the grid column widths (in our example, 100px, 210px, 320px, 430px, 540px, 650px, or 760px), but the height can be as large as needed.


Once we know our images will all have one of those widths, we can setup our CSS to deal with the variations in layout. In the most basic form, we’re going to be dealing with three classes: one each that represent an identifier, a size, and a placement for our elements.


This is really a process of abstracting the important qualities of what you would do with a given image in a layout into separate classes, allowing you to quickly customize their appearance by combining the appropriate classes. Rather than trying to serve up a one-size-fits-all approach to styling, we give each class only one or two attributes and rely on the combination of classes to get us there.


Identifier

This specifies what kind of element we have: usually either an image (pic) or some piece of text (caption).


Size

Since we know how our grid is constructed and the potential widths of our images, we can knock out a space equal to the width of any number of columns. In our example, that value can be one, two, three, four, five, six, or seven.

Placement

This tells the element where to go. In our example we can use a class of left or right, which sets the appropriate floating rule.


Additions

I created a few additions that be tacked on after the “placement” in the class stack: solo, for a bit more space beneath images without captions, frame for images that need a border, and inset for an element that appears inside of a block of text. Outset images are my default, but you could easily switch the default concept to use inset images and create a class of outset to pull them out of the content columns.


The CSS

/* I D E N T I F I E R */
.pic p, .caption {
    font-size: 11px;
    line-height: 16px;
    font-family: Verdana, Arial, sans-serif;
    color: #666;
    margin: 4px 0 10px;
}
/* P L A C E M E N T */
.left {float: left; margin-right: 20px;}
.right {float: right; margin-left: 20px;}
.right.inset {margin: 0 120px 0 20px;} /* img floated right within text */
.left.inset {margin-left: 230px;} /* img floated left within text */
/* S I Z E */
.one {width: 100px;}
.two {width: 210px;}
.three {width: 320px;}
.four {width: 430px;}
.five {width: 540px;}
.six {width: 650px;}
.seven {width: 760px;}
.eight {width: 870px;}
/* A D D I T I O N S */
.frame {border: 1px solid #999;}
.solo img {margin-bottom: 20px;}

In Use

You can already see how powerful this approach can be. If you want an image and a caption on the left to stretch over half of the page, you would use:

<div class=""pic four left"">
	<img src=""image.jpg"" />
	<p>Caption goes here.</p>
</div>

Or, for that same image with a border and no caption:

<img src=""image.jpg"" class=""pic four left frame solo""/>

You just tack on the classes that contain the qualities you need. And because we’ve kept each class so simple, we can apply these same stylings to other elements too:

<p class=""caption two left"">Caption goes here.</p>

Caveats

Obviously there are some potential semantic hang-ups with these methods. While classes like pic and caption stem the tide a bit, others like left and right are tougher to justify. This is something that you have to decide for yourself; I’m fine with the occasional four or left class because I think there’s a good tradeoff. Just as a fully semantic solution to this problem would likely be imperfect, this solution is imperfect from the other side of the semantic fence. Additionally, IE6 doesn’t understand the chain of classes within a CSS selector (like .right.inset). If you need to support IE6, you may have to write a few more CSS rules to accommodate any discrepancies.

Opportunities

This is clearly a simple example, but starting with a modular foundation like this leaves the door open for opportunity. We’ve created a highly flexible and human-readable system for layout manipulation. Obviously, this is something that would need to be tailored to the spacing and sizes of your site, but the systematic approach is very powerful, especially for editorial websites whose articles might have lots of images of varying sizes. It may not get us fully to the flexibility of WYSIWYG print layouts, but methods like this point us in a direction of designs that can adapt to the needs of the content.


View the example: without grid and with grid.",2008,Jason Santa Maria,jasonsantamaria,2008-12-15T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2008/making-modular-layout-systems/,process
30,"Making Sites More Responsive, Responsibly","With digital projects we’re used to shifting our thinking to align with our target audience. We may undertake research, create personas, identify key tasks, or observe usage patterns, with our findings helping to refine our ongoing creations. A product’s overall experience can make or break its success, and when it comes to defining these experiences our development choices play a huge role alongside more traditional user-focused activities.

The popularisation of responsive web design is a great example of how we are able to shape the web’s direction through using technology to provide better experiences. If we think back to the move from table-based layouts to CSS, initially our clients often didn’t know or care about the difference in these approaches, but we did. Responsive design was similar in this respect – momentum grew through the web industry choosing to use an approach that we felt would give a better experience, and which was more future-friendly. 

We tend to think of responsive design as a means of displaying content appropriately across a range of devices, but the technology and our implementation of it can facilitate much more. A responsive layout not only helps your content work when the newest smartphone comes out, but it also ensures your layout suitably adapts if a visually impaired user drastically changes the size of the text.

 The 24 ways site at 400% on a Retina MacBook Pro displays a layout more typically used for small screens.

When we think more broadly, we realise that our technical choices and approaches to implementation can have knock-on effects for the greater good, and beyond our initial target audiences. We can make our experiences more responsive to people’s needs, enhancing their usability and accessibility along the way.

Being responsibly responsive

Of course, when we think about being more responsive, there’s a fine line between creating useful functionality and becoming intrusive and overly complex. In the excellent Responsible Responsive Design, Scott Jehl states that:


A responsible responsive design equally considers the following throughout a project:

Usability: The way a website’s user interface is presented to the user, and how that UI responds to browsing conditions and user interactions.
Access: The ability for users of all devices, browsers, and assistive technologies to access and understand a site’s features and content.
Sustainability: The ability for the technology driving a site or application to work for devices that exist today and to continue to be usable and accessible to users, devices, and browsers in the future.
Performance: The speed at which a site’s features and content are perceived to be delivered to the user and the efficiency with which they operate within the user interface.



Scott’s book covers these ideas in a lot more detail than I’ll be able to here (put it on your Christmas list if it’s not there already), but for now let’s think a bit more about our roles as digital creators and the power this gives us.

Our choices around technology and the decisions we have to make can be extremely wide-ranging. Solutions will vary hugely depending on the needs of each project, though we can further explore the concept of making our creations more responsive through the use of humble web technologies.

The power of the web

We all know that under the HTML5 umbrella are some great new capabilities, including a number of JavaScript APIs such as geolocation, web audio, the file API and many more. We often use these to enhance the functionality of our sites and apps, to add in new features, or to facilitate device-specific interactions.

You’ll have seen articles with flashy titles such as “Top 5 JavaScript APIs You’ve Never Heard Of!”, which you’ll probably read, think “That’s quite cool”, yet never use in any real work.

There is great potential for technologies like these to be misused, but there are also great prospects for them to be used well to enhance experiences. Let’s have a look at a few examples you may not have considered.

Offline first

When we make websites, many of us follow a process which involves user stories – standardised snippets of context explaining who needs what, and why.

“As a student I want to pay online for my course so I don’t have to visit the college in person.”

“As a retailer I want to generate unique product codes so I can manage my stock.”

We very often focus heavily on what needs doing, but may not consider carefully how it will be done. As in Scott’s list, accessibility is extremely important, not only in terms of providing a great experience to users of assistive technologies, but also to make your creation more accessible in the general sense – including under different conditions.

Offline first is yet another ‘first’ methodology (my personal favourite being ‘tea first’), which encourages us to develop so that connectivity itself is an enhancement – letting users continue with tasks even when they’re offline. Despite the rapid growth in public Wi-Fi, if we consider data costs and connectivity in developing countries, our travel habits with planes, underground trains and roaming (or simply if you live in the UK’s signal-barren East Anglian wilderness as I do), then you’ll realise that connectivity isn’t as ubiquitous as our internet-addled brains would make us believe. Take a scenario that I’m sure we’re all familiar with – the digital conference. Your venue may be in a city served by high-speed networks, but after overloading capacity with a full house of hashtag-hungry attendees, each carrying several devices, then everyone’s likely to be offline after all. Wouldn’t it be better if we could do something like this instead?


	Someone visits our conference website.
	On this initial run, some assets may be cached for future use: the conference schedule, the site’s CSS, photos of the speakers.
	When the attendee revisits the site on the day, the page shell loads up from the cache.
	If we have cached content (our session timetable, speaker photos or anything else), we can load it directly from the cache. We might then try to update this, or get some new content from the internet, but the conference attendee already has a base experience to use.
	If we don’t have something cached already, then we can try grabbing it online.
	If for any reason our requests for new content fail (we’re offline), then we can display a pre-cached error message from the initial load, perhaps providing our users with alternative suggestions from what is cached.


There are a number of ways we can make something like this, including using the application cache (AppCache) if you’re that way inclined. However, you may want to look into service workers instead. There are also some great resources on Offline First! if you’d like to find out more about this.

Building in offline functionality isn’t necessarily about starting offline first, and it’s also perfectly possible to retrofit sites and apps to catch offline scenarios, but this kind of graceful degradation can end up being more complex than if we’d considered it from the start. By treating connectivity as an enhancement, we can improve the experience and provide better performance than we can when waiting to counter failures. Our websites can respond to connectivity and usage scenarios, on top of adapting how we present our content. Thinking in this way can enhance each point in Scott’s criteria.

As I mentioned, this isn’t necessarily the kind of development choice that our clients will ask us for, but it’s one we may decide is simply the right way to build based on our project, enhancing the experience we provide to people, and making it more responsive to their situation.

Even more accessible

We’ve looked at accessibility in terms of broadening when we can interact with a website, but what about how? Our user stories and personas are often of limited use. We refer in very general terms to students, retailers, and sometimes just users. What if we have a student whose needs are very different from another student? Can we make our sites even more usable and accessible through our development choices?

Again using JavaScript to illustrate this concept, we can do a lot more with the ways people interact with our websites, and with the feedback we provide, than simply accepting keyboard, mouse and touch inputs and displaying output on a screen.

Input

Ambient light detection is one of those features that looks great in simple demos, but which we struggle to put to practical use. It’s not new – many satnav systems automatically change the contrast for driving at night or in tunnels, and our laptops may alter the screen brightness or keyboard backlighting to better adapt to our surroundings. Using web technologies we can adapt our presentation to be better suited to ambient light levels.

If our device has an appropriate light sensor and runs a browser that supports the API, we can grab the ambient light in units using ambient light events, in JavaScript. We may then change our presentation based on different bandings, perhaps like this:

window.addEventListener('devicelight', function(e) {
    var lux = e.value;

    if (lux < 50) {
        //Change things for dim light
    }
    if (lux >= 50 && lux <= 10000) {
        //Change things for normal light
    }
    if (lux > 10000) {
        //Change things for bright light
    }
});

Live demo (requires light sensor and supported browser).

Soon we may also be able to do such detection through CSS, with light-level being cited in the Media Queries Level 4 specification. If that becomes the case, it’ll probably look something like this:

@media (light-level: dim) {
  /*Change things for dim light*/
}

@media (light-level: normal) {
  /*Change things for normal light*/
}

@media (light-level: washed) {
  /*Change things for bright light*/
}

While we may be quick to dismiss this kind of detection as being a gimmick, it’s important to consider that apps such as Light Detector, listed on Apple’s accessibility page, provide important context around exactly this functionality.


	“If you are blind, Light Detector helps you to be more independent in many daily activities. At home, point your iPhone towards the ceiling to understand where the light fixtures are and whether they are switched on. In a room, move the device along the wall to check if there is a window and where it is. You can find out whether the shades are drawn by moving the device up and down.”

	everywaretechnologies.com/apps/lightdetector


Input can be about so much more than what we enter through keyboards. Both an ever increasing amount of available sensors and more APIs being supported by the major browsers will allow us to cater for more scenarios and respond to them accordingly. This can be as complex or simple as you need; for instance, while x-webkit-speech has been deprecated, the web speech API is available for a number of browsers, and research into sign language detection is also being performed by organisations such as Microsoft.

Output

Web technologies give us some great enhancements around input, allowing us to adapt our experiences accordingly. They also provide us with some nice ways to provide feedback to users.

When we play video games, many of our modern consoles come with the ability to have rumble effects on our controller pads. These are a great example of an enhancement, as they provide a level of feedback that is entirely optional, but which can give a great deal of extra information to the player in the right circumstances, and broaden the scope of our comprehension beyond what we’re seeing and hearing.

Haptic feedback is possible on the web as well. We could use this in any number of responsible applications, such as alerting a user to changes or using different patterns as a communication mechanism. If you find yourself in a pickle, here’s how to print out SOS in Morse code through the vibration API. The following code indicates the length of vibration in milliseconds, interspersed by pauses in milliseconds.

navigator.vibrate([100, 300, 100, 300, 100, 300, 600, 300, 600, 300, 600, 300, 100, 300, 100, 300, 100]);

Live demo (requires supported browser)

With great power…

What you’ve no doubt come to realise by now is that these are just more examples of progressive enhancement, whose inclusion will provide a better experience if the capabilities are available, but which we should not rely on. This idea isn’t new, but the most important thing to remember, and what I would like you to take away from this article, is that it is up to us to decide to include these kind of approaches within our projects – if we don’t root for them, they probably won’t happen. This is where our professional responsibility comes in.

We won’t necessarily be asked to implement solutions for the scenarios above, but they illustrate how we can help to push the boundaries of experiences. Maybe we’ll have to switch our thinking about how we build, but we can create more usable products for a diverse range of people and usage scenarios through the choices we make around technology. Let’s stop thinking simply in terms of features inside a narrow view of our target users, and work out how we can extend these to cater for a wider set of situations.

When you plan your next digital project, consider the power of the web and the enhancements we can use, and try to make your projects even more responsive and responsible.",2014,Sally Jenkinson,sallyjenkinson,2014-12-10T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2014/making-sites-more-responsive-responsibly/,code
136,Making XML Beautiful Again: Introducing Client-Side XSL,"Remember that first time you saw XML and got it? When you really understood what was possible and the deep meaning each element could carry? Now when you see XML, it looks ugly, especially when you navigate to a page of XML in a browser. Well, with every modern browser now supporting XSL 1.0, I’m going to show you how you can turn something as simple as an ATOM feed into a customised page using a browser, Notepad and some XSL.

What on earth is this XSL?

XSL is a family of recommendations for defining XML document transformation and presentation. It consists of three parts:


	XSLT 1.0 – Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation, a language for transforming XML
	XPath 1.0 – XML Path Language, an expression language used by XSLT to access or refer to parts of an XML document. (XPath is also used by the XML Linking specification)
	XSL-FO 1.0 – Extensible Stylesheet Language Formatting Objects, an XML vocabulary for specifying formatting semantics


XSL transformations are usually a one-to-one transformation, but with newer versions (XSL 1.1 and XSL 2.0) its possible to create many-to-many transformations too. So now you have an overview of XSL, on with the show…

So what do I need?

So to get going you need a browser an supports client-side XSL transformations such as Firefox, Safari, Opera or Internet Explorer. Second, you need a source XML file – for this we’re going to use an ATOM feed from Flickr.com. And lastly, you need an editor of some kind. I find Notepad++ quick for short XSLs, while I tend to use XMLSpy or Oxygen for complex XSL work. 

Because we’re doing a client-side transformation, we need to modify the XML file to tell it where to find our yet-to-be-written XSL file. Take a look at the source XML file, which originates from my Flickr photos tagged sky, in ATOM format.

The top of the ATOM file now has an additional <?xml-stylesheet /> instruction, as can been seen on Line 2 below. This instructs the browser to use the XSL file to transform the document.

<?xml version=""1.0"" encoding=""utf-8"" standalone=""yes""?>
<?xml-stylesheet type=""text/xsl"" href=""flickr_transform.xsl""?>
<feed xmlns=""http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom""
	xmlns:dc=""http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"">

Your first transformation

Your first XSL will look something like this:

<?xml version=""1.0"" encoding=""utf-8""?>
<xsl:stylesheet version=""1.0""
	xmlns:xsl=""http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform""
	xmlns:atom=""http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom""
	xmlns:dc=""http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"">
	<xsl:output method=""html"" encoding=""utf-8""/>
</xsl:stylesheet>

This is pretty much the starting point for most XSL files. You will notice the standard XML processing instruction at the top of the file (line 1). We then switch into XSL mode using the XSL namespace on all XSL elements (line 2). In this case, we have added namespaces for ATOM (line 4) and Dublin Core (line 5). This means the XSL can now read and understand those elements from the source XML. 

After we define all the namespaces, we then move onto the xsl:output element (line 6). This enables you to define the final method of output. Here we’re specifying html, but you could equally use XML or Text, for example. The encoding attributes on each element do what they say on the tin. As with all XML, of course, we close every element including the root.

The next stage is to add a template, in this case an <xsl:template /> as can be seen below:

<?xml version=""1.0"" encoding=""utf-8""?>
<xsl:stylesheet version=""1.0""
	xmlns:xsl=""http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform""
	xmlns:atom=""http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom""
	xmlns:dc=""http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"">
	<xsl:output method=""html"" encoding=""utf-8""/>
	<xsl:template match=""/"">
		<html>
			<head>
				<title>Making XML beautiful again : Transforming ATOM</title>
			</head>
			<body>
				<xsl:apply-templates select=""/atom:feed""/>
			</body>
		</html>
	</xsl:template>
</xsl:stylesheet>

The beautiful thing about XSL is its English syntax, if you say it out loud it tends to make sense. 

The / value for the match attribute on line 8 is our first example of XPath syntax. The expression / matches any element – so this <xsl:template/> will match against any element in the document. As the first element in any XML document is the root element, this will be the one matched and processed first.

Once we get past our standard start of a HTML document, the only instruction remaining in this <xsl:template/> is to look for and match all <atom:feed/> elements using the <xsl:apply-templates/> in line 14, above.

<?xml version=""1.0"" encoding=""utf-8""?>
<xsl:stylesheet version=""1.0""
	xmlns:xsl=""http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform""
	xmlns:atom=""http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom""
	xmlns:dc=""http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"">
	<xsl:output method=""html"" encoding=""utf-8""/>
	<xsl:template match=""/"">
		<xsl:apply-templates select=""/atom:feed""/>
	</xsl:template>
	<xsl:template match=""/atom:feed"">
		<div id=""content"">
			<h1>
				<xsl:value-of select=""atom:title""/>
			</h1>
			<p>
				<xsl:value-of select=""atom:subtitle""/>
			</p>
			<ul id=""entries"">
				<xsl:apply-templates select=""atom:entry""/>
			</ul>
		</div>
	</xsl:template>
</xsl:stylesheet>

This new template (line 12, above) matches <feed/> and starts to write the new HTML elements out to the output stream. The <xsl:value-of/> does exactly what you’d expect – it finds the value of the item specifed in its select attribute. With XPath you can select any element or attribute from the source XML. 

The last part is a repeat of the now familiar <xsl:apply-templates/> from before, but this time we’re using it inside of a called template. Yep, XSL is full of recursion…

<xsl:template match=""atom:entry"">
	<li class=""entry"">
		<h2>
			<a href=""{atom:link/@href}"">
				<xsl:value-of select=""atom:title""/>
			</a>
		</h2>
		<p class=""date"">
			(<xsl:value-of select=""substring-before(atom:updated,'T')""/>)
		</p>
		<p class=""content"">
			<xsl:value-of select=""atom:content"" disable-output-escaping=""yes""/>
		</p>
		<xsl:apply-templates select=""atom:category""/>
	</li>
</xsl:template>

The <xsl:template/> which matches atom:entry (line 1) occurs every time there is a <entry/> element in the source XML file. So in total that is 20 times, this is naturally why XSLT is full of recursion. This <xsl:template/> has been matched and therefore called higher up in the document, so we can start writing list elements directly to the output stream. The first part is simply a <h2/> with a link wrapped within it (lines 3-7). We can select attributes using XPath using @. 

The second part of this template selects the date, but performs a XPath string function on it. This means that we only get the date and not the time from the string (line 9). This is achieved by getting only the part of the string that exists before the T. 

Regular Expressions are not part of the XPath 1.0 string functions, although XPath 2.0 does include them. Because of this, in XSL we tend to rely heavily on the available XML output. 

The third part of the template (line 12) is a <xsl:value-of/> again, but this time we use an attribute of <xsl:value-of/> called disable output escaping to turn escaped characters back into XML. 

The very last section is another <xsl:apply-template/> call, taking us three templates deep. Do not worry, it is not uncommon to write XSL which go 20 or more templates deep!

<xsl:template match=""atom:category"">
	<xsl:for-each select=""."">
		<xsl:element name=""a"">
			<xsl:attribute name=""rel"">
				<xsl:text>tag</xsl:text>
			</xsl:attribute>
			<xsl:attribute name=""href"">
				<xsl:value-of select=""concat(@scheme, @term)""/>
			</xsl:attribute>
			<xsl:value-of select=""@term""/>
		</xsl:element>
		<xsl:text> </xsl:text>
	</xsl:for-each>
</xsl:template>

In our final <xsl:template/>, we see a combination of what we have done before with a couple of twists. Once we match atom:category we then count how many elements there are at that same level (line 2). The XPath . means ‘self’, so we count how many category elements are within the <entry/> element. 

Following that, we start to output a link with a rel attribute of the predefined text, tag (lines 4-6). In XSL you can just type text, but results can end up with strange whitespace if you do (although there are ways to simply remove all whitespace). 

The only new XPath function in this example is concat(), which simply combines what XPaths or text there might be in the brackets. We end the output for this tag with an actual tag name (line 10) and we add a space afterwards (line 12) so it won’t touch the next tag. (There are better ways to do this in XSL using the last() XPath function). 

After that, we go back to the <xsl:for-each/> element again if there is another category element, otherwise we end the <xsl:for-each/> loop and end this <xsl:template/>.

A touch of style

Because we’re using recursion through our templates, you will find this is the end of the templates and the rest of the XML will be ignored by the parser. Finally, we can add our CSS to finish up. (I have created one for Flickr and another for News feeds)

<style type=""text/css"" media=""screen"">@import ""flickr_overview.css?v=001"";</style>

So we end up with a nice simple to understand but also quick to write XSL which can be used on ATOM Flickr feeds and ATOM News feeds. With a little playing around with XSL, you can make XML beautiful again.

All the files can be found in the zip file (14k)",2006,Ian Forrester,ianforrester,2006-12-07T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2006/beautiful-xml-with-xsl/,code
247,Managing Flow and Rhythm with CSS Custom Properties,"An important part of designing user interfaces is creating consistent vertical rhythm between elements. Creating consistent, predictable space doesn’t just make your web pages and views look better, but it can also improve the scan-ability. 
Browsers ship with default CSS and these styles often create consistent rhythm for flow elements out of the box. The problem is though that we often reset these styles with a reset. Elements such as <div> and <section> also have no default margin or padding associated with them. 
I’ve tried all sorts of weird and wonderful techniques to find a balance between using inherited CSS while also levelling the playing field for component driven front-ends with very little success. This experimentation is how I landed on the flow utility, though and I’m going to show you how it works. Let’s dive in!
The Flow utility
With the ever-growing number of folks working with component libraries and design systems, we could benefit from a utility that creates space for us, only when it’s appropriate to do so. The problem with my previous attempts at fixing this is that the spacing values were very rigid. 
That’s fine for 90% of contexts, but sometimes, it’s handy to be able to tweak the values based on the exact context of your component. This is where CSS Custom Properties come in handy.
The code
.flow {
  --flow-space: 1em;
}  

.flow > * + * { 
  margin-top: var(--flow-space);
}
What this code does is enable you to add a class of flow to an element which will then add margin-top to sibling elements within that element. We use the lobotomised owl selector to select these siblings. This approach enables an almost anonymous and automatic system which is ideal for component library based front-ends where components probably don’t have any idea what surrounds them. 
The other important part of this utility is the usage of the --flow-space custom property. We define it in the .flow component and each element within it will be spaced by --flow-space, by default. The beauty about setting this as a custom property is that custom properties also participate in the cascade, so we can utilise specificity to change it if we need it. Pretty cool, right? Let’s look at some examples.
A basic example
See the Pen CSS Flow Utility: Basic implementation by Andy Bell (@hankchizljaw) on CodePen.
https://codepen.io/hankchizljaw/pen/LXqerj
What we’ve got in this example is some basic HTML content that has a class of flow on the parent article element. Because there’s a very heavy-handed reset added as a dependency, all of the content would have been squished together without the flow utility. 
Because our --flow-space custom property is set to 1em, the space between elements is 1X the font size of the element in question. This means that a <h2> in this context has a calculated margin-top value of 28.8px, because it has an assigned font size of 1.8rem. If we were to globally change the --flow-space value to 1.1em for example, we’d affect everything because margin values would be calculated as 1.1X the font size. 
This example looks great because using font size as the basis of rhythm works really well. What if we wanted to to tweak certain elements within this article, though? 
See the Pen CSS Flow Utility: Tweaked Basic implementation by Andy Bell (@hankchizljaw) on CodePen.
https://codepen.io/hankchizljaw/pen/qQgxaY
I like lots of whitespace with my article layouts, so the 1em space isn’t going to cut it for all elements. I like to provide plenty of space between headed sections, so I increase the --flow-space in these instances:
h2 {
  --flow-space: 3rem;
}
Notice also how I also switch over to using rem units? I want to make sure that these overrides are always based on the root font size. This is a personal preference of mine and you can use whatever units you want. Just be aware that it’s better for accessibility to use flexible units like em, rem and %, so that a user’s font size preferences are honoured. 
A more advanced example
Although the flow utility is super useful for a plethora of contexts, it really shines when working with a few unrelated components. Instead of having to write specific layout CSS just for your particular context, you can use flow and --flow-space to create predictable and contextual space.
See the Pen CSS Flow Utility: Unrelated components by Andy Bell (@hankchizljaw) on CodePen.
https://codepen.io/hankchizljaw/pen/ZmPGyL
In this example, we’ve got ourselves a little prototype layout that features a media element, followed by a grid of features. By using flow, it was really quick and easy to generate space between those two main elements. It was also easy to create space within the components. For example, I added it to the .media__content element, so that the article’s content would space itself:
<article class=""media__content flow"">
  ...
</article>
Something to remember though: the custom properties cascade in the same way that other CSS values do, so you’ve got to keep that in mind. We’ve got a great example of that in this example where because we’ve got the flow utility on our .features component, which has a --flow-space override: the child elements of .features will inherit that value, so we’ve had to set another value on the .features__list element.
“But what about old browsers?”, I hear you cry
We’re using CSS Custom Properties that at the time of writing, have about 88% support. One thing we can do to remedy the other 12% of browsers is to set a default, traditional margin-top value of 1em, so it calculates itself based on the element’s font-size:
.flow {
  --flow-space: 1em;
}

.flow > * + * { 
  margin-top: 1em;
  margin-top: var(--flow-space);
}
Thanks to the cascading and declarative nature of CSS, we can set that default margin-top value and then immediately set it to use the custom property instead. Browsers that understand Custom Properties will automatically apply them—those that don’t will ignore them. Yay for the cascade and progressive enhancement! 
Wrapping up
This tiny little utility can bring great power for when you want to consistently space elements, vertically. It also—thanks to the power of the modern web—allows us to create contextual overrides without creating modifier classes or shame CSS. 
If you’ve got other methods of doing this sort of work, please let me know on Twitter. I’d love to see what you’re working on!",2018,Andy Bell,andybell,2018-12-07T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2018/managing-flow-and-rhythm-with-css-custom-properties/,code
5,Managing a Mind,"On 21 May 2013, I woke in a hospital bed feeling exhausted, disorientated and ashamed. The day before, I had tried to kill myself.

It’s very hard to write about this and share it. It feels like I’m opening up the deepest recesses of my soul and laying everything bare, but I think it’s important we share this as a community. Since starting tentatively to write about my experience, I’ve had many conversations about this: sharing with others; others sharing with me. I’ve been surprised to discover how many people are suffering similarly, thinking that they’re alone. They’re not.

Due to an insane schedule of teaching, writing, speaking, designing and just generally trying to keep up, I reached a point where my buffers completely overflowed. I was working so hard on so many things that I was struggling to maintain control. I was living life on fast-forward and my grasp on everything was slowly slipping.

On that day, I reached a low point – the lowest point of my life – and in that moment I could see only one way out. I surrendered. I can’t really describe that moment. I’m still grappling with it. All I know is that I couldn’t take it any more and I gave up.

I very nearly died.

I’m very fortunate to have survived. I was admitted to hospital, taken there unconscious in an ambulance. On waking, I felt overwhelmed with shame and overcome with remorse, but I was resolved to grasp the situation and address it. The experience has forced me to confront a great deal of issues in my life; it has also encouraged me to seek a deeper understanding of my situation and, in particular, the mechanics of the mind.

The relentless pace of change

We work in a fast-paced industry: few others, if any, confront the daily challenges we face. The landscape we work within is characterised by constant flux. It’s changing and evolving at a rate we have never experienced before. Few industries reinvent themselves yearly, monthly, weekly… Ours is one of these industries. Technology accelerates at an alarming rate and keeping abreast of this change is challenging, to say the least.

As designers it can be difficult to maintain a knowledge bank that is relevant and fit for purpose. We’re on a constant rollercoaster of endless learning, trying to maintain the pace as, daily, new ideas and innovations emerge — in some cases fundamentally changing our medium.

Under the pressure of client work or product design and development, it can be difficult to find the time to focus on learning the new skills we need to remain relevant and functionally competent. The result, all too often, is that the edges of our days have eroded. We no longer work nine to five; instead we work eight to six, and after the working day is over we regroup to spend our evenings learning. It’s an unsustainable situation.

From the workshop to the web

Added to this pressure to keep up, our work is now undertaken under a global gaze, conducted under an ever-present spotlight. Tools like Dribbble, Twitter and others, while incredibly powerful, have an unfortunate side effect, that of unfolding your ideas in public. This shift, from workshop to web, brings with it additional pressure.

In the past, the early stages of creativity took place within the relative safety of the workshop, an environment where one could take risks and gather feedback from a trusted few. We had space to make and space to break. No more. Our industry’s focus (and society’s focus) on sharing, leads us now to play out our decisions in public. This shift has changed us culturally, slowly but surely easing every aspect of our process – and lives – from private to public. This is at once liberating and debilitating.

If you’re not careful, an addiction to followers, likes, retweets, page views and other forms of measurement can overwhelm you. When you release your work into the wild and all it’s greeted with is silence, it can cripple you.

Reflecting on this, in an insightful article titled Derailed, Rogie King asks, “Can social popularity take us off the course of growth and where we were intended to go?” He makes a powerful point, that perhaps we might focus on what really matters, setting aside statistics. He concludes that to grow as practitioners we might be best served by seeking out critique through other avenues, away from the social spotlight.

On status anxiety and impostor syndrome

Following my experience I embarked on a period of self-reflection. I wanted to discover what had driven me to take the course of action I had. I wanted to ensure it never happened again. I wanted to understand how the mind works and, in so doing, learn a little more about myself.

I’ve only begun this journey, but two things I discovered resonated with me: the twin pressures of status anxiety and impostor syndrome.

In his excellent book Status Anxiety, the philosopher Alain de Botton explores a growing concern with status anxiety, a worry about how others perceive us and how this shapes our relationship with the world. He states:


	We all worry about what others think of us. We all long to succeed and fear failure. We all suffer – to a greater or lesser degree, usually privately and with embarrassment – from status anxiety. […] This is an almost universal anxiety that rarely gets mentioned directly: an anxiety about what others think of us; about whether we’re judged a success or a failure, a winner or a loser.


We see these pressures played out and amplified in the social sphere we all inhabit. We are social animals and we cannot help but react to the landscape we live and work within. Even if your work receives the public praise you so secretly desire, you find yourself questioning this praise.

A psychological phenomenon in which sufferers are unable to internalise their accomplishments, impostor syndrome is far more widespread than you’d imagine. The author Leigh Buchanan describes it as “A fear that one is not as smart or capable as others think.” As she puts it, “People who feel like frauds chalk up their accomplishments to external factors such as luck and timing, or worry they are coasting on charm and personality rather than on talent.”

At the bottom, this was all I could see. I felt overwhelmed by others’ perception of me. Was I a success or a failure? Would I be discovered as the fraud I’d convinced myself that I was? These twin pressures – that I was unconscious of at the time – had lead me to a place of crippling self-doubt, questioning my very existence.

The act of discovery, of investigating how the mind functions, led me to a deeper understanding of myself. Developing an awareness of psychology and learning about conditions like status anxiety and impostor syndrome helped me to understand and recognise how my mind worked, enabling me to manage it more effectively.



Make it count

Reflecting upon my experience, I began to regroup, to focus on what really mattered. I’d taken on too much — as I believe many of us do. I was guilty of wanting to do all the things. I started to introduce pauses. Before blindly saying yes to everything, I forced myself to pause and ask: “Is this important?”

Our community offers us huge benefits, but an always-on culture in which we’re bombarded daily by opportunity places temptation in our paths. It’s easy to get sucked in to a vortex of wanting to be a part of everything. It’s important, however, to focus. As Simon Collison puts it:


	I cull and surrender topics. Then I focus on my strengths, mastering my core skills.


We only have so much time and we can only do so much. It’s impossible, indeed futile, to try to do everything. Sometimes we need to step back a little and just enjoy life, enjoy others’ achievements, without feeling the need to be actively involved ourselves.

As Mahatma Ghandi put it:

A ‘no’ uttered from deepest conviction is better and greater than a ‘yes’ merely uttered to please, or what is worse, to avoid trouble.
Young India, volume 9, 1927


We need to learn to say no a little more often. We need to focus on the work that matters. This, coupled with an understanding of the mind and how it works, can help us achieve a happier balance between work and life.

Don’t waste your time. You only have one life. Make it count.",2013,Christopher Murphy,christophermurphy,2013-12-21T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2013/managing-a-mind/,process
143,Marking Up a Tag Cloud,"Everyone’s doing it. 

The problem is, everyone’s doing it wrong. 

Harsh words, you might think. But the crimes against decent markup are legion in this area. You see, I’m something of a markup and semantics junkie. So I’m going to analyse some of the more well-known tag clouds on the internet, explain what’s wrong, and then show you one way to do it better. 

del.icio.us 

I think the first ever tag cloud I saw was on del.icio.us. Here’s how they mark it up. 

<div class=""alphacloud"">
	<a href=""/tag/.net"" class=""lb s2"">.net</a>
	<a href=""/tag/advertising"" class="" s3"">advertising</a>
	<a href=""/tag/ajax"" class="" s5"">ajax</a>
	...
</div>

Unfortunately, that is one of the worst examples of tag cloud markup I have ever seen. The page states that a tag cloud is a list of tags where size reflects popularity. However, despite describing it in this way to the human readers, the page’s author hasn’t described it that way in the markup. It isn’t a list of tags, just a bunch of anchors in a <div>. This is also inaccessible because a screenreader will not pause between adjacent links, and in some configurations will not announce the individual links, but rather all of the tags will be read as just one link containing a whole bunch of words. Markup crime number one. 

Flickr 

Ah, Flickr. The darling photo sharing site of the internet, and the biggest blind spot in every standardista’s vision. Forgive it for having atrocious markup and sometimes confusing UI because it’s just so much damn fun to use. Let’s see what they do. 

<p id=""TagCloud"">
	 <a href=""/photos/tags/06/"" style=""font-size: 14px;"">06</a> 
	 <a href=""/photos/tags/africa/"" style=""font-size: 12px;"">africa</a> 
	 <a href=""/photos/tags/amsterdam/"" style=""font-size: 14px;"">amsterdam</a> 
	...
</p>

Again we have a simple collection of anchors like del.icio.us, only this time in a paragraph. But rather than using a class to represent the size of the tag they use an inline style. An inline style using a pixel-based font size. That’s so far away from the goal of separating style from content, they might as well use a <font> tag. You could theoretically parse that to extract the information, but you have more work to guess what the pixel sizes represent. Markup crime number two (and extra jail time for using non-breaking spaces purely for visual spacing purposes.)

Technorati 

Ah, now. Here, you’d expect something decent. After all, the Overlord of microformats and King of Semantics Tantek Çelik works there. Surely we’ll see something decent here? 

<ol class=""heatmap"">
	<li><em><em><em><em><a href=""/tag/Britney+Spears"">Britney Spears</a></em></em></em></em></li>
	<li><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><a href=""/tag/Bush"">Bush</a></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></li>
	<li><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><a href=""/tag/Christmas"">Christmas</a></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></li>
	...
	<li><em><em><em><em><em><em><a href=""/tag/SEO"">SEO</a></em></em></em></em></em></em></li>
	<li><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><em><a href=""/tag/Shopping"">Shopping</a></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></em></li>
	...
</ol>

Unfortunately it turns out not to be that decent, and stop calling me Shirley. It’s not exactly terrible code. It does recognise that a tag cloud is a list of links. And, since they’re in alphabetical order, that it’s an ordered list of links. That’s nice. However … fifteen nested <em> tags? FIFTEEN? That’s emphasis for you. Yes, it is parse-able, but it’s also something of a strange way of looking at emphasis. The HTML spec states that <em> is emphasis, and <strong> is for stronger emphasis. Nesting <em> tags seems counter to the idea that different tags are used for different levels of emphasis. Plus, if you had a screen reader that stressed the voice for emphasis, what would it do? Shout at you? Markup crime number three. 

So what should it be? 

As del.icio.us tells us, a tag cloud is a list of tags where the size that they are rendered at contains extra information. However, by hiding the extra context purely within the CSS or the HTML tags used, you are denying that context to some users. The basic assumption being made is that all users will be able to see the difference between font sizes, and this is demonstrably false. 

A better way to code a tag cloud is to put the context of the cloud within the content, not the markup or CSS alone. As an example, I’m going to take some of my favourite flickr tags and put them into a cloud which communicates the relative frequency of each tag. 

To start with a tag cloud in its most basic form is just a list of links. I am going to present them in alphabetical order, so I’ll use an ordered list. Into each list item I add the number of photos I have with that particular tag. The tag itself is linked to the page on flickr which contains those photos. So we end up with this first example. To display this as a traditional tag cloud, we need to alter it in a few ways: 


	The items need to be displayed next to each other, rather than one-per-line
	The context information should be hidden from display (but not from screen readers)
	The tag should link to the page of items with that tag


Displaying the items next to each other simply means setting the display of the list elements to inline. The context can be hidden by wrapping it in a <span> and then using the off-left method to hide it. And the link just means adding an anchor (with rel=""tag"" for some extra microformats bonus points). So, now we have a simple collection of links in our second example. 

The last stage is to add the sizes. Since we already have context in our content, the size is purely for visual rendering, so we can just use classes to define the different sizes. For my example, I’ll use a range of class names from not-popular through ultra-popular, in order of smallest to largest, and then use CSS to define different font sizes. If you preferred, you could always use less verbose class names such as  size1 through size6. Anyway, adding some classes and CSS gives us our final example, a semantic and more accessible tag cloud.",2006,Mark Norman Francis,marknormanfrancis,2006-12-09T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2006/marking-up-a-tag-cloud/,code
39,Meet for Learning,"“I’ve never worked in a place like this,” said one of my direct reports during our daily stand-up meeting.

And with that statement, my mind raced to the most important thing about lawyering that I’ve learned from decades of watching lawyers lawyer on TV: don’t ask a question you don’t know the answer to.

But I couldn’t stop myself. I wanted to learn more. The thought developed in my mind. The words formed in my mouth. And the vocalization occurred: “A place like this?”

“I’ve never worked where people are so honest and transparent about things.”

Designing a learning-centered culture

Before we started Center Centre, Jared Spool and I discussed both the larger goals and the smaller details of this new UX design school. We talked about things like user experience, curriculum, and structure.

We discussed the pattern we saw in our research. Hiring managers told us time and again that great designers have excellent technical and interpersonal skills. But, more importantly, the best designers are lifelong learners—they are willing and able to learn how to do new things. Learning this led us to ask a critical question: how would we intentionally design a learning-centered experience?

To craft the experience we were aiming for, we knew we had to create a learning-centered culture for our students and our employees. We knew that our staff would need to model the behaviors our students needed to learn. We knew the best way to shape the culture was to work with our direct reports—our directs—to develop the behaviors we wanted them to exemplify.

To craft the experience we were aiming for, we knew we had to create a learning-centered culture for our students and our employees. We knew that our staff would need to model the behaviors our students needed to learn.

Building a learning team

Our learning-centered culture starts with our staff. We believe in transparency. Transparency builds trust. Effective organizations have effective teams who trust each other as individuals.

One huge way we build that trust and provide opportunities for transparency is in our meetings. (I know, I know—meetings! Yuck!) But seriously, running and participating in effective meetings is a great opportunity to build a learning-centered culture.

Meetings—when done well—allow individuals time to come together, to share, and to listen. These behaviors, executed on a consistent and regular basis, build honest and trusting relationships.

An effective meeting is one that achieves the desired outcomes of that meeting. While different meetings aim for different results, at Center Centre all meetings have a secondary goal: meet for learning.

A framework for learning-centered meetings

We’ve developed a framework for our meetings. We use it for all our meetings, which means attendees know what to expect. It also saves us from reinventing the wheel in each meeting.

These basic steps help our meetings focus on the valuable face-to-face interaction we’re having, and help us truly begin to learn from one another.

 An agenda for a staff meeting.

Use effective meeting basics


	Prepare for the meeting before the meeting.
	If you’re running the meeting, prepare a typed agenda and share it before the meeting. Agendas have start times for each item.
	Start the meeting on time. Don’t wait for stragglers.
	Define ground rules. Get input from attendees. Recurring meetings don’t have to do this every time.
	Keep to the meeting agenda. Put off-topic questions and ideas in a parking lot, a visual document that everyone can see, so you can address the questions and ideas later.
	Finish on time. And if you’ve reached the meeting’s goals, finish early.


 Parking lots where ideas on sticky notes can be posted for later consideration.

Focus to learn


	Have tech-free meetings: no laptops, no phones, no things with notifications.
	Bring a notebook and a pen.
	Take notes by hand. You’re not taking minutes, you’re writing to learn.


Come with a learning mindset


	Ask: what are our goals for this meeting? (Hopefully answered by the meeting agenda.)
	Ask: what can I learn overall?
	Ask: what can I learn from each of my colleagues?
	Ask: what can I share that will help the team learn overall?
	Ask: what can I share that will help each of my colleagues learn?


Investing in regularly scheduled learning-centered meetings

At Center Centre, we have two types of recurring all-staff meetings: daily stand-ups and weekly staff meetings. (We are a small organization, so it makes sense to meet as an entire group.)

Yes, that means we spend thirty minutes each day in stand-up, for a total of two and a half hours of stand-up meeting time each week. And, yes, we also have a weekly ninety-minute sit-down staff meeting on top of that. This investment in time is an investment in learning.

We use these meetings to build our transparency, and, therefore, our trust. The regularity of these meetings helps us maintain ongoing, open sharing about our responsibilities, our successes, and our learning.

For instance, we answer five questions in our stand-up:


	What did I get done since the last stand-up (I reported at)?
	What is my goal to accomplish before the next stand-up?
	What’s preventing me from getting these things done, if anything?
	What’s the highest risk or most unknown thing right now about what I’m trying to get done?
	What is the most important thing I learned since the last time we met and how will what I learned change the way I approach things in the future?


Each person writes out their answers to these questions before the meeting. Each person brings their answers printed on paper to the meeting. And each person brings a pen to jot down notes.

 Notes compiled for a stand-up meeting.

During the stand-up, each person shares their answers to the five questions. To sustain a learning-centered culture, the fifth question is the most important question to answer. It allows individual reflection focused on learning. Sometimes this isn’t an easy question to answer. It makes us stretch. It makes us think.

By sharing our individual answers to the fifth question, we open ourselves up to the group. When we honestly share what we’ve learned, we openly admit that we didn’t know something. Sharing like this would be scary (and even risky) if we didn’t have a learning-centered culture.

We often share the actual process of how we learned something. By listening, each of us is invited to learn more about the topic at hand, consider what more there is to learn about that topic, and even gain insights into other methods of learning—which can be applied to other topics.

Sharing the answers to the fifth question also allows opportunities for further conversations. We often take what someone has individually learned and find ways to apply it for our entire team in support of our organization. We are, after all, learning together.

Building individual learners

We strive to grow together as a team at Center Centre, but we don’t lose sight of the importance of the individuals who form our team. As individuals, we bring our goals, dreams, abilities, and prior knowledge to the team.

To build learning teams, we must build individual learners. A team made up of lifelong learners, who share their learning and learn from each other, is a team that will continually produce better results.

As a manager, I need to meet each direct where they are with their current abilities and knowledge. Then, I can help them take their skills and knowledge base to the next levels. This process requires each individual direct to engage in professional development.

We believe effective managers help their directs engage in behaviors that support growth and development. Effective managers encourage and support learning.



Our weekly one-on-ones

One way we encourage learning is through weekly one-on-ones. Each of my directs meets with me, individually, for thirty minutes each week. The meeting is their meeting. It is not my meeting.

My direct sets the agenda. They talk about what they want to talk about. They can talk about work. They can talk about things outside of work. They can talk about their health, their kids, and even their cat. Whatever is important to them is important to me. I listen. I take notes.

Although the direct sets the specific agenda, the meeting has three main parts. Approximately ten minutes for them (the direct), ten minutes for me (the manager), and ten minutes for us to talk about their future within—and beyond—our organization.

Coaching for future performance

The final third of our one-on-one is when I coach my directs. Coaching looks to the direct’s future performance. It focuses on developing the direct’s skills.

Coaching isn’t hard. It doesn’t take much time. For me, it usually takes less than five minutes a week during a one-on-one.

The first time I coach one of my directs, I ask them to brainstorm about the skills they want to improve. They usually already have an idea about this. It’s often something they’ve wanted to work on for some time, but didn’t think they had the time or the knowhow to improve.

If a direct doesn’t know what they want to improve, we discuss their job responsibilities—specifically the aspects of the job that concern them.

Coaching provides an opportunity for me to ask, “In your job, what are the required skills that you feel like you don’t have (or know well enough, or perform effectively, or use with ease)?”

Sometimes I have to remind a direct that it’s okay not to know how to do something (even if it’s a required part of their job). After all, our organization is a learning organization. In a learning organization, no one knows everything but everyone is willing to learn anything.

After we review the job responsibilities together, I ask my direct what skill they’d like to work to improve. Whatever they choose, we focus on that skill for coaching—I’ve found my directs work better when they’re internally motivated.

Sometimes the first time I talk with a direct about coaching, they get a bit anxious. If this happens, I share a personal story about my professional learning journey. I say something like:


	I didn’t know how to make a school before we started to make Center Centre.

	I didn’t know how to manage an entire team of people—day in and day out—until I started managing a team of people every day.

	When I realized that I was the boss—and that the success of the school would hinge, at least in part, on my skills as a manager—I was a bit terrified. I was missing an important skill set that I needed to know (and I needed to know well).

	When I first understood this, I felt bad—like I should have already known how to be a great manager. But then I realized, I’d never faced this situation. I’d never needed to know how to use this skill set in this way.

	I worked through my anxiety about feeling inadequate. I decided I’d better learn how to be an effective manager because the school needed me to be one. You needed me to be one.

	Every day, I work to improve my management skills. You’ve probably noticed that some days I’m better at it than others. I try not to beat myself up about this, although it’s hard—I’d like to be perfect at it. But I’m not.

	I know that if I make a conscious, daily effort to learn how to be a better manager, I’ll continue to improve. So that’s what I do.

	Every day I learn. I learn by doing. I learn how to be better than I was the day before. That’s what I ask of you.


Once we determine the skill the direct wants to learn, we figure out how they can go about learning it. I ask: “How could you learn this skill?”

We brainstorm for two or three minutes about this. We write down every idea that comes to mind, and we write it so both of us can easily see the options (both whiteboards and sticky notes on the wall work well for this exercise).


	Read a book. Research online. Watch a virtual seminar. Listen to a podcast. Talk to a mentor. Reach out to an expert. Attend a conference. Shadow someone else while they do the skill. Join a professional organization.


The goal is to get the direct on a path of self-development. I’m coaching their development, but I’m not the main way my direct will learn this new skill.

I ask my direct which path seems like the best place to start. I let them choose whatever option they want (as long as it works with our budget). They are more likely to follow through if they are in control of this process.

Next, we work to break down the selected path into tasks. We only plan one week’s worth of tasks. The tasks are small, and the deadlines are short. My direct reports when each task is completed.

At our next one-on-one, I ask my direct about their experience learning this new skill.

Rinse. Repeat.

That’s it. I spend five minutes a week talking with each direct about their individual learning. They develop their professional skills, and together we’re creating a learning-centered culture.

Asking questions I don’t know the answer to

When my direct said, “I’ve never worked where people are so honest and transparent about things,” it led me to believe that all this is working. We are building a learning-centered culture.

This week I was reminded that creating a learning-centered culture starts not just with the staff, but with me. When I challenge myself to learn and then share what I’m currently learning, my directs want to learn more about what I’m learning about.

For example, I decided I needed to improve my writing skills. A few weeks ago, I realized that I was sorely out of practice and I felt like I had lost my voice. So I started to write. I put words on paper. I felt overwhelmed. I felt like I didn’t know how to write anymore (at least not well or effectively).

I bought some books on writing (mostly Peter Elbow’s books like Writing with Power, Writing Without Teachers, and Vernacular Eloquence), and I read them. I read them all. Reading these books was part of my personal coaching. I used the same steps to coach myself as I use with my directs when I coach them.

In stand-ups, I started sharing what I accomplished (like I completed one of the books) and what I learned by doing—specific things, like engaging in freewriting and an open-ended writing process.

This week, I went to lunch with one of my directs. She said, “You’ve been talking about freewriting a lot. You’re really excited about it. Freewriting seems like it’s helping your writing process. Would you tell me more about it?”

So I shared the details with her. I shared the reasons why I think freewriting is helping. I’m not focused on perfection. Instead, each day I’m focused on spending ten, uninterrupted minutes writing down whatever comes to my mind. It’s opening my writing mind. It’s allowing my words to flow more freely. And it’s helping me feel less self-conscious about my writing.

She said, “Leslie, when you say you’re self-conscious about your writing, I laugh. Not because it’s funny. But because when I read what you write, I think, ‘What is there to improve?’ I think you’re a great writer. It’s interesting to know that you think you can be a better writer. I like learning about your learning process. I think I could do freewriting. I’m going to give it a try.”

There’s something magical about all of this. I’m not even sure I can eloquently put it into words. I just know that our working environment is something very different. I’ve never experienced anything quite like it. Somehow, by sharing that I don’t know everything and that I’m always working to learn more, I invite my directs to be really open about what they don’t know. And they see it’s possible always to learn and grow.

I’m glad I ignore all the lawyering I’ve learned from watching TV. I’m glad I ask the questions I don’t know the answers to. And I’m glad my directs do the same. When we meet for learning, we accelerate and amplify the learning process—building individual learners and learning teams. Embracing the unknown and working toward understanding is what makes our culture a learning-centered culture.

Photos by Summer Kohlhorst.",2014,Leslie Jensen-Inman,lesliejenseninman,2014-12-20T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2014/meet-for-learning/,process
155,Minification: A Christmas Diet,"The festive season is generally more about gorging ourselves than staying thin but we’re going to change all that with a quick introduction to minification.

Performance has been a hot topic this last year. We’re building more complex sites and applications but at the same time trying to make then load faster and behave more responsively. What is a discerning web developer to do?

Minification is the process of make something smaller, in the case of web site performance we’re talking about reducing the size of files we send to the browser. The primary front-end components of any website are HTML, CSS, Javascript and a sprinkling of images. Let’s find some tools to trim the fat and speed up our sites.

For those that want to play along at home you can download the various utilities for Mac or Windows. You’ll want to be familiar with running apps on the command line too.

HTMLTidy

HTMLTidy optimises and strips white space from HTML documents. It also has a pretty good go at correcting any invalid markup while it’s at it.

tidy -m page.html

CSSTidy

CSSTidy takes your CSS file, optimises individual rules (for instance transforming padding-top: 10px; padding-bottom: 10px; to padding: 10px 0;) and strips unneeded white space.

csstidy style.css style-min.css

JSMin

JSMin takes your javascript and makes it more compact. With more and more websites using javascript to power (progressive) enhancements this can be a real bandwidth hog. Look out for pre-minified versions of libraries and frameworks too.

jsmin <script.js >script-min.js

Remember to run JSLint before you run JSMin to catch some common problems.

OptiPNG

Images can be a real bandwidth hog and making all of them smaller with OptiPNG should speed up your site.

optipng image.png

All of these tools have an often bewildering array of options and generally good documentation included as part of the package. A little experimentation will get you even more bang for your buck.

For larger projects you likely won’t want to be manually minifying all your files. The best approach here is to integrate these tools into your build process and have your live website come out the other side smaller than it went in.

You can also do things on the server to speed things up; GZIP compression for instance or compilation of resources to reduce the number of HTTP requests. If you’re interested in performance a good starting point is the Exceptional Performance section on the Yahoo Developer Network and remember to install the YSlow Firebug extension while you’re at it.",2007,Gareth Rushgrove,garethrushgrove,2007-12-06T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2007/minification-a-christmas-diet/,process
258,Mistletoe Offline,"It’s that time of year, when we gather together as families to celebrate the life of the greatest person in history. This man walked the Earth long before us, but he left behind words of wisdom. Those words can guide us every single day, but they are at the forefront of our minds during this special season.
I am, of course, talking about Murphy, and the golden rule he gave unto us:

Anything that can go wrong will go wrong.

So true! I mean, that’s why we make sure we’ve got nice 404 pages. It’s not that we want people to ever get served a File Not Found message, but we acknowledge that, despite our best efforts, it’s bound to happen sometime. Murphy’s Law, innit?
But there are some Murphyesque situations where even your lovingly crafted 404 page won’t help. What if your web server is down? What if someone is trying to reach your site but they lose their internet connection? These are all things than can—and will—go wrong.
I guess there’s nothing we can do about those particular situations, right?
Wrong!
A service worker is a Murphy-battling technology that you can inject into a visitor’s device from your website. Once it’s installed, it can intercept any requests made to your domain. If anything goes wrong with a request—as is inevitable—you can provide instructions for the browser. That’s your opportunity to turn those server outage frowns upside down. Take those network connection lemons and make network connection lemonade.
If you’ve got a custom 404 page, why not make a custom offline page too?
Get your server in order
Step one is to make …actually, wait. There’s a step before that. Step zero. Get your site running on HTTPS, if it isn’t already. You won’t be able to use a service worker unless everything’s being served over HTTPS, which makes sense when you consider the awesome power that a service worker wields.
If you’re developing locally, service workers will work fine for localhost, even without HTTPS. But for a live site, HTTPS is a must.
Make an offline page
Alright, assuming your site is being served over HTTPS, then step one is to create an offline page. Make it as serious or as quirky as is appropriate for your particular brand. If the website is for a restaurant, maybe you could put the telephone number and address of the restaurant on the custom offline page (unsolicited advice: you could also put this on the home page, you know). Here’s an example of the custom offline page for this year’s Ampersand conference.
When you’re done, publish the offline page at suitably imaginative URL, like, say /offline.html.
Pre-cache your offline page
Now create a JavaScript file called serviceworker.js. This is the script that the browser will look to when certain events are triggered. The first event to handle is what to do when the service worker is installed on the user’s device. When that happens, an event called install is fired. You can listen out for this event using addEventListener:
addEventListener('install', installEvent => {
// put your instructions here.
}); // end addEventListener
In this case, you want to make sure that your lovingly crafted custom offline page is put into a nice safe cache. You can use the Cache API to do this. You get to create as many caches as you like, and you can call them whatever you want. Here, I’m going to call the cache Johnny just so I can refer to it as JohnnyCache in the code:
addEventListener('install', installEvent => {
  installEvent.waitUntil(
    caches.open('Johnny')
    .then( JohnnyCache => {
      JohnnyCache.addAll([
       '/offline.html'
      ]); // end addAll
    }) // end open.then
  ); // end waitUntil
}); // end addEventListener
I’m betting that your lovely offline page is linking to a CSS file, maybe an image or two, and perhaps some JavaScript. You can cache all of those at this point:
addEventListener('install', installEvent => {
  installEvent.waitUntil(
    caches.open('Johnny')
    .then( JohnnyCache => {
      JohnnyCache.addAll([
       '/offline.html',
       '/path/to/stylesheet.css',
       '/path/to/javascript.js',
           '/path/to/image.jpg'
      ]); // end addAll
    }) // end open.then
  ); // end waitUntil
}); // end addEventListener
Make sure that the URLs are correct. If just one of the URLs in the list fails to resolve, none of the items in the list will be cached.
Intercept requests
The next event you want to listen for is the fetch event. This is probably the most powerful—and, let’s be honest, the creepiest—feature of a service worker. Once it has been installed, the service worker lurks on the user’s device, waiting for any requests made to your site. Every time the user requests a web page from your site, a fetch event will fire. Every time that page requests a style sheet or an image, a fetch event will fire. You can provide instructions for what should happen each time:
addEventListener('fetch', fetchEvent => {
// What happens next is up to you!
}); // end addEventListener
Let’s write a fairly conservative script with the following logic:

Whenever a file is requested,
First, try to fetch it from the network,
But if that doesn’t work, try to find it in the cache,
But if that doesn’t work, and it’s a request for a web page, show the custom offline page instead.

Here’s how that translates into JavaScript:
// Whenever a file is requested
addEventListener('fetch', fetchEvent => {
  const request = fetchEvent.request;
  fetchEvent.respondWith(
    // First, try to fetch it from the network
    fetch(request)
    .then( responseFromFetch => {
      return responseFromFetch;
    }) // end fetch.then
    // But if that doesn't work
    .catch( fetchError => {
      // try to find it in the cache
      caches.match(request)
      .then( responseFromCache => {
        if (responseFromCache) {
         return responseFromCache;
       // But if that doesn't work
       } else {
         // and it's a request for a web page
         if (request.headers.get('Accept').includes('text/html')) {
           // show the custom offline page instead
           return caches.match('/offline.html');
         } // end if
       } // end if/else
     }) // end match.then
   }) // end fetch.catch
  ); // end respondWith
}); // end addEventListener
I am fully aware that I may have done some owl-drawing there. If you need a more detailed breakdown of what’s happening at each point in the code, I’ve written a whole book for you. It’s the perfect present for Murphymas.
Hook up your service worker script
You can publish your service worker script at /serviceworker.js but you still need to tell the browser where to look for it. You can do that using JavaScript. Put this in an existing JavaScript file that you’re calling in to every page on your site, or add this in a script element at the end of every page’s HTML:
if (navigator.serviceWorker) {
  navigator.serviceWorker.register('/serviceworker.js');
}
That tells the browser to start installing the service worker, but not without first checking that the browser understands what a service worker is. When it comes to JavaScript, feature detection is your friend.
You might already have some JavaScript files in a folder like /assets/js/ and you might be tempted to put your service worker script in there too. Don’t do that. If you do, the service worker will only be able to handle requests made to for files within /assets/js/. By putting the service worker script in the root directory, you’re making sure that every request can be intercepted.
Go further!
Nicely done! You’ve made sure that if—no, when—a visitor can’t reach your website, they’ll get your hand-tailored offline page. You have temporarily defeated the forces of chaos! You have briefly fought the tide of entropy! You have made a small but ultimately futile gesture against the inevitable heat-death of the universe!
This is just the beginning. You can do more with service workers.
What if, every time you fetched a page from the network, you stored a copy of that page in a cache? Then if that person tries to reach that page later, but they’re offline, you could show them the cached version.
Or, what if instead of reaching out the network first, you checked to see if a file is in the cache first? You could serve up that cached version—which would be blazingly fast—and still fetch a fresh version from the network in the background to pop in the cache for next time. That might be a good strategy for images.
So many options! The hard part isn’t writing the code, it’s figuring out the steps you want to take. Once you’ve got those steps written out, then it’s a matter of translating them into JavaScript.
Inevitably there will be some obstacles along the way—usually it’s a misplaced curly brace or a missing parenthesis. Don’t be too hard on yourself if your code doesn’t work at first. That’s just Murphy’s Law in action.",2018,Jeremy Keith,jeremykeith,2018-12-04T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2018/mistletoe-offline/,code
156,Mobile 2.0,"Thinking 2.0

As web geeks, we have a thick skin towards jargon. We all know that “Web 2.0” has been done to death. At Blue Flavor we even have a jargon bucket to penalize those who utter such painfully overused jargon with a cash deposit. But Web 2.0 is a term that has lodged itself into the conscience of the masses. This is actually a good thing.

The 2.0 suffix was able to succinctly summarize all that was wrong with the Web during the dot-com era as well as the next evolution of an evolving media. While the core technologies actually stayed basically the same, the principles, concepts, interactions and contexts were radically different.

With that in mind, this Christmas I want to introduce to you the concept of Mobile 2.0. While not exactly a new concept in the mobile community, it is relatively unknown in the web community. And since the foundation of Mobile 2.0 is the web, I figured it was about time for you to get to know each other.

It’s the Carriers’ world. We just live in it.

Before getting into Mobile 2.0, I thought first I should introduce you to its older brother. You know the kind, the kid with emotional problems that likes to beat up on you and your friends for absolutely no reason. That is the mobile of today.

The mobile ecosystem is a very complicated space often and incorrectly compared to the Web. If the Web was a freewheeling hippie — believing in freedom of information and the unity of man through communities — then Mobile is the cutthroat capitalist — out to pillage and plunder for the sake of the almighty dollar. Where the Web is relatively easy to publish to and ultimately make a buck, Mobile is wrought with layers of complexity, politics and obstacles. 

I can think of no better way to summarize these challenges than the testimony of Jason Devitt to the United States Congress in what is now being referred to as the “iPhone Hearing.” Jason is the co-founder and CEO of SkyDeck a new wireless startup and former CEO of Vindigo an early pioneer in mobile content.



As Jason points out, the mobile ecosystem is a closed door environment controlled by the carriers, forcing the independent publisher to compete or succumb to the will of corporate behemoths.

But that is all about to change.

Introducing Mobile 2.0

Mobile 2.0 is term used by the mobile community to describe the current revolution happening in mobile. It describes the convergence of mobile and web services, adding portability, ubiquitous connectivity and location-aware services to add physical context to information found on the Web.

It’s an important term that looks toward the future. Allowing us to imagine the possibilities that mobile technology has long promised but has yet to deliver. It imagines a world where developers can publish mobile content without the current constraints of the mobile ecosystem.

Like the transition from Web 1.0 to 2.0, it signifies the shift away from corporate or brand-centered experiences to user-centered experiences. A focus on richer interactions, driven by user goals. Moving away from proprietary technologies to more open and standard ones, more akin to the Web. And most importantly (from our perspective as web geeks) a shift away from kludgy one-off mobile applications toward using the Web as a platform for content and services.

This means the world of the Web and the world of Mobile are coming together faster than you can say ARPU (Average Revenue Per User, a staple mobile term to you webbies). And this couldn’t come at a better time. The importance of understanding and addressing user context is quickly becoming a crucial consideration to every interactive experience as the number of ways we access information on the Web increases.

Mobile enables the power of the Web, the collective information of millions of people, inherit payment channels and access to just about every other mass media to literally be overlaid on top of the physical world, in context to the person viewing it. 

Anyone who can’t imagine how the influence of mobile technology can’t transform how we perform even the simplest of daily tasks needs to get away from their desktop and see the new evolution of information.

The Instigators

But what will make Mobile 2.0 move from idillic concept to a hardened market reality in 2008 will be four key technologies. Its my guess that you know each them already.

1. Opera

Opera is like the little train that could. They have been a driving force on moving the Web as we know it on to mobile handsets. Opera technology has proven itself to be highly adaptable, finding itself preloaded on over 40 million handsets, available on televisions sets through Nintendo Wii or via the Nintendo DS.

2. WebKit

Many were surprised when Apple chose to use KHTML instead of Gecko (the guts of Firefox) to power their Safari rendering engine. But WebKit has quickly evolved to be a powerful and flexible browser in the mobile context. WebKit has been in Nokia smartphones for a few years now, is the technology behind Mobile Safari in the iPhone and the iPod Touch and is the default web technology in Google’s open mobile platform effort, Android.

3. The iPhone

The iPhone has finally brought the concepts and principles of Mobile 2.0 into the forefront of consumers minds and therefore developers’ minds as well. Over 500 web applications have been written specifically for the iPhone since its launch. It’s completely unheard of to see so many applications built for the mobile context in such a short period of time.

4. CSS & Javascript

Web 2.0 could not exist without the rich interactions offered by CSS and Javascript, and Mobile 2.0 is no different. CSS and Javascript support across multiple phones historically has been, well… to put it positively… utter crap.

Javascript finally allows developers to create interesting interactions that support user goals and the mobile context. Specially, AJAX allows us to finally shed the days of bloated Java applications and focus on portable and flexible web applications. While CSS — namely CSS3 — allows us to create designs that are as beautiful as they are economical with bandwidth and load times.

With Leaflets, a collection of iPhone optimized web apps we created, we heavily relied on CSS3 to cache and reuse design elements over and over, minimizing download times while providing an elegant and user-centered design.



In Conclusion

It is the combination of all these instigators that is significantly decreasing the bar to mobile publishing. The market as Jason Devitt describes it, will begin to fade into the background. And maybe the world of mobile will finally start looking more like the Web that we all know and love.

So after the merriment and celebration of the holiday is over and you look toward the new year to refresh and renew, I hope that you take a seriously consider the mobile medium. 

By this time next year, it is predicted that one-third of humanity will be using mobile devices to access the Web.",2007,Brian Fling,brianfling,2007-12-21T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2007/mobile-2-0/,business
90,Monkey Business,"“Too expensive.” “Over-priced.” “A bit rich.”

They all mean the same thing.

When you say that something’s too expensive, you’re doing much more than commenting on a price. You’re questioning the explicit or implicit value of a product or a service. You’re asking, “Will I get out of it what you want me to pay for it?” You’re questioning the competency, judgement and possibly even integrity of the individual or company that gave you that price, even though you don’t realise it. You might not be saying it explicitly, but what you’re implying is, “Have you made a mistake?”, “Am I getting the best deal?”, “Are you being honest with me?”, “Could I get this cheaper?”

Finally, you’re being dishonest, because deep down you know all too well that there’s no such thing as too expensive. 

Why? 

It doesn’t matter what you’re questioning the price of. It could be a product, a service or the cost of an hour, day or week of someone’s time. Whatever you’re buying, too expensive is always an excuse. Saying it shifts acceptability of a price back to the person who gave it. What you should say, but are too afraid to admit, is:


	“It’s more money than I wanted to pay.”
	“It’s more than I estimated it would cost.”
	“It’s more than I can afford.”


Everyone who’s given a price for a product or service will have been told at some point that it’s too expensive. It’s never comfortable to hear that. Thoughts come thick and fast: “What do I do?” “How do I react?” “Do I really want the business?” “Am I prepared to negotiate?” “How much am I willing to compromise?”

It’s easy to be defensive when someone questions a price, but before you react, stay calm and remember that if someone says what you’re offering is too expensive, they’re saying more about themselves and their situation than they are about your price. Learn to read that situation and how to follow up with the right questions.

Imagine you’ve quoted someone for a week of your time. “That’s too expensive,” they respond. How should you handle that? Think about what they might otherwise be saying.



“It’s more money than I want to pay” may mean that they don’t understand the value of your service. How could you respond?

Start by asking what similar projects they’ve worked on and the type of people they worked with. Find out what they paid and what they got for their money, because it’s possible what you offer is different from what they had before. Ask if they saw a return on that previous investment. Maybe their problem isn’t with your headline price, but the value they think they’ll receive. Put the emphasis on value and shift the conversation to what they’ll gain, rather than what they’ll spend.

It’s also possible they can’t distinguish your service from those of your competitors, so now would be a great time to explain the differences. Do you work faster? Explain how that could help them launch faster, get customers faster, make money faster. Do you include more? Emphasise that, and how unique the experience of working with you will be.



“It’s more than I estimated it would cost” could mean that your customer hasn’t done their research properly. You’d never suggest that to them, of course, but you should ask how they’ve arrived at their estimate. Did they base it on work they’ve purchased previously? How long ago was that? Does it come from comparable work or from a different sector?

Help your customer by explaining how you arrived at your estimate. Break down each element and while you’re doing that, emphasise the parts of your process that you know will appeal to them. If you know that they’ve had difficulty with something in the past, explain how your approach will benefit them. People almost always value a positive experience more than the money they’ll save.



“It’s more than I can afford” could mean they can’t afford what you offer at all, but it could also mean they can’t afford it right now or all at once. So ask if they could afford what you’re asking if they spread payment over a longer period? Ask, “Would that mean you’ll give me the business?”

It’s possible they’re asking for too much for what they can afford to pay. Will they compromise? Can you reach an agreement on something less? Ask, “If we can agree what’s in and what’s out, will you give me the business?”

What can they afford? When you know, you’re in a good position to decide if the deal makes good business sense, for both of you. Ask, “If I can match that price, will you give me the business?”

There’s no such thing as “a bit rich”, only ways for you to get to know your customer better. There’s no such thing as “over-priced”, only opportunities for you to explain yourself better. You should relish those opportunities. There’s really also no such thing as “too expensive”, just ways to set the tone for your relationship and help you develop that relationship to a point where money will be less of a deciding factor.

Unfinished Business

Join me and my co-host Anna Debenham next year for Unfinished Business, a new discussion show about the business end of working in web, design and creative industries.",2012,Andy Clarke,andyclarke,2012-12-23T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2012/monkey-business/,business
100,Moo'y Christmas,"A note from the editors:  Moo has changed their API since this article was written.
                
                
                      
                As the web matures, it is less and less just about the virtual world. It is becoming entangled with our world and it is harder to tell what is virtual and what is real. There are several companies who are blurring this line and make the virtual just an extension of the physical. Moo is one such company. 

Moo offers simple print on demand services. You can print business cards, moo mini cards, stickers, postcards and more. They give you the ability to upload your images, customize them, then have them sent to your door. Many companies allow this sort of digital to physical interaction, but Moo has taken it one step further and has built an API. 

Printable stocking stuffers 

The Moo API consists of a simple XML file that is sent to their servers. It describes all the information needed to dynamically assemble and print your object. This is very helpful, not just for when you want to print your own stickers, but when you want to offer them to your customers, friends, organization or community with no hassle. Moo handles the check-out and shipping, all you need to do is what you do best, create! 

Now using an API sounds complicated, but it is actually very easy. I am going to walk you through the options so you can easily be printing in no time. 

Before you can begin sending data to the Moo API, you need to register and get an API key. This is important, because it allows Moo to track usage and to credit you. To register, visit http://www.moo.com/api/ and click “Request an API key”. 

In the following examples, I will use {YOUR API KEY HERE} as a place holder, replace that with your API key and everything will work fine. 

First thing you need to do is to create an XML file to describe the check-out basket. Open any text-editor and start with some XML basics. Don’t worry, this is pretty simple and Moo gives you a few tools to check your XML for errors before you order. 

<?xml version=""1.0"" encoding=""UTF-8""?> 
<moo xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation=""http://www.moo.com/xsd/api_0.7.xsd"" xmlns:xsi=""http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance""> 
	 <request>
		 <version>0.7</version>
		 <api_key>{YOUR API KEY HERE}</api_key>
		 <call>build</call>
		 <return_to>http://www.example.com/return.html</return_to>
		 <fail_to>http://www.example.com/fail.html</fail_to>
	 </request>
	 <payload>
	 ...
	 </payload>
</moo>

Much like HTML’s <head> and <body>, Moo has created <request> and <payload> elements all wrapped in a <moo> element. 

The <request> element contains a few pieces of information that is the same across all the API calls. The <version> element describes which version of the API is being used. This is more important for Moo than for you, so just stick with “0.7” for now. 

The <api_key> allows Moo to track sales, referrers and credit your account. 

The <call> element can only take “build” so that is pretty straight forward. The <return_to> and <fail_to> elements are URLs. These are optional and are the URLs the customer is redirected to if there is an error, or when the check out process is complete. This allows for some basic branding and a custom “thank you” page which is under your control. That’s it for the <request> element, pretty easy so far! 

Next up is the <payload> element. What goes inside here describes what is to be printed. There are two possible elements, we can put <chooser> or we can put <products> directly inside <payload>. They work in a similar ways, but they drop the customer into different parts of the Moo checkout process. 

If you specify <products> then you send the customer straight to the Moo payment process. If you specify <chooser> then you send the customer one-step earlier where they are allowed to pick and choose some images, remove the ones they don’t like, adjust the crop, etc. The example here will use <chooser> but with a little bit of homework you can easily adjust to <products> if you desire. 

... 
<chooser> 
	 <product_type>sticker</product_type> 
	 <images> 
		 <url>http://example.com/images/christmas1.jpg</url> 
	 </images> 
</chooser> 
...

Inside the <chooser> element, we can see there are two basic piece of information. The type of product we want to print, and the images that are to be printed. The <product_type> element can take one of five options and is required! The possibilities are: minicard, notecard, sticker, postcard or greetingcard. We’ll now look at two of these more closely. 

Moo Stickers 

In the Moo sticker books you get 90 small squarish stickers in a small little booklet. 



The simplest XML you could send would be something like the following payload:

...
<payload>
	<chooser>
		<product_type>sticker</product_type>
		<images>
			<url>http://example.com/image1.jpg</url>
		</images>
		<images>
			<url>http://example.com/image2.jpg</url>
		</images>
		<images>
			<url>http://example.com/image3.jpg</url>
		</images>
	</chooser>
</payload>
...

This creates a sticker book with only 3 unique images, but 30 copies of each image. The Sticker books always print 90 stickers in multiples of the images you uploaded. That example only has 3 <images> elements, but you can easily duplicate the XML and send up to 90. The <url> should be the full path to your image and the image needs to be a minimum of 300 pixels by 300 pixels.

You can add more XML to describe cropping, but the simplest option is to either, let your customers choose or to pre-crop all your images square so there are no issues.

The full XML you would post to the Moo API to print sticker books would look like this:

<?xml version=""1.0"" encoding=""UTF-8""?> 
<moo xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation=""http://www.moo.com/xsd/api_0.7.xsd"" xmlns:xsi=""http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance""> 
	<request>
		<version>0.7</version>
		<api_key>{YOUR API KEY HERE}</api_key>
		<call>build</call>
		<return_to>http://www.example.com/return.html</return_to>
		<fail_to>http://www.example.com/fail.html</fail_to>
	</request>
	<payload>
		<chooser>
			<product_type>sticker</product_type>
			<images>
				<url>http://example.com/image1.jpg</url>
			</images>
			<images>
				<url>http://example.com/image2.jpg</url>
			</images>
			<images>
				<url>http://example.com/image3.jpg</url>
			</images>
		</chooser>
	</payload> 
</moo>

Mini-cards 

The mini-cards are the small cute business cards in 14×35 dimensions and come in packs of 100. 



Since the mini-cards are print on demand, this allows you to have 100 unique images on the back of the cards.

Just like the stickers example, we need the same XML setup. The <moo> element and <request> elements will be the same as before. The part you will focus on is the <payload> section. 

Since you are sending along specific information, we can’t use the <chooser> option any more. Switch this to <products> which has a child of <product>, which in turn has a <product_type> and <designs>. This might seem like a lot of work, but once you have it set up you won’t need to change it.

...
<payload>
	<products>
		<product>
			<product_type>minicard</product_type>
			<designs>
				...
			</designs>
		</product>
	</products>
</payload>
...

So now that we have the basic framework, we can talk about the information specific to minicards. Inside the <designs> element, you will have one <design> for each card. Much like before, this contains a way to describe the image. Note that this time the element is called <image>, not images plural. 

Inside the <image> element you have a <url> which points to where the image lives and a <type>. The <type> should just be set to ‘variable’. You can pass crop information here instead, but we’re going to keep it simple for this tutorial. If you are interested in how that works, you should refer to the official API documentation.

...
<design>
	<image>
		<url>http://example.com/image1.jpg</url>
		<type>variable</type>
	</image>
</design>
...

So far, we have managed to build a pack of 100 Moo mini-cards with the same image on the front. If you wanted 100 different images, you just need to replicate this snippit, 99 more times.

That describes the front design, but the flip-side of your mini-cards can contain 6 lines of text, which is customizable in a variety of colors, fonts and styles.

The API allows you to create different text on the back of each mini-card, something the web interface doesn’t implement. To describe the text on the mini-card we need to add a <text_collection> element inside the <design> element. If you skip this element, the back of your mini-card will just be blank, but that’s not very festive!

Inside the <text_collection> element, we need to describe the type of text we want to format, so we add a <minicard> element, which in turn contains all the lines of text. Each of Moo’s printed products take different numbers of lines of text, so if you are not planning on making mini-cards, be sure to consult the documentation.

For mini-cards, we can have 6 distinct lines, each with their own style and layout. Each line is represented by an element <text_line> which has several optional children. The <id> tells which line of the 6 to print the text one. The <string> is the text you want to print and it must be shorter than 38 characters. The <bold> element is false by default, but if you want your text bolded, then add this and set it to true. 

The <align> element is also optional. By default it is set to align left. You can also set this to right or center if you desirer. The <font> element takes one of 3 types, modern, traditional or typewriter. The default is modern. Finally, you can set the <colour>, yes that’s color with a ‘u’, Moo is a British company, so they get to make the rules. When you start a print on demand company, you can spell it however you want. The <colour> element takes a 6 character hex value with a leading #.

<design>
	...
	<text_collection>
		<minicard>
			<text_line>
				<id>(1-6)</id>
				<string>String, I must be less than 38 chars!</string>
				<bold>true</bold>
				<align>left</align>
				<font>modern</font>
				<colour>#ff0000</colour> 
			</text_line>
		</minicard>
	</text_collection>
</design>

If you combine all of this into a mini-card request you’d get this example:

<?xml version=""1.0"" encoding=""UTF-8""?> 
<moo xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation=""http://www.moo.com/xsd/api_0.7.xsd"" xmlns:xsi=""http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance""> 
	<request>
		<version>0.7</version>
		<api_key>{YOUR API KEY HERE}</api_key>
		<call>build</call>
		<return_to>http://www.example.com/return.html</return_to>
		<fail_to>http://www.example.com/fail.html</fail_to>
	</request>
	<payload>
		<products>
			<product>
				<product_type>minicard</product_type>
				<designs>
					<design>
						<image>
							<url>http://example.com/image1.jpg</url>
							<type>variable</type>
						</image>
						<text_collection>
							<minicard>
								<text_line>
								<id>1</id>
								<string>String, I must be less than 38 chars!</string>
								<bold>true</bold>
								<align>left</align>
								<font>modern</font>
								<colour>#ff0000</colour> 
								</text_line>
							</minicard>
						</text_collection>
					</design>
				</designs>
			</product>
		</products>
	</payload> 
</moo>

Now you know how to construct the XML that describes what to print. Next, you need to know how to send it to Moo to make it happen!

Posting to the API

So your XML is file ready to go. First thing we need to do is check it to make sure it’s valid. Moo has created a simple validator where you paste in your XML, and it alerts you to problems.

When you have a fully valid XML file, you’ll want to send that to the Moo API. There are a few ways to do this, but the simplest is with an HTML form. 

This is the sample code for an HTML form with a big “Buy My Stickers” button. Once you know that it is working, you can use all your existing HTML knowledge to style it up any way you like.

<form method=""POST"" action=""http://www.moo.com/api/api.php"">
	<input type=""hidden"" name=""xml"" value=""<?xml version=""1.0"" encoding=""UTF-8""?> <moo xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation=""http://www.moo.com/xsd/api_0.7.xsd"" xmlns:xsi=""http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance""> <request>....</request> <payload>...</payload> </moo> ""> 
	<input type=""submit"" name=""submit"" value=""Buy My Stickers""/>
</form>

This is just a basic <form> element that submits to the Moo API, http://www.moo.com/api/api.php, when someone clicks the button. There is a hidden input called “xml” which contains the value the XML file we created previously.

For those of you who need to “view source” to fully understand what’s happening can see a working version and peek under the hood.

Using the API has advantages over uploading the images directly yourself. The images and text that you send via the API can be dynamic. Some companies, like Dopplr, have taken user profiles and dynamic data that changes every minute to generate customer stickers of places that you’ve travelled to or mini-cards with a world map of all the cities you have visited. Every single customer has different travel plans and therefore different sets of stickers and mini-card maps. The API allows for the utmost current information to be printed, on demand, in real-time.

Go forth and Moo’ltiply

See, making an API call wasn’t that hard was it? You are now 90% of the way to creating anything with the Moo API. With a bit of reading, you can learn that extra 10% and print any Moo product. Be on the lookout in 2009 for the official release of the 1.0 API with improvements and some extras that were not available when this article was written.

This article is released under the creative-commons attribution share-a-like license. That means you are free to re-distribute it, mash it up, translate it and otherwise re-using it ways the author never considered, in return he only asks you mention his name.


This work by Brian Suda is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported License.",2008,Brian Suda,briansuda,2008-12-19T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2008/mooy-christmas/,code
240,My CSS Wish List,"I love Christmas. I love walking around the streets of London, looking at the beautifully decorated windows, seeing the shiny lights that hang above Oxford Street and listening to Christmas songs.

I’m not going to lie though. Not only do I like buying presents, I love receiving them too. I remember making long lists that I would send to Father Christmas with all of the Lego sets I wanted to get. I knew I could only get one a year, but I would spend days writing the perfect list.

The years have gone by, but I still enjoy making wish lists. And I’ll tell you a little secret: my mum still asks me to send her my Christmas list every year.

This time I’ve made my CSS wish list. As before, I’d be happy with just one present.

Before I begin…

… this list includes:


	things that don’t exist in the CSS specification (if they do, please let me know in the comments – I may have missed them);
	others that are in the spec, but it’s incomplete or lacks use cases and examples (which usually means that properties haven’t been implemented by even the most recent browsers).


Like with any other wish list, the further down I go, the more unrealistic my expectations – but that doesn’t mean I can’t wish. Some of the things we wouldn’t have thought possible a few years ago have been implemented and our wishes fulfilled (think multiple backgrounds, gradients and transformations, for example).

The list

Cross-browser implementation of font-size-adjust

When one of the fall-back fonts from your font stack is used, rather than the preferred (first) one, you can retain the aspect ratio by using this very useful property. It is incredibly helpful when the fall-back fonts are smaller or larger than the initial one, which can make layouts look less polished.

What font-size-adjust does is divide the original font-size of the fall-back fonts by the font-size-adjust value. This preserves the x-height of the preferred font in the fall-back fonts. Here’s a simple example:

p {
    font-family: Calibri, ""Lucida Sans"", Verdana, sans-serif;
    font-size-adjust: 0.47;
}

In this case, if the user doesn’t have Calibri installed, both Lucida Sans and Verdana will keep Calibri’s aspect ratio, based on the font’s x-height. This property is a personal favourite and one I keep pointing to.

Firefox supported this property from version three. So far, it’s the only browser that does. Fontdeck provides the font-size-adjust value along with its fonts, and has a handy tool for calculating it.

More control over overflowing text

The text-overflow property lets you control text that overflows its container. The most common use for it is to show an ellipsis to indicate that there is more text than what is shown. To be able to use it, the container should have overflow set to something other than visible, and white-space: nowrap:

div {
    white-space: nowrap;
    width: 100%;
    overflow: hidden;
    text-overflow: ellipsis;
}

This, however, only works for blocks of text on a single line. In the wish list of many CSS authors (and in mine) is a way of defining text-overflow: ellipsis on a block of multiple text lines. Opera has taken the first step and added support for the -o-ellipsis-lastline property, which can be used instead of ellipsis. This property is not part of the CSS3 spec, but we could certainly make good use of it if it were…

WebKit has -webkit-line-clamp to specify how many lines to show before cutting with an ellipsis, but support is patchy at best and there is no control over where the ellipsis shows in the text. Many people have spent time wrangling JavaScript to do this for us, but the methods used are very processor intensive, and introduce a JavaScript dependency.

Indentation and hanging punctuation properties

You might notice a trend here: almost half of the items in this list relate to typography. The lack of fine-grained control over typographical detail is a general concern among designers and CSS authors. Indentation and hanging punctuation fall into this category.

The CSS3 specification introduces two new possible values for the text-indent property: each-line; and hanging. each-line would indent the first line of the block container and each line after a forced line break; hanging would invert which lines are affected by the indentation.

The proposed hanging-punctuation property would allow us to specify whether opening and closing brackets and quotes should hang outside the edge of the first and last lines. The specification is still incomplete, though, and asks for more examples and use cases.

Text alignment and hyphenation properties

Following the typographic trend of this list, I’d like to add better control over text alignment and hyphenation properties. The CSS3 module on Generated Content for Paged Media already specifies five new hyphenation-related properties (namely: hyphenate-dictionary; hyphenate-before and hyphenate-after; hyphenate-lines; and hyphenate-character), but it is still being developed and lacks examples.

In the text alignment realm, the new text-align-last property allows you to define how the last line of a block (or a line just before a forced break) is aligned, if your text is set to justify. Its value can be: start; end; left; right; center; and justify. The text-justify property should also allow you to have more control over text set to text-align: justify but, for now, only Internet Explorer supports this.

calc()

This is probably my favourite item in the list: the calc() function. This function is part of the CSS3 Values and Units module, but it has only been implemented by Firefox (4.0). To take advantage of it now you need to use the Mozilla vendor code, -moz-calc().

Imagine you have a fluid two-column layout where the sidebar column has a fixed width of 240 pixels, and the main content area fills the rest of the width available. This is how you could create that using -moz-calc():

#main {
    width: -moz-calc(100% - 240px);
}

Can you imagine how many hacks and headaches we could avoid were this function available in more browsers? Transitions and animations are really nice and lovely but, for me, it’s the ability to do the things that calc() allows you to that deserves the spotlight and to be pushed for implementation.

Selector grouping with -moz-any()

The -moz-any() selector grouping has been introduced by Mozilla but it’s not part of any CSS specification (yet?); it’s currently only available on Firefox 4.

This would be especially useful with the way HTML5 outlines documents, where we can have any number of variations of several levels of headings within numerous types of containers (think sections within articles within sections…).

Here is a quick example (copied from the Mozilla blog post about the article) of how -moz-any() works. Instead of writing:

section section h1, section article h1, section aside h1,
section nav h1, article section h1, article article h1,
article aside h1, article nav h1, aside section h1,
aside article h1, aside aside h1, aside nav h1, nav section h1,
nav article h1, nav aside h1, nav nav h1, {
    font-size: 24px;
}

You could simply write:

-moz-any(section, article, aside, nav)
-moz-any(section, article, aside, nav) h1 {
    font-size: 24px;
}

Nice, huh?

More control over styling form elements

Some are of the opinion that form elements shouldn’t be styled at all, since a user might not recognise them as such if they don’t match the operating system’s controls. I partially agree: I’d rather put the choice in the hands of designers and expect them to be capable of deciding whether their particular design hampers or improves usability.

I would say the same idea applies to font-face: while some fear designers might go crazy and litter their web pages with dozens of different fonts, most welcome the freedom to use something other than Arial or Verdana.

There will always be someone who will take this freedom too far, but it would be useful if we could, for example, style the default Opera date picker:

<input type=""date"" />



or Safari’s slider control (think star movie ratings, for example):

<input type=""range"" min=""0"" max=""5"" step=""1"" value=""3"" />



Parent selector

I don’t think there is one CSS author out there who has never come across a case where he or she wished there was a parent selector. There have been many suggestions as to how this could work, but a variation of the child selector is usually the most popular:

article < h1 {
…
}

One can dream…

Flexible box layout

The Flexible Box Layout Module sounds a bit like magic: it introduces a new box model to CSS, allowing you to distribute and order boxes inside other boxes, and determine how the available space is shared.

Two of my favourite features of this new box model are:


	the ability to redistribute boxes in a different order from the markup
	the ability to create flexible layouts, where boxes shrink (or expand) to fill the available space


Let’s take a quick look at the second case. Imagine you have a three-column layout, where the first column takes up twice as much horizontal space as the other two:

<body>
        <section id=""main"">
        </section>
        <section id=""links"">
        </section>
        <aside>
        </aside>
</body>

With the flexible box model, you could specify it like this:

body {
    display: box;
    box-orient: horizontal;
}
#main {
    box-flex: 2;
}
#links {
    box-flex: 1;
}
aside {
    box-flex: 1;
}

If you decide to add a fourth column to this layout, there is no need to recalculate units or percentages, it’s as easy as that.

Browser support for this property is still in its early stages (Firefox and WebKit need their vendor prefixes), but we should start to see it being gradually introduced as more attention is drawn to it (I’m looking at you…). You can read a more comprehensive write-up about this property on the Mozilla developer blog.

It’s easy to understand why it’s harder to start playing with this module than with things like animations or other more decorative properties, which don’t really break your layouts when users don’t see them. But it’s important that we do, even if only in very experimental projects.

Nested selectors

Anyone who has never wished they could do something like the following in CSS, cast the first stone:

article {
    h1 { font-size: 1.2em; }
    ul { margin-bottom: 1.2em; }
}

Even though it can easily turn into a specificity nightmare and promote redundancy in your style sheets (if you abuse it), it’s easy to see how nested selectors could be useful. CSS compilers such as Less or Sass let you do this already, but not everyone wants or can use these compilers in their projects.

Every wish list has an item that could easily be dropped. In my case, I would say this is one that I would ditch first – it’s the least useful, and also the one that could cause more maintenance problems. But it could be nice.

Implementation of the ::marker pseudo-element

The CSS Lists module introduces the ::marker pseudo-element, that allows you to create custom list item markers. When an element’s display property is set to list-item, this pseudo-element is created.

Using the ::marker pseudo-element you could create something like the following:

Footnote 1:  Both John Locke and his father, Anthony Cooper, are
named after 17th- and 18th-century English philosophers; the real
Anthony Cooper was educated as a boy by the real John Locke.
Footnote 2:  Parts of the plane were used as percussion instruments
and can be heard in the soundtrack.

where the footnote marker is generated by the following CSS:

li::marker {
    content: ""Footnote "" counter(notes) "":"";
    text-align: left;
    width: 12em;
}
li {
    counter-increment: notes;
}

You can read more about how to use counters in CSS in my article from last year.

Bear in mind that the CSS Lists module is still a Working Draft and is listed as “Low priority”. I did say this wish list would start to grow more unrealistic closer to the end…

Variables

The sight of the word ‘variables’ may make some web designers shy away, but when you think of them applied to things such as repeated colours in your stylesheets, it’s easy to see how having variables available in CSS could be useful.

Think of a website where the main brand colour is applied to elements like the main text, headings, section backgrounds, borders, and so on. In a particularly large website, where the colour is repeated countless times in the CSS and where it’s important to keep the colour consistent, using variables would be ideal (some big websites are already doing this by using server-side technology).

Again, Less and Sass allow you to use variables in your CSS but, again, not everyone can (or wants to) use these.

If you are using Less, you could, for instance, set the font-family value in one variable, and simply call that variable later in the code, instead of repeating the complete font stack, like so:

@fontFamily: Calibri, ""Lucida Grande"", ""Lucida Sans Unicode"", Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;
body {
    font-family: @fontFamily;
}

Other features of these CSS compilers might also be useful, like the ability to ‘call’ a property value from another selector (accessors):

header {
    background: #000000;
}
footer {
    background: header['background'];
}

or the ability to define functions (with arguments), saving you from writing large blocks of code when you need to write something like, for example, a CSS gradient:

.gradient (@start:"""", @end:"""") {
    background: -webkit-gradient(linear, left top, left bottom, from(@start), to(@end));
    background: -moz-linear-gradient(-90deg,@start,@end);
}
button {
    .gradient(#D0D0D0,#9F9F9F);
}

Standardised comments

Each CSS author has his or her own style for commenting their style sheets. While this isn’t a massive problem on smaller projects, where maybe only one person will edit the CSS, in larger scale projects, where dozens of hands touch the code, it would be nice to start seeing a more standardised way of commenting.

One attempt at creating a standard for CSS comments is CSSDOC, an adaptation of Javadoc (a documentation generator that extracts comments from Java source code into HTML). CSSDOC uses ‘DocBlocks’, a term borrowed from the phpDocumentor Project. A DocBlock is a human- and machine-readable block of data which has the following structure:

/**
 * Short description
 *
 * Long description (this can have multiple lines and contain <p> tags
 *
 * @tags (optional)
 */

CSSDOC includes a standard for documenting bug fixes and hacks, colours, versioning and copyright information, amongst other important bits of data.

I know this isn’t a CSS feature request per se; rather, it’s just me pointing you at something that is usually overlooked but that could contribute towards keeping style sheets easier to maintain and to hand over to new developers.

Final notes

I understand that if even some of these were implemented in browsers now, it would be a long time until all vendors were up to speed. But if we don’t talk about them and experiment with what’s available, then it will definitely never happen.

Why haven’t I mentioned better browser support for existing CSS3 properties? Because that would be the same as adding chocolate to your Christmas wish list – you don’t need to ask, everyone knows you want it.

The list could go on. There are dozens of other things I would love to see integrated in CSS or further developed. These are my personal favourites: some might be less useful than others, but I’ve wished for all of them at some point.

Part of the research I did while writing this article was asking some friends what they would add to their lists; other than a couple of items I already had in mine, everything else was different. I’m sure your list would be different too. So tell me, what’s on your CSS wish list?",2010,Inayaili de León Persson,inayailideleon,2010-12-03T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2010/my-css-wish-list/,code
164,My Other Christmas Present Is a Definition List,"A note from the editors:  readers should note that the HTML5 redefinition of definition lists has come to pass and is now à la mode.
                
                
                      
                Last year, I looked at how the markup for tag clouds was generally terrible. I thought this year I would look not at a method of marking up a common module, but instead just at a simple part of HTML and how it generally gets abused.

No, not tables. Definition lists. Ah, definition lists. Often used but rarely understood.

Examining the definition of definitions

To start with, let’s see what the HTML spec has to say about them.


	Definition lists vary only slightly from other types of lists in that list items consist of two parts: a term and a description.


The canonical example of a definition list is a dictionary. Words can have multiple descriptions (even the word definition has at least five). Also, many terms can share a single definition (for example, the word colour can also be spelt color, but they have the same definition).

Excellent, we can all grasp that. But it very quickly starts to fall apart. Even in the HTML specification the definition list is mis-used.


	Another application of DL, for example, is for marking up dialogues, with each DT naming a speaker, and each DD containing his or her words.


Wrong. Completely and utterly wrong. This is the biggest flaw in the HTML spec, along with dropping support for the start attribute on ordered lists. “Why?”, you may ask. Let me give you an example from Romeo and Juliet, act 2, scene 2.

<dt>Juliet</dt>
	<dd>Romeo!</dd>
<dt>Romeo</dt>
	<dd>My niesse?</dd>
<dt>Juliet</dt>
	<dd>At what o'clock tomorrow shall I send to thee?</dd>
<dt>Romeo</dt>
	<dd>At the hour of nine.</dd>

Now, the problem here is that a given definition can have multiple descriptions (the DD). Really the dialog “descriptions” should be rolled up under the terms, like so:

<dt>Juliet</dt>
	<dd>Romeo!</dd>
	<dd>At what o'clock tomorrow shall I send to thee?</dd>
<dt>Romeo</dt>
	<dd>My niesse?</dd>
	<dd>At the hour of nine.</dd>

Suddenly the play won’t make anywhere near as much sense. (If it’s anything, the correct markup for a play is an ordered list of CITE and BLOCKQUOTE elements.)

This is the first part of the problem. That simple example has turned definition lists in everyone’s mind from pure definitions to more along the lines of a list with pre-configured heading(s) and text(s).

Screen reader, enter stage left.

In many screen readers, a simple definition list would be read out as “definition term equals definition description”. So in our play excerpt, Juliet equals Romeo! That’s not right, either. But this also leads a lot of people astray with definition lists to believing that they are useful for key/value pairs.

Behaviour and convention

The WHAT-WG have noticed the common mis-use of the DL, and have codified it into the new spec. In the HTML5 draft, a definition list is no longer a definition list.


	The dl element introduces an unordered association list consisting of zero or more name-value groups (a description list). Each group must consist of one or more names (dt elements) followed by one or more values (dd elements).


They also note that the “dl element is inappropriate for marking up dialogue, since dialogue is ordered”. So for that example they have created a DIALOG (sic) element.

Strange, then, that they keep DL as-is but instead refer to it an “association list”. They have not created a new AL element, and kept DL for the original purpose. They have chosen not to correct the usage or to create a new opportunity for increased specificity in our HTML, but to “pave the cowpath” of convention.

How to use a definition list

Given that everyone else is using a DL incorrectly, should we? Well, if they all jumped off a bridge, would you too? No, of course you wouldn’t. We don’t have HTML5 yet, so we’re stuck with the existing semantics of HTML4 and XHTML1. Which means that:


	Listing dialogue is not defining anything.
	Listing the attributes of a piece of hardware (resolution = 1600×1200) is illustrating sample values, not defining anything (however, stating what ‘resolution’ actually means in this context would be a definition).
	Listing the cast and crew of a given movie is not defining the people involved in making movies. (Stuart Gordon may have been the director of Space Truckers, but that by no means makes him the true definition of a director.)
	A menu of navigation items is simply a nested ordered or unordered list of links, not a definition list.
	Applying styling handles to form labels and elements is not a good use for a definition list.


And so on.

Living by the specification, a definition list should be used for term definitions – glossaries, lexicons and dictionaries – only.

Anything else is a crime against markup.",2007,Mark Norman Francis,marknormanfrancis,2007-12-05T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2007/my-other-christmas-present-is-a-definition-list/,code
36,Naming Things,"There are only two hard things in computer science: cache invalidation and naming things.
Phil Karlton


Being a professional web developer means taking responsibility for the code you write and ensuring it is comprehensible to others. Having a documented code style is one means of achieving this, although the size and type of project you’re working on will dictate the conventions used and how rigorously they are enforced.

Working in-house may mean working with multiple developers, perhaps in distributed teams, who are all committing changes – possibly to a significant codebase – at the same time. Left unchecked, this codebase can become unwieldy. Coding conventions ensure everyone can contribute, and help build a product that works as a coherent whole.

Even on smaller projects, perhaps working within an agency or by yourself, at some point the resulting product will need to be handed over to a third party. It’s sensible, therefore, to ensure that your code can be understood by those who’ll eventually take ownership of it.

Put simply, code is read more often than it is written or changed. A consistent and predictable naming scheme can make code easier for other developers to understand, improve and maintain, presumably leaving them free to worry about cache invalidation.

Let’s talk about semantics

Names not only allow us to identify objects, but they can also help us describe the objects being identified.

Semantics (the meaning or interpretation of words) is the cornerstone of standards-based web development. Using appropriate HTML elements allows us to create documents and applications that have implicit structural meaning. Thanks to HTML5, the vocabulary we can choose from has grown even larger.

HTML elements provide one level of meaning: a widely accepted description of a document’s underlying structure. It’s only with the mutual agreement of browser vendors and developers that <p> indicates a paragraph.

Yet (with the exception of widely accepted microdata and microformat schemas) only HTML elements convey any meaning that can be parsed consistently by user agents. While using semantic values for class names is a noble endeavour, they provide no additional information to the visitor of a website; take them away and a document will have exactly the same semantic value.

I didn’t always think this was the case, but the real world has a habit of changing your opinion. Much of my thinking around semantics has been informed by the writing of my peers. In “About HTML semantics and front-end architecture”, Nicholas Gallagher wrote:


	The important thing for class name semantics in non-trivial applications is that they be driven by pragmatism and best serve their primary purpose – providing meaningful, flexible, and reusable presentational/behavioural hooks for developers to use.


These thoughts are echoed by Harry Roberts in his CSS Guidelines:


	The debate surrounding semantics has raged for years, but it is important that we adopt a more pragmatic, sensible approach to naming things in order to work more efficiently and effectively. Instead of focussing on ‘semantics’, look more closely at sensibility and longevity – choose names based on ease of maintenance, not for their perceived meaning.


Naming methodologies

Front-end development has undergone a revolution in recent years. As the projects we’ve worked on have grown larger and more important, our development practices have matured. The pros and cons of object-orientated approaches to CSS can be endlessly debated, yet their introduction has highlighted the usefulness of having documented naming schemes.

Jonathan Snook’s SMACSS (Scalable and Modular Architecture for CSS) collects style rules into five categories: base, layout, module, state and theme. This grouping makes it clear what each rule does, and is aided by a naming convention:


	By separating rules into the five categories, naming convention is beneficial for immediately understanding which category a particular style belongs to and its role within the overall scope of the page. On large projects, it is more likely to have styles broken up across multiple files. In these cases, naming convention also makes it easier to find which file a style belongs to.

	I like to use a prefix to differentiate between layout, state and module rules. For layout, I use l- but layout- would work just as well. Using prefixes like grid- also provide enough clarity to separate layout styles from other styles. For state rules, I like is- as in is-hidden or is-collapsed. This helps describe things in a very readable way.


SMACSS is more a set of suggestions than a rigid framework, so its ideas can be incorporated into your own practice. Nicholas Gallagher’s SUIT CSS project is far more strict in its naming conventions:


	SUIT CSS relies on structured class names and meaningful hyphens (i.e., not using hyphens merely to separate words). This helps to work around the current limits of applying CSS to the DOM (i.e., the lack of style encapsulation), and to better communicate the relationships between classes.


Over the last year, I’ve favoured a BEM-inspired approach to CSS. BEM stands for block, element, modifier, which describes the three types of rule that contribute to the style of a single component. This means that, given the following markup:

<ul class=“sleigh”>
    <li class=“sleigh__reindeer sleigh__reindeer––famous”>Rudolph</li>
    <li class=“sleigh__reindeer”>Dasher</li>
    <li class=“sleigh__reindeer”>Dancer</li>
    <li class=“sleigh__reindeer”>Prancer</li>
    <li class=“sleigh__reindeer”>Vixen</li>
    <li class=“sleigh__reindeer”>Comet</li>
    <li class=“sleigh__reindeer”>Cupid</li>
    <li class=“sleigh__reindeer”>Dunder</li>
    <li class=“sleigh__reindeer”>Blixem</li>
</ul>

I know that:


	.sleigh is a containing block or component.
	.sleigh__reindeer is used only as a descendent element of .sleigh.
	.sleigh__reindeer––famous is used only as a modifier of .sleigh__reindeer.


With this naming scheme in place, I know which styles relate to a particular component, and which are shared. Beyond reducing specificity-related head-scratching, this approach has given me a framework within which I can consistently label items, and has sped up my workflow considerably.

Each of these methodologies shows that any robust CSS naming convention will have clear rules around case (lowercase, camelCase, PascalCase) and the use of special (allowed) characters like hyphens and underscores.

What makes for a good name?

Regardless of higher-level conventions, there’s no getting away from the fact that, at some point, we’re still going to have to name things. Recognising that classes should be named with other developers in mind, what makes for a good name?

Understandable

The most important aspect is for a name to be understandable. Words used in your project may come from a variety of sources: some may be widely understood, and others only be recognised by people working within a particular environment.


	Culture
Most words you’ll choose will have common currency outside the world of web development, although they may have a particular interpretation among developers (think menu, list, input). However, words may have a narrower cultural significance; for example, in Germany and other German-speaking countries, impressum is the term used for legally mandated statements of ownership.
	Industry
Industries often use specific terms to describe common business practices and concepts. Publishing has a number of these (headline, standfirst, masthead, colophon…) all have well understood meanings – and not all of them are relevant to online usage.
	Organisation
Companies may have internal names (or nicknames) for their products and services. The Guardian is rife with such names: bisons (and buffalos), pixies (and super-pixies), bentos (and mini-bentos)… all of which mean something very different outside the organisation. Although such names can be useful inside smaller teams, in larger organisations they can become a barrier to entry, a sort of secret code used among employees who have been around long enough to know what they mean.
	Product
Your team will undoubtedly have created names for specific features or interface components used in your product. For example, at Clearleft we coined the term gravigation for a navigation bar that was pinned to the bottom of the viewport. Elements of a visual design language may have names, too. Transport for London’s bar and circle logo is known internally as the roundel, while Nike’s logo is called the swoosh. Branding agencies often christen colours within a brand palette, too, either to evoke aspects of the identity or to indicate intended usage.


Once you recognise the origin of the words you use, you’ll be better able to judge their appropriateness. Using Latin words for class names may satisfy a need to use semantic-sounding terms but, unless you work in a company whose employees have a basic grasp of Latin, a degree of translation will be required. Military ranks might be a clever way of declaring sizes without implying actual values, but I’d venture most people outside the armed forces don’t know how they’re ordered.

Obvious

Quite often, the first name that comes into your head will be the best option. Names that obliquely reference the function of a class (e.g. receptacle instead of container, kevlar instead of no-bullets) only serve to add an additional layer of abstraction. Don’t overthink it!

One way of knowing if the names you use are well understood is to look at what similar concepts are called in existing vocabularies. schema.org, Dublin Core and the BBC’s ontologies are all useful sources for object names.

Functional

While we’ve learned to avoid using presentational classes, there remains a tension between naming things based on their content, and naming them for their intended presentation or behaviour (which may change at different breakpoints). Rather than think about a component’s appearance or behaviour, instead look to its function, its purpose. To clarify, ask what a component’s function is, and not how the component functions.

For example, the Guardian’s internal content system uses the following names for different types of image placement: supporting, showcase and thumbnail, with inline being the default. These options make no promise of the resulting position on a webpage (or smartphone app, or television screen…), but do suggest intended use, and therefore imply the likely presentation.

Consistent

Being consistent in your approach to names will allow for easier naming of successive components, and extending the vocabulary when necessary. For example, a predictably named hierarchy might use names like primary and secondary. Should another level need to be added, tertiary is clearly be preferred over third.

Appropriate

Your project will feature a mix of style rules. Some will perform utility functions (clearing floats, removing bullets from a list, reseting margins), while others will perform specific functions used only once or twice in a project. Names should reflect this. For commonly used classes, be generic; for unique components be more specific.

It’s also worth remembering that you can use multiple classes on an element, so combining both generic and specific can give you a powerful modular design system:


	Generic: list
	Specific: naughty-children
	Combined: naughty-children list


If following the BEM methodology, you might use the following classes:


	Generic: list
	Specific: list––nice-children
	Combined: list list––nice-children


Extensible

Good naming schemes can be extended. One way of achieving this is to use namespaces, which are basically a way of grouping related names under a higher-level term.

Microformats are a good example of a well-designed naming scheme, with many of its vocabularies taking property names from existing and related specifications (e.g. hCard is a 1:1 representation of vCard). Microformats 2 goes one step further by grouping properties under several namespaces:


	h-* for root class names (e.g. h-card)
	p-* for simple (text) properties (e.g. p-name)
	u-* for URL properties (e.g. u-photo)
	dt-* for date/time properties (e.g. dt-bday)
	e-* for embedded markup properties (e.g. e-note)


The inclusion of namespaces is a massive improvement over the earlier specification, but the downside is that microformats now occupy five separate namespaces. This might be problematic if you are using u-* for your utility classes. While nothing will break, your naming system won’t be as robust, so plan accordingly.

(Note: Microformats perform a very specific function, separate from any presentational concerns. It’s therefore considered best practice to not use microformat classes as styling hooks, but instead use additional classes that relate to the function of the component and adhere to your own naming conventions.)

Short

Names should be as long as required, but no longer. When looking for words to describe a particular function, I try to look for single words where possible. Avoid abbreviations unless they are understood within the contexts described above. rrp is fine if labelling a recommended retail price in an online shop, but not very helpful if used to mean ragged-right paragraph, for example.

Fun!

Finally, names can be an opportunity to have some fun! Names can give character to a project, be it by providing an outlet for in-jokes or adding little easter eggs for those inclined to look.

The copyright statement on Apple’s website has long been named sosumi, a word that has a nice little history inside Apple. Until recently, the hamburger menu icon on the Guardian website was labelled honest-burger, after the developer’s favourite burger restaurant.

A few thoughts on preprocessors

CSS preprocessors have solved a lot of problems, but they have an unfortunate downside: they require you to name yet more things! Whereas we needed to worry only about style rules, now we need names for variables, mixins, functions… oh my!

A second article could be written about naming these, so for now I’ll offer just a few thoughts. The first is to note that preprocessors make it easier to change things, as they allow for DRYer code. So while the names of variables are important (and the advice in this article still very much applies), you can afford to relax a little.

Looking to name colour variables? If possible, find out if colours have been assigned names in a brand palette. If not, use obvious names (based on appearance or function, depending on your preference) and adapt as the palette grows. If it becomes difficult to name colours that are too similar, I’d venture that the problem lies with the design rather than the naming scheme.

The same is true for responsive breakpoints. Preprocessors allow you to move awkward naming conventions out of the markup and into the CSS. Although terms like mobile, tablet and desktop are not desirable given the need to think about device-agnostic design, if these terms are widely understood within a product team and among stakeholders, using them will ensure everyone is using the same language (they can always be changed later).

It still feels like we’re at the very beginning of understanding how preprocessors fit into a development workflow, if at all! I suspect over the next few years, best practices will emerge for all of these considerations. In the meantime, use your brain!



Even with sensible rules and conventions in place, naming things can remain difficult, but hopefully I’ve made this exercise a little less painful. Christmas is a time of giving, so to the developer reading your code in a year’s time, why not make your gift one of clearer class names.",2014,Paul Lloyd,paulrobertlloyd,2014-12-21T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2014/naming-things/,code
335,Naughty or Nice? CSS Background Images,"Web Standards based development involves many things – using semantically sound HTML to provide structure to our documents or web applications, using CSS for presentation and layout, using JavaScript responsibly, and of course, ensuring that all that we do is accessible and interoperable to as many people and user agents as we can.

This we understand to be good. 

And it is good. 

Except when we don’t clearly think through the full implications of using those techniques.

Which often happens when time is short and we need to get things done.

Here are some naughty examples of CSS background images with their nicer, more accessible counterparts.

Transaction related messages

I’m as guilty of this as others (or, perhaps, I’m the only one that has done this, in which case this can serve as my holiday season confessional)  We use lovely little icons to show status messages for a transaction to indicate if the action was successful, or was there a warning or error? For example:

“Your postal/zip code was not in the correct format.”

Notice that we place a nice little icon there, and use background colours and borders to convey a specific message: there was a problem that needs to be fixed. Notice that all of this visual information is now contained in the CSS rules for that div:

<div class=""error"">
     <p>Your postal/zip code was not in the correct format.</p>
 </div>

 div.error {
     background: #ffcccc url(../images/error_small.png) no-repeat 5px 4px;
     color: #900;
     border-top: 1px solid #c00;
     border-bottom: 1px solid #c00;
     padding: 0.25em 0.5em 0.25em 2.5em;
     font-weight: bold;
 }

Using this approach also makes it very easy to create a div.success and div.warning CSS rules meaning we have less to change in our HTML.

Nice, right?

No. Naughty. 

Visual design communicates

The CSS is being used to convey very specific information. The choice of icon, the choice of background colour and borders tell us visually that there is something wrong. 

With the icon as a background image – there is no way to specify any alt text for the icon, and significant meaning is lost. A screen reader user, for example, misses the fact that it is an “error.” 

The solution? Ask yourself: what is the bare minimum needed to indicate there was an error? Currently in the absence of CSS there will be no icon – which (I’m hoping you agree) is critical to communicating there was an error.

The icon should be considered content and not simply presentational.

The borders and background colour are certainly much less critical – they belong in the CSS.

Lets change the code to place the image directly in the HTML and using appropriate alt text to better communicate the meaning of the icon to all users:

<div class=""bettererror"">
     <img src=""images/error_small.png"" alt=""Error"" />
     <p>Your postal/zip code was not in the correct format.</p>
 </div>

 div.bettererror {
     background-color: #ffcccc;
     color: #900;
     border-top: 1px solid #c00;
     border-bottom: 1px solid #c00;
     padding: 0.25em 0.5em 0.25em 2.5em;
     font-weight: bold;
     position: relative;
     min-height: 1.25em;
 }

 div.bettererror img {
     display: block;
     position: absolute;
     left: 0.25em;
     top: 0.25em;
     padding: 0;
     margin: 0;
 }

 div.bettererror p {
     position: absolute;
     left: 2.5em;
     padding: 0;
     margin: 0;
 }

Compare these two examples of transactional messages

Status of a Record

This example is pretty straightforward. Consider the following: a real estate listing on a web site. There are three “states” for a listing: new, normal, and sold. Here’s how they look:

Example of a New Listing

Example of A Sold Listing

If we (forgive the pun) blindly apply the “use a CSS background image” technique we clearly run into problems with the new and sold images – they actually contain content with no way to specify an alternative when placed in the CSS.

In this case of the “new” image, we can use the same strategy as we used in the first example (the transaction result). The “new” image should be considered content and is placed in the HTML as part of the <h2>...</h2> that identifies the listing.

However when considering the “sold” listing, there are less changes to be made to keep the same look by leaving the “SOLD” image as a background image and providing the equivalent information elsewhere in the listing – namely, right in the heading.

For those that can’t see the background image, the status is communicated clearly and right away. A screen reader user that is navigating by heading or viewing a listing will know right away that a particular property is sold.

Of note here is that in both cases (new and sold) placing the status near the beginning of the record helps with a zoom layout as well.

Better Example of A Sold Listing

Summary

Remember: in the holiday season, its what you give that counts!! Using CSS background images is easy and saves time for you but think of the children. And everyone else for that matter… 

CSS background images should only be used for presentational images, not for those that contain content (unless that content is already represented and readily available elsewhere).",2005,Derek Featherstone,derekfeatherstone,2005-12-20T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2005/naughty-or-nice-css-background-images/,code
294,New Tricks for an Old Dog,"Much of my year has been spent helping new team members find their way around the expansive and complex codebase that is the TweetDeck front-end, trying to build a happy and productive group of people around a substantial codebase with many layers of legacy.
I’ve loved doing this. Everything from writing new documentation, drawing diagrams, and holding technical architecture sessions teaches you something you didn’t know or exposes an area of uncertainty that you can go work on.
In this article, I hope to share some experiences and techniques that will prove useful in your own situation and that you can impress your friends in some new and exciting ways!
How do you do, fellow kids?
To start with I’d like to introduce you to our JavaScript framework, Flight. Right now it’s used by twitter.com and TweetDeck although, as a company, Twitter is largely moving to React.
Over time, as we used Flight for more complex interfaces, we found it wasn’t scaling with us.
Composing components into trees was fiddly and often only applied for a specific parent-child pairing. It seems like an obvious feature with hindsight, but it didn’t come built-in to Flight, and it made reusing components a real challenge.
There was no standard way to manage the state of a component; they all did it slightly differently, and the technique often varied by who was writing the code. This cost us in maintainability as you just couldn’t predict how a component would be built until you opened it.
Making matters worse, Flight relied on events to move data around the application. Unfortunately, events aren’t good for giving structure to complex logic. They jump around in a way that’s hard to understand and debug, and force you to search your code for a specific string — the event name‚ to figure out what’s going on.
To find fixes for these problems, we looked around at other frameworks. We like React for it’s simple, predictable state management and reactive re-render flow, and Elm for bringing strict functional programming to everyone.
But when you have lots of existing code, rewriting or switching framework is a painful and expensive option. You have to understand how it will interact with your existing code, how you’ll test it alongside existing code, and how it will affect the size and performance of the application. This all takes time and effort!
Instead of planning a rewrite, we looked for the ideas hidden within other frameworks that we could reapply in our own situation or bring to the tools we already were using.
Boiled down, what we liked seemed quite simple:

Component nesting & composition
Easy, predictable state management
Normal functions for data manipulation

Making these ideas applicable to Flight took some time, but we’re in a much better place now. Through persistent trial-and-error, we have well documented, testable and standard techniques for creating complex component hierarchies, updating and reacting to state changes, and passing data around the app.
While the specifics of our situation and Flight aren’t really important, this experience taught me something: 

Distill good tech into great ideas. You can apply great ideas anywhere.

You don’t have to use cool kids’ latest framework, hottest build tool or fashionable language to benefit from them. If you can identify a nugget of gold at the heart of it all, why not use it to improve what you have already?
Times, they are a changin’
Apart from stealing ideas from the new and shiny, how can we keep make the most of improved tooling and techniques? Times change and so should the way we write code.
Going back in time a bit, TweetDeck used some slightly outmoded tools for building and bundling. Without a transpiler like Babel we were missing out new language features, and without a more advanced build tools like Webpack, every module’s source was encased in AMD boilerplate.
In fact, we found ourselves with a mix of both AMD syntaxes:
define([""lodash""], function (_) {
  // . . .
});

define(function (require) {
  var _ = require(""lodash"");
  // . . .
});
This just wouldn’t do. And besides, what we really wanted was CommonJS, or even ES2015 module syntax:
import _ from ""lodash"";
These days we’re using Babel, Webpack, ES2015 modules and many new language features that make development just… better. But how did we get there?
To explain, I want to introduce you to codemods and jscodeshift.
A codemod is a large-scale refactor of a whole codebase, often mechanical or repetitive. Think of renaming a module or changing an API like URL(""..."") to new URL(""..."").
jscodeshift is a toolkit for running automated codemods, where you express a code transformation using code. The automated codemod operates on each file’s syntax tree – a data-structure representation of the code — finding and modifying in place as it goes.
Here’s an example that renames all instances of the variable foo to bar:
module.exports = function (fileInfo, api) {
  return api
    .jscodeshift(fileInfo.source)
    .findVariableDeclarators('foo')
    .renameTo('bar')
    .toSource();
};
It’s a seriously powerful tool, and we’ve used it to write a series of codemods that:

rename modules,
unify our use of AMD to a single syntax,
transition from one testing framework to another, and
switch from AMD to CommonJS.

These changes can be pretty huge and far-reaching. Here’s an example commit from when we switched to CommonJS:
commit 8f75de8fd4c702115c7bf58febba1afa96ae52fc
Date:   Tue Jul 12 2016

   Run AMD -> CommonJS codemod

 418 files changed, 47550 insertions(+), 48468 deletions(-)

Yep, that’s just under 50k lines changed, tested, merged and deployed without any trouble. AMD be gone!

From this step-by-step approach,  using codemods to incrementally tweak and improve, we extracted a little codemod recipe for making significant, multi-stage changes:

Find all the existing patterns
Choose the two most similar
Unify with a codemod
Repeat.

For example:

For module loading, we had 2 competing AMD patterns plus some use of CommonJS
The two AMD syntaxes were the most similar
We used a codemod to move to unify the AMD patterns
Later we returned to AMD to convert it to CommonJS

It’s worked for us, and if you’d like to know more about codemods then check out Evolving Complex Systems Incrementally by Facebook engineer, Christoph Pojer.
Welcome aboard!
As TweetDeck has gotten older and larger, the amount of things a new engineer has to learn about has exploded. The myriad of microservices that manage our data and their layers of authentication, security and business logic around them make for an overwhelming amount of information to hand to a newbie.
Inspired by Amy’s amazing Guide to the Care and Feeding of Junior Devs, we realised it was important to take time to design our onboarding that each of our new hires go through to make the most of their first few weeks.
Joining a new company, team, or both, is stressful and uncomfortable. Everything you can do to help a new hire will be valuable to them. So please, take time to design your onboarding!
And as you build up an onboarding process, you’ll create things that are useful for more than just new hires; it’ll force you to write documentation, for example, in a way that’s understandable for people who are unfamiliar with your team, product and codebase. This can lead to more outside contributions: potential contributors feel more comfortable getting set up on your product without asking for help.
This is something that’s taken for granted in open source, but somehow I think we forget about it in big companies.
After all, better documentation is just a good thing. You will forget things from time to time, and you’d be surprised how often the “beginner” docs help!
For TweetDeck, we put together system and architecture diagrams, and one-pager explanations of important concepts:

What are our dependencies?
Where are the potential points of failure?
Where does authentication live? Storage? Caching?
Who owns “X”?


Of course, learning continues long after onboarding. The landscape is constantly shifting; old services are deprecated, new APIs appear and what once true can suddenly be very wrong. Keeping up with this is a serious challenge, and more than any one person can track.
To address this, we’ve thought hard about our knowledge sharing practices across the whole team. For example, we completely changed the way we do code review.
In my opinion, code review is the single most effective practice you can introduce to share knowledge around, and build the quality and consistency of your team’s work. But, if you’re not doing it, here’s my suggestion for getting started:

Every pull request gets a +1 from someone else.

That’s all — it’s very light-weight and easy. Just ask someone to have a quick look over your code before it goes into master.
At Twitter, every commit gets a code review. We do a lot of reviewing, so small efficiency and effectiveness improvements make a big difference. Over time we learned some things:

Don’t review for more than hour 1
Keep reviews smaller than ~400 lines 2
Code review your own code first 2

After an hour, and above roughly 400 lines, your ability to detect issues in a code review starts to decrease. So review little and often. The gaps around lunch, standup and before you head home are ideal. And remember, if someone’s put code up for a review, that review is blocking them doing other work. It’s your job to unblock them.
On TweetDeck, we actually try to keep reviews under 250 lines. It doesn’t sound like much, but this constraint applies pressure to make smaller, incremental changes. This makes breakages easier to detect and roll back, and leads to a very natural feature development process that encourages learning and iteration.
But the most important thing I’ve learned personally is that reviewing my own code is the best way to spot issues. I try to approach my own reviews the way I approach my team’s: with fresh, critical eyes, after a break, using a dedicated code review tool.
It’s amazing what you can spot when you put a new in a new interface around code you’ve been staring at for hours!
And yes, this list features science. The data backs up these conclusions, and if you’d like to learn more about scientific approaches to software engineering then I recommend you buy Making Software: What Really Works, and Why We Believe It. It’s ace.
For more dedicated information sharing, we’ve introduced regular seminars for everyone who works on a specific area or technology. It works like this: a team-member shares or teaches something to everyone else, and next time it’s someone else’s turn. Giving everyone a chance to speak, and encouraging a wide range of topics, is starting to produce great results.
If you’d like to run a seminar, one thing you could try to get started: run a point at the thing you least understand in our architecture session — thanks to James for this idea. And guess what… your onboarding architecture diagrams will help (and benefit from) this!
More, please!
There’s a few ideas here to get you started, but there are even more in a talk I gave this year called Frontend Archaeology, including a look at optimising for confidence with front-end operations.
And finally, thanks to Amy for proof reading this and to Passy for feedback on the original talk.




Dunsmore et al. 2000. Object-Oriented Inspection in the Face of Delocalisation. Beverly, MA: SmartBear Software. ↩


Cohen, Jason. 2006. Best Kept Secrets of Peer Code Review. Proceedings of the 22nd ICSE 2000: 467-476. ↩ ↩",2016,Tom Ashworth,tomashworth,2016-12-18T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2016/new-tricks-for-an-old-dog/,code
281,Nine Things I've Learned,"I’ve been a professional graphic designer for fourteen years and for just under four of those a professional web designer. Like most designers I’ve learned a lot in my time, both from a design point of view and in business as freelance designer. A few of the things I’ve learned stick out in my mind, so I thought I’d share them with you. They’re pretty random and in no particular order.

1. Becoming the designer you want to be

When I started out as a young graphic designer, I wanted to design posters and record sleeves, pretty much like every other young graphic designer. The problem is that the reality of the world means that when you get your first job you’re designing the back of a paracetamol packet or something equally weird. I recently saw a tweet that went something like this: “You’ll never become the designer you always dreamt of being by doing the work you never wanted to do”. This is so true; to become the designer you want to be, you need to be designing the things you’re passionate about designing. This probably this means working in the evenings and weekends for little or no money, but it’s time well spent. Doing this will build up your portfolio with the work that really shows what you can do! Soon, someone will ask you to design something based on having seen this work. From this point, you’re carving your own path in the direction of becoming the designer you always wanted to be.

2. Compete on your own terms

As well as all being friends, we are also competitors. In order to win new work we need a selling point, preferably a unique selling point. Web design is a combination of design disciplines – user experience design, user interface Design, visual design, development, and so on. Some companies will sell themselves as UX specialists, which is fine, but everyone who designs a website from scratch does some sort of UX, so it’s not really a unique selling point. Of course, some people do it better than others.

One area of web design that clients have a strong opinion on, and will judge you by, is visual design. It’s an area in which it’s definitely possible to have a unique selling point. Designing the visual aesthetic for a website is a combination of logical decision making and a certain amount of personal style. If you can create a unique visual style to your work, it can become a selling point that’s unique to you.

3. How much to charge and staying motivated

When you’re a freelance designer one of the hardest things to do is put a price on your work and skills. Finding the right amount to charge is a fine balance between supplying value to your customer and also charging enough to stay motivated to do a great job. It’s always tempting to offer a low price to win work, but it’s often not the best approach: not just for yourself but for the client as well.

A client once asked me if I could reduce my fee by £1,000 and still be motivated enough to do a good job. In this case the answer was yes, but it was the question that resonated with me. I realized I could use this as a gauge to help me price projects. Before I send out a quote I now always ask myself the question “Is the amount I’ve quoted enough to make me feel motivated to do my best on this project?” I never send out a quote unless the answer is yes. In my mind there’s no point in doing any project half-heartedly, as every project is an opportunity to build your reputation and expand your portfolio to show potential clients what you can do. Offering a client a good price but not being prepared to put everything you have into it, isn’t value for money.  

4. Supplying the right design

When I started out as a graphic designer it seemed to be the done thing to supply clients with a ton of options for their logo or brochure designs. In a talk given by Dan Rubin, he mentioned that this was a legacy of agencies competing with each other in a bid to create the illusion of offering more value for money. Over the years, I’ve realized that offering more than one solution makes no sense. The reason a client comes to you as a designer is because you’re the person than can get it right. If I  were to supply three options, I’d be knowingly offering my client at least two options that I didn’t think worked.

To this day I still get asked how many homepage design options I’ll supply for the quoted amount. The answer is one. Of course, I’m more than happy to iterate upon the design to fine-tune it and, on the odd occasion, I do revisit a design concept if I just didn’t nail the design first time around. Your time is much better spent refining the right design option than rushing out three substandard designs in the same amount of time.

5. Colour is key

There are many contributing factors that go into making a good visual design, but one of the simplest ways to do this is through the use of colour. The colour palette used in a design can have such a profound effect on a visual design that it almost feels like you’re cheating. It’s easy to add more and more subtle shades of colour to add a sense of sophistication and complexity to a design, but it dilutes the overall visual impact. When I design, I almost have a rule that only allows me to use a very limited colour palette. I don’t always stick to it, but it’s always in mind and something I’m constantly reviewing through my design process.

6. Creative thinking is central to good or boundary-pushing web design

When we think of creativity in web design we often link this to the visual design, as there is an obvious opportunity to be creative in this area if the brief allows it. Something that I’ve learnt in my time as a web designer is that there’s a massive need for creative thinking in the more technical aspects of web design. The tools we use for building websites are there to be manipulated and used in creative ways to design exciting and engaging user experiences. Great developers are constantly using their creativity to push the boundaries of what can be done with CSS, jQuery and JavaScript. 

Being creative and creative thinking are things we should embrace as an industry and they are qualities that can be found in anyone, whether they be a visual designer or Rails developer.

7. Creative block: don’t be afraid to get things wrong

Creative block can be a killer when designing. It’s often applied to visual design, which is more subjective. I suffer from creative block on a regular basis. It’s hugely frustrating and can screw up your schedule. Having thought about what creative block actually is, I’ve come to the conclusion that it’s actually more of a lack of direction than a lack of ideas. You have ideas and solutions in mind but don’t feel committed to any of them. You’re scared that whatever direction you take, it’ll turn out to be wrong. I’ve found that the best remedy for this is to work through this barrier. It’s a bit like designing with a blindfold on – you don’t really know where you’re going. If you stick to your guns and keep pressing forward I find that, nine times out of ten, this process leads to a solution. As the page begins to fill, the direction you’re looking for slowly begins to take shape.

8. You get better at designing by designing

I often get emails asking me what books someone can read to help them become a better designer. There are a lot of good books on subjects like HTML5, CSS, responsive web design and the like, that will really help improve anyone’s web design skills. But, when it comes to visual design, the best way to get better is to design as much as possible. You can’t follow instructions for these things because design isn’t following instructions. A large part of web design is definitely applying a set of widely held conventions, but there’s another part to it that is invention and the only way to get better at this is to do it as much as possible.

9. Self-belief is overrated

Throughout our lives we’re told to have self-belief. Self-belief and confidence in what we do, whatever that may be. The problem is that some people find it easier than others to believe in themselves. I’ve spent years trying to convince myself to believe in what I do but have always found it difficult to have complete confidence in my design skills. Self-doubt always creeps in.

I’ve realized that it’s ok to doubt myself and I think it might even be a good thing!  I’ve realized that it’s my self-doubt that propels me forward and makes me work harder to achieve the best results. The reason I’m sharing this is because I know I’m not the only designer that feels this way. You can spend a lot of time fighting self-doubt only to discover that it’s your body’s natural mechanism to help you do the best job possible.",2011,Mike Kus,mikekus,2011-12-11T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2011/nine-things-ive-learned/,business
232,Optimize Your Web Design Workflow,"I’m not sure about you, but I still favour using Photoshop to create my designs for the web. I agree that this application, even with its never-ending feature set, is not the perfect environment to design websites in. The ideal application doesn’t exist yet, however, so until it does it’s maybe not such a bad idea to investigate ways to optimize our workflow.

Why use Photoshop?

It will probably not come as a surprise if I say that Photoshop and Illustrator are the applications that I know best and feel most comfortable and creative in. Some people prefer Fireworks for web design. Even though I understand people’s motivations, I still prefer Photoshop personally. On the occasions that I gave Fireworks a try, I ended up just using the application to export my images as slices, or to prepare a dummy for the client. For some reason, I’ve never been able to find my way in that app. There were always certain things missing that could only be done in either Photoshop or Illustrator, which bothered me.

Why not start in the browser?

These days, with CSS3 styling emerging, there are people who find it more efficient to design in the browser. I agree that at a certain point, once the basic design is all set and defined, you can jump right into the code and go from there. But the actual creative part, at least for me, needs to be done in an application such as Photoshop.

As a designer I need to be able to create and experiment with shapes on the fly, draw things, move them around, change colours, gradients, effects, and so on. I can’t see me doing this with code. I’m sure if I switch to markup too quickly, I might end up with a rather boxy and less interesting design. Once I start playing with markup, I leave my typical ‘design zone’. My brain starts thinking differently – more rational and practical, if you know what I mean; I start to structure and analyse how to mark up my design in the most efficient semantic way. When I design, I tend to let that go for a bit. I think more freely and not so much about the limitations, as it might hinder my creativity. Now that you know my motivations to stick with Photoshop for the time being, let’s see how we can optimize this beast.

Optimize your Photoshop workspace

In Photoshop CS5 you have a few default workspace options to choose from which can be found at the top right in the Application Bar (Window > Application Bar).



You can set up your panels and palettes the way you want, starting from the ‘Design’ workspace option, and save this workspace for future web work. Here is how I have set up things for when I work on a website design:



I have the layers palette open, and I keep the other palettes collapsed. Sometimes, when space permits, I open them all. For designers who work both on print and web, I think it’s worthwhile to save a workspace for both, or for when you’re doing photo retouching.

Set up a grid

When you work a lot with Shape Layers like I do, it’s really helpful to enable the Grid (View > Show > Grid) in combination with Snap to Grid (View > Snap To > Grid). This way, your vector-based work will be pixel-sharp, as it will always snap to the grid, and so you don’t end up with blurry borders.



To set up your preferred grid, go to Preferences > Guides, Grids and Slices. A good setting is to use ‘Gridline Every 10 pixels’ and ‘Subdivision 10’. You can switch it on and off at any time using the shortcut Cmd/Ctrl + ’.



It might also help to turn on Smart Guides (View > Show > Smart Guides).

Another important tip for making sure your Shape Layer boxes and other shapes are perfectly aligned to the pixel grid when you draw them is to enable Snap to Pixels. This option can be enabled in the Application bar in the Geometry options dropdown menu when you select one of the shape tools from the toolbox.



Use Shape Layers

To keep your design as flexible as possible, it’s a good thing to use Shape Layers wherever you can as they are scalable. I use them when I design for the iPhone. All my icons, buttons, backgrounds, illustrative graphics – they are all either Smart Objects placed from Illustrator, or Shape Layers. This way, the design is scalable for the retina display.



Use Smart Objects

Among the things I like a lot in Photoshop are Smart Objects. Smart Objects preserve an image’s source content with all its original characteristics, enabling you to perform non-destructive editing to the layer. For me, this is the ideal way of making my design flexible.



For example, a lot of elements are created in Illustrator and are purely vector-based. Placing these elements in Photoshop as Smart Objects (via copy and paste, or dragging from Illustrator into Photoshop) will keep them vector-based and scalable at all times without loss of quality.



Another way you could use Smart Objects is whenever you have repeating elements; for example, if you have a stream or list of repeating items. You could, for instance, create one, two or three different items (for the sake of randomness), make each one a Smart Object, and repeat them to create the list. Then, when you have to update, you need only change the Smart Object, and the update will be automatically applied in all its linked instances.

Turning photos into Smart Objects before you resize them is also worth considering – you never know when you’ll need that same photo just a bit bigger. It keeps things more flexible, as you leave room to resize the image at a later stage. I use this in combination with the Smart Filters a lot, as it gives me such great flexibility.



I usually use Smart Objects as well for the main sections of a web page, which are repeated across different pages of a site. So, for elements such as the header, footer and sidebar, it can be handy for bigger projects that are constantly evolving, where you have to create a lot of different pages in Photoshop.

You could save a template page that has the main sections set up as Smart Objects, always in their latest version. Each time you need to create new page, you can start from that template file. If you need to update an existing page because the footer (or sidebar, or header) has been updated, you can drag the updated Smart Object into this page. Although, do I wish Photoshop made it possible to have Smart Objects live as separate files, which are then linked to my different pages. Then, whenever I update the Smart Object, the pages are automatically updated next time I open the file. This is how linked files work in InDesign and Illustrator when you place a external image.

Use Layer Comps

In some situations, using Layer Comps can come in handy. I try to use them when the design consists of different states; for example, if there are hidden and show states of certain content, such as when content is shown after clicking a certain button. It can be useful to create a Layer Comp for each state. So, when you switch between the two Layer Comps, you’re switching between the two states.



It’s OK to move or hide content in each of these states, as well as apply different layer styles. I find this particularly useful when I need to save separate JPEG versions of each state to show to the client, instead of going over all the eye icons in the layers palette to turn the layers’ visibility on or off.



Create a set of custom colour swatches

I tend to use a distinct colour Swatches palette for each project I work on, by saving a separate Swatches palette in project’s folder (as an .ase file). You can do this through the palette’s dropdown menu, choosing Save Swatches for Exchange.



Selecting this option gives you the flexibility to load this palette in other Adobe applications like Illustrator, InDesign or Fireworks. This way, you have the colours of any particular project at hand. I name each colour, using the hexadecimal values.



Loading, saving or changing the view of the Swatches palette can be done via the palette’s dropdown menu. My preferred view is ‘Small List’ so I can see the hexadecimal values or other info I have added in the description.

I do wish Photoshop had the option of loading several different Styles palettes, so I could have two or more of them open at the same time, but each as a separate palette. This would be handy whenever I switch to another project, as I’m usually working on more than one project in a day. At the moment, you can only add a set of colours to the palette that is already open, which is frustrating and inefficient if you need to update the palette of a project separately.

Create a set of custom Styles

Just like saving a Swatches palette, I also always save the styles I apply in the Styles palette as a separate Styles file in the project’s folder when I work on a website design or design for iPhone/iPad. During the design process, I can save it each time styles are added. Again, though, it would be great if we could have different Styles palettes open at the same time.



Use a scratch file

What I also find particularly timesaving, when working on a large project, is using some kind of scratch file. By that, I mean a file that has elements in place that you reuse a lot in the general design. Think of buttons, icons and so on, that you need in every page or screen design. This is great for both web design work and iPad/iPhone work. 



Use the slice tool

This might not be something you think of at first, because you probably associate this way of working with ‘old-school’ table-based techniques. Still, you can apply your slice any way you want, keeping your way of working in mind. Just think about it for a second. If you use the slice tool, and you give each slice its proper filename, you don’t have to worry about it when you need to do updates on the slice or image. Photoshop will remember what the image of that slice is called and which ‘Save for Web’ export settings you’ve used for it. You can also export multiple slices all at once, or export only the ones you need using ‘Save selected slices’.



I hope this list of optimization tips was useful, and that they will help you improve and enjoy your time in Photoshop. That is, until the ultimate web design application makes its appearance. Somebody is building this as we speak, right?",2010,Veerle Pieters,veerlepieters,2010-12-10T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2010/optimize-your-web-design-workflow/,process
166,Performance On A Shoe String,"Back in the summer, I happened to notice the official Wimbledon All England Tennis Club site had jumped to the top of Alexa’s Movers & Shakers list — a list that tracks sites that have had the biggest upturn or downturn in traffic. The lawn tennis championships were underway, and so traffic had leapt from almost nothing to crazy-busy in a no time at all. 

Many sites have similar peaks in traffic, especially when they’re based around scheduled events. No one cares about the site for most of the year, and then all of a sudden – wham! – things start getting warm in the data centre. Whilst the thought of chestnuts roasting on an open server has a certain appeal, it’s less attractive if you care about your site being available to visitors. Take a look at this Alexa traffic graph showing traffic patterns for superbowl.com at the beginning of each year, and wimbledon.org in the month of July.

Traffic graph from Alexa.com 

Whilst not on the same scale or with such dramatic peaks, we have a similar pattern of traffic here at 24ways.org. Over the last three years we’ve seen a dramatic pick up in traffic over the month of December (as would be expected) and then a much lower, although steady load throughout the year. What we do have, however, is the luxury of knowing when the peaks will be. For a normal site, be that a blog, small scale web app, or even a small corporate site, you often just cannot predict when you might get slashdotted, end up on the front page of Digg or linked to from a similarly high-profile site. You just don’t know when the peaks will be.

If you’re a big commercial enterprise like the Super Bowl, scaling up for that traffic is simply a cost of doing business. But for most of us, we can’t afford to have massive capacity sat there unused for 90% of the year. What you have to do instead is work out how to deal with as much traffic as possible with the modest resources you have.

In this article I’m going to talk about some of the things we’ve learned about keeping 24 ways running throughout December, whilst not spending a fortune on hosting we don’t need for 11 months of each year. We’ve not always got it right, but we’ve learned a lot along the way.

The Problem

To know how to deal with high traffic, you need to have a basic idea of what happens when a request comes into a web server. 24 ways is hosted on a single small virtual dedicated server with a great little hosting company in the UK. We run Apache with PHP and MySQL all on that one server. When a request comes in a new Apache process is started to deal with the request (or assigned if there’s one available not doing anything). Each process takes a bunch of memory, so there’s a finite number of processes that you can run, and therefore a finite number of pages you can serve at once before your server runs out of memory.

With our budget based on whatever is left over after beer, we need to get best performance we can out of the resources available. As the goal is to serve as many pages as quickly as possible, there are several approaches we can take:


	Reducing the amount of memory needed by each Apache process
	Reducing the amount of time each process is needed
	Reducing the number of requests made to the server


Yahoo! have published some information on what they call Exceptional Performance, which is well worth reading, and compliments many of my examples here. The Yahoo! guidelines very much look at things from a user perspective, which is always important.

Server tweaking

If you’re in the position of being able to change your server configuration (our set-up gives us root access to what is effectively a virtual machine) there are some basic steps you can take to maximise the available memory and reduce the memory footprint. Without getting too boring and technical (whole books have been written on this) there are a couple of things to watch out for.

Firstly, check what processes you have running that you might not need. Every megabyte of memory that you free up might equate to several thousand extra requests being served each day, so take a look at top and see what’s using up your resources. Quite often a machine configured as a web server will have some kind of mail server running by default. If your site doesn’t use mail (ours doesn’t) make sure it’s shut down and not using resources.

Secondly, have a look at your Apache configuration and particularly what modules are loaded. The method for doing this varies between versions of Apache, but again, every module loaded increases the amount of memory that each Apache process requires and therefore limits the number of simultaneous requests you can deal with.

The final thing to check is that Apache isn’t configured to start more servers than you have memory for. This is usually done by setting the MaxClients directive. When that limit is reached, your site is going to stop responding to further requests. However, if all else goes well that threshold won’t be reached, and if it does it will at least stop the weight of the traffic taking the entire server down to a point where you can’t even log in to sort it out.

Those are the main tidbits I’ve found useful for this site, although it’s worth repeating that entire books have been written on this subject alone.

Caching

Although the site is generated with PHP and MySQL, the majority of pages served don’t come from the database. The process of compiling a page on-the-fly involves quite a few trips to the database for content, templates, configuration settings and so on, and so can be slow and require a lot of CPU. Unless a new article or comment is published, the site doesn’t actually change between requests and so it makes sense to generate each page once, save it to a file and then just serve all following requests from that file.

We use QuickCache (or rather a plugin based on it) for this. The plugin integrates with our publishing system (Textpattern) to make sure the cache is cleared when something on the site changes. A similar plugin called WP-Cache is available for WordPress, but of course this could be done any number of ways, and with any back-end technology.

The important principal here is to reduce the time it takes to serve a page by compiling the page once and serving that cached result to subsequent visitors. Keep away from your database if you can.

Outsource your feeds

We get around 36,000 requests for our feed each day. That really only works out at about 7,000 subscribers averaging five-and-a-bit requests a day, but it’s still 36,000 requests we could easily do without. Each request uses resources and particularly during December, all those requests can add up. 

The simple solution here was to switch our feed over to using FeedBurner. We publish the address of the FeedBurner version of our feed here, so those 36,000 requests a day hit FeedBurner’s servers rather than ours. In addition, we get pretty graphs showing how the subscriber-base is building.



Off-load big files

Larger files like images or downloads pose a problem not in bandwidth, but in the time it takes them to transfer. A typical page request is very quick, a few seconds at the most, resulting in the connection being freed up promptly. Anything that keeps a connection open for a long time is going to start killing performance very quickly.

This year, we started serving most of the images for articles from a subdomain – media.24ways.org. Rather than pointing to our own server, this subdomain points to an Amazon S3 account where the files are held. It’s easy to pigeon-hole S3 as merely an online backup solution, and whilst not a fully fledged CDN, S3 works very nicely for serving larger media files. The roughly 20GB of files served this month have cost around $5 in Amazon S3 charges. That’s so affordable it may not be worth even taking the files back off S3 once December has passed.

I found this article on Scalable Media Hosting with Amazon S3 to be really useful in getting started. I upload the files via a Firefox plugin (mentioned in the article) and then edit the ACL to allow public access to the files. The way S3 enables you to point DNS directly at it means that you’re not tied to always using the service, and that it can be transparent to your users.

If your site uses photographs, consider uploading them to a service like Flickr and serving them directly from there. Many photo sharing sites are happy for you to link to images in this way, but do check the acceptable use policies in case you need to provide a credit or link back.

Off-load small files

You’ll have noticed the pattern by now – get rid of as much traffic as possible. When an article has a lot of comments and each of those comments has an avatar along with it, a great many requests are needed to fetch each of those images. In 2006 we started using Gravatar for avatars, but their servers were slow and were holding up page loads. To get around this we started caching the images on our server, but along with that came the burden of furnishing all the image requests.

Earlier this year Gravatar changed hands and is now run by the same team behind WordPress.com. Those guys clearly know what they’re doing when it comes to high performance, so this year we went back to serving avatars directly from them.

If your site uses avatars, it really makes sense to use a service like Gravatar where your users probably already have an account, and where the image requests are going to be dealt with for you. 

Know what you’re paying for

The server account we use for 24 ways was opened in November 2005. When we first hit the front page of Digg in December of that year, we upgraded the server with a bit more memory, but other than that we were still running on that 2005 spec for two years. Of course, the world of technology has moved on in those years, prices have dropped and specs have improved. For the same amount we were paying for that 2005 spec server, we could have an account with twice the CPU, memory and disk space.

So in November of this year I took out a new account and transferred the site from the old server to the new. In that single step we were prepared for dealing with twice the amount of traffic, and because of a special offer at the time I didn’t even have to pay the setup cost on the new server. So it really pays to know what you’re paying for and keep an eye out of ways you can make improvements without needing to spend more money.

Further steps

There’s nearly always more that can be done. For example, there are some media files (particularly for older articles) that are not on S3. We also serve our CSS directly and it’s not minified or compressed. But by tackling the big problems first we’ve managed to reduce load on the server and at the same time make sure that the load being placed on the server can be dealt with in the most frugal way.

Over the last 24 days we’ve served up articles to more than 350,000 visitors without breaking a sweat. On a busy day, that’s been nearly 20,000 visitors in just 24 hours. While in the grand scheme of things that’s not a huge amount of traffic, it can be a lot if you’re not prepared for it. However, with a little planning for the peaks you can help ensure that when the traffic arrives you’re ready to capitalise on it.

Of course, people only visit 24 ways for the wealth of knowledge and experience that’s tied up in the articles here. Therefore I’d like to take the opportunity to thank all our authors this year who have given their time as a gift to the community, and to wish you all a very happy Christmas.",2007,Drew McLellan,drewmclellan,2007-12-24T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2007/performance-on-a-shoe-string/,ux
134,Photographic Palettes,"How many times have you seen a colour combination that just worked, a match so perfect that it just seems obvious? 

Now, how many times do you come up with those in your own work? A perfect palette looks easy when it’s done right, but it’s often maddeningly difficult and time-consuming to accomplish.

Choosing effective colour schemes will always be more art than science, but there are things you can do that will make coming up with that oh-so-smooth palette just a little a bit easier. A simple trick that can lead to incredibly gratifying results lies in finding a strong photograph and sampling out particularly harmonious colours.

Photo Selection

Not all photos are created equal. You certainly want to start with imagery that fits the eventual tone you’re attempting to create. A well-lit photo of flowers might lead to a poor colour scheme for a funeral parlour’s web site, for example. It’s worth thinking about what you’re trying to say in advance, and finding a photo that lends itself to your message.

As a general rule of thumb, photos that have a lot of neutral or de-saturated tones with one or two strong colours make for the best palette; bright and multi-coloured photos are harder to derive pleasing results from. Let’s start with a relatively neutral image.

Sampling



In the above example, I’ve surrounded the photo with three different background colours directly sampled from the photo itself. Moving from left to right, you can see how each of the sampled colours is from an area of increasingly smaller coverage within the photo, and yet there’s still a strong harmony between the photo and the background image. I don’t really need to pick the big obvious colours from the photo to create that match, I can easily concentrate on more interesting colours that might work better for what I intend.

Using a similar palette, let’s apply those colour choices to a more interesting layout:



In this mini-layout, I’ve re-used the same tan colour from the previous middle image as a background, and sampled out a nicely matching colour for the top and bottom overlays, as well as the two different text colours. Because these colours all fall within a narrow range, the overall balance is harmonious.

What if I want to try something a little more daring? I have a photo of stacked chairs of all different colours, and I’d like to use a few more of those. No problem, provided I watch my colour contrast:



Though it uses varying shades of red, green, and yellow, this palette actually works because the values are even, and the colours muted. Placing red on top of green is usually a hideous combination of death, but if the green is drab enough and the red contrasts well enough, the result can actually be quite pleasing. I’ve chosen red as my loudest colour in this palette, and left green and yellow to play the quiet supporting roles.

Obviously, there are no hard and fast rules here. You might not want to sample absolutely every colour in your scheme from a photo. There are times where you’ll need a variation that’s just a little bit lighter, or a blue that’s not in the photo. You might decide to start from a photo base and tweak, or add in colours of your own. That’s okay too.

Tonal Variations

I’ll leave you with a final trick I’ve been using lately, a way to bring a bit more of a formula into the equation and save some steps.



Starting with the same base palette I sampled from the chairs, in the above image I’ve added a pair of overlaying squares that produce tonal variations of each primary. The lighter variation is simply a solid white square set to 40% opacity, the darker one is a black square at 20%. That gives me a highlight and shadow for each colour, which would prove handy if I had to adapt this colour scheme to a larger layout.

I could add a few more squares of varying opacities, or adjust the layer blending modes for different effects, but as this looks like a great place to end, I’ll leave that up to your experimental whims. Happy colouring!",2006,Dave Shea,daveshea,2006-12-22T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2006/photographic-palettes/,design
336,Practical Microformats with hCard,"You’ve probably heard about microformats over the last few months. You may have even read the easily digestible introduction at Digital Web Magazine, but perhaps you’ve not found time to actually implement much yet. That’s understandable, as it can sometimes be difficult to see exactly what you’re adding by applying a microformat to a page. Sure, you’re semantically enhancing the information you’re marking up, and the Semantic Web is a great idea and all, but what benefit is it right now, today? 

Well, the answer to that question is simple: you’re adding lots of information that can be and is being used on the web here and now. The big ongoing battle amongst the big web companies if one of territory over information. Everyone’s grasping for as much data as possible. Some of that information many of us are cautious to give away, but a lot of is happy to be freely available. Of the data you’re giving away, it makes sense to give it as much meaning as possible, thus enabling anyone from your friends and family to the giant search company down the road to make the most of it.

Ok, enough of the waffle, let’s get working.

Introducing hCard

You may have come across hCard. It’s a microformat for describing contact information (or really address book information) from within your HTML. It’s based on the vCard format, which is the format the contacts/address book program on your computer uses. All the usual fields are available – name, address, town, website, email, you name it.

If you’re running Firefox and Greasemonkey (or if you can, just to try this out), install this user script. What it does is look for instances of the hCard microformat in a page, and then add in a link to pass any hCards it finds to a web service which will convert it to a vCard. Take a look at the About the author box at the bottom of this article. It’s a hCard, so you should be able to click the icon the user script inserts and add me to your Outlook contacts or OS X Address Book with just a click.

So microformats are useful after all. Free microformats all round!

Implementing hCard

This is the really easy bit. All the hCard microformat is, is a bunch of predefined class names that you apply to the markup you’ve probably already got around your contact information. Let’s take the example of the About the author box from this article. Here’s how the markup looks without hCard:

<div class=""bio"">
     <h3>About the author</h3>
     <p>Drew McLellan is a web developer, author and no-good swindler from 
     just outside London, England. At the 
     <a href=""http://www.webstandards.org/"">Web Standards Project</a> he works 
     on press, strategy and tools. Drew keeps a 
     <a href=""http://www.allinthehead.com/"">personal weblog</a> covering web 
     development issues and themes.</p>
</div>

This is a really simple example because there’s only two key bits of address book information here:- my name and my website address. Let’s push it a little and say that the Web Standards Project is the organisation I work for – that gives us Name, Company and URL.

To kick off an hCard, you need a containing object with a class of vcard. The div I already have with a class of bio is perfect for this – all it needs to do is contain the rest of the contact information.

The next thing to identify is my name. hCard uses a class of fn (meaning Full Name) to identify a name. As is this case there’s no element surrounding my name, we can just use a span. These changes give us:

<div class=""bio vcard"">
     <h3>About the author</h3>
     <p><span class=""fn"">Drew McLellan</span> is a web developer...

The two remaining items are my URL and the organisation I belong to. The class names designated for those are url and org respectively. As both of those items are links in this case, I can apply the classes to those links. So here’s the finished hCard.

<div class=""bio vcard"">
     <h3>About the author</h3>
     <p><span class=""fn"">Drew McLellan</span> is a web developer, author and 
     no-good swindler from just outside London, England. 
     At the <a class=""org"" href=""http://www.webstandards.org/"">Web Standards Project</a> 
     he works on press, strategy and tools. Drew keeps a 
     <a class=""url"" href=""http://www.allinthehead.com/"">personal weblog</a> covering web 
     development issues and themes.</p>
</div>

OK, that was easy. By just applying a few easy class names to the HTML I was already publishing, I’ve implemented an hCard that right now anyone with Greasemonkey can click to add to their address book, that Google and Yahoo! and whoever else can index and work out important things like which websites are associated with my name if they so choose (and boy, will they so choose), and in the future who knows what. In terms of effort, practically nil.

Where next?

So that was a trivial example, but to be honest it doesn’t really get much more complex even with the most pernickety permutations. Because hCard is based on vCard (a mature and well thought-out standard), it’s all tried and tested. Here’s some good next steps.


	Play with the hCard Creator
	Take a deep breath and read the spec
	Start implementing hCard as you go on your own projects – it takes very little time


hCard is just one of an ever-increasing number of microformats. If this tickled your fancy, I suggest subscribing to the microformats site in your RSS reader to keep in touch with new developments.

What’s the take-away?

The take-away is this. They may sound like just more Web 2-point-HoHoHo hype, but microformats are a well thought-out, and easy to implement way of adding greater depth to the information you publish online. They have some nice benefits right away – certainly at geek-level – but in the longer term they become much more significant. We’ve been at this long enough to know that the web has a long, long memory and that what you publish today will likely be around for years. But putting the extra depth of meaning into your documents now you can help guard that they’ll continue to be useful in the future, and not just a bunch of flat ASCII.",2005,Drew McLellan,drewmclellan,2005-12-06T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2005/practical-microformats-with-hcard/,code
312,Preparing to Be Badass Next Year,"Once we’ve eaten our way through the holiday season, people will start to think about new year’s resolutions. We tend to focus on things that we want to change… and often things that we don’t like about ourselves to “fix”. We set rules for ourselves, or try to start new habits or stop bad ones. We focus in on things we will or won’t do. 
For many of us the list of things we “ought” to be spending time on is just plain overwhelming – family, charity/community, career, money, health, relationships, personal development. 
It’s kinda scary even just listing it out, isn’t it? I want to encourage you to think differently about next year.
The ever-brilliant Kathy Sierra articulates a better approach really well when talking about the attitude we should have to building great products. She tells us to think not about what the user will do with our product, but about what they are trying to achieve in the real world and how our product helps them to be badass1.
When we help the user be badass, then we are really making a difference. 
I suppose this is one way of saying: focus not on what you will do, focus on what it will help you achieve. How will it help you be awesome?
In what ways do you want to be more badass next year?
A professional lens
Though of course you might want to focus in on health or family or charity or community or another area next year, many people will want to become more badass in their chosen career. 
So let’s talk about a scaffold to help you figure out your professional / career development next year. 
First up, an assumption: everyone wants to be awesome. Nobody gets up in the morning aiming to be crap at their job. Nobody thinks to themselves “Today I am aiming for just south of mediocre, and if I can mess up everybody else’s ability to do good work then that will be just perfect2”. 
Ergo, you want to be awesome. So what does awesome look like? 
Danger!
The big trap that people fall into when think about their professional development is to immediately focus on the things that they aren’t good at. When you ask people “what do you want to work on getting better at next year?” they frequently gravitate to the things that they believe they are bad at. 
Why is this a trap? Because if you focus all your time and energy on improving the areas that you suck at, you are going to end up middling at everything. Going from bad → mediocre at a given skill / behaviour takes a bunch of time and energy. So if you spend all your time going from bad → mediocre at things, what do you think you end up? That’s right, mediocre. 
Mediocrity is not a great career goal, kids. 
What do you already rock at?
The much better investment of time and energy is to go from good → awesome. It often takes the same amount of relative time and energy, but wow the end result is better! So first, ask yourself and those who know you well what you are already pretty damn good at. Combat imposter syndrome by asking others. 
Then figure out how to double down on those things. What does brilliant look like for a given skill? What’s the knowledge or practice that you need to level yourself up even further in that thing?
But what if I really really suck?
Admittedly, sometimes something you suck at really is holding you back. But it’s important to separate out weaknesses (just something you suck at) from controlling weaknesses (something you suck at that actually matters for your chosen career). 
If skill x is just not an important thing for you to be good at, you may never need to care that you aren’t good at it. If your current role or the one you aspire to next really really requires you to be great at x, then it’s worth investing your time and energy (and possibly money too) getting better at it.
So when you look at the things that you aren’t good at, which of those are actually essential for success?
The right ratio
A good rule of thumb is to pick three things you are already good at to work on becoming awesome at and limit yourself to one weakness that you are trying to improve on. That way you are making sure that you get to awesome in areas where you already have an advantage, and limit the amount of time you are spending on going from bad → mediocre. 
Levelling up learning
So once you’ve figured out your areas you want to focus on next year, what do you actually decide to do? 
Most of all, you should try to design your day-to-day work in a way that it is also an effective learning experience. This means making sure you have a good feedback loop – you get to try something, see if it works, learn from it, rinse and repeat. 
It’s also about balance: you want to be challenged enough for work to be interesting, without it being so hard it’s frustrating. You want to do similar / the same things often enough that you get to learn and improve, without it being so repetitive that it’s boring. 
Continuously getting better at things you are already good at is actually both easier and harder than it sounds. The advantage is that it’s pretty easy to add the feedback loop to make sure that you are improving; the disadvantage is that you’re already good at these skills so you could easily just “do” without ever stopping to reflect and improve. Build in time for personal retrospectives (“What went well? What didn’t? What one thing will I choose to change next time?”) and find a way of getting feedback from outside sources as well. 
As for the new skills, it’s worth knowing that skill development follows a particular pattern:

We all start out unconsciously incompetent (we don’t know what to do and if we tried we’d unwittingly get it wrong), progress on to conscious incompetence (we now know we’re doing it wrong) then conscious competence (we’re doing it right but wow it takes effort and attention) and eventually get to unconscious competence (automatically getting it right). 
Your past experiences and knowledge might let you move faster through these stages, but no one gets to skip them. Invest the time and remember you need the feedback loop to really improve. 
What about keeping up?
Everything changes very fast in our industry. We need to invest in not falling behind, in keeping on top of what great looks like. There are a bunch of ways to do this, from reading blog posts, following links on Twitter, reading books to attending conferences or workshops, or just finding time to build things in new ways or with new technologies. 
Which will work best for you depends on how you best learn. Do you prefer to swallow a book? Do you learn most by building or experimenting? 
Whatever your learning style though, remember that there are three real needs:

Scan the landscape (what’s changing, does it matter)
Gain the knowledge or skills (get the detail)
Apply the knowledge or skills (use it in reality)

When you remember that you need all three of these things it can help you get more of what you do. 
For me personally, I use a combination of conferences and blogs / Twitter to scan the landscape. Half of what I want out of a conference is just a list of things to have on my radar that might become important. I then pick a couple of things to go read up on more (I personally learn most effectively by swallowing a book or spec or similar). And then I pick one thing at a time to actually apply in real life, to embed the skill / knowledge. 
In summary

Aim to be awesome (mediocrity is not a career goal).
Figure out what you already rock at.
Only care about stuff you suck at that matters for your career.
Pick three things to go from good → awesome and one thing to go from bad → mediocre (or mediocre → good) this year.
Design learning into your daily work.
Scan the landscape, learn new stuff, apply it for real. 
Be badass!





She wrote a whole book about it. You should read it: Badass: Making Users Awesome ↩


Before you argue too vehemently: I suppose some antisocial sociopathic bastards do exist. Identify them, and then RUN AWAY FAST AS YOU CAN #realtalk ↩",2016,Meri Williams,meriwilliams,2016-12-22T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2016/preparing-to-be-badass-next-year/,business
3,Project Hubs: A Home Base for Design Projects,"SCENE: A design review meeting. Laptop screens. Coffee cups.

Project manager: Hey, did you get my email with the assets we’ll be discussing? 

Client: I got an email from you, but it looks like there’s no attachment.

PM: Whoops! OK. I’m resending the files with the attachments. Check again?

Client: OK, I see them. It’s homepage_v3_brian-edits_FINAL_for-review.pdf, right? 

PM: Yeah, that’s the one.

Client: OK, hang on, Bill’s going to print them out. (3-minute pause. Small talk ensues.)

Client: Alright, Bill’s back. We’re good to start. 

Brian: Oh, actually those homepage edits we talked about last time are in the homepage_v4_brian_FINAL_v2.pdf document that I posted to Basecamp earlier today.

Client: Oh, OK. What message thread was that in? 

Brian: Uh, I’m pretty sure it’s in “Homepage Edits and Holiday Schedule.”

Client: Alright, I see them. Bill’s going back to the printer. Hang on a sec…



This is only a slightly exaggerated version of my experience in design review meetings. 

The design project dance is a sloppy one. It involves a slew of email attachments, PDFs, PSDs, revisions, GitHub repos, staging environments, and more. And while tools like Basecamp can help manage all these moving parts, it can still be incredibly challenging to extract only the important bits, juggle deliverables, and see how your project is progressing.

Enter project hubs. 

Project hubs

A project hub consolidates all the key design and development materials onto a single webpage presented in reverse chronological order. The timeline lives online (either publicly available or password protected), so that everyone involved in the team has easy access to it.

 A project hub.

I was introduced to project hubs after seeing Dan Mall’s open redesign of Reading Is Fundamental. Thankfully, I had a chance to work with Dan on two projects where I got to see firsthand how beneficial a project hub can be. Here’s what makes a project hub great:


	Serves as a centralized home base for the project
	Trains clients and teams to decide in the browser
	Easily and visually view project’s progress
	Provides an archive for project artifacts


A home base

Your clients and colleagues can expect to get the latest and greatest updates to your project when visiting the project hub, the same way you’d expect to get the latest information on a requested topic when you visit a Wikipedia page. That’s the beauty of URIs that don’t change. 

Creating a project hub reduces a ton of email volley nonsense, and eliminates the need to produce files and directories with staggeringly ridiculous names like design/12.13.13/team/brian/for_review/_FINAL/styletile_121313_brian-edits-final_v2_FINAL.pdf. The team can simply visit the project hub’s URL and click the link to whatever artifact they need. Need to make an update? Simply update the link on the project hub. No more email tango and silly file names. 

Deciding in the browser


	Let’s change the phrase “designing in the browser” to “deciding in the browser.”
Dan Mall


We make websites, but all too often we find ourselves looking at web design artifacts in abstractions. We email PDFs to each other, glance at mockup JPGs on our desktops, and of course kill trees in order to print out designs so that we can scribble in the margins. All of these practices subtly take everyone further and further away from the design’s eventual final resting place: the browser.

Because a project hub is just a simple webpage, reviewing designs is as easy as clicking some links, which keep your clients and teams in the browser. 

You can keep people in the browser with yet another clever trick from the wily Dan Mall: instead of sending clients PDFs or JPGs, he created a simple webpage and tossed his static visuals into the template (you can view an example here). This forces clients to review web design work in the browser rather than launching a PDF viewer or Preview. 

Now this all might sound trivial to you (“Of course my client knows that we’re designing a website!”), but keeping the design artifacts in the browser subconsciously helps remind everyone of the medium for which you’re designing, which helps everyone focus on the right aspects of the design and have the right conversations. 

Progress over time

When you’re in the trenches, it’s often hard to visualize how a project is progressing. Tools like Basecamp include discussions, files, to-dos, and more, which are all great tools but also make things a bit noisy. Project hubs provide you and your clients a quick and easy way to see at a glance how things are coming along. Teams can rest assured they’re viewing the most current versions of designs, and managers can share progress with stakeholders simply by providing a link to the project hub. 

Over time, a project hub becomes an easily accessible archive of all the design decisions, which makes it easy to compare and contrast different versions of designs and prototypes.

Setting up a project hub

Setting up your own project hub is pretty simple. Simply create a webpage with some basic styles and branding. I’ve created a project hub template that’s available on GitHub if you want a jump-start.

Publish the webpage to a URL somewhere that makes sense (we’ve found that a subdomain of your site works quite well) and share it with everyone involved in the project. Bookmark it. Let everyone know that this is where design updates will be shared, and that they can always come back to the project hub to track the project’s progress.

When it comes time to share new updates, simply add a new node to the timeline and republish the webpage. Simple FTPing works just fine, but it might make sense to keep track of changes using version control. Our project hub for our open redesign of the Pittsburgh Food Bank is managed on GitHub, which means that I can make edits to the hub right from GitHub. Thanks to the magical wizardry of webhooks, I can automatically deploy the project hub so that everything stays in sync. That’s the fancy-pants way to do it, and is certainly not a requirement. As long as you’re able to easily make edits and keep your project hub up to date, you’re good to go. 

So that’s the hubbub

Project hubs can help tame the chaos of the design process by providing a home base for all key design and development materials. Keep the design artifacts in the browser and give clients and colleagues quick insight into your project’s progress.

Happy hubbing!",2013,Brad Frost,bradfrost,2013-12-17T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2013/project-hubs/,process
297,Public Speaking with a Buddy,"My book Demystifying Public Speaking focuses on the variety of fears we each have about giving a talk. From presenting to a client, to leading a team standup, to standing on a conference stage, there are lots of things we can do to prepare ourselves for the spotlight and reduce those fears.
Though it didn’t make it into the final draft, I wanted to highlight how helpful it can be to share that public speaking spotlight with another person, or a few more people. If you have fears about not knowing the answer to a question, fumbling your words, or making a mistake in the spotlight, then buddying up may be for you!

To some, adding more people to a presentation sounds like a recipe for on-stage disaster. To others, having a friendly face nearby—a partner who can step in if you fumble—is incredibly reassuring. As design director Yesenia Perez-Cruz writes, “While public speaking is a deeply personal activity, you don’t have to go it alone. Nothing has helped my speaking career more than turning it into a group effort.”
Co-presenting can level up a talk in two ways: an additional brain and presentation skill set can improve the content of the talk itself, and you may feel safer with the on-stage safety net of your buddy. 
For example, when I started giving lengthy workshops about building mobile device labs with my co-worker Destiny Montague, we brought different experience to the table. I was able to talk about the user experience of our lab, and the importance of testing across different screen sizes. Destiny spoke about the hardware aspects of the lab, like power consumption and networking. Our audience benefitted from the spectrum of insight we included in the talk.
Moreover, Destiny and I kept each other energized and engaging while teaching our audience, having way more fun onstage. Partnering up alleviated the risk (and fear!) of fumbling; where one person makes a mistake, the other person is right there to help. Buddy presentations can be helpful if you fear saying “I don’t know” to a question, as there are other people around you who will be able to help answer it from the stage. By partnering with someone whom I trust and respect, and whose work and knowledge augments my own, it made the experience—and the presentation!—significantly better.
Co-presenting won’t work if you don’t trust the person you’re onstage with, or if you don’t have good chemistry working together. It might also not work if there’s an imbalance of responsibilities, both in preparing the talk and giving it. Read on for how to make partner talks work to your advantage!
Trustworthiness
If you want to explore co-presenting, make sure that your presentation partner is trustworthy and can carry their weight; it can be stressful if you find yourself trying to meet deadlines and prepare well and your partner isn’t being helpful. We’re all about reducing the fears and stress levels surrounding being in that spotlight onstage; make sure that the person you’re relying on isn’t making the process harder.
Before you start working together, sketch out the breakdown of work and timeline you’re each committing to. Have a conversation about your preferred work style so you each have a concrete understanding of the best ways to communicate (in what medium, and how often) and how to check in on each other’s progress without micromanaging or worrying about radio silence. Ask your buddy how they prefer to receive feedback, and give them your own feedback preferences, so neither of you are surprised or offended when someone’s work style or deliverable needs to be tweaked.
This should be a partnership in which you both feel supported; it’s healthy to set all these expectations up front, and create a space in which you can each tweak things as the work progresses.
Talk flow and responsibilities
There are a few different ways to organize the structure of your talk with multiple presenters. Start by thinking about the breakdown of the talk content—are there discrete parts you and the other presenters can own or deliver? Or does it feel more appropriate to deliver the entirety of the content together?
If you’re finding that you can break down the content into discrete chunks, figure out who should own which pieces, and what ownership means. Will you develop the content together but have only one person present the information? Or will one person research and prepare each content section in addition to delivering it solo onstage?
Rehearse how handoffs will go between sections so it feels natural, rather than stilted. I like breaking a presentation into “chapters” when I’m passionate about particular aspects of a topic and can speak on those, but know that there are other aspects to be shared and there’s someone else who can handle (and enjoy!) talking about them. When Destiny and I rehearsed our “chapter” handoffs, we developed little jingles that we’d both sing together onstage; it indicated to the audience that it was a planned transition in the content, and tied our independent work together into a partnership.
.embed-container { position: relative; padding-bottom: 56.25%; height: 0; overflow: hidden; max-width: 100%; } .embed-container iframe, .embed-container object, .embed-container embed { position: absolute; top: 0; left: 0; width: 100%; height: 100%; }



Alternatively, you can give the presentation in a way that’s close to having a rehearsed conversation, rather than independently presenting discrete parts of the talk. In this case, you’ll both be sharing the spotlight at the same time, throughout the duration of the talk. Preparation is key, here, to make sure that you each understand what needs to be communicated, and you have a sense of who will be taking responsibility for communicating those different pieces of information. A poorly-prepared talk like this will look like the co-presenters are talking over each other, or hesitating awkwardly to give the other person more room to speak; the audience will feel how uncomfortable this is, and will probably be distracted from the talk content. Practice the talk the whole way through multiple times so you know what each person is planning on covering and how you want to interact with each other while you’re both holding microphones; also figure out how you’ll be standing in relation to each other. More on that next!
Sharing the stage
If you choose to give a talk with a partner, determine ahead of time how you’ll stand (or sit). For example, if you each take “chapters” or major sections of the presentation, ensure that it’s clear who the audience should focus their attention on. You could sit in a chair off to the side (or stand). I recommend placing yourself far enough away that you’re not distracting to the audience; you don’t want them watching you while your partner is speaking. If the audience can still see you, but their focus should be on your buddy, be sure to not look distracted; keep your eyes on your buddy, and don’t just open your laptop and ignore what’s happening! Feel free to smile, laugh, or react how the audience should be reacting as your partner is speaking.
If you’re both sharing the spotlight at the same time and having a rehearsed conversation, make sure that your body language engages the audience and you’re not just speaking to each other, ignoring the folks watching. Watch this talk with Guy Podjarny and Assaf Hefetz who have partnered up to talk about security; they have clearly identified roles onstage, and remain engaged with the audience.

Consider whether or not you will share a microphone, or if you will both be mic’d. (Be sure that the event organizer, or the A/V team, has a heads-up well in advance to ensure they have the equipment handy!) Also talk through how you’d like to handle Q&A time during or after the talk, especially if you have clear “chapters” where Q&A might happen naturally during a handoff. The more clarity you and your partner have about who is responsible for which pieces of information sharing, the more you can feel and appear prepared.
Co-presenting does take a lot of preparation and requires a ton of communication between you and your partner. But the rewards can be awesome: double the brains onstage to help answer questions and communicate information, and a friendly face to help comfort you if you feel nervous.",2016,Lara Hogan,larahogan,2016-12-06T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2016/public-speaking-with-a-buddy/,process
218,Put Yourself in a Corner,"Some backstory, and a shameful confession

For the first couple years of high school I was one of those jerks who made only the minimal required effort in school. Strangely enough, how badly I behaved in a class was always in direct proportion to how skilled I was in the subject matter. In the subjects where I was confident that I could pass without trying too hard, I would give myself added freedom to goof off in class.

Because I was a closeted lit-nerd, I was most skilled in English class. I’d devour and annotate required reading over the weekend, I knew my biblical and mythological allusions up and down, and I could give you a postmodern interpretation of a text like nobody’s business. But in class, I’d sit in the back and gossip with my friends, nap, or scribble patterns in the margins of my textbooks. I was nonchalant during discussion, I pretended not to listen during lectures. I secretly knew my stuff, so I did well enough on tests, quizzes, and essays. But I acted like an ass, and wasn’t getting the most I could out of my education.

The day of humiliation, but also epiphany

One day in Ms. Kaney’s AP English Lit class, I was sitting in the back doodling. An earbud was dangling under my sweater hood, attached to the CD player (remember those?) sitting in my desk. Because of this auditory distraction, the first time Ms. Kaney called my name, I barely noticed. I definitely heard her the second time, when she didn’t call my name so much as roar it. I can still remember her five feet frame stomping across the room and grabbing an empty desk. It screamed across the worn tile as she slammed it next to hers. She said, “This is where you sit now.” My face gets hot just thinking about it.

I gathered my things, including the CD player (which was now impossible to conceal), and made my way up to the newly appointed Seat of Shame. There I sat, with my back to the class, eye-to-eye with Ms. Kaney. From my new vantage point I couldn’t see my friends, or the clock, or the window. All I saw were Ms. Kaney’s eyes, peering at me over her reading glasses while I worked. In addition to this punishment, I was told that from now on, not only would I participate in class discussions, but I would serve detention with her once a week until an undetermined point in the future.

During these detentions, Ms. Kaney would give me new books to read, outside the curriculum, and added on to my normal homework. They ranged from classics to modern novels, and she read over my notes on each book. We’d discuss them at length after class, and I grew to value not only our private discussions, but the ones in class as well. After a few weeks, there wasn’t even a question of this being punishment. It was heaven, and I was more productive than ever.

To the point

Please excuse this sentimental story. It’s not just about honoring a teacher who cared enough to change my life, it’s really about sharing a lesson. The most valuable education Ms. Kaney gave me had nothing to do with literature. She taught me that I (and perhaps other people who share my special brand of crazy) need to be put in a corner to flourish. When we have physical and mental constraints applied, we  accomplish our best work.

For those of you still reading, now seems like a good time to insert a pre-emptive word of mediation. Many of you, maybe all of you, are self-disciplined enough that you don’t require the rigorous restrictions I use to maximize productivity. Also, I know many people who operate best in a stimulating and open environment. I would advise everyone to seek and execute techniques that work best for them. But, for those of you who share my inclination towards daydreams and digressions, perhaps you’ll find something useful in the advice to follow.

In which I pretend to be Special Agent Olivia Dunham

Now that I’m an adult, and no longer have Ms. Kaney to reign me in, I have to find ways to put myself in the corner. By rejecting distraction and shaping an environment designed for intense focus, I’m able to achieve improved productivity.

Lately I’ve been obsessed with the TV show Fringe, a sci-fi series about an FBI agent and her team of genius scientists who save the world (no, YOU’RE a nerd). There’s a scene in the show where the primary character has to delve into her subconscious to do extraordinary things, and she accomplishes this by immersing herself in a sensory deprivation tank. The premise is this: when enclosed in a space devoid of sound, smell, or light, she will enter a new plane of consciousness wherein she can tap into new levels of perception.

This might sound a little nuts, but to me this premise has some real-world application. When I am isolated from distraction, and limited to only the task at hand, I’m able to be productive on a whole new level. Since I can’t actually work in an airtight iron enclosure devoid of input, I find practical ways to create an interruption-free environment.

Since I work from home, many of my methods for coping with distractions wouldn’t be necessary for my office-bound counterpart. However for some of you 9-to-5-ers, the principles will still apply.

Consider your visual input

First, I have to limit my scope to the world I can (and need to) affect. In the largest sense, this means closing my curtains to the chaotic scene of traffic, birds, the post office, a convenience store, and generally lovely weather that waits outside my window. When the curtains are drawn and I’m no longer surrounded by this view, my sphere is reduced to my desk, my TV, and my cat. Sometimes this step alone is enough to allow me to focus. 

But, my visual input can be whittled down further still. For example, the desk where I usually keep my laptop is littered with twelve owl figurines, a globe, four books, a three-pound weight, and various nerdy paraphernalia (hard drives, Wacom tablets, unnecessary bluetooth accessories, and so on). It’s not so much a desk as a dumping ground for wacky flea market finds and impulse technology buys. Therefore, in addition to this Official Desk, I have an adult version of Ms. Kaney’s Seat of Shame. It’s a rusty old student’s desk I picked up at the Salvation Army, almost an exact replica of the model Ms. Kaney dragged across the classroom all those years ago.  This tiny reproduction Seat of Shame is literally in a corner, where my only view is a blank wall. When I truly need to focus, this is where I take refuge, with only a notebook and a pencil (and occasionally an iPad).

Find out what works for your ears

Even from my limited sample size of two people, I know there are lots of different ways to cope with auditory distraction. I prefer silence when focused on independent work, and usually employ some form of a white noise generator. I’ve yet to opt for the fancy ‘real’ white noise machines; instead, I use a desktop fan or our allergy filter machine. This is usually sufficient to block out the sounds of the dishwasher and the cat, which allows me to think only about the task of hand.

My boyfriend, the other half of my extensive survey, swears by another method. He  calls it The Wall of Sound, and it’s basically an intense blast of raucous music streamed directly into his head. The outcome of his technique is really the same as mine; he’s blocking out unexpected auditory input. If you can handle the grating sounds of noisy music while working, I suggest you give The Wall of Sound a try.

Don’t count the minutes

When I sat in the original Seat of Shame in lit class, I could no longer see the big classroom clock slowly ticking away the seconds until lunch. Without the marker of time, the class period often flew by. The same is true now when I work; the less aware of time I am, the less it feels like time is passing too quickly or slowly, and the more I can focus on the task (not how long it takes). 

Nowadays, to assist in my effort to forget the passing of time, I sometimes put a sticky note over the clock on my monitor. If I’m writing, I’ll use an app like WriteRoom, which blocks out everything but a simple text editor. 

There are situations when it’s not advisable to completely lose track of time. If I’m working on a project with an hourly rate and a tight scope, or if I need to be on time to a meeting or call, I don’t want to lose myself in the expanse of the day. In these cases, I’ll set an alarm that lets me know it’s time to reign myself back in (or on some days, take a shower).

Put yourself in a mental corner, too

When Ms. Kaney took action and forced me to step up my game, she had the insight to not just change things physically, but to challenge me mentally as well. She assigned me reading material outside the normal coursework, then upped the pressure by requiring detailed reports of the material. While this additional stress was sometimes uncomfortable, it pushed me to work harder than I would have had there been less of a demand. Just as there can be freedom in the limitations of a distraction-free environment, I’d argue there is liberty in added mental constraints as well.

Deadlines as a constraint

Much has been written about the role of deadlines in the creative process, and they seem to serve different functions in different cases. I find that deadlines usually act as an important constraint and, without them, it would be nearly impossible for me to ever consider a project finished. There are usually limitless ways to improve upon the work I do and, if there’s no imperative for me to be done at a certain point, I will revise ad infinitum. (Hence, the personal site redesign that will never end – Coming Soon, Forever!). But if I have a clear deadline in mind, there’s a point when the obsessive tweaking has to stop. I reach a stage where I have to gather up the nerve to launch the thing.

Putting the pro in procrastination

Sometimes I’ve found that my tendency to procrastinate can help my productivity. (Ducks, as half the internet throws things at her.) I understand the reasons why procrastination can be harmful, and why it’s usually a good idea to work diligently and evenly towards a goal. I try to divide my projects up in a practical way, and sometimes I even pull it off. But for those tasks where you work aimlessly and no focus comes, or you find that every other to-do item is more appealing, sometimes you’re forced to bring it together at the last moment. And sometimes, this environment of stress is a formula for magic. Often when I’m down to the wire and have no choice but to produce, my mind shifts towards a new level of clarity. There’s no time to endlessly browse for inspiration, or experiment with convoluted solutions that lead nowhere.

Obviously a life lived perpetually on the edge of a deadline would be a rather stressful one, so it’s not a state of being I’d advocate for everyone, all the time. But every now and then, the work done when I’m down to the wire is my best.

Keep one toe outside your comfort zone

When I’m choosing new projects to take on, I often seek out work that involves an element of challenge. Whether it’s a design problem that will require some creative thinking, or a coding project that lends itself to using new technology like HTML5, I find a manageable level of difficulty to be an added bonus. The tension that comes from learning a new skill or rethinking an old standby is a useful constraint, as it keeps the work interesting, and ensures that I continue learning.

There you have it

Well, I think I’ve spilled most of my crazy secrets for forcing my easily distracted brain to focus. As with everything we web workers do, there are an infinite number of ways to encourage productivity. I hope you’ve found a few of these to be helpful, and please share your personal techniques in the comments. Have a happy and productive new year!",2010,Meagan Fisher,meaganfisher,2010-12-20T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2010/put-yourself-in-a-corner/,process
27,Putting Design on the Map,"The web can leave us feeling quite detached from the real world. Every site we make is really just a set of abstract concepts manifested as tools for communication and expression. At any minute, websites can disappear, overwritten by a newfangled version or simply gone. I think this is why so many of us have desires to create a product, write a book, or play with the internet of things. We need to keep in touch with the physical world and to prove (if only to ourselves) that we do make real things.

I could go on and on about preserving the web, the challenges of writing a book, or thoughts about how we can deal with the need to make real things. Instead, I’m going to explore something that gives us a direct relationship between a website and the physical world – maps.


	A map does not just chart, it unlocks and formulates meaning; it forms bridges between here and there, between disparate ideas that we did not know were previously connected.
Reif Larsen, The Selected Works of T.S. Spivet


The simplest form of map on a website tends to be used for showing where a place is and often directions on how to get to it. That’s an incredibly powerful tool. So why is it, then, that so many sites just plonk in a default Google Map and leave it as that? You wouldn’t just use dark grey Helvetica on every site, would you? Where’s the personality? Where’s the tailored experience? Where is the design?

Jumping into design

Let’s keep this simple – we all want to be better web folk, not cartographers. We don’t need to go into the history, mathematics or technology of map making (although all of those areas are really interesting to research). For the sake of our sanity, I’m going to gloss over some of the technical areas and focus on the practical concepts.

Tiles

If you’ve ever noticed a map loading in sections, it’s because it uses tiles that are downloaded individually instead of requiring the user to download everything that they might need. These tiles come in many styles and can be used for anything that covers large areas, such as base maps and data. You’ve seen examples of alternative base maps when you use Google Maps as Google provides both satellite imagery and road maps, both of which are forms of base maps. They are used to provide context for the real world, or any other world for that matter. A marker on a blank page is useless.

The tiles are representations of the physical; they do not have to be photographic imagery to provide context. This means you can design the map itself. The easiest way to conceive this is by comparing Google’s road maps with Ordnance Survey road maps. Everything about the two maps is different: the colours, the label fonts and the symbols used. Yet they still provide the exact same context (other maps may provide different context such as terrain contours).

 Comparison of Google Maps (top) and the Ordnance Survey (bottom).

Carefully designing the base map tiles is as important as any other part of the website. The most obvious, yet often overlooked, aspect are aesthetics and branding. Maps could fit in with the rest of the site; for example, by matching the colours and line weights, they can enhance the full design rather than inhibiting it. You’re also able to define the exact purpose of the map, so instead of showing everything you could specify which symbols or labels to show and hide.

I’ve not done any real research on the accessibility of base maps but, having looked at some of the available options, I think a focus on the typography of labels and the colour of the various elements is crucial. While you can choose to hide labels, quite often they provide the data required to make sense of the map. Therefore, make sure each zoom level is not too cluttered and shows enough to give context. Also be as careful when choosing the typeface as you are in any other design work. As for colour, you need to pay closer attention to issues like colour-blindness when using colour to convey information. Quite often a spectrum of colour will be used to show data, or to show the topography, so you need to be aware that some people struggle to see colour differences within a spectrum.

A nice example of a customised base map can be found on Michael K Owens’ check-in pages:

 One of Michael K Owens’ check-in pages.

As I’ve already mentioned, tiles are not just for base maps: they are also for data. In the screenshot below you can see how Plymouth Marine Laboratory uses tiles to show data with a spectrum of colour.

 A map from the Marine Operational Ecology data portal, showing data of adult cod in the North Sea.

Technical

You’re probably wondering how to design the base layers. I will briefly explain the concepts here and give you tools to use at the end of the article. If you’re worried about the time it takes to design the maps, don’t be – you can automate most of it. You don’t need to manually draw each tile for the entire world!

We’ve learned the importance of web standards the hard way, so you’ll be glad (and I won’t have to explain the advantages) of the standard for web mapping from the Open Geospatial Consortium (OGC) called the Web Map Service (WMS). You can use conventional file formats for the imagery but you need a way to query for the particular tiles to show for the area and zoom level, that is what WMS does.

Features

Tiles are great for covering large areas but sometimes you need specific smaller areas. We call these features and they usually consist of polygons, lines or points. Examples include postcode boundaries and routes between places, or even something more dynamic such as borders of nations changing over time.

Showing features on a map presents interesting design challenges. If the colour or shape conveys some kind of data beyond geographical boundaries then it needs to be made obvious. This is actually really hard, without building complicated user interfaces. For example, in the image below, is it obvious that there is a relationship between the colours? Does it need a way of showing what the colours represent?

 Choropleth map showing ranked postcode areas, using ViziCities.


	Features are represented by means of lines or colors; and the effective use of lines or colors requires more than knowledge of the subject – it requires artistic judgement.
Erwin Josephus Raisz, cartographer (1893–1968)


Where lots of boundaries are small and close together (such as a high street or shopping centre) will it be obvious where the boundaries are and what they represent? When designing maps, the hardest challenge is dealing with how the data is represented and how it is understood by the user.

Technical

As you probably gathered, we use WMS for tiles and another standard called the web feature service (WFS) for specific features. I need to stress that the difference between the two is that WMS is for tiling, whereas WFS is for specific features. Both can use similar file formats but should be used for their particular use cases. You may be wondering why you can’t just use a vector format such as KML, GeoJSON (or even SVG) – and you can – but the issue is the same as for WMS: you need a way to query the data to get the correct area and zoom level.

User interface

There is of course never a correct way to design an interface as there are so many different factors to take into consideration for each individual project. Maps can be used in a variety of ways, to provide simple information about directions or for complex visualisations to explain large amounts of data. I would like to just touch on matters that need to be taken into account when working with maps.

As I mentioned at the beginning, there are so many Google Maps on the web that people seem to think that its UI is the only way you can use a map. To some degree we don’t want to change that, as people know how to use them; but does every map require a zoom slider or base map toggle? In fact, does the user need to zoom at all? The answer to that one is generally yes, zooming does provide more context to where the map is zoomed in on.

In some cases you will need to let users choose what goes on the map (such as data layers or directions), so how do they show and hide the data? Does a simple drop-down box work, or do you need search? Google’s base map toggle is quite nice since it doesn’t offer many options yet provides very different contexts and styling.

It isn’t until we get to this point that we realise just plonking a quick Google map is really quite ridiculous, especially when compared to the amount of effort we make in other areas such as colour, typography or how the CSS is written. Each of these is important but we need to make sure the whole site is designed, and that includes the maps as much as any other content.

Putting it into practice

I could ramble on for ages about what we can do to customise maps to fit a site’s personality and correctly represent the data. I wanted to focus on concepts and standards because tools constantly change and it is never good to just rely on a tool to do the work. That said, there are a large variety of tools that will help you turn these concepts into reality. This is not a comparison; I just want to show you a few of the many options you have for maps on the web.

Google

OK, I’ve been quite critical so far about Google Maps but that is only because there is such a large amount of the default maps across the web. You can style them almost as much as anything else. They may not allow you to use custom WMS layers but Google Maps does have its own version, called styled maps. Using an array of map features (in the sense of roads and lakes and landmarks rather than the kind WFS is used for), you can style the base map with JavaScript. It even lets you toggle visibility, which helps to avoid the issue of too much clutter on the map. As well as lacking WMS, it doesn’t support WFS, but it does support GeoJSON and KML so you can still show the features on the map. You should also check out Google Maps Engine (the new version of My Maps), which provides an interface for creating more advanced maps with a selection of different base maps. A premium version is available, essentially for creating map-based visualisations, and it provides a step up from the main Google Maps offering. A useful feature in some cases is that it gives you access to many datasets.

Leaflet

You have probably seen Leaflet before. It isn’t quite as popular as Google Maps but it is definitely used often and for good reason. Leaflet is a lightweight open source JavaScript library. It is not a service so you don’t have to worry about API throttling and longevity. It gives you two options for tiling, the ability to use WMS, or to directly get the file using variables in the filename such as /{z}/{x}/{y}.png. I would recommend using WMS over dynamic file names because it is a standard, but the ability to use variables in a file name could be useful in some situations. Leaflet has a strong community and a well-documented API.

Mapbox

As a freemium service, Mapbox may not be perfect for every use case but it’s definitely worth looking into. The service offers incredible customisation tools as well as lots of data sources and hosting for the maps. It also provides plenty of libraries for the various platforms, so you don’t have to only use the maps on the web.

Mapbox is a service, though its map design tool is open source. Mapbox Studio is a vector-only version of their previous tool called Tilemill. Earlier I wrote about how typography and colour are as important to maps as they are to the rest of a website; if you thought, “Yes, but how on earth can I design those parts of a map?” then this is the tool for you. It is incredibly easy to use. Essentially each map has a stylesheet.

If you do not want to open a paid-for Mapbox account, then you can export the tiles (as PNG, SVG etc.) to use with other map tools.

OpenLayers

After a long wait, OpenLayers 3 has been released. It is similar to Leaflet in that it is a library not a service, but it has a much broader scope. During the last year I worked on the GIS portal at Plymouth Marine Laboratory (which I used to show the data tiles earlier), it essentially used OpenLayers 2 to create a web-based geographic information system, taking a large amount of data and permitting analysis (such as graphs) without downloading entire datasets and complicated software. OpenLayers 3 has improved greatly on the previous version in both performance and accessibility. It is the ideal tool for complex map-based web apps, though it can be used for the simple use cases too.

OpenStreetMap

I couldn’t write an article about maps on the web without at least mentioning OpenStreetMap. It is the place to go for crowd-sourced data about any location, with complete road maps and a strong API.

ViziCities

The newest project on this list is ViziCities by Robin Hawkes and Peter Smart. It is a open source 3-D visualisation tool, currently in the very early stages of development. The basic example shows 3-D buildings around the world using OpenStreetMap data. Robin has used it to create some incredible demos such as real-time London underground trains, and planes landing at an airport. Edward Greer and I are currently working on using ViziCities to show ideal housing areas based on particular personas. We chose it because the 3-D aspect gives us interesting possibilities for the data we are able to visualise (such as bar charts on the actual map instead of in the UI). Despite not being a completely stable, fully featured system, ViziCities is worth taking a look at for some use cases and is definitely going to go from strength to strength.



So there you have it – a whistle-stop tour of how maps can be customised. Now please stop plonking in maps without thinking about it and design them as you design the rest of your content.",2014,Shane Hudson,shanehudson,2014-12-11T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2014/putting-design-on-the-map/,design
54,Putting My Patterns through Their Paces,"Over the last few years, the conversation around responsive design has shifted subtly, focusing not on designing pages, but on patterns: understanding the small, reusable elements that comprise a larger design system. And given that many of those patterns are themselves responsive, learning to manage these small layout systems has become a big part of my work.
The thing is, the more pattern-driven work I do, the more I realize my design process has changed in a number of subtle, important ways. I suppose you might even say that pattern-driven design has, in a few ways, redesigned me.
Meet the Teaser
Here’s a recent example. A few months ago, some friends and I redesigned The Toast. (It was a really, really fun project, and we learned a lot.) Each page of the site is, as you might guess, stitched together from a host of tiny, reusable patterns. Some of them, like the search form and footer, are fairly unique, and used once per page; others are used more liberally, and built for reuse. The most prevalent example of these more generic patterns is the teaser, which is classed as, uh, .teaser. (Look, I never said I was especially clever.)
In its simplest form, a teaser contains a headline, which links to an article:

Fairly straightforward, sure. But it’s just the foundation: from there, teasers can have a byline, a description, a thumbnail, and a comment count. In other words, we have a basic building block (.teaser) that contains a few discrete content types – some required, some not. In fact, very few of those pieces need to be present; to qualify as a teaser, all we really need is a link and a headline. But by adding more elements, we can build slight variations of our teaser, and make it much, much more versatile.

        Nearly every element visible on this page is built out of our generic “teaser” pattern.
    
But the teaser variation I’d like to call out is the one that appears on The Toast’s homepage, on search results or on section fronts. In the main content area, each teaser in the list features larger images, as well as an interesting visual treatment: the byline and comment count were the most prominent elements within each teaser, appearing above the headline.

        The approved visual design of our teaser, as it appears on lists on the homepage and the section fronts.
    
And this is, as it happens, the teaser variation that gave me pause. Back in the old days – you know, like six months ago – I probably would’ve marked this module up to match the design. In other words, I would’ve looked at the module’s visual hierarchy (metadata up top, headline and content below) and written the following HTML:
<div class=""teaser"">
  <p class=""article-byline"">By <a href=""#"">Author Name</a></p>
  <a class=""comment-count"" href=""#"">126 <i>comments</i></a>
  <h1 class=""article-title""><a href=""#"">Article Title</a></h1>
  <p class=""teaser-excerpt"">Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur…</p>
</div>
But then I caught myself, and realized this wasn’t the best approach.
Moving Beyond Layout
Since I’ve started working responsively, there’s a question I work into every step of my design process. Whether I’m working in Sketch, CSSing a thing, or researching a project, I try to constantly ask myself:

What if someone doesn’t browse the web like I do?

…Okay, that doesn’t seem especially fancy. (And maybe you came here for fancy.) But as straightforward as that question might seem, it’s been invaluable to so many aspects of my practice. If I’m working on a widescreen layout, that question helps me remember the constraints of the small screen; if I’m working on an interface that has some enhancements for touch, it helps me consider other input modes as I work. It’s also helpful as a reminder that many might not see the screen the same way I do, and that accessibility (in all its forms) should be a throughline for our work on the web.
And that last point, thankfully, was what caught me here. While having the byline and comment count at the top was a lovely visual treatment, it made for a terrible content hierarchy. For example, it’d be a little weird if the page was being read aloud in a speaking browser: the name of the author and the number of comments would be read aloud before the title of the article with which they’re associated.
That’s why I find it’s helpful to begin designing a pattern’s hierarchy before its layout: to move past the visual presentation in front of me, and focus on the underlying content I’m trying to support. In other words, if someone’s encountering my design without the CSS I’ve written, what should their experience be?
So I took a step back, and came up with a different approach:
<div class=""teaser"">
  <h1 class=""article-title""><a href=""#"">Article Title</a></h1>
  <h2 class=""article-byline"">By <a href=""#"">Author Name</a></h2>
  <p class=""teaser-excerpt"">
    Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur…
    <a class=""comment-count"" href=""#"">126 <i>comments</i></a>
  </p>
</div>
Much, much better. This felt like a better match for the content I was designing: the headline – easily most important element – was at the top, followed by the author’s name and an excerpt. And while the comment count is visually the most prominent element in the teaser, I decided it was hierarchically the least critical: that’s why it’s at the very end of the excerpt, the last element within our teaser. And with some light styling, we’ve got a respectable-looking hierarchy in place:

Yeah, you’re right – it’s not our final design. But from this basic-looking foundation, we can layer on a bit more complexity. First, we’ll bolster the markup with an extra element around our title and byline:
<div class=""teaser"">
  <div class=""teaser-hed"">
    <h1 class=""article-title""><a href=""#"">Article Title</a></h1>
    <h2 class=""article-byline"">By <a href=""#"">Author Name</a></h2>
  </div>
  …
</div>
With that in place, we can use flexbox to tweak our layout, like so:
.teaser-hed {
  display: flex;
  flex-direction: column-reverse;
}
flex-direction: column-reverse acts a bit like a change in gravity within our teaser-hed element, vertically swapping its two children.

Getting closer! But as great as flexbox is, it doesn’t do anything for elements outside our container, like our little comment count, which is, as you’ve probably noticed, still stranded at the very bottom of our teaser.
Flexbox is, as you might already know, wonderful! And while it enjoys incredibly broad support, there are enough implementations of old versions of Flexbox (in addition to plenty of bugs) that I tend to use a feature test to check if the browser’s using a sufficiently modern version of flexbox. Here’s the one we used:
var doc = document.body || document.documentElement;
var style = doc.style;

if ( style.webkitFlexWrap == '' ||
    style.msFlexWrap == '' ||
    style.flexWrap == '' ) {
  doc.className += "" supports-flex"";
}
Eagle-eyed readers will note we could have used @supports feature queries to ask browsers if they support certain CSS properties, removing the JavaScript dependency. But since we wanted to serve the layout to IE we opted to write a little question in JavaScript, asking the browser if it supports flex-wrap, a property used elsewhere in the design. If the browser passes the test, then a class of supports-flex gets applied to our html element. And with that class in place, we can safely quarantine our flexbox-enabled layout from less-capable browsers, and finish our teaser’s design:
.supports-flex .teaser-hed {
  display: flex;
  flex-direction: column-reverse;
}
.supports-flex .teaser .comment-count {
  position: absolute;
  right: 0;
  top: 1.1em;
}
If the supports-flex class is present, we can apply our flexbox layout to the title area, sure – but we can also safely use absolute positioning to pull our comment count out of its default position, and anchor it to the top right of our teaser. In other words, the browsers that don’t meet our threshold for our advanced styles are left with an attractive design that matches our HTML’s content hierarchy; but the ones that pass our test receive the finished, final design.

And with that, our teaser’s complete.
Diving Into Device-Agnostic Design
This is, admittedly, a pretty modest application of flexbox. (For some truly next-level work, I’d recommend Heydon Pickering’s “Flexbox Grid Finesse”, or anything Zoe Mickley Gillenwater publishes.) And for such a simple module, you might feel like this is, well, quite a bit of work. And you’d be right! In fact, it’s not one layout, but two: a lightly styled content hierarchy served to everyone, with the finished design served conditionally to the browsers that can successfully implement it. But I’ve found that thinking about my design as existing in broad experience tiers – in layers – is one of the best ways of designing for the modern web. And what’s more, it works not just for simple modules like our teaser, but for more complex or interactive patterns as well.
Open video
    
        Even a simple search form can be conditionally enhanced, given a little layered thinking.
    
This more layered approach to interface design isn’t a new one, mind you: it’s been championed by everyone from Filament Group to the BBC. And with all the challenges we keep uncovering, a more device-agnostic approach is one of the best ways I’ve found to practice responsive design. As Trent Walton once wrote,

Like cars designed to perform in extreme heat or on icy roads, websites should be built to face the reality of the web’s inherent variability.

We have a weird job, working on the web. We’re designing for the latest mobile devices, sure, but we’re increasingly aware that our definition of “smartphone” is much too narrow. Browsers have started appearing on our wrists and in our cars’ dashboards, but much of the world’s mobile data flows over sub-3G networks. After all, the web’s evolution has never been charted along a straight line: it’s simultaneously getting slower and faster, with devices new and old coming online every day. With all the challenges in front of us, including many we don’t yet know about, a more device-agnostic, more layered design process can better prepare our patterns – and ourselves – for the future.
(It won’t help you get enough to eat at holiday parties, though.)",2015,Ethan Marcotte,ethanmarcotte,2015-12-10T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2015/putting-my-patterns-through-their-paces/,code
317,"Putting the World into ""World Wide Web""","Despite the fact that the Web has been international in scope from its inception, the predominant mass of Web sites are written in English or another left-to-right language. Sites are typically designed visually for Western culture, and rely on an enormous body of practices for usability, information architecture and interaction design that are by and large centric to the Western world.

There are certainly many reasons this is true, but as more and more Web sites realize the benefits of bringing their products and services to diverse, global markets, the more demand there will be on Web designers and developers to understand how to put the World into World Wide Web.

Internationalization

According to the W3C, Internationalization is:


	“…the design and development of a product, application or document content that enables easy localization for target audiences that vary in culture, region, or language.”


Many Web designers and developers have at least heard, if not read, about Internationalization. We understand that the Web is in fact worldwide, but many of us never have the opportunity to work with Internationalization. Or, when we do, think of it in purely technical terms, such as “which character set do I use?”

At first glance, it might seem to many that Internationalization is the act of making Web sites available to international audiences. And while that is in fact true, this isn’t done by broad-stroking techniques and technologies. Instead, it involves a far more narrow understanding of geographical, cultural and linguistic differences in specific areas of the world. This is referred to as localization and is the act of making a Web site make sense in the context of the region, culture and language(s) the people using the site are most familiar with.

Internationalization itself includes the following technical tasks:


	Ensuring no barrier exists to the localization of sites. Of critical importance in the planning stages of a site for Internationalized audiences, the role of the developer is to ensure that no barrier exists. This means being able to perform such tasks as enabling Unicode and making sure legacy character encodings are properly handled.
	Preparing markup and CSS with Internationalization in mind. The earlier in the site development process this occurs, the better. Issues such as ensuring that you can support bidirectional text, identifying language, and using CSS to support non-Latin typographic features.
	Enabling code to support local, regional, language or culturally related references. Examples in this category would include time/date formats, localization of calendars, numbering systems, sorting of lists and managing international forms of addresses.
	Empowering the user. Sites must be architected so the user can easily choose or implement the localized alternative most appropriate to them.


Localization

According to the W3C, Localization is the:


	…adaptation of a product, application or document content to meet the language, cultural and other requirements of a specific target market (a “locale”).


So here’s where we get down to thinking about the more sociological and anthropological concerns. Some of the primary localization issues are:


	Numeric formats. Different languages and cultures use numbering systems unlike ours. So, any time we need to use numbers, such as in an ordered list, we have to have a means of representing the accurate numbering system for the locale in question.
	Money, honey!  That’s right. I’ve got a pocketful of ugly U.S. dollars (why is U.S. money so unimaginative?). But I also have a drawer full of Japanese Yen, Australian Dollars, and Great British Pounds. Currency, how it’s calculated and how it’s represented is always a consideration when dealing with localization.
	Using symbols, icons and colors properly. Using certain symbols or icons on sites where they might offend or confuse is certainly not in the best interest of a site that wants to sell or promote a product, service or information type. Moreover, the colors we use are surprisingly persuasive – or detrimental. Think about colors that represent death, for example. In many parts of Asia, white is the color of death. In most of the Western world, black represents death. For Catholic Europe, shades of purple (especially lavender) have represented Christ on the cross and mourning since at least Victorian times. When Walt Disney World Europe launched an ad campaign using a lot of purple and very glitzy imagery, millions of dollars were lost as a result of this seeming subtle issue. Instead of experiencing joy and celebration at the ads, the European audience, particularly the French, found the marketing to be overly American, aggressive, depressing and basically unappealing. Along with this and other cultural blunders, Disney Europe has become a well-known case study for businesses wishing to become international. By failing to understand localization differences, and how powerful color and imagery act on the human psyche, designers and developers are put to more of a disadvantage when attempting to communicate with a given culture.
	Choosing appropriate references to objects and ideas. What seems perfectly natural in one culture in terms of visual objects and ideas can get confused in another environment. One of my favorite cases of this has to do with Gerber baby food. In the U.S., the baby food is marketed using a cute baby on the package. Most people in the U.S. culturally do not make an immediate association that what is being represented on the label is what is inside the container. However, when Gerber expanded to Africa, where many people don’t read, and where visual associations are less abstract, people made the inference that a baby on the cover of a jar of food represented what is in fact in the jar. You can imagine how confused and even angry people became. Using such approaches as a marketing ploy in the wrong locale can and will render the marketing a failure.


As you can see, the act of localization is one that can have profound impact on the success of a business or organization as it seeks to become available to more and more people across the globe.

Rethinking Design in the Context of Culture

While well-educated designers and those individuals working specifically for companies that do a lot of localization understand these nuances, most of us don’t get exposed to these ideas. Yet, we begin to see how necessary it becomes to have an awareness of not just the technical aspects of Internationalization, but the socio-cultural ones within localization.

What’s more, the bulk of information we have when it comes to designing sites typically comes from studies and work done on sites built in English and promoted to Western culture at large. We’re making a critical mistake by not including diverse languages and cultural issues within our usability and information architecture studies.

Consider the following design from the BBC:



In this case, we’re dealing with English, which is read left to right. We are also dealing with U.K. cultural norms. Notice the following:


	Location of of navigation
	Use of the color red
	Use of diverse symbols
	Mix of symbols, icons and photos
	Location of Search


Now look at this design, which is the Arabic version of the BBC News, read right to left, and dealing with cultural norms within the Arabic-speaking world.



Notice the following:


	Location of of navigation (location switches to the right)
	Use of the color blue (blue is considered the “safest” global color)
	No use of symbols and icons whatsoever
	Limitation of imagery to photos
	In most cases, the photos show people, not objects
	Location of Search


Admittedly, some choices here are more obvious than others in terms of why they were made. But one thing that stands out is that the placement of search is the same for both versions. Is this the result of a specific localization decision, or based on what we believe  about usability at large? This is exactly the kind of question that designers working on localization have to seek answers to, instead of relying on popular best practices and belief systems that exist for English-only Web sites.

It’s a Wide World Web After All

From this brief article on Internationalization, it becomes apparent that the art and science of creating sites for global audiences requires a lot more preparation and planning than one might think at first glance.  Developers and designers not working to address these issues specifically due to time or awareness will do well to at least understand the basic process of making sites more culturally savvy, and better prepared for any future global expansion.

One thing is certain: We not only are on a dramatic learning curve for designing and developing Web sites as it is, the need to localize sites is going to become more and more a part of the day to day work. Understanding aspects of what makes a site international and local will not only help you expand your skill set and make you more marketable, but it will also expand your understanding of the world and the people within it, how they relate to and use the Web, and how you can help make their experience the best one possible.",2005,Molly Holzschlag,mollyholzschlag,2005-12-09T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2005/putting-the-world-into-world-wide-web/,ux
277,Raising the Bar on Mobile,"One of the primary challenges of designing for mobile devices is that screen real estate is often in limited supply. Through the advocacy of Luke W and others, we’ve drawn comfort from the idea that this constraint ends up benefiting users and designers alike, from obvious advantages like portability and reach, to influencing our content strategy decisions through focus and restraint. But that doesn’t mean we shouldn’t take advantage of every last pixel of that screen we can snag!

As anyone who has designed a website for use on a smartphone can attest, there’s an awful lot of space on mobile screens dedicated to browser functions that would be better off toggled out of view. Unfortunately, the visibility of some of these elements is beyond our control, such as the buttons fixed to the bottom of the viewport in iOS’s Safari and the WebOS browser. However, in many devices, the address bar at the top can be manually hidden, and its absence frees up enough pixel room for a large, impactful heading, a critical piece of navigation, or even just a little more white space to air things out.

So, as my humble contribution to this most festive of web publications, today I’ll dig into the approach I used to hide the address bar in a browser-agnostic fashion for sites like BostonGlobe.com, and the jQuery Mobile framework.

Surveying the land

First, let’s assess the chromes of some popular, current mobile browsers. For example purposes, the following screen-captures feature the homepage of the Boston Globe site, without any address-bar-hiding logic in place.

Note: these captures are just mockups – actual experience on these platforms may vary.

 On the left is iOS5’s Safari (running on iPhone), and on the right is Windows Phone 7 (pre-Mango).

 BlackBerry 7 (left), and Android 2.3 (right).

 WebOS (left), Opera Mini (middle), and Opera Mobile (right).

Some browsers, such the default browsers on WebOS and BlackBerry 5, hide the bar automatically without any developer intervention, but many of them don’t. Of these, we can only manually hide the address bar on iOS Safari and Android (according to Opera Web Opener, Mike Taylor, some discussion is underway for support in Opera Mini and Mobile as well, which would be great!). This is unfortunate, but iOS and Android are incredibly popular, so let’s direct our focus there.

Great API, or greatest API?

As it turns out, iOS and Android not only allow you to hide the address bar, they use the same JavaScript method to do so, too (this shouldn’t be surprising, given that they are both WebKit browsers, but nothing expected happens in mobile). However, the method they use is not exactly intuitive. You might set out looking for a JavaScript API dedicated to this purpose, like, say, window.toolbar.hide(), but alas, to hide the address bar you need to use the window.scrollTo method!

window.scrollTo(0, 0);

The scrollTo method is not new, it’s just this particular use of it that is. For the uninitiated, scrollTo is designed to scroll a document to a particular set of coordinates, assuming the document is large enough to scroll to that spot. The method accepts two arguments: a left coordinate; and a top coordinate. It’s both simple and supported well pretty much everywhere. In iOS and Android, these coordinates are calculated from the top of the browser’s viewport, just below the address bar (interestingly, it seems that some platforms like BlackBerry 6 treat the top of the browser chrome as 0 instead, meaning the page content is closer to 20px from the top).

Anyway, by passing the coordinates 0, 0 to the scrollTo method, the browser will jump to the top of the page and pull the address bar out of view! Of course, if a quick call to scrollTo was all we need to do to hide the address bar in iOS and Android, this article would be pretty short, and nothing new. Unfortunately, the first issue we need to deal with is that this method alone will not usually do the trick: it must be called after the page has finished loading.

The browser gives us a load event for just that purpose, so we’ll wrap our scrollTo method in it and continue on our merry way! We’ll use the standard, addEventListener method to bind the the load event, passing arguments for event name load, and a callback function to execute when the event is triggered.

window.addEventListener(""load"",function() {
    window.scrollTo(0, 0);
});

For the sake of preventing errors in those using browsers that don’t support addEventListener, such as Internet Explorer 8 and under, let’s make sure that method exists before we use it:

if( window.addEventListener ){
    window.addEventListener(""load"",function() {
        window.scrollTo(0, 0);
    });
}

Now we’re getting somewhere, but we must also call the method after the load event’s default behavior has been applied. For this, we can use the setTimeout method, delaying its execution to after the load event has run its course.

if( window.addEventListener ){
    window.addEventListener(""load"",function() {
        setTimeout(function(){
            window.scrollTo(0, 0);
        }, 0);
    });
}

Sweet sugar of Christmas! Hit this demo in iOS and watch that address bar drift up and away!

Not so fast…

We’ve got a little problem: the approach above does work in iOS but, in some cases, it works a little too well. In the process of applying this behavior, we’ve broken one of the primary tenets of responsible web development: don’t break the browser’s default behaviour. This usability rule of thumb is often violated by developers with even the best of intentions, from breaking the browser’s back button through unrecorded Ajax page refreshes, to fancy momentum touch scrolling scripts that can wreak havoc in all but the most sophisticated of devices. In this case, we’ve prevented the browser’s native support of deep-linking to sections of a page (a hash identifier in the URL matching a page element’s id attribute, for example, http://example.com#contact) from working properly, because our script always scrolls to the top.

To avoid this collision, we’ll need to detect whether a deep link, or hash, is present in the URL before applying our logic. We can do this by ensuring that the location.hash property is falsey:

if( !window.location.hash && window.addEventListener ){
    window.addEventListener( ""load"",function() {
        setTimeout(function(){
            window.scrollTo(0, 0);
        }, 0);
    });
}

Still works great! And a quick test using a hash-based URL confirms that our script will not execute when a deep anchor is in play. Now iOS is looking sharp, and we’ve added our feature defensively to avoid conflicts.



Now, on to Android…

Wait. You didn’t expect that we could write code for one browser and be finished, right? Of course you didn’t. I mentioned earlier that Android uses the same method for getting rid of the scrollbar, but I left out the fact that the arguments it prefers vary slightly, but significantly, from iOS. Bah!

Differering from the earlier logic from iOS, to remove the address bar on Android’s default browser, you need to pass a Y coordinate of 1 instead of 0. Aside from being just plain odd, this is particularly unfortunate because to any other browser on the planet, 1px is a very real, however small, distance from the top of the page!

window.scrollTo( 0, 1 );

Looks like we’re going to need a fork…

R UA Android?

At this point, some developers might decide to simply not support this feature in Android, and more determined devs might decide that a quick check of the User Agent string would be a reliable way to determine the browser and tweak the scroll value accordingly. Neither of those decisions would be tragic, but in the spirit of cross-browser and future-friendly development, I’ll propose an alternative.

By this point, it should be clear that neither of the implementations above offer a particularly intuitive way to hide an address bar. As such, one might be skeptical that these approaches will stick around very long in their present state in either browser. Perhaps at some point, Android will decide to use 0 like iOS, making our lives a little easier, or maybe some new browser will decide to model their address bar hiding method after one of these implementations. In any case, detecting the User Agent only allows us to apply logic based on the known present, and in the world of mobile, let’s face it, the present is already the past.

Writing a check

In this next step of today’s technique, we’ll apply some logic to quickly determine the behavior model of the browser we’re using, then capitalize on that model – without caring which browser it happens to come from – by applying the appropriate scroll distance.

To do this, we’ll rely on a fortunate side effect of Android’s implementation, which is when you programatically scroll the page to 1 using scrollTo, Android will report that it’s still at 0 because oddly enough, it is! Of course, any other browser in this situation will report a scroll distance of 1. Thus, by scrolling the page to 1, then asking the browser its scroll distance, we can use this artifact of their wacky implementation to our advantage and scroll to the location that makes sense for the browser in play.

Getting the scroll distance

To pull off our test, we’ll need to ask the browser for its current scroll distance. The methods for getting scroll distance are not entirely standardized across popular browsers, so we’ll need to use some cross-browser logic. The following scroll distance function is similar to what you’d find in a library like jQuery. It checks the few common ways of getting scroll distance before eventually falling back to 0 for safety’s sake (that said, I’m unaware of any browsers that won’t return a numeric value from one of the first three properties).

// scrollTop getter
function getScrollTop(){
    return scrollTop  = window.pageYOffset ||
document.compatMode === ""CSS1Compat"" && document.documentElement.scrollTop ||
document.body.scrollTop || 0;
}

In order to execute that code above, the body object (referenced here as document.body) will need to be defined already, or we’ll risk an error. To determine that it’s defined, we can run a quick timer to execute code as soon as that object is defined and ready for use.

var bodycheck = setInterval(function(){
    if( document.body ){
        clearInterval( bodycheck );
        //more logic can go here!!
    }   
}, 15 );

Above, we’ve defined a 15 millisecond interval called bodycheck that checks if document.body is defined and, if so, clears itself of running again. Within that if statement, we can extend our logic further to run other code, such as our check for the scroll distance, defined via the variable scrollTop below:

var scrollTop,
    bodycheck = setInterval(function(){
    if( document.body ){
        clearInterval( bodycheck );
        scrollTop = getScrollTop();
    }   
}, 15 );

With this working, we can immediately scroll to 1, then check the scroll distance when the body is defined. If the distance reports 1, we’re likely in a non-Android browser, so we’ll scroll back to 0 and clean up our mess.

window.scrollTo( 0, 1 );

var scrollTop,
    bodycheck = setInterval(function(){
    if( document.body ){
        clearInterval( bodycheck );
        scrollTop = getScrollTop();
        window.scrollTo( 0, scrollTop === 1 ? 0 : 1 );
    }   
}, 15 );

Cashing in

All of the pieces are written now, so all we need to do is combine them with our previous logic for scrolling when the window is loaded, and we’ll have a cross-browser solution of which John Resig would be proud. Here’s our combined code snippet, with some formatting updates rolled in as well:

(function( win ){
	var doc = win.document;

	// If there’s a hash, or addEventListener is undefined, stop here
	if( !location.hash && win.addEventListener ){
		//scroll to 1
		window.scrollTo( 0, 1 );
		var scrollTop = 1,
			getScrollTop = function(){
				return win.pageYOffset || doc.compatMode = ""CSS1Compat"" && doc.documentElement.scrollTop || doc.body.scrollTop || 0;
			},
			//reset to 0 on bodyready, if needed
			bodycheck = setInterval(function(){
				if( doc.body ){
					clearInterval( bodycheck );
					scrollTop = getScrollTop();
					win.scrollTo( 0, scrollTop = 1 ? 0 : 1 );
				}	
			}, 15 );
		win.addEventListener( “load”, function(){
			setTimeout(function(){
					//reset to hide addr bar at onload
					win.scrollTo( 0, scrollTop === 1 ? 0 : 1 );
			}, 0);
		} );
	}
})( this );
View code example

And with that, we’ve got a bunch more room to play with on both iOS and Android.



Break out the eggnog

…because we’re not done yet! In the spirit of making our script act more defensively, there’s still another use case to consider. It was essential that we used the window’s load event to trigger our scripting, but on pages with a lot of content, its use can come at a cost. Often, a user will begin interacting with a page, scrolling down as they read, before the load event has fired. In those situations, our script will jump the user back to the top of the page, resulting in a jarring experience.

To prevent this problem from occurring, we’ll need to ensure that the page has not been scrolled beyond a certain amount. We can add a simple check using our getScrollTop function again, this time ensuring that its value is not greater than 20 pixels or so, accounting for a small tolerance.

if( getScrollTop() < 20 ){
    //reset to hide addr bar at onload
    window.scrollTo( 0, scrollTop === 1 ? 0 : 1 );
}

And with that, we’re pretty well protected! Here’s a final demo.

The completed script can be found on Github (full source: https://gist.github.com/1183357 ). It’s MIT licensed. Feel free to use it anywhere or any way you’d like!

Your thoughts?

I hope this article provides you with a browser-agnostic approach to hiding the address bar that you can use in your own projects today. Perhaps alternatively, the complications involved in this approach convinced you that doing this well is more trouble than it’s worth and, depending on the use case, that could be a fair decision. But at the very least, I hope this demonstrates that there’s a lot of work involved in pulling off this small task in only two major platforms, and that there’s a real need for standardization in this area.

Feel free to leave a comment or criticism and I’ll do my best to answer in a timely fashion.

Thanks, everyone!

Some parting notes

I scream, you scream…

At the time of writing, I was not able to test this method on the latest Android 4.0 (Ice Cream Sandwich) build. According to Sencha Touch’s browser scorecard, the browser in 4.0 may have a different way of managing the address bar, so I’ll post in the comments once I get a chance to dig into it further.

Short pages get no love

Today’s technique only works when the page is as tall, or taller than, the device’s available screen height, so that the address bar may be scrolled out of view. On a short page, you might work around this issue by applying a minimum height to the body element ( body { min-height: 460px; } ), but given the variety of screen sizes out there, not to mention changes in orientation, it’s tough to find a value that makes much sense (unless you manipulate it with JavaScript).",2011,Scott Jehl,scottjehl,2011-12-20T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2011/raising-the-bar-on-mobile/,design
131,Random Lines Made With Mesh,"I know that Adobe Illustrator can be a bit daunting for people who aren’t really advanced users of the program, but you would be amazed by how easy you can create cool effects or backgrounds. In this short tutorial I show you how to create a cool looking background only in 5 steps. 

Step 1 – Create Lines



Create lines using random widths and harmonious suitable colors. If you get stuck on finding the right colors, check out Adobe’s Kuler and start experimenting.

Step 2 – Convert Strokes to Fills



Select all lines and convert them to fills. Go to the Object menu, select Path > Outline Stroke. Select the Rectangle tool and draw 1 big rectangle on top the lines. Give the rectangle a suitable color. With the rectangle still selected, go to the Object menu, select Arrange > Send to Back.

Step 3 – Convert to Mesh



Select all objects by pressing the command key (for Mac users), control key (for Windows users) + the “a” key. Go to the Object menu and select the Envelope Distort > Make with Mesh option. Enter 2 rows and 2 columns. Check the preview box to see what happens and click the OK button.

Step 4 – Play Around with The Mesh Points 



Play around with the points of the mesh using the Direct Selection tool (the white arrow in the Toolbox). Click on the top right point of the mesh. Once you’re starting to drag hold down the shift key and move the point upwards. 



Now start dragging the bezier handles on the mesh to achieve the effect as shown in the above picture. Of course you can try out all kind of different effects here. 

The Final Result



This is an example of how the final result can look. You can try out all kinds of different shapes dragging the handles of the mesh points. This is just one of the many results you can get. So next time you haven’t got inspiration for a background of a header, a banner or whatever, just experiment with a few basic shapes such as lines and try out the ‘Envelope Distort’ options in Illustrator or the ‘Make with Mesh’ option and experiment, you’ll be amazed by the unexpected creative results.",2006,Veerle Pieters,veerlepieters,2006-12-08T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2006/random-lines-made-with-mesh/,design
235,"Real Animation Using JavaScript, CSS3, and HTML5 Video","When I was in school to be a 3-D animator, I read a book called Timing for Animation. Though only 152 pages long, it’s essentially the bible for anyone looking to be a great animator. In fact, Pixar chief creative officer John Lasseter used the first edition as a reference when he was an animator at Walt Disney Studios in the early 1980s.

In the book, authors John Halas and Harold Whitaker advise:


	Timing is the part of animation which gives meaning to movement. Movement can easily be achieved by drawing the same thing in two different positions and inserting a number of other drawings between the two. The result on the screen will be movement; but it will not be animation.


But that’s exactly what we’re doing with CSS3 and JavaScript: we’re moving elements, not animating them. We’re constantly specifying beginning and end states and allowing the technology to interpolate between the two. And yet, it’s the nuances within those middle frames that create the sense of life we’re looking for.

As bandwidth increases and browser rendering grows more consistent, we can create interactions in different ways than we’ve been able to before. We’re encountering motion more and more on sites we’d generally label ‘static.’ However, this motion is mostly just movement, not animation. It’s the manipulation of an element’s properties, most commonly width, height, x- and y-coordinates, and opacity.

So how do we create real animation?

The metaphor

In my experience, animation is most believable when it simulates, exaggerates, or defies the real world. A bowling ball falls differently than a racquetball. They each have different weights and sizes, which affect the way they land, bounce, and impact other objects.

This is a major reason that JavaScript animation frequently feels mechanical; it doesn’t complete a metaphor. Expanding and collapsing a <div> feels very different than a opening a door or unfolding a piece of paper, but it often shouldn’t. The interaction itself should tie directly to the art direction of a page.

Physics

Understanding the physics of a situation is key to creating convincing animation, even if your animation seeks to defy conventional physics. Isaac Newton’s first law of motion’s_laws_of_motion states, “Every body remains in a state of rest or uniform motion (constant velocity) unless it is acted upon by an external unbalanced force.” Once a force acts upon an object, the object’s shape can change accordingly, depending on the strength of the force and the mass of the object. Another nugget of wisdom from Halas and Whitaker:


	All objects in nature have their own weight, construction, and degree of flexibility, and therefore each behaves in its own individual way when a force acts upon it. This behavior, a combination of position and timing, is the basis of animation. The basic question which an animator is continually asking himself is this: “What will happen to this object when a force acts upon it?” And the success of his animation largely depends on how well he answers this question.


In animating with CSS3 and JavaScript, keep physics in mind. How ‘heavy’ is the element you’re interacting with? What kind of force created the action? A gentle nudge? A forceful shove? These subtleties will add a sense of realism to your animations and make them much more believable to your users.

Misdirection

Magicians often use misdirection to get their audience to focus on one thing rather than another. They fool us into thinking something happened that actually didn’t.

Animation is the same, especially on a screen. By changing the arrangement of pixels on screen at a fast enough rate, your eyes fool your mind into thinking an object is actually in motion. 

Another important component of misdirecting in animation is the use of multiple objects. Try to recall a cartoon where a character vanishes. More often, the character makes some sort of exaggerated motion (this is called anticipation) then disappears, and a puff a smoke follows. That smoke is an extra element, but it goes a long way into make you believe that character actually disappeared.

Very rarely does a vanishing character’s opacity simply go from one hundred per cent to zero. That’s not believable. So why do we do it with <div>s?

Armed with the ammunition of metaphors and misdirection, let’s code an example.

Shake, rattle, and roll

(These demos require at least a basic understanding of jQuery and CSS3. Run away if your’re afraid, or brush up on CSS animation and resources for learning jQuery. Also, these demos use WebKit-specific features and are best viewed in the latest version of Safari, so performance in other browsers may vary.)

We often see the design pattern of clicking a link to reveal content. Our “first demo”:”/examples/2010/real-animation/demo1/ shows us exactly that. It uses jQuery’s “ slideDown()”:http://api.jquery.com/slideDown/ method, as many instances do.

But what force acted on the <div> that caused it to open? Did pressing the button unlatch some imaginary hook? Did it activate an unlocking sequence with some gears?

Take 2

Our second demo is more explicit about what happens: the button fell on the <div> and shook its content loose. Here’s how it’s done. 

function clickHandler(){
	$('#button').addClass('animate');
	return false;
}

Clicking the link adds a class of animate to our button. That class has the following CSS associated with it:

<style>
	.animate {
		-webkit-animation-name: ANIMATE;
		-webkit-animation-duration: 0.25s;
		-webkit-animation-iteration-count: 1;
		-webkit-animation-timing-function: ease-in;
	}
	@-webkit-keyframes ANIMATE {
		from {
		top: 72px;
		}
		to {
			top: 112px;
		}
	}
</style>

In our keyframe definition, we’ve specified from and to states. This is great, because we can be explicit about how an object starts and finishes moving. 

What’s also extra handy is that these CSS keyframes broadcast events that you can react to with JavaScript. In this example, we’re listening to the webkitAnimationEnd event and opening the <div> only when the sequence is complete. Here’s that code.

function attachAnimationEventHandlers(){
	var wrap = document.getElementById('wrap');
	wrap.addEventListener('webkitAnimationEnd', function($e) {
		switch($e.animationName){
			case ""ANIMATE"" :
			openMain();
			break;
			default:
		}
	}, false);
}
function openMain(){
	$('#main .inner').slideDown('slow');
}

(For more info on handling animation events, check out the documentation at the Safari Reference Library.)

Take 3

The problem with the previous demo is that the subtleties of timing aren’t evident. It still feels a bit choppy.

For our third demo, we’ll use percentages instead of keywords so that we can insert as many points as we need to communicate more realistic timing. The percentages allow us to add the keys to well-timed animation: anticipation, hold, release, and reaction. 

<style>
	@-webkit-keyframes ANIMATE {
		0% {
			top: 72px;
		}
		40% { /* anticipation */
			top: 57px;
		}
		70% { /* hold */
			top: 56px;
		}
		80% { /* release */
			top: 112px;
		}
		100% { /* return */
			top: 72px;
		}
	}
</style>

Take 4

The button animation is starting to feel much better, but the reaction of the <div> opening seems a bit slow.

This fourth demo uses jQuery’s delay() method to time the opening precisely when we want it. Since we know the button’s animation is one second long and its reaction starts at eighty per cent of that, that puts our delay at 800ms (eighty per cent of one second). However, here’s a little pro tip: let’s start the opening at 750ms instead. The extra fifty milliseconds makes it feel more like the opening is a reaction to the exact hit of the button. Instead of listening for the webkitAnimationEnd event, we can start the opening as soon as the button is clicked, and the movement plays on the specified delay.

function clickHandler(){
	$('#button').addClass('animate');
	openMain();
	return false;
}
function openMain(){
	$('#main .inner').delay(750).slideDown('slow');
}

Take 5

We can tweak the timing of that previous animation forever, but that’s probably as close as we’re going to get to realistic animation with CSS and JavaScript. However, for some extra sauce, we could relegate the whole animation in our final demo to a video sequence which includes more nuances and extra elements for misdirection.

Here’s the basis of video replacement. Add a <video> element to the page and adjust its opacity to zero. Once the button is clicked, fade the button out and start playing the video. Once the video is finished playing, fade it out and bring the button back.

function clickHandler(){
	if($('#main .inner').is(':hidden')){
		$('#button').fadeTo(100, 0);
		$('#clickVideo').fadeTo(100, 1, function(){
			var clickVideo = document.getElementById('clickVideo');
			clickVideo.play();
			setTimeout(removeVideo, 2400);
			openMain();
		});
	}
	return false;
}
function removeVideo(){
	$('#button').fadeTo(500, 1);
	$('#clickVideo').fadeOut('slow');
}
function openMain(){
	$('#main .inner').delay(1100).slideDown('slow');
}

Wrapping up

I’m no JavaScript expert by any stretch. I’m sure a lot of you scripting wizards out there could write much cleaner and more efficient code, but I hope this gives you an idea of the theory behind more realistic motion with the technology we’re using most. This is just one model of creating more convincing animation, but you can create countless variations of this, including…


	Exporting <video> animations in 3-D animation tools or 2-D animation tools like Flash or After Effects
	Using <canvas> or SVG instead of <video>
	Employing specific JavaScript animation frameworks
	Making use of all the powerful properties of CSS Transforms and CSS Animation
	Trying out emerging CSS3 animation tools like Sencha Animator


If it wasn’t already apparent, these demos show an exaggerated example and probably aren’t practical in a lot of environments. However, there are a handful of great sites out there that honor animation techniques—metaphor, physics, and misdirection, among others—like Benjamin De Cock’s vCard, 20 Things I Learned About Browsers and the Web by Fantasy Interactive, and the Nike Snowboarding site by Ian Coyle and HEGA. They’re wonderful testaments to what you can do to aid interaction for users.

My goal was to show you the ‘why’ and the ‘how.’ Your charge is to discern the ‘where’ and the ‘when.’ Happy animating!",2010,Dan Mall,danmall,2010-12-15T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2010/real-animation-using-javascript-css3-and-html5-video/,code
173,Real Fonts and Rendering: The New Elephant in the Room,"My friend, the content strategist Kristina Halvorson, likes to call content “the elephant in the room” of web design. She means it’s the huge problem that no one on the web development team or client side is willing to acknowledge, face squarely, and plan for. 

A typical web project will pass through many helpful phases of research, and numerous beneficial user experience design iterations, while the content—which in most cases is supposed to be the site’s primary focus—gets handled haphazardly at the end. Hence, elephant in the room, and hence also artist Kevin Cornell’s recent use of elephantine imagery to illustrate A List Apart articles on the subject. But I digress.

Without discounting the primacy of the content problem, we web design folk have now birthed ourselves a second lumbering mammoth, thanks to our interest in “real fonts on the web“ (the unfortunate name we’ve chosen for the recent practice of serving web-licensed fonts via CSS’s decade-old @font-face declaration—as if Georgia, Verdana, and Times were somehow unreal). 

For the fact is, even bulletproof and mo’ bulletproofer @font-face CSS syntax aren’t really bulletproof if we care about looks and legibility across browsers and platforms.

Hyenas in the Breakfast Nook

The problem isn’t just that foundries have yet to agree on a standard font format that protects their intellectual property. And that, even when they do, it will be a while before all browsers support that standard—leaving aside the inevitable politics that impede all standardization efforts. Those are problems, but they’re not the elephant. Call them the coyotes in the room, and they’re slowly  being tamed.

Nor is the problem that workable, scalable business models (of which Typekit‘s is the most visible and, so far, the most successful) are still being shaken out and tested. The quality and ease of use of such services, their stability on heavily visited sites (via massively backed-up server clusters), and the fairness and sustainability of their pricing will determine how licensing and serving “real fonts” works in the short and long term for the majority of designer/developers.

Nor is our primary problem that developers with no design background may serve ugly or illegible fonts that take forever to load, or fonts that take a long time to download and then display as ordinary system fonts (as happens on, say, about.validator.nu). Ugliness and poor optimization on the web are nothing new. That support for @font-face in Webkit and Mozilla browsers (and for TrueType fonts converted to Embedded OpenType in Internet Explorer) adds deadly weapons to the non-designer’s toolkit is not the technology’s fault. JavaScript and other essential web technologies are equally susceptible to abuse. 

Beauty is in the Eye of the Rendering Engine

No, the real elephant in the room—the thing few web developers and no “web font” enthusiasts are talking about—has to do with legibility (or lack thereof) and aesthetics (or lack thereof) across browsers and platforms. Put simply, even fonts optimized for web use (which is a whole thing: ask a type designer) will not look good in every browser and OS. That’s because every browser treats hinting differently, as does every OS, and every OS version. 

Firefox does its own thing in both Windows and Mac OS, and Microsoft is all over the place because of its need to support multiple generations of Windows and Cleartype and all kinds of hardware simultaneously. Thus “real type” on a single web page can look markedly different, and sometimes very bad, on different computers at the same company. If that web page is your company’s, your opinion of “web fonts” may suffer, and rightfully. (The advantage of Apple’s closed model, which not everyone likes, is that it allows the company to guarantee the quality and consistency of user experience.)  

As near as my font designer friends and I can make out, Apple’s Webkit in Safari and iPhone ignores hinting and creates its own, which Apple thinks is better, and which many web designers think of as “what real type looks like.” The forked version of Webkit in Chrome, Android, and Palm Pre also creates its own hinting, which is close to iPhone’s—close enough that Apple, Palm, and Google could propose it as a standard for use in all browsers and platforms. Whether Firefox would embrace a theoretical Apple and Google standard is open to conjecture, and I somehow have difficulty imagining Microsoft buying in—even though they know the web is more and more mobile, and that means more and more of their customers are viewing web content in some version of Webkit.

The End of Simple

There are ways around this ugly type ugliness, but they involve complicated scripting and sniffing—the very nightmares from which web standards and the simplicity of @font-face were supposed to save us. I don’t know that even mighty Typekit has figured out every needed variation yet (although, working with foundries, they probably will). 

For type foundries, the complexity and expense of rethinking classic typefaces to survive in these hostile environments may further delay widespread adoption of web fonts and the resolution of licensing and formatting issues. The complexity may also force designers (even those who prefer to own) to rely on a hosted rental model simply to outsource and stay current with the detection and programming required.

Forgive my tears. I stand in a potter’s field of ideas like “Keep it simple,” by a grave whose headstone reads “Write once, publish everywhere.”",2009,Jeffrey Zeldman,jeffreyzeldman,2009-12-22T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2009/real-fonts-and-rendering/,design
103,Recession Tips For Web Designers,"For web designers, there are four keys to surviving bad economic times: do good work, charge a fair price, lower your overhead, and be sure you are communicating with your client. As a reader of 24 ways, you already do good work, so let’s focus on the rest.

I know something about surviving bad times, having started my agency, Happy Cog, at the dawn of the dot-com bust. Of course, the recession we’re in now may end up making the dot-com bust look like the years of bling and gravy. But the bust was rough enough at the time. 

Bad times are hard on overweight companies and over-leveraged start-ups, but can be kind to freelancers and small agencies. Clients who once had money to burn and big agencies to help them burn it suddenly consider the quality of work more important than the marquee value of the business card. Fancy offices and ten people at every meeting are out. A close relationship with an individual or small team that listens is in.

Thin is in

If you were good in client meetings when you were an employee, print business cards and pick a name for your new agency. Once some cash rolls in, see an accountant. 

If the one-person entrepreneur model isn’t you, it’s no problem. Form a virtual agency with colleagues who complement your creative, technical, and business skills. Athletics is a Brooklyn-based multi-disciplinary “art and design collective.” Talk about low overhead: they don’t have a president, a payroll, or a pension plan. But that hasn’t stopped clients like adidas, Nike, MTV, HBO, Disney, DKNY, and Sundance Channel from knocking on their (virtual) doors.

Running a traditional business is like securing a political position in Chicago: it costs a fortune. That’s why bad times crush so many companies. But you are a creature of the internets. You don’t need an office to do great work. I ran Happy Cog out of my apartment for far longer than anyone realized. My clients, when they learned my secret, didn’t care. 

Keep it lean: if you can budget your incoming freelance money, you don’t have to pay yourself a traditional salary. Removing the overhead associated with payroll means more of the budget stays in your pocket, enabling you to price your projects competitively, while still within industry norms. (Underpricing is uncool, and clients who knowingly choose below-market-rate vendors tend not to treat those vendors with respect.)

Getting gigs

Web design is a people business. If things are slow, email former clients. If you just lost your job, email former agency clients with whom you worked closely to inform them of your freelance business and find out how they’re doing. Best practice: focus the email on wishing them a happy holiday and asking how they’re doing. Let your email signature file tell them you’re now the president of Your Name Design. Leading with the fact that you just lost your job may earn sympathy (or commiseration: the client may have lost her job, too) but it’s not exactly a sure-fire project getter.

The qualities that help you land a web design project are the same in good times or bad. Have a story to tell about the kind of services you offer, and the business benefits they provide. (If you design with web standards, you already have one great story line. What are the others?) 

Don’t be shy about sharing your story, but don’t make it the focus of the meeting. The client is the focus. Before you meet her, learn as much as you can about her users, her business, and her competitors. At the very least, read her site’s About pages, and spend some quality time with Google. 

Most importantly, go to the meeting knowing how much you don’t know. Arrive curious, and armed with questions. Maintain eye contact and keep your ears open. If a point you raise causes two people to nod at each other, follow up on that point, don’t just keep grinding through your Keynote presentation. 

If you pay attention and think on your feet, it tells the potential client that they can expect you to listen and be flexible. (Clients are like unhappy spouses: they’re dying for someone to finally listen.) If you stick to a prepared presentation, it might send the message that you are inflexible or nervous or both. “Nervous” is an especially bad signal to send. It indicates that you are either dishonest or inexperienced. Neither quality invites a client to sign on. Web design is a people business for the client, too: they should feel that their interactions with you will be pleasant and illuminating. And that you’ll listen. Did I mention that?

Give it time

Securing clients takes longer and requires more effort in a recession. If two emails used to land you a gig, it will now take four, plus an in-person meeting, plus a couple of follow-up calls. This level of salesmanship is painful to geeks and designers, who would rather spend four hours kerning type or debugging a style sheet than five minutes talking business on the telephone. I know. I’m the same way. But we must overcome our natural shyness and inwardness if we intend not to fish our next meal out of a neighbor’s garbage can. 

As a bonus, once the recession ends, your hard-won account management skills will help you take your business to the next level. By the time jobs are plentiful again, you may not want to work for anyone but yourself. You’ll be a captain of our industry. And talented people will be emailing to ask you for a job.",2008,Jeffrey Zeldman,jeffreyzeldman,2008-12-24T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2008/recession-tips-for-web-designers/,business
92,Redesigning the Media Query,"Responsive web design is showing us that designing content is more important than designing containers. But if you’ve given RWD a serious try, you know that shifting your focus from the container is surprisingly hard to do. There are many factors and
instincts working against you, and one culprit is a perpetrator you’d least suspect.

The media query is the ringmaster of responsive design. It lets us establish the rules of the game and gives us what we need most: control. However, like some kind of evil double agent, the media query is actually working against you.

Its very nature diverts your attention away from content and forces you to focus on the container.

The very act of choosing a media query value means choosing a screen size.

Look at the history of the media query—it’s always been about the container. Values like screen, print, handheld and tv don’t have anything to do with content. The modern media query lets us choose screen dimensions, which is great because it makes RWD possible. But it’s still the act of choosing something that is completely unpredictable.

Content should dictate our breakpoints, not the container. In order to get our focus back to the only thing that matters, we need a reengineered media query—one that frees us from thinking about screen dimensions. A media query that works for your content, not the window. Fortunately, Sass 3.2 is ready and willing to take on this challenge.

Thinking in Columns

Fluid grids never clicked for me. I feel so disoriented and confused by their squishiness. Responsive design demands their use though, right?

I was ready to surrender until I found a grid that turned my world upright again. The Frameless Grid by Joni Korpi demonstrates that column and gutter sizes can stay fixed. As the screen size changes, you simply add or remove columns to accommodate. This made sense to me and armed with this concept I was able to give Sass the first component it needs to rewrite the media query: fixed column and gutter size variables.

$grid-column: 60px;
$grid-gutter: 20px;

We’re going to want some resolution independence too, so let’s create a function that converts those nasty pixel values into ems.

@function em($px, $base: $base-font-size) {
	@return ($px / $base) * 1em;
}

We now have the components needed to figure out the width of multiple columns in ems. Let’s put them together in a function that will take any number of columns and return the fixed width value of their size.

@function fixed($col) {
	@return $col * em($grid-column + $grid-gutter)
}

With the math in place we can now write a mixin that takes a column count as a parameter, then generates the perfect media query necessary to fit that number of columns on the screen. We can also build in some left and right margin for our layout by adding an additional gutter value (remembering that we already have one gutter built into our fixed function).

@mixin breakpoint($min) {
	@media (min-width: fixed($min) + em($grid-gutter)) {
		@content
	}
}

And, just like that, we’ve rewritten the media query. Instead of picking a minimum screen size for our layout, we can simply determine the number of columns needed. Let’s add a wrapper class so that we can center our content on the screen.

@mixin breakpoint($min) {
    @media (min-width: fixed($min) + em($grid-gutter)) {
	.wrapper {
		width: fixed($min) - em($grid-gutter);
		margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;
	}
	@content
    }
}

Designing content with a column count gives us nice, easy, whole numbers to work with. Sizing content, sidebars or widgets is now as simple as specifying a single-digit number.

@include breakpoint(8) {
	.main { width: fixed(5); }
	.sidebar { width: fixed(3); }
}

Those four lines of Sass just created a responsive layout for us. When the screen is big enough to fit eight columns, it will trigger a fixed width layout. And give widths to our main content and sidebar. The following is the outputted CSS…

@media (min-width: 41.25em) {
  .wrapper {
    width: 38.75em;
    margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;
  }
  .main { width: 25em; }
  .sidebar { width: 15em; }
}

Demo

I’ve created a Codepen demo that demonstrates what we’ve covered so far. I’ve added to the demo some grid classes based on Griddle by Nicolas Gallagher to create a floatless layout. I’ve also added a CSS gradient overlay to help you visualize columns. Try changing the column variable sizes or the breakpoint includes to see how the layout reacts to different screen sizes.

Responsive Images

Responsive images are a serious problem, but I’m excited to see the community talk so passionately about a solution. Now, there are some excellent stopgaps while we wait for something official, but these solutions require you to mirror your breakpoints in JavaScript or HTML. This poses a serious problem for my Sass-generated media queries, because I have no idea what the real values of my breakpoints are anymore. For responsive images to work, JavaScript needs to recognize which media query is active so that proper images can be loaded for that layout.

What I need is a way to label my breakpoints. Fortunately, people much smarter than I have figured this out. Jeremy Keith devised a labeling method by using CSS-generated content as the storage method for breakpoint labels. We can use this technique in our breakpoint mixin by passing a label as another argument.

@include breakpoint(8, 'desktop') { /* styles */ }

Sass can take that label and use it when writing the corresponding media query. We just need to slightly modify our breakpoint mixin.

@mixin breakpoint($min, $label) {
    @media (min-width: fixed($min) + em($grid-gutter)) {

        // label our mq with CSS generated content
	body::before { content: $label; display: none; }

	.wrapper {
		width: fixed($min) - em($grid-gutter);
		margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;
	}
	@content
    }
}

This allows us to label our breakpoints with a user-friendly string. Now that our media queries are defined and labeled, we just need JavaScript to step in and read which label is active.

// get css generated label for active media query
var label = getComputedStyle(document.body, '::before')['content'];

JavaScript now knows which layout is active by reading the label in the current media query—we just need to match that label to an image. I prefer to store references to different image sizes as data attributes on my image tag.

<img class=""responsive-image"" data-mobile=""mobile.jpg"" data-desktop=""desktop.jpg"" />
<noscript><img src=""desktop.jpg"" /></noscript>

These data attributes have names that match the labels set in my CSS. So while there is some duplication going on, setting a keyword like ‘tablet’ in two places is much easier than hardcoding media query values. With matching labels in CSS and HTML our script can marry the two and load the right sized image for our layout.

// get css generated label for active media query
var label = getComputedStyle(document.body, '::before')['content'];

// select image
var $image = $('.responsive-image');

// create source from data attribute
$image.attr('src', $image.data(label));

Demo

With some slight additions to our previous Codepen demo you can see this responsive image technique in action. While the above JavaScript will work it is not nearly robust enough for production so the demo uses a jQuery plugin that can accomodate multiple images, reloading on screen resize and fallbacks if something doesn’t match up.

Creating a Framework

This media query mixin and responsive image JavaScript are the center piece of a front end framework I use to develop websites. It’s a fluid, mobile first foundation that uses the breakpoint mixin to structure fixed width layouts for tablet and desktop. Significant effort was focused on making this framework completely cross-browser. For example, one of the problems with using media queries is that essential desktop structure code ends up being hidden from legacy Internet Explorer. Respond.js is an excellent polyfill, but if you’re comfortable serving a single desktop layout to older IE, we don’t need JavaScript. We simply need to capture layout code outside of a media query and sandbox it under an IE only class name.

// set IE fallback layout to 8 columns
$ie-support = 8;

// inside of our breakpoint mixin (but outside the media query)
@if ($ie-support and $min <= $ie-support) {
	.lt-ie9 { @content; }
}

Perspective Regained

Thinking in columns means you are thinking about content layout. How big of a screen do you need for 12 columns? Who cares? Having Sass write media queries means you can use intuitive numbers for content layout. A fixed grid means more layout control and less edge cases to test than a fluid grid. Using CSS labels for activating responsive images means you don’t have to duplicate breakpoints across separations of concern. 

It’s a harmonious blend of approaches that gives us something we need—responsive design that feels intuitive. And design that, from the very outset, focuses on what matters most. Just like our kindergarten teachers taught us: It’s what’s inside that counts.",2012,Les James,lesjames,2012-12-13T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2012/redesigning-the-media-query/,code
212,Refactoring Your Way to a Design System,"I love refactoring code. Absolutely love it. There’s something about taking a piece of UI or a bit of code and reworking it in a way that is simpler, modular, and reusable that makes me incredibly happy.
I also love design systems work. It gives hybrids like me a home. It seems like everyone is talking about design systems right now. Design systems teams are perfect for those who enjoy doing architectural work and who straddle the line between designer and developer. 
Una Kravets recently identified some of the reasons that design systems fail, and chief among them are lack of buy-in, underlying architecture, and communication. While it’s definitely easier to establish these before project work begins, that doesn’t mean it is the only path to success. 
It’s a privilege to work on a greenfield project, and one that is not afforded to many. Companies with complex and/or legacy codebases may not be able to support a full rewrite of their product. In addition, many people feel overwhelmed at the thought of creating a complete system and are at a loss of how or where to even begin the process. 
This is where refactoring comes into play.
According to Martin Fowler, “refactoring is the process of changing a software system in such a way that it does not alter the external behavior of the code yet improves its internal structure.” It’s largely invisible work, and if you do it right, the end user will never know the difference. What it will do is provide a decent foundation to begin more systematic work.
Build a solid foundation
When I was first asked to create Pantsuit, the design system for Hillary for America, I was tasked with changing our codebase to be more modular and scalable, without changing the behavior or visual design of the UI. We needed a system in place that would allow for the rapid creation of new projects while maintaining a consistent visual language. In essence, I was asked to refactor our code into a design system.
During that refactor, I focused the majority of my efforts on creating a scalable architecture based on the UI components in a single workflow. Since I needed to maintain a 1:1 parity with production, the only changes I could create were under-the-hood. I started with writing coding standards and deciding on a CSS architecture that I would then use as I rewrote sections of the codebase. 
If you already have these in place, great! If not, then this is an excellent place to start. Even if your dream of a design system is never fully realized, having a coding philosophy and architecture in place will still have far-reaching benefits and implications.
I want to note that if your refactor includes creating new coding standards or a CSS architecture, don’t try to switch everything over right away. Instead, focus on a single new feature and isolate/encapsulate your work from the rest of the codebase.
Focus on the features

The key principle to cleaning up a complex codebase is to always refactor in the service of a feature. 
— Max Kanat-Alexander

Refactoring for the sake of refactoring can easily lead to accusations of misused time and lack of results. Another danger of refactoring is that it can turn into yak-shaving if you aren’t disciplined in your approach. To that end, tying your refactored components to feature work is a great way to limit scope and reduce the rest of unintended changes.
For example, the initial work on Pantsuit focused only on components related to the donations flow. Every line of code I wrote was in service to improving the maintainability and modularity of that UI. Because we didn’t have any standards in place, I started with those. From there, I identified all the components present in every step of the donations flow, which included some type styles, buttons, form inputs and error states. Then came the refactor of each individual component. Finally, I reintegrated the newly refactored components into the existing donations flow and tested it against production, checking for visual and behavioral diffs. At the end of this process, I had the beginning of a design system that would grow to serve over 50 applications, and a case study to demonstrate its effectiveness.
Ideally, you’ll want to get buy-in from your stakeholders and product owners before you begin any design systems work. However, in the absence of buy-in, linking your work to new feature development is a good way to both limit the scope of your refactor and jump start component creation.
In addition, if you’re still trying to convince your team of the benefits of a design system, starting small and using the newly refactored, feature-driven work as a case study is one way showcase a design systems’ value. By providing a concrete example of how working towards a design system contributed to the project’s success, you’re gathering the data necessary to secure buy-in for a larger-scale effort. It’s a great way to show value, rather than just talking about it.
Show, don’t tell
Perhaps the most important thing you can do for any design system is to document it. The key is to create a frictionless way to keep the documentation up-to-date, otherwise no one will contribute to it, and in turn, it will become obsolete and useless. 
There are lots of tools out there to help you get started documenting your new system. One of my favorites is KSS, which parses comments in the code and uses them to generate a style guide. For Pantsuit, I used the node version of KSS, along with a template to quickly spin up a documentation site.
I’ve listed just a few tools below; for even more, check out the tools sections of styleguides.io.

Fractal
Pattern Lab
Drizzle
Fabricator
Astrum
Catalog

Regardless of what tool you settle on, it needs to integrate well with your current workflow. 
Conclusion: always be refactoring
If you’re not lucky enough to be able to start a new design system from scratch, you can start small and work on a single feature or component. With each new project comes a new opportunity to flesh out a new part of the system, and another potential case study to secure buy-in and showcase its value. Make sure to carefully and thoroughly document each new portion of the system as it’s built. After a few projects, you’ll find yourself with a decent start to a design system. 
Good luck, and happy holidays!
Further reading:

Why Design Systems Fail
CSS Architecture for Design Systems
Refactoring: Improving the Design of Existing Code
Refactoring CSS: The Three I’s
Refactoring is About Features",2017,Mina Markham,minamarkham,2017-12-23T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2017/refactoring-your-way-to-a-design-system/,code
243,Researching a Property in the CSS Specifications,"I frequently joke that I’m “reading the specs so you don’t have to”, as I unpack some detail of a CSS spec in a post on my blog, some documentation for MDN, or an article on Smashing Magazine. However waiting for someone like me to write an article about something is a pretty slow way to get the information you need. Sometimes people like me get things wrong, or specifications change after we write a tutorial. 
What if you could just look it up yourself? That’s what you get when you learn to read the CSS specifications, and in this article my aim is to give you the basic details you need to grab quick information about any CSS property detailed in the CSS specs.
Where are the CSS Specifications?
The easiest way to see all of the CSS specs is to take a look at the Current Work page in the CSS section of the W3C Website. Here you can see all of the specifications listed, the level they are at and their status. There is also a link to the specification from this page. I explained CSS Levels in my article Why there is no CSS 4.
Who are the specifications for?
CSS specifications are for everyone who uses CSS. You might be a browser engineer - referred to as an implementor - needing to know how to implement a feature, or a web developer - referred to as an author - wanting to know how to use the feature. The fact that both parties are looking at the same document hopefully means that what the browser displays is what the web developer expected.
Which version of a spec should I look at?
There are a couple of places you might want to look. Each published spec will have the latest published version, which will have TR in the URL and can be accessed without a date (which is always the newest version) or at a date, which will be the date of that publication. If I’m referring to a particular Working Draft in an article I’ll typically link to the dated version. That way if the information changes it is possible for someone to see where I got the information from at the time of writing.
If you want the very latest additions and changes to the spec, then the Editor’s Draft is the place to look. This is the version of the spec that the editors are committing changes to. If I make a change to the Multicol spec and push it to GitHub, within a few minutes that will be live in the Editor’s Draft. So it is possible there are errors, bits of text that we are still working out and so on. The Editor’s Draft however is definitely the place to look if you are wanting to raise an issue on a spec, as it may be that the issue you are about to raise is already fixed.
If you are especially keen on seeing updates to specifications keep an eye on https://drafts.csswg.org/ as this is a list of drafts, along with the date they were last updated.
How to approach a spec
The first thing to understand is that most CSS Specifications start with the most straightforward information, and get progressively further into the weeds. For an author the initial examples and explanations are likely to be of interest, and then the property definitions and examples. Therefore, if you are looking at a vast spec, know that you probably won’t need to read all the way to the bottom, or read every section in detail.
The second thing that is useful to know about modern CSS specifications is how modularized they are. It really never is a case of finding everything you need in a single document. If we tried to do that, there would be a lot of repetition and likely inconsistency between specs. There are some key specifications that many other specifications draw on, such as:

Values and Units
Intrinsic and Extrinsic Sizing
Box Alignment

When something is defined in another specification the spec you are reading will link to it, so it is worth opening that other spec in a new tab in order that you can refer back to it as you explore.
Researching your property
As an example we will take a look at the property grid-auto-rows, this property defines row tracks in the implicit grid when using CSS Grid Layout. The first thing you will need to do is find out which specification defines this property.
You might already know which spec the property is part of, and therefore you could go directly to the spec and search using your browser or look in the navigation for the spec to find it. Alternatively, you could take a look at the CSS Property Index, which is an automatically generated list of CSS Properties.
Clicking on a property will take you to the TR version of the spec, the latest published draft, and the definition of that property in it. This definition begins with a panel detailing the syntax of this property. For grid-auto-rows, you can see that it is listed along with grid-auto-columns as these two properties are essentially identical. They take the same values and work in the same way, one for rows and the other for columns.
Value
For value we can see that the property accepts a value <track-size>. The next thing to do is to find out what that actually means, clicking  will take you to where it is defined in the Grid spec.
The <track-size> value is defined as accepting various values:

<track-breadth>
minmax( <inflexible-breadth> , <track-breadth> )
fit-content( <length-percentage>

We need to head down the rabbit hole to find out what each of these mean. From here we essentially go down line by line until we have unpacked the value of track-size.
<track-breadth> is defined just below <track-size> as:

<length-percentage>
<flex>
min-content
max-content
auto

So these are all things that would be valid to use as a value for grid-auto-rows.
The first value of <length-percentage> is something you will see in many specifications as a value. It means that you can use a length unit - for example px or em - or a percentage. Some properties only accept a <length> in which case you know that you cannot use a percentage as the value. This means that you could have grid-auto-rows with any of the following values.
grid-auto-rows: 100px;
grid-auto-rows: 1em;
grid-auto-rows: 30%;
When using percentages, it is important to know what it is a percentage of. As a percentage has to resolve from something. There is text in the spec which explains how column and row percentages work.

“<percentage> values are relative to the inline size of the grid container in column grid tracks, and the block size of the grid container in row grid tracks.”

This means that in a horizontal writing mode such as when using English, a percentage when used as a track-size in grid-auto-columns would be a percentage of the width of the grid, and a percentage in grid-auto-rows a percentage of the height of the grid.
The second value of <flex> is also defined here, as “A non-negative dimension with the unit fr specifying the track’s flex factor.” This is the fr unit, and the spec links to a fuller definition of fr as this unit is only used in Grid Layout so it is therefore defined in the grid spec. We now know that a valid value would be:
grid-auto-rows: 1fr;
There is some useful information about the fr unit in this part of the spec. It is noted that the fr unit has an automatic minimum. This means that 1fr is really minmax(auto, 1fr). This is why having a number of tracks all at 1fr does not mean that all are equal sized, as a larger item in any of the tracks would have a large auto size and therefore would be larger after spare space had been distributed.
We then have min-content and max-content. These keywords can be used for track sizing and the specification defines what they mean in the context of sizing a track, representing the min and max-sizing contributions of the grid tracks. You will see that there are various terms linked in the definition, so if you do not know what these mean you can follow them to find out.
For example the spec links max-content contribution to the CSS Intrinsic and Extrinsic Sizing specification. This is one of those specs which is drawn on by many other specifications. If we follow that link we can read the definition there and follow further links to understand what each term means. The more that you read specifications the more these terms will become familiar to you. Just like learning a foreign language, at first you feel like you have to look up every little thing. After a while you remember the vocabulary.
We can now add min-content and max-content to our available values.
grid-auto-rows: min-content;
grid-auto-rows: max-content;
The final item in our list is auto. If you are familiar with using Grid Layout, then you are probably aware that an auto sized track for will grow to fit the content used. There is an interesting note here in the spec detailing that auto sized rows will stretch to fill the grid container if there is extra space and align-content or justify-content have a value of stretch. As stretch is the default value, that means these tracks stretch by default. Tracks using other types of length will not behave like this.
grid-auto-rows: auto;
So, this was the list for <track-breadth>, the next possible value is minmax( <inflexible-breadth> , <track-breadth> ). So this is telling us that we can use minmax() as a value, the final (max) value will be <track-breadth> and we have already unpacked all of the allowable values there. The first value (min) is detailed as an <inflexible-breadth>. If we look at the values for this, we discover that they are the same as <track-breadth>, minus the <flex> value:

<length-percentage>
min-content
max-content
auto

We already know what all of these do, so we can add possible minmax() values to our list of values for <track-size>.
grid-auto-rows: minmax(100px, 200px);
grid-auto-rows: minmax(20%, 1fr);
grid-auto-rows: minmax(1em, auto);
grid-auto-rows: minmax(min-content, max-content);
Finally we can use fit-content( <length-percentage>. We can see that fit-content takes a value of <length-percentage> which we already know to be either a length unit, or a percentage. The spec details how fit-content is worked out, and it essentially allows a track which acts as if you had used the max-content keyword, however the track stops growing when it hits the length passed to it.
grid-auto-rows: fit-content(200px);
grid-auto-rows: fit-content(20%);
Those are all of our possible values, and to round things off, check again at the initial <track-size> value, you can see it has a little + sign next to it, click that and you will be taken to the CSS Values and Units module to find that, “A plus (+) indicates that the preceding type, word, or group occurs one or more times.” This means that we can pass a single track size to grid-auto-rows or multiple track sizes as a space separated list. Below the box is an explanation of what happens if you pass in more than one track size:

“If multiple track sizes are given, the pattern is repeated as necessary to find the size of the implicit tracks. The first implicit grid track after the explicit grid receives the first specified size, and so on forwards; and the last implicit grid track before the explicit grid receives the last specified size, and so on backwards.”

Therefore with the following CSS, if five implicit rows were needed they would be as follows:

100px
1fr
auto
100px
1fr

.grid {
    display: grid;
    grid-auto-rows: 100px 1fr auto;
}
Initial
We can now move to the next line in the box, and you’ll be glad to know that it isn’t going to require as much unpacking! This simply defines the initial value for grid-auto-rows. If you do not specify anything, created rows will be auto sized. All CSS properties have an initial value that they will use if they are invoked as part of the usage of the specification they are in, but you do not set a value for them. In the case of grid-auto-rows it is used whenever rows are created in the implicit grid, so it needs to have a value to be used even if you do not set one.
Applies to
This line tells us what this property is used for. Some properties are used in multiple places. For example if you look at the definition for justify-content in the Box Alignment specification you can see it is used in multicol containers, flex containers, and grid containers. In our case the property only applies for grid containers.
Inherited
This tells us if the property can be inherited from a parent element if it is not set. In the case of grid-auto-rows it is not inherited. A property such as color is inherited, so you do not need to set it on each element.
Percentages
Are percentages allowed for this property, and if so how are they calculated. In this case we are referred to the definition for grid-template-columns and grid-template-rows where we discover that the percentage is from the corresponding dimension of the content area.
Media
This defines the media group that the property belongs to. In this case visual.
Computed Value
This details how the value is resolved. The grid-auto-rows property again refers to track sizing as defined for grid-template-columns and grid-template-rows, which tells us the computed value is as specified with lengths made absolute.
Canonical Order
If you have a property–generally a shorthand property–which takes multiple values in a set order, then those values need to be serialized in the order detailed in the grammar for that property. In general you don’t need to worry about this value in the table.
Animation Type
This details whether the property can be animated, and if so what type of animation. This is useful if you are trying to animate something and not getting the result that you expect. Note that just because something is listed in the spec as animatable does not mean that browsers will have implemented animation for that property yet!
That’s (mostly) it!
Sometimes the property will have additional examples - there is one underneath the table for grid-auto-rows. These are worth looking at as they will highlight usage of the property that the spec editor has felt could use an example. There may also be some additional text explaining anythign specific to this property.
In selecting grid-auto-rows I chose a fairly complex property in terms of the work we needed to do to unpack the value. Many properties are far simpler than this. However ultimately, even when you come across a complex value, it really is just a case of stepping through the definitions until you come to the bottom of the rabbit hole.
Being able to work out what is valid for each property is incredibly useful. It means you don’t waste time trying to use a value that doesn’t work for that property. You also may find that there are values you weren’t aware of, that solve problems for you.
Further reading
Specifications are not designed to be user manuals, and while they often contain examples, these are pretty terse as they need to be clear to demonstrate their particular point. The manual for the Web Platform is MDN Web Docs. Pairing reading a specification with the examples and information on an MDN property page such as the one for grid-auto-rows is a really great way to ensure that you have all the information and practical usage examples you might need.
You may also find useful:

Value Definition Syntax on MDN.
The MDN Glossary defines many common terms.
Understanding the CSS Property Value Syntax goes into more detail in terms of reading the syntax.
How to read W3C Specs - from 2001 but still relevant.

I hope this article has gone some way to demystify CSS specifications for you. Even if the specifications are not your preferred first stop to learn about new CSS, being able to go directly to the source and avoid having your understanding filtered by someone else, can be very useful indeed.",2018,Rachel Andrew,rachelandrew,2018-12-14T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2018/researching-a-property-in-the-css-specifications/,code
46,Responsive Enhancement,"24 ways has been going strong for ten years. That’s an aeon in internet timescales. Just think of all the changes we’ve seen in that time: the rise of Ajax, the explosion of mobile devices, the unrecognisably changed landscape of front-end tooling.

Tools and technologies come and go, but one thing has remained constant for me over the past decade: progressive enhancement.

Progressive enhancement isn’t a technology. It’s more like a way of thinking. Instead of thinking about the specifics of how a finished website might look, progressive enhancement encourages you to think about the fundamental meaning of what the website is providing. So instead of thinking of a website in terms of its ideal state in a modern browser on a nice widescreen device, progressive enhancement allows you to think about the core functionality in a more abstract way.

Once you’ve figured out what the core functionality is – adding an item to a shopping cart, posting a message, sharing a photo – then you can enable that functionality in the simplest possible way. That usually means starting with good old-fashioned HTML. Links and forms are often all you need. Then, once you have the core functionality working in a basic way, you can start to enhance to make a progressively better experience for more modern browsers.

The advantage of working this way isn’t just that your site will work in older browsers (albeit in a rudimentary way). It also ensures that if anything goes wrong in a modern browser, it won’t be catastrophic.

There’s a common misconception that progressive enhancement means that you’ll spend your time dealing with older browsers, but in fact the opposite is true. Putting the basic functionality into place doesn’t take very long at all. And once you’ve done that, you’re free to spend all your time experimenting with the latest and greatest browser technologies, secure in the knowledge that even if they aren’t universally supported yet, that’s OK: you’ve already got your fallback in place.

The key to thinking about web development this way is realising that there isn’t one final interface – there could be many, slightly different interfaces depending on the properties and capabilities of any particular user agent at any particular moment. And that’s OK. Websites do not need to look the same in every browser.

Once you truly accept that, it’s an immensely liberating idea. Instead of spending your time trying to make websites look the same in wildly varying browsers, you can spend your time making sure that the core functionality of what you build works everywhere, while providing the best possible experience for more capable browsers.

Allow me to demonstrate with a simple example: navigation.

Step one: core functionality

Let’s say we have a straightforward website about the twelve days of Christmas, with a page for each day. The core functionality is pretty clear:


	To read about any particular day.
	To browse from day to day.


The first is easily satisfied by marking up the text with headings, paragraphs and all the usual structural HTML elements. The second is satisfied by providing a list of good ol’ hyperlinks.

Now where’s the best place to position this navigation list? Personally, I’m a big fan of the jump-to-footer pattern. This puts the content first and the navigation second. At the top of the page there’s a link with an href attribute pointing to the fragment identifier for the navigation.

<body>
  <main role=""main"" id=""top"">
    <a href=""#menu"" class=""control"">Menu</a>
    ...
  </main>
  <nav role=""navigation"" id=""menu"">
    ...
    <a href=""#top"" class=""control"">Dismiss</a>
  </nav>
</body>

See the footer-anchor pattern in action.

Because it’s nothing more than a hyperlink, this works in just about every browser since the dawn of the web. Following hyperlinks is what web browsers were made to do (hence the name).

Step two: layout as an enhancement

The footer-anchor pattern is a particularly neat solution on small-screen devices, like mobile phones. Once more screen real estate is available, I can use the magic of CSS to reposition the navigation above the content. I could use position: absolute, flexbox or, in this case, display: table.

@media all and (min-width: 35em) {
  .control {
    display: none;
  }
  body {
    display: table;
  }
  [role=""navigation""] {
    display: table-caption;
    columns: 6 15em;
  }
}

See the styles for wider screens in action

Step three: enhance!

Right. At this point I’m providing core functionality to everyone, and I’ve got nice responsive styles for wider screens. I could stop here, but the real advantage of progressive enhancement is that I don’t have to. From here on, I can go crazy adding all sorts of fancy enhancements for modern browsers, without having to worry about providing a fallback for older browsers – the fallback is already in place.

What I’d really like is to provide a swish off-canvas pattern for small-screen devices. Here’s my plan:


	Position the navigation under the main content.
	Listen out for the .control links being activated and intercept that action.
	When those links are activated, toggle a class of .active on the body.
	If the .active class exists, slide the content out to reveal the navigation.


Here’s the CSS for positioning the content and navigation:

@media all and (max-width: 35em) {
  [role=""main""] {
    transition: all .25s;
    width: 100%;
    position: absolute;
    z-index: 2;
    top: 0;
    right: 0;
  }
  [role=""navigation""] {
    width: 75%;
    position: absolute;
    z-index: 1;
    top: 0;
    right: 0;
  }
  .active [role=""main""] {
    transform: translateX(-75%);
  }
}

In my JavaScript, I’m going to listen out for any clicks on the .control links and toggle the .active class on the body accordingly:

(function (win, doc) {
  'use strict';
  var linkclass = 'control',
    activeclass = 'active',
    toggleClassName = function (element, toggleClass) {
      var reg = new RegExp('(s|^)' + toggleClass + '(s|$)');
      if (!element.className.match(reg)) {
        element.className += ' ' + toggleClass;
      } else {
        element.className = element.className.replace(reg, '');
      }
    },
    navListener = function (ev) {
      ev = ev || win.event;
      var target = ev.target || ev.srcElement;
      if (target.className.indexOf(linkclass) !== -1) {
        ev.preventDefault();
        toggleClassName(doc.body, activeclass);
      }
    };
  doc.addEventListener('click', navListener, false);
}(this, this.document));

I’m all set, right? Not so fast!

Cutting the mustard

I’ve made the assumption that addEventListener will be available in my JavaScript. That isn’t a safe assumption. That’s because JavaScript – unlike HTML or CSS – isn’t fault-tolerant. If you use an HTML element or attribute that a browser doesn’t understand, or if you use a CSS selector, property or value that a browser doesn’t understand, it’s no big deal. The browser will just ignore what it doesn’t understand: it won’t throw an error, and it won’t stop parsing the file.

JavaScript is different. If you make an error in your JavaScript, or use a JavaScript method or property that a browser doesn’t recognise, that browser will throw an error, and it will stop parsing the file. That’s why it’s important to test for features before using them in JavaScript. That’s also why it isn’t safe to rely on JavaScript for core functionality.

In my case, I need to test for the existence of addEventListener:

(function (win, doc) {
  if (!win.addEventListener) {
    return;
  }
  ...
}(this, this.document));

The good folk over at the BBC call this kind of feature test cutting the mustard. If a browser passes the test, it cuts the mustard, and so it gets the enhancements. If a browser doesn’t cut the mustard, it doesn’t get the enhancements. And that’s fine because, remember, websites don’t need to look the same in every browser.

I want to make sure that my off-canvas styles are only going to apply to mustard-cutting browsers. I’m going to use JavaScript to add a class of .cutsthemustard to the document:

(function (win, doc) {
  if (!win.addEventListener) {
    return;
  }
  ...
  var enhanceclass = 'cutsthemustard';
  doc.documentElement.className += ' ' + enhanceclass;
}(this, this.document));

Now I can use the existence of that class name to adjust my CSS:

@media all and (max-width: 35em) {
  .cutsthemustard [role=""main""] {
    transition: all .25s;
    width: 100%;
    position: absolute;
    z-index: 2;
    top: 0;
    right: 0;
  }
  .cutsthemustard [role=""navigation""] {
    width: 75%;
    position: absolute;
    z-index: 1;
    top: 0;
    right: 0;
  }
  .cutsthemustard .active [role=""main""] {
    transform: translateX(-75%);
  }
}

See the enhanced mustard-cutting off-canvas navigation. Remember, this only applies to small screens so you might have to squish your browser window.

Enhance all the things!

This was a relatively simple example, but it illustrates the thinking behind progressive enhancement: once you’re providing the core functionality to everyone, you’re free to go crazy with all the latest enhancements for modern browsers.

Progressive enhancement doesn’t mean you have to provide all the same functionality to everyone – quite the opposite. That’s why it’s key to figure out early on what the core functionality is, and make sure that it can be provided with the most basic technology. But from that point on, you’re free to add many more features that aren’t mission-critical. You should reward more capable browsers by giving them more of those features, such as animation in CSS, geolocation in JavaScript, and new input types in HTML.

Like I said, progressive enhancement isn’t a technology. It’s a way of thinking. Once you start thinking this way, you’ll be prepared for whatever the next ten years throws at us.",2014,Jeremy Keith,jeremykeith,2014-12-09T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2014/responsive-enhancement/,code
79,Responsive Images: What We Thought We Needed,"If you were to read a web designer’s Christmas wish list, it would likely include a solution for displaying images responsively. For those concerned about users downloading unnecessary image data, or serving images that look blurry on high resolution displays, finding a solution has become a frustrating quest.

Having experimented with complex and sometimes devilish hacks, consensus is forming around defining new standards that could solve this problem. Two approaches have emerged.

The <picture> element markup pattern was proposed by Mat Marquis and is now being developed by the Responsive Images Community Group. By providing a means of declaring multiple sources, authors could use media queries to control which version of an image is displayed and under what conditions:

<picture width=""500"" height=""500"">
  <source media=""(min-width: 45em)"" src=""large.jpg"">
  <source media=""(min-width: 18em)"" src=""med.jpg"">
  <source src=""small.jpg"">
  <img src=""small.jpg"" alt="""">
  <p>Accessible text</p>
</picture>

A second proposal put forward by Apple, the srcset attribute, uses a more concise syntax intended for use with the <img> element, although it could be compatible with the <picture> element too. This would allow authors to provide a set of images, but with the decision on which to use left to the browser:

<img src=""fallback.jpg"" alt="""" srcset=""small.jpg 640w 1x, small-hd.jpg 640w 2x, med.jpg 1x, med-hd.jpg 2x "">

Enter Scrooge


	Men’s courses will foreshadow certain ends, to which, if persevered in, they must lead.
Ebenezer Scrooge


Given the complexity of this issue, there’s a heated debate about which is the best option. Yet code belies a certain truth. That both feature verbose and opaque syntax, I’m not sure either should find its way into the browser – especially as alternative approaches have yet to be fully explored.

So, as if to dampen the festive cheer, here are five reasons why I believe both proposals are largely redundant.

1. We need better formats, not more markup

As we move away from designs defined with fixed pixel values, bitmap images look increasingly unsuitable. While simple images and iconography can use scalable vector formats like SVG, for detailed photographic imagery, raster formats like GIF, PNG and JPEG remain the only suitable option.

There is scope within current formats to account for varying bandwidth but this requires cooperation from browser vendors. Newer formats like JPEG2000 and WebP generate higher quality images with smaller file sizes, but aren’t widely supported.

While it’s tempting to try to solve this issue by inventing new markup, the crux of it remains at the file level.

Daan Jobsis’s experimentation with image compression strengthens this argument. He discovered that by increasing the dimensions of a JPEG image while simultaneously reducing its quality, a smaller files could be produced, with the resulting image looking just as good on both standard and high-resolution displays.

This may be a hack in lieu of a more permanent solution, but it’s applied in the right place. Easy to accomplish with existing tools and without compatibility issues, it has few downsides. Further experimentation in this area should be encouraged, with standardisation efforts more helpful if focused on developing new image formats or, preferably, extending existing ones.

2. Art direction doesn’t belong in markup

A desired benefit of the <picture> markup pattern is to allow for greater art direction. For example, rather than scaling down images on smaller displays to the point that their content is hard to discern, we could present closer crops instead:



This can be achieved with CSS of course, although with a download penalty for those parts of an image not shown. This point may be negligible, however, since in the context of adaptable layouts, these hidden areas may end up being revealed anyway.

Art direction concerns design, not content. If we wish to maintain a separation of concerns, including presentation within our markup seems misguided.

3. The size of a display has little relation to the size of an image

By using media queries, the <picture> element allows authors to choose which characteristics of the screen or viewport to query for different images to be displayed.

In developing sites at Clearleft, we have noticed that the viewport is essentially arbitrary, with the size of an image’s containing element more important. For example, look at how this grid of images may adapt at different viewport widths:



As we build more modular systems, components need to be adaptable in and of themselves. There is a case to be made for developing more contextual methods of querying, rather than those based on attributes of the display.

4. We haven’t lived with the problem long enough

A key strength of the web is that the underlying platform can be continually iterated. This can also be problematic if snap judgements are made about what constitutes an improvement.

The early history of the web is littered with such examples, be it the perceived need for blinking text or inline typographic styling. To build a platform for the future, additions to it should be carefully considered. And if we want more consistent support across browsers, burdening vendors with an ever increasing list of features seems counterproductive.

Only once the need for a new feature is sufficiently proven, should we look to standardise it. Before we could declare hover effects, rounded corners and typographic styling in CSS, we used JavaScript as a polyfill. Sure, doing so was painful, but use cases were fully explored, and the CSS specification better reflected the needs of authors.

5. Images and the web aesthetic

The srcset proposal has emerged from a company that markets its phones as being able to browse the real – yet squashed down, tapped and zoomable – web. Perhaps Apple should make its own website responsive before suggesting how the rest of us should do so.

Converserly, while the <picture> proposal has the backing of a few respected developers and designers, it was born out of the work Mat Marquis and Filament Group did for the Boston Globe. As the first large-scale responsive design, this was a landmark project that ignited the responsive web design movement and proved its worth. But it was the first.

Its design shares a vernacular to that of contemporary newspaper websites, with a columnar, image-laden and densely packed layout. Compared to more recent examples – Quartz, The Next Web and the New York Times Skimmer – it feels out of step with the future direction of news sites. In seeking out a truer aesthetic for the web in which software interfaces have greater influence, we might discover that the need for responsive images isn’t as great as originally thought.



Building for the future

With responsive design, we’ve accepted the idea that a fully fluid layout, rather than a set of fixed layouts, is best suited to the web’s unpredictable nature. Current responsive image proposals are antithetical to this approach.

We need solutions that lack complexity, are device-agnostic and work within existing workflows. Any proposal that requires different versions of the same image to be created, is likely to have to acquiesce under the pressure of reality.

While it’s easy to get distracted about the size and quality of an image, and how we might choose to serve it, often the simplest solution is not to include it at all. After years of gluttonous design practice, in which fast connections and expansive display sizes were an accepted norm, we have got use to filling pages with needless images and countless items of page furniture.

To design more adaptable experiences, the presence of every element needs to be questioned, for its existence requires additional data to be downloaded or futher complexity within a design system. Conditional loading techniques mean that the inclusion of images is no longer a binary choice, but can instead appear in a progressively enhanced manner.

So here is my proposal. Instead of spending the next year worrying about responsive images, let’s embrace the constraints of the medium, and seek out new solutions that can work within them.",2012,Paul Lloyd,paulrobertlloyd,2012-12-11T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2012/responsive-images-what-we-thought-we-needed/,code
84,Responsive Responsive Design,"Now more than ever, we’re designing work meant to be viewed along a gradient of different experiences. Responsive web design offers us a way forward, finally allowing us to “design for the ebb and flow of things.”


With those two sentences, Ethan closed the article that introduced the web to responsive design. Since then, responsive design has taken the web by storm. Seemingly every day, some company is touting their new responsive redesign. Large brands such as Microsoft, Time and Disney are getting in on the action, blowing away the once common criticism that responsive design was a technique only fit for small blogs.

Certainly, this is a good thing. As Ethan and John Allsopp before him, were right to point out, the inherent flexibility of the web is a feature, not a bug. The web’s unique ability to be consumed and interacted with on any number of devices, with any number of input methods is something to be embraced.

But there’s one part of the web’s inherent flexibility that seems to be increasingly overlooked: the ability for the web to be interacted with on any number of networks, with a gradient of  bandwidth constraints and latency costs, on devices with varying degrees of hardware power.

A few months back, Stephanie Rieger tweeted


	“Shoot me now…responsive design has seemingly become confused with an opportunity to reduce performance rather than improve it.”


I would love to disagree, but unfortunately the evidence is damning. Consider the size and number of requests for four highly touted responsive sites that were launched this year:


	74 requests, 1,511kb
	114 requests, 1,200kb
	99 requests, 1,298kb
	105 requests, 5,942kb


And those numbers were for the small screen versions of each site!

These sites were praised for their visual design and responsive nature, and rightfully so. They’re very easy on the eyes and a lot of thought went into their appearance. But the numbers above tell an inconvenient truth: for all the time spent ensuring the visual design was airtight, seemingly very little (if any) attention was given to their performance.

It would be one thing if these were the exceptions, but unfortunately they’re not. Guy Podjarny, who has done a lot of research around responsive performance, discovered that 86% of the responsive sites he tested were either the same size or larger on the small screen as they were on the desktop.

The reality is that high performance should be a requirement on any web project, not an afterthought. Poor performance has been tied to a decrease in revenue, traffic, conversions, and overall user satisfaction. Case study after case study shows that improving performance, even marginally, will impact the bottom line. The situation is no different on mobile where 71% of people say they expect sites to load as quickly or faster on their phone when compared to the desktop.

The bottom line: performance is a fundamental component of the user experience.

So, given it’s extreme importance in the success of any web project, why is it that we’re seeing so many bloated responsive sites?

First, I adamantly disagree with the belief that poor performance is inherent to responsive design. That’s not a rule – it’s a cop-out. It’s an example of blaming the technique when we should be blaming the implementation. This argument also falls flat because it ignores the fact that the trend of fat sites is increasing on the web in general. While some responsive sites are the worst offenders, it’s hardly an issue resigned to one technique.

To fix the issue, we need to stop making excuses and start making improvements instead. Here, then, are some things we can do to start improving the state of responsive performance, and performance in general, right now.

Create a culture of performance

If you understand just how important performance is to the success of a project, the natural next step is to start creating a culture where high performance is a key consideration. 

One of the things you can do is set a baseline. Determine the maximum size and number of requests you are going to allow, and don’t let a page go live if either of those numbers is exceeded. The BBC does this with its responsive mobile site.

A variation of that, which Steve Souders discussed in a recent podcast is to create a performance budget based on those numbers. Once you have that baseline set, if someone comes along and wants to add a something to the page, they have to make sure the page remains under budget. If it exceeds the budget, you have three options:


	Optimize an existing feature or asset on the page
	Remove an existing feature or asset from the page
	Don’t add the new feature or asset


The idea here is that you make performance part of the process instead of something that may or may not get tacked on at the end.

Embrace the pain

This troubling trend of web bloat can be blamed in part on the lack of pain associated with poor performance. Most of us work on high-speed connections with low latency. When we fire up a 4Mb site, it doesn’t feel so bad. 

When I tested the previously mentioned 5,942kb site on a 3G network, it took over 93 seconds to load. A minute and a half just staring at a white screen. Had anyone working on that project experienced that, you can bet the site wouldn’t have launched in that state.

Don’t just crunch numbers. Fire up your site on a slower network and see what it feels like to wait. If you don’t have access to a slow network, simulate one using a tool like Slowy, Throttle or the Network Conditioner found in Mac OS X 10.7.

Watch for low-hanging fruit

There are a bunch of general performance improvements that apply to any site (responsive or not) but often aren’t made. A great starting point is to refer to Yahoo!‘s list of rules.

Some of this might sound complicated or intimidating, but it doesn’t have to be. You can grab an .htaccess file from HTML 5 Boilerplate or use Sergey Chernyshev’s drop-in .htaccess file. You can use tools like SpriteMe to simplify the creation of sprites, and ImageOptim to compress images.

Just by implementing these simple optimizations you will achieve a noticeable improvement in terms of weight and page load time.

Be careful with images

The most common offender for poor responsive performance is downloading unnecessarily large images, or worse yet, multiple sizes of the same image. 

For background images, simply being careful with where and how you include the image can ensure you don’t get caught in the trap of multiple background images being downloaded without being used. Don’t count on display:none to help. While it may hide elements from displaying on screen, those images will still be requested and downloaded.

Content images can be a little trickier. Whatever you do, don’t serve a large image that works on a large screen display to small screens. It’s wasteful, not only in terms of adding weight to the page, but also in wasting precious memory. Instead, use a tool like Adaptive Images or src.sencha.io to make sure only appropriately sized images are being downloaded. 

The new <picture> element that has been so often discussed is another excellent solution if you’re feeling particularly future-oriented. A picture polyfill exists so that you can start using the element now without any worries about support.

Conditional loading

Don’t load any more than you absolutely need to. If a script isn’t needed at certain sizes, use the matchMedia polyfill to ensure it only loads when needed. Use eCSSential to do the same for unnecessary CSS files.

Last year on 24 ways, Jeremy Keith wrote an article about conditional loading of content in a responsive design based on the screen width. The technique was later refined by the Filament Group into what they dubbed the Ajax-Include Pattern. It’s a powerful and simple way to lighten the load on small screens as well as reduce clutter.

Go vanilla?

If you take a look at the HTTP Archive you’ll see that other than image size, JavaScript is the heaviest asset on a page weighing in at 215kb on average. It also boasts the fifth highest correlation to load time as well as the second highest correlation to render time. 

Much of the weight can be attributed to our industry’s increasing reliance on frameworks. This is especially a concern on mobile devices. PPK recently exclaimed that current JavaScript libraries are just “too heavy for mobile”. “Research from Stoyan Stefanov on parse times supports this. On some Android and iOS devices, it can take as long as 200-300ms just to parse jQuery.

There’s nothing wrong about using a framework, but the problem is that they’ve become the default. Before dropping another framework or plugin into a page, we should stop to consider the value it adds and whether we could accomplish what we need to do using a combination of vanilla JavaScript and CSS instead. (This is a great example of a scenario where a performance budget could help.)

Start thinking beyond visual aesthetics

We love to tout the web’s universality when discussing the need for responsive design. But that universality is not limited simply to screen size. Networks and hardware capabilities must factor in as well.

The web is an incredibly dynamic and interactive medium, and designing for it demands that we consider more than just visual aesthetics. Let’s not forget to give those other qualities the attention they deserve.",2012,Tim Kadlec,timkadlec,2012-12-05T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2012/responsive-responsive-design/,design
142,Revealing Relationships Can Be Good Form,"A few days ago, a colleague of mine – someone I have known for several years, who has been doing web design for several years and harks back from the early days of ZDNet – was running through a prototype I had put together for some user testing. As with a lot of prototypes, there was an element of ‘smoke and mirrors’ to make things look like they were working. 

One part of the form included a yes/no radio button, and selecting the Yes option would, in the real and final version of the form, reveal some extra content. Rather than put too much JavaScript in the prototype, I took a preverbial shortcut and created a link which I wrapped around the text next to the radio button – clicking on that link would cause the form to mimic a change event on the radio button. But it wasn’t working for him. 

Why was that? Because whereas I created the form using a <label> tag for each <input> and naturally went to click on the text rather than the form control itself, he was going straight for the control (and missing the sneaky little <a href> I’d placed around the text). Bah! There goes my time-saver.

So, what did I learn? That a web professional who has used the Internet for years had neither heard of the <label> tag, nor had he ever tried clicking on the text. It just goes to show that despite its obvious uses, the label element is not as well known as it rightfully deserves to be. So, what’s a web-standards-loving guy to do? Make a bit more bleedin’ obvious, that’s what! 

The Mouse Pointer Trick

OK, this is the kind of thing that causes some people outrage. A dead simple way of indicating that the label does something is to use a snippet of CSS to change the default mouse cursor to a hand. It’s derided because the hand icon is usually used for links, and some would argue that using this technique is misleading:

label {
	cursor: pointer;
}

This is not a new idea, though, and you didn’t come here for this. The point is that with something very simple, you’ve made the label element discoverable. But there are other ways that you can do this that are web standards friendly and won’t upset the purists quite so much as the hand/pointer trick. Time to wheel in the JavaScript trolley jack …

Our Old Friend AddEvent

First things, first, you’ll need to use the addEvent function (or your favourite variation thereof) that Scott Andrew devised and make that available to the document containing the form:

function addEvent(elm, evType, fn, useCapture)
{
	if(elm.addEventListener)
	{
		elm.addEventListener(evType, fn, useCapture);
		return true;
	}
	else if (elm.attachEvent)
	{
		var r = elm.attachEvent('on' + evType, fn);
		return r;
	}
	else
	{
		elm['on' + evType] = fn;
	}
}

Finding All Your Labels

Once you’ve linked to the addEvent function (or embedded it on the page), you can start to get your JavaScripting fingers a-flexing. Now, what I’m suggesting you do here is:


	Identify all the label elements on the page by working your way through the DOM
	Find out the value of the for attribute for each label that you uncover
	Attach a behaviour or two to each of those label elements – and to the input that the label relates to (identified with the for attribute)


Here’s the technobabble version of the steps above:

function findLabels()
{
	var el = document.getElementsByTagName(""label"");
	for (i=0;i<el.length;i++)
	{
		var thisId = el[i].getAttribute(""for"");
		if ((thisId)==null)
		{
			thisId = el[i].htmlFor;
		}
		if(thisId!="""")
		{
			//apply these behaviours to the label
			el[i].onmouseover = highlightRelationship;
			el[i].onmouseout = hideRelationship;
		}
	}
}
function highlightRelationship()
{
	var thisId = this.getAttribute(""for"");
	if ((thisId)==null)
	{
		thisId = this.htmlFor;
	}	
	this.className=""showRel"";
	document.getElementById(thisId).className=""showRel"";
	//if (document.getElementById(thisId).type==""text"") document.getElementById(thisId).select();
}
function hideRelationship()
{
	var thisId = this.getAttribute(""for"");
	if ((thisId)==null)
	{
		thisId = this.htmlFor;
	}	
	this.className="""";
	document.getElementById(thisId).className="""";
}
addEvent(window, 'load', findLabels, false);

Using the above script, you can apply a CSS class (I’ve called it showRel) to the elements when you hover over them. How you want it to look is up to you, of course. Here are a few examples of the idea. Note: the design is not exactly what you’d call ‘fancy’, and in the examples there is one input that looks broken but it is deliberately moved away from the label it relates to, just to demonstrate that you can show the relationship even from afar. 



	Background colour changes on hover
	Background colour change + mouse pointer trick
	Background colour change + mouse pointer trick + text selection


Hopefully you’ll agree that using an unobtrusive piece of JavaScript you can make otherwise ‘shy’ elements like the label reveal their true colours. Although you might want to tone down the colours from the ones I’ve used in this demo!",2006,Ian Lloyd,ianlloyd,2006-12-13T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2006/revealing-relationships-can-be-good-form/,ux
171,Rock Solid HTML Emails,"At some stage in your career, it’s likely you’ll be asked by a client to design a HTML email. Before you rush to explain that all the cool kids are using social media, keep in mind that when done correctly, email is still one of the best ways to promote you and your clients online. In fact, a recent survey showed that every dollar spent on email marketing this year generated more than $40 in return. That’s more than any other marketing channel, including the cool ones.

There are a whole host of ingredients that contribute to a good email marketing campaign. Permission, relevance, timeliness and engaging content are all important. Even so, the biggest challenge for designers still remains building an email that renders well across all the popular email clients.

Same same, but different

Before getting into the details, there are some uncomfortable facts that those new to HTML email should be aware of. Building an email is not like building for the web. While web browsers continue their onward march towards standards, many email clients have stubbornly stayed put. Some have even gone backwards. In 2007, Microsoft switched the Outlook rendering engine from Internet Explorer to Word. Yes, as in the word processor. Add to this the quirks of the major web-based email clients like Gmail and Hotmail, sprinkle in a little Lotus Notes and you’ll soon realize how different the email game is.

While it’s not without its challenges, rest assured it can be done. In my experience the key is to focus on three things. First, you should keep it simple. The more complex your email design, the more likely is it to choke on one of the popular clients with poor standards support. Second, you need to take your coding skills back a good decade. That often means nesting tables, bringing CSS inline and following the coding guidelines I’ll outline below. Finally, you need to test your designs regularly. Just because a template looks nice in Hotmail now, doesn’t mean it will next week.

Setting your lowest common denominator

To maintain your sanity, it’s a good idea to decide exactly which email clients you plan on supporting when building a HTML email. While general research is helpful, the email clients your subscribers are using can vary significantly from list to list. If you have the time there are a number of tools that can tell you specifically which email clients your subscribers are using. Trust me, if the testing shows almost none of them are using a client like Lotus Notes, save yourself some frustration and ignore it altogether. 

Knowing which email clients you’re targeting not only makes the building process easier, it can save you lots of time in the testing phase too. For the purpose of this article, I’ll be sharing techniques that give the best results across all of the popular clients, including the notorious ones like Gmail, Lotus Notes 6 and Outlook 2007. Just remember that pixel perfection in all email clients is a pipe dream.

Let’s get started.

Use tables for layout

Because clients like Gmail and Outlook 2007 have poor support for float, margin and padding, you’ll need to use tables as the framework of your email. While nested tables are widely supported, consistent treatment of width, margin and padding within table cells is not. For the best results, keep the following in mind when coding your table structure.

Set the width in each cell, not the table

When you combine table widths, td widths, td padding and CSS padding into an email, the final result is different in almost every email client. The most reliable way to set the width of your table is to set a width for each cell, not for the table itself.

<table cellspacing=""0"" cellpadding=""10"" border=""0"">
	<tr>
		<td width=""80""></td>
		<td width=""280""></td>
	</tr>
</table>

Never assume that if you don’t specify a cell width the email client will figure it out. It won’t.  Also avoid using percentage based widths. Clients like Outlook 2007 don’t respect them, especially for nested tables. Stick to pixels. If you want to add padding to each cell, use either the cellpadding attribute of the table or CSS padding for each cell, but never combine the two.

Err toward nesting

Table nesting is far more reliable than setting left and right margins or padding for table cells. If you can achieve the same effect by table nesting, that will always give you the best result across the buggier email clients.

Use a container table for body background colors

Many email clients ignore background colors specified in your CSS or the <body> tag. To work around this, wrap your entire email with a 100% width table and give that a background color.

<table cellspacing=""0"" cellpadding=""0"" border=""0"" width=""100%"">
	<tr>
		<td bgcolor=”#000000”>
			Your email code goes here.
		</td>
	</tr>
</table>

You can use the same approach for background images too. Just remember that some email clients don’t support them, so always provide a fallback color.

Avoid unnecessary whitespace in table cells

Where possible, avoid whitespace between your <td> tags. Some email clients (ahem, Yahoo! and Hotmail) can add additional padding above or below the cell contents in some scenarios, breaking your design for no apparent reason.

CSS and general font formatting

While some email designers do their best to avoid CSS altogether and rely on the dreaded <font> tag, the truth is many CSS properties are well supported by most email clients. See this comprehensive list of CSS support across the major clients for a good idea of the safe properties and those that should be avoided. 

Always move your CSS inline

Gmail is the culprit for this one. By stripping the CSS from the <head> and <body> of any email, we’re left with no choice but to move all CSS inline. The good news is this is something you can almost completely automate. Free services like Premailer will move all CSS inline with the click of a button. I recommend leaving this step to the end of your build process so you can utilize all the benefits of CSS.

Avoid shorthand for fonts and hex notation

A number of email clients reject CSS shorthand for the font property. For example, never set your font styles like this.

p {
	font:bold 1em/1.2em georgia,times,serif;
}

Instead, declare the properties individually like this.

p {
	font-weight: bold;
	font-size: 1em;
	line-height: 1.2em;
	font-family: georgia,times,serif;
}

While we’re on the topic of fonts, I recently tested every conceivable variation of @font-face across the major email clients. The results were dismal, so unfortunately it’s web-safe fonts in email for the foreseeable future.

When declaring the color property in your CSS, some email clients don’t support shorthand hexadecimal colors like color:#f60; instead of color:#ff6600;. Stick to the longhand approach for the best results.

Paragraphs

Just like table cell spacing, paragraph spacing can be tricky to get a consistent result across the board. I’ve seen many designers revert to using double <br /> or DIVs with inline CSS margins to work around these shortfalls, but recent testing showed that paragraph support is now reliable enough to use in most cases (there was a time when Yahoo! didn’t support the paragraph tag at all).

The best approach is to set the margin inline via CSS for every paragraph in your email, like so:

p {
	margin: 0 0 1.6em 0;
}

Again, do this via CSS in the head when building your email, then use Premailer to bring it inline for each paragraph later.

If part of your design is height-sensitive and calls for pixel perfection, I recommend avoiding paragraphs altogether and setting the text formatting inline in the table cell. You might need to use table nesting or cellpadding / CSS to get the desired result. Here’s an example:

<td width=""200"" style=""font-weight:bold; font-size:1em; line-height:1.2em; font-family:georgia,'times',serif;"">your height sensitive text</td>

Links

Some email clients will overwrite your link colors with their defaults, and you can avoid this by taking two steps. First, set a default color for each link inline like so:

<a href=""http://somesite.com/"" style=""color:#ff00ff"">this is a link</a>

Next, add a redundant span inside the a tag.

<a href=""http://somesite.com/"" style=""color:#ff00ff""><span style=""color:#ff00ff"">this is a link</span></a>

To some this may be overkill, but if link color is important to your design then a superfluous span is the best way to achieve consistency.

Images in HTML emails

The most important thing to remember about images in email is that they won’t be visible by default for many subscribers. If you start your design with that assumption, it forces you to keep things simple and ensure no important content is suppressed by image blocking.

With this in mind, here are the essentials to remember when using images in HTML email:

Avoid spacer images

While the combination of spacer images and nested tables was popular on the web ten years ago, image blocking in many email clients has ruled it out as a reliable technique today. Most clients replace images with an empty placeholder in the same dimensions, others strip the image altogether. Given image blocking is on by default in most email clients, this can lead to a poor first impression for many of your subscribers. Stick to fixed cell widths to keep your formatting in place with or without images.

Always include the dimensions of your image

If you forget to set the dimensions for each image, a number of clients will invent their own sizes when images are blocked and break your layout. Also, ensure that any images are correctly sized before adding them to your email. Some email clients will ignore the dimensions specified in code and rely on the true dimensions of your image. 

Avoid PNGs

Lotus Notes 6 and 7 don’t support 8-bit or 24-bit PNG images, so stick with the GIF or JPG formats for all images, even if it means some additional file size.

Provide fallback colors for background images

Outlook 2007 has no support for background images (aside from this hack to get full page background images working). If you want to use a background image in your design, always provide a background color the email client can fall back on. This solves both the image blocking and Outlook 2007 problem simultaneously.

Don’t forget alt text

Lack of standards support means email clients have long destroyed the chances of a semantic and accessible HTML email. Even still, providing alt text is important from an image blocking perspective. Even with images suppressed by default, many email clients will display the provided alt text instead. Just remember that some email clients like Outlook 2007, Hotmail and Apple Mail don’t support alt text at all when images are blocked.

Use the display hack for Hotmail

For some inexplicable reason, Windows Live Hotmail adds a few pixels of additional padding below images. A workaround is to set the display property like so.

img {display:block;}

This removes the padding in Hotmail and still gives you the predicable result in other email clients.

Don’t use floats

Both Outlook 2007 and earlier versions of Notes offer no support for the float property. Instead, use the align attribute of the img tag to float images in your email.

<img src=""image.jpg"" align=""right"">

If you’re seeing strange image behavior in Yahoo! Mail, adding align=“top” to your images can often solve this problem.

Video in email

With no support for JavaScript or the object tag, video in email (if you can call it that) has long been limited to animated gifs. However, some recent research I did into the HTML5 video tag in email showed some promising results.

Turns out HTML5 video does work in many email clients right now, including Apple Mail, Entourage 2008, MobileMe and the iPhone. The real benefit of this approach is that if the video isn’t supported, you can provide reliable fallback content such as an animated GIF or a clickable image linking to the video in the browser.

Of course, the question of whether you should add video to email is another issue altogether. If you lean toward the “yes” side check out the technique with code samples.

What about mobile email?

The mobile email landscape was a huge mess until recently. With the advent of the iPhone, Android and big improvements from Palm and RIM, it’s becoming less important to think of mobile as a different email platform altogether.

That said, there are a few key pointers to keep in mind when coding your emails to get a decent result for your more mobile subscribers.

Keep the width less than 600 pixels

Because of email client preview panes, this rule was important long before mobile email clients came of age. In truth, the iPhone and Pre have a viewport of 320 pixels, the Droid 480 pixels and the Blackberry models hover around 360 pixels. Sticking to a maximum of 600 pixels wide ensures your design should still be readable when scaled down for each device. This width also gives good results in desktop and web-based preview panes.

Be aware of automatic text resizing

In what is almost always a good feature, email clients using webkit (such as the iPhone, Pre and Android) can automatically adjust font sizes to increase readability. If testing shows this feature is doing more harm than good to your design, you can always disable it with the following CSS rule:

-webkit-text-size-adjust: none;

Don’t forget to test

While standards support in email clients hasn’t made much progress in the last few years, there has been continual change (for better or worse) in some email clients. Web-based providers like Yahoo!, Hotmail and Gmail are notorious for this. On countless occasions I’ve seen a proven design suddenly stop working without explanation.

For this reason alone it’s important to retest your email designs on a regular basis. I find a quick test every month or so does the trick, especially in the web-based clients. The good news is that after designing and testing a few HTML email campaigns, you will find that order will emerge from the chaos. Many of these pitfalls will become quite predictable and your inbox-friendly designs will take shape with them in mind.

Looking ahead

Designing HTML email can be a tough pill for new designers and standardistas to swallow, especially given the fickle and retrospective nature of email clients today. With HTML5 just around the corner we are entering a new, uncertain phase. Will email client developers take the opportunity to repent on past mistakes and bring email clients into the present? The aim of groups such as the Email Standards Project is to make much of the above advice as redundant as the long-forgotten <blink> and <marquee> tags, however, only time will tell if this is to become a reality.

Although not the most compliant (or fashionable) medium, the results speak for themselves – email is, and will continue to be one of the most successful and targeted marketing channels available to you. As a designer with HTML email design skills in your arsenal, you have the opportunity to not only broaden your service offering, but gain a unique appreciation of how vital standards are.

Next steps

Ready to get started? There are a number of HTML email design galleries to provide ideas and inspiration for your own designs. 


	http://www.campaignmonitor.com/gallery/
	http://htmlemailgallery.com/
	http://inboxaward.com/


Enjoy!",2009,David Greiner,davidgreiner,2009-12-13T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2009/rock-solid-html-emails/,code
119,Rocking Restrictions,"I love my job. I live my job. For every project I do, I try to make it look special. I’ll be honest: I have a fetish for comments like “I never saw anything like that!” or, “I wish I thought of that!”. I know, I have an ego-problem. (Eleven I’s already)

But sometimes, you run out of inspiration. Happens to everybody, and everybody hates it. “I’m the worst designer in the world.” “Everything I designed before this was just pure luck!” No it wasn’t.

Countless articles about finding inspiration have already been written. Great, but they’re not the magic potion you’d expect them to be when you need it. Here’s a list of small tips that can have immediate effect when applying them/using them. Main theme: Liberate yourself from the designers’ block by restricting yourself.

Do’s

Grids

If you aren’t already using grids, you’re doing something wrong. Not only are they a great help for aligning your design, they also restrict you to certain widths and heights. (For more information about grids, I suggest you read Mark Boulton’s series on designing grid systems. Oh, he’s also publishing a book I think.)

So what’s the link between grids and restrictions? Instead of having the option to style a piece of layout with a width of 1 to 960 pixels, you have to choose from values like 60 pixels, 140, 220, 300, …

Start small

Having a hard time finding a style for the layout, why don’t you start with one small object? No, not that small object, I meant a piece of a form, or a link, or try styling your headers (h1 – h6).

Let’s take a submit button of a form: it’s small, but needs much attention. People will click it. People will hover it. Maybe sometimes it’s disabled? Also: a button needs to look like a button, so typically it requires more styling then a regular link. Once you’ve got the button, move on, following the button’s style.

Color palettes

There are lots of resources on the web for finding inspiration for color palettes. Some of the most famous are COLOURlovers, wear palettes and Adobe’s Kuler. Browse through them (or create your own from a picture), pick a color palette you like and which works with the subject you’re handling, and stick with it. 4-5 colors, maybe with some tonal variations, but that’s it.

Fonts

There aren’t many fonts available for the web (Richard Rutter has a great article on this subject), but you’d be surprised how long they go. A simple text-transform: uppercase; or font-style: italic; can change a dull looking font into something entirely fresh.

Play around with the fonts you want to use and the variations you’ll be using, and make a list. Pick five combinations of fonts and their variations, and stick with them throughout the layout.

Single-task

Most of us use multiple monitors. They’re great to increase productivity, but make it harder to focus on a single task. Here’s what you do: try using only your smallest monitor. Maybe it’s the one from your laptop, maybe it’s an old 1024×768 you found in the attic. Having Photoshop (or Fireworks or…) taking over your entire workspace blocks out all the other distractions on your screen, and works quite liberating.

Mute everything…

…but not entirely. I noticed I was way more focused when I set NetNewsWire to refresh it’s feeds only once every two hours. After two hours, I need a break anyway. Turning off Twitterrific was a mistake, as it’s my window to the world, and it’s the place where the people I like to call colleagues live. You can’t exactly ask them to bring you a cup of coffee when they go to the vending machine, but they do keep you fresh, and it stops you from going human-shy. Instead I changed the settings to not play a notification sound when new Tweets arrive so it doesn’t disturb me when I’m zoning.

Don’ts

CSS galleries

Don’t start browsing all kinds of CSS galleries. Either you’ll feel bad, or you just start using elements in a way you can’t call “inspired” anymore. Instead gather your own collection of inspiration. Example: I use LittleSnapper in which I dump everything I find inspiring. This goes from a smart layout idea, to a failed picture someone posted on Flickr. Everything is inspiring.

Panicking

Don’t panic. It’s the worst thing you could do. Instead, get away from the computer, and go to bed early. A good night of sleep combined with a hot/cold shower can give you a totally new perspective on a design. Got a deadline by tomorrow? Well, you should’ve started earlier. Got a good excuse to start on this design this late? Tell your client it was either that or a bad design.

120-hour work-week

Don’t work all day long, including evenings and early mornings. Write off that first hour, you don’t really think you’ll get anything productive done before 9AM?! I don’t even think you should work on one and the same design all day long. If you’re stuck, try working in blocks of 1 or 2 hours on a certain design. Mixing projects isn’t for everyone, but it might just do the trick for you.

Summary


	Use grids, not only for layout purposes.
	Pick a specific element to start with.
	Use a colour palette.
	Limit the amount of fonts and variations you’ll use.
	Search for the smallest monitor around, and restrict yourself to that one.
	Reduce the amount of noise.
	Don’t start looking on the internet for inspiration. Build your own little inspirarchive.
	Work in blocks.",2008,Tim Van Damme,timvandamme,2008-12-14T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2008/rocking-restrictions/,process
138,Rounded Corner Boxes the CSS3 Way,"If you’ve been doing CSS for a while you’ll know that there are approximately 3,762 ways to create a rounded corner box. The simplest techniques rely on the addition of extra mark-up directly to your page, while the more complicated ones add the mark-up though DOM manipulation. While these techniques are all very interesting, they do seem somewhat of a kludge. The goal of CSS is to separate structure from presentation, yet here we are adding superfluous mark-up to our code in order to create a visual effect. The reason we are doing this is simple. CSS2.1 only allows a single background image per element.

Thankfully this looks set to change with the addition of multiple background images into the CSS3 specification. With CSS3 you’ll be able to add not one, not four, but eight background images to a single element. This means you’ll be able to create all kinds of interesting effects without the need of those additional elements.

While the CSS working group still seem to be arguing over the exact syntax, Dave Hyatt went ahead and implemented the currently suggested mechanism into Safari. The technique is fiendishly simple, and I think we’ll all be a lot better off once the W3C stop arguing over the details and allow browser vendors to get on and provide the tools we need to build better websites.

To create a CSS3 rounded corner box, simply start with your box element and apply your 4 corner images, separated by commas.

.box {
	background-image: url(top-left.gif), url(top-right.gif), url(bottom-left.gif), url(bottom-right.gif);
}

We don’t want these background images to repeat, which is the normal behaviour, so lets set all their background-repeat properties to no-repeat.

.box {
	background-image: url(top-left.gif), url(top-right.gif), url(bottom-left.gif), url(bottom-right.gif);
	background-repeat: no-repeat, no-repeat, no-repeat, no-repeat;
}

Lastly, we need to define the positioning of each corner image.

.box {
	background-image: url(top-left.gif), url(top-right.gif), url(bottom-left.gif), url(bottom-right.gif);
	background-repeat: no-repeat, no-repeat, no-repeat, no-repeat;
	background-position: top left, top right, bottom left, bottom right;
}

And there we have it, a simple rounded corner box with no additional mark-up.

As well as using multiple background images, CSS3 also has the ability to create rounded corners without the need of any images at all. You can do this by setting the border-radius property to your desired value as seen in the next example.

.box {
	border-radius: 1.6em;
}

This technique currently works in Firefox/Camino and creates a nice, if somewhat jagged rounded corner. If you want to create a box that works in both Mozilla and WebKit based browsers, why not combine both techniques and see what happens.",2006,Andy Budd,andybudd,2006-12-04T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2006/rounded-corner-boxes-the-css3-way/,code
6,Run Ragged,"You care about typography, right? Do you care about words and how they look, read, and are understood? If you pick up a book or magazine, you notice the moment something is out of place: an orphan, rivers within paragraphs of justified prose, or caps masquerading as small caps. So why, I ask you, is your stance any different on the web?

We’re told time and time again that as a person who makes websites we have to get comfortable with our lack of control. On the web, this is a feature, not a bug. But that doesn’t mean we have to lower our standards, or not strive for the same amount of typographic craft of our print-based cousins. We shouldn’t leave good typesetting at the door because we can’t control the line length.

When I typeset books, I’d spend hours manipulating the text to create a pleasurable flow from line to line. A key aspect of this is manicuring the right rag — the vertical line of words on ranged-left text. Maximising the space available, but ensuring there are no line breaks or orphaned words that disrupt the flow of reading. Setting a right rag relies on a bunch of guidelines — or as I was first taught to call them, violations! 

Violation 1. Never break a line immediately following a preposition

Prepositions are important, frequently used words in English. They link nouns, pronouns and other words together in a sentence. And links should not be broken if you can help it. Ending a line on a preposition breaks the join from one word to another and forces the reader to work harder joining two words over two lines.

For example: 


	The container is for the butter


The preposition here is for and shows the relationship between the butter and the container. If this were typeset on a line and the line break was after the word for, then the reader would have to carry that through to the next line. The sentence would not flow.

There are lots of prepositions in English – about 150 – but only 70 or so in use.

Violation 2. Never break a line immediately following a dash

A dash — either an em-dash or en-dash — can be used as a pause in the reading, or as used here, a point at which you introduce something that is not within the flow of the sentence. Like an aside. Ending with a pause on the end of the line would have the same effect as ending on a preposition. It disrupts the flow of reading.

Violation 3. No small words at the end of a line

Don’t end a line with small words. Most of these will actually be covered by violation №1. But there will be exceptions. My general rule of thumb here is not to leave words of two or three letters at the end of a line.

Violation 4. Hyphenation

In print, hyphens are used at the end of lines to join words broken over a line break. Mostly, this is used in justified body text, and no doubt you will be used to seeing it in newspapers or novels. A good rule of thumb is to not allow more than two consecutive lines to end with a hyphen.

On the web, of course, we can use the CSS hyphens property. It’s reasonably supported with the exception of Chrome. Of course, it works best when combined with justified text to retain the neat right margin.

Violation 5. Don’t break emphasised phrases of three or fewer words

If you have a few words emphasised, for example:


	He calls this problem definition escalation


…then try not to break the line among them. It’s important the reader reads through all the words as a group.

How do we do all of that on the web?

All of those guidelines are relatively easy to implement in print. But what about the web? Where content is poured into a template from a CMS? Well, there are things we can do. Meet your new friend, the non-breaking space, or as you may know them:  .

The guidelines above are all based on one decision for the typesetter: when should the line break? 

We can simply run through a body of text and add the   based on these sets of questions:


	Are there any prepositions in the text? If so, add a   after them.
	Are there any dashes? If so, add a   after them.
	Are there any words of fewer than three characters that you haven’t already added spaces to? If so, add a   after them.
	Are there any emphasised groups of words either two or three words long? If so, add a   in between them.


For a short piece of text, this isn’t a big problem. But for longer bodies of text, this is a bit arduous. Also, as I said, lots of websites use a CMS and just dump the text into a template. What then? We can’t expect our content creators to manually manicure a right rag based on these guidelines. In this instance, we really need things to be automatic.

There isn’t any reason why we can’t just pass the question of when to break the line straight to the browser by way of a script which compares the text against a set of rules. In plain English, this script could be to scan the text for:


	Prepositions. If found, add   after them.
	Dashes. If found, add   after them.
	Words fewer than three characters long that aren’t prepositions. If found, add   after them.
	Emphasised phrases of up to three words in length. If found, add   between all of the words.


And there we have it.

A note on fluidity

An important consideration of this script is that it doesn’t scan the text to see what is at the end of a line. It just looks for prepositions, dashes, words fewer than three characters long, and emphasised words within paragraphs and applies the   accordingly regardless of where the thing lives. This is because in a fluid layout a word might appear in the beginning, middle or the end of a line depending on the width of the browser. And we want it to behave in the right way when it does find itself at the end.

See it in action!

My friend and colleague, Nathan Ford, has written a small JavaScript called Ragadjust that does all of this automatically. The script loops through a webpage, compares the text against the conditions, and then inserts   in the places that violate the conditions above.

You can get the script from GitHub and see it in action on my own website.

Some caveats

As my friend Jon Tan says, “There are no rules in typography, just good or bad decisions”, and typesetting the right rag is no different. 


	The guidelines for the violations above are useful for justified text, too. But we need to be careful here. Too stringent adherence to these violations could lead to ugly gaps in our words — called rivers — as the browser forces justification.
	The violation regarding short words at the end of sentences is useful for longer line lengths, or measures, of text. When the measure gets shorter, maybe five or six words, then we need to be more forgiving as to what wraps to the next line and what doesn’t. In fact, you can see this happening on my site where I’ve not included a check on the size of the browser window (purposefully, for this demo, of course. Ahem).
	This article is about applying these guidelines to English. Some of them will, no doubt, cross over to other languages quite well. But for those languages, like German for instance, where longer words tend to be in more frequent use, then some of the rules may result in a poor right rag.


Marginal gains

In 2007, I spoke with Richard Rutter at SXSW on web typography. In that talk, Richard and I made a point that good typographic design — on the web, in print; anywhere, in fact — relies on small, measurable improvements across an entire body of work. From heading hierarchy to your grid system, every little bit helps. In and of themselves, these little things don’t really mean that much. You may well have read this article, shrugged your shoulders and thought, “Huh. So what?” But these little things, when added up, make a difference. A difference between good typographic design and great typographic design.

 

Appendix

Preposition whitelist

aboard
about
above
across
after
against
along
amid
among
anti
around
as
at
before
behind
below
beneath
beside
besides
between
beyond
but
by
concerning
considering
despite
down
during
except
excepting
excluding
following
for
from
in
inside
into
like
minus
near
of
off
on
onto
opposite
outside
over
past
per
plus
regarding
round
save
since
than
through
to
toward
towards
under
underneath
unlike
until
up
upon
versus
via
with
within
without",2013,Mark Boulton,markboulton,2013-12-24T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2013/run-ragged/,design
35,SEO in 2015 (and Why You Should Care),"If your business is healthy, you can always find plenty of reasons to leave SEO on your to-do list in perpetuity. After all, SEO is technical, complicated, time-consuming and potentially dangerous. The SEO industry is full of self-proclaimed gurus whose lack of knowledge can be deadly. There’s the terrifying fact that even if you dabble in SEO in the most gentle and innocent way, you might actually end up in a worse state than you were to begin with.

To make matters worse, Google keeps changing the rules. There have been a bewildering number of major updates, which despite their cuddly names have had a horrific impact on website owners worldwide.

Fear aside, there’s also the issue of time. It’s probably tricky enough to find the time to read this article. Setting up, planning and executing an SEO campaign might well seem like an insurmountable obstacle.

So why should you care enough about SEO to do it anyway?

The main reason is that you probably already see between 30% and 60% of your website traffic come from the search engines. That might make you think that you don’t need to bother, because you’re already doing so well. But you’re almost certainly wrong.

If you have a look through the keyword data in your Google Webmaster Tools account, you’ll probably see that around 30–50% of the keywords used to find your website are brand names – the names of your products or companies. These are searches carried out by people who already know about you. But the people who don’t know who you are but are searching for what you sell aren’t finding you right now. This is your opportunity.

If a person goes looking for a company or product by name, Google will steer them towards what they’re looking for. Their intelligence does have limits, however, and even though they know your name they won’t be completely clear about what you sell. That’s where SEO would come in.

Still need more convincing? How about the fact that the seeming complexities of SEO mean that your competition are almost certainly neglecting it too. They have the same reservations as you about complexity, time and danger, and hopefully they aren’t reading this article and so are none the wiser of the well-kept secret: that 70% of SEO is easy.

I’m going to lead you through what you need to do to tap into that stream of people looking for what you sell right now.

What is real SEO?

Real SEO is all about helping Google understand the content of your website. It’s about steering, guiding and assisting Google. Not manipulating it.

It’s easy to assume that Google already understands the content and relevance of each and every page on your website, but the fact is that it needs a fair amount of hand-holding. Fortunately, helping Google along really isn’t very difficult at all.

Rest assured that real SEO has nothing to do with keyword stuffing, keyword density, hacks, tricks or cunning techniques. If you hear any of these terms from your SEO advisor, run away from them as quickly as you can.

Understanding your current situation – Google Analytics

Before you can do anything to improve your SEO status, you need to get an idea of how you’re already doing. Below is a very quick and easy way of doing so.

1. Open up your Google Analytics account.

2. Click on the date range selector on the top-right of the interface and change the year of the first date to last year. So 12 Dec 2014 will become 12 Dec 2013. Then click on Apply.

3. Click on the All Sessions rectangle towards the top-left, click once on Organic Traffic and click Apply.

4. Click the little black-and-white squares icon that has now appeared under the date selector on the top-right, and drag the slider all the way over to Higher Precision.

5. Change the interval buttons on the top-right of the graph to Week to make this easier to digest.

At this point your graph should look something like this:



It’s worth noting the approximate proportion of your visitors that currently come from organic sources.

6. Click the little downwards arrow to the right of the All Sessions rectangle and choose Remove, so that we’re only looking at the organic traffic on its own.

7. Click on Select a metric next to the Sessions button above the graph and select Pages / Session. You should then see something like this:



In the example above we can see that the quantity of traffic has been increasing since the middle of August, but the quality of the traffic (as measured by the number of pages per session) has fallen significantly. 

How you choose to view this is down to your own graph, recent history and interpretation of events, but this should give you an indication of how things stand at the present time. Trends are often much more revealing than a snapshot of a brief moment in time.

Your Google Webmaster Tools data

If you’re not very familiar with your Google Webmaster Tools account, it’s really worth taking ten to fifteen minutes to see what’s on offer. I can’t recommend this enough. From the point of view of an SEO health check, I’d advise you to look into the HTML Improvements, Crawl Errors and Crawl Stats, and most importantly the Search Queries.

From what you see here and the trends shown in your Analytics data, you should now have a good idea of your current status. If you want to explore further, I recommend Screaming Frog as a good diagnostics tool, or Botify if your website is large or unusually complex.

Combining the data into something useful

Your Google Analytics session will have shown you how you’re doing from an SEO point of view in terms of the quantity and, to some extent, the quality of your visitors. But it’s only showing you what is already working. In other words: the people who are finding you on the search engines, and clicking on your links.

The Google Webmaster Tools search query data, on the other hand, will give you a better idea of what isn’t working. It will show you the keyword searches that are getting you listed in the results, but which aren’t necessarily getting clicked. And it doesn’t take much by the way of expertise to see why.

For example, if you see your targeted keyword, which you feel is extremely relevant, has generated over 2,000 impressions in the last month but produced only two clicks, you’ll probably find a very low average position. Bear in mind that an average position of fourteen will mean being around halfway down the second page of results. Think about how rarely you go beyond the first two or three listings, never mind to the second page of results, and you’ll understand why the click-through rate is so low.

So now you have an idea of what you’re being found for at the present time. But what about the other terms?

What would you like to be found for?

This is one of the more common SEO mistakes, on a number of different levels. 

Many businesses assume that they don’t need to worry about keyword research. They think they know what terms people use to find what they sell, and they also assume that Google understands the content on their website. This is incorrect on all counts.

A better starting point is to brainstorm a small number of your most obvious keywords, then run them through Google’s Keyword Planner. Ignore the information in the Ad group ideas tab, and instead go straight to the Keyword ideas tab. Rather than wade through the very unfriendly interface, I recommend downloading the data as a spreadsheet, in which not only is more detail included, but you can also slice, dice, sort and report the data as required.

From there you can delete all the irrelevant columns, and start working your way through the list, deleting any irrelevant keywords as you go along.

It’s around this stage that you may hit a problem in terms of where to focus your efforts. The number of reported searches for a given keyword is of course important, but so is the level of competition. Ideally, you’d like keywords with plenty of searches but not too much competition.

I personally like to factor both together by adding a column that simply divides the number of searches squared by the level of competition:

(number of searches × number of searches) ÷ competition

There are plenty of alternatives to this basic formula, but I like it for ease of use and simplicity. Once I’ve added this column, I then sort the data by this value (largest to smallest) and I then only usually need ten to fifteen keywords at most to give me plenty of ideas to work with.

This is a slightly involved but effective methodology for keyword research, as what you’re left with is a list of keywords that both Google and you consider to be relevant to the content of your website. And relevance is an important concept in SEO.

Real SEO keyword research is about making sure that your customers, website and Google are all in agreement and alignment over the content of your website. Other sources of inspiration and ideas include having a look at what terms your competition are targeting, Google Trends and, of course, Google Suggest. If you’re not sure where to find these things, you can probably work out where to search for them!

If you want to dive further into understanding your current search engine status, search for some of the better keywords that you just discovered and see where you rank compared to your competition. Note that it’s vital to avoid Google serving up personalised results, so either use the privacy, incognito or anonymous mode of your browser for the searches, or use a browser that you don’t normally use. I hope this is Internet Explorer. If what you find isn’t great, don’t despair: everything in SEO is fixable (terms and conditions may apply).

Putting it all together

You should now have a good idea of where things stand with your current search engine traffic, and a solid list of keywords that you’re not getting visitors for but very much want.

All that’s left now is to work out how to use these keywords. But before we do, let’s take a quick step back.

If you have in any way kept up with what’s been happening in SEO over the last couple of years, you’ll have probably heard about Google updates with names like Panda, Hummingbird, Phantom, Pirate and more.

I won’t go into the technical details of what Google is doing, but it is important to understand why they’re trying to do it. At the most basic level, Google understands that there’s a very real problem with people who are trying manipulate its index. In response to this, Google is trying to clean up its results. They don’t want people getting fed up with bad results and considering other options – have you even tried Bing?

This is extremely important. Remember earlier when I said that 70% of SEO was easy? That rule still applies. So, for example, if you have a list of keywords that you know are relevant to what you sell, then all you need to do is create great content for them. Incredibly, that’s all there is to it (terms and conditions apply again, unfortunately – see below).

There is, however, one simple rule to be consistently followed without exception: that the content you create should not only be good quality and completely original, but it should also be written primarily for the human visitor and not the search engine spider.

In other words, if you create some fantastic content for a keyword like “choosing a small business HR service”, then the article should not only make perfect sense if read out loud (as opposed to the same phrase being repeated fifteen times), but also provide real value to the person reading it.

So the process is simple:


	Choose your keywords
	Create spectacular content


Wait. Is it really that simple?

Unfortunately there’s a lot more to the other 30% of SEO than just creating great content and waiting for the visitors. There are issues like helping Google understand the content on your pages and website, incoming links, page authority, domain authority, usage patterns, spam factors, canonical issues and much more.

But there’s the often overlooked fact about Google: it actually does a reasonable job of working out what’s on your website and (to some extent) understanding the gist of it. If you’ve never done any SEO on your website but still get some traffic from Google, this is why.

Even without dabbling in the other 30% of SEO, by creating the right content for the right visitors using the precise language and terminology that your potential customers are using, you’re significantly better off than your competition. And you can only gain from this.

When you’ve checked this off your to-do list and made it an ingrained part of your content creation process, then you’re ready to delve into the other 30% of SEO. The not-so-easy side.

Until then, work on understanding your current situation, exploring the opportunities, creating a list of good keywords, creating the right content for them, and starting 2015 with a little bit of smart, safe and real SEO.",2014,Dave Collins,davecollins,2014-12-15T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2014/seo-in-2015-and-why-you-should-care/,business
81,Science!,"Sometimes we want to capture people’s attention at a glance to communicate something fast. At other times we want to have the interface fade away into the background, letting people paint pictures in their minds with our words (if you’ll forgive a little flowery festive flourish).

I tend to distinguish between these two broad objectives as designing for impact on the one hand, and designing for immersion on the other. What defines them is interruption. Impact needs an attention-grabbing interruption. Immersion requires us to remove interruption from the interface. Careful design deliberately interrupts but doesn’t accidentally disrupt. If that seems to make sense to you, then you’ll find the following snippets of science as useful as I did.

Saccades and fixations

As you’re reading this your eyes are skipping along the lines in tiny jumps. During each jump everything is blurred. Each jump ends in a small pause so your brain can take a snapshot of the letters. It arranges them into words, and then parses out the meaning — fast — in around a quarter of a second.

The jumps are called saccades. The pauses are called fixations. Sometimes we take regressive saccades, skipping back to reread. There’s a simple example in the excellent little book, Detail in Typography, by Jost Hochuli.



If you want to explore the science of reading in much more depth, I recommend the excellent paper, “The Science of Word Recognition”, by Dr Kevin Larson of Microsoft.

To design for legibility and readability is to design for saccades and fixations. It’s the craft of making it easy for people’s brains to extract meaning, using techniques like good contrast, font size, spacing and structure, and only interrupting the reading experience deliberately.

Scan paths

At some point when visiting 24 ways you probably scanned the screen to get orientated. The journey your eyes took is known as a scan path. Scan paths are made up of saccades and fixations. Right now you’re following a scan path as you read, along one line, and down to the next. This is a map of the scan paths found by Olivier Le Meur from observing people looking at Rembrandt’s Leçon d’anatomie:



For websites, the scan path is a little different. This is an aggregate scan path of Google from LC Technologies:



The average shape of a website scan path becomes clearer in this average scan path taken by forty-six people during research by the Poynter Institute, the Estlow Center for Journalism & New Media, and Eyetools:



Just like when we read text arranged left to right in a vertical column, scan paths follow a roughly Z-shaped pattern from the top left to bottom right. Sometimes we skip back to reread a word or sentence, or glance again at a specific element, but the Z-shaped scan path persists.

Designing for scan paths is to organise content to help people move through an interface to get orientated, and to read.

The elements that are important enough to need impact must interrupt the scan path and clearly call attention to themselves. However, they don’t always need to clip people round the ear from multiple directions at once to get attention. It helps to list elements by importance. That gives us an interruption hierarchy to work with. Elements can then interrupt the design with degrees of contrast to the rest of the content using either positioning, treatment, or both. Ta-da! Impact achieved, but gently. No clips round the ear required.

Swinging mood

Human beings are resilient. Among the immersion and occasional interruptions, we even like a little disruption, especially if it’s absurd and funny. The Ling’s Cars website proves it. In fact, we’re so resilient that we can work around all kinds of mayhem to get a seemingly simple task done.

In one study, “The Aesthetics of Reading” (PDF, 480Kb), Dr Kevin Larson of Microsoft and Dr Rosalind Picard of MIT explored the effect of good typography on mood. Two versions of the New Yorker ePeriodical were created. One was typeset well and the other poorly.



They engaged twenty volunteers — half male, half female — and showed the good version to half of the participants. The other half saw the poor version.

The good doctors found that, “there are important differences between good and poor typography that appear to have little effect on common performance measures such as reading speed and comprehension.” In short, good typography didn’t help people read faster or comprehend better.

Oh. On the face of it that seems to invalidate what we designers do. Hold your horses, though! They also found that “the participants who received the good typography performed better on relative subjective duration and on certain cognitive tasks”, and that “good typography induces a good mood.”

This means that even though there were no actual differences in reading speed and comprehension, the people who read the version with good typography thought that it took less time to read, and were induced into a good mood by doing so. Not only that, but by being in a good mood, people were more capable of completing creative tasks faster.

That was a revelation to me. It means that the study showed there is a positive, measurable, emotional and perceptual benefit to good typography and design. To paraphrase: time and tasks fly when you’re having fun!



Source: Nationaal Archief of the Netherlands: Cheering man after the first goal, Netherlands vs. Belgium, Amsterdam, 1931.

So, among all my talk of saccades, fixations, scan paths and typesetting, there is science, and the science helps us qualify our design decisions when we need to, and do our jobs better. The science helps us understand how people will interact with our work, and what the actual benefits are for them, and the products or organisations we serve. Good design equals a subjectively quicker experience, a good mood, objectively faster completion of tasks, and happiness for everyone. Thank you, science!",2012,Jon Tan,jontan,2012-12-24T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2012/science/,design
263,Securing Your Site like It’s 1999,"Running a website in the early years of the web was a scary business. The web was an evolving medium, and people were finding new uses for it almost every day. From book stores to online auctions, the web was an expanding universe of new possibilities.
As the web evolved, so too did the knowledge of its inherent security vulnerabilities. Clever tricks that were played on one site could be copied on literally hundreds of other sites. It was a normal sight to log in to a website to find nothing working because someone had breached its defences and deleted its database. Lessons in web security in those days were hard-earned.
What follows are examples of critical mistakes that brought down several early websites, and how you can help protect yourself and your team from the same fate.
Bad input validation: Trusting anything the user sends you
Our story begins in the most unlikely place: Animal Crossing. Animal Crossing was a 2001 video game set in a quaint town, filled with happy-go-lucky inhabitants that co-exist peacefully. Like most video games, Animal Crossing was the subject of many fan communities on the early web.
One such unofficial web forum was dedicated to players discussing their adventures in Animal Crossing. Players could trade secrets, ask for help, and share pictures of their virtual homes. This might sound like a model community to you, but you would be wrong.
One day, a player discovered a hidden field in the forum’s user profile form. Normally, this page allows users to change their name, their password, or their profile photo. This person discovered that the hidden field contained their unique user ID, which identifies them when the forum’s backend saves profile changes to its database. They discovered that by modifying the form to change the user ID, they could make changes to any other player’s profile.
Needless to say, this idyllic online community descended into chaos. Users changed each other’s passwords, deleted each other’s messages, and attacked each-other under the cover of complete anonymity. What happened?
There aren’t any official rules for developing software on the web. But if there were, my golden rule would be:
Never trust user input. Ever.
Always ask yourself how users will send you data that isn’t what it seems to be. If the nicest community of gamers playing the happiest game on earth can turn on each other, nowhere on the web is safe.
Make sure you validate user input to make sure it’s of the correct type (e.g. string, number, JSON string) and that it’s the length that you were expecting. Don’t forget that user input doesn’t become safe once it is stored in your database; any data that originates from outside your network can still be dangerous and must be escaped before it is inserted into HTML.
Make sure to check a user’s actions against what they are allowed to do. Create a clear access control policy that defines what actions a user may take, and to whose data they are allowed access to. For example, a newly-registered user should not be allowed to change the user profile of a web forum’s owner.
Finally, never rely on client-side validation. Validating user input in the browser is a convenience to the user, not a security measure. Always assume the user has full control over any data sent from the browser and make sure you validate any data sent to your backend from the outside world.
SQL injection: Allowing the user to run their own database queries
A long time ago, my favourite website was a web forum dedicated to the Final Fantasy video game series. Like the users of the Animal Crossing forum, I’d while away many hours arguing with other people on the internet about my favourite characters, my favourite stories, and the greatest controversies of the day.
One day, I noticed people were acting strangely. Users were being uncharacteristically nasty and posting in private areas of the forum they wouldn’t normally have access to. Then messages started disappearing, and user accounts for well-respected people were banned.
It turns out someone had discovered a way of logging in to any other user account, using a secret password that allowed them to do literally anything they wanted. What was this password that granted untold power to those who wielded it?
' OR '1'='1
SQL is a computer language that is used to query databases. When you fill out a login form, just like the one above, your username and your password are usually inserted into an SQL query like this:

SELECT COUNT(*)
FROM USERS
WHERE USERNAME='Alice'
AND PASSWORD='hunter2'
This query selects users from the database that match the username Alice and the password hunter2. If there is at least one user matching record, the user will be granted access. Let’s see what happens when we use our magic password instead!

SELECT COUNT(*)
FROM USERS
WHERE USERNAME='Admin'
AND PASSWORD='' OR '1'='1'
Does the password look like part of the query to you? That’s because it is! This password is a deliberate attempt to inject our own SQL into the query, hence the term SQL injection. The query is now looking for users matching the username Admin, with a password that is blank, or 1=1. In an SQL query, 1=1 is always true, which makes this query select every single record in the database. As long as the forum software is checking for at least one matching user, it will grant the person logging in access. This password will work for any user registered on the forum!
So how can you protect yourself from SQL injection?
Never build SQL queries by concatenating strings. Instead, use parameterised query tools. PHP offers prepared statements, and Node.JS has the knex package. Alternatively, you can use an ORM tool, such as Propel or sequelize.
Expert help in the form of language features or software tools is a key ally for securing your code. Get all the help you can!
Cross site request forgery: Getting other users to do your dirty work for you
Do you remember Netflix? Not the Netflix we have now, the Netflix that used to rent you DVDs by mailing them to you. My next story is about how someone managed to convince Netflix users to send him their DVDs - free of charge.
Have you ever clicked on a hyperlink, only to find something that you weren’t expecting? If you were lucky, you might have just gotten Rickrolled. If you were unlucky…
Let’s just say there are older and fouler things than Rick Astley in the dark places of the web.
What if you could convince people to visit a page you controlled? And what if those people were Netflix users, and they were logged in? In 2006, Dave Ferguson did just that. He created a harmless-looking page with an image on it:
<img src=""http://www.netflix.com/JSON/AddToQueue?movieid=70110672"" />
Did you notice the source URL of the image? It’s deliberately crafted to add a particular DVD to your queue. Sprinkle in a few more requests to change the user’s name and shipping address, and you could ship yourself DVDs completely free of charge!
This attack is possible when websites unconditionally trust a user’s session cookies without checking where HTTP requests come from.
The first check you can make is to verify that a request’s origin and referer headers match the location of the website. These headers can’t be programmatically set.
Another check you can use is to add CSRF tokens to your web forms, to verify requests have come from an actual form on your website. Tokens are long, unpredictable, unique strings that are generated by your server and inserted into web forms. When users complete a form, the form data sent to the server can be checked for a recently generated token. This is an effective deterrent of CSRF attacks because CSRF tokens aren’t stored in cookies.
You can also set SameSite=Strict when setting cookies with the Set-Cookie HTTP header. This communicates to browsers that cookies are not to be sent with cross-site requests. This is a relatively new feature, though it is well supported in evergreen browsers.
Cross site scripting: Someone else’s code running on your website
In 2005, Samy Kamkar became famous for having lots of friends. Lots and lots of friends.
Samy enjoyed using MySpace which, at the time, was the world’s largest social network. Social networks at that time were more limited than today. For instance, MySpace let you upload photos to your photo gallery, but capped the limit at twelve. Twelve photos. At least you didn’t have to wade through photos of avocado toast back then…
Samy discovered that MySpace also locked down the kinds of content that you could post on your MySpace page. He discovered he could inject <img /> and <div /> tags into his headline, but <script /> was filtered. MySpace wasn’t about to let someone else run their own code on MySpace.
Intrigued, Samy set about finding out exactly what he could do with <img /> and <div /> tags. He found that you could add style properties to <div /> tags to style them with CSS.
<div style=""background:url('javascript:alert(1)')"">
This code only worked in Internet Explorer and in some versions of Safari, but that was plenty of people to befriend. However, MySpace was prepared for this: they also filtered the word javascript from <div />.
<div style=""background:url('java
script:alert(1)')"">
Samy discovered that by inserting a line break into his code, MySpace would not filter out the word javascript. The browser would continue to run the code just fine! Samy had now broken past MySpace’s first line of defence and was able to start running code on his profile page. Now he started looking at what he could do with that code.
alert(document.body.innerHTML)
Samy wondered if he could inspect the page’s source to find the details of other MySpace users to befriend. To do this, you would normally use document.body.innerHTML, but MySpace had filtered this too.
alert(eval('document.body.inne' + 'rHTML'))
This isn’t a problem if you build up JavaScript code inside a string and execute it using the eval() function. This trick also worked with XMLHttpRequest.onReadyStateChange, which allowed Samy to send friend requests to the MySpace API and install the JavaScript code on his new friends’ pages.
One final obstacle stood in his way. The same origin policy is a security mechanism that prevents scripts hosted on one domain interacting with sites hosted on another domain.
if (location.hostname == 'profile.myspace.com') {
  document.location = 'http://www.myspace.com'
  + location.pathname + location.search
}
Samy discovered that only the http://www.myspace.com domain would accept his API requests, and requests from http://profile.myspace.com were being blocked by the browser’s same-origin policy. By redirecting the browser to http://www.myspace.com, he discovered that he could load profile pages and successfully make requests to MySpace’s API. Samy installed this code on his profile page, and he waited.

Over the course of the next day, over a million people unwittingly installed Samy’s code into their MySpace profile pages and invited their friends. The load of friend requests on MySpace was so large that the site buckled and shut down. It took them two hours to remove Samy’s code and patch the security holes he exploited. Samy was raided by the United States secret service and sentenced to do 90 days of community service.
This is the power of installing a little bit of JavaScript on someone else’s website. It is called cross site scripting, and its effects can be devastating. It is suspected that cross-site scripting was to blame for the 2018 British Airways breach that leaked the credit card details of 380,000 people.
So how can you help protect yourself from cross-site scripting?
Always sanitise user input when it comes in, using a library such as sanitize-html. Open source tools like this benefit from hundreds of hours of work from dozens of experienced contributors. Don’t be tempted to roll your own protection. MySpace was prepared, but they were not prepared enough. It makes no sense to turn this kind of help down.
You can also use an auto-escaping templating language to make sure nobody else’s HTML can get into your pages. Both Angular and React will do this for you, and they are extremely convenient to use.
You should also implement a content security policy to restrict the domains that content like scripts and stylesheets can be loaded from. Loading content from sites not under your control is a significant security risk, and you should use a CSP to lock this down to only the sources you trust. CSP can also block the use of the eval() function.
For content not under your control, consider setting up sub-resource integrity protection. This allows you to add hashes to stylesheets and scripts you include on your website. Hashes are like fingerprints for digital files; if the content changes, so does the fingerprint. Adding hashes will allow your browser to keep your site safe if the content changes without you knowing.
npm audit: Protecting yourself from code you don’t own
JavaScript and npm run the modern web. Together, they make it easy to take advantage of the world’s largest public registry of open source software. How do you protect yourself from code written by someone you’ve never met? Enter npm audit.
npm audit reviews the security of your website’s dependency tree. You can start using it by upgrading to the latest version of npm:
npm install npm -g
npm audit
When you run npm audit, npm submits a description of your dependencies to the Registry, which returns a report of known vulnerabilities for the packages you have installed.

If your website has a known cross-site scripting vulnerability, npm audit will tell you about it. What’s more, if the vulnerability has been patched, running npm audit fix will automatically install the patched package for you!
Securing your site like it’s 2019
The truth is that since the early days of the web, the stakes of a security breach have become much, much higher. The web is so much more than fandom and mailing DVDs - online banking is now mainstream, social media and dating websites store intimate information about our personal lives, and we are even inviting the internet into our homes.
However, we have powerful new allies helping us stay safe. There are more resources than ever before to teach us how to write secure code. Tools like Angular and React are designed with security features baked-in from the start. We have a new generation of security tools like npm audit to watch over our dependencies.
As we roll over into 2019, let’s take the opportunity to reflect on the security of the code we write and be grateful for the everything we’ve learned in the last twenty years.",2018,Katie Fenn,katiefenn,2018-12-01T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2018/securing-your-site-like-its-1999/,code
190,Self-Testing Pages with JavaScript,"Working at an agency I am involved more and more on projects in which client side code is developed internally then sent out to a separate team for implementation. You provide static HTML, CSS and JavaScript which then get placed into the CMS and brought to life as an actual website. As you can imagine this can sometimes lead to frustrations. However many safeguards you include, handing over your code to someone else is always a difficult thing to do effectively.

In this article I will show you how you can create a JavaScript implementation checker and that will give you more time for drink based activity as your web site and apps are launched quicker and with less unwanted drama!

An all too frequent occurrence

You’ve been working on a project for weeks, fixed all your bugs and send it to be implemented. You hear nothing and assume all is going well then a few days before it’s meant to launch you get an email from the implementation team informing you of bugs in your code that you need to urgently fix.

 The 24ways website with a misspelt ID for the years menu

Being paranoid you trawl through the preview URL, check they have the latest files, check your code for errors then notice that a required HTML attribute has been omitted from the build and therefore CSS or JavaScript you’ve hooked onto that particular attribute isn’t being applied and that’s what is causing the “bug”.

It takes you seconds drafting an email informing them of this, it takes then seconds putting the required attribute in and low and behold the bug is fixed, everyone is happy but you’ve lost a good few hours of your life – this time could have been better spent in the pub.

I’m going to show you a way that these kind of errors can be alerted immediately during implementation of your code and ensure that when you are contacted you know that there actually is a bug to fix. You probably already know the things that could be omitted from a build and look like bugs so you’ll soon be creating tests to look for these and alert when they are not found on the rendered page. The error is reported directly to those who need to know about it and fix it. Less errant bug reports and less frantic emails ahoy!

 A page with an implementation issue and instant feedback on the problem

JavaScript selector engines to the rescue

Whether you’re using a library or indeed tapping into the loveliness of the new JavaScript Selector APIs looking for particular HTML elements in JavaScript is fairly trivial now. 

For instance this is how you look for a div element with the id attribute of year (the missing attribute from top image) using jQuery (the library I’ll be coding my examples in): 

if ($(‘div#year’).length) {
	alert(‘win’);
}

Using this logic you can probably imagine how you can write up a quick method to check for the existence of a particular element and alert when it’s not present — but assuming you have a complex page you’re going to be repeating yourself a fair bit and we don’t want to be doing that.

Test scripts

If you’ve got a lot of complex HTML patterns that need testing across a number of different pages it makes sense to keep your tests out of production code. Chances are you’ve already got a load of heavy JavaScript assets, and when it comes to file size saving every little helps.

I don’t think that tests should contain code inside of them so keep mine externally as JSON. This also means that you can use the one set of tests in multiple places. We already know that it’s a good idea to keep our CSS and JavaScript separate so lets continue along those lines here.

The test script for this example looks like this:

{
	""title"": ""JS tabs implementation test"",
	""description"": ""Check that the correct HTML patterns has been used"",
	""author"": ""Ross Bruniges"",
	""created"": ""20th July 2009"",
	""tests"": [
		{
			""name"": ""JS tabs elements"",
			""description"": ""Checking that correct HTML elements including class/IDs are used on the page for the JS to progressively enhance"",
			""selector"": ""div.tabbed_content"",
			""message"": ""We couldn't find VAR on the page - it's required for our JavaScript to function correctly"",
			""check_for"": {
				""contains"": {
					""elements"": [
						""div.tab_content"", ""h2"" 
					],
					""message"": ""We've noticed some missing HTML:</p><ul><li>VAR</li></ul><p>please refer to the examples sent for reference"" 
				} 
			} 
		} 
	]
}

The first four lines are just a little bit of meta data so we remember what this test was all about when we look at it again in the future, or indeed if it ever breaks. The tests are the really cool parts and firstly you’ll notice that it’s an array – we’re only going to show one example test here but there is no reason why you can’t place in as many as you want. I’ll explain what each of the lines in the example test means:


	name – short test name, I use this in pass/fail messaging later
	description – meta data for future reference
	selector – the root HTML element from which your HTML will be searched
	message – what the app will alert if the initial selector isn’t found
	check_for – a wrapper to hold inner tests – those run if the initial selector does match
	
		contains – the type of check, we’re checking that the selector contains specified elements
		
			elements – the HTML elements we are searching for
			message – a message for when these don’t match (VAR is substituted when it’s appended to the page with the name of any elements that don’t exist)
		
		
		

It’s very important to pass the function valid JSON (JSONLint is a great tool for this) otherwise you might get a console showing no tests have even been run. 

The JavaScript that makes this helpful

Again, this code should never hit a production server so I’ve kept it external. This also means that the only thing that’s needed to be done by the implementation team when they are ready to build is that they delete this code.

<script src=""sleuth.js"" type=""text/javascript""></script>
<script type=""text/javascript"">
	$(document).ready(function() {
	  sleuth.test_page.init(‘js_tabs_test.js');
	}); 
</script>

“View the full JavaScript:/examples/self-testing-pages-with-javascript/js/tests/test_suite.js

The init function appends the test console to the page and inserts the CSS file required to style it (you don’t need to use pictures of me when tests pass and fail though I see no reason why you shouldn’t), goes and grabs the JSON file referenced and parses it. The methods to pass (tests_pass) and fail (haz_fail) the test I hope are pretty self-explanatory as is the one which creates the test summary once everything has been run (create_summary).

The two interesting functions are init_tests and confirm_html.

init_tests

init_tests:function(i,obj) {
	var $master_elm = $(obj.selector);
	sleuth.test_page.$logger.append(""<div id='test_"" + i + ""' class='message'><p><em>"" + obj.name + ""</em></p></div>"");
	var $container = $('#test_' + i);
	if (!$master_elm.length) {
		var err_sum = obj.message.replace(/VAR/gi, obj.selector);
		sleuth.test_page.haz_failed(err_sum, $container);
		return;
	}
	if (obj.check_for) {
		$.each(obj.check_for,function(key, value){
			sleuth.test_page.assign_checks($master_elm, $container, key, value);
		});
	} else {
		sleuth.test_page.tests_passed($container);
		return;
	}
}

The function gets sent the number of the current iteration (used to create a unique id for its test summary) and the current object that contains the data we’re testing against as parameters.

We grab a reference to the root element and this is used (pretty much in the example shown right at the start of this article) and its length is checked. If the length is positive we know we can continue to the inner tests (if they exist) but if not we fail the test and don’t go any further. We append the error to the test console for everyone to see.

If we pass the initial check we send the reference to the root element, message contains and the inner object to a function that in this example sends us on to confirm_html (if we had a more complex test suite it would do a lot more). 

confirm_html

confirm_html:function(target_selector, error_elm, obj) {
	var missing_elms = [];
	$.each(obj.elements, function(i, val) {
		if (!target_selector.find(val).length) {
			missing_elms.push(val);
		}	
	});
	if (missing_elms.length) {
		var file_list = missing_elms.join('</li><li>');
		var err_sum = obj.message.replace(/VAR/gi, file_list);
		sleuth.test_page.haz_failed(err_sum, error_elm);
		return;
	}
	sleuth.test_page.tests_passed(error_elm);
	return;
}

We’re again using an array to check for a passed or failed test and checking its length but this time we push in a reference to each missing element we find.

If the test does fail we’re providing even more useful feedback by informing what elements have been missed out. All the implementation team need do is look for them in the files we’ve sent and include them as expected.

No more silly implementation bugs!

Here is an example of a successful implementation.

Here are some examples of failed implementations – one which fails at finding the root node and one that has the correct root node but none of the inner HTML tests pass.

Is this all we can check for?

Certainly not!

JavaScript provides pretty easy ways to check for attributes, included files (if the files being checked for are being referenced correctly and not 404ing) and even applied CSS.

Want to check that those ARIA attributes are being implemented correctly or that all images contain an alt attribute well this simple test suite can be extended to include tests for this – the sky is pretty much up to your imagination.",2009,Ross Bruniges,rossbruniges,2009-12-12T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2009/self-testing-pages-with-javascript/,process
110,Shiny Happy Buttons,"Since Mac OS X burst onto our screens, glossy, glassy, shiny buttons have been almost de rigeur, and have essentially, along with reflections and rounded corners, become a cliché of Web 2.0 “design”. But if you can’t beat ‘em you’d better join ‘em. So, in this little contribution to our advent calendar, we’re going to take a plain old boring HTML button, and 2.0 it up the wazoo. 

But, here’s the catch. We’ll use no images, either in our HTML or our CSS. No sliding doors, no image replacement techniques. Just straight up, CSS, CSS3 and a bit of experimental CSS. And, it will be compatible with pretty much any browser (though with some progressive enhancement for those who keep up with the latest browsers).

The HTML

We’ll start with our HTML.

<button type=""submit"">This is a shiny button</button>

OK, so it’s not shiny yet – but boy will it ever be.

Before styling, that’s going to look like this.

Ironically, depending on the operating system and browser you are using, it may well be a shiny button already, but that’s not the point. We want to make it shiny 2.0. Our mission is to make it look something like this



If you want to follow along at home keep in mind that depending on which browser you are using you may see fewer of the CSS effects we’ve added to create the button. As of writing, only in Safari are all the effects we’ll apply supported.

Taking a look at our finished product, here’s what we’ve done to it:


	We’ve given the button some padding and a width.
	We’ve changed the text color, and given the text a drop shadow.
	We’ve given the button a border.
	We’ve given the button some rounded corners.
	We’ve given the button a drop shadow.
	We’ve given the button a gradient background.


and remember, all without using any images.

Styling the button

So, let’s get to work.

First, we’ll add given the element some padding and a width:

button {
	padding: .5em;
	width: 15em;
}

Next, we’ll add the text color, and the drop shadow:

color: #ffffff;
text-shadow: 1px 1px 1px #000;

A note on text-shadow

If you’ve not seen text-shadows before well, here’s the quick back-story. Text shadow was introduced in CSS2, but only supported in Safari (version 1!) some years later. It was removed from CSS2.1, but returned in CSS3 (in the text module). It’s now supported in Safari, Opera and Firefox (3.1). Internet Explorer has a shadow filter, but the syntax is completely different.

So, how do text-shadows work? The three length values specify respectively a horizontal offset, a vertical offset and a blur (the greater the number the more blurred the shadow will be), and finally a color value for the shadow.

Rounding the corners

Now we’ll add a border, and round the corners of the element:

border: solid thin #882d13;
-webkit-border-radius: .7em;
-moz-border-radius: .7em;
border-radius: .7em;

Here, we’ve used the same property in three slightly different forms. We add the browser specific prefix for Webkit and Mozilla browsers, because right now, both of these browsers only support border radius as an experimental property. We also add the standard property name, for browsers that do support the property fully in the future. 

The benefit of the browser specific prefix is that if a browser only partly supports a given property, we can easily avoid using the property with that browser simply by not adding the browser specific prefix. At present, as you might guess, border-radius is supported in Safari and Firefox, but in each the relevant prefix is required.

border-radius takes a length value, such as pixels. (It can also take two length values, but that’s for another Christmas.) In this case, as with padding, I’ve used ems, which means that as the user scales the size of text up and down, the radius will scale as well. You can test the difference by making the radius have a value of say 5px, and then zooming up and down the text size. 

We’re well and truly on the way now. All we need to do is add a shadow to the button, and then a gradient background.

In CSS3 there’s the box-shadow property, currently only supported in Safari 3. It’s very similar to text-shadow – you specify a horizontal and vertical offset, a blur value and a color.

-webkit-box-shadow: 2px 2px 3px #999; 
box-shadow: 2px 2px 2px #bbb;

Once more, we require the “experimental” -webkit- prefix, as Safari’s support for this property is still considered by its developers to be less than perfect.

Gradient Background

So, all we have left now is to add our shiny gradient effect. Now of course, people have been doing this kind of thing with images for a long time. But if we can avoid them all the better. Smaller pages, faster downloads, and more scalable designs that adapt better to the user’s font size preference. But how can we add a gradient background without an image?

Here we’ll look at the only property that is not as yet part of the CSS standard – Apple’s gradient function for use anywhere you can use images with CSS (in this case backgrounds). In essence, this takes SVG gradients, and makes them available via CSS syntax.

Here’s what the property and its value looks like:

background-image: -webkit-gradient(linear, left top, left bottom, from(#e9ede8), to(#ce401c),color-stop(0.4, #8c1b0b));

Zooming in on the gradient function, it has this basic form:

-webkit-gradient(type, point, point, from(color), to(color),color-stop(where, color));

Which might look complicated, but is less so than at first glance.

The name of the function is gradient (and in this case, because it is an experimental property, we use the -webkit- prefix).

You might not have seen CSS functions before, but there are others, including the attr() function, used with generated content. A function returns a value that can be used as a property value – here we are using it as a background image.

Next we specify the type of the gradient. Here we have a linear gradient, and there are also radial gradients. 

After that, we specify the start and end points of the gradient – in our case the top and bottom of the element, in a vertical line. 

We then specify the start and end colors – and finally one stop color, located at 40% of the way down the element. Together, this creates a gradient that smoothly transitions from the start color in the top, vertically to the stop color, then smoothly transitions to the end color.

There’s one last thing. What color will the background of our button be if the browser doesn’t support gradients? It will be white (or possibly some default color for buttons). Which may make the text difficult or impossible to read. So, we’ll add a background color as well (see why the validator is always warning you when a color but not a background color is specified for an element?).

If we put it all together, here’s what we have:

button {
	width: 15em;
	padding: .5em;
	color: #ffffff;
	text-shadow: 1px 1px 1px #000;
	border: solid thin #882d13;
	-webkit-border-radius: .7em;
	-moz-border-radius: .7em;
	border-radius: .7em;
	-webkit-box-shadow: 2px 2px 3px #999; 
	box-shadow: 2px 2px 2px #bbb;
	background-color: #ce401c;
	background-image: -webkit-gradient(linear, left top, left bottom, from(#e9ede8), to(#ce401c),color-stop(0.4, #8c1b0b));
}

Which looks like this in various browsers:

In Safari (3)



In Firefox 3.1 (3.0 supports border-radius but not text-shadow)



In Opera 10



and of course in Internet Explorer (version 8 shown here)



But it looks different in different browsers

Yes, it does look different in different browsers, but we all know the answer to the question “do web sites need to look the same in every browser?“.

Even if you really think sites should look the same in every browser, hopefully this little tutorial has whet your appetite for what CSS3 and experimental CSS that’s already supported in widely used browsers (and we haven’t even touched on animations and similar effects!).

I hope you’ve enjoyed out little CSSMas present, and look forward to seeing your shiny buttons everywhere on the web.

Oh, and there’s just a bit of homework – your job is to use the :hover selector, and make a gradient in the hover state.",2008,John Allsopp,johnallsopp,2008-12-18T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2008/shiny-happy-buttons/,code
74,Should We Be Reactive?,"Evolution

Looking at the evolution of the web and the devices we use should help remind us that the times we’re adjusting to are just another step on a journey. These times seem to be telling us that we need to embrace flexibility.

Imagine an HTML file containing nothing but text. It’s viewable on any web-capable device and reasonably readable: the notion of the universality of the web was very much a founding principle. Right from the beginning, browser vendors understood that we’d want text to reflow (why wouldn’t we?), so I consider the first websites to have been fluid. 

As we attempted to exert more control through our designs in the early days of the web, debates about whether we should produce fixed or fluid sites raged. We could create fluid designs using tables, but what we didn’t have then was a wide range of web capable devices or the ability to control this fluidity. The biggest changes occurred when stats showed enough people using a different screen resolution we could cater for.

To me, the techniques of responsive web design provide the control we were missing. Combining new approaches to layout and images with media queries empowered us to learn how to embrace the inherent flexibility of the web in ways to suit our work and the devices used by our audience.

Perhaps another kind of flexibility might be found in how we use context to affect how we present our content; to consider how we might use the information we can access from people, browsers and devices to provide web experiences – effectively creating sites that react to initial or changing circumstances in the relationship between people and our content.

Embracing flexibility

So what is context? Put simply, you could think of it as a secondary piece of information that helps clarify the meaning of the first. It helps set a scene or describe circumstances. I think that Cennydd Bowles has summed it up really well through talks he’s given recently, in which he’s arrived at the acronym DETAILS (Device, Environment, Time, Activity, Individual, Location, Social) – I encourage you to keep an eye out for his next book due in the new year where he’ll explore this idea much further. This clarity over what context could mean in terms of what we do on the web is fundamental, directing us towards ways we might use it.

When you stop to think about it, we’ve been using some basic pieces of this information right from the beginning, like bits of JavaScript or Java applets that serve an appropriate greeting to your site’s visitors, or show their location, or even local weather. But what if we think of this from the beginning of our projects?

We should think about our content first. Once we know this and have a direction, perhaps then we can think about what context, or even multiple contexts, might help us to communicate more effectively.

The real world

There’s always been a disconnect between the real world and the web, which is to be expected. But the world around us is a sea of data; every fundamental building block: people, places, events and things have information waiting to be explored. 

For sites based around physical objects or locations, this divide is really apparent. We don’t ordinarily take the time to describe in code the properties of a place, or consider whether your relationship to the place in the real world should have any impact on your relationship with a site about it.

When I think about local businesses, they have such rich properties to draw on and yet we don’t really explore them in any meaningful way, even through something as simple as opening hours.

Now we have data…

We’ve long had access to the current time both on server- and client-sides. The use of geolocation is easier than ever, but when we look at the range of information we could glean to help us make some choices, maybe there’s some help on the horizon from projects like the W3C Device APIs Working Group. This might prove useful to help make us aware of network and battery conditions of a device, along with the potential to gain data from other sensors, which could tell us about lighting conditions, ambient noise levels and temperature depending on the capabilities of the device.

It may be that our sites have some form of login or access to your profile from another site. Along with data from our devices and browsers, this should give us a sense of how best to talk to our audience in certain situations. We don’t necessarily need to know any personal details, just enough to make decisions about how to present our sites.

The reactive web?

So why reactive web design? I’m hoping that a name might help us to have a common vocabulary not only about what we mean when we talk about context, but how it could be considered through our projects, right from the early stages. How could this manifest itself?

A simple example might be a location-aware panel on your site. Perhaps the space is a little down in your content hierarchy but serves a perfectly valid purpose by default. To visitors outside the country perhaps this works fine, but within your country maybe this panel could be used to communicate more effectively. Further still, if we knew the visitors were in the vicinity, we could talk to them more directly. 

What if both time and location were relevant? This space could work as before but you could consider how time could intersect with your local audience. If you know they’re local and it’s a certain time of day, you could communicate directly with them.

This example isn’t beyond what banner ads often do and uses easily accessible information. There are more unusual combinations we may be able to find, such as movement and presence. Perhaps a site that tells a story, which changes design and content based on whether you’re moving, how long you’ve been on the site and how far you’ve travelled. This isn’t what we typically expect from websites, but we should bear in mind that what websites are now will not be what they become in the future.

You could do much of this contextual presentation through native apps, of course. The Silent History, an app novel written and designed for iPad and iPhone, uses an exploration element, providing “hundreds of location-based stories across the U.S. and around the world. These can be read only when your device’s GPS matches the coordinates of the specified location.” But considering the universality of the web, we could redefine what web-based experiences should be like. Not all methods would work well on the web, but that’s a decision that has to be made for a specific project.

By thinking more broadly about any web-capable device, we can use what we know to provide relevant experiences for our site’s visitors. We need to be sure what we mean by relevant, of course!

Reality bites

While there are incredible possibilities, from a simple panel on a site to something bordering on living sites that evolve and change with our circumstances, we need to act with a degree of pragmatism and understand how much of what we could do is based on assumptions and the bias of our own experiences.

We could go wild with changing the way our content is presented based on contextual information, but if we’re not careful what we end up with confuses and could provide a very fractured experience. As much as possible we need to think more ethnographically, observe and question people in the situations we think may be relevant, and test our assumptions as early as we can. Even on small projects, there may be ways we can validate our assumptions and test with our audience. The key to applying contextual content or cues is not to break the experience between contextual views (as I think we now wouldn’t when hiding content on a mobile view). 

It’s another instance of progressive enhancement – as we know certain pieces of information, we can enhance the experience. Also, if you do change content, how can you not make a more cumbersome experience for your visitors?

It’s all about communication

Content is at the core of what we do, but if we consider context we need to understand the impact on that. The effect could be as subtle as an altered hierarchy, involve swapping out panels of content, or in extreme instances perhaps all of your content might change. In some ways, this extends the notion of adaptive content that Karen McGrane has been talking about, to how we write and store the content we create. Thinking about the the impact of context may require us to re-evaluate our site structure, too. Whatever we decide, we have to be clear what will happen and manage the expectations of our users.

The bottom line

What I’m proposing isn’t that we go crazy and end up with a confused, disjointed set of experiences across the web. What I hope is that starting right from the beginning of a project, we think about what context is and could be, and see what relevance it might have to what we’re trying to communicate. This strategic process leads us to think about design.

We are slowly adapting to what it means to be flexible through responsive and adaptive processes. What does thinking about contextual states mean to us (or designing for state in general)? Does this highlight again how difficult it’ll be for our tools to keep up with our processes and output?

In terms of code, the vast majority of this data comes from the client-side through JavaScript. While we can progressively enhance, this could lead to a lot of code bloat through feature or capability detection, and potentially a lot of conditional loading of scripts. It’s a real shame we don’t get much we can rely on from the server-side – we know how unreliable user agents are!

We need to understand why we’d do this. Are we trying to communicate well and be useful, or doing it to show off? Underneath it all, what do we base our decisions on? Do we have actual insight or are we proceeding from our assumptions and the bias of our own experiences? Scott Jenson summed it up best for me: (to paraphrase) the pain we put people through has to be greatly outweighed by the value we offer.

I see that this could be another potential step in our evolution on the web; continuing this exploration of the flexibility the web allows us. It’s amazing we can do such incredible things from what is essentially a set of disparate, linked documents.",2012,Dan Donald,dandonald,2012-12-09T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2012/should-we-be-reactive/,design
127,Showing Good Form,"Earlier this year, I forget exactly when (it’s been a good year), I was building a client site that needed widgets which look like this (designed, incidentally, by my erstwhile writing partner, Cameron Adams):



Building this was a challenge not just in CSS, but in choosing the proper markup – how should such a widget be constructed?

Mmm … markup

It seemed to me there were two key issues to deal with:


	The function of the interface is to input information, so semantically this is a form, therefore we have to find a way of building it using form elements: fieldset, legend, label and input
	We can’t use a table for layout, even though that would clearly be the easiest solution!


Abusing tables for layout is never good – physical layout is not what table semantics mean. But even if this data can be described as a table, we shouldn’t mix forms markup with non-forms markup, because of the behavioral impact this can have on a screen reader:

To take a prominent example, the screen reader JAWS has a mode specifically for interacting with forms (cunningly known as “forms mode”). When running in this mode its output only includes relevant elements – legends, labels and form controls themselves. Any other kind of markup – like text in a previous table cell, a paragraph or list in between – is simply ignored. The user in this situation would have to switch continually in and out of forms mode to hear all the content. (For more about this issue and some test examples, there’s a  thread at accessify forum which wanders in that direction.)

One further issue for screen reader users is implied by the design: the input fields are associated together in rows and columns, and a sighted user can visually scan across and down to make those associations; but a blind user can’t do that. For such a user the row and column header data will need to be there at every axis; in other words, the layout should be more like this:



And constructed with appropriate semantic markup to convey those relationships. By this point the selection of elements seems pretty clear: each row is a fieldset, the row header is a legend, and each column header is a label, associated with an input.

Here’s what that form looks like with no CSS:



And here’s some markup for the first row (with most of the attributes removed just to keep this example succinct):

<fieldset>
	<legend>
		<span>Match points</span>
	</legend>
	<label>
		<span>Win</span>
		<input value=""3"" />
	</label>
	<label>
		<span>Draw</span>
		<input value=""1"" />
	</label>
	<label>
		<span>Lose</span>
		<input value=""0"" />
	</label>
	<label>
		<span>Played</span>
		<input value=""0"" />
	</label>
</fieldset>

The span inside each legend is because legend elements are highly resistant to styling! Indeed they’re one of the most stubborn elements in the browsers’ vocabulary. Oh man … how I wrestled with the buggers … until this obvious alternative occurred to me! So the legend element itself is just a container, while all the styling is on the inner span.

Oh yeah, there was some CSS too

I’m not gonna dwell too much on the CSS it took to make this work – this is a short article, and it’s all there in the demo [demo page, style sheet]

But I do want to touch on the most interesting bit – where we get from a layout with headers on every row, to one where only the top row has headers – or at least, so it appears to graphical browsers. For screen readers, as we noted, we need those headers on every row, so we should employ some cunning CSS to partly negate their visual presence, without removing them from the output.

The core styling for each label span is like this:

label span
{
	display:block;
	padding:5px;
	line-height:1em;
	background:#423221;
	color:#fff;
	font-weight:bold;
}

But in the rows below the header they have these additional rules:

fieldset.body label span
{
	padding:0 5px;
	line-height:0;
	position:relative;
	top:-10000em;
}

The rendered width of the element is preserved, ensuring that the surrounding label is still the same width as the one in the header row above, and hence a unified column width is preserved all the way down. But the element effectively has no height, and so it’s effectively invisible. The styling is done this way, rather than just setting the height to zero and using overflow:hidden, because to do that would expose an unrelated quirk with another popular screen reader! (It would hide the output from Window Eyes, as shown in this  test example at access matters.)

The finished widget

It’s an intricate beast allright! But after all that we do indeed get the widget we want:


	Demo page
	Style sheet


It’s not perfect, most notably because the legends have to have a fixed width; this can be in em to allow for text scaling, but it still doesn’t allow the content to break into multiple lines. It also doesn’t look quite right in Safari; and some CSS hacking was needed to make it look right in IE6 and IE7.

Still it worked well enough for the purpose, and satisfied the client completely. And most of all it re-assured me in my faith – that there’s never any need to abuse tables for layout. (Unless of course you think this content is a table anyway, but that’s another story!)",2006,James Edwards,jamesedwards,2006-12-11T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2006/showing-good-form/,ux
104,Sitewide Search On A Shoe String,"One of the questions I got a lot when I was building web sites for smaller businesses was if I could create a search engine for their site. Visitors should be able to search only this site and find things without the maintainer having to put “related articles”  or “featured content” links on every page by hand. 

Back when this was all fields this wasn’t easy as you either had to write your own scraping tool, use ht://dig or a paid service from providers like Yahoo, Altavista or later on Google. In the former case you had to swallow the bitter pill of computing and indexing all your content and storing it in a database for quick access and in the latter it hurt your wallet.

Times have moved on and nowadays you can have the same functionality for free using Yahoo’s “Build your own search service” – BOSS. The cool thing about BOSS is that it allows for a massive amount of hits a day and you can mash up the returned data in any format you want. Another good feature of it is that it comes with JSON-P as an output format which makes it possible to use it without any server-side component!

Starting with a working HTML form

In order to add a search to your site, you start with a simple HTML form which you can use without JavaScript. Most search engines will allow you to filter results by domain. In this case we will search “bbc.co.uk”. If you use Yahoo as your standard search, this could be: 

<form id=""customsearch"" action=""http://search.yahoo.com/search"">
	<div>
		<label for=""p"">Search this site:</label>
		<input type=""text"" name=""p"" id=""term"">
		<input type=""hidden"" name=""vs"" id=""site"" value=""bbc.co.uk"">
		<input type=""submit"" value=""go"">
	</div>
</form>

The Google equivalent is:

<form id=""customsearch"" action=""http://www.google.co.uk/search"">
	<div>
		<label for=""p"">Search this site:</label>
		<input type=""text"" name=""as_q"" id=""term"">
		<input type=""hidden"" name=""as_sitesearch"" id=""site"" value=""bbc.co.uk"">
		<input type=""submit"" value=""go"">
	</div>
</form>

In any case make sure to use the ID term for the search term and site for the site, as this is what we are going to use for the script. To make things easier, also have an ID called customsearch on the form.

To use BOSS, you should get your own developer API for BOSS and replace the one in the demo code. There is click tracking on the search results to see how successful your app is, so you should make it your own.

Adding the BOSS magic

BOSS is a REST API, meaning you can use it in any HTTP request or in a browser by simply adding the right parameters to a URL. Say for example you want to search “bbc.co.uk” for “christmas” all you need to do is open the following URL:

http://boss.yahooapis.com/ysearch/web/v1/christmas?sites=bbc.co.uk&format=xml&appid=YOUR-APPLICATION-ID

Try it out and click it to see the results in XML. We don’t want XML though, which is why we get rid of the format=xml parameter which gives us the same information in JSON:

http://boss.yahooapis.com/ysearch/web/v1/christmas?sites=bbc.co.uk&appid=YOUR-APPLICATION-ID

JSON makes most sense when you can send the output to a function and immediately use it. For this to happen all you need is to add a callback parameter and the JSON will be wrapped in a function call. Say for example we want to call SITESEARCH.found() when the data was retrieved we can do it this way:

http://boss.yahooapis.com/ysearch/web/v1/christmas?sites=bbc.co.uk&callback=SITESEARCH.found&appid=YOUR-APPLICATION-ID

You can use this immediately in a script node if you want to. The following code would display the total amount of search results for the term christmas on bbc.co.uk as an alert:

<script type=""text/javascript"">
	var SITESEARCH = {};
	SITESEARCH.found = function(o){
		alert(o.ysearchresponse.totalhits);
	}
</script>
<script type=""text/javascript"" src=""http://boss.yahooapis.com/ysearch/web/v1/christmas?sites=bbc.co.uk&callback=SITESEARCH.found&appid=Kzv_lcHV34HIybw0GjVkQNnw4AEXeyJ9Rb1gCZSGxSRNrcif_HdMT9qTE1y9LdI-"">
</script>

However, for our example, we need to be a bit more clever with this.

Enhancing the search form




Here’s the script that enhances a search form to show results below it.

SITESEARCH = function(){
	var config = {
		IDs:{
			searchForm:'customsearch',
			term:'term',
			site:'site'
		},
		loading:'Loading results...',
		noresults:'No results found.',
		appID:'YOUR-APP-ID',
		results:20
	};
	var form;
	var out;
	function init(){
		if(config.appID === 'YOUR-APP-ID'){
			alert('Please get a real application ID!');
		} else {
			form = document.getElementById(config.IDs.searchForm);
			if(form){
				form.onsubmit = function(){
					var site = document.getElementById(config.IDs.site).value;
					var term = document.getElementById(config.IDs.term).value;
					if(typeof site === 'string' && typeof term === 'string'){
						if(typeof out !== 'undefined'){
							out.parentNode.removeChild(out);
						}
						out = document.createElement('p');
						out.appendChild(document.createTextNode(config.loading));
						form.appendChild(out);
						var APIurl = 'http://boss.yahooapis.com/ysearch/web/v1/' + 
													term + '?callback=SITESEARCH.found&sites=' + 
													site + '&count=' + config.results + 
													'&appid=' + config.appID;
						var s = document.createElement('script');
						s.setAttribute('src',APIurl);
						s.setAttribute('type','text/javascript');
						document.getElementsByTagName('head')[0].appendChild(s);
						return false;
					}
				};
			}
		}
	};
	function found(o){
		var list = document.createElement('ul');
		var results = o.ysearchresponse.resultset_web;
		if(results){
			var item,link,description;
			for(var i=0,j=results.length;i<j;i++){
				item = document.createElement('li');
				link = document.createElement('a');
				link.setAttribute('href',results[i].clickurl);
				link.innerHTML = results[i].title;
				item.appendChild(link);
				description = document.createElement('p');
				description.innerHTML = results[i]['abstract'];
				item.appendChild(description);
				list.appendChild(item);
			}
		} else {
			list = document.createElement('p');
			list.appendChild(document.createTextNode(config.noresults));
		}
		form.replaceChild(list,out);
		out = list;
	};
	return{
		config:config,
		init:init,
		found:found
	};
}();

Oooohhhh scary code! Let’s go through this one bit at a time:

We start by creating a module called SITESEARCH and give it an configuration object: 

SITESEARCH = function(){
	var config = {
		IDs:{
			searchForm:'customsearch',
			term:'term',
			site:'site'
		},
		loading:'Loading results...',
		appID:'YOUR-APP-ID',
		results:20
	}

Configuration objects are a great idea to make your code easy to change and also to override. In this case you can define different IDs than the one agreed upon earlier, define a message to show when the results are loading, when there aren’t any results, the application ID and the number of results that should be displayed.

Note: you need to replace “YOUR-APP-ID” with the real ID you retrieved from BOSS, otherwise the script will complain! 

var form;
var out;
function init(){
	if(config.appID === 'YOUR-APP-ID'){
		alert('Please get a real application ID!');
	} else {

We define form and out as variables to make sure that all the methods in the module have access to them. We then check if there was a real application ID defined. If there wasn’t, the script complains and that’s that.      

form = document.getElementById(config.IDs.searchForm);
if(form){
	form.onsubmit = function(){
		var site = document.getElementById(config.IDs.site).value;
		var term = document.getElementById(config.IDs.term).value;
		if(typeof site === 'string' && typeof term === 'string'){      

If the application ID was a winner, we check if the form with the provided ID exists and apply an onsubmit event handler. The first thing we get is the values of the site we want to search in and the term that was entered and check that those are strings.

if(typeof out !== 'undefined'){
	out.parentNode.removeChild(out);
}
out = document.createElement('p');
out.appendChild(document.createTextNode(config.loading));
form.appendChild(out);  

If both are strings we check of out is undefined. We will create a loading message and subsequently the list of search results later on and store them in this variable. So if out is defined, it’ll be an old version of a search (as users will re-submit the form over and over again)  and we need to remove that old version.

We then create a paragraph with the loading message and append it to the form.

var APIurl = 'http://boss.yahooapis.com/ysearch/web/v1/' + 
												term + '?callback=SITESEARCH.found&sites=' + 
												site + '&count=' + config.results + 
												'&appid=' + config.appID;
					var s = document.createElement('script');
					s.setAttribute('src',APIurl);
					s.setAttribute('type','text/javascript');
					document.getElementsByTagName('head')[0].appendChild(s);
					return false;
				}
			};
		}
	}
};

Now it is time to call the BOSS API by assembling a correct REST URL, create a script node and apply it to the head of the document. We return false to ensure the form does not get submitted as we want to stay on the page.

Notice that we are using SITESEARCH.found as the callback method, which means that we need to define this one to deal with the data returned by the API.

function found(o){
	var list = document.createElement('ul');
	var results = o.ysearchresponse.resultset_web;
	if(results){
		var item,link,description;

We create a new list and then get the resultset_web array from the data returned from the API. If there aren’t any results returned, this array will not exist which is why we need to check for it. Once we done that we can define three variables to repeatedly store the item title we want to display, the link to point to and the description of the link.

for(var i=0,j=results.length;i<j;i++){
	item = document.createElement('li');
	link = document.createElement('a');
	link.setAttribute('href',results[i].clickurl);
	link.innerHTML = results[i].title;
	item.appendChild(link);
	description = document.createElement('p');
	description.innerHTML = results[i]['abstract'];
	item.appendChild(description);
	list.appendChild(item);
}

We then loop over the results array and assemble a list of results with the titles in links and paragraphs with the abstract of the site. Notice the bracket notation for abstract as abstract is a reserved word in JavaScript2 :).

} else {
		list = document.createElement('p');
		list.appendChild(document.createTextNode(config.noresults));
	}
	form.replaceChild(list,out);
	out = list;
};      

If there aren’t any results, we define a paragraph with the no results message as list. In any case we replace the old out (the loading message) with the list and re-define out as the list.  

return{
		config:config,
		init:init,
		found:found
	};
}();

All that is left to do is return the properties and methods we want to make public. In this case found needs to be public as it is accessed by the API return. We return init to make it accessible and config to allow implementers to override any of the properties.

Using the script


In order to use this script, all you need to do is to add it after the form in the document, override the API key with your own and call init():

<form id=""customsearch"" action=""http://search.yahoo.com/search"">
	<div>
		<label for=""p"">Search this site:</label>
		<input type=""text"" name=""p"" id=""term"">
		<input type=""hidden"" name=""vs"" id=""site"" value=""bbc.co.uk"">
		<input type=""submit"" value=""go"">
	</div>
</form>
<script type=""text/javascript"" src=""boss-site-search.js""></script>
<script type=""text/javascript"">
	SITESEARCH.config.appID = 'copy-the-id-you-know-to-get-where';
	SITESEARCH.init();
</script>

Where to go from here

This is just a very simple example of what you can do with BOSS. You can define languages and regions, retrieve and display images and news and mix the results with other data sources before displaying them. One very cool feature is that by adding a view=keyterms parameter to the URL you can get the keywords of each of the results to drill deeper into the search. An example for this written in PHP is available on the YDN blog. For JavaScript solutions there is a handy wrapper called yboss available to help you go nuts.",2008,Christian Heilmann,chrisheilmann,2008-12-04T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2008/sitewide-search-on-a-shoestring/,code
229,Sketching to Communicate,"As a web designer I’ve always felt that I’d somehow cheated the system, having been absent on the day God handed out the ability to draw. I didn’t study fine art, I don’t have a natural talent to effortlessly knock out a realistic bowl of fruit beside a water jug, and yet somehow I’ve still managed to blag my way this far. I’m sure many of you may feel the same.

I had no intention of becoming an artist, but to have enough skill to convey an idea in a drawing would be useful. Instead, my inadequate instrument would doodle drunkenly across the page leaving a web of unintelligible paths instead of the refined illustration I’d seen in my mind’s eye. This – and the natural scrawl of my handwriting – is fine (if somewhat frustrating) when it’s for my eyes only but, when sketching to communicate a concept to a client, such amateur art would be offered with a sense of embarrassment. So when I had the opportunity to take part in some sketching classes whilst at Clearleft I jumped at the chance.

Why sketch?

In UX workshops early on in a project’s life, sketching is a useful and efficient way to convey and record ideas. It’s disposable and inexpensive, but needn’t look amateur. A picture may be worth a thousand words, but a well executed sketch of how you’ll combine funny YouTube videos with elephants to make Lolephants.com could be worth millions in venture capital. Actually, that’s not bad… ;-)

Although (as you will see) the basics of sketching are easy to master, the kudos you will receive from clients for being a ‘proper designer’ makes it worthwhile!

Where to begin?

Start by not buying yourself a sketch pad. If you were the type of child who ripped the first page out of a school exercise book and started again if you made even a tiny mistake (you’re not alone!), Wreck This Journal may offer a helping hand. Practicing on plain A4 paper instead of any ‘special’ notepad will make the process a whole lot easier, no matter how deliciously edible those Moleskines look.

Do buy yourself a black fine-liner pen and a set of grey Pro Markers for shading. These pens are unlike any you will have used before, and look like blended watercolours once the ink is dry. Although multiple strokes won’t create unsightly blotches of heavy ink on the page, they will go right through your top sheet so always remember to keep a rough sheet in the second position as an ink blotter.

 photo by Tom Harrison

Don’t buy pencils to sketch with, as they lack the confidence afforded by the heavy black ink strokes of marker pens and fine-liners.

If you’re going to be sketching with clients then invest in some black markers and larger sheets of paper. At the risk of sounding like a stationery brand whore, Sharpies are ideal, and these comedy-sized Post-Its do the job far better than cheaper, less sticky alternatives. Although they’re thicker than most standard paper, be sure to double-layer them if you’re writing on them on a wall, unless you fancy a weekend redecorating your client’s swanky boardroom.

The best way to build confidence and improve your sketching technique is, obviously, to practise. Reading this article will be of no help unless you repeat the following examples several times each. Go grab a pen and some paper now, and notice how you improve within even a short period of time.

Sketching web UI

Most elements of any website can be drawn as a combination of geometric shapes.

 photo by Nathanael Boehm

Circles

To draw a circle, get in position and start by resting your hand on the page and making the circular motion a few times without putting pen to paper. As you lower your pen whilst continuing the motion, you should notice the resulting shape is more regular than it otherwise would have been.

Squares and rectangles

Draw one pair of parallel lines first, followed by the others to complete the shapes. Slightly overlap the ends of the lines to make corners feel more solid than if you were to leave gaps. If you’re drawing a container, always draw the contents first, that way it won’t be a squash to fit them in. If you’re drawing a grid (of thumbnails, for instance), draw all parallel lines first as a series of long dashes to help keep line lengths and angles consistent.



Shadows

To lift elements from the page for emphasis, add a subtle shadow with a grey marker. For the most convincing look, assume the light source to be at the top left of the page – the shadow should simply be a thick grey line along the bottom and up the right edge of your shape. If the shape is irregular, the shadow should follow its outline. This is a good way to emphasise featured items, speech bubbles, form buttons, and so on.



Sketching ideas

Arrows

Use arrows to show steps in a process or direction of movement. Giving shadows a 3-D feel, or adding a single colour, will help separate them from the rest of the sketch.



Faces

Start by drawing the circle. The direction of the nose (merely a point) indicates the direction of the person’s gaze. The eyes and mouth show emotion: more open and curvy for happy thoughts; more closed and jagged for angry thoughts. Try out a few shapes and see what emotions they convey.



People

Remember, we’re aiming for communication rather than realism here. A stick man would be fine. Give him a solid body, as shown in this example, and it becomes easier to pose him.



I know you think hands are hard, but they’re quite important to convey some ideas, and for our purposes we don’t need to draw hands with any detail. An oval with a stick does the job of a pointing hand. Close-ups might need more fingers showing, but still don’t require any degree of realism.

Signage

Don’t be afraid to use words. We’re sketching to communicate, so if the easiest way to show an office block is a building with a big ‘office’ sign on the roof, that’s fine!



Labels

Likewise, feel free to label interactions. Use upper-case letters for legibility and slightly angle the horizontal bars upwards to create a more positive feel.

Clichés

Clichés are your friend! Someone’s having an idea? Light bulb above the head. Computer’s crashed? Cloud of smoke with “$£%*!”





It’s good to practise regularly. Try applying these principles to still life, too. Look around you now and draw the cup on the table, or the books on the shelf. Think of it as a combination of shapes and aim for symbolism rather than realism, and it’s not as hard as you’d think.

I hope this has given you the confidence to give it a shot, and the ability to at least not be mortified with the results!

Tip: If you’re involving clients in design games like Leisa Reichelt’s ‘Design Consequences’ it may be wise to tone down the quality of your drawings at that point so they don’t feel intimidated. Remember, it’s important for them to feel at ease with the idea of wireframing in front of you and their colleagues, no matter how bad their line work.

For more information see davegrayinfo.com – Dave Gray taught me everything I know :-)",2010,Paul Annett,paulannett,2010-12-19T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2010/sketching-to-communicate/,business
66,Solve the Hard Problems,"So, here we find ourselves on the cusp of 2016. We’ve had a good year – the web is still alive, no one has switched it off yet. Clients still have websites, teenagers still have phone apps, and there continue to be plenty of online brands to meaningfully engage with each day. Good job team, high fives all round.
As it’s the time to make resolutions, I wanted to share three small ideas to take into the new year.
Get good at what you do
“How do you get to Carnegie Hall?” the old joke goes. “Practise, practise, practise.” 
We work in an industry where there is an awful lot to learn. There’s a lot to learn to get started and then once you do, there’s a lot more to learn to keep your skills current. Just when you think you’ve mastered something, it changes.
This is true of many industries, of course, but the sheer pace of change for us makes learning not an annual activity, but daily. Learning takes time, and while I’m not convinced that every skill takes the fabled ten thousand hours to master, there is certainly no escaping that to remain current we must reinvest time in keeping our skills up to date.
Picking where to spend your time
One of the hardest aspects of this thing of ours is just choosing what to learn. If you, like me, invested any time in learning the Less CSS preprocessor over the last few years, you’ll probably now be spending your time relearning Sass instead. If you spent time learning Grunt, chances are you’ll now be thinking about whether you should switch to Gulp. It’s not just that there are new types of tools, there are new tools and frameworks to do the things you’re already doing, but, well, differently.
Deciding what to learn is hard and the costs of backing the wrong horse can seriously mount up; so much so that by the time you’ve learned and then relearned the tools everyone says you need for your job, there’s rarely enough time to spend really getting to know how best to use them.
 Practise, practise, practise
Do you know how you don’t get to Carnegie Hall? By learning a new instrument each week. It takes time and experience to really learn something well. That goes for a new JavaScript framework as much as a violin. If you flit from one shiny new thing to another, you’re destined to produce amateurish work forever.
Learn the new thing, but then stick with it long enough to get really good at it – even if Twitter trolls try to convince you it’s not cool. What’s really not cool is living as a forevernoob. 
If you’re still not sure what to learn, go back to basics. Considering a new CSS or JavaScript framework? Invest that time in learning the underlying CSS or JavaScript really well instead. Those skills will stand the test of time.
Audience and purpose
Back when I was in school, my English teacher (a nice Welsh lady, who I appreciate more now than I did back then) used to love to remind us that every piece of writing should have an audience and a purpose. So much so that audience and purpose almost became her catch phrase. For every essay, article or letter, we were reminded to consider who we were writing it for and what we were trying to achieve. 
It’s something I think about a lot; certainly when writing, but also in almost every other creative endeavour. Asking who is this for and what am I trying to achieve applies equally to designing a logo or website, through to composing music or writing software.
Being productive
It seems like everyone wants to have a product these days. As someone who used to do client services work and now has a product company, I often talk with people who are interested in taking something they’ve built in-house and turning it into a product. You know the sort of thing: a design agency with its own CMS or project management web app; the very logical thought process of: if this helps our business, maybe others will find it valuable too; the question that inevitably follows: could we turn this into a product?
Whether consciously or not, the audience and purpose influence nearly every aspect of your creative process. Once written or designed or developed or created, revising a work to change the audience and purpose can be quite a challenge. No matter how much you want to turn the tension-building, atmospheric music for a horror film into a catchy chart hit, it’s going to be a struggle. Yes, it’s music, but that’s neither the audience nor purpose for which it was created.
The same is absolutely true for your in-house tools – those were also designed for a specific audience and purpose. Your in-house CMS would have been designed with an audience of your own development team, who are busy implementing sites for clients. The purpose is to make that team more productive overall, taking into account considerations of maintaining multiple sites on a common codebase, training clients, a more mature and stable platform and all the other benefits of reusing the same code for each project. The audience is your team and the purpose increased productivity.
That’s very different from a customer who wants to buy a polished system to use off-the-shelf. If their needs perfectly aligned with yours then they wouldn’t be in the market for your product – they would have built their own.
Sometimes you hear the advice to “scratch your own itch” when it comes to product design. I don’t completely agree. Got an itch? Great. Find other itchy people and sell them a backscratcher.
Building a product, like designing a website, is a lot of work. It requires knowing your audience and purpose inside out. You can’t fudge it and you can’t just hope you’ll find an audience for some old thing you have lying around.
Always consider the audience and purpose for everything you create. It’s often the difference between success and failure.
Solve the hard problems
Human beings have a natural tendency to avoid hard problems. In digital design (websites, software, whatever) the received wisdom is often that we can get 80% of the way towards doing the hard thing by doing something that’s not very hard.
Do you know what you get at the end of it? Paid. But nothing really great ever happens that way.
I worked on a client project a while back where one of the big challenges was making full use of the massive image library they had built up over the years. The client had tens of thousands of photographs, along with a fair amount of video and a large MP3 audio library too. If it wasn’t managed carefully, storage sizes would get out of control, content would go unattributed, and everything would get very messy very quickly.
I could tell from the outset that this aspect of the project was going to be a constant problem. So we tackled it head-on. We designed and built a media management system to hold and process all the assets, and added an API so the content management system could talk to it. Every time the site needed a photo at a new size, it made an API request to the system and everything was handled seamlessly.
It was a daunting job to invest all the time and effort in building that dedicated system and API, but it really paid off. Instead of having the constant troubles of a vast library of media, it became one of the strongest parts of the project.
Turn your hardest problems into your biggest strengths
There’s a funny thing about hard problems. The hardest problems are the most fun to solve and have the biggest impact.
Maybe you’re the sort of person who clocks in for work, does their job and clocks out at 5pm without another thought. But I don’t think you are, because you’re here reading this. If you really love what you do, I don’t think you can be satisfied in your work unless you’re seeking out and working on those hard problems. That’s where the magic is.

The new year is a helpful time to think about breaking bad habits. Whether it’s smoking a bit less, or going to the gym a bit more, the ticking over of the calendar can provide the motivation for a new start. I have some suggestions for you.

Get good at what you do. Practise your skills and don’t just flit from one shiny thing to the next.
Remember who you’re doing it for and why. Consider the audience and purpose for everything you create.
Solve the hard problems. It’s more interesting, more satisfying, and has a greater impact.

As we move into 2016, these are the things I’m going to continue to work on. Maybe you’d like to join me.",2015,Drew McLellan,drewmclellan,2015-12-24T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2015/solve-the-hard-problems/,process
219,Speed Up Your Site with Delayed Content,"Speed remains one of the most important factors influencing the success of any website, and the first rule of performance (according to Yahoo!) is reducing the number of HTTP requests. Over the last few years we’ve seen techniques like sprites and combo CSS/JavaScript files used to reduce the number of HTTP requests. But there’s one area where large numbers of HTTP requests are still a fact of life: the small avatars attached to the comments on articles like this one.

Avatars

Many sites like 24 ways use a fantastic service called Gravatar to provide user images. As a user, you can sign up to Gravatar, give them your e-mail address, and upload an image to represent you. Sites can then include your image by generating a one way hash of your e-mail address and using that to build an image URL. For example, the markup for the comments on this page looks something like this:

<div>
	<h4><a href=""http://allinthehead.com/"">
		<img src=""http://www.gravatar.com/avatar.php?gravatar_id=13734b0cb20708f79e730809c29c3c48&size=100"" class=""gravatar"" alt="""" height=""100"" width=""100"" />
    Drew McLellan
	</a></h4>
	<p>This is a great article!</p>
</div>

The Gravatar URL contains two parts. 100 is the size in pixels of the image we want.  13734b0cb20708f79e730809c29c3c48 is an MD5 digest of Drew’s e-mail address. Using MD5 means we can request an image for a user without sharing their e-mail address with anyone who views the source of the page.

So what’s wrong with avatars?

The problem is that a popular article can easily get hundreds of comments, and every one of them means another image has to be individually requested from Gravatar’s servers. Each request is small and the Gravatar servers are fast but, when you add them up, it can easily add seconds to the rendering time of a page. Worse, they can delay the loading of more important assets like the CSS required to render the main content of the page.

These images aren’t critical to the page, and don’t need to be loaded up front. Let’s see if we can delay loading them until everything else is done. That way we can give the impression that our site has loaded quickly even if some requests are still happening in the background.

Delaying image loading

The first problem we find is that there’s no way to prevent Internet Explorer, Chrome or Safari from loading an image without removing it from the HTML itself. Tricks like removing the images on the fly with JavaScript don’t work, as the browser has usually started requesting the images before we get a chance to stop it.

Removing the images from the HTML means that people without JavaScript enabled in their browser won’t see avatars. As Drew mentioned at the start of the month, this can affect a large number of people, and we can’t completely ignore them. But most sites already have a textual name attached to each comment and the avatars are just a visual enhancement. In most cases it’s OK if some of our users don’t see them, especially if it speeds up the experience for the other 98%.

Removing the images from the source of our page also means we’ll need to put them back at some point, so we need to keep a record of which images need to be requested. All Gravatar images have the same URL format; the only thing that changes is the e-mail hash. Storing this is a great use of HTML5 data attributes.

HTML5 data what?

Data attributes are a new feature in HTML5. The latest version of the spec says:


	A custom data attribute is an attribute in no namespace whose name starts with the string “data-”, has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no characters in the range U+0041 to U+005A (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A to LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z).
[…]
Custom data attributes are intended to store custom data private to the page or application, for which there are no more appropriate attributes or elements. These attributes are not intended for use by software that is independent of the site that uses the attributes.


In other words, they’re attributes of an HTML element that start with “data-” which you can use to share data with scripts running on your site. They’re great for adding small bits of metadata that don’t fit into an existing markup pattern the way microformats do.

Let’s see this in action

Take a look at the markup for comments again:

<div>
	<h4><a href=""http://allinthehead.com/"">
		<img src=""http://www.gravatar.com/avatar.php?gravatar_id=13734b0cb20708f79e730809c29c3c48&size=100"" class=""gravatar"" alt="""" height=""100"" width=""100"" />
    Drew McLellan
	</a></h4>
	<p>This is a great article!</p>
</div>

Let’s replace the <img> element with a data-gravatar-hash attribute on the <a> element:

<div>
	<h4><a href=""http://allinthehead.com/"" data-gravatar-hash=""13734b0cb20708f79e730809c29c3c48"">
    Drew McLellan
	</a></h4>
	<p>This is a great article!</p>
</div>

Once we’ve done this, we’ll need a small bit of JavaScript to find all these attributes, and replace them with images after the page has loaded. Here’s an example using jQuery:

$(window).load(function() {
	$('a[data-gravatar-hash]').prepend(function(index){
		var hash = $(this).attr('data-gravatar-hash')
		return '<img width=""100"" height=""100"" alt="""" src=""http://www.gravatar.com/avatar.php?size=100&gravatar_id=' + hash + '"">'
	})
})

This code waits until everything on the page is loaded, then uses jQuery.prepend to insert an image into every link containing a data-gravatar-hash attribute. It’s short and relatively simple, but in tests it reduced the rendering time of a sample page from over three seconds to well under one.

Finishing touches

We still need to consider the appearance of the page before the avatars have loaded. When our script adds extra content to the page it will cause a browser reflow, which is visually annoying. We can avoid this by using CSS to reserve some space for each image before it’s inserted into the HTML:

#comments div {
	padding-left: 110px;
	min-height: 100px;
	position: relative;
}
#comments div h4 img {
	display: block;
	position: absolute;
	top: 0;
	left: 0;
}

In a real world example, we’ll also find that the HTML for a comment is more varied as many users don’t provide a web page link. We can make small changes to our JavaScript and CSS to handle this case.

Put this all together and you get this example.

Taking this idea further

There’s no reason to limit this technique to sites using Gravatar; we can use similar code to delay loading any images that don’t need to be present immediately. For example, this year’s redesigned Flickr photo page uses a “data-defer-src” attribute to describe any image that doesn’t need to be loaded straight away, including avatars and map tiles.

You also don’t have to limit yourself to loading the extra resources once the page loads. You can get further bandwidth savings by waiting until the user takes an action before downloading extra assets. Amazon has taken this tactic to the extreme on its product pages – extra content is loaded as you scroll down the page.

So next time you’re building a page, take a few minutes to think about which elements are peripheral and could be delayed to allow more important content to appear as quickly as possible.",2010,Paul Hammond,paulhammond,2010-12-18T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2010/speed-up-your-site-with-delayed-content/,ux
331,Splintered Striper,"Back in March 2004, David F. Miller demonstrated a little bit of DOM scripting magic in his A List Apart article Zebra Tables.

His script programmatically adds two alternating CSS background colours to table rows, making them more readable and visually pleasing, while saving the document author the tedious task of manually assigning the styling to large static data tables.

Although David’s original script performs its duty well, it is nonetheless very specific and limited in its application. It only:


	works on a single table, identified by its id, with at least a single tbody section
	assigns a background colour
	allows two colours for odd and even rows
	acts on data cells, rather than rows, and then only if they have no class or background colour already defined


Taking it further

In a recent project I found myself needing to apply a striped effect to a medium sized unordered list. Instead of simply modifying the Zebra Tables code for this particular case, I decided to completely recode the script to make it more generic.

Being more general purpose, the function in my splintered striper experiment is necessarily more complex. Where the original script only expected a single parameter (the id of the target table), the new function is called as follows:

striper('[parent element tag]','[parent element class or null]','[child element tag]','[comma separated list of classes]')

This new, fairly self-explanatory function:


	targets any type of parent element (and, if specified, only those with a certain class)
	assigns two or more classes (rather than just two background colours) to the child elements inside the parent
	preserves any existing classes already assigned to the child elements


See it in action

View the demonstration page for three usage examples. For simplicity’s sake, we’re making the calls to the striper function from the body’s onload attribute. In a real deployment situation, we would look at attaching a behaviour to the onload programmatically — just remember that, as we need to pass variables to the striper function, this would involve creating a wrapper function which would then be attached…something like:

function stripe() {
    striper('tbody','splintered','tr','odd,even');
}

window.onload=stripe;

A final thought

Just because the function is called striper does not mean that it’s limited to purely applying a striped look; as it’s more of a general purpose “alternating class assignment” script, you can achieve a whole variety of effects with it.",2005,Patrick Lauke,patricklauke,2005-12-15T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2005/splintered-striper/,code
184,Spruce It Up,"The landscape of web typography is changing quickly these days. We’ve gone from the wild west days of sIFR to Cufón to finally seeing font embedding seeing wide spread adoption by browser developers (and soon web designers) with @font-face. For those who’ve felt limited by the typographic possibilities before, this has been a good year.

As Mark Boulton has so eloquently elucidated, @font-face embedding doesn’t come without its drawbacks. Font files can be quite large and FOUT—that nasty flash of unstyled text—can be a distraction for users.

Data URIs

We can battle FOUT by using Data URIs. A Data URI allows the font to be encoded right into the CSS file. When the font comes with the CSS, the flash of unstyled text is mitigated. No extra HTTP requests are required. 

Don’t be a grinch, though. Sending hundreds of kilobytes down the pipe still isn’t great. Sometimes, all we want to do is spruce up our site with a little typographic sugar. 

Be Selective

Dan Cederholm’s SimpleBits is an attractive site. 



Take a look at the ampersand within the header of his site. It’s the lovely (and free) Goudy Bookletter 1911 available from The League of Movable Type. The Opentype format is a respectable 28KB. Nothing too crazy but hold on here. Mr. Cederholm is only using the ampersand! Ouch. That’s a lot of bandwidth just for one character.

Can we optimize a font like we can an image? Yes. Image optimization essentially works by removing unnecessary image data such as colour data, hidden comments or using compression algorithms. How do you remove unnecessary information from a font? Subsetting. 

If you’re the adventurous type, grab a copy of FontForge, which is an open source font editing tool. You can open the font, view and edit any of the glyphs and then re-generate the font. The interface is a little clunky but you’ll be able to select any character you don’t want and then cut the glyphs. Re-generate your font and you’ve now got a smaller file. 



There are certainly more optimizations that can also be made such as removing hinting and kerning information. Keep in mind that removing this information may affect how well the type renders.

At this time of year, though, I’m sure you’re quite busy. Save yourself some time and head on over to the Font Squirrel Font Generator.



The Font Generator is extremely handy and allows for a number of optimizations and cross-platform options to be generated instantly. Select the font from your local system—make sure that you are only using properly licensed fonts! 

In this particular case, we only want the ampersand. Click on Subset Fonts which will open up a new menu. Unselect any preselected sets and enter the ampersand into the Single Characters text box. 

Generate your font and what are you left with? 3KB. 



The Font Generator even generates a base64 encoded data URI stylesheet to be imported easily into your project.

Check out the Demo page. (This demo won’t work in Internet Explorer as we’re only demonstrating the Data URI font embedding and not using the EOT file format that IE requires.) 

No Unnecessary Additives

If you peeked under the hood of that demo, did you notice something interesting? There’s no <span> around the ampersand. The great thing about this is that we can take advantage of the font stack’s natural ability to switch to a fallback font when a character isn’t available.

Just like that, we’ve managed to spruce up our page with a little typographic sugar without having to put on too much weight.",2009,Jonathan Snook,jonathansnook,2009-12-19T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2009/spruce-it-up/,code
85,Starting Your Project on the Right Foot (and Keeping It There),"I’m not sure if anything is as terrifying as beginning a new design project. I often spend hours trying to find the best initial footing in a design, so I’ve been working hard to improve my process, particularly for the earliest stages of a project. I want to smooth out the bumps that disrupt my creative momentum and focus on the emotional highs and lows I experience, and then try to minimize the lows and ride the highs as long as possible. 

Design is often a struggle broken up by blissful moments of creative clarity that provide valuable force to move your work forward. Momentum is a powerful tool in creative work, and it’s something we don’t always maximize when we’re working because of the hectic nature of our field. Obviously, every designer is going to have a different process, but I thought I’d share some of the methods I’ve begun to adopt. I hope this will spark a conversation among designers who are interested in looking at process in a new way.

Jump-starting a project

I cannot overstate the importance of immersing yourself in design and collecting ample amounts of inspiration when beginning a project. I make it a daily practice to visit a handful of sites (Dribbble, Graphic Exchange, Web Creme, siteInspire, Designspiration, and others) and save any examples of design that I like. I then sort them into general categories (publication design, illustration, typography, web design, and so on). Enjoying a bit of fresh design every day helps me absorb it and analyze why it’s effective instead of just imitating it. 

Many designers are afraid to look at too much design for fear that they’ll be tempted to copy it, but I feel a steady influx of design inspiration reduces that possibility. You’re much more likely to take the easy way out and rip off a design if you’re scrambling for inspiration after getting stuck. If you are immersed in design from a variety of mediums, you’ll engage your creative brain on multiple levels and have an easier time creating something unique for your project. Looking at good design will not make you a good designer but it will make you a better designer.

Design is design

Try not to limit your visual research to the medium you’re working in. Websites, books, posters and packaging all have their own unique limitations and challenges, and any one of those characteristics could be useful to you. Posters need to grab the viewer and pass on a small tidbit of information; packaging needs to encourage physical interaction; and websites need to encourage exploration. If you know the challenges you’ll be facing, you will know where to look for design that tackles those same problems.

I find it refreshing to look at design from the turn of the nineteenth century, when type was laid out on objects without thought to aesthetics. Many vintage packages break all sorts of modern design rules, and looking at that kind of work is a great way to spark your creativity. Pulling yourself out of the box and away from the rules of what you’re working on can reveal solutions that are innovative and unique. After a little finessing, the warning label text from a 1940s hazardous chemical box from could have the exact type and icon arrangement you need for your project. There’s a massive pool of design to pull from that doesn’t have the limitations the web has, and exploring those design worlds will help you grow your own repertoire.

If all else fails, start with the footer

The very beginning of a project is the most frustrating point in a project for me. I’m trying to figure out typeface combinations, colors and the overall voice of the design, and until I find the right solutions, I’m a wreck. I’ve found often that my frustration stems from trying to solve too many problems at once. The beginning of a project has a lot of moving targets, nearly endless possible solutions, and constantly changing variables. You’ll knock out one problem only to discover your solution doesn’t jive with something you worked out earlier — you end up designing in circles.

If you find yourself getting stuck at the beginning of a website design, try working out one specific element of the site and see what emerges. I’m going to recommend the footer. Why? Footers can easily be ignored in a design or become a dumping ground for items that couldn’t be worked into the main layout. But, at the start of most projects, the minimum content requirements for the footer are usually established. There needs to be a certain number of links, social media buttons, copyright details, a search bar, and so on. It’s a self-contained item within the design that has a specific purpose, and that’s a great element to focus on when you’re stuck in a design. Colors, typefaces, link styles, input fields and buttons can all be sketched out from just the footer. It’s a very flexible element that can be as prominent or subtle as you want, and it’s a solid starting point for setting the tone and style of a site.

Save the details

Designers love details. I love details. But don’t let nitpicking early on in your process kill your creative momentum. Design is an emotional process, and being frustrated or defeated by a tricky problem or a graphical detail you just can’t nail down can deflate your creative energies. If you hit a roadblock, set it aside and tackle another piece of the project. As you spend time engaged in a design, the style you develop will evolve according to the needs of the content, and you might arrive naturally at a solution that will work perfectly for the problem that had you stuck before. 

If I find myself working on one particular element for more than a half an hour without any clear movement, I shelve it. Designers often wear their obsessive detail-oriented tendencies as a badge of honor, but there’s a difference between making the design better and wasting time. If you’ve spent hours nudging elements around pixel by pixel and can’t settle on something, it probably means what you’re doing isn’t making a huge improvement on the design. Don’t be afraid to let it lie and come at it again with fresh eyes. You will be better equipped to tackle the finer points of a project once you’ve got the broad strokes defined.

Have a plan when you start and stop designing

We all know that creativity isn’t something you can turn on effortlessly, and it’s easy to forget the emotional process that goes along with design. If you leave a project in a place of frustration, it’s going to stay with you in your free time and affect you negatively, like a dark cloud of impending disaster. Try to end each design session with a victory, a small bit of definable progress that you can take with you in your downtime. Even something as small as finding the right opacity for the interior shadow on the search bar in the header of the site is a win. Likewise, when you return to a project after a break, it can be difficult to get the ball rolling on the design again if you set it down without a clear path for the next steps. I find that I work on details best when I’m returning from downtime, when I’m fresh and re-energized and ready to dig in again. Try to pick out at least one element you’d like to fine-tune when you are winding down in a design session and use it to kick-start your next session.

Content is king

I would argue there is nothing more crucial to the success of a design than having the content defined from the outset. Designing without content is similar to designing without an audience, and designing with vague ideas of content types and character limits is going to result in a muted design that doesn’t reach its full potential. Images and language go hand in hand with design, and can take a design from functional to outstanding if you have them available from the outset. We don’t always have the luxury of having content to build a design around, but fight for it whenever you can. For example, if the site you are designing is full of technical jargon, your paragraphs might need a longer line length to accommodate the longer words being used. 

Often, working with content will lead to design solutions you wouldn’t have come to otherwise. Design speaks to content, and content speaks to design. Lorem ipsum doesn’t speak to anyone (unless you know Latin, in which case, congratulations!).

Every project has its own set of needs, and every designer has his or her own method of working. There’s obviously no perfect process to design, and being dogmatic about process can be just as harmful as not having one. Exposing yourself to new design and new ways of designing is an easy way to test your skills and grow. When things are hard and you can’t get any momentum going on a design, this is when your skill set is truly challenged. We all hope to get wonderful projects with great assets and ample creative possibilities, but you won’t always be so blessed, and this is when the quality of your process is really going to shine.",2012,Bethany Heck,bethanyheck,2012-12-02T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2012/starting-your-project-on-the-right-foot/,process
210,Stop Leaving Animation to the Last Minute,"Our design process relies heavily on static mockups as deliverables and this makes it harder than it needs to be to incorporate UI animation in our designs. Talking through animation ideas and dancing out the details of those ideas can be fun; but it’s not always enough to really evaluate or invest in animated design solutions. 
By including deliverables that encourage discussing animation throughout your design process, you can set yourself (and your team) up for creating meaningful UI animations that feel just as much a part of the design as your colour palette and typeface. You can get out of that “running out of time to add in the animation” trap by deliberately including animation in the early phases of your design process. This will give you both the space to treat animation as a design tool, and the room to iterate on UI animation ideas to come up with higher quality solutions. Two deliverables that can be especially useful for this are motion comps and animated interactive prototypes. 
Motion comps - an animation deliverable
Motion comps (also called animatics or motion mock-ups) are usually video representation of UI animations. They are used to explore the details of how a particular animation might play out. And they’re most often made with timeline-based tools like Adobe After Effects, Adobe Animate, or Tumult Hype. 
The most useful things about motion comps is how they allow designers and developers to share the work of creating animations. (Instead of pushing all the responsibility of animation on one group or the other.) For example, imagine you’re working on a design that has a content panel that can either be open or closed. You might create a mockup like the one below including the two different views: the closed state and the open state. If you’re working with only static deliverables, these two artboards might be exactly what you handoff to developers along with the instruction to animate between the two. 

On the surface that seems pretty straight forward, but even with this relatively simple transition there’s a lot that those two artboards don’t address. There are seven things that change between the closed state and the open state. That’s seven things the developer building this out has to figure out how to move in and out of view, when, and in what order. And all of that is even before starting to write the code to make it work. 
By providing only static comps, all the logic of the animation falls on the developer. This might go ok if she has the bandwidth and animation knowledge, but that’s making an awful lot of assumptions.
Instead, if you included a motion mock up like this with your static mock ups, you could share the work of figuring out the logic of the animation between design and development. Designers could work out the logic of the animation in the motion comp, exploring which items move at which times and in which order to create the opening and closing transitions. 

The motion comp can also be used to iterate on different possible animation approaches before any production code has to be committed too. Sharing the work and giving yourself time to explore animation ideas before you’re backed up again the deadline will lead to happier teammates and better design solutions. 
When to use motion comps
I’m not a fan of making more deliverables just for the sake of having more things to make, so I find it helps to narrow down what question I’m trying answer before choosing which sort of deliverable to make to investigate. 
Motion comps can be most helpful for answering questions like: 

Exactly how should this animation look? 
Which items should move? Where? And when? 
Do the animation qualities reflect our brand or our voice and tone?
One of the added bonuses of creating motion comps to answer these questions is that you’ll have a concrete thing to bring to design critiques or reviews to get others’ input on them as well.

Using motion comps as handoff
Motion comps are often used to handoff animation ideas from design to development. They can be super useful for this, but they’re even more useful when you include the details of the motion specs with them. (It’s difficult, if not impossible, to glean these details from playing back a video.)
More specifically, you’ll want to include:

Durations and the properties animated for each animation
Easing curve values or spring values used
Delay values and repeat counts

In many cases you’ll have to collect these details up manually. But this isn’t necessarily something that that will take a lot of time. If you take note of them as you’re creating the motion comp, chances are most of these details will already be top of  mind. (Also, if you use After Effects for your motion comps, the Inspector Spacetime plugin might be helpful for this task.)
Animated prototypes - an interactive deliverable
Making prototypes isn’t a new idea for web work by any stretch, but creating prototypes that include animation – or even creating prototypes specifically to investigate potential animation solutions – can go a long way towards having higher quality animations in your final product.
Interactive prototypes are web or app-based, or displayed in a particular tool’s preview window to create a useable version of interactions that might end up in the end product. They’re often made with prototyping apps like Principle, Framer, or coded up in HTML, CSS and JS directly like the example below.
See the Pen Prototype example by Val Head (@valhead) on CodePen.

The biggest different between motion comps and animated prototypes is the interactivity. Prototypes can reposed to taps, drags or gestures, while motion comps can only play back in a linear fashion. Generally speaking, this makes prototypes a bit more of an effort to create, but they can also help you solve different problems. The interactive nature of prototypes can also make them useful for user testing to further evaluate potential solutions. 
When to use prototypes
When it comes to testing out animation ideas, animated prototypes can be especially helpful in answering questions like these: 

How will this interaction feel to use? (Interactive animations often have different timing needs than animations that are passively viewed.)
What will the animation be like with real data or real content? 
Does this animation fit the context of the task at hand? 

Prototypes can be used to investigate the same questions that motion comps do if you’re comfortable working in code or your prototyping tool of choice has capabilities to address high fidelity animation details. There are so many different prototyping tools out there at the moment, you’re sure to be able to find one that fits your needs. 
As a quick side note: If you’re worried that your coding skills might not be up to par to prototype in code, know that prototype code doesn’t have to be production quality code. Animated prototypes’ main concern is working out the animation details. Once you’ve arrived at a combination of animations that works, the animation specifics can be extracted or the prototype can be refactored for production.
Motion comp or prototype?
Both motion comps and prototypes can be extremely useful in the design process and you can use whichever one (or ones) that best fits your team’s style. The key thing that both offer is a way to make animation ideas visible and sharable. When you and your teammate are both looking at the same deliverable, you can be confident you’re talking about the same thing and discuss its pros and cons more easily than just describing the idea verbally. 
Motion comps tend to be more useful earlier in the design process when you want to focus on the motion without worrying about the underlying structure or code yet. Motion comps also be great when you want to try something completely new. Some folks prefer motion comps because the tools for making them feel more familiar to them which means they can work faster. 
Prototypes are most useful for animations that rely heavily on interaction. (Getting the timing right for interactions can be tough without the interaction part sometimes.) Prototypes can also be helpful to investigate and optimize performance if that’s a specific concern.
Give them a try
Whichever deliverables you choose to highlight your animation decisions, including them in your design reviews, critiques, or other design discussions will help you make better UI animation choices. More discussion around UI animation ideas during the design phase means greater buy-in, more room for iteration, and higher quality UI animations in your designs. Why not give them a try for your next project?",2017,Val Head,valhead,2017-12-08T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2017/stop-leaving-animation-to-the-last-minute/,design
301,Stretching Time,"Time is valuable. It’s a precious commodity that, if we’re not too careful, can slip effortlessly through our fingers. When we think about the resources at our disposal we’re often guilty of forgetting the most valuable resource we have to hand: time.
We are all given an allocation of time from the time bank. 86,400 seconds a day to be precise, not a second more, not a second less.
It doesn’t matter if we’re rich or we’re poor, no one can buy more time (and no one can save it). We are all, in this regard, equals. We all have the same opportunity to spend our time and use it to maximum effect. As such, we need to use our time wisely.
I believe we can ‘stretch’ time, ensuring we make the most of every second and maximising the opportunities that time affords us.
Through a combination of ‘Structured Procrastination’ and ‘Focused Finishing’ we can open our eyes to all of the opportunities in the world around us, whilst ensuring that we deliver our best work precisely when it’s required. A win win, I’m sure you’ll agree.
Structured Procrastination
I’m a terrible procrastinator. I used to think that was a curse  – “Why didn’t I just get started earlier?” – over time, however, I’ve started to see procrastination as a valuable tool if it is used in a structured manner.
Don Norman refers to procrastination as ‘late binding’ (a term I’ve happily hijacked). As he argues, in Why Procrastination Is Good, late binding (delay, or procrastination) offers many benefits:

Delaying decisions until the time for action is beneficial… it provides the maximum amount of time to think, plan, and determine alternatives.

We live in a world that is constantly changing and evolving, as such the best time to execute is often ‘just in time’. By delaying decisions until the last possible moment we can arrive at solutions that address the current reality more effectively, resulting in better outcomes.
Procrastination isn’t just useful from a project management perspective, however. It can also be useful for allowing your mind the space to wander, make new discoveries and find creative connections. By embracing structured procrastination we can ‘prime the brain’.
As James Webb Young argues, in A Technique for Producing Ideas, all ideas are made of other ideas and the more we fill our minds with other stimuli, the greater the number of creative opportunities we can uncover and bring to life.
By late binding, and availing of a lack of time pressure, you allow the mind space to breathe, enabling you to uncover elements that are important to the problem you’re working on and, perhaps, discover other elements that will serve you well in future tasks.
When setting forth upon the process of writing this article I consciously set aside time to explore. I allowed myself the opportunity to read, taking in new material, safe in the knowledge that what I discovered – if not useful for this article – would serve me well in the future. 
Ron Burgundy summarises this neatly:

Procrastinator? No. I just wait until the last second to do my work because I will be older, therefore wiser.

An ‘older, therefore wiser’ mind is a good thing. We’re incredibly fortunate to live in a world where we have a wealth of information at our fingertips. Don’t waste the opportunity to learn, rather embrace that opportunity. Make the most of every second to fill your mind with new material, the rewards will be ample.
Deadlines are deadlines, however, and deadlines offer us the opportunity to focus our minds, bringing together the pieces of the puzzle we found during our structured procrastination.
Like everyone I’ll hear a tiny, but insistent voice in my head that starts to rise when the deadline is approaching. The older you get, the closer to the deadline that voice starts to chirp up.
At this point we need to focus.
Focused Finishing
We live in an age of constant distraction. Smartphones are both a blessing and a curse, they keep us connected, but if we’re not careful the constant connection they provide can interrupt our flow.
When a deadline is accelerating towards us it’s important to set aside the distractions and carve out a space where we can work in a clear and focused manner.
When it’s time to finish, it’s important to avoid context switching and focus. All those micro-interactions throughout the day – triaging your emails, checking social media and browsing the web – can get in the way of you hitting your deadline. At this point, they’re distractions.
Chunking tasks and managing when they’re scheduled can improve your productivity by a surprising order of magnitude. At this point it’s important to remove distractions which result in ‘attention residue’, where your mind is unable to focus on the current task, due to the mental residue of other, unrelated tasks.
By focusing on a single task in a focused manner, it’s possible to minimise the negative impact of attention residue, allowing you to maximise your performance on the task at hand.
Cal Newport explores this in his excellent book, Deep Work, which I would highly recommend reading. As he puts it:

Efforts to deepen your focus will struggle if you don’t simultaneously wean your mind from a dependence on distraction.

To help you focus on finishing it’s helpful to set up a work-focused environment that is purposefully free from distractions. There’s a time and a place for structured procrastination, but – equally – there’s a time and a place for focused finishing.
The French term ‘mise en place’ is drawn from the world of fine cuisine – I discovered it when I was procrastinating – and it’s applicable in this context. The term translates as ‘putting in place’ or ‘everything in its place’ and it refers to the process of getting the workplace ready before cooking.
Just like a professional chef organises their utensils and arranges their ingredients, so too can you.
Thanks to the magic of multiple users on computers, it’s possible to create a separate user on your computer – without access to email and other social tools – so that you can switch to that account when you need to focus and hit the deadline.
Another, less technical way of achieving the same result – depending, of course, upon your line of work – is to close your computer and find some non-digital, unconnected space to work in.
The goal is to carve out time to focus so you can finish. As Newport states:

If you don’t produce, you won’t thrive – no matter how skilled or talented you are.

Procrastination is fine, but only if it’s accompanied by finishing. Create the space to finish and you’ll enjoy the best of both worlds.
In closing…
There is a time and a place for everything: there is a time to procrastinate, and a time to focus. To truly reap the rewards of time, the mind needs both.
By combining the processes of ‘Structured Procrastination’ and ‘Focused Finishing’ we can make the most of our 86,400 seconds a day, ensuring we are constantly primed to make new discoveries, but just as importantly, ensuring we hit the all-important deadlines.
Make the most of your time, you only get so much. Use every second productively and you’ll be thankful that you did. Don’t waste your time, once it’s gone, it’s gone… and you can never get it back.",2016,Christopher Murphy,christophermurphy,2016-12-21T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2016/stretching-time/,process
216,Styling Components - Typed CSS With Stylable,"There’s been a lot of debate recently about how best to style components for web apps so that styles don’t accidentally ‘leak’ out of the component they’re meant for, or clash with other styles on the page.
Elaborate CSS conventions have sprung up, such as OOCSS, SMACSS, BEM, ITCSS, and ECSS. These work well, but they are methodologies, and require everyone in the team to know them and follow them, which can be a difficult undertaking across large or distributed teams.
Others just give up on CSS and put all their styles in JavaScript. Now, I’m not bashing JS, especially so close to its 22nd birthday, but CSS-in-JS has problems of its own. Browsers have 20 years experience in optimising their CSS engines, so JavaScript won’t be as fast as using real CSS, and in any case, this requires waiting for JS to download, parse, execute then render the styles.
There’s another problem with CSS-in-JS, too. Since Responsive Web Design hit the streets, most designers no longer make comps in Photoshop or its equivalents; instead, they write CSS. Why hire an expensive design professional and require them to learn a new way of doing their job? 
A recent thread on Twitter asked “What’s your biggest gripe with CSS-in-JS?”, and the replies were illuminating: “Always having to remember to camelCase properties then spending 10min pulling hair out when you do forget”, “the cryptic domain-specific languages that each of the frameworks do just ever so slightly differently”, “When I test look and feel in browser, then I copy paste from inspector, only to have to re-write it as a JSON object”, “Lack of linting, autocomplete, and css plug-ins for colors/ incrementing/ etc”. 
If you’re a developer, and you’re still unconvinced, I challenge you to let designers change the font in your IDE to Zapf Chancery and choose a new colour scheme, simply because they like it better. Does that sound like fun? Will that boost your productivity? Thought not.
Some chums at Wix Engineering and I wanted to see if we could square this circle. Wix-hosted sites have always used CSS-in-JS (the concept isn’t new; it was in Netscape 4!) but that was causing performance problems. Could we somehow devise a method of extending CSS (like SASS and LESS do) that gives us styles that are guaranteed not to leak or clash, that is compatible with code editors’ autocompletion, and which could be pre-processed at build time to valid, cross-browser, static CSS?
After a few months and a few proofs of concept later (drumroll), yes – we could! We call it Stylable.
Introducing Stylable
Stylable is a CSS pre-processor, like SASS or LESS. It uses CSS syntax so all your development tools will work. At build time, the Stylable CSS extensions are transpiled to flat, valid, cross-browser vanilla CSS for maximum performance. There’s quite a bit to it, and this is a short article, so let’s look at the basic concepts.
Components all the way down
Stylable is designed for component-based systems. Imagine you have a Gallery component. Within that, there is a Navigation component (for example, containing a ‘next’, ‘previous’, ‘show all thumbnails’, and ‘show all albums’ controls), and within that there are NavButton components. Each component is discrete, used elsewhere in the system in different contexts, perhaps maintained by different team members or even different organisations — you can use Stylable to add a typed interface to non-Stylable component libraries, as well as using it to build an app from scratch.
Firstly, Stylable will automatically namespace styles so they only apply inside that component, by rewriting them at build time with a unique (but human-readable) prefix. So, for example,
<div className=""jingle bells"" /> might be re-written as <div class=""header183--jingle header183--bells""></div>. 
So far, so BEM-like (albeit without the headache of remembering a convention). But what else can it do?
Custom pseudo-elements
An important feature of Stylable is the ability to reach into a component and style it from the outside, without having to know about its internal structure. Let’s see the guts of a simple JSX button component in the file button.jsx:
render () {
    return (
        <button>
            <span className=""icon"" />
            <span className=""label"">Submit</span>
        </button>
    );
}
(Note:className is the JSX way of setting a class on an element; this example uses React, but Stylable itself is framework-agnostic.)
I style it using a Stylable stylesheet (the .st.css suffix tells the preprocessor to process this file):
/* button.st.css */

/* note that the root class is automatically placed on the root HTML 
element by Stylable React integration */
.root {
  background: #b0e0e6;
}

.icon {
  display: block; 
  height: 2em;
  background-image: url('./assets/btnIcon.svg');
}

.label {
  font-size: 1.2em;
  color: rgba(81, 12, 68, 1.0);
}
Note that Stylable allows all the CSS that you know and love to be included. As Drew Powers wrote in his review:

with Stylable, you get CSS, and every part of CSS. This seems like a “duh” observation, but this is significant if you’ve ever battled with a CSS-in-JS framework over a lost or “hacky” implementation of a basic CSS feature.

I can import my Button component into another component - this time, panel.jsx:
/* panel.jsx */
import * as React from 'react';
import {properties, stylable} from 'wix-react-tools';
import {Button} from '../button';
import style from './panel.st.css';

export const Panel = stylable(style)(() => (
    <div>
        <Button className=""cancelBtn"" />
    </div>
));
In panel.st.css: 
/* panel.st.css */
:import {
  -st-from: './button.st.css';
  -st-default: Button;
}

/* cancelBtn is of type Button */
.cancelBtn {
  -st-extends: Button;
  background: cornflowerblue;
}

/* targets the label of <Button className=""cancelBtn"" /> */
.cancelBtn::label {
  color: honeydew;
  font-weight: bold;
}
Here, we’re reaching into the Button component from the Panel component. Buttons that are not inside a Panel won’t be affected.
We do this by extending the CSS concept of pseudo-elements. As MDN says “A CSS pseudo-element is a keyword added to a selector that lets you style a specific part of the selected element(s)”. We don’t use a descendant selector because the label isn’t part of the Panel component, it’s part of the Button component. 
This syntax allows us three important features: 
Piercing the Shadow Boundary
Because, like a Matroshka doll of code, you can have components inside components inside components, you can chain pseudo-elements. In Stylable, Gallery::NavigationPanel::Button::Icon is a legitimate selector. We were worried by this (even though all Stylable CSS is transpiled to flat, valid CSS) because it’s not allowed in CSS, albeit with the note “A future version of this specification may allow multiple pseudo-elements per selector”. So I asked the CSS Working Group and was told “we intend to only allow specific combinations”, so we feel this extension to CSS is in the spirit of the language.
While we’re on the subject of those pesky Web Standards, note that the proposed ::part and ::theme pseudo-elements are meant to fulfil the same function. However, those are coming in two years (YouTube link) and, when they do, Stylable will support them.
Structure-agnostic
The second totez-groovy™ feature of Stylable’s pseudo-element syntax is that you don’t have to care about the internal structure of the component whose boundary you’re piercing. Any element with a class attribute is exposed as a pseudo-element to any component that imports it. It acts as an interface on any component, whether written in-house or by a third party.
Code completion
When we started writing Stylable, our objective was to do for CSS what TypeScript does for JavaScript. Wikipedia says

Challenges with dealing with complex JavaScript code led to demand for custom tooling to ease developing of components in the language. TypeScript developers sought a solution that would not break compatibility with the standard and its cross-platform support … [with]  static typing that enables static language analysis, which facilitates tooling and IDE support.

Similarly, because Stylable knows about components, their stylable parts and states, and how they inter-relate, we can develop language services like code completion and validation. That means we can see our errors at build time or even while working in our IDE. Wave goodbye to silent run-time breakage misery, with the Stylable Intelligence VS Code extension !
An action replay of Visual Studio Code offering code completion etc, filmed in super StyloVision.
Pseudo-classes for state
Stylable makes it easy to apply styles to custom states (as well as the usual :active, :checked, :visited etc) by extending the CSS pseudo-class syntax. 
We do this by declaring the possible custom states on the component:
/* Gallery.st.css */
.root {
  -st-states: toggled, loading;
}

.root:toggled {
  color: red;
}

.root:loading {
  color: green;
}

.root:loading:toggled {
  color: blue;
}
The -st-states “property” is actually a directive for the transpiler, so Stylable knows about possible pseudo-elements and can offer code completion etc. It looks like a vendor prefix by design, because it’s therefore valid CSS syntax and IDEs won’t flag it as an error, but is removed at build time. Remember, Stylable resolves to flat, valid, cross-browser CSS.
As with plain CSS, it can’t set a state, but can only react to states set externally. In the case of custom pseudo-classes, your JavaScript logic is responsible for maintaining state — by default, by setting a data-* attribute.
And there’s more!
Hopefully, I’ve shown you how Stylable extends CSS to allow you to style components and sub-components without worrying about that styles will leak, or knowing too much about internal structure. There isn’t time to tell you about mixins (CSS macros in JavaScript), variables or our theming capabilities, because I have wine to wrap and presents to mull.
We made Stylable because we ♥ CSS. But there’s a practical reason, too. As James Kyle, a core team member of Yarn, Babel and TC39 (the JavaScript Standards Technical Committee), said of Styable “pretty sure all the CSS-in-JS libraries just died for me”,
explaining

CSS could be perfectly static if given the right tools, that’s exactly what stylable does. It gives you the tools you need in CSS so that you don’t need to do a bunch of dynamic shit in JS.
Making it static is a huge performance win.

Wix is currently battle-testing Stylable in its back-office systems, before rolling it out to power Wix-hosted sites to make them more performant. There are 110 million Wix-hosted sites, so there will be a lot of Stylable on the web in a few months. And it’s open-sourced so you, dear Reader, can try it out and use it too. There’s a Stylable boilerplate based on create-react-app to get you started (more integrations are in the pipeline).
Happy Hols ‘n’ Hugz from the Stylable team: Bruce, Arnon, Tom, Ido.

Read more

Stylable documentation centre
Stylable on Twitter
A nice picture of a hedgehog",2017,Bruce Lawson,brucelawson,2017-12-09T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2017/styling-components-typed-css-with-stylable/,code
140,Styling hCards with CSS,"There are plenty of places online where you can learn about using the hCard microformat to mark up contact details at your site (there are some resources at the end of the article). But there’s not yet been a lot of focus on using microformats with CSS. So in this installment of 24 ways, we’re going to look at just that – how microformats help make CSS based styling simpler and more logical.

Being rich, quite complex structures, hCards provide designers with a sophisticated scaffolding for styling them. A recent example of styling hCards I saw, playing on the business card metaphor, was by Andy Hume, at http://thedredge.org/2005/06/using-hcards-in-your-blog/. While his approach uses fixed width cards, let’s take a look at how we might style a variable width business card style for our hCards.

Let’s take a common hCard, which includes address, telephone and email details

<div class=""vcard"">
	<p class=""fn org"">Web Directions North
		<a href=""http://suda.co.uk/projects/X2V/get-vcard.php?uri=http://north.webdirections.org/contact/"">
			<img src=""images/vcard-add.png"" alt=""download vcard icon""></a>
	</p>

	
		 1485 Laperrière Avenue 
		 Ottawa  ON  K1Z 7S8 
		Canada
	

	
		Phone/Fax: Work: 61 2 9365 5007
		Email: info@webdirections.org
	


We’ll be using a variation on the now well established “sliding doors” technique (if you create a CSS technique, remember it’s very important to give it a memorable name or acronym, and bonus points if you get your name in there!) by Douglas Bowman, enhanced by Scott Schiller (see http://www.schillmania.com/projects/dialog/,) which will give us a design which looks like this



The technique, in a nutshell, uses background images on four elements, two at the top, and two at the bottom, to add each rounded corner.

We are going to make this design “fluid” in the sense that it grows and shrinks in proportion with the size of the font that the text of the element is displayed with. This is sometimes referred to as an “em driven design” (we’ll see why in a moment).

To see how this works in practice, here’s the same design with the text “zoomed” up in size



and the same design again, when we zoom the text size down



By the way, the hCard image comes from Chris Messina, and you can download it and other microformat icons from the microformats wiki.

Now, with CSS3, this whole task would be considerably easier, because we can add multiple background images to an element, and border images for each edge of an element. Safari, version 1.3 up, actually supports multiple background images, but sadly, it’s not supported in Firefox 1.5, or even Firefox 2.0 (let’s not mention IE7 eh?). So it’s probably too little supported to use now. So instead we’ll use a technique that only involves CSS2, and works in pretty much any browser.

Very often, developers add div or span elements as containers for these background images, and in fact, if you visit Scott Shiller’s site, that’s what he has done there. But if at all possible we shouldn’t be adding any HTML simply for presentational purposes, even if the presentation is done via CSS. What we can do is to use the HTML we have already, as much as is possible, to add the style we want. This can take some creative thinking, but once you get the hang of this approach it becomes a more natural way of using HTML compared with simply adding divs and spans at will as hooks for style. Of course, this technique isn’t always simple, and in fact sometimes simply not possible, requiring us to add just a little HTML to provide the “hooks” for CSS.

Let’s go to work

The first step is to add a background image to the whole vCard element.



We make this wide enough (for example 1000 or more pixels) and tall enough that no matter how large the content of the vCard grows, it will never overflow this area. We can’t simply repeat the image, because the top left corner will show when the image repeats.

We add this as the background image of the vCard element using CSS.

While we are at it, let’s give the text a sans-serif font, some color so that it will be visible, and stop the image repeating.

.vcard {
	background-image: url(images/vcardfill.png);
	background-repeat: no-repeat;
	color: #666;
	font-family: ""Lucida Grande"", Verdana, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;
}

Which in a browser, will look something like this.



Next step we need to add the top right hand corner of the hCard. In keeping with our aim of not adding HTML simply for styling purposes, we want to use the existing structure of the page where possible. Here, we’ll use the paragraph of class fn and org, which is the first child element of the vcard element.

<p class=""fn org"">Web Directions Conference Pty Ltd <img src=""images/vcard-add.png"" alt=""download vcard icon""></p>

Here’s our CSS for this element

.fn {
	background-image: url(images/topright.png);
	background-repeat: no-repeat;
	background-position: top right;
	padding-top: 2em;
	font-weight: bold;
	font-size: 1.1em;
}

Again, we don’t want it to repeat, but this time, we’ve specified a background position for the image. This will make the background image start from the top, but its right edge will be located at the right edge of the element. I also made the font size a little bigger, and the weight bold, to differentiate it from the rest of the text in the hCard.

Here’s the image we are adding as the background to this element.



So, putting these two CSS statements together we get



We specified a padding-top of 2em to give some space between the content of the fn element and the edge of the fn element. Otherwise the top of the hCard image would be hard against the border. To see this in action, just remove the padding-top: 2em; declaration and preview in a browser.

So, with just two statements, we are well under way. We’ve not even had to add any HTML so far. Let’s turn to the bottom of the element, and add the bottom border (well, the background image which will serve as that border).

Now, which element are we going to use to add this background image to?

OK, here I have to admit to a little, teensie bit of cheating. If you look at the HTML of the hCard, I’ve grouped the email and telephone properties into a div, with a class of telecommunications. This grouping is not strictly requred for our hCard.

<div class=""telecommunications"">
	<p class=""tel"">Phone/Fax: <span class=""tel""><span class=""type"">Work</span>:
		<span class=""value"">61 2 9365 5007</span></p>
	<p class=""email"">Email: <a class=""value"" href=""mailto:info@webdirections.org"">info@webdirections.org</a></p>
</div>

Now, I chose that class name because that is what the vCard specification calls this group of properties. And typically, I do tend to group together related elements using divs when I  mark up content. I find it makes the page structure more logical and readable. But strictly speaking, this isn’t necessary, so you may consider it cheating. But my lesson in this would be, if you are going to add markup, try to make it as meaningful as possible.

As you have probably guessed by now, we are going to add one part of the bottom border image to this element. We’re going to add this image as the background-image.



Again, it will be a very wide image, like the top left one, so that no matter how wide the element might get, the background image will still be wide enough. Now, we’ll need to make this image sit in the bottom left of the element we attach it to, so we use a backgound position of left bottom (we put the horizontal position before the vertical). Here’s our CSS statement for this

.telecommunications {
	background-image: url(images/bottom-left.png);
	background-repeat: no-repeat;
	background-position: left bottom;
	margin-bottom: 2em;
}

And that will look like this



Not quite there, but well on the way. Time for the final piece in the puzzle.

OK, I admit, I might have cheated just a little bit more in this step. But like the previous step, all valid, and (hopefully) quite justifiable markup. If we look at the HTML again, you’ll find that our email address is marked up like this

<p class=""email"">Email: <a class=""value"" href=""mailto:info@webdirections.org"">info@webdirections.org</a></p>

Typically, in hCard, the value part of this property isn’t required, and we could get away with

<a class=""email"" href=""mailto:info@webdirections.org"">info@webdirections.org</a>

The form I’ve used, with the span of class value is however, perfectly valid hCard markup (hard allows for multiple email addresses of different types, which is where this typically comes in handy). Why have I gone to all this trouble? Well, when it came to styling the hCard, I realized I needed a block element to attach the background image for the bottom right hand corner to. Typically the last block element in the containing element is the ideal choice (and sometimes it’s possible to take an inline element, for example the link here, and use CSS to make it a block element, and attach it to that, but that really doesn’t work with this design).

So, if we are going to use the paragraph which contains the email link, we need a way to select it exclusively, which means that with CSS2 at least, we need a class or id as a hook for our CSS selector (in CSS3 we could use the last-child selector, which selects the last child element of a specified element, but again, as last child is not widely supported, we won’t rely on it here.)

So, the least worst thing we could do is take an existing element, and add some reasonably meaningful markup to it. That’s why we gave the paragraph a class of email, and the email address a class of value. Which reminds me a little of a moment in Hamlet


	The lady doth protest too much, methinks


OK, let’s get back to the CSS.

We add the bottom right corner image, positioning it in the bottom right of the element, and making sure it doesn’t repeat. We also add some padding to the bottom, to balance out the padding we added to the top of the hCard.

p.email {
	background-image: url(images/bottom-right.png);
	background-position: right bottom;
	background-repeat: no-repeat;
	padding-bottom: 2em;
}

Which all goes to make our hCard look like this



It just remains for us to clean up a little.

Let’s start from the top. We’ll float the download image to the right like this

.vcard img {
	float: right;
	padding-right: 1em;
	margin-top: -1em
}

See how we didn’t have to add a class to style the image, we used the  fact that the image is a descendent of the vcard element, and a descendent selector. In my experience, the very widely supported, powerful descendent selector is one of the most underused aspects of CSS. So if you don’t use it frequently, look into it in more detail.

We added some space to the right of the image, and pulled it up a bit closer to the top of the hCard, like this



We also want to add some whitespace between the edge of the hCard and the text. We would typically add padding to the left of the containing element, (in this case the vcard element) but this would break our bottom left hand corner, like this



That’s because the div element we added this bottom left background image to would be moved in by the padding on its containing element.

So instead, we add left margin to all the paragraphs in the hCard

.vcard p {
	margin-left: 1em;
}

(there is the descendent selector again – it is the swiss army knife of CSS)

Now, we’ve not yet made the width of the hCard a function of the size of the text inside it (or “em driven” as we described it earlier). We do this by giving the hCard a width that is specified in em units. Here we’ll set a width of say 28em, which makes the hCard always roughly as wide as 28 characters (strictly speaking 28 times the width of the letter capital M). 

So the statement for our containing vcard element becomes

.vcard {
	background-image: url(images/vcardfill.png);
	background-repeat: no-repeat;
	color: #666;
	font-family: ""Lucida Grande"", Verdana, Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;
	width: 28em;
}

and now our element will look like this



We’ve used almost entirely the existing HTML from our original hCard (adding just a little, and trying as much as possible to keep that additional markup meaningful), and just 6 CSS statements.

Holiday Bonus – a downloadable vCard

Did you notice this part of the HTML

<a href=""http://suda.co.uk/projects/X2V/get-vcard.php?uri=http://north.webdirections.org/contact/"">
        <img src=""images/vcard-add.png"" alt=""download vcard icon""></a>

What’s with the odd looking url

<a href=""http://suda.co.uk/projects/X2V/get-vcard.php?uri=http://north.webdirections.org/contact/""

If you click the link, X2V, a nifty web service from Brian Suda, grabs the page at the URL, and if it finds a hCard, converts it to a vCard, and depending on how your system is setup, automatically downloads it and adds it to your address book (Mac OS X) or prompts you whether you’d like to save the vCard and add it to whatever application is the default vCard handler on your system. 

What X2V does is take the actual HTML of your hCard, and with the magic of XSLT, converts it to a vCard. So, by simply marking up contact details using hCard, and adding a link like this, you automatically get downloadable vCard – and if you change your contact details, and update the hCard, there’s no vCard file to update as well.

Technorati also have a similar service at http://technorati.com/contact so you might want to use that if you expect any kind of load, as they can probably afford the bandwidth more than Brian!

If you want to play with the HTML and CSS for this design, the code and images can be downloaded.

Hope you enjoyed this, and found it useful. If so, you might like to check out my microformats focussed blog, or get along to Web Directions North, where I’ll be speaking along with Dan Cederholmn and Tantek Çelik in a 2 hour session focussed solely on microformats. And keep an eye out for my microformats book, from which this article has been adapted, coming in the spring of 2007.

A happy festive season, and all the best for 2007

John

Some hCard links


	The hCard entry at microformats.org
	The hCard Creator
	The hCard cheatsheet
	The hCard FAQ
	Ideas for authoring hCards



	Microfomatique – a blog about microformats
	Web Directions North – featuring a full 2 hour focussed microformats session",2006,John Allsopp,johnallsopp,2006-12-14T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2006/styling-hcards-with-css/,design
284,Subliminal User Experience,"The term ‘user experience’ is often used vaguely to quantify common elements of the interaction design process: wireframing, sitemapping and so on. UX undoubtedly involves all of these principles to some degree, but there really is a lot more to it than that.

Good UX is characterized by providing the user with constant feedback as they step through your interface. It means thinking about and providing fallbacks and error resolutions in even the rarest of scenarios. It’s about omitting clutter to make way for the necessary, and using the most fundamental of design tools to influence a user’s path. It means making no assumptions, designing right down to the most distinct details and going one step further every single time. In many cases, good UX is completely subliminal.

There are simple tools and subtleties we can build into our products to enhance the overall experience but, in order to do so, we really have to step beyond where we usually draw the line on what to design.

The purpose of this article is not to provide technical how-tos, as the functionality is, in most cases, quite simple and could be implemented in a myriad of ways. Rather, it will present a handful of ideas for enhancing the experience of an interface at a deeper level of design without relying on the container.

We’ll cover three elements that should get you thinking in the right mindset:


	progress activity and post-active states
	pseudo-class preloading
	buttons and their (mis)behaviour


Progress activity and the post-active state

We’ve long established that we can’t control the devices our products are viewed on, which browser they’ll run in or what connection speed will be used to access them. We accept this all as factual, so why is it so often left to the browser to provide feedback to the user when an event is triggered or an error encountered? The browser isn’t part of the interface — it’s merely a container. A simple, visual recognition of your users’ activity may be all it takes to make or break the product.

Let’s begin with a commonly overlooked case: progress activity.

A user moves their cursor over a hyperlink or button, which is clearly defined as one by the visual language of your content. Upon doing so, they trigger the :hover state to confirm this element is indeed interactive. So far, so good. What happens next is where it starts to fall apart: the user hits this link, presumably triggering an :active state, which is then returned to the normal state upon release. And then what?



From this point on, your user is in limbo. The link has fallen back to either its regular or :visited state. You’ve effectively abandoned them and are relying entirely on the browser they’re using to communicate that something is happening. This poses quite a few problems:


	The user may lose focus of what they were doing.
	There is little consistency between progress indication in browsers.
	The user may not even notice that their action has been acknowledged.


How many times have one or more of these events happened to you due to a lack of communication from the interface?

Think about the differences between Safari and Chrome in this area — two browsers that, when compared to each other, are relatively similar in nature, though this basic feature differs in execution.



Like all aspects of designing the user experience, there is no one true way to fix this problem, but we can introduce details that many users will unconsciously appreciate.

Consider the basic loading indicator. It’s nothing new — in fact, some would argue it’s quite a cliché. However, whether using a spinning wheel or a progress bar, a gif or JavaScript, or something more sophisticated, these simple tools create an illusion of movement, progress and activity. Depending on the implementation, progress indication graphics can significantly increase a user’s perception of the speed in which an event is taking place. Combine this with a cursor change and a lock over the element to prevent double-clicking or reloading, and your chances of keeping your user’s valuable attention have significantly increased.

Demo: Progress activity and the post-active state

This same logic applies to all aspects of defaulting in a browser, from micro-elements like this up to something as simple as a 404 page. The difference in a user’s reaction to hitting the default Apache 404 and a hand-crafted, branded page are phenomenal and there are no prizes for guessing which one they’re more likely to exit from.

Pseudo-class preloading

Another detail that it pays well to look after is the use and abuse of the :hover element and, more importantly, the content revealed by it. Chances are you’re using the :hover pseudo-class somewhere in almost every screen you create. If content is being revealed on :hover and that content takes some time to load, there will inevitably be a delay the first time it is initiated. It appears tacky and half-finished when a tooltip or drop-down loads instantly, only to have its background or supporting elements follow through a second or two later. So, let’s preload the elements we know we’ll need.

A very simple application of this would be to load each file into the default state of a visible element and offset them by a large number. This ensures our elements have loaded and are ready if and when they need to be displayed.

element {
    background: url(path/to/image.jpg) -9999em -9999em no-repeat;
    }
element .tooltip {
    display: none;
    }
element:hover .tooltip {
    display: block;
    background: url(path/to/image.jpg) 0 0;
    }

Background images are just one example. Of course, the same logic can apply to any form of revealed content. Using a sprite graphic can also be a clever — albeit tedious — method for achieving the same goal, so if you’re using a sprite, preloading in this way may not be necessary

The differences between preloading and not can only be visualized properly with an actual demonstration.

Demo: Preloading revealed content

Buttons and their (mis)behaviour

Almost all of the time, a button serves just one purpose: to be clicked (or tapped). When a button’s pressed, therefore, if anything other than triggering the desired event occurs, a user naturally becomes frustrated. I often get funny looks when talking about this, but designing the details of a button is something I consider essential.

It goes without saying that a button should always visually recognise :hover and :active states. We can take that one step further and disable some actions that get in the way of pressing the button.

It’s rare that a user would ever want to select and use the text on a button, so let’s cleanly disable it:

element {
    -moz-user-select: -moz-none;
    -webkit-user-select: none;
    user-select: none;
    }

If the button is image-based or contains an image, we could also disable user dragging to make sure the image element stays locked to the button:

element {
    -moz-user-drag: -moz-none;
    -webkit-user-drag: none;
    user-drag: none;
    }

Demo: A more usable button

Disabling global features like this should be done with utmost caution as it’s very easy to cross the line between enhancement and friction. Cases where this is acceptable are very rare, but it’s a good trick to keep in mind nevertheless. Both Apple’s iCloud and Metalab’s Flow applications use these tools appropriately and to great extent.

You could argue that the visual feedback of having the text selected or image dragged when a user mis-hits the button is actually a positive effect, informing the user that their desired action did not work. However, covering for human error should be a designer’s job, not that of our users. We can (almost) ensure it does work for them by accommodating for errors like this in most cases.

Final thoughts

Designing to this level of detail can seem obsessive, but as a designer and user of many interfaces and applications, I believe it can be the difference between a good user experience and a great one.

The samples you’ve just seen are only a fraction of the detail we can design for. Keep in mind that the demonstrations, code and methods above outline just one way to do this. You may not agree with all of these processes or have the time and desire to consider them, but one fact remains: it’s not the technology, or the way it’s done that’s important — it’s the logic and the concept of designing everything.",2011,Chris Sealey,chrissealey,2011-12-03T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2011/subliminal-user-experience/,ux
261,Surviving—and Thriving—as a Remote Worker,"Remote work is hot right now. Many people even say that remote work is the future. Why should a company limit itself to hiring from a specific geographic location when there’s an entire world of talent out there?
I’ve been working remotely, full-time, for five and a half years. I’ve reached the point where I can’t even fathom working in an office. The idea of having to wake up at a specific time and commute into an office, work for eight hours, and then commute home, feels weirdly anachronistic. I’ve grown attached to my current level of freedom and flexibility.
However, it took me a lot of trial and error to reach success as a remote worker — and sometimes even now, I slip up. Working remotely requires a great amount of discipline, independence, and communication. It can feel isolating, especially if you lean towards the more extroverted side of the social spectrum. Remote working isn’t for everyone, but most people, with enough effort, can make it work — or even thrive. Here’s what I’ve learned in over five years of working remotely.
Experiment with your environment
As a remote worker, you have almost unprecedented control of your environment. You can often control the specific desk and chair you use, how you accessorize your home office space — whether that’s a dedicated office, a corner of your bedroom, or your kitchen table. (Ideally, not your couch… but I’ve been there.) Hate fluorescent lights? Change your lightbulbs. Cover your work area in potted plants. Put up blackout curtains and work in the dark like a vampire. Whatever makes you feel most comfortable and productive, and doesn’t completely destroy your eyesight.
Working remotely doesn’t always mean working from home. If you don’t have a specific reason you need to work from home (like specialized equipment), try working from other environments (which is especially helpful it you have roommates, or children). Cafes are the quintessential remote worker hotspot, but don’t just limit yourself to your favorite local haunt. More cities worldwide are embracing co-working spaces, where you can rent either a roaming spot or a dedicated desk. If you’re a social person, this is a great way to build community in your work environment. Most have phone rooms, so you can still take calls.
Co-working spaces can be expensive, and not everyone has either the extra income, or work-provided stipend, to work from one. Local libraries are also a great work location. They’re quiet, usually have free wi-fi, and you have the added bonus of being able to check out books after work instead of, ahem, spending too much money on Kindle books. (I know most libraries let you check out ebooks, but reader, I am impulsive and impatient person. When I want a book now, I mean now.) 
Just be polite — make sure your headphones don’t leak, and don’t work from a library if you have a day full of calls.
Remember, too, that you don’t have to stay in the same spot all day. It’s okay to go out for lunch and then resume work from a different location. If you find yourself getting restless, take a walk. Wash some dishes while you mull through a problem. Don’t force yourself to sit at your desk for eight hours if that doesn’t work for you.
Set boundaries
If you’re a workaholic, working remotely can be a challenge. It’s incredibly easy to just… work. All the time. My work computer is almost always with me. If I remember at 11pm that I wanted to do something, there’s nothing but my own willpower keeping me from opening up my laptop and working until 2am. Some people are naturally disciplined. Some have discipline instilled in them as children. And then some, like me, are undisciplined disasters that realize as adults that wow, I guess it’s time to figure this out, eh?
Learning how to set boundaries is one of the most important lessons I’ve learned working remotely. (And honestly, it’s something I still struggle with). 
For a long time, I had a bad habit of waking up, checking my phone for new Slack messages, seeing something I need to react to, and then rolling over to my couch with my computer. Suddenly, it’s noon, I’m unwashed, unfed, starting to get a headache, and wondering why suddenly I hate all of my coworkers. Even when I finally tear myself from my computer to shower, get dressed, and eat, the damage is done. The rest of my day is pretty much shot.
I recently had a conversation with a coworker, in which she remarked that she used to fill her empty time with work. Wake up? Scroll through Slack and email before getting out of bed. Waiting in line for lunch? Check work. Hanging out on her couch in the evening? You get the drift. She was only able to break the habit after taking a three month sabbatical, where she had no contact with work the entire time.
I too had just returned from my own sabbatical. I took her advice, and no longer have work Slack on my phone, unless I need it for an event. After the event, I delete it. I also find it too easy to fill empty time with work. Now, I might wake up and procrastinate by scrolling through other apps, but I can’t get sucked into work before I’m even dressed. I’ve gotten pretty good at forbidding myself from working until I’m ready, but building any new habit requires intentionality. 
Something else I experimented with for a while was creating a separate account on my computer for social tasks, so if I wanted to hang out on my computer in the evening, I wouldn’t get distracted by work. It worked exceptionally well. The only problems I encountered were technical, like app licensing and some of my work proxy configurations. I’ve heard other coworkers have figured out ways to work through these technical issues, so I’m hoping to give it another try soon.
You might noticed that a lot of these ideas are just hacks for making myself not work outside of my designated work times. It’s true! If you’re a more disciplined person, you might not need any of these coping mechanisms. If you’re struggling, finding ways to subvert your own bad habits can be the difference between thriving or burning out.
Create intentional transition time
I know it’s a stereotype that people who work from home stay in their pajamas all day, but… sometimes, it’s very easy to do. I’ve found that in order to reach peak focus, I need to create intentional transition time. 
The most obvious step is changing into different clothing than I woke up in. Ideally, this means getting dressed in real human clothing. I might decide that it’s cold and gross out and I want to work in joggers and a hoody all day, but first, I need to change out of my pajamas, put on a bra, and then succumb to the lure of comfort. 
I’ve found it helpful to take similar steps at the end of my day. If I’ve spent the day working from home, I try to end my day with something that occupies my body, while letting my mind unwind. Often, this is doing some light cleaning or dinner prep. If I try to go straight into another mentally heavy task without allowing myself this transition time, I find it hard to context switch. 
This is another reason working from outside your home is advantageous. Commutes, even if it’s a ten minute walk down the road, are great transition time. Lunch is a great transition time. You can decompress between tasks by going out for lunch, or cooking and eating lunch in your kitchen — not next to your computer. 
Embrace async
If you’re used to working in an office, you’ve probably gotten pretty used to being able to pop over to a colleague’s desk if you need to ask a question. They’re pretty much forced to engage with you at that point. When you’re working remotely, your coworkers might not be in the same timezone as you. They might take an hour to finish up a task before responding to you, or you might not get an answer for your entire day because dangit Gary’s in Australia and it’s 3am there right now. 
For many remote workers, that’s part of the package. When you’re not co-located, you have to build up some patience and tolerance around waiting. You need to intentionally plan extra time into your schedule for waiting on answers.
Asynchronous communication is great. Not everyone can be present for every meeting or office conversation — and the same goes for working remotely. However, when you’re remote, you can read through your intranet messages later or scroll back a couple hours in Slack. My company has a bunch of internal blogs (“p2s”) where we record major decisions and hold asynchronous conversations. I feel like even if I missed a meeting, or something big happened while I was asleep, I can catch up later. We have a phrase — “p2 or it didn’t happen.”
Working remotely has made me a better communicator largely because I’ve gotten into the habit of making written updates. I’ve also trained myself to wait before responding, which allows me to distance myself from what could potentially be an emotional reaction. (On the internet, no one can see you making that face.) Having the added space that comes from not being in the same physical location with somebody else creates an opportunity to rein myself in and take the time to craft an appropriate response, without having the pressure of needing to reply right meow. Lean into it!
(That said, if you’re stuck, sometimes the best course of action is to hop on a video call with someone and hash out the details. Use the tools most appropriate for the problem. They invented Zoom for a reason.)
Seek out social opportunities
Even introverts can feel lonely or isolated. When you work remotely, there isn’t a built-in community you’re surrounded by every day. You have to intentionally seek out social opportunities that an office would normally provide.
I have a couple private Slack channels where I can joke around with work friends. Having that kind of safe space to socialize helps me feel less alone. (And, if the channels get too noisy, I can mute them for a couple hours.)
Every now and then, I’ll also hop on a video call with some work friends and just hang out for a little while. It feels great to actually see someone laugh.
If you work from a co-working space, that space likely has events. My co-working space hosts social hours, holiday parties, and sometimes even lunch-and-learns. These events are great opportunities for making new friends and forging professional connections outside of work. 
If you don’t have access to a co-working space, your town or city likely has meetups. Create a Meetup.com account and search for something that piques your interest. If you’ve been stuck inside your house for days, heads-down on a hard deadline, celebrate by getting out of the house. Get coffee or drinks with friends. See a show. Go to a religious service. Take a cooking class. Try yoga. Find excuses to be around someone other than your cats. When you can’t fall back on your work to provide community, you need to build your own.

These are tips that I’ve found help me, but not everyone works the same way. Remember that it’s okay to experiment — just because you’ve worked one way, doesn’t mean that’s the best way for you. Check in with yourself every now and then. Are you happy with your work environment? Are you feeling lonely, down, or exhausted? Try switching up your routine for a couple weeks and jot down how you feel at the end of each day. Look for patterns. You deserve to have a comfortable and productive work environment!
Hope to see you all online soon 🙌",2018,Mel Choyce,melchoyce,2018-12-09T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2018/thriving-as-a-remote-worker/,process
328,Swooshy Curly Quotes Without Images,"The problem

Take a quote and render it within blockquote tags, applying big, funky and stylish curly quotes both at the beginning and the end without using any images – at all.

The traditional way

Feint background images under the text, or an image in the markup housed in a little float. Often designers only use the opening curly quote as it’s just too difficult to float a closing one.

Why is the traditional way bad?

Well, for a start there are no actual curly quotes in the text (unless you’re doing some nifty image replacement). Thus with CSS disabled you’ll only have default blockquote styling to fall back on. Secondly, images don’t resize, so scaling text will have no affect on your graphic curlies.

The solution

Use really big text. Then it can be resized by the browser, resized using CSS, and even be restyled with a new font style if you fancy it. It’ll also make sense when CSS is unavailable.

The problem

Creating “Drop Caps” with CSS has been around for a while (Big Dan Cederholm discusses a neat solution in that first book of his), but drop caps are normal characters – the A to Z or 1 to 10 – and these can all be pulled into a set space and do not serve up a ton of whitespace, unlike punctuation characters.

Curly quotes aren’t like traditional characters. Like full stops, commas and hashes they float within the character space and leave lots of dead white space, making it bloody difficult to manipulate them with CSS. Styles generally fit around text, so cutting into that character is tricky indeed. Also, all that extra white space is going to push into the quote text and make it look pretty uneven. This grab highlights the actual character space:



See how this is emphasized when we add a normal alphabetical character within the span. This is what we’re dealing with here:



Then, there’s size. Call in a curly quote at less than 300% font-size and it ain’t gonna look very big. The white space it creates will be big enough, but the curlies will be way too small. We need more like 700% (as in this example) to make an impression, but that sure makes for a big character space.

Prepare the curlies

Firstly, remove the opening “ from the quote. Replace it with the opening curly quote character entity “. Then replace the closing “ with the entity reference for that, which is ”. Now at least the curlies will look nice and swooshy.

Add the hooks

Two reasons why we aren’t using :first-letter pseudo class to manipulate the curlies. Firstly, only CSS2-friendly browsers would get what we’re doing, and secondly we need to affect the last “letter” of our text also – the closing curly quote.

So, add a span around the opening curly, and a second span around the closing curly, giving complete control of the characters:

<blockquote><span class=""bqstart"">“</span>Speech marks. Curly quotes. That annoying thing cool people do with their fingers to emphasize a buzzword, shortly before you hit them.<span class=""bqend"">”</span></blockquote>

So far nothing will look any different, aside form the curlies looking a bit nicer. I know we’ve just added extra markup, but the benefits as far as accessibility are concerned are good enough for me, and of course there are no images to download.

The CSS

OK, easy stuff first. Our first rule .bqstart floats the span left, changes the color, and whacks the font-size up to an exuberant 700%. Our second rule .bqend does the same tricks aside from floating the curly to the right.

.bqstart {
     float: left;
     font-size: 700%;
     color: #FF0000;
 }

 .bqend {
     float: right;
     font-size: 700%;
     color: #FF0000;
 }

That gives us this, which is rubbish. I’ve highlighted the actual span area with outlines:



Note that the curlies don’t even fit inside the span! At this stage on IE 6 PC you won’t even see the quotes, as it only places focus on what it thinks is in the div. Also, the quote text is getting all spangled.

Fiddle with margin and padding

Think of that span outline box as a window, and that you need to position the curlies within that window in order to see them. By adding some small adjustments to the margin and padding it’s possible to position the curlies exactly where you want them, and remove the excess white space by defining a height:

.bqstart {
     float: left;
     height: 45px;
     margin-top: -20px;
     padding-top: 45px;
     margin-bottom: -50px;
     font-size: 700%;
     color: #FF0000;
 }

 .bqend {
     float: right;
     height: 25px;
     margin-top: 0px;
     padding-top: 45px;
     font-size: 700%;
     color: #FF0000;
 }

I wanted the blocks of my curlies to align with the quote text, whereas you may want them to dig in or stick out more. Be aware however that my positioning works for IE PC and Mac, Firefox and Safari. Too much tweaking seems to break the magic in various browsers at various times. Now things are fitting beautifully:

I must admit that the heights, margins and spacing don’t make a lot of sense if you analyze them. This was a real trial and error job. Get it working on Safari, and IE would fail. Sort IE, and Firefox would go weird.

Finished

The final thing looks ace, can be resized, looks cool without styles, and can be edited with CSS at any time. Here’s a real example (note that I’m specifying Lucida Grande and then Verdana for my curlies):

 “Speech marks. Curly quotes. That annoying thing cool people do with their fingers to emphasize a buzzword, shortly before you hit them.”

Browsers happy

As I said, too much tweaking of margins and padding can break the effect in some browsers. Even now, Firefox insists on dropping the closing curly by approximately 6 or 7 pixels, and if I adjust the padding for that, it’ll crush it into the text on Safari or IE. Weird. Still, as I close now it seems solid through resizing tests on Safari, Firefox, Camino, Opera and IE PC and Mac. Lovely.

It’s probably not perfect, but together we can beat the evil typographic limitations of the web and walk together towards a brighter, more aligned world. Merry Christmas.",2005,Simon Collison,simoncollison,2005-12-21T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2005/swooshy-curly-quotes-without-images/,business
321,Tables with Style,"It might not seem like it but styling tabular data can be a lot of fun. From a semantic point of view, there are plenty of elements to tie some style into. You have cells, rows, row groups and, of course, the table element itself. Adding CSS to a paragraph just isn’t as exciting.

Where do I start?

First, if you have some tabular data (you know, like a spreadsheet with rows and columns) that you’d like to spiffy up, pop it into a table — it’s rightful place!

To add more semantics to your table — and coincidentally to add more hooks for CSS — break up your table into row groups. There are three types of row groups: the header (thead), the body (tbody) and the footer (tfoot). You can only have one header and one footer but you can have as many table bodies as is appropriate.

Sample table example

Inspiration

Table Striping

To improve scanning information within a table, a common technique is to style alternating rows. Also known as zebra tables. Whether you apply it using a class on every other row or turn to JavaScript to accomplish the task, a handy-dandy trick is to use a semi-transparent PNG as your background image. This is especially useful over patterned backgrounds. 

tbody tr.odd td {
     background:transparent url(background.png) repeat top left;
 }

 * html tbody tr.odd td {
     background:#C00;
     filter: progid:DXImageTransform.Microsoft.AlphaImageLoader(
          src='background.png', sizingMethod='scale');
 }

We turn off the default background and apply our PNG hack to have this work in Internet Explorer. 

Styling Columns

Did you know you could style a column? That’s right. You can add special column (col) or column group (colgroup) elements. With that you can add border or background styles to the column.

<table>
     <col id=""ingredients"">
     <col id=""serve12"">
     <col id=""serve24"">
 ...

Check out the example.

Fun with Backgrounds

Pop in a tiled background to give your table some character! Internet Explorer’s PNG hack unfortunately only works well when applied to a cell.

To figure out which background will appear over another, just remember the hierarchy:

 (bottom) Table → Column → Row Group → Row → Cell (top)

The Future is Bright

Once browser-makers start implementing CSS3, we’ll have more power at our disposal. Just with :first-child and :last-child, you can pull off a scalable version of our previous table with rounded corners and all — unfortunately, only Firefox manages to pull this one off successfully. And the selector the masses are clamouring for, nth-child, will make zebra tables easy as eggnog.",2005,Jonathan Snook,jonathansnook,2005-12-19T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2005/tables-with-style/,code
44,Taglines and Truisms,"To bring her good luck, “white rabbits” was the first thing that my grandmother said out loud on the first day of every month. We all need a little luck, but we shouldn’t rely on it, especially when it comes to attracting new clients.

The first thing we say to a prospective client when they visit our website for the first time helps them to understand not only what we do but why we do it. We can also help them understand why they should choose to work with us over one of our competitors.

Take a minute or two to look at your competitors’ websites. What’s the first thing that they say about themselves? Do they say that they “design delightful digital experiences,” “craft beautiful experiences” or “create remarkable digital experiences?”

It’s easy to find companies who introduce themselves with what they do, their proposition, but what a company does is only part of their story. Their beliefs and values, what they stand for why they do what they do are also important. 

When someone visits our websites for the first time, we have only a brief moment to help them understand us. To help us we can learn from the advertising industry, where the job of a tagline is to communicate a concept, deliver a message and sell a product, often using only a few words.

When an advertising campaign is effective, its tagline stays with you, sometimes long after that campaign is over. For example, can you remember which company or brand these taglines help to sell? (Answers at the bottom of the article:)


The Ultimate Driving Machine
Just Do It
Don’t Leave Home Without It


A clever tagline isn’t just a play on words, although it can include one. A tagline does far more than help make your company memorable. Used well, it brings together notions of what makes your company and what you offer special. Then it expresses those notions in a few words or possibly a short sentence. 

I’m sure that everyone can find examples of company slogans written in the type of language that should stay within the walls of a marketing department. We can also find taglines where the meaning is buried so deep that the tag itself becomes effectively meaningless.

A meaningful tagline supports our ideas about who we are and what we offer, and provides a platform for different executions of them, sometimes over a period of time. For a tagline to work well, it must allow for current and future ideas about a brand.

It must also be meaningful to our brand and describe a truism, a truth that need not be a fact or statistic, but something that’s true about us, who we are, what we do and why that’s distinctive. It can be obvious, funny, serious or specific but above all it must be true. It should also be difficult to argue with, making your messages difficult to argue with too.

I doubt that I need remind you who this tagline belongs to:


	There are some things money can’t buy. For everything else there’s MasterCard.


That tagline was launched in 1997 by McCann-Erickson along with the “Priceless” campaign and it helped establish MasterCard as a friendlier credit card company, one with a sense of humour. 

MasterCard’s truism is that the things which really matter in life can’t be bought. They are worth more than anything that a monetary value can be applied to. In expressing that truism through the tagline, MasterCard’s advertising tells people to use not just any credit card, but their MasterCard, to pay for everything they buy.

“Guinness is good for you” may have been a stretch, but “Good things come to those who wait” builds on the truism that patience is a virtue and therefore a good pint of Guinness takes time to pour (119.5 seconds. I know you were wondering.)

The fact that British Airways flies to more destinations than any other airline is their truism, and led their advertisers to the now famous tagline, “The world’s favourite airline.”



At my company, Stuff & Nonsense, we’ve been thinking about taglines as we think about our position within an industry that seems full of companies who “design”, “craft”, and “create” “delightful”, “beautiful”, “remarkable digital experiences”.

Much of what made us different has changed along with the type of work we’re interested in doing. Our work’s expanded beyond websites and now includes design for mobile and other media. It’s true we can’t know how or where it will be seen. The ways that we make it are flexible too as we’re careful not to become tied to particular tools or approaches. 

It’s also true that we’re a small team. One that’s flexible enough to travel around the world to work alongside our clients. We join their in-house teams and we collaborate with them in ways that other agencies often find more difficult. We know that our clients appreciate our flexibility and have derived enormous value from it. We know that we’ve won business because of it and that it’s now a big part of our proposition.

Our truism is that we’re flexible, “Fabulously flexible” as our tagline now expresses. And although we know that there may be other agencies who can be similarly flexible – after all, being flexible is not a unique selling proposition – only we do it so fabulously.



As the old year rolls into the new, how will your company describe what you do in 2015? More importantly, how will you tell prospective clients why you do it, what matters to you and why they should work with you?

Start by writing a list of truisms about your company. Write as many as you can, but then whittle that list down to just one, the most important truth. Work on that truism to create a tagline that’s meaningful, difficult to be argue with and, above all, uniquely yours.

Answers


The Ultimate Driving Machine (BMW)
Just Do It (Nike)
Don’t Leave Home Without It (American Express)",2014,Andy Clarke,andyclarke,2014-12-23T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2014/taglines-and-truisms/,business
300,Taking Device Orientation for a Spin,"When The Police sang “Don’t Stand So Close To Me” they weren’t talking about using a smartphone to view a panoramic image on Facebook, but they could have been. For years, technology has driven relentlessly towards devices we can carry around in our pockets, and now that we’re there, we’re expected to take the thing out of our pocket and wave it around in front of our faces like a psychotic donkey in search of its own dangly carrot.
But if you can’t beat them, join them.
A brave new world
A couple of years back all sorts of specs for new HTML5 APIs sprang up much to our collective glee. Emboldened, we ran a few tests and found they basically didn’t work in anything and went off disheartened into the corner for a bit of a sob.
Turns out, while we were all busy boohooing, those browser boffins have actually being doing some work, and lo and behold, some of these APIs are even half usable. Mostly literally half usable—we’re still talking about browsers, after all.
Now, of course they’re all a bit JavaScripty and are going to involve complex methods and maths and science and probably about a thousand dependancies from Github that will fall out of fashion while we’re still trying to locate the documentation, right? Well, no! 
So what if we actually wanted to use one of these APIs, say to impress our friends with our ability to make them wave their phones in front of their faces (because no one enjoys looking hapless more than the easily-technologically-impressed), how could we do something like that? Let’s find out.
The Device Orientation API
The phone-wavy API is more formally known as the DeviceOrientation Event Specification. It does a bunch of stuff that basically doesn’t work, but also gives us three values that represent orientation of a device (a phone, a tablet, probably not a desktop computer) around its x, y and z axes. You might think of it as pitch, roll and yaw if you like to spend your weekends wearing goggles and a leather hat.
The main way we access these values is through an event listener, which can inform our code every time the value changes. Which is constantly, because you try and hold a phone still and then try and hold the Earth still too.
The API calls those pitch, roll and yaw values alpha, beta and gamma. Chocks away:
window.addEventListener('deviceorientation', function(e) {
    console.log(e.alpha);
    console.log(e.beta);
    console.log(e.gamma);
});
If you look at this test page on your phone, you should be able to see the numbers change as you twirl the thing around your body like the dance partner you never had. Wrist strap recommended.
One important note
Like may of these newfangled APIs, Device Orientation is only available over HTTPS. We’re not allowed to have too much fun without protection, so make sure that you’re working on a secure line. I’ve found a quick and easy way to share my local dev environment over TLS with my devices is to use an ngrok tunnel.
ngrok http -host-header=rewrite mylocaldevsite.dev:80
ngrok will then set up a tunnel to your dev site with both HTTP and HTTPS URL options. You, of course, want the HTTPS option.
Right, where were we?
Make something to look at
It’s all well and good having a bunch of numbers, but they’re no use unless we do something with them. Something creative. Something to inspire the generations. Or we could just build that Facebook panoramic image viewer thing (because most of us are familiar with it and we’re not trying to be too clever here). Yeah, let’s just build one of those.
Our basic framework is going to be similar to that used for an image carousel. We have a container, constrained in size, and CSS overflow property set to hidden. Into this we place our wide content and use positioning to move the content back and  forth behind the ‘window’ so that the part we want to show is visible.
Here it is mocked up with a slider to set the position. When you release the slider, the position updates. (This actually tests best on desktop with your window slightly narrowed.)
The details of the slider aren’t important (we’re about to replace it with phone-wavy goodness) but the crucial part is that moving the slider results in a function call to position the image. This takes a percentage value (0-100) with 0 being far left and 100 being far right (or ‘alt-nazi’ or whatever).
var position_image = function(percent) {
    var pos = (img_W / 100)*percent;
    img.style.transform = 'translate(-'+pos+'px)'; 
};
All this does is figure out what that percentage means in terms of the image width, and set the transform: translate(…); CSS property to move the image. (We use translate because it might be a bit faster to animate than left/right positioning.)
Ok. We can now read the orientation values from our device, and we can programatically position the image. What we need to do is figure out how to convert those raw orientation values into a nice tidy percentage to pass to our function and we’re done. (We’re so not done.)
The maths bit
If we go back to our raw values test page and make-believe that we have a fascinating panoramic image of some far-off beach or historic monument to look at, you’ll note that the main value that is changing as we swing back and forth is the ‘alpha’ value. That’s the one we want to track.
As our goal here is hey, these APIs are interesting and fun and not let’s build the world’s best panoramic image viewer, we’ll start by making a few assumptions and simplifications:

When the image loads, we’ll centre the image and take the current nose-forward orientation reading as the middle.
Moving left, we’ll track to the left of the image (lower percentage).
Moving right, we’ll track to the right (higher percentage).
If the user spins round, does cartwheels or loads the page then hops on a plane and switches earthly hemispheres, they’re on their own.

Nose-forward
When the page loads, the initial value of alpha gives us our nose-forward position. In Safari on iOS, this is normalised to always be 0, whereas most everywhere else it tends to be bound to pointy-uppy north. That doesn’t really matter to us, as we don’t know which direction the user might be facing in anyway — we just need to record that initial state and then use it to compare any new readings.
var initial_position = null;

window.addEventListener('deviceorientation', function(e) {
    if (initial_position === null) {
        initial_position = Math.floor(e.alpha);
    };

    var current_position = initial_position - Math.floor(e.alpha);
});
(I’m rounding down the values with Math.floor() to make debugging easier - we’ll take out the rounding later.)
We get our initial position if it’s not yet been set, and then calculate the current position as a difference between the new value and the stored one.
These values are weird
One thing you need to know about these values, is that they range from 0 to 360 but then you also get weird left-of-zero values like -2 and whatever. And they wrap past 360 back to zero as you’d expect if you do a forward roll.
What I’m interested in is working out my rotation. If 0 is my nose-forward position, I want a positive value as I turn right, and a negative value as I turn left. That puts the awkward 360-tipping point right behind the user where they can’t see it.
var rotation  = current_position;
if (current_position > 180) rotation = current_position-360;
Which way up?
Since we’re talking about orientation, we need to remember that the values are going to be different if the device is held in portrait on landscape mode. See for yourself - wiggle it like a steering wheel and you get different values. That’s easy to account for when you know which way up the device is, but in true browser style, the API for that bit isn’t well supported. The best I can come up with is:
var screen_portrait = false;
if (window.innerWidth < window.innerHeight) {
    screen_portrait = true;
}
It works. Then we can use screen_portrait to branch our code:
if (screen_portrait) {
        if (current_position > 180) rotation = current_position-360;
} else {
        if (current_position < -180) rotation = 360+current_position;
}
Here’s the code in action so you can see the values for yourself. If you change screen orientation you’ll need to refresh the page (it’s a demo!).
Limiting rotation
Now, while the youth of today are rarely seen without a phone in their hands, it would still be unreasonable to ask them to spin through 360° to view a photo. Instead, we need to limit the range of movement to something like 60°-from-nose in either direction and normalise our values to pan the entire image across that 120° range. -60 would be full-left (0%) and 60 would be full-right (100%).
If we set max_rotation = 60, that code ends up looking like this:
if (rotation > max_rotation) rotation = max_rotation;
if (rotation < (0-max_rotation)) rotation = 0-max_rotation;

var percent = Math.floor(((rotation + max_rotation)/(max_rotation*2))*100);
We should now be able to get a rotation from -60° to +60° expressed as a percentage. Try it for yourself.
The big reveal
All that’s left to do is pass that percentage to our image positioning function and would you believe it, it might actually work.
position_image(percent);
You can see the final result and take it for a spin. Literally.
So what have we made here? Have we built some highly technical panoramic image viewer to aid surgeons during life-saving operations using only JavaScript and some slightly questionable mathematics? No, my friends, we have not. Far from it. 
What we have made is progress. We’ve taken a relatively newly available hardware API and a bit of simple JavaScript and paired it with existing CSS knowledge and made something that we didn’t have this morning. Something we probably didn’t even want this morning. Something that if you take a couple of steps back and squint a bit might be a prototype for something vaguely interesting. But more importantly, we’ve learned that our browsers are just a little bit more capable than we thought.
The web platform is maturing rapidly. There are new, relatively unexplored APIs for doing all sorts of crazy thing that are often dismissed as the preserve of native apps. Like some sort of app marmalade. Poppycock. 
The web is an amazing, exciting place to create things. All it takes is some base knowledge of the fundamentals, a creative mind and a willingness to learn. We have those! So let’s create things.",2016,Drew McLellan,drewmclellan,2016-12-24T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2016/taking-device-orientation-for-a-spin/,code
267,Taming Complexity,"I’m going to step into my UX trousers for this one. I wouldn’t usually wear them in public, but it’s Christmas, so there’s nothing wrong with looking silly.

Anyway, to business. Wherever I roam, I hear the familiar call for simplicity and the denouncement of complexity. I read often that the simpler something is, the more usable it will be. We understand that simple is hard to achieve, but we push for it nonetheless, convinced it will make what we build easier to use. Simple is better, right?

Well, I’ll try to explore that. Much of what follows will not be revelatory to some but, like all good lessons, I think this serves as a welcome reminder that as we live in a complex world it’s OK to sometimes reflect that complexity in the products we build.

Myths and legends

Less is more, we’ve been told, ever since master of poetic verse Robert Browning used the phrase in 1855. Well, I’ve conducted some research, and it appears he knew nothing of web design. Neither did modernist architect Ludwig Mies van der Rohe, a later pedlar of this worthy yet contradictory notion. Broad is narrow. Tall is short. Eggs are chips. See: anyone can come up with this stuff.

To paraphrase Einstein, simple doesn’t have to be simpler. In other words, simple doesn’t dictate that we remove the complexity. Complex doesn’t have to be confusing; it can be beautiful and elegant. On the web, complex can be necessary and powerful. A website that simplifies the lives of its users by offering them everything they need in one site or screen is powerful. For some, the greater the density of information, the more useful the site.

In our decision-making process, principles such as Occam’s razor’s_razor (in a nutshell: simple is better than complex) are useful, but simple is for the user to determine through their initial impression and subsequent engagement. What appears simple to me or you might appear very complex to someone else, based on their own mental model or needs. We can aim to deliver simple, but they’ll be the judge.

As a designer, developer, content alchemist, user experience discombobulator, or whatever you call yourself, you’re often wrestling with a wealth of material, a huge number of features, and numerous objectives. In many cases, much of that stuff is extraneous, and goes in the dustbin. However, it can be just as likely that there’s a truckload of suggested features and content because it all needs to be there. Don’t be afraid of that weight.

In the right hands, less can indeed mean more, but it’s just as likely that less can very often lead to, well… less.

Complexity is powerful

Simple is the ability to offer a powerful experience without overwhelming the audience or inducing information anxiety. Giving them everything they need, without having them ferret off all over a site to get things done, is important.

It’s useful to ask throughout a site’s lifespan, “does the user have everything they need?” It’s so easy to let our designer egos get in the way and chop stuff out, reduce down to only the things we want to see. That benefits us in the short term, but compromises the audience long-term.

The trick is not to be afraid of complexity in itself, but to avoid creating the perception of complexity. Give a user a flight simulator and they’ll crash the plane or jump out. Give them everything they need and more, but make it feel simple, and you’re building a relationship, empowering people.

This can be achieved carefully with what some call gradual engagement, and often the sensible thing might be to unleash complexity in carefully orchestrated phases, initially setting manageable levels of engagement and interaction, gradually increasing the inherent power of the product and fostering an empowered community.

The design aesthetic

Here’s a familiar scenario: the client or project lead gets overexcited and skips most of the important decision-making, instead barrelling straight into a bout of creative direction Tourette’s. Visually, the design needs to be minimal, white, crisp, full of white space, have big buttons, and quite likely be “clean”. Of course, we all like our websites to be clean as that’s more hygienic.

But what do these words even mean, really? Early in a project they’re abstract distractions, unnecessary constraints. This premature narrowing forces us to think much more about throwing stuff out rather than acknowledging that what we’re building is complex, and many of the components perhaps necessary.

Simple is not a formula. It cannot be achieved just by using a white background, by throwing things away, or by breathing a bellowsful of air in between every element and having it all float around in space. Simple is not a design treatment. Simple is hard. Simple requires deep investigation, a thorough understanding of every aspect of a project, in line with the needs and expectations of the audience.

Recognizing this helps us empathize a little more with those most vocal of UX practitioners. They usually appreciate that our successes depend on a thorough understanding of the user’s mental models and expected outcomes. I personally still consider UX people to be web designers like the rest of us (mainly to wind them up), but they’re web designers that design every decision, and by putting the user experience at the heart of their process, they have a greater chance of finding simplicity in complexity. The visual design aesthetic — the façade — is only a part of that.

Divide and conquer

I’m currently working on an app that’s complex in architecture, and complex in ambition. We’ll be releasing in carefully orchestrated private phases, gradually introducing more complexity in line with the unavoidably complex nature of the objective, but my job is to design the whole, the complete system as it will be when it’s out of beta and beyond.

I’ve noticed that I’m not throwing much out; most of it needs to be there. Therefore, my responsibility is to consider interesting and appropriate methods of navigation and bring everything together logically.

I’m using things like smart defaults, graphical timelines and colour keys to make sense of the complexity, techniques that are sympathetic to the content. They act as familiar points of navigation and reference, yet are malleable enough to change subtly to remain relevant to the information they connect. It’s really OK to have a lot of stuff, so long as we make each component work smartly.

It’s a divide and conquer approach. By finding simplicity and logic in each content bucket, I’ve made more sense of the whole, allowing me to create key layouts where most of the simplified buckets are collated and sometimes combined, providing everything the user needs and expects in the appropriate places.

I’m also making sure I don’t reduce the app’s power. I need to reflect the scale of opportunity, and provide access to or knowledge of the more advanced tools and features for everyone: a window into what they can do and how they can help. I know it’s the minority who will be actively building the content, but the power is in providing those opportunities for all.

Much of this will be familiar to the responsible practitioners who build websites for government, local authorities, utility companies, newspapers, magazines, banking, and we-sell-everything-ever-made online shops. Across the web, there are sites and tools that thrive on complexity.

Alas, the majority of such sites have done little to make navigation intuitive, or empower audiences. Where we can make a difference is by striving to make our UIs feel simple, look wonderful, not intimidating — even if they’re mind-meltingly complex behind that façade.

Embrace, empathize and tame

So, there are loads of ways to exploit complexity, and make it seem simple. I’ve hinted at some methods above, and we’ve already looked at gradual engagement as a way to make sense of complexity, so that’s a big thumbs-up for a release cycle that increases audience power.

Prior to each and every release, it’s also useful to rest on the finished thing for a while and use it yourself, even if you’re itching to release. ‘Ready’ often isn’t, and ‘finished’ never is, and the more time you spend browsing around the sites you build, the more you learn what to question, where to add, or subtract. It’s definitely worth building in some contingency time for sitting on your work, so to speak.

One thing I always do is squint at my layouts. By squinting, I get a sort of abstract idea of the overall composition, and general feel for the thing. It makes my face look stupid, but helps me see how various buckets fit together, and how simple or complex the site feels overall.

I mentioned the need to put our design egos to one side and not throw out anything useful, and I think that’s vital. I’m a big believer in economy, reduction, and removing the extraneous, but I’m usually referring to decoration, bells and whistles, and fluff. I wouldn’t ever advocate the complete removal of powerful content from a project roadmap.

Above all, don’t fear complexity. Embrace and tame it. Work hard to empathize with audience needs, and you can create elegant, playful, risky, surprising, emotive, delightful, and ultimately simple things.",2011,Simon Collison,simoncollison,2011-12-21T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2011/taming-complexity/,ux
132,Tasty Text Trimmer,"In most cases, when designing a user interface it’s best to make a decision about how data is best displayed and stick with it. Failing to make a decision ultimately leads to too many user options, which in turn can be taxing on the poor old user. 

Under some circumstances, however, it’s good to give the user freedom in customising their workspace. One good example of this is the ‘Article Length’ tool in Apple’s Safari RSS reader. Sliding a slider left of right dynamically changes the length of each article shown. It’s that kind of awesomey magic stuff that’s enough to keep you from sleeping. Let’s build one.

The Setup

Let’s take a page that has lots of long text items, a bit like a news page or like Safari’s RSS items view. If we were to attach a class name to each element we wanted to resize, that would give us something to hook onto from the JavaScript. 

Example 1: The basic page.

As you can see, I’ve wrapped my items in a DIV and added a class name of chunk to them. It’s these chunks that we’ll be finding with the JavaScript. Speaking of which …

Our Core Functions

There are two main tasks that need performing in our script. The first is to find the chunks we’re going to be resizing and store their original contents away somewhere safe. We’ll need this so that if we trim the text down we’ll know what it was if the user decides they want it back again. We’ll call this loadChunks. 

var loadChunks = function(){
	var everything = document.getElementsByTagName('*');
	var i, l;
	chunks	= [];
	for (i=0, l=everything.length; i<l; i++){
		if (everything[i].className.indexOf(chunkClass) > -1){
			chunks.push({
				ref: everything[i],
				original: everything[i].innerHTML
			});
		}
	}
};

The variable chunks is stored outside of this function so that we can access it from our next core function, which is doTrim.

var doTrim = function(interval) {
	if (!chunks) loadChunks();
	var i, l;
	for (i=0, l=chunks.length; i<l; i++){
		var a = chunks[i].original.split(' ');
		a = a.slice(0, interval);
		chunks[i].ref.innerHTML	= a.join(' ');
	}
};

The first thing that needs to be done is to call loadChunks if the chunks variable isn’t set. This should only happen the first time doTrim is called, as from that point the chunks will be loaded.

Then all we do is loop through the chunks and trim them. The trimming itself (lines 6-8) is very simple. We split the text into an array of words (line 6), then select only a portion from the beginning of the array up until the number we want (line 7). Finally the words are glued back together (line 8).

In essense, that’s it, but it leaves us needing to know how to get the number into this function in the first place, and how that number is generated by the user. Let’s look at the latter case first.

The YUI Slider Widget

There are lots of JavaScript libraries available at the moment. A fair few of those are really good. I use the Yahoo! User Interface Library professionally, but have only recently played with their pre-build slider widget. Turns out, it’s pretty good and perfect for this task. 

Once you have the library files linked in (check the docs linked above) it’s fairly straightforward to create yourself a slider.

slider = YAHOO.widget.Slider.getHorizSlider(""sliderbg"", ""sliderthumb"", 0, 100, 5); 
slider.setValue(50);
slider.subscribe(""change"", doTrim);

All that’s needed then is some CSS to make the slider look like a slider, and of course a few bits of HTML. We’ll see those later.

See It Working!

Rather than spell out all the nuts and bolts of implementing this fairly simple script, let’s just look at in it action and then pick on some interesting bits I’ve added.

Example 2: Try the Tasty Text Trimmer.

At the top of the JavaScript file I’ve added a small number of settings.

var chunkClass	= 'chunk';
var minValue	= 10;
var maxValue	= 100;
var multiplier	= 5;

Obvious candidates for configuration are the class name used to find the chunks, and also the some minimum and maximum values. The minValue is the fewest number of words we wish to display when the slider is all the way down. The maxValue is the length of the slider, in this case 100.

Moving the slider makes a call to our doTrim function with the current value of the slider. For a slider 100 pixels long, this is going to be in the range of 0-100. That might be okay for some things, but for longer items of text you’ll want to allow for displaying more than 100 words. I’ve accounted for this by adding in a multiplier – in my code I’m multiplying the value by 5, so a slider value of 50 shows 250 words. You’ll probably want to tailor the multiplier to the type of content you’re using.

Keeping it Accessible 

This effect isn’t something we can really achieve without JavaScript, but even so we must make sure that this functionality has no adverse impact on the page when JavaScript isn’t available. This is achieved by adding the slider markup to the page from within the insertSliderHTML function.

var insertSliderHTML = function(){
	var s = '<a id=""slider-less"" href=""#less""><img src=""icon_min.gif"" width=""10"" height=""10"" alt=""Less text"" class=""first"" /></a>';
	s +=' <div id=""sliderbg""><div id=""sliderthumb""><img src=""sliderthumbimg.gif"" /></div></div>';
	s +=' <a id=""slider-more"" href=""#more""><img src=""icon_max.gif"" width=""10"" height=""10"" alt=""More text"" /></a>';
	document.getElementById('slider').innerHTML = s;
}

The other important factor to consider is that a slider can be tricky to use unless you have good eyesight and pretty well controlled motor skills. Therefore we should provide a method of changing the value by the keyboard.

I’ve done this by making the icons at either end of the slider links so they can be tabbed to. Clicking on either icon fires the appropriate JavaScript function to show more or less of the text.

In Conclusion

The upshot of all this is that without JavaScript the page just shows all the text as it normally would. With JavaScript we have a slider for trimming the text excepts that can be controlled with the mouse or with a keyboard.

If you’re like me and have just scrolled to the bottom to find the working demo, here it is again:

Try the Tasty Text Trimmer

Trimmer for Christmas? Don’t say I never give you anything!",2006,Drew McLellan,drewmclellan,2006-12-01T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2006/tasty-text-trimmer/,code
215,Teach the CLI to Talk Back,"The CLI is a daunting tool. It’s quick, powerful, but it’s also incredibly easy to screw things up in – either with a mistyped command, or a correctly typed command used at the wrong moment. This puts a lot of people off using it, but it doesn’t have to be this way.
If you’ve ever interacted with Slack’s Slackbot to set a reminder or ask a question, you’re basically using a command line interface, but it feels more like having a conversation. (My favourite Slack app is Lunch Train which helps with the thankless task of herding colleagues to a particular lunch venue on time.)
Same goes with voice-operated assistants like Alexa, Siri and Google Home. There are even games, like Lifeline, where you interact with a stranded astronaut via pseudo SMS, and KOMRAD where you chat with a Soviet AI.
I’m not aiming to build an AI here – my aspirations are a little more down to earth. What I’d like is to make the CLI a friendlier, more forgiving, and more intuitive tool for new or reluctant users. I want to teach it to talk back.
Interactive command lines in the wild
If you’ve used dev tools in the command line, you’ve probably already used an interactive prompt – something that asks you questions and responds based on your answers. Here are some examples:
Yeoman
If you have Yeoman globally installed, running yo will start a command prompt.

The prompt asks you what you’d like to do, and gives you options with how to proceed. Seasoned users will run specific commands for these options rather than go through this prompt, but it’s a nice way to start someone off with using the tool.
npm
If you’re a Node.js developer, you’re probably familiar with typing npm init to initialise a project. This brings up prompts that will populate a package.json manifest file for that project.

The alternative would be to expect the user to craft their own package.json, which is more error-prone since it’s in JSON format, so something as trivial as an extraneous comma can throw an error.
Snyk
Snyk is a dev tool that checks for known vulnerabilities in your dependencies. Running snyk wizard in the CLI brings up a list of all the known vulnerabilities, and gives you options on how to deal with it – such as patching the issue, applying a fix by upgrading the problematic dependency, or ignoring the issue (you are then prompted for a reason).

These decisions get mapped to the manifest and a .snyk file, and committed into the repo so that the settings are the same for everyone who uses that project.
I work at Snyk, and running the wizard is what made me think about building my own personal assistant in the command line to help me with some boring, repetitive tasks.
Writing your own
Something I do a lot is add bookmarks to styleguides.io – I pull down the entire repo, copy and paste a template YAML file, and edit to contents. Sometimes I get it wrong and break the site. So I’ve been putting together a tool to help me add bookmarks.
It’s called bookmarkbot – it’s a personal assistant squirrel called Mark who will collect and bury your bookmarks for safekeeping.*

*Fortunately, this metaphor also gives me a charming excuse for any situation where bookmarks sometimes get lost – it’s not my poorly-written code, honest, it’s just being realistic because sometimes squirrels forget where they buried things!
When you run bookmarkbot, it will ask you for some information, and save that information as a Markdown file in YAML format.
For this demo, I’m going to use a Node.js package called inquirer, which is a well supported tool for creating command line prompts. I like it because it has a bunch of different question types; from input, which asks for some text back, confirm which expects a yes/no response, or a list which gives you a set of options to choose from. You can even nest questions, Choose Your Own Adventure style.
Prerequisites

Node.js
npm
RubyGems (Only if you want to go as far as serving a static site for your bookmarks, and you want to use Jekyll for it)

Disclaimer
Bear in mind that this is a really simplified walkthrough. It doesn’t have any error states, and it doesn’t handle the situation where we save a file with the same name. But it gets you in a good place to start building out your tool.
Let’s go!
Create a new folder wherever you keep your projects, and give it an awesome name (I’ve called mine bookmarks and put it in the Sites directory because I’m unimaginative). Now cd to that directory. 
cd Sites/bookmarks
Let’s use that example I gave earlier, the trusty npm init.
npm init
Pop in the information you’d like to provide, or hit ENTER to skip through and save the defaults. Your directory should now have a package.json file in it. Now let’s install some of the dependencies we’ll need.
npm install --save inquirer
npm install --save slugify
Next, add the following snippet to your package.json to tell it to run this file when you run npm start.
""scripts"": {
  …
  ""start"": ""node index.js""
}
That index.js file doesn’t exist yet, so let’s create it in the root of our folder, and add the following:
// Packages we need
var fs = require('fs'); // Creates our file (part of Node.js so doesn't need installing)
var inquirer = require('inquirer'); // The engine for our questions prompt
var slugify = require('slugify'); // Will turn a string into a usable filename

// The questions
var questions = [
  {
    type: 'input',
    name: 'name',
    message: 'What is your name?',
  },
];

// The questions prompt
function askQuestions() {

  // Ask questions
  inquirer.prompt(questions).then(answers => {

    // Things we'll need to generate the output
    var name = answers.name;

    // Finished asking questions, show the output
    console.log('Hello ' + name + '!');

  });

}

// Kick off the questions prompt
askQuestions();
This is just some barebones where we’re including the inquirer package we installed earlier. I’ve stored the questions in a variable, and the askQuestions function will prompt the user for their name, and then print “Hello <your name>” in the console.
Enough setup, let’s see some magic. Save the file, go back to the command line and run npm start.

Extending what we’ve learnt
At the moment, we’re just saving a name to a file, which isn’t really achieving our goal of saving bookmarks. We don’t want our tool to forget our information every time we talk to it – we need to save it somewhere. So I’m going to add a little function to write the output to a file.
Saving to a file
Create a folder in your project’s directory called _bookmarks. This is where the bookmarks will be saved.
I’ve replaced my questions array, and instead of asking for a name, I’ve extended out the questions, asking to be provided with a link and title (as a regular input type), a list of tags (using inquirer’s checkbox type), and finally a description, again, using the input type.
So this is how my code looks now:
// Packages we need
var fs = require('fs'); // Creates our file
var inquirer = require('inquirer'); // The engine for our questions prompt
var slugify = require('slugify'); // Will turn a string into a usable filename

// The questions
var questions = [
  {
    type: 'input',
    name: 'link',
    message: 'What is the url?',
  },
  {
    type: 'input',
    name: 'title',
    message: 'What is the title?',
  },
  {
    type: 'checkbox',
    name: 'tags',
    message: 'Would you like me to add any tags?',
    choices: [
      { name: 'frontend' },
      { name: 'backend' },
      { name: 'security' },
      { name: 'design' },
      { name: 'process' },
      { name: 'business' },
    ],
  },
  {
    type: 'input',
    name: 'description',
    message: 'How about a description?',
  },
];

// The questions prompt
function askQuestions() {

  // Say hello
  console.log('🐿  Oh, hello! Found something you want me to bookmark?\n');

  // Ask questions
  inquirer.prompt(questions).then((answers) => {

    // Things we'll need to generate the output
    var title = answers.title;
    var link = answers.link;
    var tags = answers.tags + '';
    var description = answers.description;
    var output = '---\n' +
                 'title: ""' + title + '""\n' +
                 'link: ""' + link + '""\n' +
                 'tags: [' + tags + ']\n' +
                 '---\n' + description + '\n';

    // Finished asking questions, show the output
    console.log('\n🐿  All done! Here is what I\'ve written down:\n');
    console.log(output);

    // Things we'll need to generate the filename
    var slug = slugify(title);
    var filename = '_bookmarks/' + slug + '.md';

    // Write the file
    fs.writeFile(filename, output, function () {
      console.log('\n🐿  Great! I have saved your bookmark to ' + filename);
    });

  });

}

// Kick off the questions prompt
askQuestions();
The output is formatted into YAML metadata as a Markdown file, which will allow us to turn it into a static HTML file using a build tool later. Run npm start again and have a look at the file it outputs.

Getting confirmation
Before the user makes critical changes, it’s good to verify those changes first. We’re going to add a confirmation step to our tool, before writing the file. More seasoned CLI users may favour speed over a “hey, can you wait a sec and just check this is all ok” step, but I always think it’s worth adding one so you can occasionally save someone’s butt.
So, underneath our questions array, let’s add a confirmation array.
// Packages we need
…
// The questions
…

// Confirmation questions
var confirm = [
  {
    type: 'confirm',
    name: 'confirm',
    message: 'Does this look good?',
  },
];

// The questions prompt
…

As we’re adding the confirm step before the file gets written, we’ll need to add the following inside the askQuestions function:
// The questions prompt
function askQuestions() {
  // Say hello
  …
  // Ask questions
  inquirer.prompt(questions).then((answers) => {
    …
    // Things we'll need to generate the output
    …
    // Finished asking questions, show the output
    …

    // Confirm output is correct
    inquirer.prompt(confirm).then(answers => {

      // Things we'll need to generate the filename
      var slug = slugify(title);
      var filename = '_bookmarks/' + slug + '.md';

      if (answers.confirm) {
        // Save output into file
        fs.writeFile(filename, output, function () {
          console.log('\n🐿  Great! I have saved your bookmark to ' +
          filename);
        });
      } else {
        // Ask the questions again
        console.log('\n🐿  Oops, let\'s try again!\n');
        askQuestions();
      }

    });

  });
}

// Kick off the questions prompt
askQuestions();
Now run npm start and give it a go!

Typing y will write the file, and n will take you back to the start. Ideally, I’d store the answers already given as defaults so the user doesn’t have to start from scratch, but I want to keep this demo simple.
Serving the files
Now that your bookmarking tool is successfully saving formatted Markdown files to a folder, the next step is to serve those files in a way that lets you share them online. The easiest way to do this is to use a static-site generator to convert your YAML files into HTML, and pop them all on one page. Now, you’ve got a few options here and I don’t want to force you down any particular path, as there are plenty out there – it’s just a case of using the one you’re most comfortable with.
I personally favour Jekyll because of its tight integration with GitHub Pages – I don’t want to mess around with hosting and deployment, so it’s really handy to have my bookmarks publish themselves on my site as soon as I commit and push them using Git.
I’ll give you a very brief run-through of how I’m doing this with bookmarkbot, but I recommend you read my Get Started With GitHub Pages (Plus Bonus Jekyll) guide if you’re unfamiliar with them, because I’ll be glossing over some bits that are already covered in there.
Setting up a build tool
If you haven’t already, install Jekyll and Bundler globally through RubyGems. Jekyll is our static-site generator, and Bundler is what we use to install Ruby dependencies.
gem install jekyll bundler
In my project folder, I’m going to run the following which will install the Jekyll files we’ll need to build our listing page. I’m using --force, otherwise it will complain that the directory isn’t empty.
jekyll new . --force
If you check your project folder, you’ll see a bunch of new files. Now run the following to start the server:
bundle exec jekyll serve
This will build a new directory called _site. This is where your static HTML files have been generated. Don’t touch anything in this folder because it will get overwritten the next time you build.
Now that serve is running, go to http://127.0.0.1:4000/ and you’ll see the default Jekyll page and know that things are set up right. Now, instead, we want to see our list of bookmarks that are saved in the _bookmarks directory (make sure you’ve got a few saved). So let’s get that set up next.
Open up the _config.yml file that Jekyll added earlier. In here, we’re going to tell it about our bookmarks. Replace everything in your _config.yml file with the following:
title: My Bookmarks
description: These are some of my favourite articles about the web.
markdown: kramdown
baseurl: /bookmarks # This needs to be the same name as whatever you call your repo on GitHub.
collections:
  - bookmarks
This will make Jekyll aware of our _bookmarks folder so that we can call it later. Next, create a new directory and file at _layouts/home.html and paste in the following.
<!doctype html>
<html lang=""en"">
<head>
  <meta charset=""UTF-8"" />
  <title>{{site.title}}</title>
  <meta name=""description"" content=""{{site.description}}"">
</head>

<body>

  <h1>{{site.title}}</h1>
  <p>{{site.description}}</p>

  <ul>
    {% for bookmark in site.bookmarks %}
    <li>
      <a href=""{{bookmark.link}}"">
        <h2>{{bookmark.title}}</h2>
      </a>
      {{bookmark.content}}
      {% if bookmark.tags %}
      <ul>
        {% for tags in bookmark.tags %}<li>{{tags}}</li>{% endfor %}
      </ul>
      {% endif %}
    </li>
    {% endfor %}
  </ul>

</body>

</html>
Restart Jekyll for your config changes to kick in, and go to the url it provides you (probably http://127.0.0.1:4000/bookmarks, unless you gave something different as your baseurl).

It’s a decent start – there’s a lot more we can do in this area but now we’ve got a nice list of all our bookmarks, let’s get it online!
If you want to use GitHub Pages to host your files, your first step is to push your project to GitHub. Go to your repository and click “settings”. Scroll down to the section labelled “GitHub Pages”, and from here you can enable it. Select your master branch, and it will provide you with a url to view your published pages.

What next?
Now that you’ve got a framework in place for publishing bookmarks, you can really go to town on your listing page and make it your own. First thing you’ll probably want to do is add some CSS, then when you’ve added a bunch of bookmarks, you’ll probably want to have some filtering in place for the tags, perhaps extend the types of questions that you ask to include an image (if you’re feeling extra-fancy, you could just ask for a url and pull in metadata from the site itself). Maybe you’ve got an idea that doesn’t involve bookmarks at all.
You could use what you’ve learnt to build a place where you can share quotes, a list of your favourite restaurants, or even Christmas gift ideas.
Here’s one I made earlier

My demo, bookmarkbot, is on GitHub, and I’ve reused a lot of the code from styleguides.io. Feel free to grab bits of code from there, and do share what you end up making!",2017,Anna Debenham,annadebenham,2017-12-11T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2017/teach-the-cli-to-talk-back/,code
257,The (Switch)-Case for State Machines in User Interfaces,"You’re tasked with creating a login form. Email, password, submit button, done.
“This will be easy,” you think to yourself.
Login form by Selecto
You’ve made similar forms many times in the past; it’s essentially muscle memory at this point. You’re working closely with a designer, who gives you a beautiful, detailed mockup of a login form. Sure, you’ll have to translate the pixels to meaningful, responsive CSS values, but that’s the least of your problems.
As you’re writing up the HTML structure and CSS layout and styles for this form, you realize that you don’t know what the successful “logged in” page looks like. You remind the designer, who readily gives it to you. But then you start thinking more and more about how the login form is supposed to work.

What if login fails? Where do those errors show up?
Should we show errors differently if the user forgot to enter their email, or password, or both?
Or should the submit button be disabled?
Should we validate the email field?
When should we show validation errors – as they’re typing their email, or when they move to the password field, or when they click submit? (Note: many, many login forms are guilty of this.)
When should the errors disappear?
What do we show during the login process? Some loading spinner?
What if loading takes too long, or a server error occurs?

Many more questions come up, and you (and your designer) are understandably frustrated. The lack of upfront specification opens the door to scope creep, which readily finds itself at home in all the unexplored edge cases.
Modeling Behavior
Describing all the possible user flows and business logic of an application can become tricky. Ironically, user stories might not tell the whole story – they often leave out potential edge-cases or small yet important bits of information.
However, one important (and very old) mathematical model of computation can be used for describing the behavior and all possible states of a user interface: the finite state machine.
The general idea, as it applies to user interfaces, is that all of our applications can be described (at some level of abstraction) as being in one, and only one, of a finite number of states at any given time. For example, we can describe our login form above in these states:

start - not submitted yet
loading - submitted and logging in
success - successfully logged in
error - login failed

Additionally, we can describe an application as accepting a finite number of events – that is, all the possible events that can be “sent” to the application, either from the user or some other external entity:

SUBMIT - pressing the submit button
RESOLVE - the server responds, indicating that login is successful
REJECT - the server responds, indicating that login failed

Then, we can combine these states and events to describe the transitions between them. That is, when the application is in one state, an an event occurs, we can specify what the next state should be:

From the start state, when the SUBMIT event occurs, the app should be in the loading state.
From the loading state, when the RESOLVE event occurs, login succeeded and the app should be in the success state.
If login fails from the loading state (i.e., when the REJECT event occurs), the app should be in the error state.
From the error state, the user should be able to retry login: when the SUBMIT event occurs here, the app should go to the loading state.
Otherwise, if any other event occurs, don’t do anything and stay in the same state.

That’s a pretty thorough description, similar to a user story! It’s also a bit more symbolic than a user story (e.g., “when the SUBMIT event occurs” instead of “when the user presses the submit button”), and that’s for a reason. By representing states, events, and transitions symbolically, we can visualize what this state machine looks like:

Every state is represented by a box, and every event is connected to a transition arrow that connects two states. This makes it intuitive to follow the flow and understand what the next state should be given the current state and an event.
From Visuals to Code
Drawing a state machine doesn’t require any special software; in fact, using paper and pencil (in case anything changes!) does the job quite nicely. However, one common problem is handoff: it doesn’t matter how detailed a user story or how well-designed a visualization is, it eventually has to be coded in order for it to become part of a real application.
With the state machine model described above, the same visual description can be mapped directly to code. Traditionally, and as the title suggests, this is done using switch/case statements:
function loginMachine(state, event) {
    switch (state) {
        case 'start':
            if (event === 'SUBMIT') {
                return 'loading';
            }
            break;
        case 'loading':
            if (event === 'RESOLVE') {
                return 'success';
            } else if (event === 'REJECT') {
                return 'error';
            }
            break;
        case 'success':
            // Accept no further events
            break;
        case 'error':
            if (event === 'SUBMIT') {
                return 'loading';
            }
            break;
        default:
            // This should never occur
            return undefined;
    }
}

console.log(loginMachine('start', 'SUBMIT'));
// => 'loading'
This is fine (I suppose) but personally, I find it much easier to use objects:
const loginMachine = {
  initial: ""start"",
  states: {
    start: {
      on: { SUBMIT: 'loading' }
    },
    loading: {
      on: {
        REJECT: 'error',
        RESOLVE: 'success'
      }
    },
    error: {
      on: {
        SUBMIT: 'loading'
      }
    },
    success: {}
  }
};

function transition(state, event) {
  return machine
    .states[state] // Look up the state
    .on[event]     // Look up the next state based on the event
    || state;      // If not found, return the current state
}

console.log(transition('start', 'SUBMIT'));
As you might have noticed, the loginMachine is a plain JS object, and can be written in JSON. This is important because it allows the machine to be visualized by a 3rd-party tool, as demonstrated here:

A Common Language Between Designers and Developers
Although finite state machines are a fundamental part of computer science, they have an amazing potential to bridge the application specification gap between designers and developers, as well as project managers, stakeholders, and more. By designing a state machine visually and with code, designers and developers alike can:

identify all possible states, and potentially missing states
describe exactly what should happen when an event occurs on a given state, and prevent that event from having unintended side-effects in other states (ever click a submit button more than once?)
eliminate impossible states and identify states that are “unreachable” (have no entry transition) or “sunken” (have no exit transition)
add features with full confidence of knowing what other states it might affect
simplify redundant states or complex user flows
create test paths for almost every possible user flow, and easily identify edge cases
collaborate better by understanding the entire application model equally.

Not a New Idea
I’m not the first to suggest that state machines can help bridge the gap between design and development.

Vince MingPu Shao wrote an article about designing UI states and communicating with developers effectively with finite state machines
User flow diagrams, which visually describe the paths that a user can take through an app to achieve certain goals, are essentially state machines. Numerous tools, from Sketch plugins to standalone apps, exist for creating them.
In 1999, Ian Horrocks wrote a book titled “Constructing the User Interface with Statecharts”, which takes state machines to the next level and describes the inherent difficulties (and solutions) with creating complex UIs. The ideas in the book are still relevant today.
More than a decade earlier, David Harel published “Statecharts: A Visual Formalism for Complex Systems”, in which the statechart - an extended hierarchical state machine model - is born.

State machines and statecharts have been used for complex systems and user interfaces, both physical and digital, for decades, and are especially prevalent in other industries, such as game development and embedded electronic systems. Even NASA uses statecharts for the Curiosity Rover and more, citing many benefits:

Visualized modeling
Precise diagrams
Automatic code generation
Comprehensive test coverage
Accommodation of late-breaking requirements changes

Moving Forward
It’s time that we improve how we communicate between designers and developers, much less improve the way we develop UIs to deliver the best, bug-free, optimal user experience. There is so much more to state machines and statecharts than just being a different way of designing and coding. For more resources:

The World of Statecharts is a comprehensive guide by Erik Mogensen in using statecharts in your applications
The Statechart Community on Spectrum is always full of interesting ideas and questions related to state machines, statecharts, and software modeling
I gave a talk at React Rally over a year ago about how state machines (finite automata) can improve the way we develop applications. The latest one is from Reactive Conf, where I demonstrate how statecharts can be used to automatically generate test cases.
I have also been working on XState, which is a library for “state machines and statecharts for the modern web”. You can create and visualize statecharts in JavaScript, and use them in any framework (and soon enough, multiple different languages).

I’m excited about the future of developing web and mobile applications with statecharts, especially with regard to faster design/development cycles, auto-generated testing, better error prevention, comprehensive analytics, and even the use of model-based reinforcement learning and artificial intelligence to greatly improve the user experience.",2018,David Khourshid,davidkhourshid,2018-12-12T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2018/state-machines-in-user-interfaces/,code
65,The Accessibility Mindset,"Accessibility is often characterized as additional work, hard to learn and only affecting a small number of people. Those myths have no logical foundation and often stem from outdated information or misconceptions.
Indeed, it is an additional skill set to acquire, quite like learning new JavaScript frameworks, CSS layout techniques or new HTML elements. But it isn’t particularly harder to learn than those other skills.
A World Health Organization (WHO) report on disabilities states that,

[i]ncluding children, over a billion people (or about 15% of the world’s population) were estimated to be living with disability.

Being disabled is not as unusual as one might think. Due to chronic health conditions and older people having a higher risk of disability, we are also currently paving the cowpath to an internet that we can still use in the future.
Accessibility has a very close relationship with usability, and advancements in accessibility often yield improvements in the usability of a website. Websites are also more adaptable to users’ needs when they are built in an accessible fashion.
Beyond the bare minimum
In the time of table layouts, web developers could create code that passed validation rules but didn’t adhere to the underlying semantic HTML model. We later developed best practices, like using lists for navigation, and with HTML5 we started to wrap those lists in nav elements. Working with accessibility standards is similar. The Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.0 can inform your decision to make websites accessible and can be used to test that you met the success criteria. What it can’t do is measure how well you met them. 
W3C developed a long list of techniques that can be used to make your website accessible, but you might find yourself in a situation where you need to adapt those techniques to be the most usable solution for your particular problem.
The checkbox below is implemented in an accessible way: The input element has an id and the label associated with the checkbox refers to the input using the for attribute. The hover area is shown with a yellow background and a black dotted border:
Open video
    
The label is clickable and the checkbox has an accessible description. Job done, right? Not really. Take a look at the space between the label and the checkbox:
Open video
    
The gutter is created using a right margin which pushes the label to the right. Users would certainly expect this space to be clickable as well. The simple solution is to wrap the label around the checkbox and the text:
Open video
    
You can also set the label to display:block; to further increase the clickable area:
Open video
    
And while we’re at it, users might expect the whole box to be clickable anyway. Let’s apply the CSS that was on a wrapping div element to the label directly:
Open video
    
The result enhances the usability of your form element tremendously for people with lower dexterity, using a voice mouse, or using touch interfaces. And we only used basic HTML and CSS techniques; no JavaScript was added and not one extra line of CSS.
<form action=""#"">  
    <label for=""uniquecheckboxid"">
      <input type=""checkbox"" name=""checkbox"" id=""uniquecheckboxid"" />
      Checkbox 4
    </label>
</form>  
Button Example
The button below looks like a typical edit button: a pencil icon on a real button element. But if you are using a screen reader or a braille keyboard, the button is just read as “button” without any indication of what this button is for.
Open video
    A screen reader announcing a button. Contains audio.
The code snippet shows why the button is not properly announced:
<button>
  <span class=""icon icon-pencil""></span>
</button>
An icon font is used to display the icon and no text alternative is given. A possible solution to this problem is to use the title or aria-label attributes, which solves the alternative text use case for screen reader users:
Open video
    A screen reader announcing a button with a title.
However, screen readers are not the only way people with and without disabilities interact with websites. For example, users can reset or change font families and sizes at will. This helps many users make websites easier to read, including people with dyslexia. Your icon font might be replaced by a font that doesn’t include the glyphs that are icons. Additionally, the icon font may not load for users on slow connections, like on mobile phones inside trains, or because users decided to block external fonts altogether. The following screenshots show the mobile GitHub view with and without external fonts:
The mobile GitHub view with and without external fonts.
Even if the title/aria-label approach was used, the lack of visual labels is a barrier for most people under those circumstances. One way to tackle this is using the old-fashioned img element with an appropriate alt attribute, but surprisingly not every browser displays the alternative text visually when the image doesn’t load.
<button>
  <img src=""icon-pencil.svg"" alt=""Edit"">
</button>
Providing always visible text is an alternative that can work well if you have the space. It also helps users understand the meaning of the icons.
<button>
  <span class=""icon icon-pencil""></span> Edit
</button>
This also reads just fine in screen readers:
Open video
    A screen reader announcing the revised button.
Clever usability enhancements don’t stop at a technical implementation level. Take the BBC iPlayer pages as an example: when a user navigates the “captioned videos” or “audio description” categories and clicks on one of the videos, captions or audio descriptions are automatically switched on. Small things like this enhance the usability and don’t need a lot of engineering resources. It is more about connecting the usability dots for people with disabilities. Read more about the BBC iPlayer accessibility case study.
More information
W3C has created several documents that make it easier to get the gist of what web accessibility is and how it can benefit everyone. You can find out “How People with Disabilities Use the Web”, there are “Tips for Getting Started” for developers, designers and content writers. And for the more seasoned developer there is a set of tutorials on web accessibility, including information on crafting accessible forms and how to use images in an accessible way.
Conclusion
You can only produce a web project with long-lasting accessibility if accessibility is not an afterthought. Your organization, your division, your team need to think about accessibility as something that is the foundation of your website or project. It needs to be at the same level as performance, code quality and design, and it needs the same attention. Users often don’t notice when those fundamental aspects of good website design and development are done right. But they’ll always know when they are implemented poorly.
If you take all this into consideration, you can create accessibility solutions based on the available data and bring accessibility to people who didn’t know they’d need it:
Open video
    
In this video from the latest Apple keynote, the Apple TV is operated by voice input through a remote. When the user asks “What did she say?” the video jumps back fifteen seconds and captions are switched on for a brief time. All three, the remote, voice input and captions have their roots in assisting people with disabilities. Now they benefit everyone.",2015,Eric Eggert,ericeggert,2015-12-17T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2015/the-accessibility-mindset/,code
260,The Art of Mathematics: A Mandala Maker Tutorial,"In front-end development, there’s often a great deal of focus on tools that aim to make our work more efficient. But what if you’re new to web development? When you’re just starting out, the amount of new material can be overwhelming, particularly if you don’t have a solid background in Computer Science. But the truth is, once you’ve learned a little bit of JavaScript, you can already make some pretty impressive things.
A couple of years back, when I was learning to code, I started working on a side project. I wanted to make something colorful and fun to share with my friends. This is what my app looks like these days:
Mandala Maker user interface
The coolest part about it is the fact that it’s a tool: anyone can use it to create something original and brand new. 
In this tutorial, we’ll build a smaller version of this app – a symmetrical drawing tool in ES5, JavaScript and HTML5. The tutorial app will have eight reflections, a color picker and a Clear button. Once we’re done, you’re on your own and can tweak it as you please. Be creative!
Preparations: a blank canvas
The first thing you’ll need for this project is a designated drawing space. We’ll use the HTML5 canvas element and give it a width and a height of 600px (you can set the dimensions to anything else if you like).
Files
Create 3 files: index.html, styles.css, main.js. Don’t forget to include your JS and CSS files in your HTML. 
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
    <meta charset=""utf-8"">
    <link rel=""stylesheet"" type=""text/css"" href=""style.css"">
    <script src=""main.js""></script>
</head>
<body onload=""init()"">
    <canvas width=""600"" height=""600"">
        <p>Your browser doesn't support canvas.</p>
    </canvas>
</body>
</html>
I’ll ask you to update your HTML file at a later point, but the CSS file we’ll start with will stay the same throughout the project. This is the full CSS we are going to use:
body {
    background-color: #ccc;
    text-align: center;
}

canvas {
    touch-action: none;
    background-color: #fff;
}

button {
    font-size: 110%;
}
Next steps
We are done with our preparations and ready to move on to the actual tutorial, which is made up of 4 parts:

Building a simple drawing app with one line and one color 
Adding a Clear button and a color picker
Adding more functionality: 2 line drawing (add the first reflection)
Adding more functionality: 8 line drawing (add 6 more reflections!)

Interactive demos
This tutorial will be accompanied by four CodePens, one at the end of each section. In my own app I originally used mouse events, and only added touch events when I realized mobile device support was (A) possible, and (B) going to make my app way more accessible. For the sake of code simplicity, I decided that in this tutorial app I will only use one event type, so I picked a third option: pointer events. These are supported by some desktop browsers and some mobile browsers. An up-to-date version of Chrome is probably your best bet.
Part 1: A simple drawing app
Let’s get started with our main.js file. Our basic drawing app will be made up of 6 functions: init, drawLine, stopDrawing, recordPointerLocation, handlePointerMove, handlePointerDown. It also has nine variables:
var canvas, context, w, h,
    prevX = 0, currX = 0, prevY = 0, currY = 0,
    draw = false;
The variables canvas and context let us manipulate the canvas. w is the canvas width and h is the canvas height. The four coordinates are used for tracking the current and previous location of the pointer. A short line is drawn between (prevX, prevY) and (currX, currY) repeatedly many times while we move the pointer upon the canvas. For your drawing to appear, three conditions must be met: the pointer (be it a finger, a trackpad or a mouse) must be down, it must be moving and the movement has to be on the canvas. If these three conditions are met, the boolean draw is set to true. 
1. init
Responsible for canvas set up, this listens to pointer events and the location of their coordinates and sets everything in motion by calling other functions, which in turn handle touch and movement events. 
function init() {
    canvas = document.querySelector(""canvas"");
    context = canvas.getContext(""2d"");
    w = canvas.width;
    h = canvas.height;

    canvas.onpointermove = handlePointerMove;
    canvas.onpointerdown = handlePointerDown;
    canvas.onpointerup = stopDrawing;
    canvas.onpointerout = stopDrawing;
}
2. drawLine
This is called to action by handlePointerMove() and draws the pointer path. It only runs if draw = true. It uses canvas methods you can read about in the canvas API documentation. You can also learn to use the canvas element in this tutorial.
lineWidth and linecap set the properties of our paint brush, or digital pen, but pay attention to beginPath and closePath. Between those two is where the magic happens: moveTo and lineTo take canvas coordinates as arguments and draw from (a,b) to (c,d), which is to say from (prevX,prevY) to (currX,currY).
function drawLine() {
    var a = prevX,
        b = prevY,
        c = currX,
        d = currY;

    context.lineWidth = 4;
    context.lineCap = ""round"";

    context.beginPath();
    context.moveTo(a, b);
    context.lineTo(c, d);
    context.stroke();
    context.closePath();
}
3. stopDrawing
This is used by init when the pointer is not down (onpointerup) or is out of bounds (onpointerout).
function stopDrawing() {
    draw = false;
}
4. recordPointerLocation
This tracks the pointer’s location and stores its coordinates. Also, you need to know that in computer graphics the origin of the coordinate space (0,0) is at the top left corner, and all elements are positioned relative to it. When we use canvas we are dealing with two coordinate spaces: the browser window and the canvas itself. This function converts between the two: it subtracts the canvas offsetLeft and offsetTop so we can later treat the canvas as the only coordinate space. If you are confused, read more about it.
function recordPointerLocation(e) {
    prevX = currX;
    prevY = currY;
    currX = e.clientX - canvas.offsetLeft;
    currY = e.clientY - canvas.offsetTop;
}
5. handlePointerMove
This is set by init to run when the pointer moves. It checks if draw = true. If so, it calls recordPointerLocation to get the path and drawLine to draw it.
function handlePointerMove(e) {
    if (draw) {
        recordPointerLocation(e);
        drawLine();
    }
}
6. handlePointerDown
This is set by init to run when the pointer is down (finger is on touchscreen or mouse it clicked). If it is, calls recordPointerLocation to get the path and sets draw to true. That’s because we only want movement events from handlePointerMove to cause drawing if the pointer is down.
function handlePointerDown(e) {
    recordPointerLocation(e);
    draw = true;
}
Finally, we have a working drawing app. But that’s just the beginning!
See the Pen Mandala Maker Tutorial: Part 1 by Hagar Shilo (@hagarsh) on CodePen.

Part 2: Add a Clear button and a color picker
Now we’ll update our HTML file, adding a menu div with an input of the type and class color and a button of the class clear.
<body onload=""init()"">
    <canvas width=""600"" height=""600"">
        <p>Your browser doesn't support canvas.</p>
    </canvas>
    <div class=""menu"">
        <input type=""color"" class=""color"" />
        <button type=""button"" class=""clear"">Clear</button>
    </div>
</body>
Color picker
This is our new color picker function. It targets the input element by its class and gets its value. 
function getColor() {
    return document.querySelector("".color"").value;
}
Up until now, the app used a default color (black) for the paint brush/digital pen. If we want to change the color we need to use the canvas property strokeStyle. We’ll update drawLine by adding strokeStyle to it and setting it to the input value by calling getColor.
function drawLine() {
    //...code...  
    context.strokeStyle = getColor();
    context.lineWidth = 4;
    context.lineCap = ""round"";

    //...code...  
}
Clear button
This is our new Clear function. It responds to a button click and displays a dialog asking the user if she really wants to delete the drawing.
function clearCanvas() {
    if (confirm(""Want to clear?"")) {
        context.clearRect(0, 0, w, h);
    }
}
The method clearRect takes four arguments. The first two (0,0) mark the origin, which is actually the top left corner of the canvas. The other two (w,h) mark the full width and height of the canvas. This means the entire canvas will be erased, from the top left corner to the bottom right corner. 
If we were to give clearRect a slightly different set of arguments, say (0,0,w/2,h), the result would be different. In this case, only the left side of the canvas would clear up.
Let’s add this event handler to init:
function init() {
    //...code...
    canvas.onpointermove = handleMouseMove;
    canvas.onpointerdown = handleMouseDown;
    canvas.onpointerup = stopDrawing;
    canvas.onpointerout = stopDrawing;
    document.querySelector("".clear"").onclick = clearCanvas;
}
See the Pen Mandala Maker Tutorial: Part 2 by Hagar Shilo (@hagarsh) on CodePen.

Part 3: Draw with 2 lines
It’s time to make a line appear where no pointer has gone before. A ghost line! 
For that we are going to need four new coordinates: a', b', c' and d' (marked in the code as a_, b_, c_ and d_). In order for us to be able to add the first reflection, first we must decide if it’s going to go over the y-axis or the x-axis. Since this is an arbitrary decision, it doesn’t matter which one we choose. Let’s go with the x-axis. 
Here is a sketch to help you grasp the mathematics of reflecting a point across the x-axis. The coordinate space in my sketch is different from my explanation earlier about the way the coordinate space works in computer graphics (more about that in a bit!). 
Now, look at A. It shows a point drawn where the pointer hits, and B shows the additional point we want to appear: a reflection of the point across the x-axis. This is our goal.
A sketch illustrating the mathematics of reflecting a point.
What happens to the x coordinates?
The variables a/a' and c/c' correspond to prevX and currX respectively, so we can call them “the x coordinates”. We are reflecting across x, so their values remain the same, and therefore a' = a and c' = c. 
What happens to the y coordinates?
What about b' and d'? Those are the ones that have to change, but in what way? Thanks to the slightly misleading sketch I showed you just now (of A and B), you probably think that the y coordinates b' and d' should get the negative values of b and d respectively, but nope. This is computer graphics, remember? The origin is at the top left corner and not at the canvas center, and therefore we get the following values: b = h - b, d' = h - d, where h is the canvas height.
This is the new code for the app’s variables and the two lines: the one that fills the pointer’s path and the one mirroring it across the x-axis.
function drawLine() {
    var a = prevX, a_ = a,
        b = prevY, b_ = h-b,
        c = currX, c_ = c,
        d = currY, d_ = h-d;

    //... code ...

    // Draw line #1, at the pointer's location
    context.moveTo(a, b);
    context.lineTo(c, d);

    // Draw line #2, mirroring the line #1
    context.moveTo(a_, b_);
    context.lineTo(c_, d_);

    //... code ...
}
In case this was too abstract for you, let’s look at some actual numbers to see how this works.
Let’s say we have a tiny canvas of w = h = 10. Now let a = 3, b = 2, c = 4 and d = 3.
So b' = 10 - 2 = 8 and d' = 10 - 3 = 7.
We use the top and the left as references. For the y coordinates this means we count from the top, and 8 from the top is also 2 from the bottom. Similarly, 7 from the top is 3 from the bottom of the canvas. That’s it, really. This is how the single point, and a line (not necessarily a straight one, by the way) is made up of many, many small segments that are similar to point in behavior.
If you are still confused, I don’t blame you. 
Here is the result. Draw something and see what happens.
See the Pen Mandala Maker Tutorial: Part 3 by Hagar Shilo (@hagarsh) on CodePen.

Part 4: Draw with 8 lines
I have made yet another confusing sketch, with points C and D, so you understand what we’re trying to do. Later on we’ll look at points E, F, G and H as well. The circled point is the one we’re adding at each particular step. The circled point at C has the coordinates (-3,2) and the circled point at D has the coordinates (-3,-2). Once again, keep in mind that the origin in the sketches is not the same as the origin of the canvas. 
A sketch illustrating points C and D.
This is the part where the math gets a bit mathier, as our drawLine function evolves further. We’ll keep using the four new coordinates: a', b', c' and d', and reassign their values for each new location/line. Let’s add two more lines in two new locations on the canvas. Their locations relative to the first two lines are exactly what you see in the sketch above, though the calculation required is different (because of the origin points being different).
function drawLine() {

    //... code ... 

    // Reassign values
    a_ = w-a; b_ = b;
    c_ = w-c; d_ = d;

    // Draw the 3rd line
    context.moveTo(a_, b_);
    context.lineTo(c_, d_);

    // Reassign values
    a_ = w-a; b_ = h-b;
    c_ = w-c; d_ = h-d;

    // Draw the 4th line
    context.moveTo(a_, b_);
    context.lineTo(c_, d_);

    //... code ... 
What is happening?
You might be wondering why we use w and h as separate variables, even though we know they have the same value. Why complicate the code this way for no apparent reason? That’s because we want the symmetry to hold for a rectangular canvas as well, and this way it will. 
Also, you may have noticed that the values of a' and c' are not reassigned when the fourth line is created. Why write their value assignments twice? It’s for readability, documentation and communication. Maintaining the quadruple structure in the code is meant to help you remember that all the while we are dealing with two y coordinates (current and previous) and two x coordinates (current and previous). 
What happens to the x coordinates?
As you recall, our x coordinates are a (prevX) and c (currX).
For the third line we are adding, a' = w - a and c' = w - c, which means…
For the fourth line, the same thing happens to our x coordinates a and c.
What happens to the y coordinates?
As you recall, our y coordinates are b (prevY) and d (currY).
For the third line we are adding, b' = b and d' = d, which means the y coordinates are the ones not changing this time, making this is a reflection across the y-axis. 
For the fourth line, b' = h - b and d' = h - d, which we’ve seen before: that’s a reflection across the x-axis.
We have four more lines, or locations, to define. Note: the part of the code that’s responsible for drawing a micro-line between the newly calculated coordinates is always the same:
    context.moveTo(a_, b_);
    context.lineTo(c_, d_);
We can leave it out of the next code snippets and just focus on the calculations, i.e, the reassignments. 
Once again, we need some concrete examples to see where we’re going, so here’s another sketch! The circled point E has the coordinates (2,3) and the circled point F has the coordinates (2,-3). The ability to draw at A but also make the drawing appear at E and F (in addition to B, C and D that we already dealt with) is the functionality we are about to add to out code.
A sketch illustrating points E and F.
This is the code for E and F:
    // Reassign for 5
    a_ = w/2+h/2-b; b_ = w/2+h/2-a;
    c_ = w/2+h/2-d; d_ = w/2+h/2-c;

    // Reassign for 6
    a_ = w/2+h/2-b; b_ = h/2-w/2+a;
    c_ = w/2+h/2-d; d_ = h/2-w/2+c;
Their x coordinates are identical and their y coordinates are reversed to one another.
This one will be out final sketch. The circled point G has the coordinates (-2,3) and the circled point H has the coordinates (-2,-3).
A sketch illustrating points G and H.
This is the code:
    // Reassign for 7
    a_ = w/2-h/2+b; b_ = w/2+h/2-a;
    c_ = w/2-h/2+d; d_ = w/2+h/2-c;

    // Reassign for 8
    a_ = w/2-h/2+b; b_ = h/2-w/2+a;
    c_ = w/2-h/2+d; d_ = h/2-w/2+c;
    //...code...  
}
Once again, the x coordinates of these two points are the same, while the y coordinates are different. And once again I won’t go into the full details, since this has been a long enough journey as it is, and I think we’ve covered all the important principles. But feel free to play around with the code and change it. I really recommend commenting out the code for some of the points to see what your drawing looks like without them.
I hope you had fun learning! This is our final app:
See the Pen Mandala Maker Tutorial: Part 4 by Hagar Shilo (@hagarsh) on CodePen.",2018,Hagar Shilo,hagarshilo,2018-12-02T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2018/the-art-of-mathematics/,code
230,The Articulate Web Designer of Tomorrow,"You could say that we design to communicate, and that we seek emotive responses. It sounds straightforward, and it can be, but leaving it to chance isn’t wise. Many wander into web design without formal training, and whilst that certainly isn’t essential, we owe it to ourselves to draw on wider influences, learn from the past, and think smarter.

What knowledge can we ourselves explore in order to become better designers? In addition, how can we take this knowledge, investigate it through our unique discipline, and in turn speak more eloquently about what we do on the web? Below, I outline a number of things that I personally believe all designers should be using and exploring collectively.

Taking stock

Where we’re at is good. Finding clarity through web standards, we’ve ended up quite modernist in our approach, pursuing function, elegance and reduction. However, we’re not great at articulating our own design processes and principles to outsiders. Equally, we rely heavily on our instincts when deciding if something is or isn’t good. That’s fine, but we can better understand why things are the way they are by looking a little deeper, thereby helping us articulate what goes on in our design brains to our peers, our clients and to normal humans.

As designers we use ideas, concepts, text and images. We apply our ideas and experience, imposing order and structure to content, hoping to ease the communication of an idea to the largest possible audience or to a specific audience. We consciously manipulate most of what is available to us, but not all. There is something else we can use. I often think that brilliant work demands a keen understanding of the magical visual language that informs design.

Embracing an established visual language

This is a language whose alphabet is shapes, structures, colours, lines and rhythms. When effective, it is somewhat invisible, subliminally enforcing messages and evoking meaning, using methods solidly rooted in a grammar perceptible in virtually all extraordinary creative work. The syntax for art, architecture, film, and furniture, industrial and graphic design (think Bauhaus and the Swiss style perhaps), this language urges us to become fluent if we aim for a more powerful dialogue with our audience.

 Figure 1: Structures (clockwise from top-left): Informal; Formal; Active; Visible.

The greatest creative minds our world has produced could understand some or all of this language. Line and point, form and shape. Abstract objects. Formal and informal structures. Visual distribution. Balance, composition and the multitudinous approaches to symmetry. Patterns and texture. Movement and paths. Repetition, rhythm and frequency. Colour theory. Whitespace and the pause. The list goes on.

The genius we perceive in our creative heroes is often a composite of experience, trial and error, conviction, intuition – even accident – but rarely does great work arise without an initial understanding of the nuts and bolts that help communicate an idea or emotion.

Our world of interactivity

As web designers, our connection with this language is most evident in graphic design. With more technological ease and power comes the responsibility to understand, wisely use, and be able to justify many of our decisions. We have moved beyond the scope of print into a world of interactivity, but we shouldn’t let go of any established principles without good reason.

 Figure 2: Understanding movement of objects in any direction along a defined path.

For example, immersion in this visual language can improve our implementation of CSS3 and JavaScript behaviour. With CSS3, we’ve seen a resurgence in CSS experimentation, some of which has been wonderful, but much of it has appeared clumsy. In the race to make something spin, twist, flip or fly from one corner to another, the designer sometimes fails to think about the true movement they seek to emulate. What forces are supposedly affecting this movement? What is the expected path of this transition and is it being respected?

Stopping to think about what is really supposed to be happening on the page compels us to use complex animations, diagrams and rotations more carefully. It helps us to better understand paths and movement.

 Figure 3: Repetition can occur through variations in colour, shape, direction, and so on.

It can only be of greater benefit to be mindful of symmetries, depth, affordance, juxtaposition, balance, economy and reduction. A deeper understanding of basic structures can help us to say more with sketches, wireframes, layouts and composition. We’ve all experimented with grids and rhythm but, to truly benefit from these long-established principles, we are duty-bound to understand their possibilities more than we will by simply leveraging a free framework or borrowing some CSS.

Design is not a science, but…

Threading through all of this is what we have learned from science, and what it teaches us of the human brain. This visual language matters because technology changes but, for the most part, people don’t. For centuries, we humans have received and interpreted information in much the same way. Understanding more of how we perceive meaning can help designers make smarter decisions, and call on visual language to underpin these decisions. It is our responsibility as designers to be aware of mental models, mapping, semiotics, sensory experience and human emotion.

Design itself is not a science, but the appropriate use of visual language and scientific understanding exposes the line between effective and awkward, between communicative and mute. By strengthening our mental and analytical approach to what is often done arbitrarily or “because it feels right”, we simply become better designers.

A visual language for the web

So, I’ve outlined numerous starting points and areas worthy of deeper investigation, and hopefully you’re eager to do some research. However, I’ve mostly discussed established ideas and principles that we as web designers can learn from. It’s my belief that our community has a shared responsibility to expand this visual language as it applies to the ebb and flow of the web. Indulge me as I conclude with a related tangent.

In defining a visual language specifically for the web, we must continue to mature. The old powerfully influences the new, but we must intelligently expand the visual language of masterful work and articulate what is uniquely ours.

For example, phrases like Ethan Marcotte’s Responsive Web Design aren’t merely elegant, they describe a new way of thinking and working, of communicating about designs and interaction patterns. These phrases broaden our vocabulary and are immediately adopted by designers worldwide, in both conversation and execution.

Our legacy

Our new definitions should flex and not be tied to specific devices or methods which fade away or morph with time. Our legacy is perhaps more about robust and flexible patterns and systems than it is about specific devices or programming languages.

 Figure 4: As web designers, we should think about systems, not pages.

The established principles we adopt and whatever new ways of thinking we define should slip neatly into a wider philosophy about our approach to web design. We’re called, as a community, to define what is distinctive about the visual language of the web, create this vocabulary, this dialect that resonates with us and moves us forward as we tackle each day’s work. Let’s give it some thought.

Further reading

This is my immediate “go-to” list of books that I bullishly believe all web designers should own, but there is so much more out there to read. Sadly, many great texts relating to this stuff are often out of print. Feel free to share your recommendations.


	Don Norman, The Design of Everyday Things
	Christian Leborg, Visual Grammar
	Scott McCloud, Understanding Comics
	David Crow, Visible Signs
	William Lidwell and Katrina Holden, Universal Principles of Design",2010,Simon Collison,simoncollison,2010-12-16T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2010/the-articulate-web-designer-of-tomorrow/,process
333,The Attribute Selector for Fun and (no ad) Profit,"If I had a favourite CSS selector, it would undoubtedly be the attribute selector (Ed: You really need to get out more). For those of you not familiar with the attribute selector, it allows you to style an element based on the existence, value or partial value of a specific attribute.

At it’s very basic level you could use this selector to style an element with particular attribute, such as a title attribute.

<abbr title=""Cascading Style Sheets"">CSS</abbr>

In this example I’m going to make all <abbr> elements with a title attribute grey. I am also going to give them a dotted bottom border that changes to a solid border on hover. Finally, for that extra bit of feedback, I will change the cursor to a question mark on hover as well. 

abbr[title] {
     color: #666;
     border-bottom: 1px dotted #666;
 }

 abbr[title]:hover {
     border-bottom-style: solid;
     cursor: help;
 }

This provides a nice way to show your site users that <abbr> elements with title tags are special, as they contain extra, hidden information.

Most modern browsers such as Firefox, Safari and Opera support the attribute selector. Unfortunately Internet Explorer 6 and below does not support the attribute selector, but that shouldn’t stop you from adding nice usability embellishments to more modern browsers.

Internet Explorer 7 looks set to implement this CSS2.1 selector, so expect to see it become more common over the next few years.

Styling an element based on the existence of an attribute is all well and good, but it is still pretty limited. Where attribute selectors come into their own is their ability to target the value of an attribute. You can use this for a variety of interesting effects such as styling VoteLinks.

VoteWhats?

If you haven’t heard of VoteLinks, it is a microformat that allows people to show their approval or disapproval of a links destination by adding a pre-defined keyword to the rev attribute.

For instance, if you had a particularly bad meal at a restaurant, you could signify your dissaproval by adding a rev attribute with a value of vote-against.

<a href=""http://www.mommacherri.co.uk/"" rev=""vote-against"">Momma Cherri's</a>

You could then highlight these links by adding an image to the right of these links.

a[rev=""vote-against""]{
     padding-right: 20px;
     background: url(images/vote-against.png) no-repeat right top;
}

This is a useful technique, but it will only highlight VoteLinks on sites you control. This is where user stylesheets come into effect. If you create a user stylesheet containing this rule, every site you visit that uses VoteLinks will receive your new style.

Cool huh?

However my absolute favourite use for attribute selectors is as a lightweight form of ad blocking. Most online adverts conform to industry-defined sizes. So if you wanted to block all banner-ad sized images, you could simply add this line of code to your user stylesheet.

img[width=""468""][height=""60""],
img[width=""468px""][height=""60px""]  {
     display: none !important;
}

To hide any banner-ad sized element, such as flash movies, applets or iFrames, simply apply the above rule to every element using the universal selector.

*[width=""468""][height=""60""], *[width=""468px""][height=""60px""]  {
     display: none !important;
}

Just bare in mind when using this technique that you may accidentally hide something that isn’t actually an advert; it just happens to be the same size.

The Interactive Advertising Bureau lists a number of common ad sizes. Using these dimensions, you can create stylesheet that blocks all the popular ad formats. Apply this as a user stylesheet and you never need to suffer another advert again.

Here’s wishing you a Merry, ad-free Christmas.",2005,Andy Budd,andybudd,2005-12-11T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2005/the-attribute-selector-for-fun-and-no-ad-profit/,code
14,The Command Position Principle,"Living where I do, in a small village in rural North Wales, getting anywhere means driving along narrow country roads. Most of these are just about passable when two cars meet. 

If you’re driving too close to the centre of the road, when two drivers meet you stop, glare at each other and no one goes anywhere. Drive too close to your nearside and in summer you’ll probably scratch your paintwork on the hedgerows, or in winter you’ll sink your wheels into mud. 

Driving these lanes requires a balance between caring for your own vehicle and consideration for someone else’s, but all too often, I’ve seen drivers pushed towards the hedgerows and mud when someone who’s inconsiderate drives too wide because they don’t want to risk scratching their own paintwork or getting their wheels dirty.

If you learn to ride a motorcycle, you’ll be taught about the command position:


	Approximate central position, or any position from which the rider can exert control over invitation space either side.


The command position helps motorcyclists stay safe, because when they ride in the centre of their lane it prevents other people, usually car drivers, from driving alongside, either forcing them into the curb or potentially dangerously close to oncoming traffic. 

Taking the command position isn’t about motorcyclists being aggressive, it’s about them being confident. It’s them knowing their rightful place on the road and communicating that through how they ride.

I’ve recently been trying to take that command position when driving my car on our lanes. When I see someone coming in the opposite direction, instead of instinctively moving closer to my nearside — and in so doing subconsciously invite them into my space on the road — I hold both my nerve and a central position in my lane. Since I done this I’ve noticed that other drivers more often than not stay in their lane or pull closer to their nearside so we occupy equal space on the road. Although we both still need to watch our wing mirrors, neither of us gets our paint scratched or our wheels muddy.

We can apply this principle to business too, in particular to negotiations and the way we sell. Here’s how we might do that.

Commanding negotiations

When a customer’s been sold to well — more on that in just a moment — and they’ve made the decision to buy, the thing that usually stands in the way of us doing business is a negotiation over price. Some people treat negotiations as the equivalent of driving wide. They act offensively, because their aim is to force the other person into getting less, usually in return for giving more.

In encounters like this, it’s easy for us to act defensively. We might lack confidence in the price we ask for, or the value of the product or service we offer. We might compromise too early because of that. When that happens, there’s a pretty good chance that we’ll drive away with less than we deserve unless we use the command position principle to help us.

Before we start any negotiation it’s important to know that both sides ultimately want to reach an agreement. This isn’t always obvious. If one side isn’t already committed, at least in principle, then it’s not a negotiation at that point, it’s something else. 

For example, a prospective customer may be looking to learn our lowest price so that they can compare it to our competitors. When that’s the case, we’ve probably failed to qualify that prospect properly as, after all, who wants to be chosen simply because they’re the cheapest? In this situation, negotiating is a waste of time since we don’t yet know that it will result in us making a deal. We should enter into a negotiation only when we know where we stand. So ask confidently: “Are you looking to [make a decision]?”

When that’s been confirmed, it’s down to everyone to compromise until a deal’s been reached. That’s because good negotiations aren’t about one side beating the other, they’re about achieving a good deal for both. Using the command position principle helps us to maintain control over our negotiating space and affords us the opportunity to give ground only if we need to and only when we’re ready. It can also ensure that the person we’re negotiating with gives up some of their space.

Commanding sales

It’s not always necessary to negotiate when we’re doing a business deal, but we should always be prepared to sell. One of the most important parts of our sales process should be controlling when and how we tell someone our price. 

Unless it’s impossible to avoid, don’t work out a price for someone on the spot. When we do that we lose control over the time and place for presenting our price alongside the value factors that will contribute to the prospective customer accepting that price. For the same reason, never give a ballpark or, worse, a guesstimate figure. If the question of price comes up before we’re fully prepared, we should say politely that we need more time to work out a meaningful cost. 

When we are ready, we shouldn’t email a price for our prospective customer to read unaccompanied. Instead, create an opportunity to talk a prospect through our figures, demonstrate how we arrived at them and, most importantly, explain the value of what we’re selling to their business. Agree a time and place to do this and, if possible, do it all face-to-face.  

We shouldn’t hesitate when we give someone a price. When we sound even the slightest bit unsure or apologetic, we give the impression that we’ll be flexible in our position before negotiations have even begun.

Think about the command position principle, know the price and present it confidently. That way we send a clear signal that we know our business and how we deal with people. The command position principle isn’t about being cocky, it’s about showing other people respect, asking for it in return and showing it to ourselves.

 

Earlier, I mentioned selling well, because we sometimes hear people say that they dislike being sold to. In my experience, it’s not that people dislike the sales process, it’s that we dislike it done badly.

Taking part in a good sales process, either by selling or being sold to, can be a pleasurable experience. Try to be confident — after all, we understand how our skills will benefit a customer better than anyone else. Our confidence will inspire confidence in others. 

Self-confidence isn’t the same as arrogance, just as the command position isn’t the same as riding without consideration for others. The command position principle preserves others’ space as well as our own. By the same token, we should be considerate of others’ time and not waste it and our own by attempting to force them into buying something that’s inappropriate.

To prevent this from happening, evaluate them well to ensure that they’re the right customer for us. If they’re not, let them go on their way. They’ll thank us for it and may well become customers the next time we meet.

The business of closing a deal can be made an enjoyable experience for everyone if we take control by guiding someone through the sales process by asking the right questions to uncover their concerns, then allaying them by being knowledgeable and confident. This is riding in the command position.

Just like demonstrating we know our rightful position on the road, knowing our rightful place in a business relationship and communicating that through how we deal with people will help everyone achieve an equitable balance. When that happens in business, as well as on the road, no one gets their paintwork scratched or their wheels muddy.",2013,Andy Clarke,andyclarke,2013-12-23T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2013/the-command-position-principle/,business
172,The Construction of Instruction,"If the world were made to my specifications, all your clients would be happy to pay for a web writer to craft every sentence into something as elegant as it was functional, and the client would have planned the content so that you had it just when you asked, but we both know that won’t happen every time. Sometimes you just know they are going to write the About page, two company blog pages and a Facebook fan page before resigning their position as chief content writer and you are going to end up filling in all the details that will otherwise just be Lorem Ipsum.

Welcome to the big world of microcopy:


	A man walks into a bar. The bartender nods a greeting and watches as the man scans the bottles behind the bar. 
“Er, you have a lot of gin here. Is there one you would recommend?” 
“Yes sir.”
Long pause. 
“… Never mind, I’ll have the one in the green bottle.” 
“Certainly, sir. But you can’t buy it from this part of the bar. You need to go through the double doors there.” 
“But they look like they lead into the kitchen.” 
“Really, sir? Well, no, that’s where we allow customers to purchase gin.” 
The man walks through the doors. On the other side he is greeted by the same bartender. 
“Y-you!” he stammers but the reticent bartender is now all but silent. 
Unnerved, the man points to a green bottle, “Er, I’d like to buy a shot of that please. With ice and tonic water.” 
The bartender mixes the drink and puts it on the bar just out of the reach of the man and looks up. 
“Um, do you take cards?” the man asks, ready to present his credit card. 
The bartender goes to take the card to put it through the machine. 
“Wait! How much was it – with sales tax and everything? Do you take a gratuity?” 
The bartender simply shrugs. 
The man eyes him for a moment and decides to try his luck at the bar next door.


In the Choose Your Own Adventure version of this story there are plenty of ways to stop the man giving up. You could let him buy the gin right where he was; you could make the price more obvious; you could signpost the place to buy gin. The mistakes made by the bar and bartender are painfully obvious. And yet, there are websites losing users everyday due to the same lack of clear instruction.

A smidgen of well written copy goes a long way to reassure the nervous prospect. Just imagine if our man walked into the bar and the bartender explained that although the bar was here, sales were conducted in the next room because people were not then able to overhear the man’s card details. Instead, he is left to fend for himself. Online, we kick customers through the anonymous double doors with a merry ‘Paypal will handle your transaction!’.

Recently I worked on a site where the default error message, to account for anything happening that the developers hadn’t accounted for, was ‘SOMETHING HAS GONE WRONG!’. It might have been technically accurate but this is not how to inspire confidence in your customers that they can make a successful purchase through you. As everyone knows they can shop just fine, thank you very much, it is your site they will blame. Card declined? It’s the site. Didn’t know my email address has changed? It’s the site. Can’t log in? It’s the site.

Yes, yes. I know. None of these things are related to your site, or you the developer, but drop outs will be high and you’ll get imploring emails from your client asking you to wade knee deep into the site analytics to find a solution by testing 41 shades of blue because if it worked for Google…? Before you try a visual fix involving the Dulux paint chart breeding with a Pantone swatch, take an objective look at the information you are giving customers. How much are you assuming they know? How much are you relying on age-old labels and prompts without clarification?

Here’s a fun example for non-North Americans: ask your Granny to write out her billing address. If she looks at you blankly, tell her it is the address where the bank sends her statements. Imagine how many fewer instances of the wrong address there would be if we routinely added that information when people purchased from the UK? Instead, we rely on a language convention that hasn’t much common usage without explanation because, well, because we always have since the banks told us how we could take payments online.

So. Your client is busying themselves with writing the ultimate Facebook fan page about themselves and here you are left with creating a cohesive signup process or basket or purchase instructions. Here are five simple rules for bending puny humans to your will creating instructive instructions and constructive error messages that ultimately mean less hassle for you.

Plan what you want to say and plan it out as early as possible 

This goes for all content. Walk a virtual mile in the shoes of your users. What specific help can you offer customers to actively encourage continuation and ensure a minimal amount of dropouts? Make space for that information. One of the most common web content mistakes is jamming too much into a space that has been defined by physical boundaries rather than planned out. If you manage it, the best you can hope for is that no-one notices it was a last-minute job. Mostly it reads like a bad game of Tetris with content sticking out all over the place.

Use your words

Microcopy often says a lot in a few words but without those words you could leave room for doubt. When doubt creeps in a customer wants reassurance just like Alice:


	This time (Alice) found a little bottle… with the words ‘DRINK ME’ beautifully printed on it in large letters. It was all very well to say ‘Drink me,’ but the wise little Alice was not going to do that in a hurry. ‘No, I’ll look first,’ she said, ‘and see whether it’s marked “poison” or not’


Alice in Wonderland, Lewis Carroll.

Value clarity over brevity. Or a little more prosaically, “If in doubt, spell it out.” Thanks, Jeremy!

Be prepared to help


	‘Login failed: email/password combination is incorrect.’


Oh.


	‘Login failed: email/password combination is incorrect. 
Are you typing in all capitals? Caps Lock may be on. 
Have you changed your email address recently and not updated your account with us? Try your old email address first. 
Can’t remember your password? We can help you reset it.’ 


Ah!

Be direct and be informative

There is rarely a site that doesn’t suffer from some degree of jargon. Squash it early by setting a few guidelines about what language and tone of voice you will use to converse with your users. Be consistent. Equally, try to be as specific as possible when giving error messages or instructions and allay fears upfront.

Card payments are handled by paypal but you do not need a paypal account to pay.

We will not display your email address but we might need it to contact you.

Sign up for our free trial (no credit card required).

Combine copy and visual cues, learn from others and test new combinations

While visual design and copy can work independently, they work best together. New phrases and designs are being tested all the time so take a peek at abtests.com for more ideas, then test some new ideas and add your own results. Have a look at the microcopy pool on Flickr for some wonderful examples of little words and pictures working together. And yes, you absolutely should join the group and post more examples.


	A man walks into a bar. The bartender greets him in a friendly manner and asks him what he would like to drink. 
“Gin and Tonic, please.” 
“Yes sir, we have our house gin on offer but we also have a particularly good import here too.”
“The import, please.” 
“How would you like it? With a slice of lemon? Over ice?” 
“Both” 
“That’s £3.80. We accept cash, cards or you could open a tab.” 
“Card please.” 
“Certainly sir. Move just over here so that you can’t be observed. Now, please enter your pin number.” 
“Thank you.” 
“And here is your drink. Do let me know if there is a problem with it. I shall just be here at the bar. Enjoy.”


Cheers!",2009,Relly Annett-Baker,rellyannettbaker,2009-12-08T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2009/the-construction-of-instruction/,content
117,The First Tool You Reach For,"Microsoft recently announced that Internet Explorer 8 will be released in the first half of 2009. Compared to the standards support of other major browsers, IE8 will not be especially great, but it will finally catch up with the state of the art in one specific area: support for CSS tables. This milestone has the potential to trigger an important change in the way you approach web design.

To show you just how big a difference CSS tables can make, think about how you might code a fluid, three-column layout from scratch. Just to make your life more difficult, give it one fixed-width column, with a background colour that differs from the rest of the page. Ready? Go!

Okay, since you’re the sort of discerning web designer who reads 24ways, I’m going to assume you at least considered doing this without using HTML tables for the layout. If you’re especially hardcore, I imagine you began thinking of CSS floats, negative margins, and faux columns. If you did, colour me impressed!

Now admit it: you probably also gave an inward sigh about the time it would take to figure out the math on the negative margin overlaps, check for dropped floats in Internet Explorer and generally wrestle each of the major browsers into giving you what you want. If after all that you simply gave up and used HTML tables, I can’t say I blame you.

There are plenty of professional web designers out there who still choose to use HTML tables as their main layout tool. Sure, they may know that users with screen readers get confused by inappropriate use of tables, but they have a job to do, and they want tools that will make that job easy, not difficult.

Now let me show you how to do it with CSS tables. First, we have a div element for each of our columns, and we wrap them all in another two divs:

<div class=""container"">
	<div>
		<div id=""menu"">
		⋮
		</div>
		<div id=""content"">
		⋮
		</div>
		<div id=""sidebar"">
		⋮
		</div>
	</div>
</div>

Don’t sweat the “div clutter” in this code. Unlike tables, divs have no semantic meaning, and can therefore be used liberally (within reason) to provide hooks for the styles you want to apply to your page.

Using CSS, we can set the outer div to display as a table with collapsed borders (i.e. adjacent cells share a border) and a fixed layout (i.e. cell widths unaffected by their contents):

.container {
	display: table;
	border-collapse: collapse;
	table-layout: fixed;
}

With another two rules, we set the middle div to display as a table row, and each of the inner divs to display as table cells:

.container > div {
	display: table-row;
}
.container > div > div {
	display: table-cell;
}

Finally, we can set the widths of the cells (and of the table itself) directly:

.container {
	width: 100%;
}
#menu {
	width: 200px;
}
#content {
	width: auto;
}
#sidebar {
	width: 25%;
}

And, just like that, we have a rock solid three-column layout, ready to be styled to your own taste, like in this example:



This example will render perfectly in reasonably up-to-date versions of Firefox, Safari and Opera, as well as the current beta release of Internet Explorer 8.

CSS tables aren’t only useful for multi-column page layout; they can come in handy in most any situation that calls for elements to be displayed side-by-side on the page. Consider this simple login form layout:



The incantation required to achieve this layout using CSS floats may be old hat to you by now, but try to teach it to a beginner, and watch his eyes widen in horror at the hoops you have to jump through (not to mention the assumptions you have to build into your design about the length of the form labels).

Here’s how to do it with CSS tables:

<form action=""/login"" method=""post"">
	<div>
		<div>
			<label for=""username"">Username:</label>
			<span class=""input""><input type=""text"" name=""username"" id=""username""/></span>
		</div>
		<div>
			<label for=""userpass"">Password:</label>
			<span class=""input""><input type=""password"" name=""userpass"" id=""userpass""/></span>
		</div>
		<div class=""submit"">
			<label for=""login""></label>
			<span class=""input""><input type=""submit"" name=""login"" id=""login"" value=""Login""/></span>
		</div>
	</div>
</form>

This time, we’re using a mixture of divs and spans as semantically transparent styling hooks. Let’s look at the CSS code.

First, we set up the outer div to display as a table, the inner divs to display as table rows, and the labels and spans as table cells (with right-aligned text):

form > div {
	display: table;
}
form > div > div {
	display: table-row;
}
form label,
form span {
	display: table-cell;
	text-align: right;
}

We want the first column of the table to be wide enough to accommodate our labels, but no wider. With CSS float techniques, we had to guess at what that width was likely to be, and adjust it whenever we changed our form labels. With CSS tables, we can simply set the width of the first column to something very small (1em), and then use the white-space property to force the column to the required width:

form label {
	white-space: nowrap;
	width: 1em;
}

To polish off the layout, we’ll make our text and password fields occupy the full width of the table cells that contain them:

input[type=text],
input[type=password] {
	width: 100%;
}

The rest is margins, padding and borders to get the desired look. Check out the finished example.

As the first tool you reach for when approaching any layout task, CSS tables make a lot more sense to your average designer than the cryptic incantations called for by CSS floats. When IE8 is released and all major browsers support CSS tables, we can begin to gradually deploy CSS table-based layouts on sites that are more and more mainstream.

In our new book, Everything You Know About CSS Is Wrong!, Rachel Andrew and I explore in much greater detail how CSS tables work as a page layout tool in the real world. CSS tables have their quirks just like floats do, but they don’t tend to affect common layout tasks, and the workarounds tend to be less fiddly too. Check it out, and get ready for the next big step forward in web design with CSS.",2008,Kevin Yank,kevinyank,2008-12-13T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2008/the-first-tool-you-reach-for/,code
228,The Great Unveiling,"The moment of unveiling our designs should be among our proudest, but it never seems to work out that way. Instead of a chance to show how we can bring our clients’ visions to life, critique can be a tense, worrying ordeal. And yes, the stakes are high: a superb design is only superb if it goes live. Mismanage the feedback process and your research, creativity and hard work can be wasted, and your client may wonder whether you’ve been worth the investment.

The great unveiling is a pivotal part of the design process, but it needn’t be a negative one. Just as usability testing teaches us whether our designs meet user needs, presenting our work to clients tells us whether we’ve met important business goals. So how can we turn the tide to make presenting designs a constructive experience, and to give good designs a chance to shine through?

Timing is everything

First, consider when you should seek others’ opinions. Your personal style will influence whether you show early sketches or wait to demonstrate something more complete. Some designers thrive at low fidelity, sketching out ideas that, despite their rudimentary nature, easily spark debate. Other designers take time to create more fully-realised versions. Some even argue that the great unveiling should be eliminated altogether by working directly alongside the client throughout, collaborating on the design to reach its full potential. 

Whatever your individual preference, you’ll rarely have the chance to do it entirely your own way. Contracts, clients, and deadlines will affect how early and often you share your work. However, try to avoid the trap of presenting too late and at too high fidelity. My experience has taught me that skilled designers tend to present their work earlier and allow longer for iteration than novices do. More aware of the potential flaws in their solutions, these designers cling less tightly to their initial efforts. Working roughly and seeking early feedback gives you the flexibility to respond more fully to nuances you may have missed until now.

Planning design reviews

Present design ideas face-to-face, or at least via video conference. Asynchronous methods like e-mail and Basecamp are slow, easily ignored, and deny you the opportunity to guide your colleagues through your work. In person, you profit from both the well-known benefits of non-verbal communication, and the chance to immediately respond to questions and elaborate on rationale.

Be sure to watch the numbers at your design review sessions, however. Any more than a handful of attendees and the meeting could quickly spiral into fruitless debate. Ask your project sponsor to appoint a representative to speak on behalf of each business function, rather than inviting too many cooks.

Where possible, show your work in its native format. Photocopy hand-drawn sketches to reinforce their disposability (the defining quality of a sketch) and encourage others to scribble their own thoughts on top. Show digital deliverables – wireframes, design concepts, rich interactions – on screen. The experience of a design is very different on screen than on paper. A monitor has appropriate dimensions and viewport size, presenting an accurate picture of the design’s visual hierarchy, and putting interactive elements in the right context. On paper, a link is merely underlined text. On screen, it is another step along the user’s journey.

Don’t waste time presenting multiple concepts. Not only is it costly to work up multiple concepts to the level required for fair appraisal, but the practice demonstrates a sorry abdication of responsibility. Designers should be custodians of design. Asking for feedback on multiple designs turns the critique process into a beauty pageant, relinquishing a designer’s authority. Instead of rational choices that meet genuine user and business needs, you may be stuck with a Frankensteinian monstrosity, assembled from incompatible parts: “This header plus the whizzy bit from Version C”.

This isn’t to say that you shouldn’t explore lots of ideas yourself. Divergent thinking early in the design process is the only way to break free of the clichéd patterns and fads that so often litter mediocre sites. But you must act as a design curator, choosing the best of your work and explaining its rationale clearly and succinctly. Attitude, then, is central to successful critique. It can be difficult to tread the fine line between the harmful extremes of doormat passivity and prima donna arrogance. Remember that you are the professional, but be mindful that even experts make mistakes, particularly when – as with all design projects – they don’t possess all the relevant information in advance. Present your case with open-minded confidence, while accepting that positive critique will make your design (and ultimately your skills) stronger.

The courage of your convictions

Ultimately, your success in the feedback process, and indeed in the entire design process, hinges upon the rationale you provide for your work. Ideally, you should be able to refer to your research – personas, usability test findings, analytics – to support your decisions. To keep this evidence in mind, print it out to share at the design review, or include it in your presentation. Explain the rationale behind the most important decisions before showing the design, so that you can be sure of the full attention of your audience.

Once you’ve covered these points, display your design and walk through the specific features of the page. A little honesty goes a long way here: state your case as strongly as your rationale demands. Sure of your reasoning? Be strong. Speculating an approach based on a hunch? Say so, and encourage your colleagues to explore the idea with you and see where it leads.

Of course, none of these approaches should be sacrosanct. A proficient designer must be able to bend his or her way of working to suit the situation at hand. So sometimes you’ll want to ignore these rules of thumb and explore your own hunches as required. More power to you. As long as you think as clearly about the feedback process as you have about the design itself, you’ll be able to enjoy the great unveiling as a moment to be savoured, not feared.",2010,Cennydd Bowles,cennyddbowles,2010-12-12T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2010/the-great-unveiling/,business
116,The IE6 Equation,"It is the destiny of one browser to serve as the nemesis of web developers everywhere. At the birth of the Web Standards movement, that role was played by Netscape Navigator 4; an outdated browser that refused to die. Its tenacious existence hampered the adoption of modern standards. Today that role is played by Internet Explorer 6.

There’s a sensation that I’m sure you’re familiar with. It’s a horrible mixture of dread and nervousness. It’s the feeling you get when—after working on a design for a while in a standards-compliant browser like Firefox, Safari or Opera—you decide that you can no longer put off the inevitable moment when you must check the site in IE6. Fingers are crossed, prayers are muttered, but alas, to no avail. The nemesis browser invariably screws something up.

What do you do next? If the differences in IE6 are minor, you could just leave it be. After all, websites don’t need to look exactly the same in all browsers. But if there are major layout issues and a significant portion of your audience is still using IE6, you’ll probably need to roll up your sleeves and start fixing the problems.

A common approach is to quarantine IE6-specific CSS in a separate stylesheet. This stylesheet can then be referenced from the HTML document using conditional comments like this:

<!--[if lt IE 7]>
<link rel=""stylesheet"" href=""ie6.css"" type=""text/css"" media=""screen"" />
<![endif]-->

That stylesheet will only be served up to Internet Explorer where the version number is less than 7.

You can put anything inside a conditional comment. You could put a script element in there. So as well as serving up browser-specific CSS, it’s possible to serve up browser-specific JavaScript.

A few years back, before Microsoft released Internet Explorer 7, JavaScript genius Dean Edwards wrote a script called IE7. This amazing piece of code uses JavaScript to make Internet Explorer 5 and 6 behave like a standards-compliant browser. Dean used JavaScript to bootstrap IE’s CSS support.

Because the script is specifically targeted at Internet Explorer, there’s no point in serving it up to other browsers. Conditional comments to the rescue:

<!--[if lt IE 7]>
<script src=""http://ie7-js.googlecode.com/svn/version/2.0(beta3)/IE7.js"" type=""text/javascript""></script>
<![endif]-->

Standards-compliant browsers won’t fetch the script. Users of IE6, on the hand, will pay a kind of bad browser tax by having to download the JavaScript file.

So when should you develop an IE6-specific stylesheet and when should you just use Dean’s JavaScript code? This is the question that myself and my co-worker Natalie Downe set out to answer one morning at Clearleft. We realised that in order to answer that question you need to first answer two other questions, how much time does it take to develop for IE6? and how much of your audience is using IE6?

Let’s say that t represents the total development time. Let t6 represent the portion of that time you spend developing for IE6. If your total audience is a, then a6 is the portion of your audience using IE6. With some algebraic help from our mathematically minded co-worker Cennydd Bowles, Natalie and I came up with the following equation to calculate the percentage likelihood that you should be using Dean’s IE7 script:



p = 50 [ log ( at6 / ta6 ) + 1 ]

Try plugging in your own numbers. If you spend a lot of time developing for IE6 and only a small portion of your audience is using that browser, you’ll get a very high number out of the equation; you should probably use the IE7 script. But if you only spend a little time developing for IE6 and a significant portion of you audience are still using that browser, you’ll get a very small value for p; you might as well write an IE6-specific stylesheet.

Of course this equation is somewhat disingenuous. While it’s entirely possible to research the percentage of your audience still using IE6, it’s not so easy to figure out how much of your development time will be spent developing for that one browser. You can’t really know until you’ve already done the development, by which time the equation is irrelevant.

Instead of using the equation, you could try imposing a limit on how long you will spend developing for IE6. Get your site working in standards-compliant browsers first, then give yourself a time limit to get it working in IE6. If you can’t solve all the issues in that time limit, switch over to using Dean’s script. You could even make the time limit directly proportional to the percentage of your audience using IE6. If 20% of your audience is still using IE6 and you’ve just spent five days getting the site working in standards-compliant browsers, give yourself one day to get it working in IE6. But if 50% of your audience is still using IE6, be prepared to spend 2.5 days wrestling with your nemesis.

All of these different methods for dealing with IE6 demonstrate that there’s no one single answer that works for everyone. They also highlight a problem with the current debate around dealing with IE6. There’s no shortage of blog posts, articles and even entire websites discussing when to drop support for IE6. But very few of them take the time to define what they mean by “support.” This isn’t a binary issue. There is no Boolean answer. Instead, there’s a sliding scale of support:


	Block IE6 users from your site.
	Develop with web standards and don’t spend any development time testing in IE6.
	Use the Dean Edwards IE7 script to bootstrap CSS support in IE6.
	Write an IE6 stylesheet to address layout issues.
	Make your site look exactly the same in IE6 as in any other browser.


Each end of that scale is extreme. I don’t think that anybody should be actively blocking any browser but neither do I think that users of an outdated browser should get exactly the same experience as users of a more modern browser. The real meanings of “supporting” or “not supporting” IE6 lie somewhere in-between those extremes.

Just as I think that semantics are important in markup, they are equally important in our discussion of web development. So let’s try to come up with some better terms than using the catch-all verb “support.” If you say in your client contract that you “support” IE6, define exactly what that means. If you find yourself in a discussion about “dropping support” for IE6, take the time to explain what you think that entails.

The web developers at Yahoo! are on the right track with their concept of graded browser support. I’m interested in hearing more ideas of how to frame this discussion. If we can all agree to use clear and precise language, we stand a better chance of defeating our nemesis.",2008,Jeremy Keith,jeremykeith,2008-12-08T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2008/the-ie6-equation/,code
25,The Introvert Owner’s Manual,"Nobody realizes that some people expend tremendous energy merely to be normal.
Albert Camus


“Whatever you plan, just make sure there are lots of people there,” said my husband in the run-up to his birthday last year. A few months later, before my own birthday, I uttered, “Whatever you plan, just make sure it is only me and you.”

I am an introvert. It is very likely some of you are too, or that you live, work or fraternise with one. Despite there being quite a few of us out there – some say as many as one third of the population, others as little as ten per cent – I think our professional and social lives are biased towards a definition of normality that is more accepting of the extrovert. I hope that by reading this article you will gain some insight to what goes on inside the head of the introvert(s) that you know and understand how to relate to them in a way that respects their disposition.

Before we go any further, I should define what exactly being an introvert means, and, equally important, what it does not. Only once this is established will you be able to handle your introvert correctly.

What defines an introvert

The simplest and most accurate way of describing an introvert is that she uses up energy in social situations and needs to be in solitude to recharge.

To explain what I mean, let us take the example of the The Sims: when you create a Sim, you can choose (among other characteristics) whether it will be outgoing or not. If the Sim is outgoing, when you play the game you need to make sure it interacts as much as possible with other Sims or its mood indicator (the plumbob) will become red and that is a bad thing. Conversely, if your Sim is not outgoing, when you put it in too many social situations its plumbob will become red too.

So your (real life) introvert might think you are great (you might even be her best friend, her spouse or her child), but if her plumbob is red, or nearly, she might just need a little time and space to recharge before she is ready to interact.

This is not the same thing as being shy or in a bad mood all the time. We are not necessarily awkward in social situations, but, if we have not had the time to recharge, being social might be almost impossible. This explains why your introvert will likely ask who will be at the gathering you have planned, for how long she will have to stay there, and what she will be doing before and after the event. It is the equivalent of you wanting to know if there will be power sockets in the restaurant to charge your iPhone – asking this does not mean you don’t want to attend.

The explanation above might be a simplistic way of looking at things, but I would say it is one that introverts can relate to; call it a minimalist approach to socialisation.

Caring for your introvert

Articles and conversations about introversion usually focus on how to fix the condition and how to make introverts more outgoing: a clear example of our society’s bias towards the normality of extroversion. Avoid this. You will not be able to convert your introvert into an extrovert. Believe it or not, there is nothing wrong with her.

In her 2012 TED talk, “The power of introverts”, Susan Cain pointed to the fact that places like school and work are designed for extroverts: students and workers are required to constantly work in groups and speaking up is highly valued. Both types are evaluated against the same criteria and more often than not people are expected to excel at being outspoken to be considered well rounded.

Obviously, this is not the right way to appraise your introvert. Comparing your introvert with an extrovert using the same parameters and simply asking her to behave more like an extrovert is a mistake and something that will only perpetuate an introvert’s idea that the problem lies with her.

Speaking up

Your introvert is likely to have strong opinions and ideas, and to have been listening to other people speak at meetings and workshops. Help her voice those thoughts by creating an environment where everyone stops and listens when someone speaks instead of one which fosters interruptions. Show her that it is acceptable for someone to take time to think before they speak: silences are OK. Allow her the freedom to be herself instead of pressuring her to change an innate quality.

It is not uncommon to find an introvert who likes to express ideas in writing. The world of web professionals excels in the spread of knowledge that is shared and sought through the written word. Give your introvert the necessary time and tools to write about the job, if she is that way inclined; this might be a good alternative to asking her to speak out.

Group work

I remember the sinking feeling whenever I heard my teachers say the dreaded words: “And now you’re going to break out into groups of…” Being an introvert does not mean you do not like people (or like to be around or work with others). It is just that activities such as group work will invariably drain your introvert’s energy rapidly. Your introvert’s batteries will need to be fully charged for her to be at her best and afterwards she will most likely need to recharge.

Quiet time

These days, one of the things that I value most at work is the ability to have moments to create and to think in solitude. When I am able to have those moments at the right time I will in turn be happy to participate in group conversations and tasks. Allow your introvert to have those moments: this does not mean she will have to work from home one day a week (but maybe it will); it might simply mean allowing her to take her laptop and her notebook and work from the empty side of the office, or from the coffee shop downstairs for an hour or two. In all likelihood she will come back fully recharged and ready to engage in more social activities – her plumbob will again be bright green.

Leadership

Do not think that your introvert cannot lead. Cain notes that introverted leaders are more likely to let their proactive employees run with their ideas instead of taking the ideas as their own. I would say that is a positive attribute in a leader. Maybe next time a project starts, talk to your introvert about the possibility of her being in a leadership position or of having more responsibility: you might be surprised at her ability to plan and foresee potential obstacles in the project.

Final thoughts

You would not tell someone with dyslexia to get better at spelling without giving her the right tools and enough time to do so. Equally, do not ask your introvert to be more outgoing, or to turn her frown upside down, without giving her the space to do so.

I believe that everyone is an introvert at some point. Everyone needs a moment of solitude now and then, and the work we do requires frequent periods of deep focus and concentration. Striving to create workplaces, classrooms, homes that allow introverts to shine and be comfortable in their skin has the potential to also make those places more balanced for everyone else.

Resources and further reading


	The power of introverts
	10 myths about introverts
	Susan Cain’s 2014 TED Talk | Announcing the Quiet Revolution
	Help Shy Kids — Don’t Punish Them
	The Introvert Advantage
	6 Things You Thought Wrong About Introverts
	Extraversion and introversion",2014,Inayaili de León Persson,inayailideleon,2014-12-13T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2014/the-introvert-owners-manual/,process
144,"The Mobile Web, Simplified","A note from the editors:  although eye-opening in 2006, this article is no longer relevant to today’s mobile web.
                
                
                      
                Considering a foray into mobile web development? Following are four things you need to know before making the leap.

1. 4 billion mobile subscribers expected by 2010

Fancy that. Coupled with the UN prediction of 6.8 billion humans by 2010, 4 billion mobile subscribers (source) is an astounding 59% of the planet. Just how many of those subscribers will have data plans and web-enabled phones is still in question, but inevitably this all means one thing for you and me: A ton of potential eyes to view our web content on a mobile device.

2. Context is king

Your content is of little value to users if it ignores the context in which it is viewed. Consider how you access data on your mobile device.  You might be holding a bottle of water or gripping a handle on the subway/tube. You’re probably seeking specific data such as directions or show times, rather than the plethora of data at your disposal via a desktop PC.

The mobile web, a phrase often used to indicate “accessing the web on a mobile device”,  is very much a context-, content-, and component-specific environment. Expressed in terms of your potential target audience, access to web content on a mobile device is largely influenced by surrounding circumstances and conditions, information relevant to being mobile, and the feature set of the device being used. Ask yourself, What is relevant to my users and the tasks, problems, and needs they may encounter while being mobile? Answer that question and you’ll be off to a great start.

3. WAP 2.0 is an XHTML environment

In a nutshell, here are a few fundamental tenets of mobile internet technology:


	Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) is the protocol for enabling mobile access to internet content.
	Wireless Markup Language (WML) was the language of choice for WAP 1.0.
	Nearly all devices sold today are WAP 2.0 devices.
	With the introduction of WAP 2.0, XHTML Mobile Profile (XHTML-MP) became the preferred markup language.
	XHTML-MP will be familiar to anyone experienced with XHTML Transitional or Strict.


Summary? The mobile web is rapidly becoming an XHTML environment, and thus you and I can apply our existing “desktop web” skills to understand how to develop content for it. With WML on the decline, the learning curve is much smaller today than it was several years ago. I’m generalizing things gratuitously, but the point remains: Get off yo’ lazy butt and begin to take mobile seriously.

I’ll even pass you a few tips for getting started. First, the DOCTYPE for XHTML-MP is as follows:

<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC ""-//WAPFORUM//DTD XHTML Mobile 1.0//EN""
""http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/DTD/xhtml-mobile10.dtd"">

As for MIME type, Open Mobile Alliance (OMA) specifies using the MIME type application/vnd.wap.xhtml+xml, but ultimately you need to ensure the server delivering your mobile content is configured properly for the MIME type you choose to use, as there are other options (see Setting up WAP Servers).

Once you’ve made it to the body, the XHTML-MP markup is not unlike what you’re already used to. A few resources worth skimming:


	Developers Home XHTML-MP Tutorial – An impressively replete resource for all things XHTML-MP
	XHTML-MP Tags List – A complete list of XHTML-MP elements and accompanying attributes


And last but certainly not least, CSS. There exists WAP CSS, which is essentially a subset of CSS2 with WAP-specific extensions. For all intents and purposes, much of the CSS you’re already comfortable using will be transferrable to mobile. As for including CSS in your pages, your options are the same as for desktop sites: external, embedded, and inline. Some experts will argue embedded or inline over external in favor of reducing the number of HTTP connections per page request, yet many popular mobilized sites and apps employ external linking without issue.

Stocking stuffers: Flickr Mobile, Fandango Mobile, and Popurls Mobile. A few sites with whom you can do the View Source song and dance for further study.

4. “Cell phone” is so DynaTAC

If you’re a U.S. resident, listen up: You must rid your vocabulary of the term “cell phone”. We’re one of the few economies on the planet to refer to a mobile phone accordingly. If you care to find yourself in any of the worthwhile mobile development circles, begin using terms more widely accepted: “mobile” or “mobile phone” or “handset” or “handy”. If you’re not sure which, go for “mobile”. Such as, “Yo dog, check out my new mobile.”

More importantly, however, is overcoming the mentality that access to the mobile web can be done only with a phone. Instead, “device” encourages us to think phone, handheld computer, watch, Nintendo DS, car, you name it.

Simple enough?",2006,Cameron Moll,cameronmoll,2006-12-19T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2006/the-mobile-web-simplified/,ux
145,The Neverending (Background Image) Story,"Everyone likes candy for Christmas, and there’s none better than eye candy. Well, that, and just more of the stuff. Today we’re going to combine both of those good points and look at how to create a beautiful background image that goes on and on… forever!

Of course, each background image is different, so instead of agonising over each and every pixel, I’m going to concentrate on five key steps that you can apply to any of your own repeating background images. In this example, we’ll look at the Miami Beach background image used on the new FOWA site, which I’m afraid is about as un-festive as you can get.

1. Choose your image wisely

I find there are three main criteria when judging photos you’re considering for repetition manipulation (or ‘repetulation’, as I like to say)…


	simplicity (beware of complex patterns)
	angle and perspective (watch out for shadows and obvious vanishing points)
	consistent elements (for easy cloning)


You might want to check out this annotated version of the image, where I’ve highlighted elements of the photo that led me to choose it as the right one.

The original image purchased from iStockPhoto.

The Photoshopped version used on the FOWA site.

2. The power of horizontal lines

With the image chosen and your cursor poised for some Photoshop magic, the most useful thing you can do is drag out the edge pixels from one side of the image to create a kind of rough colour ‘template’ on which to work over. It doesn’t matter which side you choose, although you might find it beneficial to use the one with the simplest spread of colour and complex elements.

Click and hold on the marquee tool in the toolbar and select the ‘single column marquee tool’, which will span the full height of your document but will only be one pixel wide. Make the selection right at the edge of your document, press ctrl-c / cmd-c to copy the selection you made, create a new layer, and hit ctrl-v / cmd-v to paste the selection onto your new layer. using free transform (ctrl-t / cmd-t), drag out your selection so that it becomes as wide as your entire canvas. 

A one-pixel-wide selection stretched out to the entire width of the canvas.

3. Cloning

It goes without saying that the trusty clone tool is one of the most important in the process of creating a seamlessly repeating background image, but I think it’s important to be fairly loose with it. Always clone on to a new layer so that you’ve got the freedom to move it around, but above all else, use the eraser tool to tweak your cloned areas: let that handle the precision stuff and you won’t have to worry about getting your clones right first time.

In the example below, you can see how I overcame the problem of the far-left tree shadow being chopped off by cloning the shadow from the tree on its right. 

The edge of the shadow is cut off and needs to be ‘made’ from a pre-existing element.

The successful clone completes the missing shadow.

The two elements are obviously very similar but it doesn’t look like a clone because the majority of the shape is ‘genuine’ and only a small part is a duplicate. Also, after cloning I transformed the duplicate, erased parts of it, used gradients, and — ooh, did someone mention gradients?

4. Never underestimate a gradient

For this image, I used gradients in a similar way to a brush: covering large parts of the canvas with a colour that faded out to a desired point, before erasing certain parts for accuracy.

Several of the gradients and brushes that make up the ‘customised’ part of the image, visible when the main photograph layer is hidden.

The full composite.

Gradients are also a bit of an easy fix: you can use a gradient on one side of the image, flip it horizontally, and then use it again on the opposite side to make a more seamless join.

Speaking of which…

5. Sewing the seams

No matter what kind of magic Photoshop dust you sprinkle over your image, there will still always be the area where the two edges meet: that scary ‘loop’ point. Fret ye not, however, for there’s help at hand in the form of a nice little cheat. Even though the loop point might still be apparent, we can help hide it by doing something to throw viewers off the scent.

The seam is usually easy to spot because it’s a blank area with not much detail or colour variation, so in order to disguise it, go against the rule: put something across it!

This isn’t quite as challenging as it may sound, because if we intentionally make our own ‘object’ to span the join, we can accurately measure the exact halfway point where we need to split it across the two sides of the image. This is exactly what I did with the FOWA background image: I made some clouds!

A sky with no clouds in an unhappy one.

A simple soft white brush creates a cloud-like formation in the sky.

After taking the cloud’s opacity down to 20%, I used free transform to highlight the boundaries of the layer. I then moved it over to the right, so that the middle of the layer perfectly aligned with the right side of the canvas.

Finally, I duplicated the layer and did the same in reverse: dragging the layer over to the left and making sure that the middle of the duplicate layer perfectly aligned with the left side of the canvas.

And there you have it! Boom! Ta-da! Et Voila! To see the repeating background image in action, visit futureofwebapps.com on a large widescreen monitor or see a simulation of the effect.

Thanks for reading, folks. Have a great Christmas!",2007,Elliot Jay Stocks,elliotjaystocks,2007-12-03T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2007/the-neverending-background-image-story/,code
22,The Responsive Hover Paradigm,"CSS transitions and animations provide web designers with a whole slew of tools to spruce up our designs. Move over ActionScript tweens! The techniques we can now implement with CSS are reminiscent of Flash-based adventures from the pages of web history.

Pairing CSS enhancements with our :hover pseudo-class allows us to add interesting events to our websites. We have a ton of power at our fingertips. However, with this power, we each have to ask ourselves: just because I can do something, should I?

Why bother? 

We hear a lot of mantras in the web community. Some proclaim the importance of content; some encourage methods like mobile first to support content; and others warn of the overhead and speed impact of decorative flourishes and visual images. I agree, one hundred percent. At the same time, I believe that content can reign king and still provide a beautiful design with compelling interactions and acceptable performance impacts. Maybe, just maybe, we can even have a little bit of fun when crafting these systems!

Yes, a site with pure HTML content and no CSS will load very fast on your mobile phone, but it leaves a lot to be desired. If you went to your local library and every book looked the same, how would you know which one to borrow? Imagine if every book was printed on the same paper stock with the same cover page in the same type size set at a legible point value… how would you know if you were going to purchase a cookbook about wild game or a young adult story about teens fighting to the death?

For certain audiences, seeing a site with hip, lively hovers sure beats a stale website concept. I’ve worked on many higher education sites, and setting the interactive options is often a very important factor in engaging potential students, alumni, and donors. The same can go for e-commerce sites: enticing your audience with surprise and delight factors can be the difference between a successful and a lost sale. 

Knowing your content and audience can help you decide if an intriguing experience is appropriate for your site; if it is, then hover responses can be a real asset. 

Why hover?

We have all these capabilities with CSS properties to create the aforementioned fun interactions, and it would be quite easy to fall back into some old patterns and animation abuse. The world of Flash intros and skip links could be recreated with CSS keyframes. However, I don’t think any of us want to go the route of forcing users into unwanted exchanges and road blocking content. 

What’s great about utilizing hover to pair with CSS powered actions is that it’s user initiated. It’s a well-established expectation that when a user mouses over an object, something changes. If we can identify that something as a link, then we will expect something to change as we move our mouse over it. By waiting to trigger a CSS-based response until a user chooses to engage with a target makes for a more polished experience (as opposed to barraging our screens with animations all willy-nilly). This makes it the perfect opportunity to add some unique spunk. 

What about mobile, touch, and responsive?

So, you’re on board with this so far, but what about mobile and touch devices? Sure, some devices like the Samsung Galaxy S4 have some hovering capabilities, but certainly most do not. Beyond mobile devices, we also have to worry about desktops with touch capabilities. It’s super difficult to detect if a user is currently using touch or hover. One option we have is to design strictly for touch only and send hover enhancements to the graveyard. However, being that I’m all “fuck yeah hovers!,” I like to explore all options. So, let’s examine four different types of hover patterns and see how they can translate to our touch devices.

1. The essential text hover

Changing text color on hover is something we’ve done for a while and it has helped aid in identifying links. To maintain the best accessibility we can achieve, it helps to have a different visual indicator on the default :link state, such as an underline. By making sure all text links have an underline, we won’t have to rely on visual changes during hover to make sure touch device users know that it is a link. For hover-enabled devices, we can add a basic color transition. Doing so creates a nice fade, which makes the change on hover less jarring. Kinda like smooth jazz. The code* to achieve this is quite simple: 

a {
	color: #6dd4b1;
	transition: color 0.25s linear;  
}

a:hover, a:focus  {
	color: #357099;
}


	Browser prefixes are omitted


You can see in the final result that, for both touch and hover, everyone wins: 

See the Pen Most Basic Link Transition by Jenn Lukas (@Jenn) on CodePen

  

2. Visual background wizardry and animated hovers

We can take this a step further by again making changes to our aesthetic on hover, but not making any content changes. Altering image hovers for fun and personality can separate your site from others; that personality is important and can enhance our content. 

Let’s look at a few sites that do this really well. Scroll down to the judges section of CSS Off and check out the illustrations of the judges. On hover, the illustration fades into a photo of the judge. This provides a realistic alternative to the drawing. Users without the hover can click into the detail page, where they can see the full color picture and learn more about the judges; the information is still available through a different pathway. 

Going back to the higher education field, let’s visit Delaware Valley College. The school had recently gone through a rebranding that included loop icons as a symbol to connect ideas. These icons are brought into the website on hover of the slideshow arrows (WebKit browsers). The hover reveals a loop animation, tying in overall themes and adding some extra pizzazz that makes me think, “This is a hip place that feels current.” For visitors who can’t access the hover effect, the default arrow state clearly represents a clickable link, and there is swipe functionality on mobile devices to boot. 

DIY.org’s Frontend Dev page has a bunch of enjoyable hover actions happening, featuring scaling transforms and looping animations. Nothing new is revealed on hover, so touch devices won’t miss anything, but it intrigues the user who is visiting a site about front-end dev doing cool front-end things. It backs up its claim of front-end knowledge by adding this enhancement. 

The old Cowork Chicago (now redirecting) had a great example, captured here:

 Coop: Chicago Coworking from Jenn Lukas on Vimeo.

The code for the Join areas is quite simple: 

.join-buttons .daily, .join-buttons .monthly { 
    height: 260px; z-index: 0; margin-top: 30px;
	transition: height .2s linear,margin .2s linear;
}

.join-buttons .daily:hover, .join-buttons .monthly:hover { 
	height: 280px; margin-top: 20px; 
}

li.button:hover { 
    z-index: 20; 
}

The slight rotation on the photos, and the change of color and size of the rate options on hover, add to the fun factor. The site attempts to advertise the co-working space by letting bits of their charisma show through with these transitions. They don’t hit the user over the head with animations, but provide a nice addition to make sure visitors know it’s a welcoming place to work. Some text is added on the hover, but the text isn’t essential to determine where the link goes.

3. Image block hovers

There have been more designs popping up with large image blocks acting as extensive hit area links to subsequent pages. On hover of these links, text is revealed, letting the user know where the link destination goes. 

See the Pen Transitioning Max Height by Jenn Lukas (@Jenn) on CodePen

This type of link is tough for users on touch as the image might not provide enough context to reveal its target. If you weren’t aware of what my illustrated avatar from 2007 looked like (or even if you did), then how would you know that this is a link to my Twitter page? Instead, if we provide  enough context — such as the @jennlukas handle — you could assume the destination. Users who receive the hover can also see the Twitter bio. It won’t break the experience for users that can’t hover, but it will provide a nice interaction and some more information for those that can. 

See the Pen Transitioning Max Height by Jenn Lukas (@Jenn) on CodePen

The Esquire site follows this same pattern, in which the title of the story is shown and the subheading is revealed on hover. Dining at Altitude took the opposite approach, where all text is shown by default and, on hover, you can see more of the image that the text sits atop. This is a nice technique to follow. For touch users, following the link will allow them to see more of the image detail that was revealed on hover. 

4. Drop-down navigation menu hovers

Main navigation options that rely on hover have come up as a problem for touch. One way to address this is to be sure your top level items are all functional links to somewhere, and not blank anchors to trigger a submenu drop-down. This ensures that, even without the hover-triggered menu, users can still navigate to those top-level pages. From there, they should be able to access the tertiary pages shown in the drop-down. Following this arrangement, drop-down menus act as a quick shortcut and aren’t necessary to the navigational structure. If the top navigation items are your most visited pages, this execution won’t hinder your visitors. 

If the information within the menu is vital, such as a lone account menu, another option is to show drop-down menus on click instead of hover. This pattern will allow both mouse and touch users to access the drop-downs. 

Why can’t we just detect hover?

This is a really tricky thing to do. Internet Explorer 10 on Windows 8 uses the aria-haspopup attribute to simulate hover on touch devices, but usually our audience stretches beyond that group. There’s been discussion around using Modernizr, but false positives have come with that. A W3C draft for Media Queries Level 4 includes a hover feature, but it’s not supported yet. Since some devices can hover and touch, should you rely on hover effects for those? Arguments have come up that users can be browsing your site with a mouse and then decide to switch to touch, or vice versa. That might be a large concern for you, or it might be an edge case that isn’t vital to your site’s success. 

For one site, I used mousemove and touchstart JavaScript events in order to detect if a visitor starts to browse the site with a mouse. The design initiates for touch users, showing all text on load, but as soon as a mouse movement occurs, the text becomes hidden and is then revealed on hover. 

See the Pen Detect Touch devices with mousemove and touchstart by Jenn Lukas (@Jenn) on CodePen

One downside to this approach is that the text is viewable until a mouse enters the document, but if the elements are further down the page it might not be noticed. A second downside is if a user on a touch- and hover-enabled device starts browsing with the mouse and then switches back to touch, the hover-centric styles will remain until a new page load. These were acceptable scenarios in the project I worked on, but might not be for every project. 

Can we give our visitors a choice?

I’ve been thinking about how we can combat the concern of not knowing if our customers are using touch or a mouse, not to mention keyboard or Wacom tablets or Minority Report screens. We can cover keyboards with our friend :focus, but that still doesn’t solve our other dilemmas. 

Remember when we couldn’t rely on browsers to zoom text and we had to use those small A, medium A, big A [AAA] buttons? On selection of one of those options, a different style sheet would load with small, medium, or large text sizes to satisfy our user’s request. We could even set cookies to remember their font choices. What if we offered a similar solution, a hover/touch switcher, for our new predicament? 

See the Pen cwuJf by Jenn Lukas (@Jenn) on CodePen

We could add this switcher to our design. Maybe add it to the header on smaller screens and the footer on larger screens to play the odds. Then be sure to deliver the appropriate touch- or hover-optimized adventure for our guests.

How about adding View options in the areas where we’re hiding content until hover? Looking at Delta Cycle, there’s logic in place to switch layouts on some mobile devices. On desktops we can see the layout shows the product and price by default, and the name of the item and an Add to cart button on hover. If you want to keep this hover, but also worry that touch users can’t access it — or even if you are concerned that people might want to view it with more details up front — we could add another view switcher. 

See the Pen List/Grid Views for Hover or Touch by Jenn Lukas (@Jenn) on CodePen

Similar to the list versus grid view we often see in operating systems, a choice here could cover all of our bases.  

Conclusion

There is no one-size-fits-all solution when it comes to hover patterns. Design for your content. If you are providing important information about driving directions or healthcare, you might want to err on the side of designing for touch only. If you are behind an educational site and trying to entice more traffic and sign-ups, or a more immersive e-commerce site selling pies, then hover activity can help support your content and engage your visitors without being a detriment. While content can be our top priority, let’s not forget that our designs and interactions, hovers included, can have a great positive impact on how visitors experience our site. Hover wisely, friends.",2013,Jenn Lukas,jennlukas,2013-12-12T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2013/the-responsive-hover-paradigm/,
251,"The System, the Search, and the Food Bank","Imagine a warehouse, half the length of a football field, with a looped conveyer belt down the center. 
On the belt are plastic bins filled with assortments of shelf-stable food—one may have two bags of potato chips, seventeen pudding cups, and a box of tissues; the next, a dozen cans of beets. The conveyer belt is ringed with large, empty cardboard boxes, each labeled with categories like “Bottled Water” or “Cereal” or “Candy.” 
Such was the scene at my local food bank a few Saturdays ago, when some friends and I volunteered for a shift sorting donated food items. Our job was to fill the labeled cardboard boxes with the correct items nabbed from the swiftly moving, randomly stocked plastic bins.
I could scarcely believe my good fortune of assignments. You want me to sort things? Into categories? For several hours? And you say there’s an element of time pressure? Listen, is there some sort of permanent position I could be conscripted into.
Look, I can’t quite explain it: I just know that I love sorting, organizing, and classifying things—groceries at a food bank, but also my bookshelves, my kitchen cabinets, my craft supplies, my dishwasher arrangement, yes I am a delight to live with, why do you ask?
The opportunity to create meaning from nothing is at the core of my excitement, which is why I’ve tried to build a career out of organizing digital content, and why I brought a frankly frightening level of enthusiasm to the food bank. “I can’t believe they’re letting me do this,” I whispered in awe to my conveyer belt neighbor as I snapped up a bag of popcorn for the Snacks box with the kind of ferocity usually associated with birds of prey.
The jumble of donated items coming into the center need to be sorted in order for the food bank to be able to quantify, package, and distribute the food to those who need it (I sense a metaphor coming on). It’s not just a nice-to-have that we spent our morning separating cookies from carrots—it’s a crucial step in the process. Organization makes the difference between chaos and sense, between randomness and usefulness, whether we’re talking about donated groceries or—there it is—web content.
This happens through the magic of criteria matching. In order for us to sort the food bank donations correctly, we needed to know not only the categories we were sorting into, but also the criteria for each category. Does canned ravioli count as Canned Soup? Does enchilada sauce count as Tomatoes? Do protein bars count as Snacks? (Answers: yes, yes, and only if they are under 10 grams of protein or will expire within three months.) 
Is X a Y? was the question at the heart of our food sorting—but it’s also at the heart of any information-seeking behavior. When we are organizing, or looking for, any kind of information, we are asking ourselves:

What is the criteria that defines Y?
Does X meet that criteria?

We don’t usually articulate it so concretely because it’s a background process, only leaping to consciousness when we encounter a stumbling block. If cans of broth flew by on the conveyer belt, it didn’t require much thought to place them in the Canned Soup box. Boxed broth, on the other hand, wasn’t allowed, causing a small cognitive hiccup—this X is NOT a Y—that sometimes meant having to re-sort our boxes.
On the web, we’re interested—I would hope—in reducing cognitive hiccups for our users. We are interested in making our apps easy to use, our websites easy to navigate, our information easy to access. After all, most of the time, the process of using the internet is one of uniting a question with an answer—Is this article from a trustworthy source? Is this clothing the style I want? Is this company paying their workers a living wage? Is this website one that can answer my question? Is X a Y?
We have a responsibility, therefore, to make information easy for our users to find, understand, and act on. This means—well, this means a lot of things, and I’ve got limited space here, so let’s focus on these three lessons from the food bank:


Use plain, familiar language. This advice seems to be given constantly, but that’s because it’s solid and it’s not followed enough. Your menu labels, page names, and headings need to reflect the word choice of your users. Think how much harder it would have been to sort food if the boxes were labeled according to nutritional content, grocery store aisle number, or Latin name. How much would it slow sorting down if the Tomatoes box were labeled Nightshades? It sounds silly, but it’s not that different from sites that use industry jargon, company lingo, acronyms (oh, yes, I’ve seen it), or other internally focused language when trying to provide wayfinding for users. Choose words that your audience knows—not only will they be more likely to spot what they’re looking for on your site or app, but you’ll turn up more often in search results.


Create consistency in all things. Missteps in consistency look like my earlier chicken broth example—changing up how something looks, sounds, or functions creates a moment of cognitive dissonance, and those moments add up. The names of products, the names of brands, the names of files and forms and pages, the names of processes and procedures and concepts—these all need to be consistently spelled, punctuated, linked, and referenced, no matter what section or level the user is in. If submenus are visible in one section, they should be visible in all. If calls-to-action are a graphic button in one section, they are the same graphic button in all. Every affordance, every module, every design choice sets up user expectations; consistency keeps those expectations afloat, making for a smoother experience overall.

Make the system transparent. By this, I do not mean that every piece of content should be elevated at all times. The horror. But I do mean that we should make an effort to communicate the boundaries of the digital space from any given corner within. Navigation structures operate just as much as a table of contents as they do a method of moving from one place to another. Page hierarchies help explain content relationships, communicating conceptual relevancy and relative importance. Submenus illustrate which related concepts may be found within a given site section. Take care to show information that conveys the depth and breadth of the system, rather than obscuring it.

This idea of transparency was perhaps the biggest challenge we experienced in food sorting. Imagine us volunteers as users, each looking for a specific piece of information in the larger system. Like any new visitor to a website, we came into the system not knowing the full picture. We didn’t know every category label around the conveyer belt, nor what criteria each category warranted. 
The system wasn’t transparent for us, so we had to make it transparent as we went. We had to stop what we were doing and ask questions. We’d ask staff members. We’d ask more seasoned volunteers. We’d ask each other. We’d make guesses, and guess wrongly, and mess up the boxes, and correct our mistakes, and learn.
The more we learned, the easier the sorting became. That is, we were able to sort more quickly, more efficiently, more accurately.  The better we understood the system, the better we were at interacting with it.
The same is true of our users: the better they understand digital spaces, the more effective they are at using them. But visitors to our apps and websites do not have the luxury of learning the whole system. The fumbling trial-and-error method that I used at the food bank can, on a website, drive users away—or, worse, misinform or hurt them. 
This is why we must make choices that prioritize transparency, consistency, and familiarity. Our users want to know if X is a Y—well-sorted content can give them the answer.",2018,Lisa Maria Martin,lisamariamartin,2018-12-16T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2018/the-system-the-search-and-the-food-bank/,content
186,The Web Is Your CMS,"It is amazing what you can do these days with the services offered on the web. Flickr stores terabytes of photos for us and converts them automatically to all kind of sizes, finds people in them and even allows us to edit them online. YouTube does almost the same complete job with videos, LinkedIn allows us to maintain our CV, Delicious our bookmarks and so on.

We don’t have to do these tasks ourselves any more, as all of these systems also come with ways to use the data in the form of Application Programming Interfaces, or APIs for short. APIs give us raw data when we send requests telling the system what we want to get back.

The problem is that every API has a different idea of what is a simple way of accessing this data and in which format to give it back.

Making it easier to access APIs

What we need is a way to abstract the pains of different data formats and authentication formats away from the developer — and this is the purpose of the Yahoo Query Language, or YQL for short. 

Libraries like jQuery and YUI make it easy and reliable to use JavaScript in browsers (yes, even IE6) and YQL allows us to access web services and even the data embedded in web documents in a simple fashion – SQL style.

Select * from the web and filter it the way I want

YQL is a web service that takes a few inputs itself:


	A query that tells it what to get, update or access
	An output format – XML, JSON, JSON-P or JSON-P-X
	A callback function (if you defined JSON-P or JSON-P-X)


You can try it out yourself – check out this link to get back Flickr photos for the search term ‘santa’*%20from%20flickr.photos.search%20where%20text%3D%22santa%22&format=xml in XML format. The YQL query for this is 

select * from flickr.photos.search where text=""santa""

The easiest way to take your first steps with YQL is to look at the console. There you get sample queries, access to all the data sources available to you and you can easily put together complex queries. In this article, however, let’s use PHP to put together a web page that pulls in Flickr photos, blog posts, Videos from YouTube and latest bookmarks from Delicious.

Check out the demo and get the source code on GitHub.

<?php
  /* YouTube RSS */
  $query = 'select description from rss(5) where url=""http://gdata.youtube.com/feeds/base/users/chrisheilmann/uploads?alt=rss&v=2&orderby=published&client=ytapi-youtube-profile"";';
  /* Flickr search by user id */
  $query .= 'select farm,id,owner,secret,server,title from flickr.photos.search where user_id=""11414938@N00"";';
  /* Delicious RSS */
  $query .= 'select title,link from rss where url=""http://feeds.delicious.com/v2/rss/codepo8?count=10"";';
  /* Blog RSS */
  $query .= 'select title,link from rss where url=""http://feeds.feedburner.com/wait-till-i/gwZf""';
  /* The YQL web service root with JSON as the output */
  $root = 'http://query.yahooapis.com/v1/public/yql?format=json&env=store%3A%2F%2Fdatatables.org%2Falltableswithkeys';
  /* Assemble the query */
  $query = ""select * from query.multi where queries='"".$query.""'"";
  $url = $root . '&q=' . urlencode($query);
  /* Do the curl call (access the data just like a browser would) */
  $ch = curl_init(); 
  curl_setopt($ch, CURLOPT_URL, $url); 
  curl_setopt($ch, CURLOPT_RETURNTRANSFER, 1); 
  curl_setopt($ch, CURLOPT_SSL_VERIFYPEER, false);
  curl_setopt($ch, CURLOPT_SSL_VERIFYHOST, false);
  $output = curl_exec($ch); 
  curl_close($ch);
  $data = json_decode($output);
  $results = $data->query->results->results;
  /* YouTube output */
  $youtube = '<ul id=""youtube"">';
  foreach($results[0]->item as $r){
	$cleanHTML = undoYouTubeMarkupCrimes($r->description);
	$youtube .= '<li>'.$cleanHTML.'</li>';
  }
  $youtube .= '</ul>';
  /* Flickr output */
  $flickr = '<ul id=""flickr"">';
  foreach($results[1]->photo as $r){
	$flickr .= '<li>'.
			   '<a href=""http://www.flickr.com/photos/codepo8/'.$r->id.'/"">'.
			   '<img src=""http://farm' .$r->farm . '.static.flickr.com/'.
			   $r->server . '/' . $r->id . '_' . $r->secret . 
			   '_s.jpg"" alt=""'.$r->title.'""></a></li>';
  }
  $flickr .= '</ul>';
  /* Delicious output */
  $delicious = '<ul id=""delicious"">';
  foreach($results[2]->item as $r){
	$delicious .= '<li><a href=""'.$r->link.'"">'.$r->title.'</a></li>';
  }
  $delicious .= '</ul>';
  /* Blog output */
  $blog = '<ul id=""blog"">';
  foreach($results[3]->item as $r){
	$blog .= '<li><a href=""'.$r->link.'"">'.$r->title.'</a></li>';
  }
  $blog .= '</ul>';
  function undoYouTubeMarkupCrimes($str){
	$cleaner = preg_replace('/555px/','100%',$str);
	$cleaner = preg_replace('/width=""[^""]+""/','',$cleaner);
	$cleaner = preg_replace('/<tbody>/','<colgroup><col width=""20%""><col width=""50%""><col width=""30%""></colgroup><tbody>',$cleaner);
	return $cleaner;
  }
?>

What we are doing here is create a few different YQL statements and queue them together with the query.multi table. Each of these can be run inside YQL itself. Check out the YouTube, Flickr, Delicious and Blog example in the console if you don’t believe me. The benefit of using this table is that we don’t make individual requests for each query but we get all the data in one single request – which means a much better performing solution as the YQL server farm is faster on the web than our servers.

We point the query to the YQL web service end point and get the resulting data using cURL. All that we need to do then is to convert the returned data to HTML lists that can be printed out inside an HTML template.

Mixing, matching and using HTML as a data source

This was a simple example of what YQL can do for you. Where it gets really powerful however is by mixing and matching different APIs. YQL is also a good tool to get information from HTML documents. By using the html table you can load the content of an HTML document (which gets fixed automatically by HTMLTidy) and use XPATH to filter down results to what you need. Take the following example which takes headlines from the news.bbc.co.uk homepage and runs the results through Yahoo’s Term Extractor API to give you a list of currently hot topics.

select * from search.termextract where context in (
  select content from html where url=""http://news.bbc.co.uk"" and xpath=""//table[@width=800]//a""
)

Try it out in the console or see the results here. In English, this means:


	Go to http://news.bbc.co.uk and get me the HTML
	Run it through HTML Tidy to clean it up.
	Get me only the links inside the table with an attribute of width and the value 800
	Get only the content of the link and for each of the links
	
		Take the content and send it as context to the Yahoo Term Extractor API
	
	

If we choose JSON-P as the output format we can use the outcome directly in JavaScript (see this demo or see its source):

<ul id=""hottopics""></ul>
<script type=""text/javascript"">
function hottopics(o){
  var res = o.query.results.Result,
	  all = res.length,
	  topics = {},
	  out = [],
	  html = '',
	  i=0;
  /* create hash from topics to prevent repetition */	 
  for(i=0;i<all;i++){
	topics[res[i]] = res[i];
  };
  for(i in topics){
	out.push(i);
  };
  html = '<li>' + out.join('</li><li>') + '</li>';
  document.getElementById('hottopics').innerHTML = html;
};
</script>
<script type=""text/javascript"" src=""http://query.yahooapis.com/v1/public/yql?q=select%20content%20from%20search.termextract%20where %20context%20in%20(select%20content%20from%20html%20where%20url%3D%22http%3A%2F%2Fnews.bbc.co.uk%22%20and%20xpath%3D%22%2F%2Ftable%5B%40width%3D800%5D%2F%2Fa%22)&format=json&callback=hottopics""></script>

Using JSON, we can also use PHP which means the demo works for everybody – not only those with JavaScript enabled (see this demo or see its source):

<ul id=""hottopics""><li>
<?php
$url = 'http://query.yahooapis.com/v1/public/yql?q=select%20content'.
	   '%20from%20search.termextract%20where%20context%20in'.
	   '%20(select%20content%20from%20html%20where%20url%3D%22'.
	   'http%3A%2F%2Fnews.bbc.co.uk%22%20and%20xpath%3D%22%2F%2F'.
	   'table%5B%40width%3D800%5D%2F%2Fa%22)&format=json';
$ch = curl_init(); 
curl_setopt($ch, CURLOPT_URL, $url); 
curl_setopt($ch, CURLOPT_RETURNTRANSFER, 1); 
curl_setopt($ch, CURLOPT_SSL_VERIFYPEER, false);
curl_setopt($ch, CURLOPT_SSL_VERIFYHOST, false);
$output = curl_exec($ch); 
curl_close($ch);
$data = json_decode($output);
$topics = array_unique($data->query->results->Result);
echo join('</li><li>',$topics);
?>
</li></ul>

Summary

This article could only scratch the surface of YQL. You have not only read access to the web but you can also write to web services. For example you can update Twitter, post to your WordPress blog or shorten a URL with bit.ly. Using Open Tables you can add any web service to the YQL interface and you can even run server-side JavaScript which is for example useful to return Flickr photos as HTML or get the HTML content from a document that needs POST data.

The web of data is already here, and using YQL you don’t have to be a web services expert to use it and be part of it.",2009,Christian Heilmann,chrisheilmann,2009-12-17T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2009/the-web-is-your-cms/,code
273,There’s No Formula for Great Designs,"Before he combined them with fluid images and CSS3 media queries to coin responsive design, Ethan Marcotte described fluid grids — one of the most enjoyable parts of responsive design. Enjoyable that is, if you like working with math(s). But fluid grids aren’t perfect and, unless we’re careful when applying them, they can sometimes result in a design that feels disconnected.

Recapping fluid grids

If you haven’t read Ethan’s Fluid Grids, now would be a good time to do that. It centres around a simple formula for converting pixel widths to percentages:

(target ÷ context) × 100 = result

How does that work in practice? Well, take that Fireworks or Photoshop comp you’re working on (I call them static design visuals, or just visuals.) Of course, everything on that visual — column divisions, inline images, navigation elements, everything — is measured in pixels. Now:


	Pick something in the visual and measure its width. That’s our target.
	Take that target measurement and divide it by the width of its parent (context).
	Multiply what you’ve got by 100 (shift two decimal places).
	What you’re left with is a percentage width to drop into your style sheets.


For example, divide this 300px wide sidebar division by its 948px parent and then multiply by 100: your original 300px is neatly converted to 31.646%.

.content-sub {
width : 31.646%; /* 300px ÷ 948px = .31646 */ }

That formula makes it surprisingly simple for even die-hard fixed width aficionados to convert their visuals to percentage-based, fluid layouts.

It’s a handy formula for those who still design using static visuals, and downright essential for those situations where one person in an organization designs in Fireworks or Photoshop and another develops with CSS. Why?

Well, although I think that designing in a browser makes the best sense — particularly when designing for multiple devices — I’ll wager most designers still make visuals in Fireworks or Photoshop and use them for demonstrations and get feedback and sign-off. That’s OK. If you haven’t made the transition to content-out designing in a browser yet, the fluid grids formula helps you carry on pushing pixels a while longer.

You can carry on moving pixel width measurements from your visuals to your style sheets, too, in the same way you always have. You can be precise to the pixel and even apply a grid image as a CSS background to help you keep everything lined up perfectly.

Once you’re done, and the fixed width layout in the browser matches your visual, loop back through your style sheets and convert those pixels to percentages using the fluid grids formula. With very little extra work, you’ll have a fluid implementation of your fixed width layout.

The fluid grids formula is simple and incredibly effective, but not long after I started working responsively I realized that the formula shouldn’t (always) be a one-fix, set-and-forget calculation. I noticed that unless we compensate for problems it sometimes creates, the result can be a disconnected design.

Staying connected

Good design relies on connectedness, a feeling of natural balance between elements and the grid they’re placed on. Give an element greater prominence or position in a visual hierarchy and you can fundamentally alter the balance and sometimes the meaning of a design.

Different from a browser’s page zooming feature — where images, text and overall layout change size by the same ratio — fluid grids flex a layout in response to a window or device width. Columns expand and contract, and within them fluid media (images and videos) can also change size. This can be one of the most impressive demonstrations of responsive design.

But not every element within a fluid grid can change size along with the window or device width. For example, type size and leading won’t change along with a column’s width.

When columns and elements within them change width, all too easily a visual hierarchy can be broken and along with it the relationship between element sizes and the outer window or viewport. This can happen quickly if you make just one set of fluid grid calculations and use those percentages across every screen width, from smartphones through tablets and up to large desktops.

The answer? Make several sets of fluid grids calculations, each one at a significant window or device width breakpoint. Then apply those new percentages, when needed, to help keep elements in proportion and maintain balance and connectedness. Here’s how I work.

Avoiding disconnection

I’ve never been entirely happy with grid frameworks such as the 960 Grid System, so I start almost every project by creating a custom grid to inform my layout decisions. Here’s a plain version of a grid from a recent project that I’ll use as an illustration.

This project’s grid comprises 84px columns and 24px gutters. This creates an odd number of columns at common tablet and desktop widths, and allows for 300px fixed width assets — useful when I need to fit advertising into a desktop layout’s sidebar.

 Showing common advertising sizes (Larger image)

For this project I chose three 320 and Up breakpoints above 320px and, after placing as many columns as would fit those breakpoint widths, I derived three content widths:


		
			Breakpoint 
			Columns 
			Content width 
		
		
			768px 
			 7 
			 732px 
		
		
			992px 
			 9 
			 948px 
		
		
			1,382px 
			 13 
			 1,380px 
		


Here’s my grid again, this time with pixel measurements and breakpoints overlaid.

 Showing pixel measurements and breakpoints (Larger image)

Now cast your mind back to the fluid grids calculation I made earlier. I divided a 300px element by 948px and arrived at 31.646%. For some elements it’s possible to use that percentage across all screen widths, but others will feel too small in relation to a narrower 768px and too large inside 1,380px.

To help maintain connectedness, I make a set of fluid grids calculations based on each of the content widths I established earlier. Now I can shift an element’s percentage width up or down when I switch to a new breakpoint and content width. For example:


	300px is 40.984% of 732px
	300px is 31.646% of 948px
	300px is 21.739% of 1,380px


I’ll add all those fluid grid percentages to my grid image and save it for quick reference.

 Showing percentages at all breakpoints (Larger image)

Then I can apply those different percentage widths to elements at each breakpoint using CSS3 media queries. For example, that sidebar division again:

/*  732px, 7-column width */

@media only screen and (min-width: 768px) {

    .content-sub {
        width : 40.983%; /* 300px ÷ 732px = .40983 */ }

}

/*  948px, 9-column width */
@media only screen and (min-width: 992px) {

    .content-sub {
        width : 31.645%; /* 300px ÷ 948px = .31645 */ }

}

/*  1380px, 13-column width */
@media only screen and (min-width: 1382px) {

    .content-sub {
        width : 21.739%; /* 300px ÷ 1380px = .21739 */ }

}

The number of changes you make to a layout at different breakpoints will, of course, depend on the specifics of the design you’re working on. Yes, this is additional work, but the result will be a layout that feels better balanced and within which elements remain in harmony with each other while they respond to new screen or device widths.

Putting the design in responsive web design

Until now, many of the conversations around responsive web design have been about aspects of technical implementation, rather than design. I believe we’re only beginning to understand what’s involved in designing responsively. In future, we’ll likely be making design decisions not just about proportions but also about responsive typography. We’ll also need to learn how to adapt our designs to device characteristics such as touch targets and more.

Sometimes we’ll make decisions to improve function, other times because they make a design ‘feel’ right. You’ll know when you’ve made a right decision. You’ll feel it.

After all, there really is no formula for making great designs.",2011,Andy Clarke,andyclarke,2011-12-23T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2011/theres-no-formula-for-great-designs/,ux
88,"Think First, Code Later","This is a story that’s best told from the end, and it’s probably one you’re all familiar with.

You, or someone just like you, have been building a website, probably as part of a skilled and capable team. You’re a front-end developer, focusing on JavaScript – it’s either your sole responsibility or shared around. It’s quite a big job, been going on for months, and at last it feels like you’re reaching the end of it.

But, in a brief moment of downtime, you step back and take a look at the code as a whole. You notice that the folder called “jQuery plugins” suddenly looks rather full, and maybe there’s evidence of several methods of doing the same thing; there are loads of little niggly fixes in the bug tracker; and every place you use Ajax the structure of the data is slightly different. You sigh, and your shoulders droop slightly, and you think “Yeah, we’ll do that more cleanly next time.”

The thing is, you probably already know how to rewrite the start of this story to make the ending work better. This situation is not really anyone’s fault – it’s just an accumulation of all the things you decided along the way, all the things you agreed you’d fix later that have disappeared into the black hole of technical debt, and accomodating all the “can we just…?” requests from around the team and the client.

So, the solution to this is easy, right? More interminable planning meetings, more tightly controlled and documented specifications, less freedom to innovate, to try out new ideas and enjoy what you’re doing.

Wait, that sounds even less fun than the old way.

Minimum viable planning

Actually, planning and specifications are exactly what you need, but the way you go about them can make a real difference, both to the quality of your code, and the quality of your life as a developer. It can be as simple as being a little more thoughtful before starting on any new piece of functionality. Involve your whole team if possible, or at least those working on what you’re doing. Canvass opinions and work out what the solution to the problem might look like first, rather than coding speculatively to find out.

There are easy ways you can get into this habit of putting the thought and design up front, and it doesn’t have to mean spending more time on the project as a whole. It also doesn’t have to result in reams of functional specifications. Instead, let the code itself form the specification.

As JavaScript applications become more complex, unit testing is becoming ever more important. So embrace it, whether you prefer QUnit, or Mocha, or any of the other JavaScript testing frameworks out there. The TDD (or test-driven development) pattern is all about writing the tests first and then writing functional code to pass those tests; or, if you prefer, code that meets the specification given by the tests.

Sounds like a hassle at first, but once you get into the rhythm of it you should find that the time spent writing tests up front is no greater, and often significantly less, than the time you would have spent fixing bugs afterwards.

If what you’re working on requires an API between client and server (usually Ajax but this can apply to any method of sending or receiving data) then spend a bit of time with the back-end developer to design the data contracts, before either of you cut any code. Work out what the API endpoints are going to be, and what the data structure you’ll get back from a certain endpoint looks like. A mock JSON object documented on a wiki is enough and it can be atomic. Don’t worry about planning the entire project at once, just plan enough to get on with your current tasks.

Definition in this way doesn’t have to make your API immutable – change is still fine – but if you know roughly where you’re heading, then not only can your team’s efforts become more parallel, but you’re far more likely to have an easier time making it all work. And again, you have a specification – the shape of the data – to write your JavaScript against.

Putting everything together, you end up with a logical flow of development, from the specification agreed with the client (your backlog), to the specification agreed with your team (the API contract design), to the specification agreed with your code (your unit tests). Hopefully, there will be ample clues in all of this to inform your front-end library choices, because by then you should have a better picture of what you’re going to need.

What the framework?

As a JavaScript developer predominantly, these are the choices I’m particularly interested in – how and why you use JavaScript libraries and frameworks, both what you expect from them and what you actually get.

If we look back at how web development, and specifically JavaScript development has progressed – from the earliest days of using lines and lines of Dreamweaver code-barf to make an image rollover effect, to today’s large frameworks that handle working with the DOM, Ajax communication and visual effects all in one hit – the purpose of it is clear: to smooth over the inconsistent bumps between browsers and give a solid, reliable, predictable base on which to put our desired functionality.

Understanding what we expect the language as a specification to do, and matching that to what we observe browsers actually doing, and then smoothing out the differences, is a big job. Since the language and the implementations are also changing as we go along, it also feels like a never-ending job. So make full use of this valuable effort. Use jQuery or YUI or anything else you’re comfortable with, but it still pays to think early on about what you need your library to do and what the best choice is to meet that need.

I’ve come in to projects as a fixer and found, to take a recent example, that jQuery UI was being used just to provide a date picker and a modal effect. That’s a lot of code weight to provide two fairly simple pieces of functionality that could easily be covered by smaller plugins. Which isn’t to say that jQuery UI itself is a bad choice, but I could see that it had been included late on just to do those things, whereas a more considered approach would have been to put the library in early and use it more universally.

There are other choices, too. If you automatically throw in jQuery (or whatever your favourite main library is) to a small site with limited functionality, you might only touch a tiny fraction of its scope. In my own development I started looking at what I actually needed from a JavaScript library. For a simple project like What the Framework?, all jQuery needed to do was listen for .ready() and then perform some light DOM selection before handing over to a client-side MVC framework. So perhaps there was another way to go about this while still avoiding the cross-browser headaches.

Deleting jQuery

But the jQuery pattern is compelling and familiar. And once you’re comfortable with something, it’s a bit of an effort to force yourself out of that comfort zone and learn. But looking back at my whole career, I realised that I’ve relearned pretty much everything I do, probably several times, since I started out. So it’s worth keeping in mind that learning and trying new things is how development has advanced to where it is now, and how it will keep advancing in the future.

In the end this lead me to Ender, which is billed as an NPM-style package manager for the browser, letting you search for and manage small, loosely coupled modules and their dependencies, and compile them to one file with a common API.

For What the Framework I ended up with a set of DOM tools, Underscore and Knockout, all minified into 25kb of JavaScript. This compares really well with 32kb minified for jQuery on its own, and Ender’s use of the dollar variable and the jQuery-like syntax in many modules makes switching over a low-friction experience.

On more complex projects, where you’re really going to use all the features of something like jQuery, but want to minimise the loading of other dependencies when you don’t need them, I’ve recently started looking at Jam. This uses the RequireJS pattern to compile commonly used code into a library file and then manage dependencies and bring in others on a per-page basis depending on how you need it. Again, it all comes down to thinking about what you need and using it only when you need it. And the configurability of tools like Ender or Jam allow you to be responsive to changing requirements as your project grows.

There is no right answer

That’s not to say this way of working automatically makes things easier. It doesn’t. On a large, long-running project or one where future functionality is unknown, it’s still hard to predict and plan for everything – at least until crystal balls as a service come about. But by including strong engineering practices in your front-end, and trying to minimise technical debt, you’re at least giving yourself a decent safety net to guard against the “can we just…?” tendencies that are a fact of life.

So, really, this is not an advocation of using a particular technology or framework, because I can’t tell you what works for you or your team. But what I can tell you is that working this way round has done wonders for my productivity and enthusiasm, both for code quality and for trying out new libraries. Give it a go, you might like it!",2012,Stephen Fulljames,stephenfulljames,2012-12-07T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2012/think-first-code-later/,process
160,Tracking Christmas Cheer with Google Charts,"A note from the editors:  Since this article was written Google has retired the Charts API.
                
                
                      
                Let’s get something out in the open: I love statistics. As an informatician I can’t get enough graphs, charts, and numbers. So you can imagine when Google released their Charts API I thought Christmas had come early. I immediately began to draw up graphs for the holiday season using the new API; and using my new found chart-making skills I’ll show you what you can and can’t do with Google Charts.

Mummy, it’s my first chart

The Google Charts API allows you to send data to Google; in return they give you back a nicely-rendered graph. All the hard work is done on Google’s servers — you need only reference an image in your HTML. You pass along the data — the numbers for the charts, axis labels, and so on — in the query string of the image’s URL. If you want to add charts to your blog or web site, there’s probably no quicker way to get started.

Here’s a simple example: if we add the following line to an HTML page:

<img src=""http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?cht=lc&chs=200x125&chd=s:ZreelPuevfgznf2008"" />

Then we’ll see the line graph in Figure 1 appear in our page. That graph is hosted on Google’s own server1: http://chart.apis.google.com/.

Figure 1: A simple example of a line graph created with Google Charts.

If you look at the URL used in the example you’ll notice we’re passing some parameters along in the query string (the bit after the question mark). The query string looks like this:

cht=lc&chs=200x125&chd=s:ZreelPuevfgznf2008

It’s contains everything Google Charts needs to draw the graph.  There are three parameters in the query string:


	cht; this specifies the type of chart Google Charts will generate (in this case, lc is a line chart).
	chs, the value of which is 200x125; this defines the chart’s size (200 pixels wide by 125 pixels high).
	chd, the value of which is s:ZreelPuevfgznf2008; this is the actual chart data, which we’ll discuss in more detail later.


These three parameters are the minimum you need to send to Google Charts in order to create a chart.  There are lots more parameters you can send too (giving you more choice over how a chart is displayed), but you have to include at least these three before a chart can be created. Using these three parameters you can create pie charts, scatter plots, Venn diagrams, bar charts (and more) up to 1,000 pixels wide or 1,000 pixels high (but no more than 300,000 pixels in total).

Christmas pie

After I discovered the option to create a pie chart I instantly thought of graphing all the types of food and beverages that I’ll consume at this year’s Christmas feast. I can represent each item as a percentage of all the food on a pie chart (just thinking about that makes me hungry).

By changing the value of the cht parameter in the image’s query string I can change the chart type from a line chart to a pie chart. Google Charts offers two different types of pie chart: a fancy three-dimensional version and a two-dimensional overhead version. I want to stick with the latter, so I need to change cht=lc to cht=p (the p telling Google Charts to create a pie chart; if you want the three-dimensional version, use cht=p3). As a pie chart is circular I also need to adjust the size of the chart to make it square. Finally, it would be nice to add a title to the graph. I can do this by adding the optional parameter, chtt, to the end of the image URL. I end up with the chart you see in Figure 2.

Figure 2: Pie chart with a title.

To add this chart to your own page, you include the following (notice that you can’t include spaces in URLs, so you need to encode them as plus-signs.):

<img src=""http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?chtt=Food+and+Drink+Consumed+Christmas+2007&cht=p&chs=300x300&chd=s:ZreelPuevfgznf2008"" />

Ok, that’s great, but there are still two things I want to do before I can call this pie chart complete. First I want to label each slice of the pie. And second I want to include the proper data (at the moment the slices are meaningless). If 2007 is anything like 2006, the break down will be roughly as follows:


		
			Egg nog
			10%
		
		
			Christmas Ham
			20%
		
		
			Milk (not including egg nog)
			8%
		
		
			Cookies
			25%
		
		
			Roasted Chestnuts
			5%
		
		
			Chocolate
			3%
		
		
			Various Other Beverages
			15%
		
		
			Various Other Foods
			9%
		
		
			Snacks
			5%
		


I have nine categories of food and drink to be tracked, so I need nine slice labels. To add these to the chart, I use the chl parameter. All nine labels are sent in one value; I use the vertical-pipe character, |,  to separate them. So I need to append the following to the query string:

chl=Egg+nog|Christmas+Ham|Milk+(not+including+egg+nog)|Cookies|Roast+Chestnuts|Chocolate|Various+Other+Beverages|Various+Other+Foods|Snacks

Next I need to add the corresponding percentage values to the chart labels. Encoding the chart data is the trickiest part of the Google Charts API — but by no means complicated. There are three different ways to encode your data on a chart. As I’m only dealing with small numbers, I’m going to use what Google calls simple encoding.

Simple encoding offers a sixty-two value spectrum in which to represent data. Remember the mandatory option, chd, from the first example? The value for this is split into two parts: the type of encoding and the graph data itself.  These two parts are separated with a colon.  To use simple encoding, the first character of the chd option must be a lower case s. Follow this with a colon and everything after it is considered data for the graph.

In simple encoding, you have sixty-two values to represent your data. These values are lowercase and uppercase letters from the Latin alphabet (fifty-two characters in total) and the digits 0 to 9. Each letter of the alphabet represents a single number: A equals 0, B equals 1, and so on up to Z, which equals 25; a equals 26, b equals 27, and so on up to z, which equals 51. The ten digits represent the numbers 52 to 61: 0 equals 52, 1 equals 53, and 9 equals 61.

In the previous two examples we used the string ZreelPuevfgznf2008 as our chart data; the Z is equal to 25, the r is equal to 42, the e is equal to 30, and so on. I want to encode the percentage values 10, 20, 8, 25, 5, 3, 15, 9 and 5, so in simple encoding I would use the string KUIZFDPJF.

If you think figuring this out for each chart may make your head explode, don’t worry: help is out there.

Do you remember I said I needed to change the image dimensions to be square, to accommodate the pie chart? Well now I’m including labels I need even more room. And as I’m in a Christmassy mood I’m going to add some festive colours too.

The optional chco parameter is used to change the chart color. You set this using the same hexadecimal (“hex”) notation found in CSS. So let’s make our pie chart green by adding chco=00AF33 (don’t start it with a hash character as in CSS) to the image URL. If we only specify one hex colour for the pie chart Google Charts will use shades of that colour for each of the slices. To choose your own colours, pass a comma separated list of colours. The “Milk” and “Cookies” slices were consumed together, so we can make those two slices more of a redish colour.  I’ll use shades of green for the other slices. My chco parameter now looks like this:

chco=00AF33,4BB74C,EE2C2C,CC3232,33FF33,66FF66,9AFF9A,C1FFC1,CCFFCC.

After all this, I’m left with the following URL:

http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?chco=00AF33,4BB74C,EE2C2C,CC3232,33FF33,66FF66,9AFF9A,C1FFC1,CCFFCC&chl=Egg+nog|Christmas+Ham|Milk+(not+including+egg+nog)|Cookies|Roast+Chestnuts|Chocolate|Various+Other+Beverages|Various+Other+Foods|Snacks&chtt=Food+and+Drink+Consumed+Christmas+2007&cht=p&chs=600x300&chd=s:KUIZFDPJF

What does that give us?  I’m glad you asked.  I have the rather beautiful 600-pixel wide pie chart you see in Figure 3.

Figure 3: A Christmassy pie chart with labels.

But I don’t like pie charts

The pie chart was invented by the Scottish polymath William Playfair in 1801.  But not everyone is as excited by pie charts as wee Billy, so if you’re an anti-pie-chartist, what can you do?

You can easily reuse the same data but display it as a bar graph in a snap. The first thing we need to do is change the value of the cht parameter from p to bhg. This creates a horizontal bar graph (you can request a vertical bar graph using bvg). The data and labels all remain the same, but we need to decide where the labels will appear. I’ll talk more about how to do all this in the next section. 

In Figure 4 you’ll see the newly-converted bar graph. The URL for the graph is:

http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?cht=bhg&chs=600x300&chd=s:KUIZFDPJF&chxt=x,y&chtt=Food+and+Drink+Consumed+Christmas+2007&chxl=1:|Egg+nog|Christmas+Ham|Milk+(not+including+egg+nog)|Cookies|Roast+Chestnuts|Chocolate|Various+Other+Beverages|Various+Other+Foods|Snacks&chco=00AF33

Figure 4: The pie chart from Figure 3 represented as a bar chart.

Two lines, one graph

Pie charts and bar charts are interesting, but what if I want to compare last year’s Christmas cheer with this year’s? That sounds like I’ll need two lines on one graph.

The code is much the same as the previous examples; the most obvious difference is I need to set up the chart as a line graph. Creating some dummy values for the required parameters, I end up with:

<img src=""http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?chs=800x300&cht=lxy&chd=t:0,100|0,100"" />

The chs=800x300 sets the dimensions of the new chart, while cht=lxy describes the type of chart we are using (in this case a line chart with x and y co-ordinates). For the chart data I’m going to demostrate a different encoding, text encoding. To use this I start the value of the chd parameter with “t:”  instead of “s:”, and follow it with a list of x coordinates, a vertical pipe, |, and a list of y coordinates. Given the URL above, Google Charts will render the chart shown in Figure 5.

Figure 5: A simple line graph with x and y co-ordinates.

To make this graph a little more pleasing to the eye, I can add much the same as I did to the pie chart. I’ll add a chart title. Maybe something like “Projected Christmas Cheer for 2007”. Just as before I would add a chtt parameter to the image URL:

&chtt=Projected+Christmas+Cheer+for+2007

Next, let’s add some labels on the y axis to represent a scale from 0 to 100. On the x axis let’s label for the most important days of December. To do this I need to use the chart axis type parameter, chxt. This allows us to specify the axes and associate some labels with them. As I’m only interested in the y-axis (to the left of the chart) and the x-axis (below the chart), we add chxt=x,y to our image URL.

Now I need my label data. This is slightly more tricky because I want the data evenly spaced without labelling every item. The parameter for labels is chxl, the chart axis label. You match a label to an axis by using a number. So 0:Label1 is the zero index of chxt — in this case the x-axis. 1:Label2 is the first index of chxt — the y-axis. The order of these parameters or labels doesn’t matter as long as you associate them to their chxt correctly.

The next thing to know about chxl is that you can add an empty label. Labels are separated by vertical pipe; if you don’t put any text in a label, you just leave the two vertical pipes empty (“||”) and Google Charts will allocate space but no label.

For our vertical y axis, we want to label only 50% and 100% on the graph and plot them in their respective places. Since the y-axis is the second item, 1: (remember to start counting at zero), we add ten spaces to our image URL, chxl=1:||||||50|||||100 This will output the 50 halfway and the 100 at the top; all the other spaces will be empty.

We can do the same thing to get specific dates along the x-axis as well. Let’s add the 1st of December, St. Nick’s Day (the 6th), Christmas Day, Boxing Day (a holiday common in the UK and the Commonwealth, on the 26th), and the final day of the month, the 31st.  Since this is the x-axis I’ll use 0: as a reference in the chxt parameter tell Google Charts which axis to label. In full, the chxl parameter now looks like:

chxl=1:||||||50|||||100|0:|Dec+1st|||||6th||||10th|||||15th|||||20th|||||25th|26th|||||Dec+31st

That’s pretty.

Before we begin to graph our data, I’ll do one last thing: add some grid lines to the chart so to better connect the data to the labels. The parameter for this is chg, short for chart grid lines. The parameter takes four comma-separated arguments. The first is the x-axis spacing for the grid. I have thirty-one days, so I need thirty vertical lines. The chart is 100% wide, so 3.33 (100 divided by 30) is the required spacing.

As for the y-axis: the axis goes up to 100% but we probably only need to have a horizontal line every 10%, so the required spacing is 10 (100 divided by 10). That is the second argument.

The last two arguments control the dash-style of the grid-lines. The first number is the length of the line dash and the second is the space between the dashes. So 6,3 would mean a six-unit dash with a three-unit space. I like a ratio of 1,3 but you can change this as you wish. Now that I have the four arguments, the chg parameter looks like:

chg=3.333,10,1,3

If I add that to the chart URL I end up with:

http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?chs=800x300&cht=lxy&chd=t:0,100|0,100&chtt=Projected+Christmas+Cheer+for+2007&chxt=x,y&chxl=0:|Dec+1st|||||6th|||||||||||||||||||25th|26th|||||Dec+31st|1:||||||50|||||100&chg=3.3333,10,1,3

Which results in the chart shown in Figure 6.

Figure 6: Chart ready to receive the Christmas cheer values.

Real data

Now the chart is ready I can add historical data from 2006 and current data from 2007.

Having a look at last year’s cheer levels we find some highs and lows through-out the month:


		
			Dec 1st
			Advent starts; life is good
			30%
		
		
			Dec 6th
			St. Nick’s Day, awake to find good things in my shoes
			45%
		
		
			Dec 8th
			Went Christmas carolling, nearly froze
			20%
		
		
			Dec 10th
			Christmas party at work, very nice dinner
			50%
		
		
			Dec 18th
			Panic Christmas shopping, hate rude people
			15%
		
		
			Dec 23rd
			Off Work, home eating holiday food
			80%
		
		
			Dec 25th
			Opened presents, good year, but got socks again from Grandma
			60%
		
		
			Dec 26th
			Boxing Day; we’re off and no one knows why
			70%
		
		
			Dec 28th
			Third day of left overs
			40%
		
		
			Dec 29th
			Procured some fireworks for new years
			55%
		
		
			Dec 31st
			New Year’s Eve
			80%
		


Since I’m plotting data for 2006 and 2007 on the same graph I’ll need two different colours — one for each year’s line — and a key to denote what each colour represents. The key is controlled by the chdl (chart data legend) parameter. Again, each part of the parameter is separated by a vertical pipe, so for two labels I’ll use chdl=2006|2007. I also want to colour-code them, so I’ll need to add the chco as I did for the pie chart. I want a red line and a green line, so I’ll use chco=458B00,CD2626 and add this to the image URL.

Let’s begin to plot the 2006 data on the Chart, replacing our dummy data of chd=t:0,100|0,100 with the correct information. The chd works by first listing all the x coordinates (each separated by a comma), then a vertical pipe, and then all the y coordinates (also comma-separated). The chart is 100% wide, so I need to convert the days into a percentage of the month.

The 1st of December is 0 and the 31st is 100. Everything else is somewhere in between. Our formula is:

(d – 1) × 100 ÷ (31 – 1)

Where d is the day of the month. The formula states that each day will be printed every 3.333 units; so the 6th of December will be printed at 16.665 units. I can repeat the process for the other dates listed to get the following x coordinates: 0,16.7,23.3,33.3,60,76.7,83.3,86.7,93.3,96.7. The y axis coordinates are easy because our scale is 100%, just like our rating, so we can simply copy them across as 30,45,20,50,15,80,60,70,40,55,80. This gives us a final chd value of:

chd=t:0,16.7,23.3,33.3,60,76.7,83.3,86.7,93.3,96.7,100|30,45,20,50,15,80,60,70,40,55,80

Onto 2007: I can put the data for the month so far to see how we are trending.


		
			Dec 1st
			Christmas shopping finished already
			50%
		
		
			Dec 4th
			Computer hard disk drive crashed (not Christmas related accident, but put me in a bad mood)
			10%
		
		
			Dec 6th
			Missed St. Nick’s Day completely due to travelling
			30%
		
		
			Dec 9th
			Dinner with friends before they travel
			55%
		
		
			Dec 11th
			24ways article goes live
			60%
		


Using the same system we did for 2006, I can take the five data points and plot them on the chart. The new x axis values will be 0,10,16.7,26.7 and the new y axis 50,10,30,65. We incorporate those into the image URL by appending these values onto the chd parameter we already have, which then becomes:

chd=t:0,16.7,23.3,33.3,60,76.7,83.3,86.7,93.3,96.7,100|30,45,20,50,15,80,60,70,40,55,80|0,10,16.7,26.7,33.3|50,10,30,55,60

Passing this to Google Charts results in Figure 7.

http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?chs=800x300&cht=lxy&chd=t:0,100|0,100&chtt=Projected+Christmas+Cheer+for+2007&chxt=x,y&chxl=0:|Dec+1st|||||6th|||||||||||||||||||25th|26th|||||Dec+31st|1:||||||50|||||100&chg=3.3333,10,1,3&chd=t:0,16.7,23.3,33.3,60,76.7,83.3,86.7,93.3,96.7,100|30,45,20,50,15,80,60,70,40,55,80|0,10,16.7,26.7,33.3|50,10,30,55,60&chco=458B00,CD2626&chdl=2006|2007

Figure 7: Projected Christmas cheer for 2006 and 2007.

Did someone mention Edward Tufte?

Google Charts are a robust set of chart types that you can create easily and freely using their API. As you can see, you can graph just about anything you want using the line graph, bar charts, scatter plots, venn diagrams and pie charts. One type of chart conspicuously missing from the API is sparklines.  Sparklines were proposed by Edward Tufte as “small, high resolution graphics embedded in a context of words, numbers, images”.  They can be extremely useful, but can you create them in Google Charts?

The answer is: “Yes, but it’s an undocumented feature”. (The usual disclaimer about undocumented features applies.)

If we take our original line graph example, and change the value of the cht parameter from lc (line chart) to lfi (financial line chart) the axis-lines are removed. This allows you to make a chart — a sparkline — small enough to fit into a sentence. Google uses the lfi type all throughout the their financial site, but it’s not yet part of the official API.


		
			MerryChristmas
			
			http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?cht=lfi&chs=100x15&chd=s:MerryChristmas
		
		
			24ways
			
			http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?cht=lfi&chs=100x15&chd=s:24ways&chco=999999
		
		
			HappyHolidays
			
			http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?cht=lfi&chs=100x15&chd=s:HappyHolidays&chco=ff0000
		
		
			HappyNewYear
			
			http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?cht=lfi&chs=100x15&chd=s:HappyNewYear&chco=0000ff
		


Summary

The new Google Charts API is a powerful method for creating charts and graphs of all types. If you apply a little bit of technical skill you can create pie charts, bar graphs, and even sparklines as and when you need them. Now you’ve finished ready the article I hope you waste no more time: go forth and chart!

Further reading


	Google Charts API
	More on Google Charts
	How to handle negative numbers
	12 Days of Christmas Pie Chart


1 In order to remain within the 50,000 requests a day limit the Google Charts API imposes, chart images on this page have been cached and are being served from our own servers. But the URLs work – try them!",2007,Brian Suda,briansuda,2007-12-11T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2007/tracking-christmas-cheer-with-google-charts/,ux
334,Transitional vs. Strict Markup,"When promoting web standards, standardistas often talk about XHTML as being more strict than HTML. In a sense it is, since it requires that all elements are properly closed and that attribute values are quoted. But there are two flavours of XHTML 1.0 (three if you count the Frameset DOCTYPE, which is outside the scope of this article), defined by the Transitional and Strict DOCTYPEs. And HTML 4.01 also comes in those flavours.

The names reveal what they are about: Transitional DOCTYPEs are meant for those making the transition from older markup to modern ways. Strict DOCTYPEs are actually the default – the way HTML 4.01 and XHTML 1.0 were constructed to be used.

A Transitional DOCTYPE may be used when you have a lot of legacy markup that cannot easily be converted to comply with a Strict DOCTYPE. But Strict is what you should be aiming for. It encourages, and in some cases enforces, the separation of structure and presentation, moving the presentational aspects from markup to CSS. From the HTML 4 Document Type Definition:


	This is HTML 4.01 Strict DTD, which excludes the presentation attributes and elements that W3C expects to phase out as support for style sheets matures. Authors should use the Strict DTD when possible, but may use the Transitional DTD when support for presentation attribute and elements is required.


An additional benefit of using a Strict DOCTYPE is that doing so will ensure that browsers use their strictest, most standards compliant rendering modes.

Tommy Olsson provides a good summary of the benefits of using Strict over Transitional in Ten questions for Tommy Olsson at Web Standards Group:


	In my opinion, using a Strict DTD, either HTML 4.01 Strict or XHTML 1.0 Strict, is far more important for the quality of the future web than whether or not there is an X in front of the name. The Strict DTD promotes a separation of structure and presentation, which makes a site so much easier to maintain.


For those looking to start using web standards and valid, semantic markup, it is important to understand the difference between Transitional and Strict DOCTYPEs. For complete listings of the differences between Transitional and Strict DOCTYPEs, see XHTML: Differences between Strict & Transitional, Comparison of Strict and Transitional XHTML, and XHTML1.0 Element Attributes by DTD.

Some of the differences are more likely than others to cause problems for developers moving from a Transitional DOCTYPE to a Strict one, and I’d like to mention a few of those.

Elements that are not allowed in Strict DOCTYPEs


	center
	font
	iframe
	strike
	u


Attributes not allowed in Strict DOCTYPEs


	align (allowed on elements related to tables: col, colgroup, tbody, td, tfoot, th, thead, and tr)
	language
	background
	bgcolor
	border (allowed on table)
	height (allowed on img and object)
	hspace
	name (allowed in HTML 4.01 Strict, not allowed on form and img in XHTML 1.0 Strict)
	noshade
	nowrap
	target
	text, link, vlink, and alink
	vspace
	width (allowed on img, object, table, col, and colgroup)


Content model differences

An element type’s content model describes what may be contained by an instance of the element type. The most important difference in content models between Transitional and Strict is that blockquote, body, and form elements may only contain block level elements. A few examples:


	text and images are not allowed immediately inside the body element, and need to be contained in a block level element like p or div
	input elements must not be direct descendants of a form element
	text in blockquote elements must be wrapped in a block level element like p or div


Go Strict and move all presentation to CSS

Something that can be helpful when doing the transition from Transitional to Strict DOCTYPEs is to focus on what each element of the page you are working on is instead of how you want it to look.

Worry about looks later and get the structure and semantics right first.",2005,Roger Johansson,rogerjohansson,2005-12-13T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2005/transitional-vs-strict-markup/,code
165,Transparent PNGs in Internet Explorer 6,"Newer breeds of browser such as Firefox and Safari have offered support for PNG images with full alpha channel transparency for a few years. With the use of hacks, support has been available in Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6, but the hacks are non-ideal and have been tricky to use. With IE7 winning masses of users from earlier versions over the last year, full PNG alpha-channel transparency is becoming more of a reality for day-to-day use.

However, there are still numbers of IE6 users out there who we can’t leave out in the cold this Christmas, so in this article I’m going to look what we can do to support IE6 users whilst taking full advantage of transparency for the majority of a site’s visitors.

So what’s alpha channel transparency?

Cast your minds back to the Ghost of Christmas Past, the humble GIF. Images in GIF format offer transparency, but that transparency is either on or off for any given pixel. Each pixel’s either fully transparent, or a solid colour. In GIF, transparency is effectively just a special colour you can chose for a pixel.

The PNG format tackles the problem rather differently. As well as having any colour you chose, each pixel also carries a separate channel of information detailing how transparent it is. This alpha channel enables a pixel to be fully transparent, fully opaque, or critically, any step in between.

This enables designers to produce images that can have, for example, soft edges without any of the ‘halo effect’ traditionally associated with GIF transparency. If you’ve ever worked on a site that has different colour schemes and therefore requires multiple versions of each graphic against a different colour, you’ll immediately see the benefit. 

What’s perhaps more interesting than that, however, is the extra creative freedom this gives designers in creating beautiful sites that can remain web-like in their ability to adjust, scale and reflow.

The Internet Explorer problem

Up until IE7, there has been no fully native support for PNG alpha channel transparency in Internet Explorer. However, since IE5.5 there has been some support in the form of proprietary filter called the AlphaImageLoader. Internet Explorer filters can be applied directly in your CSS (for both inline and background images), or by setting the same CSS property with JavaScript. 

CSS:

img {
	filter: progid:DXImageTransform.Microsoft.AlphaImageLoader(...);
}

JavaScript:

img.style.filter = ""progid:DXImageTransform.Microsoft.AlphaImageLoader(...)"";

That may sound like a problem solved, but all is not as it may appear. Firstly, as you may realise, there’s no CSS property called filter in the W3C CSS spec. It’s a proprietary extension added by Microsoft that could potentially cause other browsers to reject your entire CSS rule. 

Secondly, AlphaImageLoader does not magically add full PNG transparency support so that a PNG in the page will just start working. Instead, when applied to an element in the page, it draws a new rendering surface in the same space that element occupies and loads a PNG into it. If that sounds weird, it’s because that’s precisely what it is. However, by and large the result is that PNGs with an alpha channel can be accommodated.

The pitfalls

So, whilst support for PNG transparency in IE5.5 and 6 is possible, it’s not without its problems.

Background images cannot be positioned or repeated

The AlphaImageLoader does work for background images, but only for the simplest of cases. If your design requires the image to be tiled (background-repeat) or positioned (background-position) you’re out of luck. The AlphaImageLoader allows you to set a sizingMethod to either crop the image (if necessary) or to scale it to fit. Not massively useful, but something at least.

Delayed loading and resource use

The AlphaImageLoader can be quite slow to load, and appears to consume more resources than a standard image when applied. Typically, you’d need to add thousands of GIFs or JPEGs to a page before you saw any noticeable impact on the browser, but with the AlphaImageLoader filter applied Internet Explorer can become sluggish after just a handful of alpha channel PNGs.

The other noticeable effect is that as more instances of the AlphaImageLoader are applied, the longer it takes to render the PNGs with their transparency. The user sees the PNG load in its original non-supported state (with black or grey areas where transparency should be) before one by one the filter kicks in and makes them properly transparent.

Both the issue of sluggish behaviour and delayed load only really manifest themselves with volume and size of image. Use just a couple of instances and it’s fine, but be careful adding more than five or six. As ever, test, test, test.

Links become unclickable, forms unfocusable 

This is a big one. There’s a bug/weirdness with AlphaImageLoader that sometimes prevents interaction with links and forms when a PNG background image is used. This is sometimes reported as a z-index issue, but I don’t believe it is. Rather, it’s an artefact of that weird way the filter gets applied to the document almost outside of the normal render process. 

Often this can be solved by giving the links or form elements hasLayout using position: relative; where possible. However, this doesn’t always work and the non-interaction problem cannot always be solved. You may find yourself having to go back to the drawing board.

Sidestepping the danger zones

Frankly, it’s pretty bad news if you design a site, have that design signed off by your client, build it and then find out only at the end (because you don’t know what might trigger a problem) that your search field can’t be focused in IE6. That’s an absolute nightmare, and whilst it’s not likely to happen, it’s possible that it might. It’s happened to me. So what can you do?

The best approach I’ve found to this scenario is


	Isolate the PNG or PNGs that are causing the problem. Step through the PNGs in your page, commenting them out one by one and retesting. Typically it’ll be the nearest PNG to the problem, so try there first. Keep going until you can click your links or focus your form fields.
	This is where you really need luck on your side, because you’re going to have to fake it. This will depend on the design of the site, but some way or other create a replacement GIF or JPEG image that will give you an acceptable result. Then use conditional comments to serve that image to only users of IE older than version 7.


A hack, you say? Well, you started it chum.

Applying AlphaImageLoader

Because the filter property is invalid CSS, the safest pragmatic approach is to apply it selectively with JavaScript for only Internet Explorer versions 5.5 and 6. This helps ensure that by default you’re serving standard CSS to browsers that support both the CSS and PNG standards correct, and then selectively patching up only the browsers that need it. 

Several years ago, Aaron Boodman wrote and released a script called sleight for doing just that. However, sleight dealt only with images in the page, and not background images applied with CSS. Building on top of Aaron’s work, I hacked sleight and came up with bgsleight for applying the filter to background images instead. That was in 2003, and over the years I’ve made a couple of improvements here and there to keep it ticking over and to resolve conflicts between sleight and bgsleight when used together. However, with alpha channel PNGs becoming much more widespread, it’s time for a new version.

Introducing SuperSleight

SuperSleight adds a number of new and useful features that have come from the day-to-day needs of working with PNGs.


	Works with both inline and background images, replacing the need for both sleight and bgsleight
	Will automatically apply position: relative to links and form fields if they don’t already have position set. (Can be disabled.)
	Can be run on the entire document, or just a selected part where you know the PNGs are. This is better for performance.
	Detects background images set to no-repeat and sets the scaleMode to crop rather than scale.
	Can be re-applied by any other JavaScript in the page – useful if new content has been loaded by an Ajax request.


  Download SuperSleight 

Implementation

Getting SuperSleight running on a page is quite straightforward, you just need to link the supplied JavaScript file (or the minified version if you prefer) into your document inside conditional comments so that it is delivered to only Internet Explorer 6 or older.

<!--[if lte IE 6]>
	<script type=""text/javascript"" src=""supersleight-min.js""></script>
<![endif]-->

Supplied with the JavaScript is a simple transparent GIF file. The script replaces the existing PNG with this before re-layering the PNG over the top using AlphaImageLoaded. You can change the name or path of the image in the top of the JavaScript file, where you’ll also find the option to turn off the adding of position: relative to links and fields if you don’t want that.

The script is kicked off with a call to supersleight.init() at the bottom. The scope of the script can be limited to just one part of the page by passing an ID of an element to supersleight.limitTo(). And that’s all there is to it.

Update March 2008: a version of this script as a jQuery plugin is also now available.",2007,Drew McLellan,drewmclellan,2007-12-01T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2007/supersleight-transparent-png-in-ie6/,code
252,Turn Jekyll up to Eleventy,"Sometimes it pays not to over complicate things. While many of the sites we use on a daily basis require relational databases to manage their content and dynamic pages to respond to user input, for smaller, simpler sites, serving pre-rendered static HTML is usually a much cheaper — and more secure — option. 
The JAMstack (JavaScript, reusable APIs, and prebuilt Markup) is a popular marketing term for this way of building websites, but in some ways it’s a return to how things were in the early days of the web, before developers started tinkering with CGI scripts or Personal HomePage. Indeed, my website has always served pre-rendered HTML; first with the aid of Movable Type and more recently using Jekyll, which Anna wrote about in 2013.
By combining three approachable languages — Markdown for content, YAML for data and Liquid for templating — the ergonomics of Jekyll found broad appeal, influencing the design of the many static site generators that followed. But Jekyll is not without its faults. Aside from notoriously slow build times, it’s also built using Ruby. While this is an elegant programming language, it is yet another ecosystem to understand and manage, and often alongside one we already use: JavaScript. For all my time using Jekyll, I would think to myself “this, but in Node”. Thankfully, one of Santa’s elves (Zach Leatherman) granted my Atwoodian wish and placed such a static site generator under my tree.
Introducing Eleventy
Eleventy is a more flexible alternative Jekyll. Besides being written in Node, it’s less strict about how to organise files and, in addition to Liquid, supports other templating languages like EJS, Pug, Handlebars and Nunjucks. Best of all, its build times are significantly faster (with future optimisations promising further gains).
As content is saved using the familiar combination of YAML front matter and Markdown, transitioning from Jekyll to Eleventy may seem like a reasonable idea. Yet as I’ve discovered, there are a few gotchas. If you’ve been considering making the switch, here are a few tips and tricks to help you on your way1.
Note: Throughout this article, I’ll be converting Matt Cone’s Markdown Guide site as an example. If you want to follow along, start by cloning the git repository, and then change into the project directory:
git clone https://github.com/mattcone/markdown-guide.git
cd markdown-guide
Before you start
If you’ve used tools like Grunt, Gulp or Webpack, you’ll be familiar with Node.js but, if you’ve been exclusively using Jekyll to compile your assets as well as generate your HTML, now’s the time to install Node.js and set up your project to work with its package manager, NPM:

Install Node.js:

Mac: If you haven’t already, I recommend installing Homebrew, a package manager for the Mac. Then in the Terminal type brew install node.
Windows: Download the Windows installer from the Node.js website and follow the instructions.

Initiate NPM: Ensure you are in the directory of your project and then type npm init. This command will ask you a few questions before creating a file called package.json. Like RubyGems’s Gemfile, this file contains a list of your project’s third-party dependencies.

If you’re managing your site with Git, make sure to add node_modules to your .gitignore file too. Unlike RubyGems, NPM stores its dependencies alongside your project files. This folder can get quite large, and as it contains binaries compiled to work with the host computer, it shouldn’t be version controlled. Eleventy will also honour the contents of this file, meaning anything you want Git to ignore, Eleventy will ignore too.
Installing Eleventy
With Node.js installed and your project setup to work with NPM, we can now install Eleventy as a dependency:
npm install --save-dev @11ty/eleventy
If you open package.json you should see the following:
…
""devDependencies"": {
  ""@11ty/eleventy"": ""^0.6.0""
}
…
We can now run Eleventy from the command line using NPM’s npx command. For example, to covert the README.md file to HTML, we can run the following:
npx eleventy --input=README.md --formats=md
This command will generate a rendered HTML file at _site/README/index.html. Like Jekyll, Eleventy shares the same default name for its output directory (_site), a pattern we will see repeatedly during the transition.
Configuration
Whereas Jekyll uses the declarative YAML syntax for its configuration file, Eleventy uses JavaScript. This allows its options to be scripted, enabling some powerful possibilities as we’ll see later on.
We’ll start by creating our configuration file (.eleventy.js), copying the relevant settings in _config.yml over to their equivalent options:
module.exports = function(eleventyConfig) {
  return {
    dir: {
      input: ""./"",      // Equivalent to Jekyll's source property
      output: ""./_site"" // Equivalent to Jekyll's destination property
    }
  };
};
A few other things to bear in mind:


Whereas Jekyll allows you to list folders and files to ignore under its exclude property, Eleventy looks for these values inside a file called .eleventyignore (in addition to .gitignore).

By default, Eleventy uses markdown-it to parse Markdown. If your content uses advanced syntax features (such as abbreviations, definition lists and footnotes), you’ll need to pass Eleventy an instance of this (or another) Markdown library configured with the relevant options and plugins.

Layouts
One area Eleventy currently lacks flexibility is the location of layouts, which must reside within the _includes directory (see this issue on GitHub).
Wanting to keep our layouts together, we’ll move them from _layouts to _includes/layouts, and then update references to incorporate the layouts sub-folder. We could update the layout: frontmatter property in each of our content files, but another option is to create aliases in Eleventy’s config:
module.exports = function(eleventyConfig) {
  // Aliases are in relation to the _includes folder
  eleventyConfig.addLayoutAlias('about', 'layouts/about.html');
  eleventyConfig.addLayoutAlias('book', 'layouts/book.html');
  eleventyConfig.addLayoutAlias('default', 'layouts/default.html');

  return {
    dir: {
      input: ""./"",
      output: ""./_site""
    }
  };
}
Determining which template language to use
Eleventy will transform Markdown (.md) files using Liquid by default, but we’ll need to tell Eleventy how to process other files that are using Liquid templates. There are a few ways to achieve this, but the easiest is to use file extensions. In our case, we have some files in our api folder that we want to process with Liquid and output as JSON. By appending the .liquid file extension (i.e. basic-syntax.json becomes basic-syntax.json.liquid), Eleventy will know what to do.
Variables
On the surface, Jekyll and Eleventy appear broadly similar, but as each models its content and data a little differently, some template variables will need updating.
Site variables
Alongside build settings, Jekyll let’s you store common values in its configuration file which can be accessed in our templates via the site.* namespace. For example, in our Markdown Guide, we have the following values:
title: ""Markdown Guide""
url: https://www.markdownguide.org
baseurl: """"
repo: http://github.com/mattcone/markdown-guide
comments: false
author:
  name: ""Matt Cone""
og_locale: ""en_US""
Eleventy’s configuration uses JavaScript which is not suited to storing values like this. However, like Jekyll, we can use data files to store common values. If we add our site-wide values to a JSON file inside a folder called _data and name this file site.json, we can keep the site.* namespace and leave our variables unchanged.
{
  ""title"": ""Markdown Guide"",
  ""url"": ""https://www.markdownguide.org"",
  ""baseurl"": """",
  ""repo"": ""http://github.com/mattcone/markdown-guide"",
  ""comments"": false,
  ""author"": {
    ""name"": ""Matt Cone""
  },
  ""og_locale"": ""en_US""
}
Page variables
The table below shows a mapping of common page variables. As a rule, frontmatter properties are accessed directly, whereas derived metadata values (things like URLs, dates etc.) get prefixed with the page.* namespace:



Jekyll
Eleventy




page.url
page.url


page.date
page.date


page.path
page.inputPath


page.id
page.outputPath


page.name
page.fileSlug


page.content
content


page.title
title


page.foobar
foobar



When iterating through pages, frontmatter values are available via the data object while content is available via templateContent:



Jekyll
Eleventy




item.url
item.url


item.date
item.date


item.path
item.inputPath


item.name
item.fileSlug


item.id
item.outputPath


item.content
item.templateContent


item.title
item.data.title


item.foobar
item.data.foobar



Ideally the discrepancy between page and item variables will change in a future version (see this GitHub issue), making it easier to understand the way Eleventy structures its data.
Pagination variables
Whereas Jekyll’s pagination feature is limited to paginating posts on one page, Eleventy allows you to paginate any collection of documents or data. Given this disparity, the changes to pagination are more significant, but this table shows a mapping of equivalent variables:



Jekyll
Eleventy




paginator.page
pagination.pageNumber


paginator.per_page
pagination.size


paginator.posts
pagination.items


paginator.previous_page_path
pagination.previousPageHref


paginator.next_page_path
pagination.nextPageHref



Filters
Although Jekyll uses Liquid, it provides a set of filters that are not part of the core Liquid library. There are quite a few — more than can be covered by this article — but you can replicate them by using Eleventy’s addFilter configuration option. Let’s convert two used by our Markdown Guide: jsonify and where.
The jsonify filter outputs an object or string as valid JSON. As JavaScript provides a native JSON method, we can use this in our replacement filter. addFilter takes two arguments; the first is the name of the filter and the second is the function to which we will pass the content we want to transform:
// {{ variable | jsonify }}
eleventyConfig.addFilter('jsonify', function (variable) {
  return JSON.stringify(variable);
});
Jekyll’s where filter is a little more complicated in that it takes two additional arguments: the key to look for, and the value it should match:
{{ site.members | where: ""graduation_year"",""2014"" }}
To account for this, instead of passing one value to the second argument of addFilter, we can instead pass three: the array we want to examine, the key we want to look for and the value it should match:
// {{ array | where: key,value }}
eleventyConfig.addFilter('where', function (array, key, value) {
  return array.filter(item => {
    const keys = key.split('.');
    const reducedKey = keys.reduce((object, key) => {
      return object[key];
    }, item);

    return (reducedKey === value ? item : false);
  });
});
There’s quite a bit going on within this filter, but I’ll try to explain. Essentially we’re examining each item in our array, reducing key (passed as a string using dot notation) so that it can be parsed correctly (as an object reference) before comparing its value to value. If it matches, item remains in the returned array, else it’s removed. Phew!
Includes
As with filters, Jekyll provides a set of tags that aren’t strictly part of Liquid either. This includes one of the most useful, the include tag. LiquidJS, the library Eleventy uses, does provide an  include tag, but one using the slightly different syntax defined by Shopify. If you’re not passing variables to your includes, everything should work without modification. Otherwise, note that whereas with Jekyll you would do this:
<!-- page.html -->
{% include include.html value=""key"" %}

<!-- include.html -->
{{ include.value }}
in Eleventy, you would do this:
<!-- page.html -->
{% include ""include.html"", value: ""key"" %}

<!-- include.html -->
{{ value }}
A downside of Shopify’s syntax is that variable assignments are no longer scoped to the include and can therefore leak; keep this in mind when converting your templates as you may need to make further adjustments.
Tweaking Liquid
You may have noticed in the above example that LiquidJS expects the names of included files to be quoted (else it treats them as variables). We could update our templates to add quotes around file names (the recommended approach), but we could also disable this behaviour by setting LiquidJS’s dynamicPartials option to false. Additionally, Eleventy doesn’t support the include_relative tag, meaning you can’t include files relative to the current document. However, LiquidJS does let us define multiple paths to look for included files via its root option. 
Thankfully, Eleventy allows us to pass options to LiquidJS:
eleventyConfig.setLiquidOptions({
  dynamicPartials: false,
  root: [
    '_includes',
    '.'
  ]
});
Collections
Jekyll’s collections feature lets authors create arbitrary collections of documents beyond pages and posts. Eleventy provides a similar feature, but in a far more powerful way.
Collections in Jekyll
In Jekyll, creating collections requires you to add the name of your collections to _config.yml and create corresponding folders in your project. Our Markdown Guide has two collections:
collections:
  - basic-syntax
  - extended-syntax
These correspond to the folders _basic-syntax and _extended-syntax whose content we can iterate over like so:
{% for syntax in site.extended-syntax %}
  {{ syntax.title }}
{% endfor %}
Collections in Eleventy
There are two ways you can set up collections in 11ty. The first, and most straightforward, is to use the tag property in content files:
---
title: Strikethrough
syntax-id: strikethrough
syntax-summary: ""~~The world is flat.~~""
tag: extended-syntax
---
We can then iterate over tagged content like this:
{% for syntax in collections.extended-syntax %}
  {{ syntax.data.title }}
{% endfor %}
Eleventy also allows us to configure collections programmatically. For example, instead of using tags, we can search for files using a glob pattern (a way of specifying a set of filenames to search for using wildcard characters):
eleventyConfig.addCollection('basic-syntax', collection => {
  return collection.getFilteredByGlob('_basic-syntax/*.md');
});

eleventyConfig.addCollection('extended-syntax', collection => {
  return collection.getFilteredByGlob('_extended-syntax/*.md');
});
We can extend this further. For example, say we wanted to sort a collection by the display_order property in our document’s frontmatter. We could take the results of collection.getFilteredByGlob and then use JavaScript’s sort method to sort the result:
eleventyConfig.addCollection('example', collection => {
  return collection.getFilteredByGlob('_examples/*.md').sort((a, b) => {
    return a.data.display_order - b.data.display_order;
  });
});
Hopefully, this gives you just a hint of what’s possible using this approach.
Using directory data to manage defaults
By default, Eleventy will maintain the structure of your content files when generating your site. In our case, that means /_basic-syntax/lists.md is generated as /_basic-syntax/lists/index.html. Like Jekyll, we can change where files are saved using the permalink property. For example, if we want the URL for this page to be /basic-syntax/lists.html we can add the following:
---
title: Lists
syntax-id: lists
api: ""no""
permalink: /basic-syntax/lists.html
---
Again, this is probably not something we want to manage on a file-by-file basis but again, Eleventy has features that can help: directory data and permalink variables.
For example, to achieve the above for all content stored in the _basic-syntax folder, we can create a JSON file that shares the name of that folder and sits inside it, i.e. _basic-syntax/_basic-syntax.json and set our default values. For permalinks, we can use Liquid templating to construct our desired path:
{
  ""layout"": ""syntax"",
  ""tag"": ""basic-syntax"",
  ""permalink"": ""basic-syntax/{{ title | slug }}.html""
}
However, Markdown Guide doesn’t publish syntax examples at individual permanent URLs, it merely uses content files to store data. So let’s change things around a little. No longer tied to Jekyll’s rules about where collection folders should be saved and how they should be labelled, we’ll move them into a folder called _content:
markdown-guide
└── _content
    ├── basic-syntax
    ├── extended-syntax
    ├── getting-started
    └── _content.json
We will also add a directory data file (_content.json) inside this folder. As directory data is applied recursively, setting permalink to false will mean all content in this folder and its children will no longer be published:
{
  ""permalink"": false
}
Static files
Eleventy only transforms files whose template language it’s familiar with. But often we may have static assets that don’t need converting, but do need copying to the destination directory. For this, we can use pass-through file copy. In our configuration file, we tell Eleventy what folders/files to copy with the addPassthroughCopy option. Then in the return statement, we enable this feature by setting passthroughFileCopy to true:
module.exports = function(eleventyConfig) {
  …

  // Copy the `assets` directory to the compiled site folder
  eleventyConfig.addPassthroughCopy('assets');

  return {
    dir: {
      input: ""./"",
      output: ""./_site""
    },
    passthroughFileCopy: true
  };
}
Final considerations
Assets
Unlike Jekyll, Eleventy provides no support for asset compilation or bundling scripts — we have plenty of choices in that department already. If you’ve been using Jekyll to compile Sass files into CSS, or CoffeeScript into Javascript, you will need to research alternative options, options which are beyond the scope of this article, sadly.
Publishing to GitHub Pages
One of the benefits of Jekyll is its deep integration with GitHub Pages. To publish an Eleventy generated site — or any site not built with Jekyll — to GitHub Pages can be quite involved, but typically involves copying the generated site to the gh-pages branch or including that branch as a submodule. Alternatively, you could use a continuous integration service like Travis or CircleCI and push the generated site to your web server. It’s enough to make your head spin! Perhaps for this reason, a number of specialised static site hosts have emerged such as Netlify and Google Firebase. But remember; you can publish a static site almost anywhere!

Going one louder
If you’ve been considering making the switch, I hope this brief overview has been helpful. But it also serves as a reminder why it can be prudent to avoid jumping aboard bandwagons. 
While it’s fun to try new software and emerging technologies, doing so can require a lot of work and compromise. For all of Eleventy’s appeal, it’s only a year old so has little in the way of an ecosystem of plugins or themes. It also only has one maintainer. Jekyll on the other hand is a mature project with a large community of maintainers and contributors supporting it.
I moved my site to Eleventy because the slowness and inflexibility of Jekyll was preventing me from doing the things I wanted to do. But I also had time to invest in the transition. After reading this guide, and considering the specific requirements of your project, you may decide to stick with Jekyll, especially if the output will essentially stay the same. And that’s perfectly fine! 
But these go to 11.




Information provided is correct as of Eleventy v0.6.0 and Jekyll v3.8.5 ↩",2018,Paul Lloyd,paulrobertlloyd,2018-12-11T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2018/turn-jekyll-up-to-eleventy/,content
174,Type-Inspired Interfaces,"One of the things that terrifies me most about a new project is the starting point. How is the content laid out? What colors do I pick? Once things like that are decided, it becomes significantly easier to continue design, but it’s the blank page where I spend the most time.

To that end, I often start by choosing type. I don’t need to worry about colors or layout or anything else… just the right typefaces that support the art direction. (This article won’t focus on how to choose a typeface, but there are some really great resources if you interested in that sort of thing.)

And just like that, all your work is done. “Hold it just a second,” you might say. “All I’ve done is pick type. I still have to do the rest!”

To which I would reply, “Silly rabbit. You already have!” You see, picking the right typeface gets you farther than you might think. Here are a few tips on taking cues from type to design interfaces and interface elements.

Perfecting Web 2.0

If you’re going for that beloved rounded corner look, you might class it up a bit by choosing the wonderful Omnes Pro by Joshua Darden. As the typeface already has a rounded aesthetic, making buttons that fit the style should be pretty easy.

I’ve found that using multiples helps to keep your interfaces looking balanced and proportional. Noticing that the top left edge of the letter “P” has about an 12px corner radius, let’s choose a 24px radius for our button (a multiple of 2), so that we get proper rounded corners. By taking mathematical measurements from the typeface, our button looks more thought out than just “place arbitrary text on arbitrarily-sized button.” Pretty easy, eh?



What’s in a name(plate)?

Rounded buttons are pretty popular buttons nowadays, so let’s try something a bit more stylized.

Have a gander at Brothers, a sturdy face from Emigre. The chiseled edges give us a perfect cue for a stylized button. Using the same slope, you can make plated-looking buttons that fit a different kind of style.



Headlining

You might even take some cues from the style of the typeface itself. Didone serifs are known for their lack of bracketsーthat is, a gradual transition from the stem to the serif. Instead, they typically connect at a right angle. Another common characteristic is the high contrast in the strokes: very thick stems, very thin serifs.

So, when using a high contrast typeface, you can use it to your advantage to enhance hierarchy. Following our “multiples” guideline, a 12px measurement from the stems helps us create a top rule with a height of 24px (a multiple of 2). We can take the exact 1px measurement from the serif—a multiple of 1—to create the bottom rule. Voilà! I use this technique a lot.



Swashbucklers

And don’t forget the importance of visual “speed bumps” to break up long passages of text. A beautiful face like Alejandro Paul’s Ministry Script has over a thousand characters that can be manipulated or even combined to create elegant interface elements. Altering the partial differential character (∂) creates a delightful ornament that can help to guide the eye through content.



Stagger & Swagger

What about layout? How can we use typography to inform how our content is displayed?

Let’s take a typeface like Assembler. We might use this for a design that needs to feel uneasy or uncomfortable. In design terms, that might translate into using irregular shapes and asymmetry. Using the proportional distances and degrees from the perpendiculars, we could easily create a multi-column layout that jives with the general tone. And for all you skeptics that don’t think a layout like this is doable on the web, stranger things have happened.

 Background texture generously offered by Bittbox.

Overall Design Direction

Finally, your typography could impact the entire look of the site, from the navigation to the interaction and everything in between. Check out how the (now-defunct) Nike Free site’s typography echoes the product itself, and in turn influences the navigation.



Find Your Type

With thousands of fonts to choose from, the possibilities are ridiculously open. From angles to radii to color to weight, you’ve got endless fodder before you. Great type designers spent countless hours slaving over these detailed letterforms; take advantage of it! Don’t feel like you have to limit yourself to the same old Helvetica and wet floors… unless your design calls for it. 

Happy hunting!",2009,Dan Mall,danmall,2009-12-07T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2009/type-inspired-interfaces/,design
148,Typesetting Tables,"Tables have suffered in recent years on the web. They were used for laying out web pages. Then, following the Web Standards movement, they’ve been renamed by the populous as `data tables’ to ensure that we all know what they’re for. There have been some great tutorials for the designing tables using CSS for presentation and focussing on the semantics in the displaying of data in the correct way. However, typesetting tables is a subtle craft that has hardly had a mention.

Table design can often end up being a technical exercise. What data do we need to display? Where is the data coming from and what form will it take? When was the last time your heard someone talk about lining numerals? Or designing to the reading direction?

Tables are not read like sentences

When a reader looks at, and tries to understand, tabular data, they’re doing a bunch of things at the same time.


	Generally, they’re task based; they’re looking for something.
	They are reading horizontally AND vertically


Reading a table is not like reading a paragraph in a novel, and therefore shouldn’t be typeset in the same way. Designing tables is information design, it’s functional typography—it’s not a time for eye candy.

Typesetting tables

Typesetting great looking tables is largely an exercise in restraint. Minimal interference with the legibility of the table should be in the forefront of any designers mind.

When I’m designing tables I apply some simple rules:


	Plenty of negative space
	Use the right typeface
	Go easy on the background tones, unless you’re giving reading direction visual emphasis
	Design to the reading direction


By way of explanation, here are those rules as applied to the following badly typeset table.

Your default table

This table is a mess. There is no consideration for the person trying to read it. Everything is too tight. The typeface is wrong. It’s flat. A grim table indeed.



Let’s see what we can do about that.

Plenty of negative space

The badly typeset table has been set with default padding. There has been little consideration for the ascenders and descenders in the type interfering with the many horizontal rules.

The first thing we do is remove most of the lines, or rules. You don’t need them – the data in the rows forms its own visual rules. Now, with most of the rules removed, the ones that remain mean something; they are indicating some kind of hierarchy to the help the reader understand what the different table elements mean – in this case the column headings.



Now we need to give the columns and rows more negative space. Note the framing of the column headings. I’m giving them more room at the bottom. This negative space is active—it’s empty for a reason. The extra air in here also gives more hierarchy to the column headings.



Use the right typeface

The default table is set in a serif typeface. This isn’t ideal for a couple of reasons. This serif typeface has a standard set of text numerals. These dip below the baseline and are designed for using figures within text, not on their own. What you need to use is a typeface with lining numerals. These align to the baseline and are more legible when used for tables.



Sans serif typefaces generally have lining numerals. They are also arguably more legible when used in tables.

Go easy on the background tones, unless you’re giving reading direction visual emphasis 

We’ve all seen background tones on tables. They have their use, but my feeling is that use should be functional and not decorative.

If you have a table that is long, but only a few columns wide, then alternate row shading isn’t that useful for showing the different lines of data. It’s a common misconception that alternate row shading is to increase legibility on long tables. That’s not the case. Shaded rows are to aid horizontal reading across multiple table columns. On wide tables they are incredibly useful for helping the reader find what they want.



Background tone can also be used to give emphasis to the reading direction. If we want to emphasis a column, that can be given a background tone.



Hierarchy

As I said earlier, people may be reading a table vertically, and horizontally in order to find what they want. Sometimes, especially if the table is complex, we need to give them a helping hand.

Visually emphasising the hierarchy in tables can help the reader scan the data. Column headings are particularly important. Column headings are often what a reader will go to first, so we need to help them understand that the column headings are different to the stuff beneath them, and we also need to give them more visual importance. We can do this by making them bold, giving them ample negative space, or by including a thick rule above them. We can also give the row titles the same level of emphasis.



In addition to background tones, you can give emphasis to reading direction by typesetting those elements in bold. You shouldn’t use italics—with sans serif typefaces the difference is too subtle.

So, there you have it. A couple of simple guidelines to make your tables cleaner and more readable.",2007,Mark Boulton,markboulton,2007-12-07T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2007/typesetting-tables/,design
16,URL Rewriting for the Fearful,"I think it was Marilyn Monroe who said, “If you can’t handle me at my worst, please just fix these rewrite rules, I’m getting an internal server error.” Even the blonde bombshell hated configuring URL rewrites on her website, and I think most of us know where she was coming from.

The majority of website projects I work on require some amount of URL rewriting, and I find it mildly enjoyable — I quite like a good rewrite rule. I suspect you may not share my glee, so in this article we’re going to go back to basics to try to make the whole rigmarole more understandable.

When we think about URL rewriting, usually that means adding some rules to an .htaccess file for an Apache web server. As that’s the most common case, that’s what I’ll be sticking to here. If you work with a different server, there’s often documentation specifically for translating from Apache’s mod_rewrite rules. I even found an automatic converter for nginx.

This isn’t going to be a comprehensive guide to every URL rewriting problem you might ever have. That would take us until Christmas. If you consider yourself a trial-and-error dabbler in the HTTP 500-infested waters of URL rewriting, then hopefully this will provide a little bit more of a basis to help you figure out what you’re doing. If you’ve ever found yourself staring at the white screen of death after screwing up your .htaccess file, don’t worry. As Michael Jackson once insipidly whined, you are not alone.

The basics

Rewrite rules form part of the Apache web server’s configuration for a website, and can be placed in a number of different locations as part of your virtual host configuration. By far the simplest and most portable option is to use an .htaccess file in your website root. Provided your server has mod_rewrite available, all you need to do to kick things off in your .htaccess file is:

RewriteEngine on

The general formula for a rewrite rule is:

RewriteRule URL/to/match URL/to/use/if/it/matches [options]

When we talk about URL rewriting, we’re normally talking about one of two things: redirecting the browser to a different URL; or rewriting the URL internally to use a particular file. We’ll look at those in turn.

Redirects

Redirects match an incoming URL, and then redirect the user’s browser to a different address. These can be useful for maintaining legacy URLs if content changes location as part of a site redesign. Redirecting the old URL to the new location makes sure that any incoming links, such as those from search engines, continue to work. 

In 1998, Sir Tim Berners-Lee wrote that Cool URIs don’t change, encouraging us all to go the extra mile to make sure links keep working forever. I think that sometimes it’s fine to move things around — especially to correct bad URL design choices of the past — provided that you can do so while keeping those old URLs working. That’s where redirects can help.

A redirect might look like this

RewriteRule ^article/used/to/be/here.php$ /article/now/lives/here/ [R=301,L]

Rewriting

By default, web servers closely map page URLs to the files in your site. On receiving a request for http://example.com/about/history.html the server goes to the configured folder for the example.com website, and then goes into the about folder and returns the history.html file.

A rewrite rule changes that process by breaking the direct relationship between the URL and the file system. “When there’s a request for /about/history.html” a rewrite rule might say, “use the file /about_section.php instead.”

This opens up lots of possibilities for creative ways to map URLs to the files that know how to serve up the page. Most MVC frameworks will have a single rule to rewrite all page URLs to one single file. That file will be a script which kicks off the framework to figure out what to do to serve the page.

RewriteRule ^for/this/url/$ /use/this/file.php [L] 

Matching patterns

By now you’ll have noted the weird ^ and $ characters wrapped around the URL we’re trying to match. That’s because what we’re actually using here is a pattern. Technically, it is what’s called a Perl Compatible Regular Expression (PCRE) or simply a regex or regexp. We’ll call it a pattern because we’re not animals.

What are these patterns? If I asked you to enter your credit card expiry date as MM/YY then chances are you’d wonder what I wanted your credit card details for, but you’d know that I wanted a two-digit month, a slash, and a two-digit year. That’s not a regular expression, but it’s the same idea: using some placeholder characters to define the pattern of the input you’re trying to match.

We’ve already met two regexp characters.


	^
	Matches the beginning of a string
	$
	Matches the end of a string


When a pattern starts with ^ and ends with $ it’s to make sure we match the complete URL start to finish, not just part of it. There are lots of other ways to match, too:


	[0-9]
	Matches a number, 0–9. [2-4] would match numbers 2 to 4 inclusive.
	[a-z]
	Matches lowercase letters a–z
	[A-Z]
	Matches uppercase letters A–Z
	[a-z0-9]
	Combining some of these, this matches letters a–z and numbers 0–9


These are what we call character groups. The square brackets basically tell the server to match from the selection of characters within them. You can put any specific characters you’re looking for within the brackets, as well as the ranges shown above. 

However, all these just match one single character. [0-9] would match 8 but not 84 — to match 84 we’d need to use [0-9] twice.

[0-9][0-9]

So, if we wanted to match 1984 we could to do this:

[0-9][0-9][0-9][0-9] 

…but that’s getting silly. Instead, we can do this:

[0-9]{4}

That means any character between 0 and 9, four times. If we wanted to match a number, but didn’t know how long it might be (for example, a database ID in the URL) we could use the + symbol, which means one or more.

[0-9]+

This now matches 1, 123 and 1234567.

Putting it into practice

Let’s say we need to write a rule to match article URLs for this website, and to rewrite them to use /article.php under the hood. The articles all have URLs like this:

2013/article-title/

They start with a year (from 2005 up to 2013, currently), a slash, and then have a URL-safe version of the article title (a slug), ending in a slash. We’d match it like this:

^[0-9]{4}/[a-z0-9-]+/$

If that looks frightening, don’t worry. Breaking it down, from the start of the URL (^) we’re looking for four numbers ([0-9]{4}). Then a slash — that’s just literal — and then anything lowercase a–z or 0–9 or a dash ([a-z0-9-]) one or more times (+), ending in a slash (/$).

Putting that into a rewrite rule, we end up with this:

RewriteRule ^[0-9]{4}/[a-z0-9-]+/$ /article.php

We’re getting close now. We can match the article URLs and rewrite them to use article.php. Now we just need to make sure that article.php knows which article it’s supposed to display.

Capturing groups, and replacements

When rewriting URLs you’ll often want to take important parts of the URL you’re matching and pass them along to the script that handles the request. That’s usually done by adding those parts of the URL on as query string arguments. For our example, we want to make sure that article.php knows the year and the article title we’re looking for. That means we need to call it like this:

/article.php?year=2013&slug=article-title

To do this, we need to mark which parts of the pattern we want to reuse in the destination. We do this with round brackets or parentheses. By placing parentheses around parts of the pattern we want to reuse, we create what’s called a capturing group. To capture an important part of the source URL to use in the destination, surround it in parentheses.

Our pattern now looks like this, with parentheses around the parts that match the year and slug, but ignoring the slashes:

^([0-9]{4})/([a-z0-9-]+)/$ 

To use the capturing groups in the destination URL, we use the dollar sign and the number of the group we want to use. So, the first capturing group is $1, the second is $2 and so on. (The $ is unrelated to the end-of-pattern $ we used before.)

RewriteRule ^([0-9]{4})/([a-z0-9-]+)/$ /article.php?year=$1&slug=$2 

The value of the year capturing group gets used as $1 and the article title slug is $2. Had there been a third group, that would be $3 and so on. In regexp parlance, these are called back-references as they refer back to the pattern.

Options

Several brain-taxing minutes ago, I mentioned some options as the final part of a rewrite rule. There are lots of options (or flags) you can set to change how the rule is processed. The most useful (to my mind) are:


	R=301
	Perform an HTTP 301 redirect to send the user’s browser to the new URL. A status of 301 means a resource has moved permanently and so it’s a good way of both redirecting the user to the new URL, and letting search engines know to update their indexes.
	L
	Last. If this rule matches, don’t bother processing the following rules.


Options are set in square brackets at the end of the rule. You can set multiple options by separating them with commas:

RewriteRule ^([0-9]{4})/([a-z0-9-]+)/$ /article.php?year=$1&slug=$2 [L]

or

RewriteRule ^about/([a-z0-9-]+).jsp/$ /about/$1/ [R=301,L] 

Common pitfalls

Once you’ve built up a few rewrite rules, things can start to go wrong. You may have been there: a rule which looks perfectly good is somehow not matching. One common reason for this is hidden behind that [L] flag. 

L for Last is a useful option to tell the rewrite engine to stop once the rule has been matched. This is what it does — the remaining rules in the .htaccess file are then ignored. However, once a URL has been rewritten, the entire set of rules are then run again on the new URL. If the new URL matches any of the rules, that too will be rewritten and on it goes. 

One way to avoid this problem is to keep your ‘real’ pages under a folder path that will never match one of your rules, or that you can exclude from the rewrite rules.

Useful snippets

I find myself reusing the same few rules over and over again, just with minor changes. Here are some useful examples to refer back to.

Excluding a directory

As mentioned above, if you’re rewriting lots of fancy URLs to a collection of real files it can be helpful to put those files in a folder and exclude it from rewrite rules. This helps solve the issue of rewrite rules reapplying to your newly rewritten URL. To exclude a directory, put a rule like this at the top of your file, before your other rules. Our files are in a folder called _source, the dash in the rule means do nothing, and the L flag means the following rules won’t be applied.

RewriteRule ^_source - [L]

This is also useful for excluding things like CMS folders from your website’s rewrite rules

RewriteRule ^perch - [L] 

Adding or removing www from the domain

Some folk like to use a www and others don’t. Usually, it’s best to pick one and go with it, and redirect the one you don’t want. On this site, we don’t use www.24ways.org so we redirect those requests to 24ways.org.

This uses a RewriteCond which is like an if for a rewrite rule: “If this condition matches, then apply the following rule.” In this case, it’s if the HTTP HOST (or domain name, basically) matches this pattern, then redirect everything:

RewriteCond %{HTTP_HOST} ^www.24ways.org$ [NC]
RewriteRule ^(.*)$ http://24ways.org/$1 [R=301,L]

The [NC] flag means ‘no case’ — the match is case-insensitive. The dots in the domain are escaped with a backslash, as a dot is a regular expression character which means match anything, so we escape it because we literally mean a dot in this instance.

Removing file extensions

Sometimes all you need to do to tidy up a URL is strip off the technology-specific file extension, so that /about/history.php becomes /about/history. This is easily achieved with the help of some more rewrite conditions.

RewriteCond %{REQUEST_FILENAME} !-f
RewriteCond %{REQUEST_FILENAME} !-d
RewriteCond %{REQUEST_FILENAME}.php -f
RewriteRule ^(.+)$ $1.php [L,QSA]

This says if the file being asked for isn’t a file (!-f) and if it isn’t a directory (!-d) and if the file name plus .php is an actual file (-f) then rewrite by adding .php on the end. The QSA flag means ‘query string append’: append the existing query string onto the rewritten URL.

It’s these sorts of more generic catch-all rules that you need to watch out for when your .htaccess gets rerun after a successful match. Without care they can easily rematch the newly rewritten URL.

Logging for when it all goes wrong

Although not possible within your .htaccess file, if you have access to your Apache configuration files you can enable rewrite logging. This can be useful to track down where a rule is going wrong, if it’s matching incorrectly or failing to match. It also gives you an overview of the amount of work being done by the rewrite engine, enabling you to rearrange your rules and maximise performance.

RewriteEngine On
RewriteLog ""/full/system/path/to/rewrite.log""
RewriteLogLevel 5

To be doubly clear: this will not work from an .htaccess file — it needs to be added to the main Apache configuration files. (I sometimes work using MAMP PRO locally on my Mac, and this can be pasted into the snappily named Customized virtual host general settings box in the Advanced tab for your site.)

The white screen of death

One of the most frustrating things when working with rewrite rules is that when you make a mistake it can result in the server returning an HTTP 500 Internal Server Error. This in itself isn’t an error message, of course. It’s more of a notification that an error has occurred. The real error message can usually be found in your Apache error log.

If you have access to your server logs, check the Apache error log and you’ll usually find a much more descriptive error message, pointing you towards your mistake. (Again, if using MAMP PRO, go to Server, Apache and the View Log button.)

In conclusion

Rewriting URLs can be a bear, but the advantages are clear. Keeping a tidy URL structure, disconnected from the technology or file structure of your site can result in URLs that are easier to use and easier to maintain into the future.

If you’re redesigning a site, remember that cool URIs don’t change, so budget some time to make sure that any content you move has a rewrite rule associated with it to keep any links working.

Further reading

To find out more about URL rewriting and perhaps even learn more about regular expressions, I can recommend the following resources.


	From the horse’s mouth, the Apache mod_rewrite documentation
	Particularly useful with that documentation is the RewriteRule Flags listing
	You may wish to don sunglasses to follow the otherwise comprehensive Regular-Expressions.info tutorial
	Friend of 24 ways, Neil Crosby has a mod_rewrite Beginner’s Guide which I’ve found handy over the years.


As noted at the start, this isn’t a fully comprehensive guide, but I hope it’s useful in finding your feet with a powerful but sometimes annoying technology. Do you have useful snippets you often use on projects? Feel free to share them in the comments.",2013,Drew McLellan,drewmclellan,2013-12-01T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2013/url-rewriting-for-the-fearful/,code
149,Underpants Over My Trousers,"With Christmas approaching faster than a speeding bullet, this is the perfect time for you to think about that last minute present to buy for the web geek in your life. If you’re stuck for ideas for that special someone, forget about that svelte iPhone case carved from solid mahogany and head instead to your nearest comic-book shop and pick up a selection of comics or graphic novels. (I’ll be using some of my personal favourite comic books as examples throughout). 

Trust me, whether your nearest and dearest has been reading comics for a while or has never peered inside this four-colour world, they’ll thank-you for it.

Aside from indulging their superhero fantasies, comic books can provide web designers with a rich vein of inspiring ideas and material to help them create shirt button popping, trouser bursting work for the web. I know from my own personal experience, that looking at aspects of comic book design, layout and conventions and thinking about the ways that they can inform web design has taken my design work in often-unexpected directions. 

There are far too many fascinating facets of comic book design that provide web designers with inspiration to cover in the time that it takes to pull your underpants over your trousers. So I’m going to concentrate on one muscle bound aspect of comic design, one that will make you think differently about how you lay out the content of your pages in panels. 

A suitcase full of Kryptonite

Now, to the uninitiated onlooker, the panels of a comic book may appear to perform a similar function to still frames from a movie. But inside the pages of a comic, panels must work harder to help the reader understand the timing of a story. It is this method for conveying narrative timing to a reader that I believe can be highly useful to designers who work on the web as timing, drama and suspense are as important in the web world as they are in worlds occupied by costumed crime fighters and superheroes.

I’d like you to start by closing your eyes and thinking about your own process for laying out panels of content on a page. OK, you’ll actually be better off with your eyes open if you’re going to carry on reading.

I’ll bet you a suitcase full of Kryptonite that you often, if not always, structure your page layouts, and decide on the dimensions of those panels according to either:


	The base grid that you are working to
	The Golden Ratio or another mathematical schema


More likely, I bet that you decide on the size and the number of your panels based on the amount of content that will be going into them. From today, I’d like you to think about taking a different approach. This approach not only addresses horizontal and vertical space, but also adds the dimension of time to your designs.

Slowing down the action

A comic book panel not only acts as a container for its content but also indicates to a reader how much time passes within the panel and as a result, how much time the reader should focus their attention on that one panel. 

Smaller panels create swift eye movement and shorter bursts of attention. Larger panels give the perception of more time elapsing in the story and subconsciously demands that a reader devotes more time to focus on it. 

Concrete by Paul Chadwick (Dark Horse Comics)

This use of panel dimensions to control timing can also be useful for web designers in designing the reading/user experience. Imagine a page full of information about a product or service. You’ll naturally want the reader to focus for longer on the key benefits of your offering rather than perhaps its technical specifications.

Now take a look at this spread of pages from Watchmen by Alan Moore and Dave Gibbons.

Watchmen by Alan Moore and Dave Gibbons (Diamond Comic Distributors 2004)

Throughout this series of (originally) twelve editions, artist Dave Gibbons stuck rigidly to his 3×3 panels per page design and deviated from it only for dramatic moments within the narrative. 

In particular during the last few pages of chapter eleven, Gibbons adds weight to the impending doom by slowing down the action by using larger panels and forces the reader to think longer about what was coming next. The action then speeds up through twelve smaller panels until the final panel: nothing more than white space and yet one of the most iconic and thought provoking in the entire twelve book series.

Watchmen by Alan Moore and Dave Gibbons (Diamond Comic Distributors 2004)

On the web it is common for clients to ask designers to fill every pixel of screen space with content, perhaps not understanding the drama that can be added by nothing more than white space.

In the final chapter, Gibbons emphasises the carnage that has taken place (unseen between chapters eleven and twelve) by presenting the reader with six full pages containing only single, large panels. 

Watchmen by Alan Moore and Dave Gibbons (Diamond Comic Distributors 2004)

This drama, created by the artist’s use of panel dimensions to control timing, is a technique that web designers can also usefully employ when emphasising important areas of content.

Think back for a moment to the home page of Apple Inc., during the launch of their iconic iPhone, where the page contained nothing more than a large image and the phrase “Say hello to iPhone”. Rather than fill the page with sales messages, Apple’s designers allowed the space itself to tell the story and created a real sense of suspense and expectation among their readers.

Borders

Whereas on the web, panel borders are commonly used to add emphasis to particular areas of content, in comic books they take on a different and sometimes opposite role. 

In the examples so far, borders have contained all of the action. Removing a border can have the opposite effect to what you might at first think. Rather than taking emphasis away from their content, in comics, borderless panels allow the reader’s eyes to linger for longer on the content adding even stronger emphasis.

Concrete by Paul Chadwick (Dark Horse Comics)

This effect is amplified when the borderless content is allowed to bleed to the edges of a page. Because the content is no longer confined, except by the edges of the page (both comic and web) the reader’s eye is left to wander out into open space. 

Concrete by Paul Chadwick (Dark Horse Comics)

This type of open, borderless content panel can be highly useful in placing emphasis on the most important content on a page in exactly the very opposite way that we commonly employ on the web today. 

So why is time an important dimension to think about when designing your web pages? On one level, we are often already concerned with the short attention spans of visitors to our pages and should work hard to allow them to quickly and easily find and read the content that both they and we think is important. Learning lessons from comic book timing can only help us improve that experience.

On another: timing, suspense and drama are already everyday parts of the web browsing experience. Will a reader see what they expect when they click from one page to the next? Or are they in for a surprise? 

Most importantly, I believe that the web, like comics, is about story telling: often the story of the experiences that a customer will have when they use our product or service or interact with our organisation. It is this element of story telling than can be greatly improved by learning from comics.

It is exactly this kind of learning and adapting from older, more established and at first glance unrelated media that you will find can make a real distinctive difference to the design work that you create.

Fill your stockings

If you’re a visual designer or developer and are not a regular reader of comics, from the moment that you pick up your first title, I know that you will find them inspiring. 

I will be writing more, and speaking about comic design applied to the web at several (to be announced) events this coming year. I hope you’ll be slipping your underpants over your trousers and joining me then. In the meantime, here is some further reading to pick up on your next visit to a comic book or regular bookshop and slip into your stockings:


	Comics and Sequential Art by Will Eisner (Northern Light Books 2001)
	Understanding Comics: The Invisible Art by Scott McCloud (Harper Collins 1994)


Have a happy superhero season.

(I would like to thank all of the talented artists, writers and publishers whose work I have used as examples in this article and the hundreds more who inspire me every day with their tall tales and talent.)",2007,Andy Clarke,andyclarke,2007-12-14T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2007/underpants-over-my-trousers/,design
49,Universal React,"One of the libraries to receive a huge amount of focus in 2015 has been ReactJS, a library created by Facebook for building user interfaces and web applications.
More generally we’ve seen an even greater rise in the number of applications built primarily on the client side with most of the logic implemented in JavaScript. One of the main issues with building an app in this way is that you immediately forgo any customers who might browse with JavaScript turned off, and you can also miss out on any robots that might visit your site to crawl it (such as Google’s search bots). Additionally, we gain a performance improvement by being able to render from the server rather than having to wait for all the JavaScript to be loaded and executed.
The good news is that this problem has been recognised and it is possible to build a fully featured client-side application that can be rendered on the server. The way in which these apps work is as follows:

The user visits www.yoursite.com and the server executes your JavaScript to generate the HTML it needs to render the page.
In the background, the client-side JavaScript is executed and takes over the duty of rendering the page.
The next time a user clicks, rather than being sent to the server, the client-side app is in control.
If the user doesn’t have JavaScript enabled, each click on a link goes to the server and they get the server-rendered content again.

This means you can still provide a very quick and snappy experience for JavaScript users without having to abandon your non-JS users. We achieve this by writing JavaScript that can be executed on the server or on the client (you might have heard this referred to as isomorphic) and using a JavaScript framework that’s clever enough handle server- or client-side execution. Currently, ReactJS is leading the way here, although Ember and Angular are both working on solutions to this problem.
It’s worth noting that this tutorial assumes some familiarity with React in general, its syntax and concepts. If you’d like a refresher, the ReactJS docs are a good place to start.
 Getting started
We’re going to create a tiny ReactJS application that will work on the server and the client. First we’ll need to create a new project and install some dependencies. In a new, blank directory, run:
npm init -y
npm install --save ejs express react react-router react-dom
That will create a new project and install our dependencies:

ejs is a templating engine that we’ll use to render our HTML on the server.
express is a small web framework we’ll run our server on.
react-router is a popular routing solution for React so our app can fully support and respect URLs.
react-dom is a small React library used for rendering React components.

We’re also going to write all our code in ECMAScript 6, and therefore need to install BabelJS and configure that too.
npm install --save-dev babel-cli babel-preset-es2015 babel-preset-react
Then, create a .babelrc file that contains the following:
{
  ""presets"": [""es2015"", ""react""]
}
What we’ve done here is install Babel’s command line interface (CLI) tool and configured it to transform our code from ECMAScript 6 (or ES2015) to ECMAScript 5, which is more widely supported. We’ll need the React transforms when we start writing JSX when working with React.
Creating a server
For now, our ExpressJS server is pretty straightforward. All we’ll do is render a view that says ‘Hello World’. Here’s our server code:
import express from 'express';
import http from 'http';

const app = express();

app.use(express.static('public'));

app.set('view engine', 'ejs');

app.get('*', (req, res) => {
  res.render('index');
});

const server = http.createServer(app);

server.listen(3003);
server.on('listening', () => {
  console.log('Listening on 3003');
});
Here we’re using ES6 modules, which I wrote about on 24 ways last year, if you’d like a reminder. We tell the app to render the index view on any GET request (that’s what app.get('*') means, the wildcard matches any route).
We now need to create the index view file, which Express expects to be defined in views/index.ejs:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
  <head>
    <title>My App</title>
  </head>

  <body>
    Hello World
  </body>
</html>
Finally, we’re ready to run the server. Because we installed babel-cli earlier we have access to the babel-node executable, which will transform all your code before running it through node. Run this command:
./node_modules/.bin/babel-node server.js
And you should now be able to visit http://localhost:3003 and see ‘Hello World’ right there:

Building the React app
Now we’ll build the React application entirely on the server, before adding the client-side JavaScript right at the end. Our app will have two routes, / and /about which will both show a small amount of content. This will demonstrate how to use React Router on the server side to make sure our React app plays nicely with URLs.
Firstly, let’s update views/index.ejs. Our server will figure out what HTML it needs to render, and pass that into the view. We can pass a value into our view when we render it, and then use EJS syntax to tell it to output that data. Update the template file so the body looks like so:
<body>
  <%- markup %>
</body>
Next, we’ll define the routes we want our app to have using React Router. For now we’ll just define the index route, and not worry about the /about route quite yet. We could define our routes in JSX, but I think for server-side rendering it’s clearer to define them as an object. Here’s what we’re starting with:
const routes = {
  path: '',
  component: AppComponent,
  childRoutes: [
    {
      path: '/',
      component: IndexComponent
    }
  ]
}
These are just placed at the top of server.js, after the import statements. Later we’ll move these into a separate file, but for now they are fine where they are.
Notice how I define first that the AppComponent should be used at the '' path, which effectively means it matches every single route and becomes a container for all our other components. Then I give it a child route of /, which will match the IndexComponent. Before we hook these routes up with our server, let’s quickly define components/app.js and components/index.js. app.js looks like so:
import React from 'react';

export default class AppComponent extends React.Component {
  render() {
    return (
      <div>
        <h2>Welcome to my App</h2>
        { this.props.children }
      </div>
    );
  }
}
When a React Router route has child components, they are given to us in the props under the children key, so we need to include them in the code we want to render for this component. The index.js component is pretty bland:
import React from 'react';

export default class IndexComponent extends React.Component {
  render() {
    return (
      <div>
        <p>This is the index page</p>
      </div>
    );
  }
}
Server-side routing with React Router
Head back into server.js, and firstly we’ll need to add some new imports:
import React from 'react';
import { renderToString } from 'react-dom/server';
import { match, RoutingContext } from 'react-router';

import AppComponent from './components/app';
import IndexComponent from './components/index';
The ReactDOM package provides react-dom/server which includes a renderToString method that takes a React component and produces the HTML string output of the component. It’s this method that we’ll use to render the HTML from the server, generated by React. From the React Router package we use match, a function used to find a matching route for a URL; and RoutingContext, a React component provided by React Router that we’ll need to render. This wraps up our components and provides some functionality that ties React Router together with our app. Generally you don’t need to concern yourself about how this component works, so don’t worry too much.
Now for the good bit: we can update our app.get('*') route with the code that matches the URL against the React routes:
app.get('*', (req, res) => {
  // routes is our object of React routes defined above
  match({ routes, location: req.url }, (err, redirectLocation, props) => {
    if (err) {
      // something went badly wrong, so 500 with a message
      res.status(500).send(err.message);
    } else if (redirectLocation) {
      // we matched a ReactRouter redirect, so redirect from the server
      res.redirect(302, redirectLocation.pathname + redirectLocation.search);
    } else if (props) {
      // if we got props, that means we found a valid component to render
      // for the given route
      const markup = renderToString(<RoutingContext {...props} />);

      // render `index.ejs`, but pass in the markup we want it to display
      res.render('index', { markup })

    } else {
      // no route match, so 404. In a real app you might render a custom
      // 404 view here
      res.sendStatus(404);
    }
  });
});
We call match, giving it the routes object we defined earlier and req.url, which contains the URL of the request. It calls a callback function we give it, with err, redirectLocation and props as the arguments. The first two conditionals in the callback function just deal with an error occuring or a redirect (React Router has built in redirect support). The most interesting bit is the third conditional, else if (props). If we got given props and we’ve made it this far it means we found a matching component to render and we can use this code to render it:
...
} else if (props) {
  // if we got props, that means we found a valid component to render
  // for the given route
  const markup = renderToString(<RoutingContext {...props} />);

  // render `index.ejs`, but pass in the markup we want it to display
  res.render('index', { markup })
} else {
   ...
}
The renderToString method from ReactDOM takes that RoutingContext component we mentioned earlier and renders it with the properties required. Again, you need not concern yourself with what this specific component does or what the props are. Most of this is data that React Router provides for us on top of our components.
Note the {...props}, which is a neat bit of JSX syntax that spreads out our object into key value properties. To see this better, note the two pieces of JSX code below, both of which are equivalent:
<MyComponent a=""foo"" b=""bar"" />

// OR:

const props = { a: ""foo"", b: ""bar"" };
<MyComponent {...props} />
Running the server again
I know that felt like a lot of work, but the good news is that once you’ve set this up you are free to focus on building your React components, safe in the knowledge that your server-side rendering is working. To check, restart the server and head to http://localhost:3003 once more. You should see it all working!

Refactoring and one more route
Before we move on to getting this code running on the client, let’s add one more route and do some tidying up. First, move our routes object out into routes.js:
import AppComponent from './components/app';
import IndexComponent from './components/index';

const routes = {
  path: '',
  component: AppComponent,
  childRoutes: [
    {
      path: '/',
      component: IndexComponent
    }
  ]
}

export { routes };
And then update server.js. You can remove the two component imports and replace them with:
import { routes } from './routes';
Finally, let’s add one more route for ./about and links between them. Create components/about.js:
import React from 'react';

export default class AboutComponent extends React.Component {
  render() {
    return (
      <div>
        <p>A little bit about me.</p>
      </div>
    );
  }
}
And then you can add it to routes.js too:
import AppComponent from './components/app';
import IndexComponent from './components/index';
import AboutComponent from './components/about';

const routes = {
  path: '',
  component: AppComponent,
  childRoutes: [
    {
      path: '/',
      component: IndexComponent
    },
    {
      path: '/about',
      component: AboutComponent
    }
  ]
}

export { routes };
If you now restart the server and head to http://localhost:3003/about` you’ll see the about page!

For the finishing touch we’ll use the React Router link component to add some links between the pages. Edit components/app.js to look like so:
import React from 'react';
import { Link } from 'react-router';

export default class AppComponent extends React.Component {
  render() {
    return (
      <div>
        <h2>Welcome to my App</h2>
        <ul>
          <li><Link to='/'>Home</Link></li>
          <li><Link to='/about'>About</Link></li>
        </ul>
        { this.props.children }
      </div>
    );
  }
}
You can now click between the pages to navigate. However, everytime we do so the requests hit the server. Now we’re going to make our final change, such that after the app has been rendered on the server once, it gets rendered and managed in the client, providing that snappy client-side app experience.
Client-side rendering
First, we’re going to make a small change to views/index.ejs. React doesn’t like rendering directly into the body and will give a warning when you do so. To prevent this we’ll wrap our app in a div:
<body>
  <div id=""app""><%- markup %></div>
  <script src=""build.js""></script>
</body>
I’ve also added in a script tag to build.js, which is the file we’ll generate containing all our client-side code.
Next, create client-render.js. This is going to be the only bit of JavaScript that’s exclusive to the client side. In it we need to pull in our routes and render them to the DOM.
import React from 'react';
import ReactDOM from 'react-dom';
import { Router } from 'react-router';

import { routes } from './routes';

import createBrowserHistory from 'history/lib/createBrowserHistory';

ReactDOM.render(
  <Router routes={routes} history={createBrowserHistory()} />,
  document.getElementById('app')
)
The first thing you might notice is the mention of createBrowserHistory. React Router is built on top of the history module, a module that listens to the browser’s address bar and parses the new location. It has many modes of operation: it can keep track using a hashbang, such as http://localhost/#!/about (this is the default), or you can tell it to use the HTML5 history API by calling createBrowserHistory, which is what we’ve done. This will keep the URLs nice and neat and make sure the client and the server are using the same URL structure. You can read more about React Router and histories in the React Router documentation.
Finally we use ReactDOM.render and give it the Router component, telling it about all our routes, and also tell ReactDOM where to render, the #app element.
Generating build.js
We’re actually almost there! The final thing we need to do is generate our client side bundle. For this we’re going to use webpack, a module bundler that can take our application, follow all the imports and generate one large bundle from them. We’ll install it and babel-loader, a webpack plugin for transforming code through Babel.
npm install --save-dev webpack babel-loader
To run webpack we just need to create a configuration file, called webpack.config.js. Create the file in the root of our application and add the following code:
var path = require('path');
module.exports = {
  entry: path.join(process.cwd(), 'client-render.js'),
  output: {
    path: './public/',
    filename: 'build.js'
  },
  module: {
    loaders: [
      {
        test: /.js$/,
        loader: 'babel'
      }
    ]
  }
}
Note first that this file can’t be written in ES6 as it doesn’t get transformed. The first thing we do is tell webpack the main entry point for our application, which is client-render.js. We use process.cwd() because webpack expects an exact location – if we just gave it the string ‘client-render.js’, webpack wouldn’t be able to find it.
Next, we tell webpack where to output our file, and here I’m telling it to place the file in public/build.js. Finally we tell webpack that every time it hits a file that ends in .js, it should use the babel-loader plugin to transform the code first.
Now we’re ready to generate the bundle!
./node_modules/.bin/webpack
This will take a fair few seconds to run (on my machine it’s about seven or eight), but once it has it will have created public/build.js, a client-side bundle of our application. If you restart your server once more you’ll see that we can now navigate around our application without hitting the server, because React on the client takes over. Perfect!
The first bundle that webpack generates is pretty slow, but if you run webpack -w it will go into watch mode, where it watches files for changes and regenerates the bundle. The key thing is that it only regenerates the small pieces of the bundle it needs, so while the first bundle is very slow, the rest are lightning fast. I recommend leaving webpack constantly running in watch mode when you’re developing.
Conclusions
First, if you’d like to look through this code yourself you can find it all on GitHub. Feel free to raise an issue there or tweet me if you have any problems or would like to ask further questions.
Next, I want to stress that you shouldn’t use this as an excuse to build all your apps in this way. Some of you might be wondering whether a static site like the one we built today is worth its complexity, and you’d be right. I used it as it’s an easy example to work with but in the future you should carefully consider your reasons for wanting to build a universal React application and make sure it’s a suitable infrastructure for you.
With that, all that’s left for me to do is wish you a very merry Christmas and best of luck with your React applications!",2015,Jack Franklin,jackfranklin,2015-12-05T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2015/universal-react/,code
168,Unobtrusively Mapping Microformats with jQuery,"Microformats are everywhere. You can’t shake an electronic stick these days without accidentally poking a microformat-enabled site, and many developers use microformats as a matter of course. And why not? After all, why invent your own class names when you can re-use pre-defined ones that give your site extra functionality for free?

Nevertheless, while it’s good to know that users of tools such as Tails and Operator will derive added value from your shiny semantics, it’s nice to be able to reuse that effort in your own code.

We’re going to build a map of some of my favourite restaurants in Brighton. Fitting with the principles of unobtrusive JavaScript, we’ll start with a semantically marked up list of restaurants, then use JavaScript to add the map, look up the restaurant locations and plot them as markers.

We’ll be using a couple of powerful tools. The first is jQuery, a JavaScript library that is ideally suited for unobtrusive scripting. jQuery allows us to manipulate elements on the page based on their CSS selector, which makes it easy to extract information from microformats.

The second is Mapstraction, introduced here by Andrew Turner a few days ago. We’ll be using Google Maps in the background, but Mapstraction makes it easy to change to a different provider if we want to later.

Getting Started

We’ll start off with a simple collection of microformatted restaurant details, representing my seven favourite restaurants in Brighton. The full, unstyled list can be seen in restaurants-plain.html. Each restaurant listing looks like this:

<li class=""vcard"">
	<h3><a class=""fn org url"" href=""http://www.riddleandfinns.co.uk/"">Riddle & Finns</a></h3>
	<div class=""adr"">
		<p class=""street-address"">12b Meeting House Lane</p>
		<p><span class=""locality"">Brighton</span>, <abbr class=""country-name"" title=""United Kingdom"">UK</abbr></p>
		<p class=""postal-code"">BN1 1HB</p>
	</div>
	<p>Telephone: <span class=""tel"">+44 (0)1273 323 008</span></p>
	<p>E-mail: <a href=""mailto:info@riddleandfinns.co.uk"" class=""email"">info@riddleandfinns.co.uk</a></p>
</li>

Since we’re dealing with a list of restaurants, each hCard is marked up inside a list item. Each restaurant is an organisation; we signify this by placing the classes fn and org on the element surrounding the restaurant’s name (according to the hCard spec, setting both fn and org to the same value signifies that the hCard represents an organisation rather than a person).

The address information itself is contained within a div of class adr. Note that the HTML <address> element is not suitable here for two reasons: firstly, it is intended to mark up contact details for the current document rather than generic addresses; secondly, address is an inline element and as such cannot contain the paragraphs elements used here for the address information.

A nice thing about microformats is that they provide us with automatic hooks for our styling. For the moment we’ll just tidy up the whitespace a bit; for more advanced style tips consult John Allsop’s guide from 24 ways 2006.

.vcard p {
	margin: 0;
}
.adr {
	margin-bottom: 0.5em;
}

To plot the restaurants on a map we’ll need latitude and longitude for each one. We can find this out from their address using geocoding. Most mapping APIs include support for geocoding, which means we can pass the API an address and get back a latitude/longitude point. Mapstraction provides an abstraction layer around these APIs which can be included using the following script tag:

<script type=""text/javascript"" src=""http://mapstraction.com/src/mapstraction-geocode.js""></script>

While we’re at it, let’s pull in the other external scripts we’ll be using:

<script type=""text/javascript"" src=""jquery-1.2.1.js""></script>
<script src=""http://maps.google.com/maps?file=api&v=2&key=YOUR_KEY"" type=""text/javascript""></script>
<script type=""text/javascript"" src=""http://mapstraction.com/src/mapstraction.js""></script>
<script type=""text/javascript"" src=""http://mapstraction.com/src/mapstraction-geocode.js""></script>

That’s everything set up: let’s write some JavaScript!

In jQuery, almost every operation starts with a call to the jQuery function. The function simulates method overloading to behave in different ways depending on the arguments passed to it. When writing unobtrusive JavaScript it’s important to set up code to execute when the page has loaded to the point that the DOM is available to be manipulated. To do this with jQuery, pass a callback function to the jQuery function itself:

jQuery(function() {
	// This code will be executed when the DOM is ready
});

Initialising the map

The first thing we need to do is initialise our map. Mapstraction needs a div with an explicit width, height and ID to show it where to put the map. Our document doesn’t currently include this markup, but we can insert it with a single line of jQuery code:

jQuery(function() {
	// First create a div to host the map
	var themap = jQuery('<div id=""themap""></div>').css({
		'width': '90%',
		'height': '400px'
	}).insertBefore('ul.restaurants');
});

While this is technically just a single line of JavaScript (with line-breaks added for readability) it’s actually doing quite a lot of work. Let’s break it down in to steps:

var themap = jQuery('<div id=""themap""></div>')

Here’s jQuery’s method overloading in action: if you pass it a string that starts with a < it assumes that you wish to create a new HTML element. This provides us with a handy shortcut for the more verbose DOM equivalent:

var themap = document.createElement('div');
themap.id = 'themap';

Next we want to apply some CSS rules to the element. jQuery supports chaining, which means we can continue to call methods on the object returned by jQuery or any of its methods:

var themap = jQuery('<div id=""themap""></div>').css({
	'width': '90%',
	'height': '400px'
})

Finally, we need to insert our new HTML element in to the page. jQuery provides a number of methods for element insertion, but in this case we want to position it directly before the <ul> we are using to contain our restaurants. jQuery’s insertBefore() method takes a CSS selector indicating an element already on the page and places the current jQuery selection directly before that element in the DOM.

var themap = jQuery('<div id=""themap""></div>').css({
	'width': '90%',
	'height': '400px'
}).insertBefore('ul.restaurants');

Finally, we need to initialise the map itself using Mapstraction. The Mapstraction constructor takes two arguments: the first is the ID of the element used to position the map; the second is the mapping provider to use (in this case google ):

// Initialise the map
var mapstraction = new Mapstraction('themap','google');

We want the map to appear centred on Brighton, so we’ll need to know the correct co-ordinates. We can use www.getlatlon.com to find both the co-ordinates and the initial map zoom level.

// Show map centred on Brighton
mapstraction.setCenterAndZoom(
	new LatLonPoint(50.82423734980143, -0.14007568359375),
	15 // Zoom level appropriate for Brighton city centre
);

We also want controls on the map to allow the user to zoom in and out and toggle between map and satellite view.

mapstraction.addControls({
	zoom: 'large',
	map_type: true
});

Adding the markers

It’s finally time to parse some microformats. Since we’re using hCard, the information we want is wrapped in elements with the class vcard. We can use jQuery’s CSS selector support to find them:

var vcards = jQuery('.vcard');

Now that we’ve found them, we need to create a marker for each one in turn. Rather than using a regular JavaScript for loop, we can instead use jQuery’s each() method to execute a function against each of the hCards.

jQuery('.vcard').each(function() {
	// Do something with the hCard
});

Within the callback function, this is set to the current DOM element (in our case, the list item). If we want to call the magic jQuery methods on it we’ll need to wrap it in another call to jQuery:

jQuery('.vcard').each(function() {
	var hcard = jQuery(this);
});

The Google maps geocoder seems to work best if you pass it the street address and a postcode. We can extract these using CSS selectors: this time, we’ll use jQuery’s find() method which searches within the current jQuery selection:

var streetaddress = hcard.find('.street-address').text();
var postcode = hcard.find('.postal-code').text();

The text() method extracts the text contents of the selected node, minus any HTML markup.

We’ve got the address; now we need to geocode it. Mapstraction’s geocoding API requires us to first construct a MapstractionGeocoder, then use the geocode() method to pass it an address. Here’s the code outline:

var geocoder = new MapstractionGeocoder(onComplete, 'google');
geocoder.geocode({'address': 'the address goes here');

The onComplete function is executed when the geocoding operation has been completed, and will be passed an object with the resulting point on the map. We just want to create a marker for the point:

var geocoder = new MapstractionGeocoder(function(result) {
	var marker = new Marker(result.point);
	mapstraction.addMarker(marker);
}, 'google');   

For our purposes, joining the street address and postcode with a comma to create the address should suffice:

geocoder.geocode({'address': streetaddress + ', ' + postcode});   

There’s one last step: when the marker is clicked, we want to display details of the restaurant. We can do this with an info bubble, which can be configured by passing in a string of HTML. We’ll construct that HTML using jQuery’s html() method on our hcard object, which extracts the HTML contained within that DOM node as a string.

var marker = new Marker(result.point);
marker.setInfoBubble(
	'<div class=""bubble"">' + hcard.html() + '</div>'
);
mapstraction.addMarker(marker);

We’ve wrapped the bubble in a div with class bubble to make it easier to style. Google Maps can behave strangely if you don’t provide an explicit width for your info bubbles, so we’ll add that to our CSS now:

.bubble {
	width: 300px;
}

That’s everything we need: let’s combine our code together:

jQuery(function() {
	// First create a div to host the map
	var themap = jQuery('<div id=""themap""></div>').css({
		'width': '90%',
		'height': '400px'
	}).insertBefore('ul.restaurants');
	// Now initialise the map
	var mapstraction = new Mapstraction('themap','google');
	mapstraction.addControls({
		zoom: 'large',
		map_type: true
	});
	// Show map centred on Brighton
	mapstraction.setCenterAndZoom(
		new LatLonPoint(50.82423734980143, -0.14007568359375),
		15 // Zoom level appropriate for Brighton city centre
	);
	// Geocode each hcard and add a marker
	jQuery('.vcard').each(function() {
		var hcard = jQuery(this);
		var streetaddress = hcard.find('.street-address').text();
		var postcode = hcard.find('.postal-code').text();
		var geocoder = new MapstractionGeocoder(function(result) {
			var marker = new Marker(result.point);
			marker.setInfoBubble(
				'<div class=""bubble"">' + hcard.html() + '</div>'
			);
			mapstraction.addMarker(marker);
		}, 'google');	 
		geocoder.geocode({'address': streetaddress + ', ' + postcode});
	});
});

Here’s the finished code.

There’s one last shortcut we can add: jQuery provides the $ symbol as an alias for jQuery. We could just go through our code and replace every call to jQuery() with a call to $(), but this would cause incompatibilities if we ever attempted to use our script on a page that also includes the Prototype library. A more robust approach is to start our code with the following:

jQuery(function($) {
	// Within this function, $ now refers to jQuery
	// ...
});

jQuery cleverly passes itself as the first argument to any function registered to the DOM ready event, which means we can assign a local $ variable shortcut without affecting the $ symbol in the global scope. This makes it easy to use jQuery with other libraries.

Limitations of Geocoding

You may have noticed a discrepancy creep in to the last example: whereas my original list included seven restaurants, the geocoding example only shows five. This is because the Google Maps geocoder incorporates a rate limit: more than five lookups in a second and it starts returning error messages instead of regular results.

In addition to this problem, geocoding itself is an inexact science: while UK postcodes generally get you down to the correct street, figuring out the exact point on the street from the provided address usually isn’t too accurate (although Google do a pretty good job).

Finally, there’s the performance overhead. We’re making five geocoding requests to Google for every page served, even though the restaurants themselves aren’t likely to change location any time soon. Surely there’s a better way of doing this?

Microformats to the rescue (again)! The geo microformat suggests simple classes for including latitude and longitude information in a page. We can add specific points for each restaurant using the following markup:

<li class=""vcard"">
	<h3 class=""fn org"">E-Kagen</h3>
	<div class=""adr"">
		<p class=""street-address"">22-23 Sydney Street</p>
		<p><span class=""locality"">Brighton</span>, <abbr class=""country-name"" title=""United Kingdom"">UK</abbr></p>
		<p class=""postal-code"">BN1 4EN</p>
	</div>
	<p>Telephone: <span class=""tel"">+44 (0)1273 687 068</span></p>
	<p class=""geo"">Lat/Lon: 
		<span class=""latitude"">50.827917</span>, 
		<span class=""longitude"">-0.137764</span>
	</p>
</li>

As before, I used www.getlatlon.com to find the exact locations – I find satellite view is particularly useful for locating individual buildings.

Latitudes and longitudes are great for machines but not so useful for human beings. We could hide them entirely with display: none, but I prefer to merely de-emphasise them (someone might want them for their GPS unit):

.vcard .geo {
	margin-top: 0.5em;
	font-size: 0.85em;
	color: #ccc;
}

It’s probably a good idea to hide them completely when they’re displayed inside an info bubble:

.bubble .geo {
	display: none;
}

We can extract the co-ordinates in the same way we extracted the address. Since we’re no longer geocoding anything our code becomes a lot simpler:

$('.vcard').each(function() {
	var hcard = $(this);
	var latitude = hcard.find('.geo .latitude').text();
	var longitude = hcard.find('.geo .longitude').text();
	var marker = new Marker(new LatLonPoint(latitude, longitude));
	marker.setInfoBubble(
		'<div class=""bubble"">' + hcard.html() + '</div>'
	);
	mapstraction.addMarker(marker);
});

And here’s the finished geo example.

Further reading

We’ve only scratched the surface of what’s possible with microformats, jQuery (or just regular JavaScript) and a bit of imagination. If this example has piqued your interest, the following links should give you some more food for thought.


	The hCard specification
	Notes on parsing hCards
	jQuery for JavaScript programmers – my extended tutorial on jQuery.
	Dann Webb’s Sumo – a full JavaScript library for parsing microformats, based around some clever metaprogramming techniques.
	Jeremy Keith’s Adactio Austin – the first place I saw using microformats to unobtrusively plot locations on a map. Makes clever use of hEvent as well.",2007,Simon Willison,simonwillison,2007-12-12T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2007/unobtrusively-mapping-microformats-with-jquery/,code
12,Untangling Web Typography,"When I was a carpenter, I noticed how homeowners often had this deer-in-the-headlights look when the contractor I worked for would ask them to make tons of decisions, seemingly all at once.

Square or subway tile? Glass or ceramic? Traditional or modern trim details? Flat face or picture frame cabinets? Real wood or laminate flooring? Every day the decisions piled up and were usually made in the context of that room, or that part of that room. Rarely did the homeowner have the benefit of taking that particular decision in full view of the larger context of the project. And architectural plans? Sure, they lay out the broad strokes, but there is still so much to decide.

Typography is similar. Designers try to make sites that are easy to use and understand visually. They labour over the details of line height, font size, line length, and font weights. They consider the relative merits of different typographical scales for applications versus content-driven sites. Frequently, designers consider all of this in the context of one page, feature, or view of an application. They are asked to make a million tiny decisions.

Sometimes designers just bump up the font size until it looks right.

I don’t see anything wrong with that. Instincts are important. Designing in context is easier. It’s OK to leave the big picture until later. Design a bunch of things, and then look for the patterns. You can’t always know everything up front. How does the current feature relate to all the other features on the site? For a large site, just like for a substantial remodel, the number of decisions you would need to internalize to make that knowable would be prohibitively large.

When typography goes awry

I should be honest. I know very little about typography. I struggle to understand vertical rhythm and the math in Tim Ahrens’s talks about the interaction between type design and rendering technology kind of melted my brain. I have an unusual perspective because I’m not the one making the design decisions, but I am the one implementing them and often cleaning up when a project goes off the rails.

I’ve seen projects with thousands of font-size declarations and headings. One project even had over ten thousand margin declarations. So while I appreciate creative exploration, I’m also eager to establish patterns in typography and make sure we aren’t choosing not to choose. Or, choosing all the things.

Analyzing a site’s typography

Most of my projects start out with an evaluation of the client’s existing CSS. I look for duplication in the CSS by using Grep, though functionality is landing soon in CSS Lint to do the same thing automatically. The goal is to find the underlying missing abstractions that, once in place, would allow developers to create new functionality without needing to write additional CSS. In addition to that, my team and I would comb through each site (generally, around ten pages is enough to get the big picture), and take screenshots of each of the components we found.

In this way, we could look for subtle visual differences that were unlikely to add value to the user. By correcting these differences, we could help make the design more consistent, and at the same time the code leaner and more performant. Typography is much like a homeowner who chooses to incorporate too many disparate design elements, pairing a mid-century modern sofa with flowered country cottage curtains. Often the typography of a site ends up collecting an endless array of new typefaces as the site’s overall styles evolve. Designers come and go on a project, and eventually no one can remember how the 16px Verdana got into the codebase.

Automation

We used to do this work by hand. It was incredibly tedious. We’d go through the site, taking screenshots and meticulously documenting the style information we found. We didn’t have to do that many times before it became incredibly clear that the task needed to be automated. So we built a little tool called the Type-o-matic that could do it for us.

To try it on your site:


	Download and install the Firebug extension to Firefox
	Download and install the Type-o-matic extension to Firebug (I know, I fully intend to port it to Chrome)
	Now, visit the site you’d like to test
	Right click and choose Inspect element with Firebug
	Now click on the Typography tab
	Click Persist
	Click Generate Report
	Choose which pages to analyze (we’ve found that ten is a good number to get the big picture, but you can analyze as many as you’d like — it will even work on just one page!)
	Now navigate to other pages, and on each subsequent page, click Generate Report
	The table of results can be a bit difficult to interact with, so you can always click Copy to clipboard, and copy the results (JSON).


 
 
A screenshot of Type-o-matic in action


What does this data mean?

When you’ve analyzed as many pages or different views as you’d like, you’ll start to see some interesting patterns emerge in the data. In the right-hand column, you’ll see examples of how each kind of typography we found has been used in a real context on your site. It is organized by color and then by size so you can easily see how you are using typography.

The next thing you’ll want to take a look at is in the first column, called “Count”. We’ve counted how many times you’ve used each combination of typographical styles. This can be incredibly helpful when deciding which styles were intentional, versus one-off color pick errors or experiments that never got removed from the code base. If you’ve used one color blue 1,400 times, and another just 23, it’s pretty obvious which is more in line with broader site-wide styles.

Consistency before perfection

It can be really tempting to try to make everything perfect — to try to make every decision final. When you use the data you can collect from this tool, I’d recommend trying to get to consistent before you try to make things perfect. Stop using fifteen different shades of blue type first, and then if you want to change to a new blue, go for it! You’ll be able to make design changes much more easily once you’ve reduced the total number of typographical styles you rely on.

Lower the importance of the decisions you are making. Our sites, like ourselves, are always a work in progress. Or, as a carpenter I used to work with said, “You’re not building a fucking piano.” We’re not building houses. We can choose one typeface today and a different one tomorrow. It is OK to experiment. Be brave.",2013,Nicole Sullivan,nicolesullivan,2013-12-20T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2013/untangling-web-typography/,design
96,Unwrapping the Wii U Browser,"The Wii U was released on 18 November 2012 in the US, and 30 November in the UK. It’s the first eighth generation home console, the first mainstream second-screen device, and it has some really impressive browser specs.

Consoles are not just for games now: they’re marketed as complete entertainment solutions. Internet connectivity and browser functionality have gone from a nice-to-have feature in game consoles to a selling point. In Nintendo’s case, they see it as a challenge to design an experience that’s better than browsing on a desktop.


	Let’s make a browser that users can use on a daily basis, something that can really handle everything we’ve come to expect from a browser and do it more naturally.
Sasaki – Iwata Asks on Nintendo.com


With 11% of people using console browsers to visit websites, it’s important to consider these devices right from the start of projects. Browsing the web on a TV or handheld console is a very different experience to browsing on a desktop or a mobile phone, and has many usability implications.

Console browser testing

When I’m testing a console browser, one of the first things I do is run Niels Leenheer’s HTML5 test and Lea Verou’s CSS3 test. I use these benchmarks as a rough comparison of the standards each browser supports.

In October, IE9 came out for the Xbox 360, scoring 120/500 in the HTML5 test and 32% in the CSS3 test. The PS Vita also had an update to its browser in recent weeks, jumping from 58/500 to 243/500 in the HTML5 test, and 32% to 55% in the CSS3 test. Manufacturers have been stepping up their game, trying to make their browsing experiences better.

To give you an idea of how the Wii U currently compares to other devices, here are the test results of the other TV consoles I’ve tested. I’ve written more in-depth notes on TV and portable console browsers separately.


Year of releaseHTML5 scoreCSS3 scoreNotes
Wii U2012258/50048%Runs a Netfront browser (WebKit).
Wii200689/500Wouldn’t runRuns an Opera browser.
PS3200668/50038%Runs a Netfront browser (WebKit).
Xbox 3602005120/50032%A browser for the Xbox (IE9) was only recently released in October 2012. The Kinect provides voice and gesture support. There’s also SmartGlass, a second-screen app for platforms including Android and iOS.


The Wii U browser is Nintendo’s fifth attempt at a console browser. Based on these tests, it’s already looking promising.

Why console browsers used to suck

It takes a lot of system memory to run a good browser, and the problem of older consoles is that they don’t have much memory available. The original Nintendo DS needs a memory expansion pack just to run the browser, because the 4MB it has on board isn’t enough. I noticed that even on newer devices, some sites fail to load because the system runs out of memory.

The Wii came out six years ago with an Opera browser. Still being used today and with such low resources available, the latest browser features can’t reasonably be supported. There’s also pressure to add features such as tabs, and enable gamers to use the browser while a game is paused. Nintendo’s browser team have the advantage of higher specs to play with on their new console (1GB of memory dedicated to games, 1GB for the system), which makes it easier to support the latest standards. But it’s still a challenge to fit everything in.


	…even though we have more memory, the amount of memory we can use for the browser is limited compared to a PC, so we’ve worked in ways that efficiently allocates the available memory per tab. To work on this, the experience working on the browser for the Nintendo 3DS system under a limited memory constraint helped us greatly.
Sasaki – Iwata Asks on Nintendo.com


In the box

The Wii U consists of a console unit which plugs into a TV (the first to support HD), and a wireless controller known as a gamepad. The gamepad is a lot bigger than typical TV console controllers, and it has a touchscreen on the front. The touchscreen is resistive, responding to pressure rather than electrical current. It’s intended to be used with a stylus (provided) but fingers can be used.

It might look a bit like one, but the gamepad isn’t a portable console designed to be taken out like the PS Vita. The gamepad can be used as a standalone screen with the TV switched off, as long as it’s within range of the console unit – it basically piggybacks off it.



It’s surprisingly lightweight for its size. It has a wealth of detectors including 9-axis control. Sensors wake the device from sleep when it’s picked up. There’s also a camera on the front, and a headphone port and speakers, with audio coming through both the TV and the gamepad giving a surround sound feel.

Up to six tabs can be opened at once, and the browser can be used while games are paused. There’s a really nice little feature here – the current game’s name is saved as a search option, so it’s really quick to look up contextual content such as walk-throughs.

Controls

Only one gamepad can be used to control the browser, but if there are Wiimotes connected, they can be used as pointers. This doesn’t let the user do anything except point (they each get a little hand icon with a number on it displayed on the screen), but it’s interesting that multiple people can be interacting with a site at once.



See a bigger version

The gamepad can also be used as a simple TV remote control, with basic functions such as bringing up the programme guide, adjusting volume and changing channel. I found the simplified interface much more usable than a full-featured remote control.



I’m used to scrolling being sluggish on consoles, but the Wii U feels almost as snappy as a desktop browser. Sites load considerably faster compared with others I’ve tested.

Tilt-scroll

Holding down ZL and ZR while tilting the screen activates an Instapaper-style tilt to scroll for going up and down the page quickly, useful for navigating very long pages.

Second screen

The TV mirrors most of what’s on the gamepad, although the TV screen just displays the contents of the browser window, while the gamepad displays the site along with the browser toolbar.

When the user with the gamepad is typing, the keyboard is hidden from the TV screen – there’s just a bit of text at the top indicating what’s happening on the gamepad.

Pressing X draws an on-screen curtain over the TV, hiding the content that’s on the gamepad from the TV. Pressing X again opens the curtains, revealing what’s on the gamepad. Holding the button down plays a drumroll before it’s released and the curtains are opened. I can imagine this being used in meetings as a fun presentation tool.




	In a sense, browsing is a personal activity, but you get the idea that people will be coming and going through the room. When I first saw the curtain function, it made a huge impression on me. I walked around with it all over the company saying, “They’ve really come up with something amazing!”
Iwata – Iwata Asks on Nintendo.com


Text

Writing text

Unlike the capacitive screens on smartphones, the Wii U’s resistive screen needs to be pressed harder than you’re probably used to for registering a touch event. The gamepad screen is big, which makes it much easier to type on this device than other handheld consoles, even without the stylus. It’s still more fiddly than a full-sized keyboard though. When you’re designing forms, consider the extra difficulty console users experience.



Although TV screens are physically big, they are typically viewed from further away than desktop screens. This makes readability an issue, so Nintendo have provided not one, but four ways to zoom in and out:


	Double-tapping on the screen.
	Tapping the on-screen zoom icons in the browser toolbar.
	Pressing the + and - buttons on the device.
	Moving the right analogue stick up and down.


As well as making it easy to zoom in and out, Nintendo have done a few other things to improve the reading experience on the TV.

System font

One thing you’ll notice pretty quickly is that the browser lacks all the fonts we’re used to falling back to. Serif fonts are replaced with the system’s sans-serif font. I couldn’t get Typekit’s font loading method to work but Fontdeck, which works slightly differently, does display custom fonts.

 The system font has been optimised for reading at a distance and is easy to distinguish because the lowercase e has a quirky little tilt.

Don’t lose :focus

Using the D-pad to navigate is similar to using a keyboard. Individual links are focused on, with a blue outline drawn around them.

The recently redesigned An Event Apart site is an example that improves the experience for keyboard and D-pad users. They’ve added a yellow background colour to links on focus. It feels nicer than the default blue outline on its own.



Media

This year, television overtook PCs as the primary way to watch online video content. TV is the natural environment for video, and 42% of online TVs in the US are connected to the internet via a console. Unfortunately, the <video> tag isn’t supported in most console browsers, and those that have Flash installed often have such an old version that the video won’t play.

I suspect this has been a big driver in getting console browsers to support web standards. The Wii U is designed with video content in mind. It doesn’t support Flash but it does support the HTML5 <video> tag.

Some video formats can’t be played, but those that are supported bring up an optimised interface with a custom scrub bar. This is where the device switches from mirroring the TV to being a second screen. The full-screen video is displayed on the TV, and the interface on the gamepad.

The really clever bit is that while a video is playing, the gamepad user can keep the video playing on the TV screen while searching for another video or browsing the web. This is the same for images too.

On the left, the video is being shown full-screen on the TV and gamepad. Only the gamepad gets the scrub bar. Clicking the slide up/down button (circled) lets the gamepad user browse the web while the video on the TV continues to play full-screen, as shown in the image on the right.

There’s support for SVG images, and they look great on a high-definition TV screen. However, there’s currently no way to save or download files.

Preparing for console users

I wasn’t expecting to be quite as impressed as I am by this browser. It’s encouraging to see console makers investing time into improving the experience as well as the standards support. In the same way there was an explosion in mobile browser use as the experience got better, I’m sure we’ll see the same with console browsers as the experience improves.

The value of detection

Consoles offer a range of inputs including gesture, voice and controller buttons. That means we have to think about more diverse methods of input than just touch and click.

This is where I could tell you to add some detection methods such as user agent string sniffing to target a different experience for console users. But the majority of the time, that really isn’t necessary. TV console browsers are getting a lot better at compensating for the living room environment, and they’re designed to work with websites that haven’t been optimised for this context.

Rather than tighten our grip on optimising experiences for every device out there, we’ve got to be pragmatic. There are so many new devices coming out every week, our designs need to be future-proof rather than fixed to a particular device in time.

Even fuzzy device detection isn’t reliable – the PS Vita declares itself to be mobile, a mobile device and a Kindle Fire tablet, while the two DS devices state they’re neither mobile nor mobile phones nor tablets, but computers. They’re weird outliers, but they’re still important devices to consider.

Thinking broadly about how our designs will be interacted with and viewed on a TV screen can help improve that experience for everyone. This is about accessibility. Considering how someone uses a site with a D-pad, we can improve the experience for keyboard users. When we think about colour contrast and text legibility on TV screens, we can apply that for anyone who reads content on the web. So why just offer this to the TV users?

Playing with the browser


	…we want to prove to them through this Wii U Internet Browser that browsing itself can be an entertainment.
Iwata – Iwata Asks on Nintendo.com


Although I’m cautious about designing experiences for specific devices, it’s fun to experiment with the technology available. Nintendo have promised web developers access to the Wii U’s buttons and sensors. There’s already some JavaScript documentation, and a demo for you to try.

If you’re interested in making your own games, thanks to web standards, a lot of HTML5 games work already on the device. Matt Hackett wrote up his experience of testing the game he built, and he talks about some of features the browser lacks. There’s certainly an incentive there for console manufacturers to improve their HTML5 support so more games can be played in their browser.

What excites me about consoles is that it’s like looking at what might be available to us in future browsers. As well as thinking about how our sites work on small screens, we should also consider big screens. We’re already figuring out how images should work at different screen widths and connection speeds, but we’ve also got some interesting challenges ahead of us catering for second screen experiences and 3D-enabled devices. 

So, this Christmas, if you’re huddled round the game console or a smart TV, give the browser in it a try.",2012,Anna Debenham,annadebenham,2012-12-22T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2012/unwrapping-the-wii-u-browser/,ux
71,Upping Your Web Security Game,"When I started working in web security fifteen years ago, web development looked very different. The few non-static web applications were built using a waterfall process and shipped quarterly at best, making it possible to add security audits before every release; applications were deployed exclusively on in-house servers, allowing Info Sec to inspect their configuration and setup; and the few third-party components used came from a small set of well-known and trusted providers. And yet, even with these favourable conditions, security teams were quickly overwhelmed and called for developers to build security in.
If the web security game was hard to win before, it’s doomed to fail now. In today’s web development, every other page is an application, accepting inputs and private data from users; software is built continuously, designed to eliminate manual gates, including security gates; infrastructure is code, with servers spawned with little effort and even less security scrutiny; and most of the code in a typical application is third-party code, pulled in through open source repositories with rarely a glance at who provided them.
Security teams, when they exist at all, cannot solve this problem. They are vastly outnumbered by developers, and cannot keep up with the application’s pace of change. For us to have a shot at making the web secure, we must bring security into the core. We need to give it no less attention than that we give browser compatibility, mobile design or web page load times. More broadly, we should see security as an aspect of quality, expecting both ourselves and our peers to address it, and taking pride when we do it well.
Where To Start?
Embracing security isn’t something you do overnight.
A good place to start is by reviewing things you’re already doing – and trying to make them more secure. Here are three concrete steps you can take to get going.
HTTPS
Threats begin when your system interacts with the outside world, which often means HTTP. As is, HTTP is painfully insecure, allowing attackers to easily steal and manipulate data going to or from the server. HTTPS adds a layer of crypto that ensures the parties know who they’re talking to, and that the information exchanged can be neither modified nor sniffed.
HTTPS is relevant to any site. If your non-HTTPS site holds opinions, reading it may get your users in trouble with employers or governments. If your users believe what you say, attackers can modify your non-HTTPS to take advantage of and abuse that trust. If you want to use new browser technologies like HTTP2 and service workers, your site will need to be HTTPS. And if you want to be discovered on the web, using HTTPS can help your Google ranking. For more details on why I think you should make the switch to HTTPS, check out this post, these slides and this video.
Using HTTPS is becoming easier and cheaper. Here are a few free tools that can help:

Get free and easy HTTPS delivery from Cloudflare (be sure to use “Full SSL”!)
Get a free and automation-friendly certificate from Let’s Encrypt (now in open beta).
Test how well your HTTPS is set up using SSLTest.

Other vendors and platforms are rapidly simplifying and reducing the cost of their HTTPS offering, as demand and importance grows.
Two-Factor Authentication
The most sensitive data is usually stored behind a login, and the authentication process is the primary gate in front of this data. Making this process secure has many aspects, including using HTTPS when accepting credentials, having a strong password policy, never storing the password, and more.
All of these are important, but the best single step to boost your authentication security is to introduce two-factor authentication (2FA). Adding 2FA usually means prompting users for an additional one-time code when logging in, which they get via SMS or a mobile app (e.g. Google Authenticator). This code is short-lived and is extremely hard for a remote attacker to guess, thus vastly reducing the risk a leaked or easily guessed password presents.
The typical algorithm for 2FA is based on an IETF standard called the time-based one-time password (TOTP) algorithm, and it isn’t that hard to implement. Joel Franusic wrote a great post on implementing 2FA; modules like speakeasy make it even easier; and you can swap SMS with Google Authenticator or your own app if you prefer. If you don’t want to build 2FA support yourself, you can purchase two/multi-factor authentication services from vendors such as DuoSecurity, Auth0, Clef, Hypr and others.
If implementing 2FA still feels like too much work, you can also choose to offload your entire authentication process to an OAuth-based federated login. Many companies offer this today, including Facebook, Google, Twitter, GitHub and others. These bigger players tend to do authentication well and support 2FA, but you should consider what data you’re sharing with them in the process.
Tracking Known Vulnerabilities
Most of the code in a modern application was actually written by third parties, and pulled into your app as frameworks, modules and libraries. While using these components makes us much more productive, along with their functionality we also adopt their security flaws. To make things worse, some of these flaws are well-known vulnerabilities, making it easy for hackers to take advantage of them in an attack.
This is a real problem and happens on pretty much every platform. Do you develop in Java? In 2014, over 6% of Java modules downloaded from Maven had a known severe security issue, the typical Java applications containing 24 flaws. Are you coding in Node.js? Roughly 14% of npm packages carry a known vulnerability, and over 60% of dev shops find vulnerabilities in their code. 30% of Docker Hub containers include a high priority known security hole, and 60% of the top 100,000 websites use client-side libraries with known security gaps.
To find known security issues, take stock of your dependencies and match them against language-specific lists such as Snyk’s vulnerability DB for Node.js, rubysec for Ruby, victims-db for Python and OWASP’s Dependency Check for Java. Once found, you can fix most issues by upgrading the component in question, though that may be tricky for indirect dependencies.  
This process is still way too painful, which means most teams don’t do it. The Snyk team and I are hoping to change that by making it as easy as possible to find, fix and monitor known vulnerabilities in your dependencies. Snyk’s wizard will help you find and fix these issues through guided upgrades and patches, and adding Snyk’s test to your continuous integration and deployment (CI/CD) will help you stay secure as your code evolves.
Note that newly disclosed vulnerabilities usually impact old code – the one you’re running in production. This means you have to stay alert when new vulnerabilities are disclosed, so you can fix them before attackers can exploit them. You can do so by subscribing to vulnerability lists like US-CERT, OSVDB and NVD. Snyk’s monitor will proactively let you know about new disclosures relevant to your code, but only for Node.js for now – you can register to get updated when we expand.
Securing Yourself
In addition to making your application secure, you should make the contributors to that application secure – including you. Earlier this year we’ve seen attackers target mobile app developers with a malicious Xcode. The real target, however, wasn’t these developers, but rather the users of the apps they create. That you create. Securing your own work environment is a key part of keeping your apps secure, and your users from being compromised.
There’s no single step that will make you fully secure, but here are a few steps that can make a big impact:

Use 2FA on all the services related to the application, notably source control (e.g. GitHub), cloud platform (e.g. AWS), CI/CD, CDN, DNS provider and domain registrar. If an attacker compromises any one of those, they could modify or replace your entire application. I’d recommend using 2FA on all your personal services too.
Use a password manager (e.g. 1Password, LastPass) to ensure you have a separate and complex password for each service. Some of these services will get hacked, and passwords will leak. When that happens, don’t let the attackers access your other systems too.
Secure your workstation. Be careful what you download, lock your screen when you walk away, change default passwords on services you install, run antivirus software, etc. Malware on your machine can translate to malware in your applications.
Be very wary of phishing. Smart attackers use ‘spear phishing’ techniques to gain access to specific systems, and can trick even security savvy users. There are even phishing scams targeting users with 2FA. Be alert to phishy emails.
Don’t install things through curl <somewhere-on-the-web> | sudo bash, especially if the URL is on GitHub, meaning someone else controls it. Don’t do it on your machines, and definitely don’t do it in your CI/CD systems. Seriously.

Staying secure should be important to you personally, but it’s doubly important when you have privileged access to an application. Such access makes you a way to reach many more users, and therefore a more compelling target for bad actors.
A Culture of Security
Using HTTPS, enabling two-factor authentication and fixing known vulnerabilities are significant steps in building security at your core. As you implement them, remember that these are just a few steps in a longer journey.
The end goal is to embrace security as an aspect of quality, and accept we all share the responsibility of keeping ourselves – and our users – safe.",2015,Guy Podjarny,guypodjarny,2015-12-11T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2015/upping-your-web-security-game/,code
112,User Styling,"During the recent US elections, Twitter decided to add an ‘election bar’ as part of their site design. You could close it if it annoyed you, but the action wasn’t persistent and the bar would always come back like a bad penny. 

The solution to common browsing problems like this is CSS. ‘User styling’ (or the creepy ‘skinning’) is the creation of CSS rules to customise and personalise a particular domain. Aside from hiding adverts and other annoyances, there are many reasons for taking the time and effort to do it:


	Improving personal readability by changing text size and colour
	Personalising the look of a web app like GMail to look less insipid
	Revealing microformats
	Sport! My dreams of site skinning tennis are not yet fully realised, but it’ll be all the rage by next Christmas, believe me.


Hopefully you’re now asking “But how? HOW?!”. The process of creating a site skin is roughly as follows:


	See something you want to change
	Find out what it’s called, and if any rules already apply to it
	Write CSS rule(s) to override and/or enhance it.
	Apply the rules


So let’s get stuck in…

See something

Let’s start small with Multimap.com. Look at that big header – it takes up an awful lot of screen space doesn’t it? 



No matter, we can fix it.

Tools

Now we need to find out where that big assed header is in the DOM, and make overriding CSS rules. The best tool  I’ve found yet is the Mac OS X app, CSS Edit. It utilises a slick ‘override stylesheets’ function and DOM Inspector. Rather than give you all the usual DOM inspection tools, CSS Edit’s is solely concerned with style.  Go into ‘X-Ray’ mode, click an element, and look at the inspector window to see every style rule governing it. Click the selector to be taken to where it lives in the CSS. It really is a user styling dream app.



Having said all that, you can achieve all this with free, cross platform  tools – namely Firefox with the Firebug and Stylish extensions. We’ll be using them for these examples, so make sure you have them installed if you want to follow along.



Using Firebug, we can see that the page is very helpfully marked up, and that whole top area is simply a div with an ID of header. 

Change Something

When you installed Stylish, it added a page and brush icon to your status bar. Click on that, and choose Write Style > for Multimap.com. The other options allow you to only create a style for a particular part of a website or URL, but we want this to apply to the whole of Multimap:



The ‘Add Style’ window then pops up, with the @-moz-document query at the top:

@namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);
@-moz-document domain(""multimap.com"") {
}

All you need to do is add the CSS to hide the header, in between the curly brackets.

@namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);
@-moz-document domain(""multimap.com"") {
        #header {display: none;} 
}



A click of the preview button shows us that it’s worked! Now the map appears further up the page. The ethics of hiding adverts is a discussion for another time, but let’s face it, when did you last whoop at the sight of a banner?

Make Something Better

If we’re happy with our modifications, all we need to do is give it a name and save. Whenever you visit Multimap.com, the style will be available. Stylish also allows you to toggle a style on/off via the status bar menu. If you feel you want to share this style with the world, then userstyles.org is the place to do it. It’s a grand repository of customisations that Stylish connects with. Whenever you visit a site, you can see if anyone else has written a style for it, again, via the status bar menu “Find Styles for this Page”. Selecting this with “BBC News” shows that there are plenty of options, ranging from small layout tweaks to redesigns:



What’s more, whenever a style is updated, Stylish will notify you, and offer a one-click process to update it. This does only work in Firefox and Flock, so I’ll cover ways of applying site styles to other browsers later.

Specific Techniques

Important!

In the Multimap example there wasn’t a display specified on that element, but it isn’t always going to be that easy. You may have spent most of your CSS life being a good designer and not resorting to adding !important to give your rule priority. There’s no way to avoid this in user styling – if you’re overriding an existing rule it’s a necessity! Be prepared to be typing !important a lot.

Star Selector

The Universal Selector is a particularly useful way to start a style. For example, if we want to make Flickr use Helvetica before Arial (as they should’ve done!), we can cover all occurrences with just one rule:

* {font-family: ""Helvetica Neue"", Helvetica, sans-serif !important;}

You can also use it to select ‘everything within an element’, by placing it after the element name:

#content * {font-family: ""Helvetica Neue"", Helvetica, sans-serif !important;}

Swapping Images

If you’re changing something a little more complex, such as Google Reader, then at some point you’ll probably want to change an <img>. The technique for replacing an image involves:


	making your replacement image the background of the <img> tag
	adding padding top and left to the size of you image to push the ‘top’ image away
	making the height and width zero.




The old image is then pushed out of the way and hidden from view, allowing the replacement in the background to be revealed.  Targeting the image may require using an attribute selector:

img[src=""/reader/ui/3544433079-tree-view-folder-open.gif""] {
	padding: 16px 0 0 16px;
	width: 0 !important;
	height: 0 !important;
	background-image: url(data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAABAAAAAQCAYA
AAAf8/9hAAAABHNCSVQICAgIfAhkiAAAAAlwSFlzAAALEgAACxIB0t1+/AAAA
Bx0RVh0U29mdHdhcmUAQWRvYmUgRmlyZXdvcmtzIENTM5jWRgMAAAAVdE
VYdENyZWF0aW9uIFRpbWUAMjkvNi8wOJJ/BVgAAAG3SURBVDiNpZIhb5RBEIaf
2W+vpIagIITSBIHBgsGjEYQaFLYShcITDL+ABIPnh4BFN0GQNFA4Cnf3fbszL2L3
jiuEVLDJbCazu8+8Mzsmif9ZBvDy7bvXlni0HRe8eXL/zuPzABng62J5kFKaAQS
QgJAOgHMB9vDZq+d71689Hcyw9LfAZAYdioE10VSJo6OPL/KNvSuHD+7dhU
0vHEsDUUWJChIlYJIjFx5BuMB2mJY/DnMoOJl/R147oBUR0QAm8LAGCOEh3IO
ULiAl8jSOy/nPetGsbGRKjktEiBCEHMlQj4loCuu4zCXCi4lUHTNDtGqEiACTqAFSI
OgAUAKv4bkWVy2g6tAbJtGy0TNugM3HADmlurKH27dVZSecxjboXggiAsMItR
h99wTILdewYRpXVJWtY85k7fPW8e1GpJFJacgesXs6VYYomz9G2yDhwPB7NEB
BDAMK7WYJlisYVBCpfaJBeB+eocFyVyAgCaoMCTJSTOOCWSyILrAnaXpSexRsx
GGAZ0AR+XT+5fjzyfwSpnUB/1w64xizVI/t6q3b+58+vJ96mWtLf9haxNoc8M
v7N3d+AT4XPcFIxghoAAAAAElFTkSuQmCC) no-repeat !important;
}

Woah boy! What was all that gubbins in the background-image? It was a Data URI, and you can create these easily with Hixie’s online tool. It’s simply the image translated into text so that it can be embedded in the CSS, cutting down on the number of http requests. It’s also a necessity with Mozilla browsers, as they don’t allow user CSS to reference images stored locally. Converting images to URI’s avoids this, as well as making a style easily portable – no images folder to pass around. 

Don’t forget all your other CSS techniques at your disposal: inserting your own content with :before and :after pseudo classes, make elements semi-transparent with opacity and round box corners without hacking . You can have fun, and for once, enjoy the freedom of not worrying about IE!

User styling without Stylish

Instead of using the Stylish extension, you can add rules to the userContent.css file, or use @import in that file to load a separate stylesheet. You can find this is in /Library/Application Support/Camino/chrome/ on OS X, or C/Program Files/Mozilla Firefox/Chrome on Windows. This is only way to apply user styles in Camino, but what about other browsers?

Opera & Omniweb: 

Both allow you to specify a custom CSS file as part of the site’s preferences. Opera also allows custom javascript, using the same syntax as Greasemonkey scripts (more on that below)

Safari

There are a few options here: the PithHelmet and SafariStand haxies both allow custom stylesheets, or alternatively, a Greasemonkey style user script can employed via GreaseKit. The latter is my favoured solution on my Helvetireader theme, as it can allow for more prescriptive domain rules, just like the Mozilla @-moz-document method. User scripts are also the solution supported by the widest range of browsers.

What now?

Hopefully I’ve given you enough information for you to be able start making your own styles. If you want to go straight in and tackle the ‘Holy Grail’, then off with you to GMail – I get more requests to theme that than anything else!

If you’re a site author and want to encourage this sort of tom foolery, a good way is to provide a unique class or ID name with the body tag:

<body id=""journal"" class=""hicksdesign-co-uk"">

This makes it very easy to write rules that only apply to that particular site. If you wanted to use Safari without any of the haxies mentioned above, this method means you can include rules in a general CSS file (chosen via Preferences > Advanced > Stylesheet) without affecting other sites. 

One final revelation on user styling – it’s not just for web sites. You can tweak the UI of Firefox itself with the userChrome.css. You’ll need to use the in-built DOM Inspector instead of Firebug to inspect the window chrome, instead of a page. Great if you want to make small tweaks (changing the size of tab text for example) without creating a full blown theme.",2008,Jon Hicks,jonhicks,2008-12-03T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2008/user-styling/,process
107,Using Google App Engine as Your Own Content Delivery Network,"Do you remember, years ago, when hosting was expensive, domain names were the province of the rich, and you hosted your web pages on Geocities? It seems odd to me now that there was a time when each and every geek didn’t have his own top-level domain and super hosting setup. But as the parts became more and more affordable a man could become an outcast if he didn’t have his own slightly surreal-sounding TLD.

And so it will be in the future when people realise with surprise there was a time before affordable content delivery networks.

A content delivery network, or CDN, is a system of servers spread around the world, serving files from the nearest physical location. Instead of waiting for a file to find its way from a server farm in Silicon Valley 8,000 kilometres away, I can receive it from London, Dublin, or Paris, cutting down the time I wait. The big names — Google, Yahoo, Amazon, et al — use CDNs for their sites, but they’ve always been far too expensive for us mere mortals. Until now.

There’s a service out there ready for you to use as your very own CDN. You have the company’s blessing, you won’t need to write a line of code, and — best of all — it’s free. The name? Google App Engine.

In this article you’ll find out how to set up a CDN on Google App Engine. You’ll get the development software running on your own computer, tell App Engine what files to serve, upload them to a web site, and give everyone round the world access to them.

Creating your first Google App Engine project

Before we do anything else, you’ll need to download the Google App Engine software development kit (SDK). You’ll need Python 2.5 too — you won’t be writing any Python code but the App Engine SDK will need it to run on your computer. If you don’t have Python, App Engine will install it for you (if you use Mac OS X 10.5 or a Linux-based OS you’ll have Python; if you use Windows you won’t).

Done that? Excellent, because that’s the hardest step. The rest is plain sailing.

You’ll need to choose a unique ‘application id’ — nothing more than a name — for your project. Make sure it consists only of lowercase letters and numbers. For this article I’ll use 24ways2008, but you can choose anything you like.

On your computer, create a folder named after your application id. This folder can be anywhere you want: your desktop, your documents folder, or wherever you usually keep your web files. Within your new folder, create a folder called assets, and within that folder create three folders called images, css, and javascript. These three folders are the ones you’ll fill with files and serve from your content delivery network. You can have other folders too, if you like.

That will leave you with a folder structure like this:

24ways2008/
		assets/
			css/
			images/
			javascript/

Now you need to put a few files in these folders, so we can later see our CDN in action. You can put anything you want in these folders, but for this example we’ll include an HTML file, a style sheet, an image, and a Javascript library.

In the top-level folder (the one I’ve called 24ways2008), create a file called index.html. Fill this with any content you want. In the assets/css folder, create a file named core.css and throw in a couple of CSS rules for good measure. In the assets/images directory save any image that takes your fancy — I’ve used the silver badge from the App Engine download page. Finally, to fill the JavaScript folder, add in this jQuery library file. If you’ve got the time and the inclination, you can build a page that uses all these elements.

So now we should have a set of files and folders that look something like this:

24ways2008/
		assets/
				index.html
				css/
						core.css
				images/
						appengine-silver-120x30.gif
				javascript/
						jquery-1.2.6.min.js

Which leaves us with one last file to create. This is the important one: it tells App Engine what to do with your files. It’s named app.yaml, it sits at the top-level (inside the folder I’ve named 24ways2008), and it needs to include these lines:

application: 24ways2008
version: 1
runtime: python
api_version: 1

handlers:
- url: /
	static_files: assets/index.html
	upload: assets/index.html

- url: /
	static_dir: assets

You need to make sure you change 24ways2008 on the first line to whatever you chose as your application id, but otherwise the content of your app.yaml file should be identical. And with that, you’ve created your first App Engine project. If you want it, you can download a zip file containing my project.

Testing your project

As it stands, your project is ready to be uploaded to App Engine. But we couldn’t call ourselves professionals if we didn’t test it, could we? So, let’s put that downloaded SDK to good use and run the project from your own computer.

One of the files you’ll find App Engine installed is named dev_appserver.py, a Python script used to simulate App Engine on your computer. You’ll find lots of information on how to do this in the documentation on the development web server, but it boils down to running the script like so (the space and the dot at the end are important):

dev_appserver.py .

You’ll need to run this from the command-line: Mac users can run the Terminal application, Linux users can run their favourite shell, and Windows users will need to run it via the Command Prompt (open the Start menu, choose ‘Run…’, type ‘cmd‘, and click ‘OK’). Before you run the script you’ll need to make sure you’re in the project folder — in my case, as I saved it to my desktop I can go there by typing 

cd ~/Desktop/24ways2008

in my Mac’s Terminal app; if you’re using Windows you can type 

cd ""C:\Documents and Settings\username\Desktop\24ways2008""

If that’s successful, you’ll see a few lines of output, the last looking something like this:

INFO     2008-11-22 14:35:00,830 dev_appserver_main.py] Running application 24ways2008 on port 8080: http://localhost:8080

Now you can power up your favourite browser, point it to http://localhost:8080/, and you’ll see the page you saved as index.html. You’ll also find your CSS file at http://localhost:8080/css/core.css. In fact, anything you put inside the assets folder in the project will be accessible from this domain. You’re running our own App Engine web server!

Note that no-one else will be able to see your files: localhost is a special domain that you can only see from your computer — and once you stop the development server (by pressing Control–C) you’ll not be able to see the files in your browser until you start it again.

You might notice a new file has turned up in your project: index.yaml. App Engine creates this file when you run the development server, and it’s for internal App Engine use only. If you delete it there are no ill effects, but it will reappear when you next run the development server. If you’re using version control (e.g. Subversion) there’s no need to keep a copy in your repository.

So you’ve tested your project and you’ve seen it working on your own machine; now all you need to do is upload your project and the world will be able to see your files too.

Uploading your project

If you don’t have a Google account, create one and then sign in to App Engine. Tell Google about your new project by clicking on the ‘Create an Application’ button. Enter your application id, give the application a name, and agree to the terms and conditions. That’s it. All we need do now is upload the files.

Open your Mac OS X Terminal, Windows Command Prompt, or Linux shell window again, move to the project folder, and type (again, the space and the dot at the end are important):

appcfg.py update .

Enter your email address and password when prompted, and let App Engine do it’s thing. It’ll take no more than a few seconds, but in that time App Engine will have done the equivalent of logging in to an FTP server and copying files across. It’s fairly understated, but you now have your own project up and running. You can see mine at http://24ways2008.appspot.com/, and everyone can see yours at http://your-application-id.appspot.com/. Your files are being served up over Google’s content delivery network, at no cost to you!

Benefits of using Google App Engine

The benefits of App Engine as a CDN are obvious: your own server doesn’t suck up the bandwidth, while your visitors will appreciate a faster site. But there are also less obvious benefits.

First, once you’ve set up your site, updating it is an absolute breeze. Each time you update a file (or a batch of files) you need only run appcfg.py to see the changes appear on your site. To paraphrase Joel Spolsky, a good web site must be able to be updated in a single step. Many designers and developers can’t make that claim, but with App Engine, you can.

App Engine also allows multiple people to work on one application. If you want a friend to be able to upload files to your site you can let him do so without giving him usernames and passwords — all he needs is his own Google account. App Engine also gives you a log of all actions taken by collaborators, so you can see who’s made updates, and when.

Another bonus is the simple version control App Engine offers. Do you remember the file named app.yaml you created a while back? The second line looked like this:

version: 1

If you change the version number to 2 (or 3, or 4, etc), App Engine will keep a copy of the last version you uploaded. If anything goes wrong with your latest version, you can tell App Engine to revert back to that last saved version. It’s no proper version control system, but it could get you out of a sticky situation.

One last thing to note: if you’re not happy using your-application-id.appspot.com as your domain, App Engine will quite happily use any domain you own.

The weak points of Google App Engine

In the right circumstances, App Engine can be a real boon. I run my own site using the method I’ve discussed above, and I’m very happy with it. But App Engine does have its disadvantages, most notably those discussed by Aral Balkan in his post ‘Why Google App Engine is broken and what Google must do to fix it‘.

Aral found the biggest problems while using App Engine as a web application platform; I wouldn’t recommend using it as such either (at least for now) but for our purposes as a CDN for static files, it’s much more worthy. Still, App Engine has two shortcomings you should be aware of.

The first is that you can’t host a file larger than one megabyte. If you want to use App Engine to host that 4.3MB download for your latest-and-greatest desktop software, you’re out of luck. The only solution is to stick to smaller files.

The second problem is the quota system. Google’s own documentation says you’re allowed 650,000 requests a day and 10,000 megabytes of bandwidth in and out (20,000 megabytes in total), which should be plenty for most sites. But people have seen sites shut down temporarily for breaching quotas — in some cases after inexplicable jumps in Google’s server CPU usage. Aral, who’s seen it happen to his own sites, seemed genuinely frustrated by this, and if you measure your hits in the hundreds of thousands and don’t want to worry about uptime, App Engine isn’t for you.

That said, for most of us, App Engine offers a fantastic resource: the ability to host files on Google’s own content delivery network, at no charge.

Conclusion

If you’ve come this far, you’ve seen how to create a Google App Engine project and host your own files on Google’s CDN. You’ve seen the great advantages App Engine offers — an excellent content delivery network, the ability to update your site with a single command, multiple authors, simple version control, and the use of your own domain — and you’ve come across some of its weaknesses — most importantly the limit on file sizes and the quota system. All that’s left to do is upload those applications — but not before you’ve finished your Christmas shopping.",2008,Matt Riggott,mattriggott,2008-12-06T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2008/using-google-app-engine-as-your-own-cdn/,process
94,Using Questionnaires for Design Research,"How do you ask the right questions? 

In this article, I share a bunch of tips and practical advice on how to write and use your own surveys for design research.

I’m an audience researcher – I’m not a designer or developer. I’ve spent much of the last thirteen years working with audience data both in creative agencies and on the client-side. I’m also a member of the Market Research Society. I run user surveys and undertake user research for our clients at the design studio I run with my husband – Mark Boulton Design.

So let’s get started!

Who are you designing for?

Good web designers and developers appreciate the importance of understanding the audience they are designing or building a website or app for. I’m assuming that because you are reading a quality publication like 24 ways that you fall into this category, and so I won’t begin this article with a lecture.

Suffice it to say, it’s a good idea to involve research of some sort during the life cycle of every project you undertake. I don’t just mean visual or competitor research, which of course is also very important. I mean looking at or finding your own audience or user data. Whether that be auditing existing data or research available from the client, carrying out user interviews, A/B testing, or conducting a simple questionnaire with users, any research is better than none. If you create personas as a design tool, they should always be based on research, so you will need to have plenty of data to hand for that.

Where do I start?

In the initial kick-off stages of a project, it’s a good idea to start by asking your client (when working in-house you still have a client – you might even be the client) what research or audience data they have available. Some will have loads – analytics, surveys, focus groups and insights – from talking to customers. Some won’t have much at all and you’ll be hard pressed to find out much about the audience. It’s best to review existing research first without rushing headlong into doing new research. Get a picture of what the data tells you and perhaps get this into a document – who, what, why and how are they using this website or app? What gaps are there in existing research? What else do you need to know? Then you can decide what else you need to do to plug these gaps. Think about the information first before deciding on the methodology. The rest of my article talks mostly about running self-completion online surveys. You can of course do face-to-face surveys, self-completion written questionnaires or phone polls, but I won’t cover those here. That’s for another article.

Why run a survey?

Surveys are great for getting a broad picture of your audience. As long as they are designed carefully, you can create an overview of them, how they use the site and their opinions of it, with an idea of which parts of this picture are more important than others. By using a limited amount of open-ended questions, you can also get some more qualitative feedback or insights on your website or app. The clients we work with surprisingly often don’t have much in the way of audience research available, even basic analytics, so I will often suggest running a short survey, just to create a picture of who is out there.

OK, what should I do first?

Before you rush into writing questions, stop and think about what you’re trying to find out. Remember being in school when you studied science and you had to propose a hypothesis? This could be a starting point – something to prove or disprove. Or, even better, write a research brief. It doesn’t have to be long; it can be just a sentence that encapsulates what you’re trying to do, like a good creative brief. For the purposes of this article, I created a short, slightly silly survey on Christmas and beliefs in Father Christmas.

My research brief was:


	To find out more about people’s beliefs about Father Christmas and their experiences of Christmas.


Inevitably, as you start thinking of what questions to ask, you will find that you go off at tangents or your client will want you to add in everything but the kitchen sink. In order for your questionnaire not to get too long and lose focus, you could write lists of what it is and what it’s not. This is how I’d apply it to my Christmas questionnaire example:

What it is about


	How people communicate with Father Christmas
	If someone’s background has affected their likelihood of believing in Father Christmas


What it is not about


	What colour to change Father Christmas’s coat to
	Father Christmas’s elves


Let’s get down to business: the questions. 

Kinds of questions

There are two basic kinds of questions: open-ended and closed. Closed questions limit answers by giving the respondent a number of predefined lists of options to choose from. Typically, these are multiple-choice questions with a list of responses. You can either select one or tick all that apply. Another useful type of closed question I often use is a rating scale, where a respondent can assess a situation along a continuum of values. These can also be useful as a measure of advocacy or strength of feeling about something. There is a standard measure called the Net Promoter score, which measures how likely someone is to recommend your product or service to a friend or acquaintance. It’s a useful benchmark as you can compare your scores to others in a similar sector.



Open-ended questions often take the form of a statement which requires a response. Generally, respondents are given a text box to fill in. It’s useful to limit this in some way so that people have an idea of how long the expected response should be; for example, a single line for an email address (Q18), or a larger text area for a longer response (Q6).

If you plan to send your survey out to a large number of people, I would suggest using mostly closed questions, unless you want to spend a long time wading through comments and hand-coded responses. I’d always advise adding a general request at the end of a survey (‘Is there anything else you’d like to tell us?’). You’d be surprised how many interesting and insightful comments people will add.

There are times when it’s better to provide an open-ended text box rather than a predefined list makes assumptions about your audience’s groupings. For example, we ran a short survey for our Gridset beta testers and rather than assume we knew who they were, we decided to ask an open-ended question: “What is your current job title?”



The analysis took quite a bit longer than responses using a predefined list, but it meant that we were able to make sure we didn’t miss anyone. And next time we run a survey for Gridset, I can use the responses gathered from this survey to help create a predefined list to make analysis easier.

What to ask

The questions to ask depend on what you want to know, but your brief and lists of what the survey is and isn’t should help here. I always ask the design team and client to give me ideas of what they are interested in finding out, and combine this with a mix of new and standard questions I have used in other surveys. I find Survey Monkey’s question bank a very useful source of example questions and help with tricky wording.

I always include simple demographics so I can compare my results to the population at large or internet users as a whole – just going on age, gender and location can be quite illuminating. For example, with the Christmas survey, I can see that the respondents were typical of the online design and dev community, mainly young and male.

If appropriate, I add questions on disability, ethnic background, religion and community of interest. Questions about ethnicity, religion, sexual preference, disability and other sensitive subjects can feel awkward and difficult to ask. This is not a good reason to not ask them. Perhaps you’re working for a public sector client, like a local council, so it’s likely you will need to consider groups of people who maybe under-represented, who may have differing views to others, or who you need to look at specifically as a subset.

How to ask

Although they may seem clunky and wordy, it’s often best to use the census wording or professional body wording for such demographic questions. For example, I used the UK census 2011 wording for Wales on my Christmas questionnaire in my questions on religion [PDF] (Q16) and ethnicity [PDF] (Q17). I had to adapt them slightly for the Survey Monkey format – self-completion online, rather than pen and paper – which is why “White Welsh” came up as the first option for the ethnicity question. For similar questions for US audiences, try the Census Bureau website.

When conducting a survey for a project that has a global audience, you need to consider who your primary audience is. For example, I recently created a questionnaire for a global news website. A large proportion of its audience is based in the USA, so I was careful to word things in a way Americans would find familiar. I used the US ethnic background census question wording and options, and looked at data for US competitor news websites to decide which to include.

You should also consider people whose first language isn’t English. Working as an audience researcher at BBC Wales, every survey we did was bilingual. I’ve also recently run a user survey in Arabic using Google Forms. During this project, we found that while Survey Monkey supports different languages, including Arabic, the text ran left to right with no option to change it to right to left – an essential when it comes to reading Arabic! If research is a deliverable in a client project, and you know you’ll need to conduct it in a foreign language, always build in extra time for translation at both the questionnaire design and analysis stages. Make sure you also allow for plenty of checks. In this case we had to change to Google Forms after initially creating our survey with Survey Monkey to get the functionality we needed.

Look and feel

Think about the survey as another way your audience will experience your brand. Take care getting the tone of voice right. There are plenty of great articles and books out there about tone of voice – try Letting Go of the Words by Ginny Redish for starters, or Brand Language by Liz Doig. The basic rule of thumb is to sound like a human, and use clear and friendly language. If, like me, you are lucky enough to work with journalists or copy editors, you should ask for their help, particularly in the preamble, linking text and closing statements. I find it helpful to break my questions down into sections and to have a page for each. I then have an introductory piece of text for each section to guide the respondent through the survey.

You should also make sure you check with your designers how your survey looks – use a company logo and branding, and make the typography legible. Many survey apps like Survey Monkey and Google Forms have a progress bar. This is helpful for users to see how far through your survey they are. I generally time the survey and give an indication in the preamble: “This survey will only take five minutes of your time.”

You also need to think about how you will technically serve the questionnaire. For example, will it be via email, social media, a pop-up or lightbox on your website, or (not recommended but possible) in an ad space?

Ethical considerations

Something else to think about are any local laws that govern how you collect and store data, such as the Data Protection Act in the UK. As a member of the Market Research Society, I am also obliged to consider its guidelines, but even if you’re not, it’s always a good idea to deal with personal data ethically.

If you collect personal data that can identify individuals, you must ask their permission to share it with others, and store it securely for no longer than two years. If you want to contact people afterwards, you must ask for their permission. If you ask for email addresses, as I did in question 18, you have a ready-made sample for a further survey, interviews or focus groups. Remember, you shouldn’t survey people under sixteen years old without the permission of their parents or legal guardians, so if you know your website is likely to be used by children, you must ask for verification of age early on, and your survey should close someone answers that they are under sixteen. The ESOMAR guidelines for online research [PDF] are well worth reading, as they go into detail about such issues, as well as privacy guidelines – using cookies, storing IP addresses, and so on.

Tools

Unless you work in-house and have proprietary software, or at a market research agency and you’re using specialist software such as Snap or IBM SPSS Statistics (previously just SPSS), you will need to use a good tool to run your survey, collect your responses and, ideally, help with the analysis. I like Survey Monkey because of the question bank and analysis tools. The software graphs your results and does simple cross-tabbing and filtering. What this means is you can slice the data in more interesting ways and delve a bit deeper. For example, in the Gridset questionnaire I mentioned earlier, I cross-tabbed responses to questions against whether a person worked in-house, for an agency or as a freelancer. 

Other well known online tools that I also use from time to time are Wufoo and Google Forms. Smart Surveys is a similar service to Survey Monkey and it’s used by many leading brands in the UK. Snap Surveys mentioned above is a well-established player in the market research scene, used a lot for face-to-face surveys and also on tablets and smartphones.

Analysis

Analysis is often overlooked but is as important as the design of the questionnaire. Don’t just rely on looking at the summary report and charts generated as standard by your form or survey software. Spend time with your data. Spend at least a week now and then if you can, looking at the data. Keep coming back to it and tweaking or cutting it a different way to see if there are any different pictures. Slice it up in different ways to reveal new insights. Here is the data from my dummy survey (apart from the open-ended responses). 

For open-ended questions, you can analyse collaboratively. Print and cut out the open-ended responses and do a cluster analysis or affinity sort with a colleague. 



Discussing the comments helps you to understand them. You will also find the design team are more likely to buy into the research as they have uncovered the insights for themselves. Always make sure to treat open-ended responses sensitively and don’t share anything publicly in a way that identifies the respondent.

Write a report

Never hand over a dataset to your client without a summary of the findings. Data on its own can be skewed to suit the reader’s needs, and not everyone is able to find the story in a dataset. Even if it’s not a deliverable, it’s always a good idea to capture your findings in a report of some sort. Use graphs sparingly to show really interesting things or to aid the reader’s understanding. I have written a quick dummy report using the data from the Christmas questionnaire so you can see how it’s done.

I highly recommend Brian Suda’s book A Practical Guide to Designing with Data for tips on how to present data effectively, but that’s a subject that benefits a whole article (indeed book) in itself. 

I am not a designer. I am a researcher, so I never write design recommendations in a report unless they have been talked about or suggested by the designers I work with. More often, I write up the results and we talk about them and what impact they have on the project or design. Often they lead to more questions or further research.

So that’s it: a brief introduction to using questionnaires for design research. Here’s a quick summary to remind you what I have talked about, and a list of resources if you’re interested in reading further.

Top 10 things to remember when using questionnaires for design research:


	Start by auditing existing research to identify gaps in data.
	Write a research brief. Work out exactly what you’re trying to find out – what is the survey about, and what is it not about?
	The two basic kinds of questions are open-ended and closed.
	Closed questions limit responses by giving the respondent a number of predefined lists of options to choose from (multiple choice, rating scales, and so on).
	Open-ended questions are often in the form of a statement which requires a response. Always ask one at the end of a questionnaire.
	Always include simple demographics to enable you to compare your sample against the population in general.
	It’s best to use official census or professional body wording for questions on ethnicity, disability and religion.
	Be sure to think carefully about your tone of voice and the look of your questionnaire.
	Pay attention to guidelines and laws on storing personal data, cookies and privacy.
	Invest plenty of time in analysis and report writing. Don’t just look at the obvious – dig deep for more interesting insights.


Some useful resources for further study

Online research


	Design Research: Methods and Perspectives edited by Brenda Laurel
	Online Research Essentials by Brenda Russell and John Purcell
	Handbook of Online and Social Media Research by Ray Poynter
	ESOMAR guidelines for online research [PDF]
	Online questionnaires


Market research books on questionnaire design


	Using Questionnaires in Small-Scale Research: A Beginner’s Guide by Pamela Munn
	Questionnaire Design by A N Oppenheim
	Developing a Questionnaire by Bill Gillham",2012,Emma Boulton,emmaboulton,2012-12-14T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2012/using-questionnaires-for-design-research/,business
239,Using the WebFont Loader to Make Browsers Behave the Same,"Web fonts give us designers a whole new typographic palette with which to work. However, browsers handle the loading of web fonts in different ways, and this can lead to inconsistent user experiences.

Safari, Chrome and Internet Explorer leave a blank space in place of the styled text while the web font is loading. Opera and Firefox show text with the default font which switches over when the web font has loaded, resulting in the so-called Flash of Unstyled Text (aka FOUT). Some people prefer Safari’s approach as it eliminates FOUT, others think the Firefox way is more appropriate as content can be read whilst fonts download. Whatever your preference, the WebFont Loader can make all browsers behave the same way.

The WebFont Loader is a JavaScript library that gives you extra control over font loading. It was co-developed by Google and Typekit, and released as open source. The WebFont Loader works with most web font services as well as with self-hosted fonts.

The WebFont Loader tells you when the following events happen as a browser downloads web fonts (or loads them from cache):


	when fonts start to download (‘loading’)
	when fonts finish loading (‘active’)
	if fonts fail to load (‘inactive’)


If your web page requires more than one font, the WebFont Loader will trigger events for individual fonts, and for all the fonts as a whole. This means you can find out when any single font has loaded, and when all the fonts have loaded (or failed to do so).

The WebFont Loader notifies you of these events in two ways: by applying special CSS classes when each event happens; and by firing JavaScript events. For our purposes, we’ll be using just the CSS classes.

Implementing the WebFont Loader

As stated above, the WebFont Loader works with most web font services as well as with self-hosted fonts.

Self-hosted fonts

To use the WebFont Loader when you are hosting the font files on your own server, paste the following code into your web page:

<script type=""text/javascript"">
WebFontConfig = {
	custom: { families: ['Font Family Name', 'Another Font Family'],
	urls: [ 'http://yourwebsite.com/styles.css' ] }
};
(function() {
	var wf = document.createElement('script');
	wf.src = ('https:' == document.location.protocol ? 'https' : 'http') + '://ajax.googleapis.com/ajax/libs/webfont/1/webfont.js';
	wf.type = 'text/javascript';
	wf.async = 'true';
	var s = document.getElementsByTagName('script')[0];
	s.parentNode.insertBefore(wf, s);
})();
</script>

Replace Font Family Name and Another Font Family with a comma-separated list of the font families you want to check against, and replace http://yourwebsite.com/styles.css with the URL of the style sheet where your @font-face rules reside.

Fontdeck

Assuming you have added some fonts to a website project in Fontdeck, use the afore-mentioned code for self-hosted solutions and replace http://yourwebsite.com/styles.css with the URL of the <link> tag in your Fontdeck website settings page. It will look something like http://f.fontdeck.com/s/css/xxxx/domain/nnnn.css.

Typekit

Typekit’s JavaScript-based implementation incorporates the WebFont Loader events by default, so you won’t need to include any WebFont Loader code.

Making all browsers behave like Safari

To make Firefox and Opera work in the same way as WebKit browsers (Safari, Chrome, etc.) and Internet Explorer, and thus minimise FOUT, you need to hide the text while the fonts are loading.

While fonts are loading, the WebFont Loader adds a class of wf-loading to the <html> element. Once the fonts have loaded, the wf-loading class is removed and replaced with a class of wf-active (or wf-inactive if all of the fonts failed to load). This means you can style elements on the page while the fonts are loading and then style them differently when the fonts have finished loading.

So, let’s say the text you need to hide while fonts are loading is contained in all paragraphs and top-level headings. By writing the following style rule into your CSS, you can hide the text while the fonts are loading:

.wf-loading h1, .wf-loading p {
	visibility:hidden;
}

Because the wf-loading class is removed once the the fonts have loaded, the visibility:hidden rule will stop being applied, and the text revealed. You can see this in action on this simple example page.

That works nicely across the board, but the situation is slightly more complicated. WebKit doesn’t wait for all fonts to load before displaying text: it displays text elements as soon as the relevant font is loaded. 

To emulate WebKit more accurately, we need to know when individual fonts have loaded, and apply styles accordingly. Fortunately, as mentioned earlier, the WebFont Loader has events for individual fonts too.

When a specific font is loading, a class of the form wf-fontfamilyname-n4-loading is applied. Assuming headings and paragraphs are styled in different fonts, we can make our CSS more specific as follows:

.wf-fontfamilyname-n4-loading h1, 
.wf-anotherfontfamily-n4-loading p {
	visibility:hidden;
}

Note that the font family name is transformed to lower case, with all spaces removed. The n4 is a shorthand for the weight and style of the font family. In most circumstances you’ll use n4 but refer to the WebFont Loader documentation for exceptions.

You can see it in action on this Safari example page (you’ll probably need to disable your cache to see any change occur).

Making all browsers behave like Firefox

To make WebKit browsers and Internet Explorer work like Firefox and Opera, you need to explicitly show text while the fonts are loading. In order to make this happen, you need to specify a font family which is not a web font while the fonts load, like this:

.wf-fontfamilyname-n4-loading h1 { 
    font-family: 'arial narrow', sans-serif; 
}
.wf-anotherfontfamily-n4-loading p { 
    font-family: arial, sans-serif; 
}

You can see this in action on the Firefox example page (again you’ll probably need to disable your cache to see any change occur).

And there’s more

That’s just the start of what can be done with the WebFont Loader. More areas to explore would be tweaking font sizes to reduce the impact of reflowing text and to better cater for very narrow fonts. By using the JavaScript events much more can be achieved too, such as fading in text as the fonts load.",2010,Richard Rutter,richardrutter,2010-12-02T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2010/using-the-webfont-loader-to-make-browsers-behave-the-same/,code
207,Want to Break Out of Comparison Syndrome? Do a Media Detox,"“Comparison is the thief of joy.”
—Theodore Roosevelt

I grew up in an environment of perpetual creativity and inventiveness. My father Dennis built and flew experimental aircraft as a hobby. During my entire childhood, there was an airplane fuselage in the garage instead of a car. My mother Deloria was a self-taught master artisan who could quickly acquire any skills that it took to work with fabric and weaving. She could sew any garment she desired, and was able to weave intricate wall hangings just by looking at a black and white photos in magazines. My older sister Diane blossomed into a consummate fine artist who drew portraits with uncanny likeness, painted murals, and studied art and architecture. In addition, she loved good food and had a genius for cooking and baking, which converged in her creating remarkable art pieces out of cake that were incredibly delicious to boot. Yes. This was the household in which I grew up.
While there were countless positives to being surrounded by people who were compelled to create, there was also a downside to it. I incessantly compared myself to my parents and older sister and always found myself lacking.
It wasn’t a fair comparison, but tell that to a sensitive kid who wanted to fit in to her family by being creative as well. From my early years throughout my teens, I convinced myself that I would never understand how to build an airplane or at least be as proficient with tools as my father, the aeronautical engineer. Even though my sister was six years older than I was, I lamented that I would never be as good a visual artist as she was. And I marveled at my mother’s seemingly magical ability to make and tailor clothes and was certain that I would never attain her level of mastery.
This habit of comparing myself to others grew over the years, continuing to subtly and effectively undermine my sense of self. I had almost reached an uneasy truce with my comparison habit when social media happened.
As an early adopter of Twitter, I loved staying connected to people I met at tech conferences. However, as I began to realize my aspirations of being an author and a speaker, Twitter became a dreaded hall of mirrors where I only saw distorted reflections of my lack of achievement in other people’s success. Every person announcing a publishing deal caused me to drown under waves of envy over the imagined size of her or his book advance as I struggled to pay my mortgage. Every announcement I read of someone speaking at a conference led to thoughts of, “I wish I were speaking at that conference – I must not be good enough to be invited.” Twitter was fertile ground for my Inner Critic to run rampant.
One day in 2011, my comparisons to people who I didn’t even know rose to a fever pitch. I saw a series of tweets that sparked a wave of self-loathing so profound that I spent the day sobbing and despondent, as I chastised myself for being a failure. I had fallen into the deep pit of Comparison Syndrome, and to return to anything close to being productive took a day or two of painstakingly clawing my way out.
Comparison Syndrome Takes Deficiency Anxiety to Eleven
Do any of these scenarios ring true?

You frequently feel like a failure when viewing the success of others.
You feel dispirited and paralyzed in moving forward with your own work because it will never measure up to what others have done.
You discount your ideas because you fear that they aren’t as good as those of your colleagues or industry peers.

Are you making yourself miserable by thinking thoughts like these?

“I’m surrounded by people who are so good at what they do, how can I possibly measure up?”
“Compared to my partner, my musical ability is childish – and music is no longer fun.”
“Why haven’t I accomplished more by now? My peers are so much more successful than I am.”

Unenviable Envy
Many people use the terms envy and jealousy interchangeably, but they are two distinct emotions. Jealousy is the fear of losing someone to a perceived rival: a threat to an important relationship and the parts of the self that are served by that relationship. Jealousy is always about the relationship between three people. Envy is wanting what another has because of a perceived shortcoming on your part. Envy is always based on a social comparison to another.1
Envy is a reaction to the feeling of lacking something. Envy always reflects something we feel about ourselves, about how we are somehow deficient in qualities, possessions, or success.2 It’s based on a scarcity mentality: the idea that there is only so much to go around, and another person got something that should rightfully be yours.3
A syndrome is a condition characterized by a set of associated symptoms. I call it Comparison Syndrome because a perceived deficiency of some sort – in talent, accomplishments, success, skills, etc. – is what initially sparks it. While at the beginning you may merely feel inadequate, the onset of the syndrome will bring additional symptoms. Lack of self-trust and feelings of low self-worth will fuel increased thoughts of not-enoughness and blindness to your unique brilliance. If left unchecked, Deficiency Anxieties can escalate to full-blown Comparison Syndrome: a form of the Inner Critic in which we experience despair from envy and define ourselves as failures in light of another’s success.
The irony is that when we focus so much on what we lack, we can’t see what we have in abundance that the other person doesn’t have. And in doing so, we block what is our birthright: our creative expression. Envy shackles our creativity, keeps us trapped in place, and prevents forward movement. The Inner Critic in the form of Comparison Syndrome caused by envy blocks us from utilizing our gifts, seeing our path clearly, and reveling in our creative power.
In order to keep a grip on reality and not fall into the abyss of Comparison Syndrome, we’ll quell the compulsion to compare before it happens: we will free the mental bandwidth to turn our focus inward so we can start to see ourselves clearly. 
Break the Compulsion to Compare

“Why compare yourself with others? No one in the entire world can do a better job of being you than you.”
— Krystal Volney, poet and author

At some point in time, many of us succumb to moments of feeling that we are lacking and comparing ourselves unfavorably to others. As social animals, much of our self-definition comes from comparison with others. This is how our personalities develop. We learn this behavior as children, and we grow up being compared to siblings, peers, and kids in the media. Because of this, the belief that somehow, someway, we aren’t good enough becomes deeply ingrained. The problem is that whenever we deem ourselves to be “less than,” our self-esteem suffers. This creates a negative feedback loop where negative thoughts produce strong emotions that result in self-defeating behaviors that beget more negative thoughts.
Couple this cycle with the messages we get from society that only “gifted” people are creative, and it’s no wonder that many of us will fall down the rabbit hole of Comparison Syndrome like I did on that fated day while reading tweets. Comparing ourselves to others is worse than a zero-sum game, it’s a negative-sum game. No one wins, our self-esteem deteriorates, and our creative spark dies out.
With effort, we can break the compulsion to compare and stop the decline into Comparison Syndrome by turning the focus of comparison inward to ourselves and appreciating who we’ve become. But first, we need to remove some of the instances that trigger our comparisons in the first place.
Arrest: Stop the Triggers

“Right discipline consists, not in external compulsion, but in the habits of mind which lead spontaneously to desirable rather than undesirable activities.”
— Bertrand Russell, philosopher

After my Twitter post meltdown, I knew had to make a change. While bolstering my sense of self was clearly a priority, I also knew that my ingrained comparison habit was too strong to resist and that I needed to instill discipline. I decided then and there to establish boundaries with social media.
First, to maintain my sanity, I took this on as my mantra:
“I will not compare myself to strangers on the Internet or acquaintances on Facebook.”
If you find yourself sliding down the slippery slope of social media comparison, you can do the same: repeat this mantra to yourself to help put on the brakes.
Second, in order to reduce my triggers, I stopped reading the tweets of the people I followed. However, I continued to be active on Twitter through sharing information, responding to mentions, crowdsourcing, and direct messaging people. It worked! The only time I’d start to slip into darkness were the rare instances when I would break my rules and look at my Twitstream.
But we can do even more than calm ourselves with helpful mantras. Just like my example of modifying my use of Twitter, and more recently, of separating myself from Facebook, you can get some distance from the media that activates your comparison reflex and start creating the space for other habits that are more supportive to your being to take its place.
Creative Dose: Trigger-free and Happy
Purpose: To stop comparison triggers in their tracks
Mindfulness is a wonderful tool, but sometimes you have to get hardcore and do as much as you can to eliminate distractions so that you can first hear your own thoughts in order to know which ones you need to focus on.
Here are four steps to becoming trigger-free and happier.
Step 1: Make a List
Pay attention when you get the most triggered and hooked.
Is it on Twitter, Facebook, Instagram, or Snapchat?
Is it YouTube, TV shows, or magazines?
Make list of your top triggers.
My primary trigger is:______________________________________
My second trigger is:______________________________________
My third trigger is:______________________________________
Now that you have your list, you need to get an idea just how often you’re getting triggered.
Step 2: Monitor
It’s easy to think that we should track our activity on the computer, but these days, it’s no longer our computer use that is the culprit: most of us access social media and news from our phones. Fortunately, there are apps that will track the usage for both.
Seeing just how much you consume media from either or both will show you how much of an accomplice the use of devices is to your comparison syndrome, and how much you need to modify your behavior accordingly.
For tracking both computer use and tablet use, this app works great:

RescueTime.com tracks app usage and sends a productivity report at the end of the week via email.

For your phone, there are many for either platform.4 Although I recommend fully researching what is available and will work for you best, here are a few recommendations:

For both platforms: Offtime, Breakfree, Checky
For Android only: Flipd, AppDetox, QualityTime, Stay On Task
For iOS only: Moment

Install your app of choice, and see what you find. How much time are you spending on sites or apps that compel you to compare?
Step 3: Just Say No
Now that you know what your triggers are and how much you’re exposing yourself to them, it’s time to say No.
Put yourself on a partial social media and/or media detox for a specified period of time; consider even going for a full media detox.5 I recommend starting with one month.
To help you to fully commit, I recommend writing this down and posting it where you can see it.
I, ___________________, commit to avoiding my comparison triggers 
of ___________________, ___________________, and ___________________ 
for the period of ___________________, 
starting on ___________________ and ending on ___________________ .
To help you out, I’ve created a social media detox commitment sheet for you.
Step 4: Block
When I decided to reduce my use of Twitter and Facebook to break my comparison habit, initially I tried to rely solely on self-discipline, which was only moderately successful. Then I realized that I could use the power of technology to help. Don’t think you have to rely upon sheer willpower to block, or at least limit, your exposure to known triggers. If your primary access to the items that cause you to compare yourself to others is via computers and other digitalia, use these devices to help maintain your mental equilibrium.
Here are some apps and browser extensions that you can use during your media detox to help keep yourself sane and stay away from sites that could throw you into a comparison tailspin.
These apps are installed onto your computer:

RescueTime.com works on both computer and mobile devices, and does a lot more than just prevent you from going to sites that will ruin your concentration, it will also track your apps usage and give you a productivity report at the end of the week.
Focus and SelfControl (Mac-only)

To go right to the source and prevent you from visiting sites through your browser, there are browser extensions.
Not only can you put in the list of the URLs that are your points of weakness, but you can also usually set the times of the day you need the self-control the most.

Google Chrome: StayFocusd, Strict Workflow, and Website Blocker
Firefox: Idderall and Leechblock
Safari: WasteNoTime and MindfulBrowsing
Edge (or Explorer): Unfortunately, there are currently no website blocking extensions for these browsers.

I currently use a browser extension to block me from using Facebook between 9:00am – 6:00pm. It’s been a boon for my sanity: I compare tons less. A bonus is that it’s been terrific for my productivity as well. 
Which tool will you use for your media detox time? Explore them all and then settle upon the one(s) that will work the best for you. Install it and put it to work.
Despite the tool, you will still need to exercise discipline. Resist the urge to browse Instagram or Facebook while waiting for your morning train. You can do it!
Step 5: Relax
Instead of panicking from FOMO (Fear of Missing Out), take comfort from this thought: what you don’t know won’t affect you. Start embracing JOMO (Joy of Missing Out), and the process of rebuilding and maintaining your sanity.
What will you do instead of consuming the media that compels you to
compare? Here are some ideas:

Read a book 
Go for a walk 
Have dinner with a friend 
Go watch a movie 
Learn how to play the harmonica 
Take an improv class

Really, you could do anything. And depending on how much of your time and attention you’ve devoted to media, you could be recapturing a lot of lost moments, minutes, hours, and days.
Step 6: Reconnect
Use your recovered time and attention to focus on your life and reconnect with your true value-driven goals, higher aspirations, and activities that you’ve always wanted to do.

This article is an excerpt from the book Banish Your Inner Critic by Denise Jacobs, and has been reprinted with permission. If you’d like to read more, you can find the book on Amazon.




Shane Parrish, “Mental Model: Bias from Envy and Jealousy,” Farnam Street, accessed February 9, 2017. ↩


Parrish, “Mental Model: Bias from Envy and Jealousy.” ↩


Henrik Edberg, “How to Overcome Envy: 5 Effective Tips,” Practical Happiness Advice That Works | The Positivity Blog, accessed February 9, 2017. ↩


Jeremy Golden, “6 Apps to Stop Your Smartphone Addiction,” Inc.com, accessed February 10, 2017. ↩


Emily Nickerson, “How to Silence the Voice of Doubt,” The Muse, accessed February 8, 2017. ↩",2017,Denise Jacobs,denisejacobs,2017-12-19T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2017/do-a-media-detox/,process
292,Watch Your Language!,"I’m bilingual. My first language is French. I learned English in my early 20s. Learning a new language later in life meant that I was able to observe my thought processes changing over time. It made me realize that some concepts can’t be expressed in some languages, while other languages express these concepts with ease.
It also helped me understand the way we label languages. English: business. French: romance. Here’s an example of how words, or the absence thereof, can affect the way we think:
In French we love everything. There’s no straightforward way to say we like something, so we just end up loving everything. I love my sisters, I love broccoli, I love programming, I love my partner, I love doing laundry (this is a lie), I love my mom (this is not a lie). I love, I love, I love. It’s no wonder French is considered romantic. When I first learned English I used the word love rather than like because I hadn’t grasped the difference. Needless to say, I’ve scared away plenty of first dates!
Learning another language made me realize the limitations of my native language and revealed concepts I didn’t know existed. Without the nuances a given language provides, we fail to express what we really think. The absence of words in our vocabulary gets in the way of effectively communicating and considering ideas.
When I lived in Montréal, most people in my circle spoke both French and English. I could switch between them when I could more easily express an idea in one language or the other. I liked (or should I say loved?) those conversations. They were meaningful. They were efficient.

I’m quadrilingual. I code in Ruby, HTML/CSS, JavaScript, Python. In the past couple of years I have been lucky enough to write code in these languages at a massive scale. In learning Ruby, much like learning English, I discovered the strengths and limitations of not only the languages I knew but the language I was learning. It taught me to choose the right tool for the job.
When I started working at Shopify, making a change to a view involved copy/pasting HTML and ERB from one view to another. The CSS was roughly structured into modules, but those modules were not responsive to different screen sizes. Our HTML was complete mayhem, and we didn’t consider accessibility. All this made editing views a laborious process.
Grep. Replace all. Test. Ship it. Repeat.
This wasn’t sustainable at Shopify’s scale, so the newly-formed front end team was given two missions:

Make the app responsive (AKA Let’s Make This Thing Responsive ASAP)
Make the view layer scalable and maintainable (AKA Let’s Build a Pattern Library… in Ruby)

Let’s make this thing responsive ASAP
The year was 2015. The Shopify admin wasn’t mobile friendly. Our browser support was set to IE10. We had the wind in our sails. We wanted to achieve complete responsiveness in the shortest amount of time. Our answer: container queries.
It seemed like the obvious decision at the time. We would be able to set rules for each component in isolation and the component would know how to lay itself out on the page regardless of where it was rendered. It would save us a ton of development time since we wouldn’t need to change our markup, it would scale well, and we would achieve complete component autonomy by not having to worry about page layout. By siloing our components, we were going to unlock the ultimate goal of componentization, cutting the tie to external dependencies. We were cool.
Writing the JavaScript handling container queries was my first contribution to Shopify. It was a satisfying project to work on. We could drop our components in anywhere and they would magically look good. It took us less than a couple weeks to push this to production and make our app mostly responsive.
But with time, it became increasingly obvious that this was not as performant as we had hoped. It wasn’t performant at all. Components would jarringly jump around the page before settling in on first paint.
It was only when we started using the flex-wrap: wrap CSS property to build new components that we realized we were not using the right language for the job. So we swapped out JavaScript container queries for CSS flex-wrapping. Even though flex wasn’t yet as powerful as we wanted it to be, it was still a good compromise. Our components stayed independent of the window size but took much less time to render. Best of all: they used CSS instead of relying on JavaScript for layout.
In other words: we were using the wrong language to express our layout to the browser, when another language could do it much more simply and elegantly.
Let’s build a pattern library… in Ruby
In order to make our view layer maintainable, we chose to build a comprehensive library of helpers. This library would generate our markup from a single source of truth, allowing us to make changes system-wide, in one place. No. More. Grepping.
When I joined Shopify it was a Rails shop freshly wounded by a JavaScript framework (See: Batman.js). JavaScript was like Voldemort, the language that could not be named. Because of this baggage, the only way for us to build a pattern library that would get buyin from our developers was to use Rails view helpers. And for many reasons using Ruby was the right choice for us. The time spent ramping developers up on the new UI Components would be negligible since the Ruby API felt familiar. The transition would be simple since we didn’t have to introduce any new technology to the stack. The components would be fast since they would be rendered on the server. We had a plan.
We put in place a set of Rails tools to make it easy to build components, then wrote a bunch of sweet, sweet components using our shiny new tools. To document our design, content and front end patterns we put together an interactive styleguide to demonstrate how every component works. Our research and development department loved it (and still do)! We continue to roll out new components, and generally the project has been successful, though it has had its drawbacks.
Since the Shopify admin is mostly made up of a huge number of forms, most of the content is static. For this reason, using server-rendered components didn’t seem like a problem at the time. With new app features increasing the amount of DOM manipulation needed on the client side, our early design decisions mean making requests to the server for each re-paint. This isn’t going to cut it.
I don’t know the end of this story, because we haven’t written it yet. We’ve been exploring alternatives to our current system to facilitate the rendering of our components on the client, including React, Vue.js, and Web Components, but we haven’t determined the winner yet. Only time (and data gathering) will tell.
Ruby is great but it doesn’t speak the browser’s language efficiently. It was not the right language for the job.

Learning a new spoken language has had an impact on how I write code. It has taught me that you don’t know what you don’t know until you have the language to express it. Understanding the strengths and limitations of any programming language is fundamental to making good design decisions. At the end of the day, you make the best choices with the information you have. But if you still feel like you’re unable to express your thoughts to the fullest with what you know, it might be time to learn a new language.",2016,Annie-Claude Côté,annieclaudecote,2016-12-10T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2016/watch-your-language/,code
303,We Need to Talk About Technical Debt,"In my work with clients, a lot of time is spent assessing old, legacy, sprawling systems and identifying good code, bad code, and technical debt.
One thing that constantly strikes me is the frequency with which bad code and technical debt are conflated, so let me start by saying this:
Not all technical debt is bad code, and not all bad code is technical debt.
Sometimes your bad code is just that: bad code. Calling it technical debt often feels like a more forgiving and friendly way of referring to what may have just been a poor implementation or a substandard piece of work.
It is an oft-misunderstood phrase, and when mistaken for meaning ‘anything legacy or old hacky or nasty or bad’, technical debt is swept under the carpet along with all of the other parts of the codebase we’d rather not talk about, and therein lies the problem.
We need to talk about technical debt.
What We Talk About When We Talk About Technical Debt
The thing that separates technical debt from the rest of the hacky code in our project is the fact that technical debt, by definition, is something that we knowingly and strategically entered into. Debt doesn’t happen by accident: debt happens when we choose to gain something otherwise-unattainable immediately in return for paying it back (with interest) later on.
An Example
You’re a front-end developer working on a SaaS product, and your sales team is courting a large customer – a customer so large that you can’t really afford to lose them. The customer tells you that as long as you can allow them to theme your SaaS application according to their branding, they are willing to sign on the dotted line… the problem being that your CSS architecture was never designed to incorporate theming at all, and there isn’t currently a nice, clean way to incorporate a theme into the codebase.
You and the business make the decision that you will hack a theme into the product in two days. It’s going to be messy, it’s going to be ugly, but you can’t afford to lose a huge customer just because your CSS isn’t quite right, right now. This is technical debt.
You deliver the theme, the customer signs up, and everyone is happy. Except you (and the business, because you are one and the same) have a decision to make:

Do we go back and build theming into the CSS architecture as a first-class citizen, porting the hacked theme back into a codified and formal framework?
Do we carry on as we are? Things are working okay, and the customer paid up, so is there any reason to invest time and effort into things after we (and the customer) got what we wanted?

Option 1 is choosing to pay off your debts; Option 2 is ignoring your repayments.
With Option 1, you’re acknowledging that you did what you could given the constraints, but, free of constraints, you’d have done something different. Now, you are choosing to implement that something different.
With Option 2, however, you are avoiding your responsibility to repay your debt, and you are letting interest accrue. The problem here is that…

your SaaS product now offers theming to one of your customers;
another potential customer might also demand the ability to theme their instance of your product;
you can’t refuse them that request, nor can you quickly fulfil it;
you hack in another theme, thus adding to the balance of your existing debt;
and so on (plus interest) for every subsequent theme you need to implement.

Here you have increased entropy whilst making little to no attempt to address what you already knew to be problems.
Your second, third, fourth, fifth request for theming will be hacked on top of your hack, further accumulating debt whilst offering nothing by way of a repayment. After a long enough period, the code involved will get so unwieldy, so hard to work with, that you are forced to tear it all down and start again, and the most painful part of this is that you’re actually paying off even more than your debt repayments would have been in the first place. Two days of hacking plus, say, five days of subsequent refactoring, would still have been substantially less than the weeks you will now have to spend rewriting your CSS to fix and incorporate the themes properly. You’ve made a loss; your strategic debt ultimately became a loss-making exercise.
The important thing to note here is that you didn’t necessarily write bad code. You knew there were two options: the quick way and the correct way. The decision to take the quick route was a definite choice, because you knew there was a better way. Implementing the better way is your repayment.
Good Debt and Bad Debt
Technical debt is acceptable as long as you have intentions to settle; it can be a valuable solution to a business problem, provided the right approach is taken afterwards. That doesn’t, however, mean that all debt is born equal. Just as in real life, there is good debt and there is bad debt.
Good debt might be…

a mortgage;
a student loan, or;
a business loan.

These are types of debt that will secure you the means of repaying them. These are well considered debts whose very reason for being will allow you to make the money to pay them off—they have real, tangible benefit.
A business loan to secure some equipment and premises will allow you to start an enterprise whose revenue will allow you to pay that debt back; a student loan will allow you to secure the kind of job that has the ability to pay a student loan back.
These kinds of debt involve a considered and well-balanced decision to acquire something in the short term in the knowledge that you will have the means, in the long term, to pay it back.
Conversely, bad debt might be…

borrowing $1,000 from a loan shark so you can go to Vegas, or;
taking out a payday loan in order to buy a new television.

Both of these kinds of debt will leave you paying for things that didn’t provide you a way of earning your own capital. That is to say, the loans taken did not secure anything that would help pay off said loans. These are bad debts that will usually provide a net loss. You really are only gaining the short term in exchange for a long term financial responsibility: i.e., was it worth it?
A good litmus test for debt is to compare the gains of its immediate benefit with the cost of its long term commitment.
The earlier example of theming a site is a good debt, provided we are keeping up our repayments (all debt is bad debt if you don’t). A calculated decision to do something ‘wrong’ in the short term with the promise of better payoffs later on.
Bad Technical Debt
The majority of my work is with front-end development teams—CSS is what I do. To that end, the most succinct example of technical debt for that audience is simply:
!important
All front-end developers know the horrors and dangers associated with using !important, yet we continue to use it. Why?
It’s not necessarily because we’re bad developers, but because we see a shortcut. !important is usually implemented as a quick way out of a sticky specificity situation. We could spend the rest of the day refactoring our CSS to fix the issue at its source, or we can spend mere seconds typing the word !important and patch over the symptoms.
This is us making an explicit decision to do something less than ideal now in exchange for immediate benefit. After all, refactoring our CSS will take a lot more time, and will still only leave us with the same outcome that the vastly quicker !important solution will, so it seems to make better business sense.
However, this is a bad debt. !important takes seconds to implement but weeks to refactor. The cost of refactoring this back out later will be an order of magnitude higher than it would be to have done things properly the first time. The first !important usually sets a precedent, and subsequent developers are likely to have to use it themselves in order to get around the one that you left.
So many CSS projects deteriorate because of this one simple word, and rewrites become more and more imminent. That makes it possibly the most costly 10 bytes a CSS developer could ever write.
Bad Code
Now we’ve got a good idea of what constitutes technical debt, let’s take a look at what constitutes bad code. Something I hear time and time again in my client work goes a little like this:

We’ve amassed a lot of technical debt and we’d like to get a strategy in place
to begin dealing with it.

Whilst I genuinely admire their willingness to identify and desire to fix problems in their code, sometimes they’re not looking at technical debt at
all—sometimes they’re just looking at bad code, plain and simple.
Where technical debt is knowing that there’s a better way, but the quicker way makes more sense right now, bad code is not caring if there’s a better way at all.
Again, looking at a CSS-specific world, a lot of bad code is contributed by non-front-end developers with little training, appreciation, or even respect for the front-end landscape. Writing code with reckless abandon should not be described as technical debt, because to do so would imply that…

the developers knew they were implementing a sub-par solution, but…
the developers also knew that a better solution was out there, which…
implies that it can be tidied up relatively simply.

Developers writing bad code is a larger and more cultural problem that requires a lot more effort to fix. Hopefully—and usually—bad code is in the minority, but it helps to be objective in identifying and solving it. Bad code usually doesn’t happen for a good enough reason, and is therefore much harder to justify.
Technical debt often represents ability in judgement, whereas bad code often represents a gap in skills.
Takeaway
Take time to familiarise yourself with the true concepts underlying technical debt and why it exists. Understand that technical debt can be good or bad. Admit that sometimes code is just of poor quality.
Understanding these points will allow you to make better calls around what you might need to refactor and when, and what skills gaps you might have in your team.

Sometimes it’s okay to cut corners if there is a tangible gain to be had in the immediate term.
Technical debt is okay provided it is a sensible debt and you have intentions to pay it off.
Technical debt is not necessarily synonymous with bad code, and bad code isn’t necessarily technical debt. Technical debt is code that was implemented given limited knowledge or resource, with the understanding that you would need to repay something in future.
Technical debt is not inherently bad—failure to make repayments is. Periodically, it is justifiable—encouraged, even—to enter a debt in order to fulfil a more pressing matter. However, it is imperative that we begin making repayments as soon as we are capable, be that based on newly available time or knowledge.
Bad code is worse than technical debt as it represents a lack of knowledge or quality control within a team. It needs a much more fundamental fix.",2016,Harry Roberts,harryroberts,2016-12-05T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2016/we-need-to-talk-about-technical-debt/,code
245,Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.1—for People Who Haven’t Read the Update,"Happy United Nations International Day of Persons with Disabilities 2018! The United Nations chose “Empowering persons with disabilities and ensuring inclusiveness and equality” as this year’s theme. We’ve seen great examples of that in 2018; for example, Paul Robert Lloyd has detailed how he improved the accessibility of this very website. 
On social media, US Congressmember-Elect Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez started using the Clipomatic app to add live captions to her Instagram live stories, conforming to success criterion 1.2.4, “Captions (Live)” of the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (figure 1) …and British Vogue Contributing Editor Sinéad Burke has used the split-screen feature of Instagram live stories to invite an interpreter to provide live Sign Language interpretation, going above and beyond success criterion 1.2.6, “Sign Language (Prerecorded)” of the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (figure 2).

Figure 1: Screenshot of Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez’s Instagram story with live captionsFigure 2: Screenshot of Sinéad Burke’s Instagram story with Sign Language Interpretation
That theme chimes with this year’s publication of the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C)’s Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1. In last year’s “Web Content Accessibility Guidelines—for People Who Haven’t Read Them”, I mentioned the scale of the project to produce this update during 2018: “the editors have to update the guidelines to cover all the new ways that people interact with new technologies, while keeping the guidelines backwards-compatible”. 
The WCAG working group have added 17 success criteria to the 61 that they released way back in 2008—for context, that was 1½ years before Apple released their first iPad! These new criteria make it easier than ever for us web geeks to produce work that is more accessible to people using mobile devices and touchscreens, people with low vision, and people with cognitive and learning disabilities. 
Once again, let’s rip off all the legalese and ambiguous terminology like wrapping paper, and get up to date.
Can your users perceive the information on your website?
The first guideline has criteria that help you prevent your users from asking, “What the **** is this thing here supposed to be?” We’ve seven new criteria for this guideline.
1.3.4 Some people can’t easily change the orientation of the device that they use to browse the web, and so you should make sure that your users can use your website in portrait orientation and in landscape orientation. Consider how people slowly twirl presents that they have plucked from under the Christmas tree, to find the appropriate orientation—and expect your users to do likewise with your websites and apps. We’ve had 18½ years since John Allsopp’s revelatory Dao of Web Design enlightened us to “embrace the fact that the web doesn’t have the same constraints” as printed pages, and to “design for this flexibility”. So, even though this guideline doesn’t apply to websites where “a specific display orientation is essential,” such as a piano tutorial, always ask yourself, “What would John Allsopp do?”
1.3.5 You should help the user’s browser to automatically complete–or not complete–form fields, to save the user some time and effort. The surprisingly powerful and flexible autocomplete attribute for input elements should prove most useful here. If you’ve used microformats or microdata to mark up information about a person, the autocomplete attribute’s range of values should seem familiar. I like how the W3’s “Using HTML 5.2 autocomplete attributes” says that autocompleted values in forms help “those with dexterity disabilities who have trouble typing, those who may need more time, and anyone who wishes to reduce effort to fill out a form” (emphasis mine). Um…🙋‍♂️
1.3.6 I like this one a lot, because it can help a huge audience to overcome difficulties that might prevent them from ever using the web. Some people have cognitive difficulties that affect their memory, focus, attention, language processing, and/or decision-making. Those users often rely on assistive technologies that present information through proprietary symbols, summaries of content, and keyboard shortcuts. You could use ARIA landmarks to identify the regions of each webpage. You could also keep an eye on the W3C’s ongoing work on Personalisation Semantics.
1.4.10 If you were to find a Nintendo Switch and “Super Mario Odyssey” under your Christmas tree, you would have many hours of enjoyably scrolling horizontally and vertically to play the game. On the other hand, if you had to zoom a webpage to 400% so that you could read the content, you might have many hours of frustratedly scrolling horizontally and vertically to read the content. Learned reader, I assume you understand the purpose and the core techniques of Responsive Web Design. I also assume you’re getting up to speed with the new Grid, Flexbox, and Box Alignment techniques for layout, and overflow-wrap. Using those skills, you should make sure that all content and functionality remain available when the browser is 320px wide, without your user needing to scroll horizontally. (For vertical text, you should make sure that all content and functionality remain available when the browser is 256px high, without your user needing to scroll vertically.) You don’t have to do this for anything that would lose meaning if you restructured it into one narrow column. That includes some images, maps, diagrams, video, games, presentations, and data tables. Remember to check how your media queries affect font size: your user might find that text becomes smaller as they zoom into the webpage. So, test this one on real devices, or—better yet—test it with real users.
1.4.11 In “Web Content Accessibility Guidelines—for People Who Haven’t Read Them”, I recommended bookmarking Lea Verou’s Contrast Ratio calculator for checking that text contrasts enough with its background (for success criteria 1.4.3 and 1.4.6), so that more people can read it more easily. For this update, you should make sure that form elements and their focus states have a 3:1 contrast ratio with the colour around them. This doesn’t apply to controls that use the browser’s default styling. Also, you should make sure that graphics that convey information have a 3:1 contrast ratio with the colour around them.
1.4.12 Some people, due to low vision or dyslexia, might need to modify the typography that you agonised over. Research indicates that you should make sure that all content and functionality would remain available if a user were to set:

line height to at least 1½ × the font size;
space below paragraphs to at least 2 × the font size;
letter spacing to at least 0.12 × the font size;
word spacing to at least 0.16 × the font size.

To test this, check for text overlapping, text hiding behind other elements, or text disappearing.
1.4.13 Sometimes when visiting a website, you hover over—or tab on to—something that unleashes a newsletter subscription pop-up, some suggested “related content”, and/or a GDPR-related pop-up. On a well-designed website, you can press the Esc key on your keyboard or click a prominent “Close” button or “X” button to vanquish such intrusions. If the Esc key fails you, or if you either can’t see or can’t click the “Close” button…well, you’ll probably just close that browser tab. This situation can prove even more infuriating for users with low vision or cognitive disabilities. So, if new content appears when your user hovers over or tabs on to some element, you should make sure that:

your user can dismiss that content without needing to move their pointer or tab on to some other element (this doesn’t apply to error warnings, or well-behaved content that doesn’t obscure or replace other content);
the new content remains visible while your user moves their cursor over it;
the new content remains visible as long as the user hovers over that element or dismisses that content—or until the new content is no longer valid.

This doesn’t apply to situations such as hovering over an element’s title attribute, where the user’s browser controls the display of the content that appears.
Can users operate the controls and links on your website?
The second guideline has criteria that help you prevent your users from asking, “How the **** does this thing work?” We’ve nine new criteria for this guideline.
2.1.4 Some websites offer keyboard shortcuts for users. For example, the keyboard shortcuts for Gmail allow the user to press the ⇧ key and u to mark a message as unread. Usually, shortcuts on websites include modifier keys, such as Ctrl, along with a letter, number, or punctuation symbol. Unfortunately, users who have dexterity challenges sometimes trigger those shortcuts by accident, and that can make a website impossible to use. Also, speech input technology can sometimes trigger those shortcuts. If your website offers single-character keyboard shortcuts, you must allow your user to turn off or remap those shortcuts. This doesn’t apply to single-character keyboard shortcuts that only work when a control, such as drop-down list, has focus.
2.2.6 If your website uses a timeout for some process, you could store the user’s data for at least 20 hours, so that users with cognitive disabilities can take a break or take longer than usual to complete the process without losing their place or losing their data. Alternatively, you could warn the user, at the start of the process, about that the website will timeout after whatever amount of time you have chosen. 
2.3.3 If your website has some non-essential animation (such as parallax scrolling) that starts when the user does some particular action, you could allow the user to turn off that animation so that you avoid harming users with vestibular disorders. The prefers-reduced-motion media query currently has limited browser support, but you can start using it now to avoid showing animations to users who select the “Reduce Motion” setting (or equivalent) in their device’s operating system:
@media (prefers-reduced-motion: reduce) {
  .MrFancyPants {
    animation: none;
  }
}
2.5.1 Some websites let users use multi-touch gestures on touchscreen devices. For example, Google Maps allows users to pinch with two fingers to zoom out and “unpinch” with two fingers to zoom in. Also, some websites allow users to drag a finger to do some action, such as changing the value on an input element with type=""range"", or swiping sideways to the next photograph in a gallery. Some users with dexterity challenges, and some users who use a head pointer, an eye-gaze system, or speech-controlled mouse emulation, might find multi-touch gestures or dragging impossible. You must make sure that your website supports single-tap alternatives to any multi-touch gestures or dragging actions that it provides. For example, if your website lets someone pinch and unpinch a map to zoom in and out, you must also provide buttons that a user can tap to zoom in and out.
2.5.2 This might be my favourite accessibility criterion ever! Did you ever touch or press a “Send” button but then immediately realise that you really didn’t want to send the message, and so move your finger or cursor away from the “Send” button before lifting your finger?! Imagine how many arguments that functionality has prevented. 😌 You must make sure that touching or pressing does not cause anything to happen before the user raises their finger or cursor, or make sure that the user can move their finger or cursor away to prevent the action. In JavaScript, prefer onclick to onmousedown, unless your website has actions that need onmousedown. Also, this doesn’t apply to actions that need to happen as soon as the user clicks or touches. For example, a user playing a “Whac-A-Mole” game or a piano emulator needs the action to happen as soon as they click or touch the screen.
2.5.3 Recently, entrepreneur and social media guru Gary Vaynerchuk has emphasised the rise of audio and voice as output and input. He quotes a Google statistic that says one in five search queries use voice input. Once again, users with disabilities have been ahead of the curve here, having used screen readers and/or dictation software for many years. You must make sure that the text that appears on a form control or image matches how your HTML identifies that form control or image. Use proper semantic HTML to achieve this:

use the label element to pair text with the corresponding input element;
use an alt attribute value that exactly matches any text that appears in an image;
use an aria-labelledby attribute value that exactly matches the text that appears in any complex component.

2.5.4 Modern Web APIs allow web developers to specify how their website will react to the user shaking, tilting, or gesturing towards their device. Some users might find those actions difficult, impossible, or embarrassing to perform. If you make any functionality available when the user shakes, tilts, or gestures towards their device, you must provide form controls that make that same functionality available. As usual, this doesn’t apply to websites that require shaking, tilting, or gesturing; this includes some games and music programmes. John Gruber describes the iPhone’s “Shake to Undo” gesture as “dreadful — impossible to discover through exploration of the on-screen [user interface], bad for accessibility, and risks your phone flying out of your hand”. This accessibility criterion seems to empathise with John: you must make sure that your user can prevent your website from responding to shaking, tilting and/or gesturing towards their device.
2.5.5 Homer Simpson’s telephone famously complained, “The fingers you have used to dial are too fat.” I think we’ve all felt like that when using phones and tablets, particularly when trying to dismiss pop-ups and ads. You could make interactive elements at least 44px wide × 44px high. Apple’s “Human Interface Guidelines” agree: “Provide ample touch targets for interactive elements. Try to maintain a minimum tappable area of 44pt x 44pt for all controls.” This doesn’t apply to links within inline text, or to unsoiled elements.
2.5.6 Expect your users to use a variety of input devices they want, and to change from one to another whenever they please. For example, a user with a tablet and keyboard might jab icons on the screen while typing on the keyboard, or a user might dictate text while alone and then type on a keyboard when a colleague arrives. You could make sure that your website allows your users to use whichever available input modality they choose. Once again, this doesn’t apply to websites that require a specific modality; this includes typing tutors and music programmes.
Can users understand your content?
The third guideline has criteria that help you prevent your users from asking, “What the **** does this mean?” We’ve no new criteria for this guideline. 
Have you made your website robust enough to work on your users’ browsers and assistive technologies?
The fourth and final guideline has criteria that help you prevent your users from asking, “Why the **** doesn’t this work on my device?” We’ve one new criterion for this guideline.
4.1.3 Sometimes you need to let your user know the status of something: “Did it work OK? What was the error? How far through it are we?” However, you should avoid making your user lose their place on the webpage, and so you should let them know the status without opening a new window, focusing on another element, or submitting a form. To do this properly for assistive technology users, choose the appropriate ARIA role for the new content; for example:  

if your user needs to know, “Did it work OK?”, add role=""status”;
if your user needs to know, “What was the error?”, add role=""alert”;
if you user needs to know, “How far through it are we?”, add role=""log"" (for a chat window) or role=""progressbar"" (for, well, a progress bar).

Better design for humans
My favourite of Luke Wroblewski’s collection of Design Quotes is, “Design is the art of gradually applying constraints until only one solution remains,”   from that most prolific author, “Unknown”. I’ve always viewed the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines as people-based constraints, and liked how they help the design process. With these 17 new web content accessibility criteria, go forth and create solutions that more people than ever before can use.
Spending those book vouchers you got for Christmas
What next? If you’re looking for something to do to keep you busy this Christmas, I thoroughly recommend these four books for increasing your accessibility expertise:

“Pro HTML5 Accessibility” by Joshue O Connor (Head of Accessibility (Interim) at the UK Government Digital Service, Director of InterAccess, and one of the editors of the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.1): Although this book is six years old—a long time in web design—I find it an excellent go-to resource. It begins by explaining how people with disabilities use the web, and then expertly explains modern HTML in that context.
“A Web for Everyone—Designing Accessible User Experiences” by Sarah Horton (the Paciello Group’s UX Strategy Lead) and Whitney Quesenbery (the Center for Civic Design’s co-director): This book covers the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0, the principles of Universal Design, and design thinking. Its personas for Accessible UX and its profiles of well-known industry figures—including some 24ways authors—keep its content practical and relevant throughout.
“Accessibility For Everyone” by Laura Kalbag (Ind.ie’s co-founder and designer, and 24ways author): This book is just over a year old, and so serves as a great resource for up-to-date coverage of guidelines, laws, and accessibility features of operating systems—as well as content, design, coding, and testing. The audiobook, which Laura narrates, can help you and your colleagues go from having little or no understanding of web accessibility, to becoming familiar with all aspects of web accessibility—in less than four hours.
“Just Ask: Integrating Accessibility Throughout Design” by Shawn Lawton Henry (the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C)’s Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI)’s Outreach Coordinator): Although this book is 11½ years old, the way it presents accessibility as part of the User-Centered Design process is timeless. I found its section on Usability Testing with people with disabilities particularly useful.",2018,Alan Dalton,alandalton,2018-12-03T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2018/wcag-for-people-who-havent-read-the-update/,ux
193,Web Content Accessibility Guidelines—for People Who Haven't Read Them,"I’ve been a huge fan of the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0 since the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) published them, nine years ago. I’ve found them practical and future-proof, and I’ve found that they can save a huge amount of time for designers and developers. You can apply them to anything that you can open in a browser. My favourite part is when I use the guidelines to make a website accessible, and then attend user-testing and see someone with a disability easily using that website.
Today, the United Nations International Day of Persons with Disabilities, seems like a good time to re-read Laura Kalbag’s explanation of why we should bother with accessibility. That should motivate you to devour this article.
If you haven’t read the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0, you might find them a bit off-putting at first. The editors needed to create a single standard that countries around the world could refer to in legislation, and so some of the language in the guidelines reads like legalese. The editors also needed to future-proof the guidelines, and so some terminology—such as “time-based media” and “programmatically determined”—can sound ambiguous. The guidelines can seem lengthy, too: printing the guidelines, the Understanding WCAG 2.0 document, and the Techniques for WCAG 2.0 document would take 1,200 printed pages.
This festive season, let’s rip off that legalese and ambiguous terminology like wrapping paper, and see—in a single article—what gifts the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0 editors have bestowed upon us.
Can your users perceive the information on your website?
The first guideline has criteria that help you prevent your users from asking “What the **** is this thing here supposed to be?”
1.1.1 Text is the most accessible format for information. Screen readers—such as the “VoiceOver” setting on your iPhone or the “TalkBack” app on your Android phone—understand text better than any other format. The same applies for other assistive technology, such as translation apps and Braille displays. So, if you have anything on your webpage that’s not text, you must add some text that gives your user the same information. You probably know how to do this already; for example:

for images in webpages, put some alternative text in an alt attribute to tell your user what the image conveys to the user;
for photos in tweets, add a description to make the images accessible;
for Instagram posts, write a caption that conveys the photo’s information.

The alternative text should allow the user to get the same information as someone who can see the image. For websites that have too many images for someone to add alternative text to, consider how machine learning and Dynamically Generated Alt Text might—might—be appropriate.
You can probably think of a few exceptions where providing text to describe an image might not make sense. Remember I described these guidelines as “practical”? They cover all those exceptions:

User interface controls such as buttons and text inputs must have names or labels to tell your user what they do.
If your webpage has video or audio (more about these later on!), you must—at least—have text to tell the user what they are.
Maybe your webpage has a test where your user has to answer a question about an image or some audio, and alternative text would give away the answer. In that case, just describe the test in text so your users know what it is.
If your webpage features a work of art, tell your user the experience it evokes.
If you have to include a Captcha on your webpage—and please avoid Captchas if at all possible, because some users cannot get past them—you must include text to tell your user what it is, and make sure that it doesn’t rely on only one sense, such as vision.
If you’ve included something just as decoration, you must make sure that your user’s assistive technology can ignore it. Again, you probably know how to do this. For example, you could use CSS instead of HTML to include decorative images, or you could add an empty alt attribute to the img element. (Please avoid that recent trend where developers add empty alt attributes to all images in a webpage just to make the HTML validate. You’re better than that.)

(Notice that the guidelines allow you to choose how to conform to them, with whatever technology you choose. To make your website conform to a guideline, you can either choose one of the techniques for WCAG 2.0 for that guideline or come up with your own. Choosing a tried-and-tested technique usually saves time!)
1.2.1 If your website includes a podcast episode, speech, lecture, or any other recorded audio without video, you must include a transcription or some other text to give your user the same information. In a lot of cases, you might find this easier than you expect: professional transcription services can prove relatively inexpensive and fast, and sometimes a speaker or lecturer can provide the speech or lecture notes that they read out word-for-word. Just make sure that all your users can get the same information and the same results, whether they can hear the audio or not. For example, David Smith and Marco Arment always publish episode transcripts for their Under the Radar podcast. 
Similarly, if your website includes recorded video without audio—such as an animation or a promotional video—you must either use text to detail what happens in the video or include an audio version. Again, this might work out easier then you perhaps fear: for example, you could check to see whether the animation started life as a list of instructions, or whether the promotional video conveys the same information as the “About Us” webpage. You want to make sure that all your users can get the same information and the same results, whether they can see that video or not.
1.2.2 If your website includes recorded videos with audio, you must add captions to those videos for users who can’t hear the audio. Professional transcription services can provide you with time-stamped text in caption formats that YouTube supports, such as .srt and .sbv. You can upload those to YouTube, so captions appear on your videos there. YouTube can auto-generate captions, but the quality varies from impressively accurate to comically inaccurate. If you have a text version of what the people in the video said—such as the speech that a politician read or the bedtime story that an actor read—you can create a transcript file in .txt format, without timestamps. YouTube then creates captions for your video by synchronising that text to the audio in the video. If you host your own videos, you can ask a professional transcription service to give you .vtt files that you can add to a video element’s track element—or you can handcraft your own. (A quick aside: if your website has more videos than you can caption in a reasonable amount of time, prioritise the most popular videos, the most important videos, and the videos most relevant to people with disabilities. Then make sure your users know how to ask you to caption other videos as they encounter them.)
1.2.3 If your website has recorded videos that have audio, you must add an “audio description” narration to the video to describe important visual details, or add text to the webpage to detail what happens in the video for users who cannot see the videos. (I like to add audio files from videos to my Huffduffer account so that I can listen to them while commuting.) Maybe your home page has a video where someone says, “I’d like to explain our new TPS reports” while “Bill Lumbergh, division Vice President of Initech” appears on the bottom of the screen. In that case, you should add an audio description to the video that announces “Bill Lumbergh, division Vice President of Initech”, just before Bill starts speaking. As always, you can make life easier for yourself by considering all of your users, before the event: in this example, you could ask the speaker to begin by saying, “I’m Bill Lumbergh, division Vice President of Initech, and I’d like to explain our new TPS reports”—so you won’t need to spend time adding an audio description afterwards. 
1.2.4 If your website has live videos that have some audio, you should get a stenographer to provide real-time captions that you can include with the video. I’ll be honest: this can prove tricky nowadays. The Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0 predate YouTube Live, Instagram live Stories, Periscope, and other such services. If your organisation creates a lot of live videos, you might not have enough resources to provide real-time captions for each one. In that case, if you know the contents of the audio beforehand, publish the contents during the live video—or failing that, publish a transcription as soon as possible.
1.2.5 Remember what I said about the recorded videos that have audio? If you can choose to either add an audio description or add text to the webpage to detail what happens in the video, you should go with the audio description.
1.2.6 If your website has recorded videos that include audio information, you could provide a sign language version of the audio information; some people understand sign language better than written language. (You don’t need to caption a video of a sign language version of audio information.)
1.2.7 If your website has recorded videos that have audio, and you need to add an audio description, but the audio doesn’t have enough pauses for you to add an “audio description” narration, you could provide a separate version of that video where you have added pauses to fit the audio description into.
1.2.8 Let’s go back to the recorded videos that have audio once more! You could add text to the webpage to detail what happens in the video, so that people who can neither read captions nor hear dialogue and audio description can use braille displays to understand your video.
1.2.9 If your website has live audio, you could get a stenographer to provide real-time captions. Again, if you know the contents of the audio beforehand, publish the contents during the live audio or publish a transcription as soon as possible.
(Congratulations on making it this far! I know that seems like a lot to remember, but keep in mind that we’ve covered a complex area: helping your users to understand multimedia information that they can’t see and/or hear. Grab a mince pie to celebrate, and let’s keep going.)
1.3.1 You must mark up your website’s content so that your user’s browser, and any assistive technology they use, can understand the hierarchy of the information and how each piece of information relates to the rest. Once again, you probably know how to do this: use the most appropriate HTML element for each piece of information. Mark up headings, lists, buttons, radio buttons, checkboxes, and links with the most appropriate HTML element. If you’re looking for something to do to keep you busy this Christmas, scroll through the list of the elements of HTML. Do you notice any elements that you didn’t know, or that you’ve never used? Do you notice any elements that you could use on your current projects, to mark up the content more accurately? Also, revise HTML table advanced features and accessibility, how to structure an HTML form, and how to use the native form widgets—you might be surprised at how much you can do with just HTML! Once you’ve mastered those, you can make your website much more usable for your all of your users.
1.3.2 If your webpage includes information that your user has to read in a certain order, you must make sure that their browser and assistive technology can present the information in that order. Don’t rely on CSS or whitespace to create that order visually. Check that the order of the information makes sense when CSS and whitespace aren’t formatting it. Also, try using the Tab key to move the focus through the links and form widgets on your webpage. Does the focus go where you expect it to? Keep this in mind when using order in CSS Grid or Flexbox.
1.3.3 You must not presume that your users can identify sensory characteristics of things on your webpage. Some users can’t tell what you’ve positioned where on the screen. For example, instead of asking your users to “Choose one of the options on the left”, you could ask them to “Choose one of our new products” and link to that section of the webpage.
1.4.1 You must not rely on colour as the only way to convey something to your users. Some of your users can’t see, and some of your users can’t distinguish between colours. For example, if your webpage uses green to highlight the products that your shop has in stock, you could add some text to identify those products, or you could group them under a sub-heading.
1.4.2  If your webpage automatically plays a sound for more than 3 seconds, you must make sure your users can stop the sound or change its volume. Don’t rely on your user turning down the volume on their computer; some users need to hear the screen reader on their computer, and some users just want to keep listening to whatever they were listening before your webpage interrupted them!
1.4.3 You should make sure that your text contrasts enough with its background, so that your users can read it. Bookmark Lea Verou’s Contrast Ratio calculator now. You can enter the text colour and background colour as named colours, or as RGB, RGBa, HSL, or HSLa values. You should make sure that:

normal text that set at 24px or larger has a ratio of at least 3:1;
bold text that set at 18.75px or larger has a ratio of at least 3:1;
all other text has a ratio of at least 4½:1.

You don’t have to do this for disabled form controls, decorative stuff, or logos—but you could!
1.4.4 You should make sure your users can resize the text on your website up to 200% without using their assistive technology—and still access all your content and functionality. You don’t have to do this for subtitles or images of text.
1.4.5 You should avoid using images of text and just use text instead. In 1998, Jeffrey Veen’s first Hot Design Tip said, “Text is text. Graphics are graphics. Don’t confuse them.” Now that you can apply powerful CSS text-styling properties, use CSS Grid to precisely position text, and choose from thousands of web fonts (Jeffrey co-founded Typekit to help with this), you pretty much never need to use images of text. The guidelines say you can use images of text if you let your users specify the font, size, colour, and background of the text in the image of text—but I’ve never seen that on a real website. Also, this doesn’t apply to logos.
1.4.6 Let’s go back to colour contrast for a second. You could make your text contrast even more with its background, so that even more of your users can read it. To do that, use Lea Verou’s Contrast Ratio calculator to make sure that:

normal text that is 24px or larger has a ratio of at least 4½:1;
bold text that 18.75px or larger has a ratio of at least 4½:1;
all other text has a ratio of at least 7:1.

1.4.7 If your website has recorded speech, you could make sure there are no background sounds, or that your users can turn off any background sounds. If that’s not possible, you could make sure that any background sounds that last longer than a couple of seconds are at least four times quieter than the speech. This doesn’t apply to audio Captchas, audio logos, singing, or rapping. (Yes, these guidelines mention rapping!)
1.4.8 You could make sure that your users can reformat blocks of text on your website so they can read them better. To do this, make sure that your users can:

specify the colours of the text and the background, and
make the blocks of text less than 80-characters wide, and 
align text to the left (or right for right-to-left languages), and 
set the line height to 150%, and 
set the vertical distance between paragraphs to 1½ times the line height of the text, and 
resize the text (without using their assistive technology) up to 200% and still not have to scroll horizontally to read it.

By the way, when you specify a colour for text, always specify a colour for its background too. Don’t rely on default background colours!
1.4.9 Let’s return to images of text for a second. You could make sure that you use them only for decoration and logos.
Can users operate the controls and links on your website?
The second guideline has criteria that help you prevent your users from asking, “How the **** does this thing work?”
2.1.1 You must make sure that you users can carry out all of your website’s activities with just their keyboard, without time limits for pressing keys. (This doesn’t apply to drawing or anything else that requires a pointing device such as a mouse.) Again, if you use the most appropriate HTML element for each piece of information and for each form element, this should prove easy.
2.1.2 You must make sure that when the user uses the keyboard to focus on some part of your website, they can then move the focus to some other part of your webpage without needing to use a mouse or touch the screen. If your website needs them to do something complex before they can move the focus elsewhere, explain that to your user. These “keyboard traps” have become rare, but beware of forms that move focus from one text box to another as soon as they receive the correct number of characters.
2.1.3 Let’s revisit making sure that you users can carry out all of your website’s activities with just their keyboard, without time limits for pressing keys. You could make sure that your user can do absolutely everything on your website with just the keyboard.
2.2.1 Sometimes people need more time than you might expect to complete a task on your website. If any part of your website imposes a time limit on a task, you must do at least one of these: 

let your users turn off the time limit before they encounter it; or
let your users increase the time limit to at least 10 times the default time limit before they encounter it; or
warn your users before the time limit expires and give them at least 20 seconds to extend it, and let them extend it at least 10 times.

Remember: these guidelines are practical. They allow you to enforce time limits for real-time events such as auctions and ticket sales, where increasing or extending time limits wouldn’t make sense. Also, the guidelines allow you to enforce a maximum time limit of 20 hours. The editors chose 20 hours because people need to go to sleep at some stage. See? Practical!
2.2.2 In my experience, this criterion remains the least well-known—even though some users can only use websites that conform to it. If your website presents content alongside other content that can distract users by automatically moving, blinking, scrolling, or updating, you must make sure that your users can:

pause, stop, or hide the other content if it’s not essential and lasts more than 5 seconds; and
pause, stop, hide, or control the frequency of the other content if it automatically updates.

It’s OK if your users miss live information such as stock price updates or football scores; you can’t do anything about that! Also, this doesn’t apply to animations such as progress bars that you put on a website to let all users know that the webpage isn’t frozen.
(If this one sounds complex, just add a pause button to anything that might distract your users.)
2.2.3 Let’s go back to time limits on tasks on your website. You could   make your website even easier to use by removing all time limits except those on real-time events such as auctions and ticket sales. That would mean your user wouldn’t need to interact with a timer at all.
2.2.4 You could let your users turn off all interruptions—server updates, promotions, and so on—apart from any emergency information.
2.2.5 This is possibly my favourite of these criteria! After your website logs your user out, you could make sure that when they log in again, they can continue from where they were without having lost any information. Do that, and you’ll be on everyone’s Nice List this Christmas.
2.3.1 You must make sure that nothing flashes more than three times a second on your website, unless you can make sure that the flashes remain below the acceptable general flash and red flash thresholds…
2.3.2 …or you could just make sure that nothing flashes more than three times per second on your website. This is usually an easier goal.
2.4.1 You must make sure that your users can jump past any blocks of content, such as navigation menus, that are repeated throughout your website. You know the drill here: using HTML’s sectioning elements such as header, nav, main, aside, and footer allows users with assistive technology to go straight to the content they need, and adding “Skip Navigation” links allows everyone to get to your main content faster.
2.4.2 You must add a proper title to describe each webpage’s topic. Your webpage won’t even validate without a title element, so make it a useful one.
2.4.3 If your users can focus on links and native form widgets, you must make sure that they can focus on elements in an order that makes sense.
2.4.4 You must make sure that your users can understand the purpose of a link when they read:

the text of the link; or
the text of the paragraph, list item, table cell, or table header for the cell that contains the link; or
the heading above the link.

You don’t have to do that for games and quizzes.
2.4.5 You should give your users multiple ways to find any webpage within a set of webpages. Add site-wide search and a site map and you’re done!
This doesn’t apply for a webpage that is part of a series of actions (like a shopping cart and checkout flow) or to a webpage that is a result of a series of actions (like a webpage confirming that the user has bought what was in the shopping cart).
2.4.6 You should help your users to understand your content by providing:

headings that describe the topics of you content;
labels that describe the purpose of the native form widgets on the webpage.

2.4.7 You should make sure that users can see which element they have focussed on. Next time you use your website, try hitting the Tab key repeatedly. Does it visually highlight each item as it moves focus to it? If it doesn’t, search your CSS to see whether you’ve applied outline: 0; to all elements—that’s usually the culprit. Use the :focus pseudo-element to define how elements should appear when they have focus.
2.4.8 You could help your user to understand where the current webpage is located within your website. Add “breadcrumb navigation” and/or a site map and you’re done.
2.4.9 You could make links even easier to understand, by making sure that your users can understand the purpose of a link when they read the text of the link. Again, you don’t have to do that for games and quizzes.
2.4.10 You could use headings to organise your content by topic. 
Can users understand your content?
The third guideline has criteria that help you prevent your users from asking, “What the **** does this mean?”
3.1.1 Let’s start this section with the criterion that possibly takes the least time to implement; you must make sure that the user’s browser can identify the main language that your webpage’s content is written in. For a webpage that has mainly English content, use <html lang=""en"">. 
3.1.2 You  must specify when content in another language appears in your webpage, like so: <q>I wish you a <span lang=""fr"">Joyeux Noël</span>.</q>. You don’t have to do this for proper names, technical terms, or words that you can’t identify a language for. You also don’t have to do it for words from a different language that people consider part of the language around those words; for example, <q>Come to our Christmas rendezvous!</q> is OK.
3.1.3 You could make sure that your users can find out the meaning of any unusual words or phrases, including idioms like “stocking filler” or “Bah! Humbug!” and jargon such as “VoiceOver” and “TalkBack”. Provide a glossary or link to a dictionary.
3.1.4 You could make sure that your users can find out the meaning of any    abbreviation. For example, VoiceOver pronounces “Xmas” as “Smas” instead of “Christmas”. Using the abbr element and linking to a glossary can help. (Interestingly, VoiceOver pronounces “abbr” as “abbreviation”!)
3.1.5 Do your users need to be able to read better than a typically educated nine-year-old, to read your content (apart from proper names and titles)? If so, you could provide a version that doesn’t require that level of reading ability, or you could provide images, videos, or audio to explain your content. (You don’t have to add captions or audio description to those videos.)
3.1.6 You could make sure that your users can access the pronunciation of any word in your content if that word’s meaning depends on its pronunciation. For example, the word “close” could have one of two meanings, depending on pronunciation, in a phrase such as, “Ready for Christmas? Close now!”
3.2.1 Some users need to focus on elements to access information about them. You must make sure that focusing on an element doesn’t trigger any major changes, such as opening a new window, focusing on another element, or submitting a form.
3.2.2 Webpages are easier for users when the controls do what they’re supposed to do. Unless you have warned your users about it, you must make sure that changing the value of a control such as a text box, checkbox, or drop-down list doesn’t trigger any major changes, such as opening a new window, focusing on another element, or submitting a form.
3.2.3 To help your users to find the content they want on each webpage, you should put your navigation elements in the same place on each webpage. (This doesn’t apply when your user has changed their preferences or when they use assistive technology to change how your content appears.) 
3.2.4 When a set of webpages includes things that have the same functionality on different webpages, you should name those things consistently. For example, don’t use the word “Search” for the search box on one webpage and “Find” for the search box on another webpage within that set of webpages.
3.2.5 Let’s go back to major changes, such as a new window opening, another element taking focus, or a form being submitted. You could make sure that they only happen when users deliberately make them happen, or when you have warned users about them first. For example, you could give the user a button for updating some content instead of automatically updating that content. Also, if a link will open in a new window, you could add the words “opens in new window” to the link text.
3.3.1 Users make mistakes when filling in forms. Your website must identify each mistake to your user, and must describe the mistake to your users in text so that the user can fix it. One way to identify mistakes reliably to your users is to set the aria-invalid attribute to true in the element that has a mistake. That makes sure that users with assistive technology will be alerted about the mistake. Of course, you can then use the [aria-invalid=""true""] attribute selector in your CSS to visually highlight any such mistakes. Also, look into how certain attributes of the input element such as required, type, and list can help prevent and highlight mistakes.
3.3.2 You must include labels or instructions (and possibly examples) in your website’s forms, to help your users to avoid making mistakes. 
3.3.3 When your user makes a mistake when filling in a form, your webpage should suggest ways to fix that mistake, if possible. This doesn’t apply in scenarios where those suggestions could affect the security of the content.
3.3.4 Whenever your user submits information that:

has legal or financial consequences; or
affects information that they have previously saved in your website; or
is part of a test

…you should make sure that they can:

undo it; or
correct any mistakes, after your webpage checks their information; or
review, confirm, and correct the information before they finally submit it.

3.3.5 You could help prevent your users from making mistakes by providing obvious, specific help, such as examples, animations, spell-checking, or extra instructions.
3.3.6 Whenever your user submits any information, you could make sure that they can:

undo it; or
correct any mistakes, after your webpage checks their information; or
review, confirm, and correct the information before they finally submit it.

Have you made your website robust enough to work on your users’ browsers and assistive technologies?
The fourth and final guideline has criteria that help you prevent your users from asking, “Why the **** doesn’t this work on my device?”
4.1.1 You must make sure that your website works as well as possible with current and future browsers and assistive technology. Prioritise  complying with web standards instead of relying on the capabilities of currently popular devices and browsers. Web developers didn’t expect their users to be unwrapping the Wii U Browser five years ago—who knows what browsers and assistive technologies our users will be unwrapping in five years’ time? Avoid hacks, and use the W3C Markup Validation Service to make sure that your HTML has no errors.
4.1.2 If you develop your own user interface components, you must make their name, role, state, properties, and values available to your user’s browsers and assistive technologies. That should make them almost as accessible as standard HTML elements such as links, buttons, and checkboxes.
“…and a partridge in a pear tree!”
…as that very long Christmas song goes. We’ve covered a lot in this article—because your users have a lot of different levels of ability. Hopefully this has demystified the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0 for you. Hopefully you spotted a few situations that could arise for users on your website, and you now know how to tackle them. 
To start applying what we’ve covered, you might like to look at Sarah Horton and Whitney Quesenbery’s personas for Accessible UX. Discuss the personas, get into their heads, and think about which aspects of your website might cause problems for them. See if you can apply what we’ve covered today, to help users like them to do what they need to do on your website.
How to know when your website is perfectly accessible for everyone
LOL! There will never be a time when your website becomes perfectly accessible for everyone. Don’t aim for that. Instead, aim for regularly testing and making your website more accessible.
Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1
The W3C hope to release the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1 as a “recommendation” (that’s what the W3C call something that we should start using) by the middle of next year. Ten years may seem like a long time to move from version 2.0 to version 2.1, but consider the scale of the task: the editors have to update the guidelines to cover all the new ways that people interact with new technologies, while keeping the guidelines backwards-compatible. Keep an eye out for 2.1!
You’ll go down in history
One last point: I’ve met a surprising number of web designers and developers who do great work to make their websites more accessible without ever telling their users about it. Some of your potential customers have possibly tried and failed to use your website in the past. They probably won’t try again unless you let them know that things have improved. A quick Twitter search for your website’s name alongside phrases like “assistive technology”, “doesn’t work”, or “#fail” can let you find frustrated users—so you can tell them about how you’re making your website more accessible. Start making your websites work better for everyone—and please, let everyone know.",2017,Alan Dalton,alandalton,2017-12-03T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2017/wcag-for-people-who-havent-read-them/,code
38,"Websites of Christmas Past, Present and Future","The websites of Christmas past

The first website was created at CERN. It was launched on 20 December 1990 (just in time for Christmas!), and it still works today, after twenty-four years. Isn’t that incredible?!

Why does this website still work after all this time? I can think of a few reasons.

First, the authors of this document chose HTML. Of course they couldn’t have known back then the extent to which we would be creating documents in HTML, but HTML always had a lot going for it. It’s built on top of plain text, which means it can be opened in any text editor, and it’s pretty readable, even without any parsing.

Despite the fact that HTML has changed quite a lot over the past twenty-four years, extensions to the specification have always been implemented in a backwards-compatible manner. Reading through the 1992 W3C document HTML Tags, you’ll see just how it has evolved. We still have h1 – h6 elements, but I’d not heard of the <plaintext> element before. Despite being deprecated since HTML2, it still works in several browsers. You can see it in action on my website.

As well as being written in HTML, there is no run-time compilation of code; the first website simply consists of HTML files transmitted over the web. Due to its lack of complexity, it stood a good chance of surviving in the turbulent World Wide Web.

That’s all well and good for a simple, static website. But websites created today are increasingly interactive. Many require a login and provide experiences that are tailored to the individual user. This type of dynamic website requires code to be executed somewhere.

Traditionally, dynamic websites would execute such code on the server, and transmit a simple HTML file to the user. As far as the browser was concerned, this wasn’t much different from the first website, as the additional complexity all happened before the document was sent to the browser.

Doing it all in the browser

In 2003, the first single page interface was created at slashdotslash.com. A single page interface or single page app is a website where the page is created in the browser via JavaScript. The benefit of this technique is that, after the initial page load, subsequent interactions can happen instantly, or very quickly, as they all happen in the browser.

When software runs on the client rather than the server, it is often referred to as a fat client. This means that the bulk of the processing happens on the client rather than the server (which can now be thin).

A fat client is preferred over a thin client because:


	It takes some processing requirements away from the server, thereby reducing the cost of servers (a thin server requires cheaper, or fewer servers).
	They can often continue working offline, provided no server communication is required to complete tasks after initial load.
	The latency of internet communications is bypassed after initial load, as interactions can appear near instantaneous when compared to waiting for a response from the server.


But there are also some big downsides, and these are often overlooked:


	They can’t work without JavaScript. Obviously JavaScript is a requirement for any client-side code execution. And as the UK Government Digital Service discovered, 1.1% of their visitors did not receive JavaScript enhancements. Of that 1.1%, 81% had JavaScript enabled, but their browsers failed to execute it (possibly due to dropping the internet connection). If you care about 1.1% of your visitors, you should care about the non-JavaScript experience for your website.
	The browser needs to do all the processing. This means that the hardware it runs on needs to be fast. It also means that we require all clients to have largely the same capabilities and browser APIs.
	The initial payload is often much larger, and nothing will be rendered for the user until this payload has been fully downloaded and executed. If the connection drops at any point, or the code fails to execute owing to a bug, we’re left with the non-JavaScript experience.
	They are not easily indexed as every crawler now needs to run JavaScript just to receive the content of the website.


These are not merely edge case issues to shirk off. The first three issues will affect some of your visitors; the fourth affects everyone, including you.

What problem are we trying to solve?

So what can be done to address these issues? Whereas fat clients solve some inherent issues with the web, they seem to create as many problems. When attempting to resolve any issue, it’s always good to try to uncover the original problem and work forwards from there. One of the best ways to frame a problem is as a user story. A user story considers the who, what and why of a need. Here’s a template:


	As a {who} I want {what} so that {why}


I haven’t got a specific project in mind, so let’s refer to the who as user. Here’s one that could explain the use of thick clients.


	As a user I want the site to respond to my actions quickly so that I get immediate feedback when I do something.


This user story could probably apply to a great number of websites, but so could this:


	As a user I want to get to the content quickly, so that I don’t have to wait too long to find out what the site is all about or get the content I need.


A better solution

How can we balance both these user needs? How can we have a website that loads fast, and also reacts fast? The solution is to have a thick server, that serves the complete document, and then a thick client, that manages subsequent actions and replaces parts of the page. What we’re talking about here is simply progressive enhancement, but from the user’s perspective.

The initial payload contains the entire document. At this point, all interactions would happen in a traditional way using links or form elements. Then, once we’ve downloaded the JavaScript (asynchronously, after load) we can enhance the experience with JavaScript interactions. If for whatever reason our JavaScript fails to download or execute, it’s no biggie – we’ve already got a fully functioning website. If an API that we need isn’t available in this browser, it’s not a problem. We just fall back to the basic experience.

This second point, of having some minimum requirement for an enhanced experience, is often referred to as cutting the mustard, first used in this sense by the BBC News team. Essentially it’s an if statement like this:

if('querySelector' in document
 && 'localStorage' in window
 && 'addEventListener' in window) {
 // bootstrap the JavaScript application
 }

This code states that the browser must support the following methods before downloading and executing the JavaScript:


	document.querySelector (can it find elements by CSS selectors)
	window.localStorage (can it store strings)
	window.addEventListener (can it bind to events in a standards-compliant way)


These three properties are what the BBC News team decided to test for, as they are present in their website’s JavaScript. Each website will have its own requirements. The last method, window.addEventListener is in interesting one. Although it’s simple to bind to events on IE8 and earlier, these browsers have very inconsistent support for standards. Making any JavaScript-heavy website work on IE8 and earlier is a painful exercise, and comes at a cost to all users on other browsers, as they’ll download unnecessary code to patch support for IE.

 JavaScript API support by browser.

I discovered that IE8 supports 12% of the current JavaScript APIs, while IE9 supports 16%, and IE10 51%. It seems, then, that IE10 could be the earliest version of IE that I’d like to develop JavaScript for. That doesn’t mean that users on browsers earlier than 10 can’t use the website. On the contrary, they get the core experience, and because it’s just HTML and CSS, it’s much more likely to be bug-free, and could even provide a better experience than trying to run JavaScript in their browser. They receive the thin client experience.

By reducing the number of platforms that our enhanced JavaScript version supports, we can better focus our efforts on those platforms and offer an even greater experience to those users. But we can only do that if we use progressive enhancement. Otherwise our website would be completely broken for all other users.

So what we have is a thick server, capable of serving the entire website to our users, complete with all core functionality needed for our users to complete their tasks; and we have a thick client on supported browsers, which can bring an even greater experience to those users.

This is all transparent to users. They may notice that the website seems snappier on the new iPhone they received for Christmas than on the Windows 7 machine they got five years ago, but then they probably expected it to be faster on their iPhone anyway.

Isn’t this just more work?

It’s true that making a thick server and a thick client is more work than just making one or the other. But there are some big advantages:


	The website works for everyone.
	You can decide when users get the enhanced experience.
	You can enhance features in an iterative (or agile) manner.
	When the website breaks, it doesn’t break down.
	The more you practise this approach, the quicker you will become.


The websites of Christmas present

The best way to discover websites using this technique of progressive enhancement is to disable JavaScript and see if the website breaks. I use the Web Developer extension, which is available for Chrome and Firefox. It lets me quickly disable JavaScript.

 Web Developer extension.

24 ways works with and without JavaScript. Try using the menu icon to view the navigation. Without JavaScript, it’s a jump link to the bottom of the page, but with JavaScript, the menu slides in from the right.

 24 ways navigation with JavaScript disabled.

 24 ways navigation with working JavaScript.

Google search will also work without JavaScript. You won’t get instant search results or any prerendering, because those are enhancements.

For a more app-like example, try using Twitter. Without JavaScript, it still works, and looks nearly identical. But when you load JavaScript, links open in modal windows and all pages are navigated much quicker, as only the content that has changed is loaded. You can read about how they achieved this in Twitter’s blog posts Improving performance on twitter.com and Implementing pushState for twitter.com.

Unfortunately Facebook doesn’t use progressive enhancement, which not only means that the website doesn’t work without JavaScript, but it takes longer to load. I tested it on WebPagetest and if you compare the load times of Twitter and Facebook, you’ll notice that, despite putting similar content on the page, Facebook takes two and a half times longer to render the core content on the page.

 Facebook takes two and a half times longer to load than Twitter.

Websites of Christmas yet to come

Every project is different, and making a website that enjoys a long life, or serves a larger number of users may or may not be a high priority. But I hope I’ve convinced you that it certainly is possible to look to the past and future simultaneously, and that there can be significant advantages to doing so.",2014,Josh Emerson,joshemerson,2014-12-08T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2014/websites-of-christmas-past-present-and-future/,code
67,What I Learned about Product Design This Year,"2015 was a humbling year for me. In September of 2014, I joined a tiny but established startup called SproutVideo as their third employee and first designer. The role interests me because it affords the opportunity to see how design can grow a solid product with a loyal user-base into something even better. 
The work I do now could also have a real impact on the brand and user experience of our product for years to come, which is a thrilling prospect in an industry where much of what I do feels small and temporary. I got in on the ground floor of something special: a small, dedicated, useful company that cares deeply about making video hosting effortless and rewarding for our users.
I had (and still have) grand ideas for what thoughtful design can do for a product, and the smaller-scale product design work I’ve done or helped manage over the past few years gave me enough eager confidence to dive in head first. Readers who have experience redesigning complex existing products probably have a knowing smirk on their face right now. As I said, it’s been humbling. A year of focused product design, especially on the scale we are trying to achieve with our small team at SproutVideo, has taught me more than any projects in recent memory. I’d like to share a few of those lessons.
Product design is very different from marketing design
The majority of my recent work leading up to SproutVideo has been in marketing design. These projects are so fun because their aim is to communicate the value of the product in a compelling and memorable way. In order to achieve this goal, I spent a lot of time thinking about content strategy, responsive design, and how to create striking visuals that tell a story. These are all pursuits I love.
Product design is a different beast. When designing a homepage, I can employ powerful imagery, wild gradients, and somewhat-quirky fonts. When I began redesigning the SproutVideo product, I wanted to draw on all the beautiful assets I’ve created for our marketing materials, but big gradients, textures, and display fonts made no sense in this new context.
That’s because the product isn’t about us, and it isn’t about telling our story. Product design is about getting out of the way so people can do their job. The visual design is there to create a pleasant atmosphere for people to work in, and to help support the user experience. Learning to take “us” out of the equation took some work after years of creating gorgeous imagery and content for the sales-driven side of businesses.
I’ve learned it’s very valuable to design both sides of the experience, because marketing and product design flex different muscles. If you’re currently in an environment where the two are separate, consider switching teams in 2016. Designing for product when you’ve mostly done marketing, or vice versa, will deepen your knowledge as a designer overall. You’ll face new unexpected challenges, which is the only way to grow.
Product design can not start with what looks good on Dribbble
I have an embarrassing confession: when I began the redesign, I had a secret goal of making something that would look gorgeous in my portfolio. I have a collection of product shots that I admire on Dribbble; examples of beautiful dashboards and widgets and UI elements that look good enough to frame. I wanted people to feel the same way about the final outcome of our redesign. Mistakenly, this was a factor in my initial work. I opened Photoshop and crafted pixel-perfect static buttons and form elements and color palettes that — when applied to our actual product — looked like a toddler beauty pageant. It added up to a lot of unusable shininess, noise, and silliness.
I was disappointed; these elements seemed so lovely in isolation, but in context, they felt tacky and overblown. I realized: I’m not here to design the world’s most beautiful drop down menu. Good design has nothing to do with ego, but in my experience designers are, at least a little bit, secret divas. I’m no exception. I had to remind myself that I am not working in service of a bigger Dribbble following or to create the most Pinterest-ing work. My function is solely to serve the users — to make life a little better for the good people who keep my company in business.
This meant letting go of pixel-level beauty to create something bigger and harder: a system of elements that work together in harmony in many contexts. The visual style exists to guide the users. When done well, it becomes a language that users understand, so when they encounter a new feature or have a new goal, they already feel comfortable navigating it. This meant stripping back my gorgeous animated menu into something that didn’t detract from important neighboring content, and could easily fit in other parts of the app. In order to know what visual style would support the users, I had to take a wider view of the product as a whole.
Just accept that designing a great product – like many worthwhile pursuits – is initially laborious and messy
Once I realized I couldn’t start by creating the most Dribbble-worthy thing, I knew I’d have to begin with the unglamorous, frustrating, but weirdly wonderful work of mapping out how the product’s content could better be structured. Since we’re redesigning an existing product, I assumed this would be fairly straightforward: the functionality was already in place, and my job was just to structure it in a more easily navigable way.
I started by handing off a few wireframes of the key screens to the developer, and that’s when the questions began rolling in: “If we move this content into a modal, how will it affect this similar action here?” “What happens if they don’t add video tags, but they do add a description?” “What if the user has a title that is 500 characters long?” “What if they want their video to be private to some users, but accessible to others?”.
How annoying (but really, fantastic) that people use our product in so many ways. Turns out, product design isn’t about laying out elements in the most ideal scenario for the user that’s most convenient for you. As product designers, we have to foresee every outcome, and anticipate every potential user need.
Which brings me to another annoying epiphany: if you want to do it well, and account for every user, product design is so much more snarly and tangled than you’d expect going in. I began with a simple goal: to improve the experience on just one of our key product pages. However, every small change impacts every part of the product to some degree, and that impact has to be accounted for. Every decision is based on assumptions that have to be tested; I test my assumptions by observing users, talking to the team, wireframing, and prototyping. Many of my assumptions are wrong. There are days when it’s incredibly frustrating, because an elegant solution for users with one goal will complicate life for users with another goal. It’s vital to solve as many scenarios as possible, even though this is slow, sometimes mind-bending work.
As a side bonus, wireframing and prototyping every potential state in a product is tedious, but your developers will thank you for it. It’s not their job to solve what happens when there’s an empty state, error, or edge case. Showing you’ve accounted for these scenarios will win a developer’s respect; failing to do so will frustrate them.
When you’ve created and tested a system that supports user needs, it will be beautiful
Remember what I said in the beginning about wanting to create a Dribbble-worthy product? When I stopped focusing on the visual details of the design (color, spacing, light and shadow, font choices) and focused instead on structuring the content to maximize usability and delight, a beautiful design began to emerge naturally.
I began with grayscale, flat wireframes as a strategy to keep me from getting pulled into the visual style before the user experience was established. As I created a system of elements that worked in harmony, the visual style choices became obvious. Some buttons would need to be brighter and sit off the page to help the user spot important actions. Some elements would need line separators to create a hierarchy, where others could stand on their own as an emphasized piece of content. As the user experience took shape, the visual style emerged naturally to support it. The result is a product that feels beautiful to use, because I was thoughtful about the experience first.

A big takeaway from this process has been that my assumptions will often be proven wrong. My assumptions about how to design a great product, and how users will interact with that product, have been tested and revised repeatedly. At SproutVideo we’re about to undertake the biggest test of our work; we’re going to launch a small part of the product redesign to our users. If I’ve learned anything, it’s that I will continue to be humbled by the ongoing effort of making the best product I can, which is a wonderful thing.
Next year, I hope you all get to do work that takes you out of our comfort zone. Be regularly confounded and embarrassed by your wrong assumptions, learn from them, and come back and tell us what you learned in 2016.",2015,Meagan Fisher,meaganfisher,2015-12-14T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2015/what-i-learned-about-product-design-this-year/,design
254,What I Learned in Six Years at GDS,"When I joined the Government Digital Service in April 2012, GOV.UK was just going into public beta. GDS was a completely new organisation, part of the Cabinet Office, with a mission to stop wasting government money on over-complicated and underperforming big IT projects and instead deliver simple, useful services for the public.
Lots of people who were experts in their fields were drawn in by this inspiring mission, and I learned loads from working with some true leaders. Here are three of the main things I learned.
1. What is the user need?

The main discipline I learned from my time at GDS was to always ask ‘what is the user need?’ It’s very easy to build something that seems like a good idea, but until you’ve identified what problem you are solving for the user, you can’t be sure that you are building something that is going to help solve an actual problem.
A really good example of this is GOV.UK Notify. This service was originally conceived of as a status tracker; a “where’s my stuff” for government services. For example, if you apply for a passport online, it can take up to six weeks to arrive. After a few weeks, you might feel anxious and phone the Home Office to ask what’s happening. The idea of the status tracker was to allow you to get this information online, saving your time and saving government money on call centres.
The project started, as all GDS projects do, with a discovery. The main purpose of a discovery is to identify the users’ needs. At the end of this discovery, the team realised that a status tracker wasn’t the way to address the problem. As they wrote in this blog post: 

Status tracking tools are often just ‘channel shift’ for anxiety. They solve the symptom and not the problem. They do make it more convenient for people to reduce their anxiety, but they still require them to get anxious enough to request an update in the first place.

What would actually address the user need would be to give you the information before you get anxious about where your passport is. For example, when your application is received, email you to let you know when to expect it, and perhaps text you at various points in the process to let you know how it’s going. So instead of a status tracker, the team built GOV.UK Notify, to make it easy for government services to incorporate text, email and even letter notifications into their processes.
Making sure you know your user
At GDS user needs were taken very seriously. We had a user research lab on site and everyone was required to spend two hours observing user research every six weeks. Ideally you’d observe users working with things you’d built, but even if they weren’t, it was an incredibly valuable experience, and something you should seek out if you are able to.
Even if we think we understand our users very well, it is very enlightening to see how users actually use your stuff. Partly because in technology we tend to be power users and the average user doesn’t use technology the same way we do. But even if you are building things for other developers, someone who is unfamiliar with it will interact with it in a way that may be very different to what you have envisaged.
User needs is not just about building things
Asking the question “what is the user need?” really helps focus on why you are doing what you are doing. It keeps things on track, and helps the team think about what the actual desired end goal is (and should be). 
Thinking about user needs has helped me with lots of things, not just building services. For example, you are raising a pull request. What’s the user need? The reviewer needs to be able to easily understand what the change you are proposing is, why you are proposing that change and any areas you need particular help on with the review. 
Or you are writing an email to a colleague. What’s the user need? What are you hoping the reader will learn, understand or do as a result of your email?
2. Make things open: it makes things better
The second important thing I learned at GDS was ‘make things open: it makes things better’. This works on many levels: being open about your strategy, blogging about what you are doing and what you’ve learned (including mistakes), and – the part that I got most involved in – coding in the open.
Talking about your work helps clarify it
One thing we did really well at GDS was blogging – a lot – about what we were working on. Blogging about what you are working on is is really valuable for the writer because it forces you to think logically about what you are doing in order to tell a good story. If you are blogging about upcoming work, it makes you think clearly about why you’re doing it; and it also means that people can comment on the blog post. Often people had really useful suggestions or clarifying questions.
It’s also really valuable to blog about what you’ve learned, especially if you’ve made a mistake. It makes sure you’ve learned the lesson and helps others avoid making the same mistakes. As well as blogging about lessons learned, GOV.UK also publishes incident reports when there is an outage or service degradation. Being open about things like this really engenders an atmosphere of trust and safe learning; which helps make things better.
Coding in the open has a lot of benefits
In my last year at GDS I was the Open Source Lead, and one of the things I focused on was the requirement that all new government source code should be open. From the start, GDS coded in the open (the GitHub organisation still has the non-intuitive name alphagov, because it was created by the team doing the original Alpha of GOV.UK, before GDS was even formed).
When I first joined GDS I was a little nervous about the fact that anyone could see my code. I worried about people seeing my mistakes, or receiving critical code reviews. (Setting people’s mind at rest about these things is why it’s crucial to have good standards around communication and positive behaviour - even a critical code review should be considerately given). 
But I quickly realised there were huge advantages to coding in the open. In the same way as blogging your decisions makes you think carefully about whether they are good ones and what evidence you have, the fact that anyone in the world could see your code (even if, in practice, they probably won’t be looking) makes everyone raise their game slightly. The very fact that you know it’s open, makes you make it a bit better.
It helps with lots of other things as well, for example it makes it easier to collaborate with people and share your work. And now that I’ve left GDS, it’s so useful to be able to look back at code I worked on to remember how things worked.
Share what you learn
It’s sometimes hard to know where to start with being open about things, but it gets easier and becomes more natural as you practice. It helps you clarify your thoughts and follow through on what you’ve decided to do. Working at GDS when this was a very important principle really helped me learn how to do this well.
3. Do the hard work to make it simple (tech edition)
‘Start with user needs’ and ‘Make things open: it makes things better’ are two of the excellent government design principles. They are all good, but the third thing that I want to talk about is number 4: ‘Do the hard work to make it simple’, and specifically, how this manifests itself in the way we build technology.
At GDS, we worked very hard to do the hard work to make the code, systems and technology we built simple for those who came after us. For example, writing good commit messages is taken very seriously. There is commit message guidance, and it was not unusual for a pull request review to ask for a commit message to be rewritten to make a commit message clearer.
We worked very hard on making pull requests good, keeping the reviewer in mind and making it clear to the user how best to review it.
Reviewing others’ pull requests is the highest priority so that no-one is blocked, and teams have screens showing the status of open pull requests (using fourth wall) and we even had a ‘pull request seal’, a bot that publishes pull requests to Slack and gets angry if they are uncommented on for more than two days.
Making it easier for developers to support the site
Another example of doing the hard work to make it simple was the opsmanual. I spent two years on the web operations team on GOV.UK, and one of the things I loved about that team was the huge efforts everyone went to to be open and inclusive to developers.
The team had some people who were really expert in web ops, but they were all incredibly helpful when bringing me on board as a developer with no previous experience of web ops, and also patiently explaining things whenever other devs in similar positions came with questions. 
The main artefact of this was the opsmanual, which contained write-ups of how to do lots of things. One of the best things was that every alert that might lead to someone being woken up in the middle of the night had a link to documentation on the opsmanual which detailed what the alert meant and some suggested actions that could be taken to address it.
This was important because most of the devs on GOV.UK were on the on-call rota, so if they were woken at 3am by an alert they’d never seen before, the opsmanual information might give them everything they needed to solve it, without the years of web ops training and the deep familiarity with the GOV.UK infrastructure that came with working on it every day.
Developers are users too
Doing the hard work to make it simple means that users can do what they need to do, and this applies even when the users are your developer peers. At GDS I really learned how to focus on simplicity for the user, and how much better this makes things work.
These three principles help us make great things
I learned so much more in my six years at GDS. For example, the civil service has a very fair way of interviewing. I learned about the importance of good comms, working late, responsibly and the value of content design.
And the real heart of what I learned, the guiding principles that help us deliver great products, is encapsulated by the three things I’ve talked about here: think about the user need, make things open, and do the hard work to make it simple.",2018,Anna Shipman,annashipman,2018-12-08T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2018/what-i-learned-in-six-years-at-gds/,business
41,What Is Vagrant and Why Should I Care?,"If you run a web server, a database server and your scripting language(s) of choice on your main machine and you have not yet switched to using virtualisation in your workflow then this essay may be of some value to you.

I know you exist because I bump into you daily: freelancers coming in to work on our projects; internet friends complaining about reinstalling a development environment because of an operating system upgrade; fellow agency owners who struggle to brief external help when getting a particular project up and running; or even hardcore back-end developers who “don’t do ops” and prefer to run their development stack of choice locally.

There are many perfectly reasonable arguments as to why you may not have already made the switch, from being simply too busy, all the way through to a distrust of the new. I’ll admit that there are many new technologies or workflows that I hear of daily and instantly disregard because I have tool overload, that feeling I get when I hear about a new shiny thing and think “Well, what I do now works – I’ll leave it for others to play with.” If that’s you when it comes to Vagrant then I hope you’ll hear me out. The business case is compelling enough for you to make that switch; as a bonus it’s also really easy to get going.

In this article we’ll start off by going through the high level, the tools available and how it all fits together. Then we’ll touch on the justification for making the switch, providing a few use cases that might resonate with you. Finally, I’ll provide a very simple example that you can follow to get yourself up and running.

What?

You already know what virtualisation is. You use the ability to run an operating system within another operating system every day. Whether that’s Parallels or VMware on your laptop or similar server-based tools that drive the ‘cloud’, squeezing lots of machines on to physical hardware and making it really easy to copy servers and even clusters of servers from one place to another. It’s an amazing technology which has changed the face of the internet over the past fifteen years.

Simply put, Vagrant makes it really easy to work with virtual machines. According to the Vagrant docs:


	If you’re a designer, Vagrant will automatically set everything up that is required for that web app in order for you to focus on doing what you do best: design. Once a developer configures Vagrant, you don’t need to worry about how to get that app running ever again. No more bothering other developers to help you fix your environment so you can test designs. Just check out the code, vagrant up, and start designing.


While I’m not sure I agree with the implication that all designers would get others to do the configuring, I think you’ll agree that the “Just check out the code… and start designing” premise is very compelling.

You don’t need Vagrant to develop your web applications on virtual machines. All you need is a virtualisation software package, something like VMware Workstation or VirtualBox, and some code. Download the half-gigabyte operating system image that you want and install it. Then download and configure the stack you’ll be working with: let’s say Apache, MySQL, PHP. Then install some libraries, CuRL and ImageMagick maybe, and finally configure the ability to easily copy files from your machine to the new virtual one, something like Samba, or install an FTP server. Once this is all done, copy the code over, import the database, configure Apache’s virtual host, restart and cross your fingers.

If you’re a bit weird like me then the above is pretty easy to do and secretly quite fun. Indeed, the amount of traffic to one of my more popular blog posts proves that a lot of people have been building themselves development servers from scratch for some time (or at least trying to anyway), whether that’s on virtual or physical hardware.

Or you could use Vagrant. It allows you, or someone else, to specify in plain text how the machine’s virtual hardware should be configured and what should be installed on it. It also makes it insanely easy to get the code on the server. You check out your project, type vagrant up and start work.

Why?

It’s worth labouring the point that Vagrant makes it really easy; I mean look-no-tangle-of-wires-or-using-vim-and-loads-of-annoying-command-line-stuff easy to run a development environment.

That’s all well and good, I hear you say, but there’s a steep learning curve, an overhead to switch. You’re busy and this all sounds great but you need to get on; you’ve got a career to build or a business to run and you don’t have time to learn new stuff right now.

In short, what’s the business case?

The business case involves saved time, a very low barrier to entry and the ability to give the exact same environment to somebody else.

Getting your first development virtual machine running will take minutes, not counting download time. Seriously, use pre-built Vagrant files and provisioners (we’ll touch on this below) and you can start developing immediately.

Once you’ve finished developing you can check in your changes, ask a colleague or freelancer to check them out, and then they run the code on the exact same machine – even if they are on the other side of the world and regardless of whether they are on Windows, Linux or Apple OS X.

The configuration to build the machine isn’t a huge binary disk image that’ll take ages to download from Git; it’s two small text files that can be version controlled too, so you can see any changes made to the config and roll back if needed.

No more ‘It works for me’ reports; no ‘Oh, I was using PHP 5.3.3, not PHP 5.3.11’ – you’re both working on exact same copies of the development environment. With a tested and verified provisioning file you’ll have the confidence that when you brief your next freelancer in to your team there won’t be that painful to and fro of getting the system up and running, where you’re on a Skype call and they are uttering the immortal words, ‘It still doesn’t work’. You know it works because you can run it too.

This portability becomes even more important when you’re working on larger sites and systems. Need a load balancer? Multiple front-end servers and a clustered database back-end? No problem. Add each server into the same Vagrant file and a single command will build all of them. As you’ll know if you work on larger, business critical systems, keeping the operating systems in sync is a real problem: one server with a slightly different library causing sporadic and hard to trace issues is a genuine time black hole. Well, the good news is that you can use the same provisioning files to keep test and production machines in sync using your current build workflow.

Let’s also not forget the most simple use case: a single developer with multiple websites running on a single machine. If that’s you and you switch to using Vagrant-managed virtual machines then the next time you upgrade your operating system or do a fresh install there’s no chance that things will all stop working. The server config is all tucked away in version control with your code. Just pull it down and carry on coding.

OK, got it. Show me already

If you want to try this out you’ll need to install the latest VirtualBox and Vagrant for your platform. If you already have VMware Workstation or another supported virtualisation package installed you can use that instead but you may need to tweak my Vagrant file below. Depending on your operating system, a reboot might also be wise.

Note: the commands below were executed on my MacBook, but should also work on Windows and Linux. If you’re using Windows make sure to run the command prompt as Administrator or it’ll fall over when trying to update the hosts file.

As a quick sanity check let’s just make sure that we have the vagrant command in our path, so fire up a terminal and check the version number:

$ vagrant -v
Vagrant 1.6.5

We’ve one final thing to install and that’s the vagrant-hostsupdater plugin. Once again, in your terminal:

$ vagrant plugin install vagrant-hostsupdater
Installing the 'vagrant-hostsupdater' plugin. This can take a few minutes...
Installed the plugin 'vagrant-hostsupdater (0.0.11)'!

Hopefully that wasn’t too painful for you.

There are two things that you need to manage a virtual machine with Vagrant:


	a Vagrant file: this tells Vagrant what hardware to spin up
	a provisioning file: this tells Vagrant what to do on the machine


To save you copying and pasting I’ve supplied you with a simple example (ZIP) containing both of these. Unzip it somewhere sensible and in your terminal make sure you are inside the Vagrant folder:

$ cd where/you/placed/it/24ways

$ ls -l
-rw-r--r--@  1 bealers  staff  11055  9 Nov 09:16 bealers-24ways.md
-rw-r--r--@  1 bealers  staff  118152 9 Nov 10:08 it-works.png
drwxr-xr-x   5 bealers  staff  170    8 Nov 22:54 vagrant

$ cd vagrant/

$ ls -l
-rw-r--r--@ 1 bealers  staff  1661  8 Nov 21:50 Vagrantfile
-rwxr-xr-x@ 1 bealers  staff  3841  9 Nov 08:00 provision.sh

The Vagrant file tells Vagrant how to configure the virtual hardware of your development machine. Skipping over some of the finer details, here’s what’s in that Vagrant file:

www.vm.box = ""ubuntu/trusty64""  

Use Ubuntu 14.04 for the VM’s OS. Vagrant will only download this once. If another project uses the same OS, Vagrant will use a cached version.

www.vm.hostname = ""bealers-24ways.dev""     

Set the machine’s hostname. If, like us, you’re using the vagrant-hostsupdater plugin, this will also get added to your hosts file, pointing to the virtual machine’s IP address.

www.vm.provider :virtualbox do |vb|
    vb.customize [""modifyvm"", :id, ""--cpus"", ""2"" ]
end

Here’s an example of configuring the virtual machine’s hardware on the fly. In this case we want two virtual processors.

Note: this is specific for the VirtualBox provider, but you could also have a section for VMware or other supported virtualisation software.

www.vm.network ""private_network"", ip: ""192.168.13.37""   

This specifies that we want a private networking link between your computer and the virtual machine. It’s probably best to use a reserved private subnet like 192.168.0.0/16 or 10.0.0.0/8

www.vm.synced_folder ""../"", ""/var/www/24ways"",
        owner: ""www-data"", group: ""www-data""

A particularly handy bit of Vagrant magic. This maps your local 24ways parent folder to /var/www/24ways on the virtual machine. This means the virtual machine already has direct access to your code and so do you. There’s no messy copying or synchronisation – just edit your files and immediately run them on the server.

www.vm.provision :shell, :path => ""provision.sh""

This is where we specify the provisioner, the script that will be executed on the machine.

If you open up the provisioner you’ll see it’s a bash script that does things like:


	install Apache, PHP, MySQL and related libraries
	configure the libraries: set permissions, enable logging
	create a database and grant some access rights
	set up some code for us to develop on; in this case, fire up a vanilla WordPress installation


To get this all up and running you simply need to run Vagrant from within the vagrant folder:

$ vagrant up

You should now get a Matrix-like stream of stuff shooting up the screen. If this is the first time Vagrant has used this particular operating system image – remember we’ve specified the latest version of Ubuntu – it’ll download the disc image and cache it for future reuse. Then all the packages are downloaded and installed and finally all our configuration steps occur incluing the download and configuration of WordPress.

Halfway through proceedings it’s likely that the process will halt at a prompt something like this:

==> www: adding to (/etc/hosts) : 192.168.13.37  bealers-24ways.dev  # VAGRANT: 2dbfbced1b1e79d2a0942728a0a57ece (www) / 899bd80d-4251-4f6f-91a0-d30f2d9918cc
Password:

You need to enter your password to give vagrant sudo rights to add the IP address and hostname mapping to your local hosts file.

Once finished, fire up your browser and go to http://bealers-24ways.dev. You should see a default WordPress installation. The username for wp-admin is admin and the password is 24ways.



If you take a look at your local filesystem the 24ways folder should now look like:

$ cd ../

$ ls -l

-rw-r--r--@  1 bealers  staff    13074  9 Nov 10:14 bealers-24ways.md
drwxr-xr-x  21 bealers  staff      714  9 Nov 10:06 code
drwxr-xr-x   3 bealers  staff      102  9 Nov 10:06 etc
-rw-r--r--@  1 bealers  staff   118152  9 Nov 10:08 it-works.png
drwxr-xr-x   5 bealers  staff      170  9 Nov 10:03 vagrant
-rwxr-xr-x   1 bealers  staff  1315849  9 Nov 10:06 wp-cli

$ cd vagrant/

$ ls -l
-rw-r--r--@ 1 bealers  staff  1661  9 Nov 09:41 Vagrantfile
-rwxr-xr-x@ 1 bealers  staff  3836  9 Nov 10:06 provision.sh

The code folder contains all the WordPress files. You can edit these directly and refresh that page to see your changes instantly.

Staying in the vagrant folder, we’ll now SSH to the machine and have a quick poke around.

$ vagrant ssh
Welcome to Ubuntu 14.04.1 LTS (GNU/Linux 3.13.0-39-generic x86_64)

* Documentation:  https://help.ubuntu.com/

System information as of Sun Nov  9 10:03:38 UTC 2014

System load:  1.35              Processes:           102
Usage of /:   2.7% of 39.34GB   Users logged in:     0
Memory usage: 16%               IP address for eth0: 10.0.2.15
Swap usage:   0%

Graph this data and manage this system at:
https://landscape.canonical.com/

Get cloud support with Ubuntu Advantage Cloud Guest:
http://www.ubuntu.com/business/services/cloud

0 packages can be updated.
0 updates are security updates.

vagrant@bealers-24ways:~$

You’re now logged in as the Vagrant user; if you want to become root this is easy:

vagrant@bealers-24ways:~$ sudo su -
root@bealers-24ways:~# 

Or you could become the webserver user, which is a good idea if you’re editing the web files directly on the server:

root@bealers-24ways:~# su - www-data
www-data@bealers-24ways:~$

www-data’s home directory is /var/www so we should be able to see our magically mapped files:

www-data@bealers-24ways:~$ ls -l
total 4
drwxr-xr-x 1 www-data www-data  306 Nov  9 10:09 24ways
drwxr-xr-x 2 root     root     4096 Nov  9 10:05 html

www-data@bealers-24ways:~$ cd 24ways/

www-data@bealers-24ways:~/24ways$ ls -l
total 1420
-rw-r--r-- 1 www-data www-data   13682 Nov  9 10:19 bealers-24ways.md
drwxr-xr-x 1 www-data www-data     714 Nov  9 10:06 code
drwxr-xr-x 1 www-data www-data     102 Nov  9 10:06 etc
-rw-r--r-- 1 www-data www-data  118152 Nov  9 10:08 it-works.png
drwxr-xr-x 1 www-data www-data     170 Nov  9 10:03 vagrant
-rwxr-xr-x 1 www-data www-data 1315849 Nov  9 10:06 wp-cli

We can also see some of our bespoke configurations:

www-data@bealers-24ways:~/24ways$ cat /etc/php5/mods-available/siftware.ini 
upload_max_filesize = 15M
log_errors = On
display_errors = On
display_startup_errors = On
error_log = /var/log/apache2/php.log
memory_limit = 1024M
date.timezone = Europe/London

www-data@bealers-24ways:~/24ways$ ls -l /etc/apache2/sites-enabled/
total 0
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 43 Nov  9 10:06 bealers-24ways.dev.conf -> /var/www/24ways/etc/bealers-24ways.dev.conf

If you want to leave the server, simply type Ctrl+D a few times and you’ll be back where you started.

www-data@bealers-24ways:~/24ways$ logout
root@bealers-24ways:~# logout
vagrant@bealers-24ways:~$ logout
Connection to 127.0.0.1 closed.
$ 

You can now halt the machine:

$ vagrant halt
==> www: Attempting graceful shutdown of VM...
==> www: Removing hosts

Bonus level

The example I’ve provided isn’t very realistic. In the real world I’d expect the Vagrant file and provisioner to be included with the project and for it not to create the directory structure, which should already exist in your project. The same goes for the Apache VirtualHost file. You’ll also probably have a default SQL script to populate the database.

As you work with Vagrant you might start to find bash provisioning to be quite limiting, especially if you are working on larger projects which use more than one server. In that case I would suggest you take a look at Ansible, Puppet or Chef. We use Ansible because we like YAML but they all do the same sort of thing. The main benefit is being able to use the same Vagrant provisioning scripts to also provision test, staging and production environments using your build workflows.

Having to supply a password so the hosts file can be updated gets annoying very quicky so you can give Vagrant sudo rights:

$ sudo visudo

Add these lines to the bottom (Shift+G then i then Ctrl+V then Esc then :wq)

Cmnd_Alias VAGRANT_HOSTS_ADD = /bin/sh -c echo ""*"" >> /etc/hosts
Cmnd_Alias VAGRANT_HOSTS_REMOVE = /usr/bin/sed -i -e /*/ d /etc/hosts
%staff ALL=(root) NOPASSWD: VAGRANT_HOSTS_ADD, VAGRANT_HOSTS_REMOVE

Vagrant caches the operating system images that you download but it’ll download the installed software packages every time. You can get around this by using a plugin like vagrant-cachier or, if you’re really keen, maintain local Apt repositories (or whatever the equivalent is for your server architecture).

At some point you might start getting a large number of virtual machines running on your poor hardware all at the same time, especially if you’re switching between projects a lot and each of those projects use lots of servers. We’re just getting to that stage now, so are considering a medium-term move to a containerised option like Docker, which seems to be maturing now.

If you are keen not to use any command line tools whatsoever and you’re on OS X then you could check out Vagrant Manager as it looks quite shiny.

Finally, there are a huge amount of resources to give you pre-built Vagrant machines from the likes of VVV for Wordpress, something similar for Perch, PuPHPet for generating various configurations, and a long list of pre-built operating systems at VagrantBox.es.

Wrapping up

Hopefully you can now see why it might be worthwhile to add Vagrant to your development workflow. Whether you’re an agency drafting in freelancers or a one-person band running lots of sites on your laptop using MAMP or something similar.

Vagrant makes it easy to launch exact copies of the same machine in a repeatable and version controlled way. The learning curve isn’t too steep and, once configured, you can forget about it and focus on getting your work done.",2014,Darren Beale,darrenbeale,2014-12-05T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2014/what-is-vagrant-and-why-should-i-care/,process
29,What It Takes to Build a Website,"In 1994 we lost Kurt Cobain and got the world wide web as a weird consolation prize. In the years that followed, if you’d asked me if I knew how to build a website I’d have said yes, I know HTML, so I know how to build a website. If you’d then asked me what it takes to build a website, I’d have had to admit that HTML would hardly feature.

Among the design nerdery and dev geekery it’s easy to think that the nuts and bolts of building a page just need to be multiplied up and Ta-da! There’s your website. That can certainly be true with weekend projects and hackery for fun. It works for throwing something together on GitHub or experimenting with ideas on your personal site. But what about working professionally on client projects?

The web is important, so we need to build it right.

It’s 2015 – your job involves people paying you money for building websites. What does it take to build a website and to do it right? What practices should we adopt to make really great, successful and professional web projects in 2015? I put that question to some friends and 24 ways authors to see what they thought.

Getting the tech right

Inevitably, it all starts with the technology. We work in a technical medium, after all. From Notepad and WinFTP through to continuous integration and deployment – how do you build sites?

Create a stable development environment

There’s little more likely to send a web developer into a wild panic and a client into a wild rage than making a new site live and things just not working. That’s why it’s important to have realistic development and staging environments that mimic the live server as closely as possible.

Are you in the habit of developing new sites right on the client’s server? Or maybe in a subfolder on your local machine? It’s time to reconsider.

Charlie Perrins writes:


	Don’t work on a live server – this feels like one of those gear-changing moments for a developer’s growth. Build something that works just as well locally on your own machine as it does on a live server, and capture the differences in the code between the local and live version in a single config file. Ultimately, if you can get all the differences between environments down to a config level then you’ll be in a really good position to automate the deployment process at some point in the future.


Anything that creates a significant difference between the development and the live environments has the potential to cause problems you won’t know about until the site goes live – and at that point the problems are very public and very embarrassing, not to mention unprofessional.

A reasonable solution is to use a tool like MAMP PRO which enables you to set up an individual local website for each project you work on. Importantly, individual sites give you both consistency of paths between development and live, but also the ability to configure server options (like PHP versions and configuration, for example) to match the live site.

Better yet is to use a virtual machine, managed with a tool such as Vagrant. If you’re interested in learning more about that, we have an article on that subject later in the series.

Use source control

Trent Walton writes:


	We use source control, and it’s become the centerpiece for how we handle collaboration, enhancements, and issues. It drives our process.


I’m hoping by now that you’re either using source control for all your work, or feeling a nagging guilt that you should be. Be it Git, Mercurial, Subversion (name your poison), a revision control system enables you to keep track of changes, revert anything that breaks, and keep rolling backups of your project.

The benefits only start there, and Charlie Perrins recommends using source control “not just as a personal backup of your code, but as a way to play nicely with other developers.“

Noting the benefits when collaborating with other developers, he adds:


	Graduating from being the sole architect of your codebase to contributing to a shared codebase is a huge leap for a developer. Perhaps a practical way for people who tend to work on their own to do that would be to submit a pull request or a patch to an open source project or plugin.”


Richard Rutter of Clearleft sees clear advantages for the client, too. He recommends using source control “preferably in some sort of collaborative environment that you can open up or hand over to the client” – a feature found with hosted services such as GitHub.

If you’d like to hone your Git skills, Emma Jane Westby wrote Git for Grown-ups in last year’s 24 ways.

Don’t repeat, automate!

Tim Kadlec is a big proponent of automating your build process:


	I’ve been hammering that home to every client I’ve had this year. It’s amazing how many companies don’t really have a formal build/deployment process in place. So many issues on the web (performance, accessibility, etc.) can be greatly improved just by having a layer of automation involved.

	For example, graphic editing software spits out ridiculously bloated images. Very frequently, that’s what ends up getting put on a site. If you have a build process, you can have the compression automated and start seeing immediate gains for no effort. On a recent project, they were able to shave around 1.5MB from their site weight simply by automating compression.


Once you have your code in source control, some of that automation can be made easier. Brian Suda writes:


	We have a few bash scripts that run on git commit: they compile the less, jslint and remove white-space, basically the 3 Cs, Compress, Concatenate, Combine. This is now part of our workflow without even realising it.


One great way to get started with a build process is to use a tool like Grunt, and a great way to get started with Grunt is to read Chris Coyier’s Grunt for People Who Think Things Like Grunt are Weird and Hard.

Tim reinforces:


	Issues like [image compression]  —  or simple accessibility issues like alt tags on images  —  should never be able to hit a live server. If you can detect it, you can automate it. And if you can automate it, you can free up time for designers and developers to focus on more challenging — and interesting — problems.


A clear call to arms to tighten up and formalise development and deployment practices. The less that has to be done manually or is susceptible to change, the less that can go wrong when a site is built and deployed. Any procedures that are automated are no longer dependant on a single person’s knowledge, making it easier to build your team or just cope when someone important is out of the office or leaves.

If you’re interested in kicking the FTP habit and automating your site deployments, we have an article later in the series just for you.

Build systems, not sites

One big theme arising this year was that of building websites as systems, not as individual pages.

Brad Frost:


	For me, teams making websites in 2015 shouldn’t be working on just-another-redesign redesign. People are realizing that in order to make stable, future-friendly, scalable, extensible web experiences they’re going to need to think more systematically. That means crafting deliberate and thoughtful design systems. That means establishing front-end style guides. That means killing the out-dated, siloed, assembly-line waterfall process and getting cross-disciplinary teams working together in meaningful ways. That means treating development as design. That means treating performance as design. That means taking the time out of the day to establish the big picture, rather than aimlessly crawling along quarter by quarter.


Designer and developer Jina Bolton also advocates the use of style guides, and recommends making the guide a project deliverable:


	Consider adding on a style guide/UI library to your project as a deliverable for maintainability and thinking through all UI elements and components.


Val Head agrees: “build and maintain a style guide for each project” she wrote. On the subject of approaching a redesign, she added:


	A UI inventory goes a long way to helping get your head around what a design system needs in the early stages of a redesign project.


So what about that old chestnut, responsive web design? Should we be making sites responsive by default? How about mobile first?

Richard Rutter:


	Think mobile first unless you have a very good reason not to. Remember to take the client with you on this principle, otherwise it won’t work as a convincing piece of design.


Trent Walton adds:


	The more you can test and sort of skew your perception for what is typical on the web, the better. 4k displays hooked up to 100Mbps connections can make one extremely unsympathetic.


The value of testing with real devices is something Ruth John appreciates. She wrote:


	I still have my own small device lab at home, even though I work permanently for a well-established company (which has a LOT of devices at its disposal) – it just means I can get a good overview of how things are looking during development.


And speaking of systems, Mark Norman Francis recommends the use of measuring tools to aid the design process; “[U]se analytics and make decisions from actual data” he suggests, rather than relying totally on intuition.

Tim Kadlec adds a word on performance planning:


	I think having a performance budget in place should now be a given on any project. We’ve proven pretty conclusively through a hundred and one case studies that performance matters. And over the last year or so, we’ve really seen a lot of great tools emerge to help track and enforce performance budgets. There’s not really a good excuse for not using one any more.


It’s clear that in the four years since Ethan Marcotte’s Responsive Web Design article the diversity of screen sizes, network connection speeds and input methods has only increased. New web projects should presume visitors will be using anything from a watch up to a big screen desktop display, and from being offline, through to GPRS, 3G and fast broadband.

Will it take more time to design and build for those constraints? Yes, it most likely will. If Internet Explorer is brave enough to ask to be your default browser, you can be brave enough to tell your client they need to build responsively.

Working collaboratively

A big part of delivering a successful website project is how we work together, both as a design team and a wider project team with the client.

Val Head recommends an open line of communication:


	Keep conversations going. With clients, with teammates. Talking is so important with the way we work now. A good team conversation place, like Slack, is slowly becoming invaluable for me too.


Ruth John agrees:


	We’ve recently opened up our lines of communication by using Slack. It has transformed the way we work. We’re easily more productive and collaborative on projects, as well as making it a lot easier for us all to work remotely (including freelancers).


She goes on to point out how tools can be combined to ease team communication without adding further complications:


	We have a private GitHub organisation (which everyone who works with us is granted access to), which not only holds all our project code but also a team wiki. This has lots of information to get you set up within the team, as well as coding guidelines and best practices and other admin info, like contact numbers/emails for the team.


Small-A agile is also the theme of the day, with Mark Norman Francis suggesting an approach of “small iterations with constant feedback around individual features, not spec-it-all-first”. He also encourages you to review as you go, at each stage of the project:


	Always reflect on what went well and what went badly, and how you can learn from that, even if not Doing Agile™. Ultimately “best practices” should come from learning lessons (both good and bad).


Richard Rutter echoes this, warning against working in isolation from the client for too long:


	Avoid big reveals. Your engagement with the client should be participatory. In business no one likes surprises.


This experience rings true for Ruth John who recommends involving real users in the feedback loop, not just the client:


	We also try and get feedback on what we’re building as soon and as often as we can with our stakeholders/clients and real users.


We should also remember that our role is to serve the client’s needs, not just bill them for whatever we can. Brian Suda adds:


	Don’t sell clients on things they don’t need. We can spout a lot of jargon and scare clients into thinking you are a god. We can do things few can now, but you can’t rip people off because they are unknowledgeable.


But do clients know what they’re getting, even when they see it? Trent Walton has an interesting take:


	We focus on prototypes over image-based comps at all costs, especially when meetings are involved. It’s much easier to assess a prototype, and too often with image-based comps, discussions devolve into how something might feel when actually live, or how a layout could change to fit a given viewport.


Val Head also likes to get work into the browser:


	Sketch design ideas with any software you like, but get to the browser as soon as possible.


Beyond your immediate team, Emma Jane Westby has advice for looking further afield:


	Invest time into building relationships within your (technical) community. You never know when you might be able to lend a hand; or benefit from someone who’s able to lend theirs.


And when things don’t go according to plan, Brian Suda has the following advice:


	If something doesn’t work out, be professional and don’t burn bridges. It will always come back to you.


The best work comes from working collaboratively, not just as a team within an agency or department, but with the client and stakeholders too. If doing your job and chucking it over the fence ever worked, it certainly doesn’t fly any more. You can work in isolation, but doing really great work requires collaboration.

The business end

When you’re building sites professionally, every team member has to think about the business aspects. Estimating time, setting billing rates, and establishing deliverables are all part of the job.

In 2008, Andrew Clarke gave us the Contract Killer sample contract we could use to establish a working agreement for a web design project. Richard Rutter agrees that contracts are still an essential part of business:


	They are there for both parties’ protection. Make sure you know what will happen if you decide you don’t want to work with the client any more (it happens) and, of course, what circumstances mean they can stop taking your services.


Having a contract is one thing, but does it adequately protect both you and the client? Emma Jane Westby adds:


	Find a good IP lawyer/legal counsel. I routinely had an IP lawyer read all of my contracts to find loopholes I wouldn’t have noticed. I didn’t always change the contract, but at least I knew what might come back to bite me.


So, you have a contract in place, and know what the project is. Brian Suda recommends keeping track of time and making sure you bill fairly for the hours the project costs you:


	If I go to a meeting and they are 15 minutes late, the billing clock has already started. They can’t expect me to be in the 1h meeting and not bill for the extra 15–30 minutes they wasted. It goes both ways too. You need to do your best to respect their deadlines and time frame – this is always hard to get right.


As ever, it’s good business to do good business. Perhaps we can at last shed the old image of web designers being snowboarding layabouts and demonstrate to clients that we care as much about conducting professional business as they do.

Time to review

It’s a lot to take in. Some of these ideas and practices will be familiar, others new and yet to be evaluated. The web moves at a fast pace, and we need to be constantly reexamining our tools, techniques and working practices. The most important thing is not to blindly adopt any and all suggestions, but to carefully look at what the benefits might be and decide how they apply to your work.

Could you benefit from more formalised development and deployment procedures? Would your design projects run more smoothly and have a longer maintainable life if you approached the solution as a componentised system rather than a series of pages? Are your teams structured in a way that enables the most fluid communication, or are there changes you could make? Are your billing procedures and business agreements serving you and your clients in the best way possible?

The new year is a good time to look at your working practices and see what can be improved, and maybe this time next year you’ll look back and think “thank goodness we don’t work like that any more”.",2014,Drew McLellan,drewmclellan,2014-12-01T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2014/what-it-takes-to-build-a-website/,business
113,What Your Turkey Can Teach You About Project Management,"The problem with project management is that everyone thinks it’s boring. Well, that’s not really the problem. The problem is that everyone thinks it’s boring but it’s still really important. Project management is what lets you deliver your art – whether that be design or development. 

In the same way, a Christmas dinner cooked by a brilliant chef with no organizational skills is disastrous – courses arrive in the wrong order, some things are cold whilst others are raw and generally it’s a trip to the ER waiting to happen. Continuing the Christmas dinner theme, here are my top tips for successful projects, wrapped up in a nice little festive analogy. Enjoy!

Tip 1: Know What You’re Aiming For

(Turkey? Ham? Both??)

The underlying cause for the failure of so many projects is mismatched expectations. Christmas dinner cannot be a success if you serve glazed ham and your guests view turkey as the essential Christmas dinner ingredient. It doesn’t matter how delicious and well executed your glazed ham is, it’s still fundamentally just not turkey. You might win one or two adventurous souls over, but the rest will go home disappointed.

Add to the mix the fact that most web design projects are nowhere near as emotive as Christmas dinner (trust me, a ham vs turkey debate will rage much longer than a fixed vs fluid debate in normal human circles) and the problem is compounded. In particular, as technologists, we forget that our ability to precisely imagine the outcome of a project, be it a website, a piece of software, or similar, is much more keenly developed than the average customer of such projects. 

So what’s the solution? Get very clear, from the very beginning, on exactly what the project is about. What are you trying to achieve? How will you measure success? Is the presence of turkey a critical success factor?

Summarize all this information in some form of document (in PM-speak, it’s called a Project Initiation Document typically). Ideally, get the people who are the real decision makers to sign their agreement to that summary in their own blood. Well, you get the picture, I suppose actual blood is not strictly necessary, but a bit of gothic music to set the tone can be useful!

Tip 2: Plan at the Right Level of Detail

Hugely detailed and useless Gantt charts are a personal bugbear of mine. For any project, you should plan at the appropriate level of detail (and in an appropriate format) for the project itself. In our Christmas dinner example, it may be perfectly fine to have a list of tasks for the preparation work, but for the intricate interplay of oven availability and cooking times, something more complex is usually due. Having cooked roast dinners for fourteen in a student house where only the top oven and two of the rings on the hob actually worked, I can attest to the need for sequence diagrams in some of these situations!

The mistake many small teams make is to end up with a project plan that is really the amalgamation of their individual todo lists. What is needed is a project plan that will:


	reflect reality
	be easy to update
	help to track progress (i.e. are we on track or not?)


A good approach is to break your project into stages (each representing something tangible) and then into deliverables (again, something tangible for each milestone, else you’ll never know if you’ve hit it or not!). 

My personal rule of thumb is that the level of granularity needed on most projects is 2-3 days – i.e. we should never be more than two to three days from a definitive milestone which will either be complete or not. The added advantage of this approach is that if find yourself off track, you can only be two to three days off track… much easier to make up than if you went weeks or even months working hard but not actually delivering what was needed!

In our Christmas dinner example, there are a number of critical milestones – a tick list of questions. Do we have all the ingredients? Check. Has the turkey been basted? Check. On the actual day, the sequencing and timing will mean more specific questions: It’s 12pm. Are the Brussels sprouts cooked to death yet? Check. (Allowing for the extra hour of boiling to go from soft and green to mushy and brown… Yeuch!) 

Tip 3: Actively Manage Risks and Issues

A risk is something that could go wrong. An issue is something that has already gone wrong. Risks and issues are where project management superstars are born. Anyone can manage things when everything is going according to plan; it’s what you do when Cousin Jim refuses to eat anything but strawberry jam sandwiches that sorts the men from the boys. 

The key with a Christmas dinner, as with any project, is to have contingency plans for the most likely and most damaging risks. These depend on your own particular situation, but some examples might be:

 
		
			RISK
			CONTINGENCY PLAN
		
		
			Cousin Jim is a picky eater.
			Have strawberry jam and sliced white bread on hand to placate.
		
		
			Prime organic turkey might not be available at Waitrose on Christmas eve.
			Shop in advance!
		
		
			You live somewhere remote that seems to lose power around Christmas on a disturbingly regular basis.
			(number of options here depending on how far you want to go…)

					Buy a backup generator.

					Invent a new cooking method using only candles.

					Stock up on “Christmas dinner in a tin”.
		
		
			Your mother in law is likely to be annoying.
			Bottle of sherry at the ready (whether it’s for you or her, you can decide!).
		
 


The point of planning in advance is so that most of your issues don’t blindside you – you can spring into action with the contingency plan immediately. This leaves you with plenty of ingenuity and ability to cope in reserve for those truly unexpected events. 

Back in your regular projects, you should have a risk management plan (developed at the beginning of the project and regularly reviewed) as well as an issue list, tracking open, in progress and closed issues. Importantly, your issue list should be separate from any kind of bug list – issues are at a project level, bugs are at a technical level.

Tip 4: Have a Project Board

A project board consists of the overall sponsor of your project (often, but not always, the guy with the cheque book) and typically a business expert and a technical expert to help advise the sponsor. The project board is the entity that is meant to make the big, critical decisions. As a project manager, your role is to prepare a recommendation, but leave the actual decision up to the board. 

Admittedly this is where our Christmas dinner analogy has to stretch the most, but if you imagine that instead of just cooking for your family you are the caterer preparing a Christmas feast for a company. In this case, you obviously want to please the diners who will be eating the food, but key decisions are likely to be taken by whoever is organizing the event. They, in turn, will involve the boss if there are really big decisions that would affect the project drastically – for instance, having to move it to January, or it exceeding the set budget by a significant amount.

Most projects suffer from not having a project board to consult for these major decisions, or from having the wrong people selected. The first ailment is eased by ensuring that you have a functioning project board, with whom you either meet regularly to update on status, or where there is a special process for convening the board if they are needed. The second problem is a little more subtle. Key questions to ask yourself are:


	Who is funding this project?
	Who has the authority to stop the project if it was the right thing to do?
	Who are the right business and technical advisors?
	Who are the folks who don’t look like they are powerful on the org chart, but in fact might scupper this project? (e.g. administrators, tech support, personal assistants…)


Tip 5: Finish Unequivocably and Well

No one is ever uncertain as to when Christmas dinner ends. Once the flaming pudding has been consumed and the cheese tray picked at, the end of the dinner is heralded by groaning and everyone collapsing in their chairs. Different households have different rituals, so you might only open your presents after Christmas dinner (unlikely if you have small children!), or you might round off the afternoon watching the Queen’s speech (in Britland, certainly) or if you live in warmer climes you might round off Christmas dinner with a swim (which was our tradition in Cape Town – after 30 mins of food settling so you didn’t get cramp, of course!). 

The problem with projects is that they are one time efforts and so nowhere near as ritualized. Unless you have been incredibly lucky, you’ve probably worked on a project where you thought you were finished but seemed unable to lose your “zombie customers” – those folks who just didn’t realise it was over and kept coming back with more and more requests. You might even have fallen prey to this yourself, believing that the website going live was the end of the project and not realising that a number of things still needed to be wrapped up.

The essence of this final tip is to inject some of that end-of-Christmas finality ritual into your projects. Find your own ritual for closing down projects – more than just sending the customer the invoice and archiving the files. Consider things like documentation, support structure handover and training to make sure that those zombies are going to the right people (hopefully not you!). 

So, to summarise:


	Make sure you start your projects well – with an agreed (written) vision of what you’re trying to achieve.
	Plan your projects at the right level of detail and in an appropriate format – never be more than a few days away from knowing for sure whether you’re on track or not.
	Plan for likely and important risks and make sure you track and resolve those you actually encounter.
	Institute a project board, made up of the people with the real power over your project.
	Create rituals for closing projects well – don’t leave anyone in doubt that the project has been delivered, or of who they should go to for further help.",2008,Meri Williams,meriwilliams,2008-12-16T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2008/what-your-turkey-can-teach-you-about-project-management/,business
176,What makes a website successful? It might not be what you expect!,"What makes some sites succeed and others fail? Put another way, when you are asked to redesign an existing website, what problems are you looking out for and where do you concentrate your efforts?

I would argue that as web designers we spend too much time looking at the wrong kind of problem.

I recently ran a free open door consultancy clinic to celebrate the launch of my new book (yes I know, two shameless plugs in one sentence). This involved various website owners volunteering their sites for review. Both myself and the audience then provided feedback.

What quickly became apparent is that the feedback being given by the audience was biased towards design and development.

Although their comments were excellent it focused almost exclusively on the quality of code, site aesthetics and usability. To address these issues in isolation is similar to treating symptoms and ignoring the underlying illness.

Cure the illness not the symptoms

Poor design, bad usability and terribly written code are symptoms of bigger problems. Often when we endeavour to address these symptoms, we meet resistance from our clients and become frustrated. This is because our clients are still struggling with fundamental concepts we take for granted.

Before we can address issues of aesthetics, usability and code, we need to tackle business objectives, calls to action and user tasks. Without dealing with these fundamental principles our clients’ website will fail.

Let me address each in turn:

Understand the business objectives

Do you ask your clients why they have a website? It feels like an obvious question. However, it is surprising how many clients do not have an answer.

Without having a clear idea of the siteʼs business objectives, the client has no way to know whether it is succeeding. This means they have no justification for further investment and that leads to quibbling over every penny.

However most importantly, without clearly defined business aims they have no standard against which to base their decisions. Everything becomes subjective and that will inevitably lead to problems.

Before we start discussing design, usability and development, we need to focus our clients on establishing concrete business objectives. This will provide a framework for decision making during the development phase.

This will not only help the client make decisions, it will also focus them on the business and away from micro managing the design.

Establish clear calls to action

Once business objectives have been set this opens up the possibility to establish clear calls to action.

I am amazed at how few website owners can name their calls to action. However, I am even more staggered at how few web designers ask about them.

Calls to action are not just limited to ecommerce sites. Whether you are asking people to sign up for a newsletter or complete a contact us form, every site should have a desired objective for users.

What is more, each page of a site should have micro calls to action that always draw users on and never leave them at a dead end.

Without clearly defined calls to action you cannot successfully design a site, structure the user experience or measure its success. They bring focus to the site and encourage the client to concentrate their efforts on helping people reach those goals.

Of course in order to know if a call to action is going to work, it is necessary to do some user testing.

Test against the right tasks

As web designers we all like to boast about being ʻuser centricʼ whatever that means! However, in reality I think many of us are paying lip service to the subject.

Sure, we ask our clients about who their users are and maybe even do some usability testing. However, usability testing is no good if we are not asking the right questions.

Again we find ourselves working on a superficial level rather than tackling the deeper issues.

Clients find it relatively easy to tell you who their target audience is. Admittedly the list they come back with is often overly long and contains a lot of edge cases. However, where they begin to struggle is articulating what these users will want to achieve on the website. They know who they want to reach. However, they cannot always tell you why those people would be interested in the site.

These user tasks are another fundamental building block for any successful website. Although it is important for a website owner to understand what their objectives are and what they want users to do, it is even more important that they understand the users objectives as well.

Again, this provides context for the decisions they are making about design, usability and functionality. Without it the site will become self serving, largely ignoring the needs of users.

User tasks help to focus the clientʼs mind on the needs of their user, rather than what they can get out of them.

So am I claiming that design, usability and code do not matter? Well the shocking truth is that to some extent I am!

The shocking truth

Whether we like it or not there is significant evidence that you can create a successful website with bad design, terrible code and without ever running a usability test session.

You only need to look at the design of Craigslist or the code of Amazon to see that this is true.

However, I do not believe it is possible to build a successful website without business objectives, calls to action and a clear idea of user tasks.

Do not misunderstand me. I do believe design, usability and code matters. I just believe that they only matter if the fundamentals are already in place. These things improve a solid foundation but are no use in their own right.

As web designers it is our responsibility to ensure fundamental questions are being asked, before we start exploring other issues. If we do not, our websites will look great, be well coded and have gone through endless usability tests, however it will not be truly successful.",2009,Paul Boag,paulboag,2009-12-04T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2009/what-makes-a-website-successful/,business
306,What next for CSS Grid Layout?,"In 2012 I wrote an article for 24 ways detailing a new CSS Specification that had caught my eye, at the time with an implementation only in Internet Explorer. What I didn’t realise at the time was that CSS Grid Layout was to become a theme on which I would base the next four years of research, experimentation, writing and speaking. 
As I write this article in December 2016, we are looking forward to CSS Grid Layout being shipped in Chrome and Firefox. What will ship early next year in those browsers is expanded and improved from the early implementation I explored in 2012. Over the last four years the spec has been developed as part of the CSS Working Group process, and has had input from browser engineers, specification writers and web developers. Use cases have been discussed, and features added.
The CSS Grid Layout specification is now a Candidate Recommendation. This status means the spec is to all intents and purposes, finished. The discussions now happening are on fine implementation details, and not new feature ideas. It makes sense to draw a line under a specification in order that browser vendors can ship complete, interoperable implementations. That approach is good for all of us, it makes development far easier if we know that a browser supports all of the features of a specification, rather than working out which bits are supported. However it doesn’t mean that works stops here, and that new use cases and features can’t be proposed for future levels of Grid Layout. Therefore, in this article I’m going to take a look at some of the things I think grid layout could do in the future. I would love for these thoughts to prompt you to think about how Grid - or any CSS specification - could better suit the use cases you have.
Subgrid - the missing feature of Level 1
The implementation of CSS Grid Layout in Chrome, Firefox and Webkit is comparable and very feature complete. There is however one standout feature that has not been implemented in any browser as yet - subgrid. Once you set the value of the display property to grid, any direct children of that element become grid items. This is similar to the way that flexbox behaves, set display: flex and all direct children become flex items. The behaviour does not apply to children of those items. You can nest grids, just as you can nest flex containers, but the child grids have no relationship to the parent.

Nesting Grids by Rachel Andrew (@rachelandrew) on CodePen.
The subgrid behaviour would enable the grid defined on the parent to be used by the children. I feel this would be most useful when working with a multiple column flexible grid - for example a typical 12 column grid. I could define a grid on a wrapper, then position UI elements on that grid - from the major structural elements of my page down through the child elements to a form where I wanted the field to line up with items above.
The specification contained an initial description of subgrid, with a value of subgrid for grid-template-columns and grid-template-rows, you can read about this in the August 2015 Working Draft. This version of the specification would have meant you could declare a subgrid in one dimension only, and create a different set of tracks in the other.
In an attempt to get some implementation of subgrid, a revised specification was proposed earlier this year. This gives a single subgrid value of the display property. As we now cannot specify a subgrid on rows OR columns this limits us to have a subgrid that works in two dimensions. At this point neither version has been implemented by anyone, and subgrids are marked as “at risk” in the Level 1 Candidate Recommendation. With regard to ‘at-risk’ this is explained as follows:

“‘At-risk’ is a W3C Process term-of-art, and does not necessarily imply that the feature is in danger of being dropped or delayed. It means that the WG believes the feature may have difficulty being interoperably implemented in a timely manner, and marking it as such allows the WG to drop the feature if necessary when transitioning to the Proposed Rec stage, without having to publish a new Candidate Rec without the feature first.” 

If we lose subgrid from Level 1, as it looks likely that we will, this does give us a chance to further discuss and iterate on that feature. My current thoughts are that I’m not completely happy about subgrids being tied to both dimensions and feel that a return to the earlier version, or something like it, would be preferable. 
Further reading about subgrid

My post from 2015 detailing why I feel subgrid is important
My post based on the revised specification
Eric Meyer’s thoughts on subgrid
Write-up of a discussion from Igalia who work on the Blink and Webkit browser implementations

Styling cells, tracks and areas
Having defined a grid with CSS Grid Layout you can place child elements into that grid, however what you can’t do is style the grid tracks or cells. Grid doesn’t even go as far as multiple column layout, which has the column-rule properties.
In order to set a background colour on a grid cell at the moment you would have to add an empty HTML element or insert some generated content as in the below example. I’m using a 1 pixel grid gap to fake lines between grid cells, and empty div elements, and some generated content to colour those cells.

Faked backgrounds and borders by Rachel Andrew (@rachelandrew) on CodePen.
I think it would be a nice addition to Grid Layout to be able to directly add backgrounds and borders to cells, tracks and areas. There is an Issue raised in the CSS WG Drafts repository for Decorative Grid Cell pseudo-elements, if you want to add thoughts to that.
More control over auto placement
If you haven’t explicitly placed the direct children of your grid element they will be laid out according to the grid auto placement rules. You can see in this example how we have created a grid and the items are placing themselves into cells on that grid.

Items auto-place on a defined grid by Rachel Andrew (@rachelandrew) on CodePen.
The auto-placement algorithm is very cool. We can position some items, leaving others to auto-place; we can set items to span more than one track; we can use the grid-auto-flow property with a value of dense to backfill gaps in our grid.

Websafe colors meet CSS Grid (auto-placement demo) by Rachel Andrew (@rachelandrew) on CodePen.
I think however this could be taken further. In this issue posted to my CSS Grid AMA on GitHub, the question is raised as to whether it would be possible to ask grid to place items on the next available line of a certain name. This would allow you to skip tracks in the grid when using auto-placement, an issue that has also been raised by Emil Björklund in this post to the www-style list prior to spec discussion moving to Github. I think there are probably similar issues, if you can think of one add a comment here.
Creating non-rectangular grid areas
A grid area is a collection of grid cells, defined by setting the start and end lines for columns and rows or by creating the area in the value of the grid-template-areas property as shown below. Those areas however must be rectangular - you can’t create an L-shaped or otherwise non-regular shape.

Grid Areas by Rachel Andrew (@rachelandrew) on CodePen.

Perhaps in the future we could define an L-shape or other non-rectangular area into which content could flow, as in the below currently invalid code where a quote is embedded into an L-shaped content area.
.wrapper {
  display: grid;
  grid-template-areas:
      ""sidebar header  header""
      ""sidebar content quote""
      ""sidebar content content"";
}
Flowing content through grid cells or areas
Some uses cases I have seen perhaps are not best solved by grid layout at all, but would involve grid working alongside other CSS specifications. As I detail in this post, there are a class of problems that I believe could be solved with the CSS Regions specification, or a revised version of that spec.
Being able to create a grid layout, then flow content through the areas could be very useful. Jen Simmons presented to the CSS Working Group at the Lisbon meeting a suggestion as to how this might work.
In a post from earlier this year I looked at a collection of ideas from specifications that include Grid, Regions and Exclusions. These working notes from my own explorations might prompt ideas of your own.
Solving the keyboard/layout disconnect
One issue that grid, and flexbox to a lesser extent, raises is that it is very easy to end up with a layout that is disconnected from the underlying markup. This raises problems for people navigating using the keyboard as when tabbing around the document you find yourself jumping to unexpected places. The problem is explained by Léonie Watson with reference to flexbox in Flexbox and the keyboard navigation disconnect.
The grid layout specification currently warns against creating such a disconnect, however I think it will take careful work by web developers in order to prevent this. It’s also not always as straightforward as it seems. In some cases you want the logical order to follow the source, and others it would make more sense to follow the visual. People are thinking about this issue, as you can read in this mailing list discussion.
Bringing your ideas to the future of Grid Layout
When I’m not getting excited about new CSS features, my day job involves working on a software product - the CMS that is serving this very website, Perch. When we launched Perch there were many use cases that we had never thought of, despite having a good idea of what might be needed in a CMS and thinking through lots of use cases. The additional use cases brought to our attention by our customers and potential customers informed the development of the product from launch. The same will be true for Grid Layout.
As a “product” grid has been well thought through by many people. Yet however hard we try there will be use cases we just didn’t think of. You may well have one in mind right now. That’s ok, because as with any CSS specification, once Level One of grid  is complete, work can begin on Level Two. The feature set of Level Two will be informed by the use cases that emerge as people get to grips with what we have now.
This is where you get to contribute to the future of layout on the web. When you hit up against the things you cannot do, don’t just mutter about how the CSS Working Group don’t listen to regular developers and code around the problem. Instead, take a few minutes and write up your use case. Post it to your blog, to Medium, create a CodePen and go to the CSS Working Group GitHub specs repository and post an issue there. Write some pseudo-code, draw a picture, just make sure that the use case is described in enough detail that someone can see what problem you want grid to solve. It may be that - as with any software development - your use case can’t be solved in exactly the way you suggest. However once we have a use case, collected with other use cases, methods of addressing that class of problems can be investigated. 
I opened this article by explaining I’d written about grid layout four years ago, and how we’re only now at a point where we will have Grid Layout available in the majority of browsers. Specification development, and implementation into browsers takes time. This is actually a good thing, as it’s impossible to take back CSS once it is out there and being used by production websites. We want CSS in the wild to be well thought through and that takes time. So don’t feel that because you don’t see your use case added to a spec immediately it has been ignored. Do your future self a favour and write down your frustrations or thoughts, and we can all make sure that the web platform serves the use cases we’re dealing with now and in the future.",2016,Rachel Andrew,rachelandrew,2016-12-12T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2016/what-next-for-css-grid-layout/,code
299,What the Heck Is Inclusive Design?,"Naming things is hard. And I don’t just mean CSS class names and JSON properties. Finding the right term for what we do with the time we spend awake and out of bed turns out to be really hard too.
I’ve variously gone by “front-end developer”, “user experience designer”, and “accessibility engineer”, all clumsy and incomplete terms for labeling what I do as an… erm… see, there’s the problem again.
It’s tempting to give up entirely on trying to find the right words for things, but this risks summarily dispensing with thousands of years spent trying to qualify the world around us. So here we are again.
Recently, I’ve been using the term “inclusive design” and calling myself an “inclusive designer” a lot. I’m not sure where I first heard it or who came up with it, but the terminology feels like a good fit for the kind of stuff I care to do when I’m not at a pub or asleep.
This article is about what I think “inclusive design” means and why I think you might like it as an idea.
Isn’t ‘inclusive design’ just ‘accessibility’ by another name?
No, I don’t think so. But that’s not to say the two concepts aren’t related. Note the ‘design’ part in ‘inclusive design’ — that’s not just there by accident. Inclusive design describes a design activity; a way of designing things.
This sets it apart from accessibility — or at least our expectations of what ‘accessibility’ entails. Despite every single accessibility expert I know (and I know a lot) recommending that accessibility should be integrated into design process, it is rarely ever done. Instead, it is relegated to an afterthought, limiting its effect.
The term ‘accessibility’ therefore lacks the power to connote design process. It’s not that we haven’t tried to salvage the term, but it’s beginning to look like a lost cause. So maybe let’s use a new term, because new things take new names. People get that.
The ‘access’ part of accessibility is also problematic. Before we get ahead of ourselves, I don’t mean access is a problem — access is good, and the more accessible something is  the better. I mean it’s not enough by itself.
Imagine a website filled with poorly written and lackadaisically organized information, including a bunch of convoluted and confusing functionality. To make this site accessible is to ensure no barriers prevent people from accessing the content. 
But that doesn’t make the content any better. It just means more people get to suffer it. 
Whoopdidoo.
Access is certainly a prerequisite of inclusion, but accessibility compliance doesn’t get you all the way there. It’s possible to check all the boxes but still be left with an unusable  interface. And unusable interfaces are necessarily inaccessible ones. Sure, you can take an unusable interface and make it accessibility compliant, but that only placates stakeholders’ lawyers, not users. Users get little value from it.
So where have we got to? Access is important, but inclusion is bigger than access. Inclusive design means making something valuable, not just accessible, to as many people as we can.
So inclusive design is kind of accessibility + UX?
Closer, but there are some problems with this definition.
UX is, you will have already noted, a broad term encompassing activities ranging from conducting research studies to optimizing the perceived affordance of interface elements. But overall, what I take from UX is that it’s the pursuit of making interfaces  understandable.
As it happens, WCAG 2.0 already contains an ‘Understandable’ principle covering provisions such as readability, predictability and feedback. So you might say accessibility — at least as described by WCAG — already covers UX.
Unfortunately, the criteria are limited, plus some really important stuff (like readability) is relegated to the AAA level; essentially “bonus points if you get the time (you won’t).”
So better to let UX folks take care of this kind of thing. It’s what they do. Except, therein lies a danger. UX professionals don’t tend to be well versed in accessibility, so their ‘solutions’ don’t tend to work for that many people. My friend Billy Gregory coined the term SUX, or “Some UX”: if it doesn’t work for different users, it’s only doing part of the job it should be. 
SUX won’t do, but it’s not just a disability issue. All sorts of user circumstances go unchecked when you’re shooting straight for what people like, and bypassing what people need: device type, device settings, network quality, location, native language, and available time to name just a few.
In short, inclusive design means designing things for people who aren’t you, in your situation. In my experience, mainstream UX isn’t very good at that. By bolting accessibility onto mainstream UX we labor under the misapprehension that most people have a ‘normal’ experience, a few people are exceptions, and that all of the exceptions pertain to disability directly.
So inclusive design isn’t really about disability?
It is about disability, but not in the same way as accessibility. Accessibility (as it is typically understood, anyway) aims to make sure things work for people with clinically recognized disabilities. Inclusive design aims to make sure things work for people, not forgetting those with clinically recognized disabilities. A subtle, but not so subtle, difference.
Let’s go back to discussing readability, because that’s a good example. Now: everyone benefits from readable text; text with concise sentences and widely-understood words. It certainly helps people with cognitive impairments, but it doesn’t hinder folks who have less trouble with comprehension. In fact, they’ll more than likely be thankful for the time saved and the clarity. Readable text covers the whole gamut. It’s — you’ve got it — inclusive.
Legibility is another one. A clear, well-balanced typeface makes the reading experience less uncomfortable and frustrating for all concerned, including those who have various forms of visual dyslexia. Again, everyone’s happy — so why even contemplate a squiggly, sketchy typeface? Leave well alone.
Contrast too. No one benefits from low contrast; everyone benefits from high contrast. Simple. There’s no more work involved, it just entails better decision making. And that’s what design is really: decision making.
How about zoom support? If you let your users pinch zoom on their phones they can compensate for poor eyesight, but they can also increase the touch area of controls, inspect detail in images, and compose better screen shots. Unobtrusively supporting options like zoom makes interfaces much more inclusive at very little cost.
And when it comes to the underlying HTML code, you’re in luck: it has already been designed, from the outset, to be inclusive. HTML is a toolkit for inclusion. Using the right elements for the job doesn’t just mean the few who use screen readers benefit, but keyboard accessibility comes out-of-the-box, you can defer to browser behavior rather than writing additional scripts, the code is easier to read and maintain, and editors can create content that is effortlessly presentable. 
Wait… are you talking about universal design?
Hmmm. Yes, I guess some folks might think of “universal design” and “inclusive design” as synonymous. I just really don’t like the term universal in this context. 
The thing is, it gives the impression that you should be designing for absolutely everyone in the universe. Though few would adopt a literal interpretation of “universal” in this context, there are enough developers who would deliberately misconstrue the term and decry universal design as an impossible task. I’ve actually had people push back by saying, “what, so I’ve got to make it work for people who are allergic to computers? What about people in comas?”
For everyone’s sake, I think the term ‘inclusive’ is less misleading. Of course you can’t make things that everybody can use — it’s okay, that’s not the aim. But with everything that’s possible with web technologies, there’s really no need to exclude people in the vast numbers that we usually are. 
Accessibility can never be perfect, but by thinking inclusively from planning, through prototyping to production, you can cast a much wider net. That means more and happier users at very little if any more effort.
If you like, inclusive design is the means and accessibility is the end — it’s just that you get a lot more than just accessibility along the way.
Conclusion
That’s inclusive design. Or at least, that’s a definition for a thing I think is a good idea which I identify as inclusive design. I’ll leave you with a few tips.
Involve code early
Web interfaces are made of code. If you’re not working with code, you’re not working on the interface. That’s not to say there’s anything wrong with sketching or paper prototyping  — in fact, I recommend paper prototyping in my book on inclusive design. Just work with code as soon as you can, and think about code even before that. Maintain a pattern library of coded solutions and omit any solutions that don’t adhere to basic accessibility guidelines.
Respect conventions
Your content should be fresh, inventive, radical. Your interface shouldn’t. Adopt accepted conventions in the appearance, placement and coding of interface elements. Users aren’t there to experience interface design; they’re there to use an interface. In other words: stop showing off (unless, of course, the brief is to experiment with new paradigms in interface design, for an audience of interface design researchers).
Don’t be exact
“Perfection is the enemy of good”. But the pursuit of perfection isn’t just to be avoided because nothing ever gets finished. Exacting design also makes things inflexible and brittle. If your design depends on elements retaining precise coordinates, they’ll break easily when your users start adjusting font settings or zooming. Choose not to position elements exactly or give them fixed, “magic number” dimensions. Make less decisions in the interface so your users can make more decisions for it.
Enforce simplicity
The virtue of simplicity is difficult to overestimate. The simpler an interface is, the easier it is to use for all kinds of users. Simpler interfaces require less code to make too, so there’s an obvious performance advantage. There are many design decisions that require user research, but keeping things simple is always the right thing to do. Not simplified or simple-seeming or simplistic, but simple. 
Do a little and do it well, for as many people as you can.",2016,Heydon Pickering,heydonpickering,2016-12-07T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2016/what-the-heck-is-inclusive-design/,process
60,What’s Ahead for Your Data in 2016?,"Who owns your data? Who decides what can you do with it? Where can you store it? What guarantee do you have over your data’s privacy? Where can you publish your work? Can you adapt software to accommodate your disability? Is your tiny agency subject to corporate regulation? Does another country have rights over your intellectual property?
If you aren’t the kind of person who is interested in international politics, I hate to break it to you: in 2016 the legal foundations which underpin our work on the web are being revisited in not one but three major international political agreements, and every single one of those questions is up for grabs. These agreements – the draft EU Data Protection Regulation (EUDPR), the Trans-Pacific Partnership (TPP), and the draft Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership (TTIP) – stand poised to have a major impact on your data, your workflows, and your digital rights. While some proposed changes could protect the open web for the future, other provisions would set the internet back several decades.
In this article we will review the issues you need to be aware of as a digital professional. While each of these agreements covers dozens of topics ranging from climate change to food safety, we will focus solely on the aspects which pertain to the work we do on the web.
The Trans-Pacific Partnership
The Trans-Pacific Partnership (TPP) is a free trade agreement between the US, Japan, Malaysia, Vietnam, Singapore, Brunei, Australia, New Zealand, Canada, Mexico, Chile and Peru – a bloc comprising 40% of the world’s economy. The agreement is expected to be signed by all parties, and thereby to come into effect, in 2016. This agreement is ostensibly about the bloc and its members working together for their common interests. However, the latest draft text of the TPP, which was formulated entirely in secret, has only been made publicly available on a Medium blog published by the U.S. Trade Representative which features a patriotic banner at the top proclaiming “TPP: Made in America.” The message sent about who holds the balance of power in this agreement, and whose interests it will benefit, is clear.
By far the most controversial area of the TPP has centred around the provisions on intellectual property. These include copyright terms of up to 120 years, mandatory takedowns of allegedly infringing content in response to just one complaint regardless of that complaint’s validity, heavy and disproportionate penalties for alleged violations, and – most frightening of all – government seizures of equipment allegedly used for copyright violations. All of these provisions have been raised without regard for the fact that a trade agreement is not the appropriate venue to negotiate intellectual property law.
Other draft TPP provisions would restrict the digital rights of people with disabilities by banning the workarounds they use every day. These include no exemptions for the adaptations of copywritten works for use in accessible technology (such as text-to-speech in ebook readers), a ban on circumventing DRM or digital locks in order to convert a file to an accessible format, and requiring the takedown of adapted works, such as a video with added subtitles, even if that adaptation would normally have fallen under the definition of fair use.
The e-commerce provisions would prohibit data localisation, the practice of requiring data to be physically stored on servers within a country’s borders. Data localisation is growing in popularity following the Snowden revelations, and some of your own personal data may have been recently “localised” in response to the Safe Harbor verdict. Prohibiting data localisation through the TPP would address the symptom but not the cause.
The Electronic Frontier Foundation has published an excellent summary of the digital rights issues raised by the agreement along with suggested actions American readers can take to speak out.
Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership
TTIP stands for the Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership, a draft free trade agreement between the United States and the EU. The plan has been hugely controversial and divisive, and the internet and digital provisions of the draft form just a small part of that contention.
The most striking digital provision of TTIP is an attempt to circumvent and override European data protection law. As EDRI, a European digital rights organisation, noted:

“the US proposal would authorise the transfer of EU citizens’ personal data to any country, trumping the EU data protection framework, which ensures that this data can only be transferred in clearly defined circumstances. For years, the US has been trying to bypass the default requirement for storage of personal data in the EU. It is therefore not surprising to see such a proposal being {introduced} in the context of the trade negotiations.”

This draft provision was written before the Safe Harbor data protection agreement between the EU and US was invalidated by the Court of Justice of the European Union. In other words, there is no longer any protective agreement in place, and our data is as vulnerable as this political situation. However, data protection is a matter of its own law, the acting Data Protection Directive and the draft EU Data Protection Reform. A trade agreement, be it the TTIP or the TPP, is not the appropriate place to revamp a law on data protection.
Other digital law issues raised by TTIP include the possibility of renegotiating standards on encryption (which in practice means lowering them) and renegotiating intellectual property rights such as copyright. The spectre of net neutrality has even put in an appearance, with an attempt to introduce rules on access to the internet itself being introduced as provisions.
TTIP is still under discussion, and this month the EU trade representative said that “we agreed to further intensify our work during 2016 to help negotiations move forward rapidly.” This has been cleverly worded: this means the agreement has little chance of being passed or coming into effect in 2016, which buys civil society more precious time to speak out.
The EU Data Protection Regulation
On 15 December 2015 the European Commission announced their agreement on the text of the draft General Data Protection Regulation. This law will replace its predecessor, the EU Data Protection Regulation of 1995, which has done a remarkable job of protecting data privacy across the continent throughout two decades of constant internet evolution.
The goal of the reform process has been to return power over data, and its uses, to citizens. Users will have more control over what data is captured about them, how it is used, how it is retained, and how it can be deleted. Businesses and digital professionals, in turn, will have to restructure their relationships with client and customer data. Compliance obligations will increase, and difficult choices will have to be made. However, this time should be seen as an opportunity to rethink our relationship with data. After Snowden, Schrems, and Safe Harbor, it is clear that we cannot go back to the way things were before. In an era of where every one of our heartbeats is recorded on a wearable device and uploaded to a surveilled data centre in another country, the need for reform has never been more acute.
While texts of the draft GDPR are available, there is not enough mulled wine in the world that will help you get through them. Instead, the law firm Fieldfisher Waterhouse has produced this helpful infographic which will give you a good idea of the changes we can expect to see (view full size):

The most surprising outcome announced on 15 December was the new regulation’s teeth. Under the new law, companies that fail to heed the updated data protection rules will face fines of up to 4% of their global turnover. Additionally, the law expands the liability for data protection to both the controller (the company hosting the data) and the data processor (the company using the data). The new law will also introduce a one-stop shop for resolving concerns over data misuse. Companies will no longer be able to headquarter their European operations in countries which are perceived to have relatively light-touch data protection enforcement (that means you, Ireland) as a means of automatically rejecting any complaints filed by citizens outside that country.
For digital professionals, the most immediate concern is analytics. In fact, I am going to make a prediction: in 2016 we will begin to see the same misguided war on analytics that we saw on cookies. By increasing the legal liabilities for both data processors and controllers – in other words, the company providing the analytics as well as the site administrator studying them – the new regulation risks creating disproportionate burdens as well as the same “guilt by association” risks we saw in 2012. There have already been statements made by some within the privacy community that analytics are tracking, and tracking is surveillance, therefore analytics are evil. Yet “just don’t use analytics,” as was suggested by one advocate, is simply not an option. European regulators should consult with the web community to gain a clear understanding of why analytics are vital to everyday site administrators, and must find a happy medium that protects users’ data without criminalising every website by default. No one wants a repeat of the crisis of consent, as well as the scaremongering, caused by the cookie law.
Assuming the text is adopted in 2016, the new EU Data Protection Regulation would not come into effect until 2018. We have a considerable challenge ahead, but we also have plenty of time to get it right.",2015,Heather Burns,heatherburns,2015-12-21T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2015/whats-ahead-for-your-data-in-2016/,business
1,Why Bother with Accessibility?,"Web accessibility (known in other fields as inclusive design or universal design) is the degree to which a website is available to as many people as possible. Accessibility is most often used to describe how people with disabilities can access the web.

How we approach accessibility

In the web community, there’s a surprisingly inconsistent approach to accessibility. There are some who are endlessly dedicated to accessible web design, and there are some who believe it so intrinsic to the web that it shouldn’t be considered a separate topic. Still, of those who are familiar with accessibility, there’s an overwhelming number of designers, developers, clients and bosses who just aren’t that bothered.

Over the last few months I’ve spoken to a lot of people about accessibility, and I’ve heard the same reasons to ignore it over and over again. Let’s take a look at the most common excuses.

Excuse 1: “People with disabilities don’t really use the web”

Accessibility will make your site available to more people — the inclusion case

In the same way that the accessibility of a building isn’t just about access for wheelchair users, web accessibility isn’t just about blind users and screen readers. We can affect positively the lives of many people by making their access to the web easier.

There are four main types of disability that affect use of the web:


	Visual
	Blindness, low vision and colour-blindness
	Auditory
	Profoundly deaf and hard of hearing
	Motor
	The inability to use a mouse, slow response time, limited fine motor control
	Cognitive
	Learning difficulties, distractibility, the inability to focus on large amounts of information


None of these disabilities are completely black and white

Examining deafness, it’s clear from the medical scale that there are many grey areas between full hearing and total deafness:


	mild
	moderate
	moderately severe
	severe
	profound
	totally deaf


For eyesight, and brain conditions that affect what users see, there is a huge range of conditions and challenges:


	astigmatism
	colour blindness
	akinetopsia (motion blindness)
	scotopic visual sensitivity (visual stress related to light)
	visual agnosia (impaired recognition or identification of objects)


While we might have medical and government-recognised definitions that tell us what makes a disability, day-to-day life is not so straightforward. People experience varying degrees of different conditions, and often one or more conditions at a time, creating a false divide when you view disability in terms of us and them.

Impairments aren’t always permanent

As we age, we’re more likely to experience different levels of visual, auditory, motor and cognitive impairments. We might have an accident or illness that affects us temporarily. We might struggle more earlier or later in the day. There are so many little physiological factors that affect the way people interact with the web that we can’t afford to make any assumptions based on our own limited experiences.

Impairments might be somewhere between the user and the website

There are also impairments that aren’t directly related to the user. Environmental factors have a huge effect on the way people interact with the web. These could be:


	Low bandwidth, or intermittent internet connection
	Bright light, rain, or other weather-based conditions
	Noisy environments, or a location where the user doesn’t want to disturb their neighbours with sound
	Browsing with mobile devices, games consoles and other non-desktop devices
	Browsing with legacy browsers or operating systems


Such environmental factors show that it’s not just those with physical impairments who benefit from more accessible websites. We started designing responsive websites so we could be more future-friendly, and with a shared goal of better optimised experiences, accessibility should be at the core of responsive web design.

Excuse 2: “We don’t want to affect the experience for the majority of our users”

Accessibility will improve your site for all your users — the usability case

On a basic level, the different disability groups, as shown in the inclusion case, equate to simple usability goals:


	Visual – make it easy to read
	Auditory – make it easy to hear
	Motor – make it easy to interact
	Cognitive – make it easy to understand and focus


Taking care to ensure good usability in these areas will also have an impact on accessibility. Unless your site is catering specifically to a particular disability, where extreme optimisation is most beneficial, taking care to design with accessibility in mind will rarely negatively affect the experience of your wider audience.

Excuse 3: “We don’t have the budget for accessibility”

Accessibility will make you money — the business case

By reducing your audience through ignoring accessibility, you’re potentially excluding the income from those users. Designing with accessibility in mind from the beginning of a project makes it easier to make small inexpensive optimisations as part of the design and development process, rather than bolting on costly updates to increase your potential audience later on.

The following are excerpts from a white paper about companies that increased the accessibility of their websites to comply with government regulation.


	Improvements in accessibility doubled Legal and General’s life insurance sales online.



	Improvements in accessibility increased Tesco’s grocery home delivery sales by £13 million in 2005… To their surprise they found that many normal visitors preferred the ease of navigation and improved simplicity of the [parallel] accessible site and switched to use it. Tesco have replaced their ‘normal’ site with their accessible version and expect a further increase in revenues.



	Improvements in accessibility increased Virgin.net sales by 68%.


Statistics all from WSI white paper: Improve your website’s usability and accessibility to increase sales (PDF).

Excuse 4: “Accessible websites are ugly”

Accessibility won’t stop your site from being beautiful — the beauty case

Many people use ugly accessible websites as proof that all accessible websites are ugly. This just isn’t the case. I’ve compiled some examples of beautiful and accessible websites with screenshots of how they look through the Color Oracle simulator and how they perform when run through Webaim’s Wave accessibility checker tool.

While automated tools are no substitute for real users, they can help you learn more about good practices, and give you guidance on where your site needs improvements to make it more accessible.

Amazon.co.uk

It may not be a decorated beauty, but Amazon is often first in functional design. It’s a huge website with a lot of interactive content, but it generates just five errors on the Wave test, and is easy to read under a Color Oracle filter.

 Screenshot of Amazon website
 Screenshot of Amazon’s Wave results – five errors
 Screenshot of Amazon through a Color Oracle filter

24 ways

When Tim Van Damme redesigned 24 ways back in 2007, it was a striking and unusual design that showed what could be achieved with CSS and some imagination. Despite the complexity of the design, it gets an outstanding zero errors on the Wave test, and is still readable under a Color Oracle filter.

 Screenshot of pre-2013 24 ways website design
 Screenshot of 24 ways Wave results – zero errors
 Screenshot of 24ways through a Color Oracle filter

Opera’s Shiny Demos

Demos and prototypes are notorious for ignoring accessibility, but Opera’s Shiny Demos site shows how exploring new technologies doesn’t have to exclude anyone. It only gets one error on the Wave test, and looks fine under a Color Oracle filter.

 Screenshot of Opera’s Shiny Demos website
 Screenshot of Opera’s Shiny Demos Wave results – 1 error
 Screenshot of Opera’s Shiny Demos through a Color Oracle filter

SoundCloud

When a site is more app-like, relying on more interaction from the user, accessibility can be more challenging. However, SoundCloud only gets one error on the Wave test, and the colour contrast holds up well under a Color Oracle filter.

 Screenshot of SoundCloud website
 Screenshot of SoundCloud’s Wave results – one error
 Screenshot of SoundCloud through a Color Oracle filter

Education and balance

As with most web design, doing accessibility well is about combining your knowledge of accessibility with your project’s context to create a balance that serves your users’ needs. Your types of content and interactions will dictate one set of constraints. Your users’ needs and goals will dictate another. In broad terms, web design as a practice is finding the equilibrium between these constraints.

And then there’s just caring. The web as a platform is open, affordable and available to many. Accessibility is our way to ensure that nobody gets shut out.",2013,Laura Kalbag,laurakalbag,2013-12-10T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2013/why-bother-with-accessibility/,design
205,Why Design Systems Fail,"Design systems are so hot right now, and for good reason. They promote a modular approach to building a product, and ensure organizational unity and stability via reusable code snippets and utility styles. They make prototyping a breeze, and provide a common language for both designers and developers.
A design system is a culmination of several individual components, which can include any or all of the following (and more):

Style guide or visual pattern library
Design tooling (e.g. Sketch Library)
Component library (where the components live in code)
Code usage guidelines and documentation
Design usage documentation
Voice and tone guideline
Animation language guideline

Design systems are standalone (internal or external) products, and have proven to be very effective means of design-driven development. However, in order for a design system to succeed, everyone needs to get on board.
I’d like to go over a few considerations to ensure design system success and what could hinder that success.
Organizational Support
Put simply, any product, including internal products, needs support. Something as cross-functional as a design system, which spans every vertical project team, needs support from the top and bottom levels of your organization. 
What I mean by that is that there needs to be top-level support from project managers up through VP’s to see the value of a design system, to provide resources for its implementation, and advocate for its use company-wide. This is especially important in companies where such systems are being put in place on top of existing, crufty codebases, because it may mean there needs to be some time and effort put in the calendar for refactoring work.
Support from the bottom-up means that designers and engineers of all levels also need to support this system and feel responsibility for it. A design system is an organization’s product, and everyone should feel confident contributing to it. If your design system supports external clients as well (such as contractors), they too can become valuable teammates.
A design system needs support and love to be nurtured and to grow. It also needs investment.
Investment
To have a successful design system, you need to make a continuous effort to invest resources into it. I like to compare this to working out.
You can work out intensely for 3 months and see some gains, but once you stop working out, those will slowly fade away. If you continue to work out, even if its less often than the initial investment, you’ll see yourself maintaining your fitness level at a much higher rate than if you stopped completely. 
If you invest once in a design system (say, 3 months of overhauling it) but neglect to keep it up, you’ll face the same situation. You’ll see immediate impact, but that impact will fade as it gets out of sync with new designs and you’ll end up with strange, floating bits of code that nobody is using. Your engineers will stop using it as the patterns become outdated, and then you’ll find yourself in for another round of large investment (while dreading going through the process since its fallen so far out of shape).

With design systems, small incremental investments over time lead to big gains overall.

With this point, I also want to note that because of how they scale, design systems can really make a large impact across the platform, making it extremely important to really invest in things like accessibility and solid architecture from the start. You don’t want to scale a brittle system that’s not easy to use.
Take care of your design systems, and keep working on them to ensure their effectiveness. One way to ensure this is to have a dedicated team working on this design system, managing tickets and styling updates that trickle out to the rest of your company.
Responsibility
With some kind of team to act as an owner of a design system, whether it be the design team, engineering team, or a new team
made of both designers and engineers (the best option), your company is more likely to keep a relevant, up-to-date system that doesn’t break.
This team is responsible for a few things:

Helping others get set up on the system (support)
Designing and building components (development)
Advocating for overall UI consistency and adherence (evangelism)
Creating a rollout plan and update system (product management)

As you can see, these are a lot of roles, so it helps to have multiple people on this team, at least part of the time, if you can. One thing I’ve found to be effective in the past is to hold office hours for coworkers to book slots within to help them get set up and to answer any questions about using the system. Having an open Slack channel also helps for this sort of thing, as well as for bringing up bugs/issues/ideas and being an channel for announcements like new releases.
Communication
Once you have resources and a plan to invest in a design system, its really important that this person or team acts as a bridge between design and engineering. Continuous communication is really important here, and the way you communicate is even more important.
Remember that nobody wants to be told what to do or prescribed a solution, especially developers, who are used to a lot of autonomy (usually they get to choose their own tools at work). Despite how much control the other engineers have on the process, they need to feel like they have input, and feel heard.
This can be challenging, especially since ultimately, some party needs to be making a final decision on direction and execution. Because it’s a hard balance to strike, having open communication channels and being as transparent as possible as early as possible is a good start.
Buy-in
For all of the reasons we’ve just looked over, good communication is really important for getting buy-in from your users (the engineers and designers), as well as from product management.

Building and maintaining a design system is surprisingly a lot of people-ops work.

To get buy-in where you don’t have a previous concensus that this is the right direction to take, you need to make people want to use your design system. A really good way to get someone to want to use a product is to make it the path of least resistance, to show its value.
Gather examples and usage wins, because showing is much more powerful than telling.
If you can, have developers use your product in a low-stakes situation where it provides clear benefits. Hackathons are a great place to debut your design system. Having a hackathon internally at DigitalOcean was a perfect opportunity to:

Evangelize for the design system
See what people were using the component library for and what they were struggling with (excellent user testing there)
Get user feedback afterward on how to improve it in future iterations
Let people experience the benefits of using it themselves

These kinds of moments, where people explore on their own are where you can really get people on your side and using the design system, because they can get their hands on it and draw their own conclusions (and if they don’t love it — listen to them on how to improve it so that they do). We don’t always get so lucky as to have this sort of instantaneous user feedback from our direct users.
Architecture
I briefly mentioned the scalable nature of design systems. This is exactly why it’s important to develop a solid architecture early on in the process. Build your design system with growth and scalability in mind. What happens if your company acquires a new product? What happens when it develops a new market segment? How can you make sure there’s room for customization and growth?
A few things we’ve found helpful include:
Namespacing
Use namespacing to ensure that the system doesn’t collide with existing styles if applying it to an existing codebase. This means prefixing every element in the system to indicate that this class is a part of the design system. To ensure that you don’t break parts of the existing build (which may have styled base elements), you can namespace the entire system inside of a parent class. Sass makes this easy with its nested structure. 
This kind of namespacing wouldn’t be necessary per se on new projects, but it is definitely useful when integrating new and old styles.
Semantic Versioning
I’ve used Semantic Versioning on all of the design systems I’ve ever worked on. Semantic versioning uses a system of Major.Minor.Patch for any updates. You can then tag released on Github with versioned updates and ensure that someone’s app won’t break unintentionally when there is an update, if they are anchored to a specific version (which they should be).
We also use this semantic versioning as a link with our design system assets at DigitalOcean (i.e. Sketch library) to keep them in sync, with the same version number corresponding to both Sketch and code.
Our design system is served as a node module, but is also provided as a series of built assets using our CDN for quick prototyping and one-off projects. For these built assets, we run a deploy script that automatically creates folders for each release, as well as a latest folder if someone wanted the always-up-to-date version of the design system. 
So, semantic versioning for the system I’m currently building is what links our design system node module assets, sketch library assets, and statically built file assets.
The reason we have so many ways of consuming our design system is to make adoption easier and to reduce friction.
Friction
A while ago, I posed the question of why design systems become outdated and unused, and a major conclusion I drew from the conversation was:

“If it’s harder for people to use than their current system, people just won’t use it”

You have to make your design system the path of least resistance, lowering cognitive overhead of development, not adding to it. This is vital. A design system is intended to make development much more efficient, enforce a consistent style across sites, and allow for the developer to not worry as much about small decisions like naming and HTML semantics. These are already sorted out for them, meaning they can focus on building product.
But if your design system is complicated and over-engineered, they may find it frustrating to use and go back to what they know, even if its not the best solution. If you’re a Sass expert, and base your system on complex mixins and functions, you better hope your user (the developer) is also a Sass expert, or wants to learn. This is often not the case, however. You need to talk to your audience.
With the DigitalOcean design system, we provide a few options:
Option 1
Users can implement the component library into a development environment and use Sass, select just the components they want to include, and extend the system using a hook-based system. This is the most performant and extensible output. Only the components that are called upon are included, and they can be easily extended using mixins.
But as noted earlier, not everyone wants to work this way (including Sass a dependency and potentially needing to set up a build system for it and learn a new syntax). There is also the user who just wants to throw a link onto their page and have it look nice, and thats where our versioned built assets come in.
Option 2
With Option 2, users pull in links that are served via a CDN that contain JS, CSS, and our SVG icon library. The code is a bit bigger than the completely customized version, but often this isn’t the aim when people are using Option 2.
Reducing friction for adoption should be a major goal of your design system rollout.
Conclusion
Having a design system is really beneficial to any product, especially as it grows. In order to have an effective system, it’s important to primarily always keep your user in mind and garner support from your entire company. Once you have support and acceptance, this system will flourish and grow. Make sure someone is responsible for it, and make sure its built with a solid foundation from the start which will be carefully maintained toward the future. Good luck, and happy holidays!",2017,Una Kravets,unakravets,2017-12-14T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2017/why-design-systems-fail/,process
28,Why You Should Design for Open Source,"Let’s be honest. Most designers don’t like working for nothing. We rally against spec work and make a stand for contracts and getting paid. That’s totally what you should do as a professional designer in the industry. It’s your job. It’s your hard-working skill. It’s your bread and butter. Get paid.

However, I’m going to make a case for why you could also consider designing for open source. First, I should mention that not all open source work is free work. Some companies hire open source contributors to work on their projects full-time, usually because that project is used by said company. There are other companies that encourage open source contribution and even offer 20%-time for these projects (where you can spend one day a week contributing to open source). These are super rad situations to be in. However, whether you’re able to land a gig doing this type of work, or you’ve decided to volunteer your time and energy, designing for open source can be rewarding in many other ways.

Portfolio building

New designers often find themselves in a catch-22 situation: they don’t have enough work experience showcased in their portfolio, which leads to them not getting much work because their portfolio is bare. These new designers often turn to unsolicited redesigns to fill their portfolio. An unsolicited redesign is a proof of concept in which a designer attempts to redesign a popular website. You can see many of these concepts on sites like Dribbble and Behance and there are even websites dedicated to showcasing these designs, such as Uninvited Designs. There’s even a subreddit for them.

There are quite a few negative opinions on unsolicited redesigns, though some people see things from both sides. If you feel like doing one or two of these to fill your portfolio, that’s of course up to you. But here’s a better suggestion. Why not contribute design for an open source project instead?

You can easily find many projects in great need of design work, from branding to information design, documentation, and website or application design. The benefits to doing this are far better than an unsolicited redesign. You get a great portfolio piece that actually has greater potential to get used (especially if the core team is on board with it). It’s a win-win situation.

Not all designers are in need of portfolio filler, but there are other benefits to contributing design.

Giving back to the community

My first experience with voluntary work was when I collaborated with my friend, Vineet Thapar, on a pro bono project for the W3C’s Web Accessibility Initiative redesign project back in 2004. I was very excited to contribute CSS to a website that would get used by the W3C! Unfortunately, it decided to go a different direction and my work did not get used. However, it was still pretty exciting to have the opportunity, and I don’t regret a moment of that work. I learned a lot about accessibility from this experience and it helped me land some of the jobs I’ve had since.

Almost a decade later, I got super into Sass. One of the core maintainers, Chris Eppstein, lamented on Twitter one day that the Sass website and brand was in dire need of design help. That led to the creation of an open source task force, Team Sass Design, and we revived the brand and the website, which launched at SassConf in 2013.

It helped me in my current job. I showed it during my portfolio review when I interviewed for the role. Then I was able to use inspiration from a technique I’d tried on the Sass website to help create the more feature-rich design system that my team at work is building. But most importantly, I soon learned that it is exhilarating to be a part of the Sass community. This is the biggest benefit of all. It feels really good to give back to the technology I love and use for getting my work done.

Ben Werdmuller writes about the need for design in open source. It’s great to see designers contributing to open source in awesome ways. When A List Apart’s website went open source, Anna Debenham contributed by helping build its pattern library. Bevan Stephens worked with FontForge on the design of its website. There are also designers who have created their own open source projects. There’s Dan Cederholm’s Pears, which shares common patterns in markup and style. There’s also Brad Frost’s Pattern Lab, which shares his famous method of atomic design and applies it to a design system. These systems and patterns have been used in real-world projects, such as RetailMeNot, so designers have contributed to the web in an even larger way simply by putting their work out there for others to use. That’s kind of fun to think about.

How to get started

So are you stoked about getting into the open source community? That’s great!

Initially, you might get worried or uncomfortable in getting involved. That’s okay. But first consider that the project is open source for a reason. Your contribution (no matter how large or small) can help in a big way.

If you find a project you’re interested in helping, make sure you do your research. Sometimes project team members will be attached to their current design. Is there already a designer on the core team? Reach out to that designer first. Don’t be too aggressive with why you think your design is better than theirs. Rather, offer some constructive feedback and a proposal of what would make the design better. Chances are, if the designer cares about the project, and you make a strong case, they’ll be up for it.

Are there contribution guidelines? It’s proper etiquette to read these and follow the community’s rules. You’ll have a better chance of getting your work accepted, and it shows that you take the time to care and add to the overall quality of the project. Does the project lack guidelines? Consider starting a draft for that before getting started in the design.

When contributing to open source, use your initiative to solve problems in a manageable way. Huge pull requests are hard to review and will often either get neglected or rejected. Work in small, modular, and iterative contributions.

So this is my personal take on what I’ve learned from my experience and why I love open source. I’d love to hear from you if you have your own experience in doing this and what you’ve learned along the way as well. Please share in the comments!

Thanks Drew McLellan, Eric Suzanne, Kyle Neath for sharing their thoughts with me on this!",2014,Jina Anne,jina,2014-12-19T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2014/why-you-should-design-for-open-source/,design
181,Working With RGBA Colour,"When Tim and I were discussing the redesign of this site last year, one of the clear goals was to have a graphical style without making the pages heavy with a lot of images. When we launched, a lot of people were surprised that the design wasn’t built with PNGs. Instead we’d used RGBA colour values, which is part of the CSS3 specification.

What is RGBA Colour?

We’re all familiar with specifying colours in CSS using by defining the mix of red, green and blue light required to achieve our tone. This is fine and dandy, but whatever values we specify have one thing in common — the colours are all solid, flat, and well, a bit boring.

 Flat RGB colours

CSS3 introduces a couple of new ways to specify colours, and one of those is RGBA. The A stands for Alpha, which refers to the level of opacity of the colour, or to put it another way, the amount of transparency. This means that we can set not only the red, green and blue values, but also control how much of what’s behind the colour shows through. Like with layers in Photoshop.

Don’t We Have Opacity Already?

The ability to set the opacity on a colour differs subtly from setting the opacity on an element using the CSS opacity property. Let’s look at an example.

Here we have an H1 with foreground and background colours set against a page with a patterned background.

 Heading with no transparency applied

h1 {
	color: rgb(0, 0, 0);
	background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);
}

By setting the CSS opacity property, we can adjust the transparency of the entire element and its contents:

 Heading with 50% opacity on the element

h1 {
	color: rgb(0, 0, 0);
	background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);
	opacity: 0.5;
}

RGBA colour gives us something different – the ability to control the opacity of the individual colours rather than the entire element. So we can set the opacity on just the background:

 50% opacity on just the background colour

h1 {
	color: rgb(0, 0, 0);
	background-color: rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.5);
}

Or leave the background solid and change the opacity on just the text:

 50% opacity on just the foreground colour

h1 {
	color: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.5);
	background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);
}

The How-To

You’ll notice that above I’ve been using the rgb() syntax for specifying colours. This is a bit less common than the usual hex codes (like #FFF) but it makes sense when starting to use RGBA. As there’s no way to specify opacity with hex codes, we use rgba() like so:

color: rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.5);

Just like rgb() the first three values are red, green and blue. You can specify these 0-255 or 0%-100%. The fourth value is the opacity level from 0 (completely transparent) to 1 (completely opaque).

You can use this anywhere you’d normally set a colour in CSS — so it’s good for foregrounds and background, borders, outlines and so on. All the transparency effects on this site’s current design are achieved this way.

Supporting All Browsers

Like a lot of the features we’ll be looking at in this year’s 24 ways, RGBA colour is supported by a lot of the newest browsers, but not the rest. Firefox, Safari, Chrome and Opera browsers all support RGBA, but Internet Explorer does not.

Fortunately, due to the robust design of CSS as a language, we can specify RGBA colours for browsers that support it and an alternative for browsers that do not.

Falling back to solid colour

The simplest technique is to allow the browser to fall back to using a solid colour when opacity isn’t available. The CSS parsing rules specify that any unrecognised value should be ignored. We can make use of this because a browser without RGBA support will treat a colour value specified with rgba() as unrecognised and discard it.

So if we specify the colour first using rgb() for all browsers, we can then overwrite it with an rgba() colour for browsers that understand RGBA.

h1 {
	color: rgb(127, 127, 127);
	color: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.5);
}

Falling back to a PNG

In cases where you’re using transparency on a background-color (although not on borders or text) it’s possible to fall back to using a PNG with alpha channel to get the same effect. This is less flexible than using CSS as you’ll need to create a new PNG for each level of transparency required, but it can be a useful solution.

Using the same principal as before, we can specify the background in a style that all browsers will understand, and then overwrite it in a way that browsers without RGBA support will ignore.

h1 {
	background: transparent url(black50.png);
	background: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.5) none;
}

It’s important to note that this works because we’re using the background shorthand property, enabling us to set both the background colour and background image in a single declaration. It’s this that enables us to rely on the browser ignoring the second declaration when it encounters the unknown rgba() value.

Next Steps

The really great thing about RGBA colour is that it gives us the ability to create far more graphically rich designs without the need to use images. Not only does that make for faster and lighter pages, but sites which are easier and quicker to build and maintain. CSS values can also be changed in response to user interaction or even manipulated with JavaScript in a way that’s just not so easy using images.

 Opacity can be changed on :hover or manipulated with JavaScript

div {
	color: rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.8);
	background-color: rgba(142, 213, 87, 0.3);
}
div:hover {
	color: rgba(255, 255, 255, 1);
	background-color: rgba(142, 213, 87, 0.6);
}

Clever use of transparency in border colours can help ease the transition between overlay items and the page behind.

 Borders can receive the RGBA treatment, too

div {
	color: rgb(0, 0, 0);
	background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);
	border: 10px solid rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.3);
}

In Conclusion


That’s a brief insight into RGBA colour, what it’s good for and how it can be used whilst providing support for older browsers. With the current lack of support in Internet Explorer, it’s probably not a technique that commercial designs will want to heavily rely on right away – simply because of the overhead of needing to think about fallback all the time. 

It is, however, a useful tool to have for those smaller, less critical touches that can really help to finesse a design. As browser support becomes more mainstream, you’ll already be familiar and practised with RGBA and ready to go.",2009,Drew McLellan,drewmclellan,2009-12-01T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2009/working-with-rgba-colour/,code
233,Wrapping Things Nicely with HTML5 Local Storage,"HTML5 is here to turn the web from a web of hacks into a web of applications – and we are well on the way to this goal. The coming year will be totally and utterly awesome if you are excited about web technologies.

This year the HTML5 revolution started and there is no stopping it. For the first time all the browser vendors are rallying together to make a technology work. The new browser war is fought over implementation of the HTML5 standard and not over random additions. We live in exciting times.

Starting with a bang

As with every revolution there is a lot of noise with bangs and explosions, and that’s the stage we’re at right now. HTML5 showcases are often CSS3 showcases, web font playgrounds, or video and canvas examples.

This is great, as it gets people excited and it gives the media something to show. There is much more to HTML5, though. Let’s take a look at one of the less sexy, but amazingly useful features of HTML5 (it was in the HTML5 specs, but grew at such an alarming rate that it warranted its own spec): storing information on the client-side.

Why store data on the client-side?

Storing information in people’s browsers affords us a few options that every application should have:


	You can retain the state of an application – when the user comes back after closing the browser, everything will be as she left it. That’s how ‘real’ applications work and this is how the web ones should, too.
	You can cache data – if something doesn’t change then there is no point in loading it over the Internet if local access is so much faster
	You can store user preferences – without needing to keep that data on your server at all.


In the past, storing local data wasn’t much fun.

The pain of hacky browser solutions

In the past, all we had were cookies. I don’t mean the yummy things you get with your coffee, endorsed by the blue, furry junkie in Sesame Street, but the other, digital ones. Cookies suck – it isn’t fun to have an unencrypted HTTP overhead on every server request for storing four kilobytes of data in a cryptic format. It was OK for 1994, but really neither an easy nor a beautiful solution for the task of storing data on the client.

Then came a plethora of solutions by different vendors – from Microsoft’s userdata to Flash’s LSO, and from Silverlight isolated storage to Google’s Gears. If you want to know just how many crazy and convoluted ways there are to store a bit of information, check out Samy’s evercookie.

Clearly, we needed an easier and standardised way of storing local data.

Keeping it simple – local storage

And, lo and behold, we have one. The local storage API (or session storage, with the only difference being that session data is lost when the window is closed) is ridiculously easy to use. All you do is call a few methods on the window.localStorage object – or even just set the properties directly using the square bracket notation:

if('localStorage' in window && window['localStorage'] !== null){
	var store = window.localStorage;

	// valid, API way
		store.setItem(‘cow’,‘moo’);
		console.log(
		store.getItem(‘cow’)
	); // => ‘moo’

	// shorthand, breaks at keys with spaces
		store.sheep = ‘baa’ 
		console.log(
		store.sheep 
	); // ‘baa’

	// shorthand for all
		store[‘dog’] = ‘bark’
		console.log(
		store[‘dog’]
	); // => ‘bark’

}

Browser support is actually pretty good: Chrome 4+; Firefox 3.5+; IE8+; Opera 10.5+; Safari 4+; plus iPhone 2.0+; and Android 2.0+. That should cover most of your needs. Of course, you should check for support first (or use a wrapper library like YUI Storage Utility or YUI Storage Lite).

The data is stored on a per domain basis and you can store up to five megabytes of data in localStorage for each domain.

Strings attached

By default, localStorage only supports strings as storage formats. You can’t store results of JavaScript computations that are arrays or objects, and every number is stored as a string. This means that long, floating point numbers eat into the available memory much more quickly than if they were stored as numbers.

var cowdesc = ""the cow is of the bovine ilk, ""+
		""one end is for the moo, the ""+
		""other for the milk"";

var cowdef = {
	ilk“bovine”,
	legs,
	udders,
	purposes
		front“moo”,
		end“milk”
	}
};

window.localStorage.setItem(‘describecow’,cowdesc);
console.log(
	window.localStorage.getItem(‘describecow’)
); // => the cow is of the bovine… 

window.localStorage.setItem(‘definecow’,cowdef);
console.log(
	window.localStorage.getItem(‘definecow’)
); // => [object Object] = bad!

This limits what you can store quite heavily, which is why it makes sense to use JSON to encode and decode the data you store:

var cowdef = {
	""ilk"":""bovine"",
	""legs"":4,
	""udders"":4,
	""purposes"":{
	""front"":""moo"",
	""end"":""milk""
	}
};

window.localStorage.setItem(‘describecow’,JSON.stringify(cowdef));
console.log(
	JSON.parse(
		window.localStorage.getItem(‘describecow’)
	)
); // =>  Object { ilk=“bovine”,  more…}

You can also come up with your own formatting solutions like CSV, or pipe | or tilde ~ separated formats, but JSON is very terse and has native browser support.

Some use case examples

The simplest use of localStorage is, of course, storing some data: the current state of a game; how far through a multi-form sign-up process a user is; and other things we traditionally stored in cookies. Using JSON, though, we can do cooler things.

Speeding up web service use and avoiding exceeding the quota

A lot of web services only allow you a certain amount of hits per hour or day, and can be very slow. By using localStorage with a time stamp, you can cache results of web services locally and only access them after a certain time to refresh the data.

I used this technique in my An Event Apart 10K entry, World Info, to only load the massive dataset of all the world information once, and allow for much faster subsequent visits to the site. The following screencast shows the difference:



For use with YQL (remember last year’s 24 ways entry?), I’ve built a small script called YQL localcache that wraps localStorage around the YQL data call. An example would be the following:

yqlcache.get({
	yql: 'select * from flickr.photos.search where text=""santa""',
	id: 'myphotos',
	cacheage: ( 60*60*1000 ),
	callback: function(data) {
		console.log(data);
	}
});

This loads photos of Santa from Flickr and stores them for an hour in the key myphotos of localStorage. If you call the function at various times, you receive an object back with the YQL results in a data property and a type property which defines where the data came from – live is live data, cached means it comes from cache, and freshcache indicates that it was called for the first time and a new cache was primed. The cache will work for an hour (60×60×1,000 milliseconds) and then be refreshed. So, instead of hitting the YQL endpoint over and over again, you hit it once per hour.

Caching a full interface

Another use case I found was to retain the state of a whole interface of an application by caching the innerHTML once it has been rendered. I use this in the Yahoo Firehose search interface, and you can get the full story about local storage and how it is used in this screencast:



The stripped down code is incredibly simple (JavaScript with PHP embed):

// test for localStorage support
if(('localStorage' in window) && window['localStorage'] !== null){

var f = document.getElementById(‘mainform’);
// test with PHP if the form was sent (the submit button has the name “sent”)


	// get the HTML of the form and cache it in the property “state”
	localStorage.setItem(‘state’,f.innerHTML);

// if the form hasn’t been sent…


	// check if a state property exists and write back the HTML cache
	if(‘state’ in localStorage){
		f.innerHTML = localStorage.getItem(‘state’);  
	}

	

}

Other ideas

In essence, you can use local storage every time you need to speed up access. For example, you could store image sprites in base-64 encoded datasets instead of loading them from a server. Or you could store CSS and JavaScript libraries on the client. Anything goes – have a play.

Issues with local and session storage

Of course, not all is rainbows and unicorns with the localStorage API. There are a few niggles that need ironing out. As with anything, this needs people to use the technology and raise issues. Here are some of the problems:


	Inadequate information about storage quota – if you try to add more content to an already full store, you get a QUOTA_EXCEEDED_ERR and that’s it. There’s a great explanation and test suite for localStorage quota available.
	Lack of automatically expiring storage – a feature that cookies came with. Pamela Fox has a solution (also available as a demo and source code)
	Lack of encrypted storage – right now, everything is stored in readable strings in the browser.


Bigger, better, faster, more!

As cool as the local and session storage APIs are, they are not quite ready for extensive adoption – the storage limits might get in your way, and if you really want to go to town with accessing, filtering and sorting data, real databases are what you’ll need. And, as we live in a world of client-side development, people are moving from heavy server-side databases like MySQL to NoSQL environments.

On the web, there is also a lot of work going on, with Ian Hickson of Google proposing the Web SQL database, and Nikunj Mehta, Jonas Sicking (Mozilla), Eliot Graff (Microsoft) and Andrei Popescu (Google) taking the idea beyond simply replicating MySQL and instead offering Indexed DB as an even faster alternative.

On the mobile front, a really important feature is to be able to store data to use when you are offline (mobile coverage and roaming data plans anybody?) and you can use the Offline Webapps API for that.

As I mentioned at the beginning, we have a very exciting time ahead – let’s make this web work faster and more reliably by using what browsers offer us. For more on local storage, check out the chapter on Dive into HTML5.",2010,Christian Heilmann,chrisheilmann,2010-12-06T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2010/html5-local-storage/,code
124,Writing Responsible JavaScript,"Without a doubt, JavaScript has been making something of a comeback in the last year. If you’re involved in client-side development in any way at all, chances are that you’re finding yourself writing more JavaScript now than you have in a long time.

If you learned most of your JavaScript back when DHTML was all the rage and before DOM Scripting was in vogue, there have been some big shifts in the way scripts are written. Most of these are in the way event handlers are assigned and functions declared. Both of these changes are driven by the desire to write scripts that are responsible page citizens, both in not tying behaviour to content and in taking care not to conflict with other scripts. I thought it may be useful to look at some of these more responsible approaches to learn how to best write scripts that are independent of the page content and are safely portable between different applications.

Event Handling

Back in the heady days of Web 1.0, if you wanted to have an object on the page react to something like a click, you would simply go ahead and attach an onclick attribute. This was easy and understandable, but much like the font tag or the style attribute, it has the downside of mixing behaviour or presentation in with our content. As we’re learned with CSS, there are big benefits in keeping those layers separate. Hey, if it works for CSS, it should work for JavaScript too.

Just like with CSS, instead of adding an attribute to our element within the document, the more responsible way to do that is to look for the item from your script (like CSS does with a selector) and then assign the behaviour to it. To give an example, take this oldskool onclick use case:

<a id=""anim-link"" href=""#"" onclick=""playAnimation()"">Play the animation</a>

This could be rewritten by removing the onclick attribute, and instead doing the following from within your JavaScript.

document.getElementById('anim-link').onclick = playAnimation;

It’s all in the timing

Of course, it’s never quite that easy. To be able to attach that onclick, the element you’re targeting has to exist in the page, and the page has to have finished loading for the DOM to be available. This is where the onload event is handy, as it fires once everything has finished loading. Common practise is to have a function called something like init() (short for initialise) that sets up all these event handlers as soon as the page is ready.

Back in the day we would have used the onload attibute on the <body> element to do this, but of course what we really want is:

window.onload = init;

As an interesting side note, we’re using init here rather than init() so that the function is assigned to the event. If we used the parentheses, the init function would have been run at that moment, and the result of running the function (rather than the function itself) would be assigned to the event. Subtle, but important.

As is becoming apparent, nothing is ever simple, and we can’t just go around assigning our initialisation function to window.onload. What if we’re using other scripts in the page that might also want to listen out for that event? Whichever script got there last would overwrite everything that came before it. To manage this, we need a script that checks for any existing event handlers, and adds the new handler to it. Most of the JavaScript libraries have their own systems for doing this. If you’re not using a library, Simon Willison has a good stand-alone example

function addLoadEvent(func) {
	var oldonload = window.onload;
	if (typeof window.onload != 'function') {
		window.onload = func;
	} else {
		window.onload = function() {
			if (oldonload) {
				oldonload();
			}
			func();
		}
	}
}

Obviously this is just a toe in the events model’s complex waters. Some good further reading is PPK’s Introduction to Events.

Carving out your own space

Another problem that rears its ugly head when combining multiple scripts on a single page is that of making sure that the scripts don’t conflict. One big part of that is ensuring that no two scripts are trying to create functions or variables with the same names. Reusing a name in JavaScript just over-writes whatever was there before it.

When you create a function in JavaScript, you’ll be familiar with doing something like this.

function foo() {
	... goodness ...
}

This is actually just creating a variable called foo and assigning a function to it. It’s essentially the same as the following.

var foo = function() {
	... goodness ...
}

This name foo is by default created in what’s known as the ‘global namespace’ – the general pool of variables within the page. You can quickly see that if two scripts use foo as a name, they will conflict because they’re both creating those variables in the global namespace.

A good solution to this problem is to add just one name into the global namespace, make that one item either a function or an object, and then add everything else you need inside that. This takes advantage of JavaScript’s variable scoping to contain you mess and stop it interfering with anyone else.

Creating An Object

Say I was wanting to write a bunch of functions specifically for using on a site called ‘Foo Online’. I’d want to create my own object with a name I think is likely to be unique to me.

var FOOONLINE = {};

We can then start assigning functions are variables to it like so:

FOOONLINE.message = 'Merry Christmas!';
FOOONLINE.showMessage = function() {
	alert(this.message);
};

Calling FOOONLINE.showMessage() in this example would alert out our seasonal greeting. The exact same thing could also be expressed in the following way, using the object literal syntax.

var FOOONLINE = {
	message: 'Merry Christmas!',
	showMessage: function() {
		alert(this.message);
	}
};

Creating A Function to Create An Object

We can extend this idea bit further by using a function that we run in place to return an object. The end result is the same, but this time we can use closures to give us something like private methods and properties of our object.

var FOOONLINE = function(){
	var message = 'Merry Christmas!';
	return {
		showMessage: function(){
			alert(message);
		}
	}
}();

There are two important things to note here. The first is the parentheses at the end of line 10. Just as we saw earlier, this runs the function in place and causes its result to be assigned. In this case the result of our function is the object that is returned at line 4.

The second important thing to note is the use of the var keyword on line 2. This ensures that the message variable is created inside the scope of the function and not in the global namespace. Because of the way closure works (which if you’re not familiar with, just suspend your disbelief for a moment) that message variable is visible to everything inside the function but not outside. Trying to read FOOONLINE.message from the page would return undefined.

This is useful for simulating the concept of private class methods and properties that exist in other programming languages. I like to take the approach of making everything private unless I know it’s going to be needed from outside, as it makes the interface into your code a lot clearer for someone else to read. 

All Change, Please

So that was just a whistle-stop tour of a couple of the bigger changes that can help to make your scripts better page citizens. I hope it makes useful Sunday reading, but obviously this is only the tip of the iceberg when it comes to designing modular, reusable code.

For some, this is all familiar ground already. If that’s the case, I encourage you to perhaps submit a comment with any useful resources you’ve found that might help others get up to speed. Ultimately it’s in all of our interests to make sure that all our JavaScript interoperates well – share your tips.",2006,Drew McLellan,drewmclellan,2006-12-10T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2006/writing-responsible-javascript/,code
276,Your jQuery: Now With 67% Less Suck,"Fun fact: more websites are now using jQuery than Flash.

jQuery is an amazing tool that’s made JavaScript accessible to developers and designers of all levels of experience. However, as Spiderman taught us, “with great power comes great responsibility.” The unfortunate downside to jQuery is that while it makes it easy to write JavaScript, it makes it easy to write really really f*&#ing bad JavaScript. Scripts that slow down page load, unresponsive user interfaces, and spaghetti code knotted so deep that it should come with a bottle of whiskey for the next sucker developer that has to work on it. 

This becomes more important for those of us who have yet to move into the magical fairy wonderland where none of our clients or users view our pages in Internet Explorer. The IE JavaScript engine moves at the speed of an advancing glacier compared to more modern browsers, so optimizing our code for performance takes on an even higher level of urgency.

Thankfully, there are a few very simple things anyone can add into their jQuery workflow that can clear up a lot of basic problems. When undertaking code reviews, three of the areas where I consistently see the biggest problems are: inefficient selectors; poor event delegation; and clunky DOM manipulation. We’ll tackle all three of these and hopefully you’ll walk away with some new jQuery batarangs to toss around in your next project.

Selector optimization

Selector speed: fast or slow?

Saying that the power behind jQuery comes from its ability to select DOM elements and act on them is like saying that Photoshop is a really good tool for selecting pixels on screen and making them change color – it’s a bit of a gross oversimplification, but the fact remains that jQuery gives us a ton of ways to choose which element or elements in a page we want to work with. However, a surprising number of web developers are unaware that all selectors are not created equal; in fact, it’s incredible just how drastic the performance difference can be between two selectors that, at first glance, appear nearly identical. For instance, consider these two ways of selecting all paragraph tags inside a <div> with an ID.

$(""#id p"");

$(""#id"").find(""p"");

Would it surprise you to learn that the second way can be more than twice as fast as the first? Knowing which selectors outperform others (and why) is a pretty key building block in making sure your code runs well and doesn’t frustrate your users waiting for things to happen.

There are many different ways to select elements using jQuery, but the most common ways can be basically broken down into five different methods. In order, roughly, from fastest to slowest, these are:


	$(""#id""); 
This is without a doubt the fastest selector jQuery provides because it maps directly to the native document.getElementbyId() JavaScript method. If possible, the selectors listed below should be prefaced with an ID selector in conjunction with jQuery’s .find() method to limit the scope of the page that has to be searched (as in the $(""#id"").find(""p"") example shown above).
	$(""p"");, $(""input"");, $(""form""); and so on
Selecting elements by tag name is also fast, since it maps directly to the native document.getElementsByTagname() method.
	$("".class""); 
Selecting by class name is a little trickier. While still performing very well in modern browsers, it can cause some pretty significant slowdowns in IE8 and below. Why? IE9 was the first IE version to support the native document.getElementsByClassName() JavaScript method. Older browsers have to resort to using much slower DOM-scraping methods that can really impact performance.
	$(""[attribute=value]"");
There is no native JavaScript method for this selector to use, so the only way that jQuery can perform the search is by crawling the entire DOM looking for matches. Modern browsers that support the querySelectorAll() method will perform better in certain cases (Opera, especially, runs these searches much faster than any other browser) but, generally speaking, this type of selector is Slowey McSlowersons.
	$("":hidden"");
Like attribute selectors, there is no native JavaScript method for this one to use. Pseudo-selectors can be painfully slow since the selector has to be run against every element in your search space. Again, modern browsers with querySelectorAll() will perform slightly better here, but try to avoid these if at all possible. If you must use one, try to limit the search space to a specific portion of the page: $(""#list"").find("":hidden"");


But, hey, proof is in the performance testing, right? It just so happens that said proof is sitting right here. Be sure to notice the class selector numbers beside IE7 and 8 compared to other browsers and then wonder how the people on the IE team at Microsoft manage to sleep at night. Yikes.

Chaining

Almost all jQuery methods return a jQuery object. This means that when a method is run, its results are returned and you can continue executing more methods on them. Rather than writing out the same selector multiple times over, just making a selection once allows multiple actions to be run on it.

Without chaining

$(""#object"").addClass(""active"");
$(""#object"").css(""color"",""#f0f"");
$(""#object"").height(300);

With chaining

$(""#object"").addClass(""active"").css(""color"", ""#f0f"").height(300);

This has the dual effect of making your code shorter and faster. Chained methods will be slightly faster than multiple methods made on a cached selector, and both ways will be much faster than multiple methods made on non-cached selectors. Wait… “cached selector”? What is this new devilry? 

Caching

Another easy way to speed up your code that seems to be a mystery to developers is the idea of caching your selectors. Think of how many times you end up writing the same selector over and over again in any project. Every $("".element"") selector has to search the entire DOM each time, regardless of whether or not that selector had been previously run. Running the selection once and then storing the results in a variable means that the DOM only has to be searched once. Once the results of a selector have been cached, you can do anything with them.

First, run your search (here we’re selecting all of the <li> elements inside <ul id=""blocks"">): 

var blocks = $(""#blocks"").find(""li"");

Now, you can use the blocks variable wherever you want without having to search the DOM every time.

$(""#hideBlocks"").click(function() {
    blocks.fadeOut();
});
$(""#showBlocks"").click(function() {
    blocks.fadeIn();
});

My advice? Any selector that gets run more than once should be cached. This jsperf test shows just how much faster a cached selector runs compared to a non-cached one (and even throws some chaining love in to boot).

Event delegation

Event listeners cost memory. In complex websites and apps it’s not uncommon to have a lot of event listeners floating around, and thankfully jQuery provides some really easy methods for handling event listeners efficiently through delegation.

In a bit of an extreme example, imagine a situation where a 10×10 cell table needs to have an event listener on each cell; let’s say that clicking on a cell adds or removes a class that defines the cell’s background color. A typical way that this might be written (and something I’ve often seen during code reviews) is like so:

$('table').find('td').click(function() {
    $(this).toggleClass('active');
});

jQuery 1.7 has provided us with a new event listener method, .on(). It acts as a utility that wraps all of jQuery’s previous event listeners into one convenient method, and the way you write it determines how it behaves. To rewrite the above .click() example using .on(), we’d simply do the following:

$('table').find('td').on('click',function() {
    $(this).toggleClass('active');
});

Simple enough, right? Sure, but the problem here is that we’re still binding one hundred event listeners to our page, one to each individual table cell. A far better way to do things is to create one event listener on the table itself that listens for events inside it. Since the majority of events bubble up the DOM tree, we can bind a single event listener to one element (in this case, the <table>) and wait for events to bubble up from its children. The way to do this using the .on() method requires only one change from our code above:

$('table').on('click','td',function() {
    $(this).toggleClass('active');
});

All we’ve done is moved the td selector to an argument inside the .on() method. Providing a selector to .on() switches it into delegation mode, and the event is only fired for descendants of the bound element (table) that match the selector (td). With that one simple change, we’ve gone from having to bind one hundred event listeners to just one. You might think that the browser having to do one hundred times less work would be a good thing and you’d be completely right. The difference between the two examples above is staggering.

(Note that if your site is using a version of jQuery earlier than 1.7, you can accomplish the very same thing using the .delegate() method. The syntax of how you write the function differs slightly; if you’ve never used it before, it’s worth checking the API docs for that page to see how it works.)

DOM manipulation

jQuery makes it very easy to manipulate the DOM. It’s trivial to create new nodes, insert them, remove other ones, move things around, and so on. While the code to do this is simple to write, every time the DOM is manipulated, the browser has to repaint and reflow content which can be extremely costly. This is no more evident than in a long loop, whether it be a standard for() loop, while() loop, or jQuery $.each() loop.

In this case, let’s say we’ve just received an array full of image URLs from a database or Ajax call or wherever, and we want to put all of those images in an unordered list. Commonly, you’ll see code like this to pull this off:

var arr = [reallyLongArrayOfImageURLs]; 
    $.each(arr, function(count, item) {
        var newImg = '<li><img src=""'+item+'""></li>';
        $('#imgList').append(newImg);
    });

There are a couple of problems with this. For one (which you should have already noticed if you’ve read the earlier part of this article), we’re making the $(""#imgList"") selection once for each iteration of our loop. The other problem here is that each time the loop iterates, it’s adding a new <li> to the DOM. Each of those insertions is going to be costly, and if our array is quite large then this could lead to a massive slowdown or even the dreaded ‘A script is causing this page to run slowly’ warning.

var arr = [reallyLongArrayOfImageURLs],
    tmp = ''; 
$.each(arr, function(count, item) {
    tmp += '<li><img src=""'+item+'""></li>';
});
$('#imgList').append(tmp);

All we’ve done here is create a tmp variable that each <li> is added to as it’s created. Once our loop has finished iterating, that tmp variable will contain all of our list items in memory, and can be appended to our <ul> all in one go. Browsers work much faster when working with objects in memory rather than on screen, so this is a much faster, more CPU-cycle-friendly method of building a list.

Wrapping up

These are far from being the only ways to make your jQuery code run better, but they are among the simplest ones to implement. Though each individual change may only make a few milliseconds of difference, it doesn’t take long for those milliseconds to add up. Studies have shown that the human eye can discern delays of as few as 100ms, so simply making a few changes sprinkled throughout your code can very easily have a noticeable effect on how well your website or app performs. Do you have other jQuery optimization tips to share? Leave them in the comments and help make us all better.

Now go forth and make awesome!",2011,Scott Kosman,scottkosman,2011-12-13T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2011/your-jquery-now-with-less-suck/,code
221,"“Probably, Maybe, No”: The State of HTML5 Audio","With the hype around HTML5 and CSS3 exceeding levels not seen since 2005’s Ajax era, it’s worth noting that the excitement comes with good reason: the two specifications render many years of feature hacks redundant by replacing them with native features. For fun, consider how many CSS2-based rounded corners hacks you’ve probably glossed over, looking for a magic solution. These days, with CSS3, the magic is border-radius (and perhaps some vendor prefixes) followed by a coffee break.

CSS3’s border-radius, box-shadow, text-shadow and gradients, and HTML5’s <canvas>, <audio> and <video> are some of the most anticipated features we’ll see put to creative (ab)use as adoption of the ‘new shiny’ grows. Developers jumping on the cutting edge are using subsets of these features to little detriment, in most cases. The more popular CSS features are design flourishes that can degrade nicely, but the current audio and video implementations in particular suffer from a number of annoyances.

The new shiny: how we got here

Sound involves one of the five senses, a key part of daily life for most – and yet it has been strangely absent from HTML and much of the web by default. From a simplistic perspective, it seems odd that HTML did not include support for the full multimedia experience earlier, despite the CD-ROM-based craze of the early 1990s. In truth, standards like HTML can take much longer to bake, but eventually deliver the promise of a lowered barrier to entry, consistent implementations and shiny new features now possible ‘for free’ just about everywhere.

<img> was introduced early and naturally to HTML, despite having some opponents at the time. Perhaps <audio> and <video> were avoided, given the added technical complexity of decoding various multi-frame formats, plus the hardware and bandwidth limitations of the era. Perhaps there were quarrels about choosing a standard format or – more simply – maybe these elements just weren’t considered to be applicable to the HTML-based web at the time. In any event, browser plugins from programs like RealPlayer and QuickTime eventually helped to fill the in-page audio/video gap, handling <object> and <embed> markup which pointed to .wav, .avi, .rm or .mov files. Suffice it to say, the experience was inconsistent at best and, on the standards side of the fence right now, so is HTML5 in terms of audio and video.

: the theory

As far as HTML goes, the code for <audio> is simple and logical. Just as with <img>, a src attribute specifies the file to load. Pretty straightforward – sounds easy, right?

<audio src=""mysong.ogg"" controls>
	<!-- alternate content for unsupported case -->
	Download <a href=""mysong.ogg"">mysong.ogg</a>;
</audio>

Ah, if only it were that simple. The first problem is that the OGG audio format, while ‘free’, is not supported by some browsers. Conversely, nor is MP3, despite being a de facto standard used in all kinds of desktop software (and hardware). In fact, as of November 2010, no single audio format is commonly supported across all major HTML5-enabled browsers.

What you end up writing, then, is something like this:

<audio controls>
	<source src=""mysong.mp3"" />
	<source src=""mysong.ogg"" />
	<!-- alternate content for unsupported case, maybe Flash, etc. -->
	Download <a href=""mysong.ogg"">mysong.ogg</a> or <a href=""mysong.mp3"">mysong.mp3</a>
</audio>

Keep in mind, this is only a ‘first class’ experience for the HTML5 case; also, for non-supported browsers, you may want to look at another inline player (object/embed, or a JavaScript plus Flash API) to have inline audio. You can imagine the added code complexity in the case of supporting ‘first class’ experiences for older browsers, too.

: the caveats

With <img>, you typically don’t have to worry about format support – it just works – and that’s part of what makes a standard wonderful. JPEG, PNG, BMP, GIF, even TIFF images all render just fine if for no better reason, perhaps, than being implemented during the ‘wild west’ days of the web. The situation with <audio> today reflects a very different – read: business-aware – environment in 2010. (Further subtext: There’s a lot of [potential] money involved.) Regrettably, this is a collision of free and commercial interests, where the casualty is ultimately the user. Second up in the casualty list is you, the developer, who has to write additional code around this fragmented support.

The HTML5 audio API as implemented in JavaScript has one of the most un-computer-like responses I’ve ever seen, and inspired the title of this post. Calling new Audio().canPlayType('audio/mp3'), which queries the system for format support according to a MIME type, is supposed to return one of “probably”, “maybe”, or “no”. Sometimes, you’ll just get a null or empty string, which is also fun. A “maybe” response does not guarantee that a format will be supported; sometimes audio/mp3 gives “maybe,” but then audio/mpeg; codecs=""mp3"" will give a more-solid “probably” response. This can vary by browser or platform, too, depending on native support – and finally, the user may also be able to install codecs, extending support to include other formats. (Are you excited yet?)

Damn you, warring formats!

New market and business opportunities go hand-in-hand with technology developments. What we have here is certainly not failure to communicate; rather, we have competing parties shouting loudly in public in attempts to influence mindshare towards a de facto standard for audio and video. Unfortunately, the current situation means that at least two formats are effectively required to serve the majority of users correctly.

As it currently stands, we have the free and open source software camp of OGG Vorbis/WebM and its proponents (notably, Mozilla, Google and Opera in terms of browser makers), up against the non-free, proprietary and ‘closed’ camp of MP3 and MPEG4/HE-AAC/H.264 – which is where you’ll find commitments from Apple and Microsoft, among others. Apple is likely in with H.264 for the long haul, given its use of the format for its iTunes music store and video offerings.

It is generally held that H.264 is a technically superior format in terms of file size versus quality, but it involves intellectual property and, in many use cases, requires licensing fees. To be fair, there is a business model with H.264 and much has been invested in its development, but this approach is not often the kind that wins over the web. On that front, OGG/WebM may eventually win for being a ‘free’ format that does not involve a licensing scheme.

Closed software and tools ideologically clash with the open nature of the web, which exists largely thanks to free and open technology. Because of philosophical and business reasons, support for audio and video is fragmented across browsers adopting HTML5 features. It does not help that a large amount of audio and video currently exists in non-free MP3 and MPEG-4 formats. Adoption of <audio> and <video> may be slowed, since it is more complex than <img> and may feel ‘broken’ to developers when edge cases are encountered. Furthermore, the HTML5 spec does not mandate a single required format. The end result is that, as a developer, you must currently provide at least both MP3 and OGG, for example, to serve most existing HTML5-based user agents.

Transitioning to 



There will be some growing pains as developers start to pick up the new HTML5 shiny, while balancing the needs of current and older agents that don’t support either <audio> or the preferred format you may choose (for example, MP3). In either event, Flash or other plugins can be used as done traditionally within HTML4 documents to embed and play the relevant audio.



The SoundManager 2 page player demo in action.



Ideally, HTML5 audio should be used whenever possible with Flash as the backup option. A few JavaScript/Flash-based audio player projects exist which balance the two; in attempting to tackle this problem, I develop and maintain SoundManager 2, a JavaScript sound API which transparently uses HTML5 Audio() and, if needed, Flash for playing audio files. The internals can get somewhat ugly, but the transition between HTML4 and HTML5 is going to be just that – and even with HTML5, you will need some form of format fall-back in addition to graceful degradation.

It may be safest to fall back to MP3/MP4 formats for inline playback at this time, given wide support via Flash, some HTML5-based browsers and mobile devices. Considering the amount of MP3/MP4 media currently available, it is wiser to try these before falling through to a traditional file download process.

Early findings

Here is a brief list of behavioural notes, annoyances, bugs, quirks and general weirdness I have found while playing with HTML5-based audio at time of writing (November 2010):

Apple iPad/iPhone (iOS 4, iPad 3.2+)


	Only one sound can be played at a time. If a second sound starts, the first is stopped.
	No auto-play allowed. Sounds follow the pop-up window security model and can only be started from within a user event handler such as onclick/touch, and so on. Otherwise, playback attempts silently fail.
	Once started, a sequence of sounds can be created or played via the ‘finish’ event of the previous sound (for example, advancing through a playlist without interaction after first track starts).
	iPad, iOS 3.2: Occasional ‘infinite loop’ bug seen where audio does not complete and stop at a sound’s logical end – instead, it plays again from the beginning. Might be specific to example file format (HE-AAC) encoded from iTunes.


Apple Safari, OS X Snow Leopard 10.6.5


	Critical bug: Safari 4 and 5 intermittently fail to load or play HTML5 audio on Snow Leopard due to bug(s) in QuickTime X and/or other underlying frameworks. Known Apple ‘radar’ bug: bugs.webkit.org #32159 (see also, test case.) Amusing side note: Safari on Windows is fine.


Apple Safari, Windows


	Food for thought: if you download “Safari” alone on Windows, you will not get HTML5 audio/video support (tested in WinXP). You need to download “Safari + QuickTime” to get HTML5 audio/video support within Safari. (As far as I’m aware, Chrome, Firefox and Opera either include decoders or use system libraries accordingly. Presumably IE 9 will use OS-level APIs.)


General Quirks


	Seeking and loading, ‘progress’ events, and calculating bytes loaded versus bytes total should not be expected to be linear, as users can arbitrarily seek within a sound. It appears that some support for HTTP ranges exists, which adds a bit of logic to UI code. Browsers seem to vary slightly in their current implementations of these features.
	The onload event of a sound may be of little relevance, if non-linear loading is involved (see above note re: seeking).
	Interestingly (perhaps I missed it), the current spec does not seem to specify a panning or left/right channel mix option.
	The preload attribute values may vary slightly between browsers at this time.


Upcoming shiny: HTML5 Audio Data API




	With access to audio data, you can incorporate waveform and spectrum elements that make your designs react to music.



The HTML5 audio spec does a good job covering the basics of playback, but did not initially get into manipulation or generation of audio on-the-fly, something Flash has had for a number of years now. What if JavaScript could create, monitor and change audio dynamically, like a sort of audio <canvas> element? With that kind of capability, many dynamic audio processing features become feasible and, when combined with other media, can make for some impressive demos.

What started as a small idea among a small group of audio and programming enthusiasts grew to inspire a W3C audio incubator group, and continued to establish the Mozilla Audio Data API. Contributors wrote a patch for Firefox which was reviewed and revised, and is now slated to be in the public release of Firefox 4. Some background and demos are also detailed in an article from the BBC R&D blog.

There are plenty of live demos to see, which give an impression of the new creative ideas this API enables. Many concepts are not new in themselves, but it is exciting to see this sort of thing happening within the native browser context.

Mozilla is not alone in this effort; the WebKit folks are also working on a JavaScriptAudioNode interface, which implements similar audio buffering and sample elements.

The future?

It is my hope that we’ll see a common format emerge in terms of support across the major browsers for both audio and video; otherwise, support will continue to be fragmented and mildly frustrating to develop for, and that can impede growth of the feature. It’s a big call, but if <img> had lacked a common format back in the wild west era, I doubt the web would have grown to where it is today.

Complaints and nitpicks aside, HTML5 brings excellent progress on the browser multimedia front, and the first signs of native support are a welcome improvement given all audio and video previously relied on plugins. There is good reason to be excited. While there is room for more, support could certainly be much worse – and as tends to happen with specifications, the implementations targeting them should improve over time.

Note: Thanks to Nate Koechley, who suggested the Audio().canPlayType() response be part of the article title.",2010,Scott Schiller,scottschiller,2010-12-08T00:00:00+00:00,https://24ways.org/2010/the-state-of-html5-audio/,code